iaivhwtatetetatetatatne
Peart ar tay tes efi REE Cr rig arte ea et Pt OER Oat atten eer
Oe tk ot tl ath et alo ch RO et hr 7 Letdem bamatia ent aentnaediteeie id
nA hea Heke he hemi tie Re Bo ha et Re . ° ~- = wr =
33 s 7
RA SS A te ee IO AP
LEE ENON OE Ei eB
RoAcAiiatntapiatnrtubetemeae eke ht Salis
PE POE ODA LE ELLE NN A NN eA
: 4 emer
- > . .
Se US Pree
- ey sor ee
abt et
OE A NR
S57 setae he PD Ne Nenrg a harem
ea ae
psa ad og et ae =. a
1S p99 Seem nen eh tps wre ota oat
ani eae, OR
rr, iy saad wa
Bae ere
NF
THE
GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE.
DECADE IV. VOL. VIII.
JANUARY—DECEMBER, 1901.
SS . OS Les,
GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE
OR,
Monthly Journal of Geology:
WITH WHICH IS INCORPORATED
WEEE GH OLmOG ES i
NOS. CCCCXXXIX TO CCCCL.
EDITED BY
HENRY WOODWARD, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., F.Z.8., F.R.M.S.,
LATE OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY};
PRESIDENT OF THE PALZONTOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY,
VICE-PRESIDENT OF THE ZOOLOGICAL AND MALACOLOGICAL SOCIETIES ;
MEMBER OF THE LYCEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY, NEW YORK; AND OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL
SOCIETY, PHILADELPHIA; HONORARY MEMBER OF THE YORKSHIRE PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY;
OF THE GEOLOGISTS’ ASSOCIATION, LONDON; OF THE INSTITUTION OF MINING AND
METALLURGY, LONDON; CF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETIES OF EDINBURGH,
GLASGOW, HALIFAX, LIVERPOOL, AND SOUTH AFRICA; CORRESPONDING
MEMBER OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF BELGIUM; OF THE
IMPERIAL SOCIETY OF NATURAL HISTORY OF MOSCOW; OF
THE NATURAL HISTORY SOCIETY OF MONTREAL;
AND OF THE MALACOLOGICAL
SOCIETY OF BELGIUM.
ASSISTED BY
ROBERT ETHERIDGE, F.R.S. L.&E., F.G.S., F.C.8., &e.
WILFRID H. HUDLESTON, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S., F.LS., F.C.8.
GEORGE J. HINDE, Px.D., F.B.S., F.G.8., &.
AND
HORACE BOLINGBROKE WOODWARD, F.R.S., F.G.S., &c.
NEW SERIES. DECADE Iv. VOL. VIII.
JANUARY—DECEMBER, 1901.
5
EON Do OFN-:
MESSRS. DULAU & CO., 87, SOHO SQUARE, W.
1901.
HERTFORD :
PRINTED BY STEPHEN AUSTIN AND SONS.
LIST OF PLATES.
PLATE FACING PAGE
ee venlock Limestonevirilobites 3) ae a 2s | 5
II. Geological Viewsin Central France. . . . - ... =. =- ~- ~ 60
III. Geological Views in Central France. . . . . . - ~~. - = £62
IV. Geological Views in Central France. . . . . . .- +--+ - 64
V. Portrait of Professor Lapworth, LL.D., F.R.S. . . . . - . 289
Wit ake Louiseand Mirror Lake: .. «s+ 4-6 < 3 4 «+ ~ 5 {9%
Wil, OrbyrGen enolic G6 6 596 6 6 6 o 6 o o Jl
ili Cirripedes'and ‘Trilobites? «=. ei = 6s 4 - - «2a +s ele
TX. Diagram to illustrate Periodic Oscillations of Sea-level . . . - 172
X. Pine-board and Oak Eroded by Sand-blast of the Shore . . . . 193
XI. Gasteropoda, Wenlock Limestone, Dudley. . . . . . - . . 249
XII. Cretaceous Crustacea from Faxe, Denmark . .... . =. =. SOl
Nie horivaitot Or. Gustat Vindsiromy- ney ey -) see
XIV. Portrait of the Rev. Professor Bonney, D.Se., LL.D., F.R.S., etc. 385
ANE olluran Gasteropoday sa. G Stan ica sc. fs ks) repeals fs (2 GeUO
NIV e Siberian Anthracomyevete: sss . 5 =. . - » = » « 400
mevitse Devonian Fossils; Lynton: 2.9. 050-5 os ve st 8
MV eDevonian Hossilss Torquay) = 5 -)a se es 2 oe = OeO
90 eIk
Bays 8")
Pe Hi
cali Le
Lag
BS
uss
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS IN THE TEXT.
Impressions of Echinoderms in Triassic Sandstones :
Photograph of the Bottom of a Flask containing Spherulitic Structure :
Belinurus kiltorkensis Ae bid
Wing of Fouguea cambrensis fom the Chale measures
Bone Needle from Cave on the River Wye . :
Skull of Ochotona (Lagomys) pusillus from Cave on itis River Wye
Skull of Décrostonyx (Myodes) torquatus from Cave on the River Wye .
Upper Molars of Dicrostonyx (Myodes) torquatus from Cave on the River Wye
Lower Molars of Dicrostonyx (Myodes) torquatus from Cave on the River Wye
Lower and Upper Molars of Lemmus is yodes) lemmus from Cave on the
River Wye
Neolithic Implement from Tras, Pahang site Peninsula,
Pollicipes polymerus, G. B. Sowerby .
Catophragmus polymerus, Darwin. :
Brachylepas cretacea, H. Woodw., gen. nov.
Black Shale with Diplograptus from Carabaya, Eo
Arms of the Royal Hammerers
Estheria anomala, T. R. Jones, sp. nov.
Diagram of Area of Earthquake of September 22, 1900
Map of Lake District of Central Africa .
Map of Lake Tanganyika ;
Diagram to illustrate lines of Volcanic oon:
Diagram-Section on the East side of Ruwenzori . :
Left Ramus of Mandible of Pal@omastodon Beadnelli, ence
Dentition of Maritheriwm Lyonsi, Andrews :
Mandible and Lower Teeth of Bradytherium grave, aa ,
Left Upper Cheek-teeth of Bradytheriwm grave, Andrews .
Pleurotoma prisca, Solander, sp.
Diagram-Section illustrating Limburgite
Diagram-Section illustrating Limburgite
Vertebre of Gigantophis Garstini, Andrews
Vertebra of Meriophis Schweinfurthi, Andrews .
Left Humerus of Psephophorus cocenus, Andrews
Skull and Mandible of Stereogenys Cromeri, Andrews an:
Diagram of Divisions of Carapace in a Brachyuran Decapod Grtetavoun
Encrusted Block in the Eeca Shale, Ladysmith, Natal .
Relative Position of Travelled Blocks, Ladysmith :
Sigmoidal Folding in Devonian Rocks, Hele Bay, Ilfracombe .
Strabops Fletcheri, Beecher ; Cambrian, Missouri
104
104
PRRs FRE PF:
aatit ‘
TEELILUY E,
THE
GHOLOGICAL MAGAZINE.
NEW) SERIES. .DECADE; IV. VOL... VIII.
No. IL—JANUARY, 1901.
Ores Geran AC, Acres Giese
———.>-—_
I.—Note oN THE StrRvucTuRE or SARSENs.
By Professor J. W. Jupp, C.B., LL.D., F.R.S., .V.P.G.S., etc.
[Introductory Note.—After the publication of my paper on the
Sarsens, or Sarsen Stones, in the Wiltshire Archeological and
Natural History Society’s Magazine, vol. xxiii (1886), pp. 122-154,
many friendly communications gave me further information on the
subject, and additional references to published facts and opinions.
From this correspondence, and my own notes made in the country,
I propose to utilize much that seems to be of interest. The most
important of these additions to our knowledge of the Sarsens is the
following memoir on their constitution and structure by my friend
Prof. Dr. J. W. Judd, C.B., F.B.S., etc., of the Royal College of
Science, who most obligingly examined with care the microscopical
structure of many specimens from authenticated localities. With
his kind permission this valuable communication (dated March 9th,
1888) is here printed.—T. Rurrerr Jonss. |
HE microscopic examination of a series of thin sections, cut
from the Sarsens, shows that their minute structure varies as
strikingly as does the appearance of their fractured surfaces.
Microscopically, the Sarsens are seen to be made up of two kinds
of materials, clastic fragments of crystalline minerals and a cement
(base or matrix) of a microcrystalline or cryptocrystalline character.
The relative proportion of these two constituents varies very widely
in different cases.
The Sarsens with saccharoid fracture stand at one end of the
series. An admirable example from Camberley, North Surrey, is
seen to be almost wholly made up of sand grains, with very little in
the way of cement visible. Much of the cementing material in this
rock is ferruginous, and the rock is more incoherent than is the case
with most Sarsens.
_ At the other end of the series stand the Sarsens exhibiting
a fracture resembling that of some cherts. Under the microscope
the greater part of their mass is seen to be made up of excessively
minute and imperfectly developed quartz microlites, and these
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. I. L
2 Professor J. W. Judd—Structure of Sarsens.
occasionally exhibit a tendency to the spherulitic arrangement.
A beautiful example of this kind of Sarsen is one from Poxwell
Ring, near Dorchester. In this case the original sand grains seem
to have almost wholly disappeared, and an aggregate of grains of
secondary quartz has been formed, which crystallize out freely
on the sides of cavities. In parts, the section shows admirable
spherulitic structure, and the iron-oxides have separated into small
globular masses. The appearances exhibited are strikingly like
those of some flints with highly crystalline structure.
All the other sections examined show the detrital crystalline
particles enveloped in more or less of the fine-grained secondary
matrix. The detrital grains consist mainly of quartz. By far the
greater part of these quartz grains exhibit the bands of liquid
cavities so characteristic of the quartz of granites and gneisses ;
corroded quartz grains with glass or stone cavities, evidently derived
from quartz-felsites, occur, but are much less rare, as are also the
polysynthetic grains, some of which may have been derived from
schistose rocks. With the quartz grains are a few unmistakable
particles of flint, but these are never numerous. TFelspars and other
minerals are usually rare. Sometimes the grains appear to be well
rounded, and at other times they seem perfectly angular; but it is
probable that in all cases a considerable amount of corrosion of the
surfaces of the grains has taken place. Only in one or two doubtful
cases have I seen what could be taken as a deposition of secondary
silica upon, and in optical continuity with, the detrital quartz.
In a specimen from the valley of the Kennet (Enborne Lodge
gravel-pit) we have perfectly angular quartz grains embedded in
a nearly compact cement—one which can be resolved only under
very high microscopic power.
A very remarkable variety of Sarsen is one from Staple-Fitzpaine,
about 10 miles west of Taunton. In this rock the grains are much
larger than in any other Sarsen that I have examined; they are
markedly angular, and though quartz grains form a majority of the
whole, yet felspars and other minerals occur much more usually
than in the other specimens examined. If this should be found
to be the rule with Sarsens from the most westerly localities, it
would indicate that the granitic and metamorphic rocks which
yielded the materials of which they are composed lay to the west
of the London Basin.
[In a subsequent letter (February 27th, 1889) Professor Judd
states that this “specimen from Staple-Fitzpaine has a fragment of
whitened flint in it. The microscopic characters of which are
unmistakably those of a silicified Chalk-mud full of fragments of
Globigerina.”’ ]
The cement of the flint-conglomerate of Hertfordshire consists of
quartz grains, with a few grains of flint, embedded in a crypto-.
crystalline siliceous groundmass. There is no very striking
resemblance between the cement of this conglomerate and that of
any of the Sarsens which I have examined.
Professor R. Burckhardt—Triassice Starfishes. 3
IJ].—NoTE ON CERTAIN IMPRESSIONS OF ECHINODERMS OBSERVED ON
THE SANDSTONE SLABS IN WHICH THE SKELETONS oF HypzrRo-
DAPEDON GORDONI AND RHYNCHOSAURUS ARE PRESERVED.
By Prof. Rupotr Burcknarnt, Ph.D., of the University of Basel, Switzerland.
HEN searching for traces of the dermal structure preserved
in the specimen of Hyperodapedon in the British Museum
(Natural History) in London,’ my attention was drawn to certain
spots where the matrix showed projections and pits of a polygonal
shape, which I detected when I took the photographs of this Triassic
reptile. Primarily occupying myself with the matrix of the principal
slab, in which the skeleton is enclosed, I quite thought I had only
to deal with dermal structures similar to those discovered in
Rhynchosaurus.
One of these spots, lying between the ninth and tenth ribs of the
left side, particularly attracted my attention. This I was at first
inclined to regard as a dermal ossification, the pentagonal character
of which was unquestionable. On closer inspection I found,
however, the whole of the matrix densely covered with similar
structures, a circumstance which became still more perplexing in
proportion as I discovered their immense numbers, which were
equally abundant at a considerable distance from the body, and also
in the matrix of the counterpart which had not been touched by the
chisel. The matrix of the Rhynchosaurian fossils from Warwickshire
also showed the same character; indeed, I found some on these slabs
in even better condition of preservation.
Prints of Echinoderms in the Triassic Sandstones of Warwickshire and Elgin,
From a specimen in the British Museum (Natural History), x 3.
Actual petrefactions they were not, but simply the hollow
impressions leaving a film behind, between the coarse grains of the
sand. In size they vary between 3mm. and 3cm. in diameter.
The matrix is crowded with these bodies, which are deposited over
each other, all of them lying in the same plane as the skeleton of
1 See ‘‘ On Hyperodapedon Gordoni’’: Grou. Mac., 1900, Nov. and Dee.
4 Professor R. Burckhardt—Triassic Starfishes.
Hyperodapedon. Those facing the observer with their upper sides
have left teat-like projections in the stone; others appear as funnel-
shaped depressions made by a massive body.
In shape they are star-like pentagons, of about the same form
as the bodies of Euryalidee. :
In diagonal opposition to the main portion of the star-shaped
bed lies a small pentagonal plate consisting of five parts, which
radiate from a central piece. I believe I have also detected some
radiating striz on the outer pentagon in a few exceptionally well-
preserved examples, as well as some finer striz, skirting the margim
of the extreme pentagonal radially, where they arrange themselves:
in regular order. Besides these pentagons I noticed some series of
smaller segments of about 4 mm., which to the number of six unite
with each other, though rarely more, in which latter case they are
very difficult of detection.
The conclusions I have arrived at as to these structures, and to
which I give expression quite reservedly to specialists engaged in
this branch of geology, are as follows :—
These pentagonal forms are empty caverns left by Echinoderms
of a Hurylaid shape, having peripheral arms, either simple or
forked. To whatever group of Echinoderms they may belong will
be a matter of investigation by specialists. Under no circumstances
are they parts of Hyperodapedon. The two pentagonal sets of which
they are composed, together with their projecting limbs, are forms:
which do not resemble any other type of the classes of invertebrates.
In favour also of this inference is their enormous quantity and the
great diversity in their sizes. The extreme delicacy of these
impressions is probably the reason why my examination of the
slabs did not yield a better result, as might have been the case if the
stones had been more recently quarried or specially prepared for this:
purpose.
That no remains of their external skeletons are preserved, is in
no way detrimental to this hypothesis, as a corollary to this is found
in the case of those hollows left by Elgin reptiles, which E. T.
Newton so admirably described from casts taken from their natural
moulds. No other fossils having been found in these localities except
reptiles, is also an argument in favour of such an interpretation as-
the above.
From a like presence of these casts in both localities, the Elgin
sandstones, which Smith Woodward quotes as “supposed Trias,”
should be of the same age as the sandstones belonging to the Upper
Triassic of Warwickshire and Shropshire.
Interesting as may be the task of pursuing this highly attractive
geological question, it is a matter of real regret that I am compelled
to deny myself the pleasure of conducting the investigation of this
subject further. I must confine myself here to the statement only,
that I have good reason for believing that I have observed similar
petrefactions of organic origin in some rather imperfect fragments
from the Maleri deposits in India.
= b~
2
oe Sa ae
Geol. Mag 1901. - Decade WNVol-VILPLI
G@MWoodward delet lith. West,Newman imp.
Wenlock Limestone Trilobites.
F. RB. Cowper Reed—Undescribed Trilobites. 5
I11.—Woopwarpian Musrum Nores: Sartrer’s UNDESCRIBED
Species. II.
By F. R. Cowper Rezep, M.A., F.G.S.
(PLATE I.)
Licwas scuTats, Salter. (PI. I, Figs. 1-4.)
1873. Lichas scutalis, Salter MSS.: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 130
1877. ee ces, Woodward: Cat. Brit. Foss. Crust., p. 43.
1878. Lichas scutalis, Edgell MSS.: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Mus, Pract. Geol., p. 84.
1891. Lichas verrucosus, Woods: Cat. Type Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 147.
fW\HERE are three specimens of this species in the Woodwardian
Museum, viz.: (1) Salter’s fine original specimen (a 954) from
the Wenlock Shale of Malvern, belonging to the first part of the
Fletcher Collection, acquired prior to 1873; (2) a poor specimen
probably from the same collection and horizon, locality unknown ;
and (3) an almost perfect specimen, also from the Wenlock Shale
of Malvern, belonging to that part of the Fletcher Collection
recently presented by Mrs. Fletcher. This specimen will be
designated the Fletcher specimen in distinction to Salter’s original
specimen. Both these specimens show almost the whole trilobite
preserved in excellent condition, and from them the following
description has been drawn up.
Draanosts.—Head-shield broadly parabolic, nearly twice as broad
as long, and slightly produced backwards at genal angles; strongly
convex from back to front and from side to side, slightly flattened
between the eyes across the middle portion of the posterior half;
anterior half of head-shield bent down very steeply to margin,
almost at a right angle to posterior half; sides bent down as steeply
in front, but less steeply towards genal angles, where they flatten out.
Glabella wide, occupying nearly whole middle third of head-
shield; forms most elevated portion of head-shield, but is not
swollen nor raised with independent convexity above fixed cheeks.
Median lobe much expanded in front, its narrow laterally-projecting
tongues overlapping anterior lateral lobes; constricted strongly at
level of anterior lateral furrow, behind which it gradually decreases
in width with nearly straight sides to the base of anterior lateral
lobes, where it again expands a little. Behind this point the median
lobe is only weakly marked off from the two pairs of posterior
lateral lobes, but is traceable in the Fletcher specimen to the
straight occipital furrow, where it has nearly double the width it
possessed between the anterior lateral lobes.
Anterior lateral lobes large, of broadly oval shape, rather wider
in front than behind, where the furrow which defines them is very
faint. They extend about two-thirds the whole length of the
glabella with their longer axes obliquely directed inwards, and
with a gentle convexity of their own, bending down strongly in
front with the median lobe and at the sides with the general
curvature of the head-shield. In front they are separated from the
6 F. R. Couper Reed—Undescribed Trilobites.
marginal furrow of the head-shield by the lateral projections of the
median lobe.
Middle lateral lobes subquadrate in shape, small and indistinctly
defined, being marked off in front from the anterior lobes by a very
faint depression sweeping round the hinder end of the latter lobes
and representing the middle lateral furrows. They are still more
indistinctly marked off posteriorly from the basal lobes by weak
grooves, while their outer sides are defined by the faint axal furrows
and their inner sides by the continuation of the anterior lateral
furrows to the occipital segment.
Basal lobes likewise weakly marked off from the rest of the
glabella and fixed cheeks, but relatively large, being nearly the size
of the middle lobes ; subrhomboidal rather than triangular in shape.
owing to the basal (posterior lateral) furrow starting, not from the
level of the occipital furrow but a little way in advance of it.
The posterior side of the basal lobes is marked off from the occipital
segment by the strong deep occipital furrow.
Occipital ring flattened and very broad in the middle behind the
straight portion of the occipital furrow at the base of the median
lobe of the glabella, but with its lateral portions only about half
the width, and bent backwards behind the basal lobes.
Axal furrows strongly marked only along the outer side of the
anterior end of the anterior lateral lobes, being posteriorly very
weak, as above mentioned. Behind the point where they pass into
the marginal furrow which bounds the glabella in front they arch
outwards, curving round inwards posteriorly as they define the
anterior lateral lobes, to the base of which they nearly extend with
a deeply impressed course. Here the middle lateral furrows pass
imperceptibly into them. Behind this point the axal furrows
become very weak, and curve outwards along the outer side of the
middle and basal lobes to end in the occipital furrow.
Anterior lateral furrows arise far forwards, curving round the broad
anterior end of the anterior lateral lobes, and then run with nearly
a straight course backwards along the inner side of these lobes,
slightly converging. At the posterior end of the latter each furrow
bends a little outwards to end in a small pit from which the middle
furrow starts. About half-way along the inner side of these anterior
lobes there is a slight outward kink in these anterior furrows, from
which a faint groove runs outwards a little distance across the lobe,
such as has been noticed in Lichas ornatus (Angelin),' Lichas
anglicus (Beyr.), and other species. Behind the pits at the base of
the anterior lobes the anterior lateral furrows are traceable as faint
slightly divergent grooves (especially clear in the Fletcher specimen),
which finally meet the occipital furrow at the inner posterior angle
of the basal lobes.
Middle lateral furrows weak and short, starting from the pit on
the anterior furrows and curving round the base of the anterior
lobes to merge imperceptibly into the stronger axal furrows.
1 Schmidt: Rev. Ostbalt. Silur. Trilob,, Abth. ii (1885), p. 109, t. vi, fig. 18a.
F. R. Cowper Reed—Undescribed Trilobites.
“NI
Basal furrows extremely faint. As mentioned above, they are
not straight lateral prolongations of the median portion of the
occipital furrow, as is the case in many species, but they arise
a short distance in front of it on the backward continuation of the
anterior lateral furrow, and curve slightly forwards to join the axal
furrow nearly at right angles.
In Salter’s original specimen there is in addition to the above
furrows a shallow transverse depression arched backwards, extending
across the neck of the median lobe at the base of the anterior lateral
lobes and between the pits on the anterior furrows. A similar
transverse groove is seen in Lichas palmatus (Barr.), LZ. scaber
(Beyr.),' and ZL. anglicus (Beyr.).
Occipital furrow composed of a central straight portion, not
deeply impressed, and of lateral portions curving strongly backwards
and strongly marked behind the basal lobes.
Fixed cheeks small, with an anterior wing forming a very narrow
strip between the axal furrow and the facial suture. At the base
of the anterior lateral lobes of the glabella, where the axal furrow
bends in, the cheeks increase in width, expanding behind the eye
and entering into the general convexity of the head-shield.
Hye-lobes of moderate size, prominent, horizontally-extended
outwards on a level with the general convexity of the glabella,
and situated just in front of the base of the anterior lateral lobes.
A short furrow separates them from the fixed cheeks. In front
of the glabella is a flattened horizontally-extended border of
moderate width, widening a little laterally as it passes into that
of the free cheeks, and marked off by a shallow marginal furrow.
Free cheeks triangular in shape, with an inner strongly convex
portion abruptly elevated above the flattened broad border, and
marked off behind by the occipital furrow and scarcely in front by
the very weakly-defined marginal furrow which circumscribes its
base and joins the occipital furrow at nearly a right angle. This
inner convex portion of the free cheek bears the eye at its summit,
but nearer the front than the anterior border.
Eye semicircular and prominent, rising up vertically with a high
visual surface beneath the overhanging eye-lobe.
Border of free cheek flattened, rapidly increasing in width from
the front to the genal angle, owing to the inward course of the
marginal furrow. Genal angles slightly produced into blunt points.
Ornamentation.—The glabella, occipital ring, fixed cheeks, and
the convex portion of the free cheeks are ornamented with tubercles
of moderate size, rather sparingly distributed. On the flattened
border of the free cheeks, particularly near the genal angles, there
are also a few similar tubercles.
Thorax.—The thorax in the Fletcher specimen is nearly perfect
and shows nine narrow segments, but in Salter’s original specimen
it is not so well preserved and only seven segments can be dis-
tinguished. In each case the specimen has its head and tail strongly
bent upwards, and this has caused the body to break across at the
1 Barrande: Syst. Silur. Bohem., vol. i (1851), pl. xxix, figs. 7 and 24.
8 EF. BR. Cowper Reed—Undescribed Trilobites.
junction of the head and thorax, forcing back the head over the
first few segments of the body and concealing them. In the Fletcher
specimen there are indications of one segment being thus covered,
making the actual number of thoracic rings to be ten.
Axis of thorax gently convex, broad, tapering gradually to the
pygidium, each ring consisting of a simple narrow band, apparently
devoid of ornamentation. The anterior rings of the axis appear to
be wider than the corresponding pleurz, but the posterior ones to be
narrower. Axal furrows weak.
Pleurz semicylindrical, horizontally extended as far as the
falerum, but then bent downwards, flattening again towards their
extremities, which are separate and free. The fulcrum is distant
from the axal furrow about one-third of the length of the pleura,
and is obtusely rounded. Each pleura curves gently forwards to.
the fulcrum, then bends more strongly backwards, and again bends
forward slightly towards its extremity. The surface of each pleura
is marked along its inner portion by a nearly median furrow, which
yuns straight outwards to the fulerum and then curves backwards
over the outer portion to the point, dividing this outer portion into
a flattened anterior and an elevated posterior part, but near the end
the whole breadth of the pleura is flattened. The extremity is
bluntly pointed. There are a few obscure traces of tubercles on the
pleuree.
Pygidium.—Broad and roughly pentagonal, gently convex from
side to side, having its lateral lobes bent down, but flattened along
its margin. Its component segments are closely fused together, and
only the two anterior pleura on each side are marked out.
The pygidium is arched forwards in front; posteriorly it is
forked, and each side is angulated by the projection of the extremities
of the second pair of pleura.
The posterior margin lying in the fork is rather less than half the
anterior width of the pygidium. The re-entrant angle is about 135°,
and the sides meet the lateral borders at an angle of a little over
90° at the obtusely rounded divergent points of the fork. (In the
Fletcher specimen these points are rather more acute.)
Axis cylindrical, convex, and prominent, being strongly raised
above the lateral lobes. Its posterior end is pointed and prolonged
to reach the posterior margin of the pygidium at the re-entrant
angle, sloping down rapidly to the level of the flattened border.
The cylindrical portion of the axis measures only about two-thirds
the total length of the pygidium.
First axial ring only distinct, and marked off behind by a strong
continuous furrow. Very obscure traces of four or five rings behind
it. Axal furrows well marked on each side of the cylindrical portion,
but very faint behind it and scarcely traceable to the margin.
Lateral lobes of pygidium, bent down on each side of the axis and
consisting of a convex inner portion and a flattened marginal portion.
Hach lateral lobe measures anteriorly about 13 times the width of
the axis.
First pair of pleura: distinct, each pleura expanding outwardly to
F. RB. Cowper Reed— Undescribed Trilobites. i)
double its axial width, and with a squarely truncated extremity,
not projecting beyond the margin. A straight diagonal furrow
marks the surface, but does not reach the extremity, and the outer
anterior angle of the truncated end is flattened as in the pleura of
the thorax, as if for rolling-up. The groove separating the first from
the second pleura runs obliquely backwards and outwards at an
-angle of about 30° to the front margin of the pygidium, curving
gently forwards at its outer end.
Second pair of pleura distinct, each pleura increasing rapidly to
double the width possessed by the first pleura on the margin; end
broad, truncated, and with posterior angle projecting beyond the
inargin as a distinct tooth ; posteriorly marked off by weak furrow
‘making an angle of about 45° with front margin of the pygidium.
A median, slightly oblique furrow traverses the ‘surface of the pleura,
but stops short of the margin.
The position of the projecting ends of this second pair of pleure
“is about half-way along the lateral margins of the pygidium. Behind
them the margin takes a slight curve “inwards to the points of the
posterior fori.
The lateral lobes behind the second pair of pleuree show no
segmentation or furrows, but probably are composed of two pairs of
pleurze, one ending at the lateral pointed extremities of the posterior
margin and the other at the axal furrows in the re-entrant angle.
A few scattered tubercles are visible on the flattened marginal
portion of the lateral lobes, especially near the posterior angles.
MEASUREMENTS.
Me le
mm. mm.
Leneth of head-shield Pee wate Bo 13°0 Kae 11°5
Width ot head-shield oh =i — 26-0 rae PALLY
Length of glabella... dae aes 11-0 ft 8a
Width of elabella at front end. ae sbe 10°5 ase 10:0
Width of glabella at level of eyes”... ate ORO) wees 73
Width of glabella at neck-furrow ... ae 9-0 re 9-0
Width ot thorax aa. ay. ae about 22:0 oe 19-0
Width of axis of thorax Heo BAG --- uncertain ... 8:0
Length of pygidium ... 500 sie 11°5 aie 10-0
Width of pygidium at front end rs Boe 18:0 as 18-0
Width of pygidium between posterior angles 9-0 fed 8:0
Width of axis of pygidium ... ade 6-0 RE 6-0
I = Salter’s specimen. II = Fletcher’s specimen.
N.B.—In the Fletcher specimen the hypostome is also seen in its
proper position on the lower surface of the upturned head. It is
subpentagonal in shape; its length is less than its breadth, which
is greatest across the middle. The central portion, which is also of
greater breadth than length, is marked off by a continuous furrow
from the border, is gently convex, and occupies about two-thirds of
the whole length of the hypostome ; its anterior end is strongly
arched forwards, and its sides and posterior edge are nearly straight
and parallel respectively to the lateral and posterior margins of the
hypostome. Report Brit. Assoc,, 1889.
R. H. Tiddeman—Formation of Reef Knolls. 21
area of the downthrow side and from other considerations there was
every reason to suppose that the Craven Faults were actually taking
place during the formation of those rocks.
My friend Mr. J. E. Marr, F.R.S., has in a most courteous way,
whilst taking my geological mapping as for the most part correct,
found reasons for dissenting from all the groundwork on which it
was founded.’ In combating Mr. Marr’s views I offer no opinion
on knolls of other localities or other ages which he brings forward
an support of his views. I speak only of the Carboniferous knolls
of which I have written, and with which I am well acquainted.
Speaking generally, 1 think the differences between us may be thus
‘summarized :—
1. Mr. Marr disagrees with my reading of the succession and
thickness of the rocks on the south side of the Craven Faults, and,
whilst I consider that we have two distinct successions of different
thickness caused by a difference in the rate of submergence in the
two districts, and by shallower and deeper seas, he regards the
rocks on both sides as having been one series of like thickness in
orderly sequence to the north, but, so to speak, shuffled by earth-
movements on the south of those faults and repeated several times
by overthrusts.
la. In illustration let us take a pack of cards, say arranged in
‘suits as representing the regular country on the north side, and
several packs similarly arranged to represent the greater thickness
on the south side. Shuffle these last to represent the supposed
disturbance and overthrusting. Shall we always find after
shuffling the same general succession? Yet over a tract reaching
from Draughton to Chipping and from Settle to Derbyshire, we do
get such a general succession, and that does not at all resemble the
‘succession on the north side of the faults. The overthrusting to do
this effectually must cover the whole of this wide area comprised in
three or four counties, and not confine its operations to a narrow
disturbed belt near the Craven Faults. Is Mr. Marr prepared to
make his orogenic movements extend over so large an area, and
thereby arrange the whole country, which they break up, into so
orderly a disposition ?
2. Mr. Marr regards the great difference between the black and
white limestone, the form and constitution of the reef-knolls, the
abundance in them of perfect fossil forms in a well-preserved state,
the conglomerates and breccias which accompany them, as all being
the result of what he calls orogenic movements ; in other words, of
the folding repetition and overthrusting of the rocks, with here and
there relief of pressure. More especially is the last called in as
being the reason for the abundant and well-preserved fossils and the
change of the limestones.
It is extremely difficult for me to accept these views. If we could
believe that a black, well and thinly bedded limestone can by any
physical change be converted into a white crystalline mass with
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soe., vol. lv, pp. 327-361.
22 R. H. Tiddeman—Formation of Reef Knoils.
little visible bedding, but with abundant fossils in a perfect state,
we have still to learn what has become of the shales which are
almost always present with the black limestone. If squeezed out,
as might be suggested, they would at least leave partings behind,
and the rock would be more bedded than it is:
Mr. Marr contemplates the likelihood of several different lime-
stones being shifted together to make one reef-knoll, but if so, are
we not as likely to get the thin sandstones of the Pendleside Grit
‘sandwiched into them as well? Yet sandstones and shale-beds are
unknown in the reef-knolls.
Mr. Marr makes a number of statements about what he calls the
Vs of the Middle Craven Fault. His opinion is that this is a great
thrust-plane dipping gently north, and that the Coal-measures are
forced beneath the limestone, and so on along its course. A bed of
coal in the limestone at Ingleton is regarded by him as having been
forced up from underlying Coal-measures by pressure, and not as-
originally interbedded. Unfortunately for these views, there are no
proper Vs or dipping planes of faulting indicated in the map. The
sinuous track of the Craven Fault is not so drawn to accommodate-
any theory, but is merely put where the exposures of rock show it
to run. Its wanderings are either dictated by or stand in relation
to the two principal lines of jointing in the limestone, which range
W.N.W. and N.N.W. Sometimes one direction, sometimes the
other, has the mastery. At Clapham the line is absolutely straight,
and does not curve up-stream as suggested by Mr. Marr. The coal-
seam mentioned is well known to me. On searching it I found
several Producti, fairly perfect, embedded in it and filled with it, and
the conclusion I came to was that it was either a coal-seam which
had grown on a reef and been submerged, or a deposit of seaweed.
These Producti seem to disagree with the injection theory. Such
coal-seams are found occasionally in the limestone. One near
Kirkby Lonsdale has been worked for coal.
Mr. Marr has mentioned two places where knolls of grit occur.
Ido not admit that a knoll of grit can have anything in common
with the reef-knolls of Craven unless it be the external form; but if
such structures were made by earth thrusts and abounded, it would
no doubt be a strong point in favour of his views. One of these
grit knolls is said to be in the canal at the back of Shipton Castle.
I think this must be an error. I know of no sandstone in that
locality, though I know it well. I have consulted others who are,
as geologists, conversant with Shipton, competent to form an opinion,
and they agree with me that nothing but limestone and shales occur
in that canal at that point. The beds there are certainly contorted,
but they are not sandstone, and contortions do not necessarily imply
reef-knolls.
I feel unable to regard Mr. Marr’s ‘model knoll’ as in any respect
resembling what I have called reef-knolls. That is, according to his.
views, a broken plication of a thin hard bed of limestone in a mass
of softer shale, the shale surrounding its broken fragments. The-
knolls to which I allude are almost solid limestone from top to base.
Notices of Memoirs—H. J. L. Beadnell—Geology of Egypt. 23
They have no alternations of hard and soft beds, and, so far as I have
seen, no repetition of beds by folding. The evidences of movement
on their flanks, if any, are not more than one would expect from the
vertical pressure of a more or less plastic shale upon what is at least
a less plastic limestone.
I admit fully that there are abundant evidences in the district of
faulting, of great pressure, and quite likely of overthrusts; but to
say that these have given to these rocks a change of character, or are
responsible for the order of their succession, appears to me to be
invoking an unnecessarily powerful but yet inadequate force. Such
thrust-planes as are implied would meet the geologist in the field
at every turn, and force themselves into recognition. They would
admit of easy mapping, and no statement of their existence would
be complete without some such systematic recognition.
INjG22rCinsS Cie") VWEEVEOLEES=
I.— On some Recent GerouocicaL Discovertes IN THE NILE
VaLLey and Lisyan Desert.! By Hucu J. L. Brapnext,
F.G.S., F.R.G.S.
N this paper the author draws attention to some interesting
discoveries made by him during the last three or four years
while attached to the Geological Survey of Egypt. When the
latter Survey was established in 1896 the publications and maps,
both geological and geographical, of the Rohlfs Expedition of
1873-74 still remained the only source of information on the greater
part of Egypt.
In his geological reports Zittel, the geologist of the Rohlfs
Expedition, calls special attention to the absence of any uncon-
formity between the Cretaceous and Hocene deposits, in fact
mentioning this as one of the most important results obtained.
More extended researches have, however, enabled the author “ to
bring forward incontestable evidence from at least two areas in the
Libyan Desert, namely, Abu-Roash, near Cairo, and Baharia Oasis,
that instead of this perfectly gradual petrographical and paleeonto-
logical passage, undisturbed by any unconformity, from the upper-
most marine Chalk into the oldest Tertiary beds, there is as a matter
of fact a strongly marked unconformity, representing a long lapse
of time in the process of sedimentation. During this period the
Cretaceous was elevated into land, often with intense folding and
faulting, and underwent considerable denudation before subsidence
led to the entire or partial submergence of the area below the sea, and
allowed the deposition of successive beds of Eocene in a markedly
overlapping manner.”
The accompanying table is compiled chiefly from the work of
Professor Zittel and the Geological Survey of Egypt.
1 Abstract of a paper read (with the permission of Captain H. G. Lyons, R.E.,
F.G.S., the Director-General of the Egyptian Geological Survey) before the Inter-
national Geological Congress at Paris, 1900.
“sisuauodosnjo 7 pue ‘eaulwagy “i
‘nnyaquy niliboug ‘sniwalinagh 4
"AT YI skevpo pue souoyspueg
‘AQTIVA HIIN GNV LYASHC NVAGIT AHL NI SHIUMS SQOMOVIGYO GNVY ANNO AHL AO WIAVeL
‘snumahwigrs 8a7y ‘souojspues pue skejg | ‘uvrusurouen
-oqoayr Suinohqu muapwiposaja ry “oqo ‘sapyouppnar ‘9071
‘sisuayano.t MagsMrUlazT UJIM SaM04s |-2UMy dy ‘srsuayavos wagsniuazy ‘vag
pues poyesoriva pue sauojsotury |-vgqy vuosoydhg YIM souoysouryT
“WOSPOYOUNT VIMlO.Lgsan rT
*S0.00SDA- 1.09 Saz20IpD.LUT ‘Sout : ain
*SoTO}SpUes -DIog) (woazovya0.4 7, ) nyjavoaja 7 ‘wip TUTOUE =|
| pue shvfo werqn yy ueIUoIn Ty, 10, wermoues -1ua bay DOULIANT YIM SOUO0JSOULLT |
‘somojspuvs pie sAvpo TeIqn yy : : a
Ss pot eoo oT sgneereron ote sped ‘somoqysounty AUTT IT a
: . c hllay DINING YIM SLL] ONS)
sprees operpomroquy ony Jo amos ATAPIONT | rvovymgy snssisqomyag ¢-oyo | “wvruoyueg |B | S
a ae “uopoyoup (‘229809 VALgSC) ‘270881. T, Eppes
ae : 2 ed DY70S8LT, JIM SOTOYSOTAT] PUL SpAB]AL B
Tae SPL Z1PUO OFAN JO Eg | ‘werwedurey) ©
‘sXvpo Ayeoy Aors-Yse pur ystusary ‘oqo ‘snguop
“B90 JSOTUTT ‘o40 ‘sisualf[vlug Wap0ag ‘siumjnarsaa | -0js1ud xndog ‘sisuatfving W9j00q arante
Aye O91 AA poydhiy ‘vywao sajhyounup ‘sayy | “ihanwag vilboug ‘sr.vmpnaisaa ‘aya ‘sagsipnar ‘snghpuody med
[-19109UAA *S[RIOD YYIM YVYO oT AA | PHYdhwy ‘sye10o YIM yey 91g AA | ‘vagsQ ‘sTeI0O YI HLRYO oP AL
‘RATIVA SATIN ‘SISVQ VIHUV(, *SISVQ VINVHVG “HSVOY-ALY
"(ojo ‘vereyy “eayerey ‘etet Jo) soyeyg vusy ) . { ‘UBsIIpusyzT
“ayo “usaquog snpnvar ‘nongayy, wmonyT ‘waliqu vurynotadg YL souoysounly j ST a | ‘wermosseng
‘ojo ‘soTLOJSOWUT] wuxjoaM Fy ‘speq vsswuUnYIVD “NVKAIT Uatdady— ‘UBIUIPUOT be
Q
*SOUOJSOUT] SISUaYarLH sazYNUUNAT TIM ‘WVLLVMOW, WLAO'T : 5
“NVLLVIOW, UWLdd() Urs TLE td
-naan.ihidnd sapropg1g pue ‘.tahaurgner “Ar Spypautsague “AT “yaqyouT saqynuUnUnAT YYIM ‘SISeO BAI JO ANDO ATdty ‘TBIMOJABT
Notices of Memoirs—H. J. I. Beadnell—Geology of Egypt. 25
The author then discusses separately several typical localities,
which may be briefly alluded to.
Abu-Roash.—This peculiarly interesting Cretaceous complex, near
‘Cairo, has been described by Walther and Schweinfurth as having
been brought into position among the Eocene deposits by faults
along its four sides. This view, however, is strongly opposed by
the author, who maintains that the fault theory is absolutely
untenable, “as a most casual examination of the boundary of the
‘Cretaceous, at almost any point where its junction with the Eocene
was visible, instead of suggesting the existence of faults, yielded
‘indubitable evidence of their absence, and the presence instead of
a well-marked unconformity.” At some points ‘“‘the upper surface
of the white chalk of the Cretaceous shows a most irregularly
eroded surface, which is covered by a bed of rolled pebbles, some-
times a metre thick, the latter being overlaid by a thick bed of
Eocene shelly limestone, followed by a series full of characteristic
‘Upper Mokattam fossils.” The author further points out the
existence in this area of Danian beds, the uppermost member
(White Chalk) being apparently homotaxial with the White Chalk
-of Baharia and Farafra.
Baharia Oasis.— Of the remarkable sand belt which occurs
between the Nile Valley and this oasis, the author says :—‘ This
‘sand belt has a total breadth of five kilometres, and runs slightly
west of north and east of south (parallel, in fact, to the normal
direction of the wind). Its origin is much further north, probably
in the neighbourhood of the oasis of Moghara, while to the south
it runs, as far as known unbroken, into the depression of Kharga,
whence, after a slight break, it continues southwards. Its length
is thus certainly over 350 kilometres. The dunes are composed of
light-yellow, siliceous, well-rounded sand-grains. The steepest sides
are those facing west, wbich have an angle of 80°-31°. It is
a remarkable sight, this narrow band of sand dunes extending across
the open desert as far as the eye can reach, maintaining an almost
-exactly straight course, an even breadth, and with sides as well
defined as if drawn with the edge of a ruler.”
The author’s work shows that, contrary to original ideas, there is
‘in reality a remarkable development of Cretaceous rocks in the
oasis of Baharia and the surrounding desert on the west and south
sides.
The lowest beds, consisting of sandstones, clays, and marls, attain
a thickness of 170 metres, and are of Cenomanian age. Above them
come limestones and variegated sandstones (45 metres), followed by
white chalk of Danian age, 40 metres thick. (See Table.)
As at Abu-Roash, the junction between the Cretaceous and
Hocene is unconformable, the deposits of the latter overlapping
successively the different beds of the former.
The author, in discussing the age and origin of the peculiar
ferruginous quartzites which so constantly cap the numerous
dsolated hills within the depression, brings forward evidence which
tends to show that these “ were deposited in a lake which formed
26 Notices of Memoirs—H. J. L. Beadneli— Geology of Egypt.
here when there existed only a slight depression in the Hocene and
Cretaceous rocks, ages in fact before erosion had carved out the
depression to its present form. The large amount of ferruginous
material and general character of the beds point to freshwater
lacustrine deposition and precipitation. Lithologically they are
often exactly similar to the Oligocene beds of the Fayum and Jebel
Ahmar, and to the deposits on the road between Feshn and the
oasis, and it may be that they are of the same age.”
The author states that the igneous rocks of Baharia are of Post-
Cretaceous, probably Oligocene, age, contemporaneous with the
basalt sheets of the Fayum, of Abu-Roash and the desert to the
west, and of Abu-Zabel; and that the andesites of the Libyan
desert at Bahnessa, Gara Soda, and Jebel Gebail were likewise
erupted at the same time.
After describing the important folds which occur in Baharia the
author continues :—‘‘The Cretaceous beds as a whole evidently
form a large anticline . . . . which has its axis more or less.
parallel to the syncline already described. It is continued into the
north end of Farafra, where the dip is well marked . . . ~-
Yet the Eocene beds forming the plateau are in general quite
horizontal, even in close proximity to inclined Cretaceous beds
ate it seems certain that the Cretaceous beds, after the
deposition of the White Chalk of Danian age, underwent upheaval,
denudation, and finally depression, before the deposition of the
earliest Tertiary beds.
“In this part of Egypt it appears that the subsiding Cretaceous.
land had the form of a long, flat, irregular ridge of anticlinal
structure, extending from Dakhla oasis through Farafra, Baharia,
and Abu-Roash. The northern end of this ridge was the last to.
subside and receive Eocene deposits, which accounts for the fact
that in Farafra the Cretaceous is overlaid, always unconformably,
by the Esna Shales of the Lower Libyan, in Baharia by limestones.
of the Upper Libyan, and at Abu-Roash by still younger beds of
Lower and Upper Mokattam age.”
The author finds other evidence which “suggests the probability
that there was another period of possibly even more important
earth-movements in Post-Eocene times. In this case, it seems not
unlikely that the folding was closely connected with the important
series of earth-movements which took place in North-East Africa
and South-West Asia in early Pliocene times, and which gave rise to
the formation of the chief topographical features of the country, such
as the Nile and Jordan valleys and their attendant series of lakes.”
The author’s theory as to the origin of these wonderful depressions.
in the Libyan desert is interesting, and may be quoted in full. He
writes :—‘ Baharia is a self-contained depression without drainage
outlet, so that the ordinary methods of removal of disintegrated
material do not here apply. Next, we have a large, flat, anticlinal
ridge of Cretaceous beds, with at least one subsidiary, sharp, parallel,
synclinal fold, overlaid by more or less horizontal beds of Eocene
limestone. Since the elevation of this part of North Africa into dry
Notices of Memoirs—H. J. L. Beadneli—Geology of Egypt. 27
land in late Tertiary times, denudation must have gone on con-
tinuously over the whole surface of the country.
“The most important denuding agent at the present day in the
Libyan desert is wind-borne sand, the erosive action of which is.
‘very powerful and at once apparent to every traveller in these
regions; but in the past there may have been, and probably were,
other eroding agencies as well at work on the surface of this part of
North Africa. Imagine, then, the general planing down of the
country little by little through a long interval of time, until the
anticlinal ridge of Cretaceous beds was reached, with its attendant
soft sandstones and clays. As soon as the latter were exposed the
action of denudation would have rapidly quickened, chiefly by the
breaking up of the constituents of these beds by changes of tempera-
ture, rains and frosts, and the removal of the resulting sand and
dust by wind. In this way must these wonderful depressions have
been formed.
“Generalizing, then, we may say that where there have been
extensive deposits of soft beds, and these have become exposed by
the action of denudation, there large depressions have been cut out.
The existence of soft Cenomanian sandstones and clays is thus the
primary cause of the existence of the depression of Baharia, the soft
Esna shales have played a similar role in that of Farafra, while,
again, Dakhla is cut out in a thick series of soft beds of Danian age.
The other oases and depressions probably owe their existence largely
to the same cause.”
Farafra and Dakhla Oasis.—In Farafra the author’s chief additions
to our knowledge were rather geographical than geological, although
some evidence is brought forward to show that the very fossiliferous
clays on the road between Farafra and Dakhla are somewhat younger
than the age assigned to them by Zittel.
In Dakhila oasis thick and extensive highly phosphatic bone-beds:
of considerable commercial value were discovered.
Fayum.—It was in this province that there existed, some 2,000
years before Herodotus, the celebrated Lake Moeris, the exact site
of which has led to so much discussion. The author shows that
the geological evidence, in the shape of clays with numerous fresh-
water shells and fish-remains, of the same species as those at present
inhabiting the existing lake, proves that the ancient lake occupied
the lowest part of the depression, i.e. that now occupied by the Birket
el Qurun and a considerable area of the low surrounding country.
His position, in fact, closely agrees with that assigned to the jake by
Major Brown, who bases his conclusions chiefly on considerations
of level.
An extensive series of fluvio-marine beds, with intercalated sheets
of basalt near the top, is shown to overlie the Upper Mokattam
formation throughout the north part of the Fayum. This series is
provisionally regarded as Oligocene. At the top come the silicified,
wood-bearing sandstones, which stretch northwards across the desert
to beyond the latitude of Cairo.
Within the Fayum depression, high up on the slopes or summits.
28 Notices of Memoirs—H. J. L. Beadnell—Geology of Egypt.
of the surrounding ridges, are found extensive raised beaches,
probably of marine Pliocene age, at which time the sea stretched
far up the Nile Valley.
Nile Valley.—In conclusion, some highly interesting facts are
brought forward with regard to the Nile Valley itself, which the
author summarizes as follows:—‘‘The general north and south
direction of the Nile Valley in Egypt, the remarkable high, lofty,
wall-like cliffs by which it is hemmed in, the absence of any true
river deposits at any considerable height above the river, the almost
-entire absence of hills or outliers of the plateau within the valley,
the proved existence of bounding faults throughout a long stretch
-of the valley, lead us to infer that the formation of this gorge was
brought about by faulting, rifting, and folding, and not cut out in
the usual way by river action.”
Between Cairo and Assuan the Nile Valley floor is covered for
ithe most part with deposits of comparatively recent geological age,
which may be divided into (1) Marine, Pliocene; (2) Lacustrine,
Pleistocene ; and (3) Fluviatile, Recent.
The marine Pliocene deposits, discovered near Esna by Mr. Barron
and the author in 1897, consist of a thick series of limestones and
anterbedded conglomerates. In the limestones numerous foraminifera
were found, and have been described by Mr. F. Chapman.
The lacustrine series consist of fresh-water deposits of the most
variable nature, including gravels, conglomerates, clays, marls, lime-
‘stones, and tufas. They have been mapped and examined by the
author throughout a large length of the Nile Valley from Qena to
Cairo. Calcareous tufas, crowded with the most beautiful impressions
-of leaves and twigs, abound in places. At Isawia the limestones of
the series are of considerable commercial importance, supplying the
material for the construction of the great dam at Assiut. Finally,
the fluviatile deposits include the Nile mud and other recent
accumulations.
In conclusion, the author shows the probable date of the formation
‘of the Nile Valley gorge to be Lower Pliocene, and refers it to the
same great series of earth-movements which determined and formed
the main physical feature of North-East Africa and part of Asia.
After the deposition of the Pliocene beds a gradual elevation led to
the final retreat of the sea, the valley then becoming the site of
a series of fresh-water lakes in which were deposited large quantities
of calcareous tufa, which enclosed the numerous leaves carried into
the lakes from the surrounding forests.
Finally, “‘in later Pleistocene times drainage must have become
well established down the Nile Valley, and a river, the youthful
Father Nile, commenced its career by carving out a channel through
‘the valley deposits, before, owing to changed conditions, it finally
took to depositing layer upon layer of ‘ Nile mud,’ thus forming the
‘strip of cultivable and inhabitable country without which the Land
of Egypt, as we know it, would be non-existent.”
Notices of Memoirs— Vegetation of the Coal Period. 29
II.—British AssocratioN FoR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE.
Braprorp, 1900. Joint Discussion, Sections C and K. On
THE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH THE Puanrs OF THE CoaL
PERIOD GREW.
1. Frora or tHe Coat-mrasures. By R. Krpston, F.R.S.E., F.G.S.
EAVING out of consideration a few genera of which we possess
little or no definite knowledge, the flora of the Coal-measures
consists of Ferns, Calamites, Lycopods, Sphenophyllexw, Cordaites,
and Coniferze.
In genera and species the Ferns are probably more numerous than
the whole of the other groups, and contain representatives of the
Eusporangiate and Leptosporangiate members of the class. The
Eusporangiate, or those ferns whose sporangia are unprovided with
an annulus, were more numerous in the Carboniferous period than
at present, though in the Coal-measures they do not appear to have
been more numerous than the genera with annulate sporangia. ‘Tree
ferns, though not very common, are more frequent in the Upper
than in the Lower Coal-measures, in the lowest beds of which they
seem to be very rare.
The Calamites are largely represented throughout the whole of
the Coal-measures, Asterophyllites (Culamocladus) and Aninularia
probably being their foliage.
Lycopods are also very numerous, and are represented by many
important genera — Lycopodites, Lepidodendron, Lepidophloios,
Bothrodendron, and Sigillaria, with their rhizomes Stigmaria and
Stigmariopsis. These genera contributed largely to the formation
of Coal.
The genus Sphenophyllum was also frequent during Coal-measure
times, and forms a type of vegetation essentially distinct from any
existing group.
The Gymnosperms are represented by Cordaites, Conifer, and
Cycads.
The Cordaites had tree-like trunks and long yucca-like leaves.
They are plentiful in the Coal-measures, and, like the arborescent
lycopods, must have been a prominent feature in a Carboniferous
forest scene.
The Coniferz, so far as I have seen, are only represented by
a single specimen of Walchia from the Upper Coal-measures ; and
though Cycads have been discovered in the Upper Coal-measures on
_the Continent, I am not aware of any British species which can be
referred with certainty to this group.
2. Tue Ortern oF Coat. By A. Srranay, M.A., F.G.S.
The deposition of the Coal-measures was due to the subsidence of
large portions of the earth’s crust to a depth often amounting to
several thousand feet. The subsidence, being unequal, led to the
formation of coal-basins, parts of the margins of which are still
recognizable. That the intervening areas rose no less rapidly than
the basins sank is proved by the vast denudation suffered by the
earlier Palzeozoic rocks during the Carboniferous period.
30 Notices of Memoirs—Vegetation of the Coal Period.
The subsidence was counterbalanced during Coal-measure times
‘by sedimentation, for the occurrence of marine beds among deposits
of a generally estuarine aspect proves that the surface was maintained
at or near sea-level. The Carboniferous sediments consist, in the
majority of coalfields, of marine limestones in the lower part, of
marine grits and conglomerates in the middle part, and of estuaro-
marine sandstones and shales in the upper part. The sequence is
due, firstly, to the admission of the sea to the subsiding areas; and
lastly, to the restoration of level brought about by sedimentation and
denudation. But there is evidence also of the sedimentation having
been more or less spasmodic. Thus the Limestone Series generally
consists of repetitions of small groups of strata, each group being
-composed of sandstone, followed by shale, shale followed by lime-
stone. Similarly the Coal-measures present repetitions of sandstone
followed by shale, shale by coal. Limestone in the one case and
-coal in the other are therefore comparable in this respect, that each
represents an episode when sedimentation had come to a pause.
Early views as to the origin of coal, namely, that it was formed of
vegetable matter drifted beyond the region to which the finest
mineral sediment could reach, were in accordance with these facts.
More minute examination of the strata, however, revealed proofs
of land-surfaces in the Coal-measures, and it was generally accepted
that the coal-seams represent forests in the place of their growth.
‘The evidence may be summarized as follows :—
(1) Rain-pittings, sun-cracks, and footprints prove that the surfaces
-of some of the beds were exposed to the air.
(2) Erect tree-trunks of large size, in some cases attached to large
spreading roots, are not uncommon. JLand-shells, millipedes, and
the skeletons of air-breathing reptiles have occasionally been found
within the hollow trunks.’
(3) The underclays of coal-seams are traversed in all directions by
‘branching rootlets, unlike the drifted fragments in the bedding
planes of the other strata. They were described as an invariable
accompaniment of coals, and as being the soils in which the coal-
forest was rooted.
(4) Coal-seams, with thin minute partings, persist over vast areas,
and it was thought impossible that so wide and regular a distribution
-of vegetable matter could have been accomplished by drifting.
(5) The chemical composition of the coals was believed to prove
that the vegetable matter underwent partial decomposition in the
open air before being submerged or buried.
This evidence, however, though it proves the existence of land
surfaces, is not conclusive of the coal-seams being forests in place of
growth. The rain-pittings, sun-cracks, and footprints occur, not in
the coals, but in the intervening strata. Of the erect tree-trunks
a large proportion occur in sandstones devoid of coal, a few only
having been found to stand upon an underclay, or to be associated
1 ©. Brongniart and others have shown that air-breathing insects of the orders
Neuroptera, Orthoptera, Thysanura, and Homoptera, were very nwmerous in the
Coal-period in Europe and America.—Hpit. Geox. Mac.
Notices of Memoirs— Vegetation of the Coal Period. dL
with seams of coal. Vast areas of coal have been worked without
any such trunks having been encountered. The majority of the
trunks, moreover, are destitute of spreading roots, and are believed
to have been floated to their present positions. The land-shells,
insect and reptilian remains, are of extremely rare occurrence.
The underclays do not resemble soils, inasmuch as they are
perfectly homogeneous, and lie with absolute parallelism to the other
members of a stratified series. They are not always present beneath
coal-seams, but, on the other hand, often occur in them or above
them. Frequently they have no coal associated with them. The
rootlets in them have no connection with the coal, which is a well-
stratified deposit with a sharply defined base.
The persistence of the partings and characters of the coal over
wide areas is in favour of their being subaqueous deposits, for on so
large an expanse of land there must have been river-systems and
variations in the vegetation. The stream-beds, known to miners as
‘wash-outs,’ are not proportioned in size to the supposed land-
surfaces.
Subaérial decomposition of part of a mass of vegetable matter
would take place whether it were floating or resting on dry land.
Spores, which enter largely into the composition of many coals,
would travel long distances either by wind or water.
Some coal-seams show clear proof of a drifted origin, as, for
example, those which are made up of a mass of small water-worn
chips of wood or bark. Other seams pass horizontally into bands
of ironstone, and one case has been observed of a coal changing
gradually into a dolomitic tufa, doubtless formed in a stagnant
lagoon. Putting aside exceptional cases, the sequence of events
which preceded the deposition of a normal coal-seam seems to have
been—firstly, the outspreading of sand or gravel with drifted plant-
remains, followed by shale as the currents lost velocity. The water
was extremely shallow, and even retreated at times, so as to leave
the surface open to the air. The last sediments were extremely
fine, homogeneous, and almost wholly siliceous, and in them a mass
of presumably aquatic vegetation rooted itself. This further im-
pediment to movement in the water cut off all sediment, and the
material brought into the area then consisted only of wind-borne
vegetable dust or floating vegetable matter carrying an occasional
boulder. Lastly, the formation of the coal-seam was brought to
a close by a sudden invasion of the area by moving water. The
‘mass of vegetable matter, often after suffering some little erosion,
was buried by sandstone or shale rich in large drifted remains of
plants or trees, and the whole process was recommenced.
3. BorantcaL EvipENCE BEARING ON THE CLIMATIC AND OTHER
PuysicaL ConpITIONS UNDER WHICH CoAL WAS FORMED. By
A. C. Sewarp, F.R.S.
Botanical investigations into the nature and composition of the
vegetation which has left abundant traces in the sediments of the
Coal-measures may be expected to throw some light on the natural
32 Notices of Memoirs— Vegetation of the Coal Period.
conditions which prevailed during that period in the earth’s history
that was par excellence the age of coal production. The minute
examination of petrified tissues has rendered possible a restoration
of the internal framework of several extinct types of plant-life, and
has carried us a step further towards the solution of evolutionary
problems. It is possible, even with our present knowledge, to-
make a limited use of anatomical structure as an index of life-
conditions, and to restore in some degree from structural records the
physiological and physical conditions of plant-life characteristic of
the close of the Carboniferous epoch.
(1) Lvidence furnished by the Coal-period Floras as to Climatic and
other Physical Conditions.
The uniformity in the character of the vegetation has no doubt
been somewhat exaggerated ; e.g., the Glossopéeris flora of Australia,
South Africa, and South America. The existence of botanical
provinces in Upper Paleozoic times.
A comparison of the Coal-period vegetation with that of the
present day as regards (i) the relative abundance of certain classes
of plants, (ii) the geographical distribution of certain families of
plants during the Carboniferous epoch and at the present day. The
importance of bearing in mind the progress of plant-evolution as.
a factor affecting the consideration of such comparisons. The
possible existence of a Paleozoic Mountain flora of which no-
records have been preserved.
(2) The Form, Habit, and Manner of Occurrence of Individual Plants
as Indices of Conditions of Growth.
Comparison of Calamites and horse-tails. Fossil forests of
Calamites. Psaronius stems in siti and bearing roots at different
levels, suggesting growth in a region of rapid sedimentation.
Vertical stems either in loco natali or drifted. Climbing plants.
possibly represented by Sphenophyllum, some species of ferns and
Medullosez. Function of the so-called Aphlebia leaves of ferns.
(5) Anatomical Evidence.
The value of evidence afforded by anatomical features. Risks of
comparison between structural character of extinct and recent plants.
Structure considered from the point of view of evolution, as the
result of adaptation to external conditions, and to mechanical and
physiological requirements.
(a) Spores and leaves. — Abundance of spores provided with
filamentous or hooked appendages ; adaptation of spores to floating
or to wind-dispersal. ‘The leaf structure of Calamites, ferns, ete. ;
presence of stomata, palissade tissue, and water-glands; the
‘parichnos’ or aérating tissue in the leaves of Lepidodendree and
Sigillarieze.
(B) Stems and roots.—Absence of annual rings of growth. The
large size of water-conducting elements connected with rapid transport
(e.g. Sphenophyllum) or with storage of water (e.g. Megaloxylon).
The chambered pith of Cordaites, quoted as evidence of rapid
elongation, of little or no physiological significance. Abundance-
Notices of Memoirs— Vegetation of the Coal Period. 33
of secretory tissue. Anatomical characteristics of a Lepidodendroid
type of stem; great development of secondary tissue in the outer
cortex, little or no true cork, lax inner cortex. Lacunar tissue in
the roots of Calamites; hollow appendages of Stigmaria. Indications
of xerophytic characters may be the result of growth in salt marshes.
(4) Evidence as to the Manner of Formation of Coal.
(a) The structure of calcareous nodules found in coal-seams ; the
preservation of delicate tissues, the occurrence of fungal hyphz, and
the petrification of Stigmarian appendages as evidence in favour
of the subaqueous accumulation of the plant-débris found in the
calcareous nodules.
(b) Ordinary coal microscopically examined. Spores, fragments
of tissues, bacteria, and the ground substance of coal. Coal found in
the cavities of cells in carbonized tissues. Suggested non-vegetable
origin of the matrix of coal. ‘Boulders’ and coal-balls included in
coal-seams.
(c) Boghead, Cannel coal, and Oil-shales. Recent investigations
of Bertrand, Renault, and others. The structure and mode of origin
of torbanite, kerosene, shale, etc. Suggested origin of Boghead
from the minute bodies of alge (fleurs d’eau), spores, etc., embedded
in a brown ulmic substance found on the floor of a lake. Absence
of clastic material. Cannel coal characterized by abundance of
spores.
(d) Paper-coal of Russia.—The paper-coal of Culm age in the
Moscow basin consists largely of the cuticles of a Lepidodendroid
plant. Bacterial action as an agent in the destruction of plants and
as a factor in the production of coal.
4, By J. E. Marr, F.R.S.
(1) What is coal 2—A non-scientific term introduced into scientific
nomenclature for substances of divers character, and, therefore,
probably of different modes of origin.
(2) Was the Carboniferous period one where conditions suitable to
formation of coal were unusually widespread ?
Coincidence at this period of dominant giant cryptogams, extensive
plains of sedimentation, and suitable climatic conditions. Such
coincidence never occurred before or after the Carboniferous period.
(3) What work should be done in order to advance our knowledge
‘of origin of coal ?
In the past light has been thrown on coal-formation by chemical,
petrological, paleontological, and stratigraphical studies, and these
should be continued.
(a) Chemical.—Importance of study of chemical composition of
fire-clays and other accompaniments of coal in addition to coal itself.
(b) Petrological.— Dr. Sorby’s work on origin of grains of
mechanically formed rocks (sandstones, etc.) should be continued.
(c) Palgontological.—Studies of faunas and floras throwing light
on physical and also on climatic conditions.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. I. 3
2) Notices of Memoirs—On Strire-Maps.
(d) Stratigraphical_—Much detailed work is required in many
parts of the world to discover over what periods coal-formation
occurred in exceptional amount. Tendency at outset to refer all
Upper Palzeozoic coal-formations to the Coal-measures.
III.—On tHe Construction anp Uses of Srrixe-Maps.’ By
J. Lomas, A.R.C.S., F.G.S.
N studying the deformations which a series of rocks have undergone,
we are apt to regard the vertical movements as all-important,
and neglect the horizontal movements to which they have been
subjected. This is largely owing to the difficulties experienced
in picturing such horizontal movements and representing them
on a plan. Lines dependent on surface inequalities confuse the
worker when he seeks to use the ordinary geological maps for this
purpose. It is easy to get rid of these lines by projecting the
strikes of the beds on to a horizontal plane. We then have the
appearance that would be produced if the country were planed down
to a horizontal surface. The outcrops would coincide with the
strikes, and any deviation from straight lines would indicate
horizontal movements. Vertical movements would also be shown
on such a plan by the closing up of outcrops of beds of equal
thickness. All the data necessary to represent these features
on a strike-map are given in the ordinary Geological Survey
sheets. To construct such a map, first trace the dips given
on the geological map and draw short lines at the points of the
arrows, at right angles to the direction of dip. We thus have
represented the strikes of the beds at a number of points. Now
it is necessary to connect these up by lines to show the strike at
intermediate places. It would not be safe to connect one line with
another, as the strikes may refer to different beds. In order to
overcome this difficulty, draw a series of lines parallel to the strike
line on both sides of it. On doing this for all the positions it will
be found that the lines either connect themselves in linear series,
or we have represented a series of tangents to curves which become
evident when the lines are prolonged in the direction of the strike.
Care should be taken not to connect in the same line strikes with
dips in contrary directions, and it is well to represent the dip side of
the strike lines by a short mark ——7——. When the amount of
dip is known, as well as the direction, we can represent the
steepness of the folds by suitable shading, either by hachures or
closeness of strike lines. As an illustration I exhibit strike maps
of the district about Clitheroe, including the well-known knolls
at Worsa and Gerna. The anticlinal ridge just north of Chatburn
is clearly shown, and the strata dipping with wavy folds towards
the Ribble on the north and Clitheroe on the south. The Salt Hill
quarries are excavated in this southern slope at a place where the
fold becomes acute. The knolls at Worsa and Gerna appear like
whirls or eddies, such as may be seen in a stream when the flow is
obstructed by boulders in the stream bed.
1 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Bradford, Sept., 1900.
Notices of Memoirs—G. Abbott—Magnesian Concretions. 85
JV.—Tue Conoretionary Types In THE CELLULAR MAGNESIAN
Limestone oF Duruam.' By G. Assorr, M.R.C.S.
4 SSOCIATED with the Cannon-ball bed near Sunderland is
t\ acellular limestone which is much more extensive, and exhibits
still more remarkable physical features. Although described by
Professor Sedgwick more than sixty years ago with other magnesian
beds in the North of England, it is still comparatively unknown. He
divided the concretions in these strata into four classes, but I have
been unable to find any classified collection except the one in the
Newcastle Museum, and even in this series it is only partially done.
My own studies at Fulweli and Hendon lead me to suggest a new
classification, with five primary forms, viz.: (1) rods, (2) bands,
(5) rings, (4) balls and modified spheres, (5) eggs. Combinations of
these forms constitute the major part of these massive beds, and
frequently a bed of less than a foot thick shows examples of several
different combinations. These I place in ten classes, though they may
have to be added to. The chief types are (1) tubes, (2) ‘ cauliflowers,’
(5) basaltiform, (4) irregular, (5 and 6) troughs and bands (two
kinds), (7) ‘floral,’ (8 and 9) ‘honeycomb’ or coralloid (two kinds),
(10) pseudo-organic.
I exhibit photographs on the screen showing both the primary
forms and the combinations as seen (wherever possible) in the
undisturbed rock sections.
My own conclusions are as follows :—
1. That the rod structure is secondary to the formation of the
conspicuous bands which run across the beds at various angles.
(These bands need to be distinguished from the bands mentioned
among the ‘primary forms.’) The conspicuous bands act as planes
of origin for the ‘rods,’ and do not cross through the long axes of
the rods themselves. They appear never to cross the bedding
planes, though occasionally they follow them and also the outline
of the joints. The question therefore arises, whether this does not
give us a clue to the age and sequence of the changes which have
occurred in these beds, and whether the previous existence of joints
does not mean that the beds were already above the sea-level when
the changes commenced.
2. The rods invariably start from the last-mentioned bands, and
may be seen at every possible angle. As they have grown upwards
and obliquely as well as downwards the term ‘stalactitic’ is a very
misleading one to use. As Mr. Garwood stated long ago, these beds
‘present many points which appear irreconcilable with the theory of
their stalactitic origin.”
3. The first step in the series of changes which have taken
place was probably an orderly but unsymmetrical arrangement of
amorphous molecules of calcium carbonate which separated them-
Selves from those of the carbonate of magnesia.
4. The internal architecture is due to such arrangement of
amorphous particles of lime which has since been coated with an
1 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Bradford, Sept., 1900.
36 ~=Notices of Memoirs—A. C. Seward’s Jurassic Flora.
outer crystalline layer. In some cases, however, the entire mass-
has undergone a complete subsequent change into a crystalline
structure.
5. Pearl-spar (crystals of the combined carbonates) is seldom met
with. I failed to find any.
6. In the Fulwell beds there are very few fossils, and where met
with, as at Marsden, concretionary action is seldom traceable near them.
7. The specimens at Fulwell which arouse the most interest
are coralloid masses (‘honeycomb’ of the quarrymen). They are-
confined, so far as I could discover, to a stratum, about 14 foot thick,
above the marl bed, and lie in close juxtaposition to each other,
which accounts for their peculiar external shape.
In conclusion I would point out the close resemblance which exists:
between the ‘lines’ and ‘planes’ in these concretionary beds, and
the ‘lines’ which shoot across congealing water. In some respects
the architecture of the magnesian beds compares with the ice
decorations seen on our window-panes in frosty weather.
V.—Txe Jurassic Frora OF Eas Youxsman By, pane
SewarD, F.R.S.
HE plant-beds exposed in the cliff sections of the Yorkshire
coast have afforded unusually rich data towards a restoration
of the characteristics and composition of a certain facies of Mesozoic
vegetation. Rich collections of plants from Gristhorpe Bay and
other well-known localities are found in the British Museum (Natural
History), also in the Museums of Scarborough, Whitby, Cambridge,
Oxford, Manchester, York, Newcastle, Leeds, and elsewhere. The
Natural History Museum, Paris, contains several important York-
shire plants, some of which have been described by Brongniart and
Saporta. The following species have been recognized from the Hast
Yorkshire area :—
Marchantites erectus (Leck., ex Bean MS.); Zquisetites columnaris,.
Brongn. ; Hquisetites Beant (Bunb.); Lycopodites falcatus, L. & H. ;
Cladophlebis denticulata (Brongn.); C. haiburnensis (L. & H.); C. lobi-
folia (Phill.); Coniopteris arguta (L. & H.); C. hymenophylloides
(Brongn.); C. quinqueloba (Phill.) ; Dictyophyllum rugosum, L. & H. ;
Klukia exilis (Phill.) ; Laccopteris polypodioides (Brongn.); L. Wood-
wardi (Leck.) ; Matonidium Goepperti (Ett.) ; Pachypteris lanceolata,
Brongn. ; Ruffordia Goepperti (Dunk.); Sagenopteris Phillipsi
(Brongn.) ; Sphenopteris Murrayana (Brongn.); S. Williamsoni,
Brongn. ; Teniopteris major, L. & H.; Z. vittata, Brongn. ; Todites-
Williamsoni (Brongn.); Anomozamites ‘Nilssoni (Phill.) ; ” Araucarites
Phillipsi, Carr; Baiera gracilis, Bunb.; B. Lindleyana (Schimp. ) ;
B. Phillipsi, Nath. ; Beania gracilis, Carr ; Bruchyphyllum mammillare,
Brongn. ; Cheirolepis setosus (Phill.) ; Cryptomerites divaricatus,
Bunb. ; Ctenis falcata, L. & EL Cockanoushin Murrayana (L. & H.) ;.
Dioonites Nathorsti, sp. nov. Ginkgo gaia (Brongn.); G. whitbi-
ensis, Nath. ; Mageiopsis anne sp. nov. ; Nilssonia compta (Phill.) ;
1 Read before the British Association, Section C: es Bradford, Sept., 1900.
Reviews—The Bateman Collection in the Sheffield Museum. 37
N. mediana (Leck., ex Bean MS.); N. tenuinervis, Nath. ; Otozamites
acuminatus (L. & H.); O. Beani (L. & H.); O. Bunburyanus, Zign. ;
O. Feistmanteli, Zign.; O. graphicus (Leck., ex Bean MS.) ; O. obtusus
(L. & H.), var. ooliticus; O. parallelus (Phill.) ; Pagiophyllum William-
soni (Brongn.) ; Podozamites lanceolatus (L. & H.); Ptilozamites
(Leck., ex Bean MS.) ; Tawites zamioides (Leck.) ; Williamsonia
gigas (L. & H.); W. pecten (Phill.).
The English flora is compared by the author with Rhetic, Jurassic,
and Wealden floras of other regions; a comparison is made also
between the fossil flora and the vegetation of the present day.
VI—On rue Fish Fauna or THe YorksHtre Coarrenps.'’ By
Epe@ar D. Wexieurn, F.G.S.
( NLY the Lower and Middle Coal-measures are present. The
author described the Lower Measures, their extent and general
characters, with their beds of marine and fresh-water origin. The
Middle Measures and their general character: formed in a series of
fresh-water lake basins. ‘The author described the fish-remains,
where found and in what state of preservation. Hlasmobranchs,
Teleosteans (and in some cases Dipnoans), commingled, i.e. marine
and fresh-water types in the same beds; Hlasmobranchs found in
marine and fresh-water beds ; Dipnoi only found under fresh-water
conditions. Teleostean orders, Crossopterygii and Actinopterygil
found in both fresh-water and marine beds. The conditions under
which coal was deposited was shown to have a bearing on the
occurrence and habits of the fishes. The swim-bladder of Ccela-
canths, and its peculiar use to them under certain conditions. The
Elasmobranchii were represented by eleven genera and twenty-three
species ; Ichthyodorulites by seven genera and eight species; Dipnoi
by two genera and two species; and the Teleostomi by twelve
genera and thirty-three species. A tabular list of fish-remains was
given showing their stratigraphical distribution ; several new fish-
bearing coal shales were recorded, the distribution and vertical
range of the Yorkshire coal-fishes being thus greatly extended ;
several genera and species new to Yorkshire, and others new to
science, were referred to by the author.
a Se = ee eel =I a
X.—Cartatocue or THE BatEMAN COLLECTION oF ANTIQUITIES IN
THE SHEFFIELD Pusric Musrum. Prepared by E. Howarrua,
F.R.A.S., F.Z.S., Curator of the Public Museum and Mappin Art
Gallery. Svo; pp. xxiv and 254, with 262 illustrations in the
text. Published by order of the Committee. (London: Dulau
& Co., 1899. Price 3s. 6d.)
(}\HE very valuable and interesting collection which forms the
subject of this excellent Catalogue is not only entirely British,
but is confined to Derbyshire, Staffordshire, and Yorkshire, and is
the work of three generations of Batemans of Middleton Hall,
1 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Bradford, Sept., 1900.
388 Reviews—The Bateman Collection in the Sheffield Museum.
Derbyshire, from 1759 to 1847, assisted by Mr. Samuel Carrington
in Staffordshire, Mr. James Ruddock in the North Riding of York-
shire, Mr. Stephen Glover in Derbyshire, and Mr. Samuel Mitchell
of Sheffield, an antiquary of wide erudition.
Following the Collection, the Catalogue is arranged as under, viz. :
Critic Periop: Stone and bronze weapons and utensils, Nos. 1-526,
pp. 1-89 ; urns and other pottery, Nos. 757-896, pp. 91-156 ;
miscellaneous objects, crania, querns, Nos. 897-985, pp. 157—
174; tools, personal ornaments, Nos. 527-598, pp. 175-190.
Romano-Britisu Prriop: Nos. 599-687 and 986-1117, pp. 191-218.
Aneto-Saxon Prrtop: Nos. 688-756, pp. 219-281.
Miscettangous Oxsxects; Nos. 1118-1288, pp. 282-254.
In his excellent Introduction Mr. Howarth observes that: ‘‘ Records
of the dead are almost the only means whereby any reliable account
can be constructed of the life and customs of the earliest inhabitants
of Britain, with whom writing was unknown; pictorial art, if not
quite beyond their skill, was of the simplest kind, and their
dwellings were of such a temporary and unsubstantial character that
all traces of them vanished before the historical period. The care
of the dead forms their most lasting memorials, and it is these
sepultural mounds that furnish the principal information respecting
the early Britons. Derbyshire has contained many conspicuous.
examples of ancient barrows, tumuli, or grave-mounds, and,
fortunately, amongst the Bateman family there were men of leisure,
means, and knowledge, with the taste for exploring these sepulchral
storehouses and carefully preserving them ; and it was chiefly owing
to the labours of Mr. Thomas Bateman that the collection which
bore his family name was formed.” (p/p. v.
“Under the Celtic Period are grouped all those objects found in
the burial-places, or in any way associated with the ancient Britons,
whether belonging to the round-headed or long-headed races, two.
distinct types which may have sprung from two different groups
afterwards associated together. Authorities agree in regarding the
earliest race inhabiting these islands as Celts, and as the exact
indications of time are few there is the freer scope for the imagina-
tion. Let us take it, then, that 1600 years before Christ, Britain
was inhabited by a Celtic race of long-headed men of low mental
development and small stature. The Phcenicians traded with Britain
for tin, lead, and skins, 600 years before Christ ; and about 500 B.c.
Hecatus, a Greek writer, describes Britain as an island opposite the
coast of Gaul about as large as Sicily.
“In or about the year 350 B.c. the Belge, a tribe descended from
the Scythians, invaded the island. They were men of larger stature
than the Celts, their heads were round rather than long, and they
were inured to the dangers and hardships of war. The Belge
conquered and occupied the southern and south-western counties,
driving the Celts to the north and north-west. When the Romans
invaded the island, first in 55 B.c. under Julius Cesar, and about
a century later in the reign of Claudius, the Belgz were the tribes
Reviews—The Bateman Collection in the Sheffield Museum. 39
first encountered. The skulls found in the barrows mainly belong
to the round-headed type, some of them being mesaticephalous,
representing the characters of the two types.” (p. vi.)
It is interesting to notice the “very great care and trouble
expended over the construction of many of the grave-mounds,
probably those in which were deposited chiefs of tribes or important
individuals of the community, for it is impossible that these huge
mounds, which sometimes contain only a single interment, and
never very many, could have been constructed for all the people
who died. It is these barrows or tumuli which furnish the evidence
of the customs, habits, and rites of these ancient people.
“The chief characteristic of a Celtic place of burial is a large
mound, sometimes circular, in other cases oval, and more rarely
long-shaped, the latter being regarded as the most ancient. These
mounds differ considerably in dimensions, from 20 to 200 feet in
diameter and from 1 to 24 feet in height. They were usually
placed in a conspicuous position on or near the summit of some
natural elevation of the land. The mounds of earth and stone are
called barrows, and are formed of materials from the immediate
neighbourhood of the situation in which they were placed. In
some cases a mound of stones or a cairn was erected over the
dead.” (p. vii.)
Burial by Cremation.—‘ Where the bodies were cremated the
ashes were afterwards carefully collected together, tied up in some
fabric, and placed on the ground; or they were covered by or put
into an urn, and frequently placed in a cist or in a cavity hewn in
the rock.”
Ordinary Interment.—“ Inhumation was the more common mode
of burial, the body probably being wrapped in some skin or garment,
for although these have long since perished, pins, buttons, and other
articles found in barrows indicate that they were used as fastenings
for sepulchral clothing of some kind. Some barrows contain burnt
and unburnt bones, one body having been interred in the position in
which it died, while the others were burnt; and it may be inferred
from these occurrences that the sacrifice of human life at the death
of a chief was practised amongst the ancient Britons, as is the custom
in recent times with many uncivilized races. The wife, children, or
slaves may thus have been immolated to keep the head of the family
company in a future world.” (p. viii.)
Objects found in Celtic Tumuli and Barrows.—“ The contents of the
graves lead strongly to the supposition that belief in a future state
was held by these primitive people, provision evidently being made
for them to carry on their work and amusements. Besides the
cinerary urns, which were obviously intended to contain the cremated
bones, other vessels of three distinct types have been found with
interments, both of burnt and unburnt bodies. These are generally
known as food-vessels, drinking-cups, and incense-cups, though it
must not be inferred that they were strictly used for the purposes
implied in those names.” (p. viii.)
“Implements and weapons, both in stone and bronze, are
40 Reviews—The Bateman Collection in the Sheffield Museum.
frequently found in barrows, as also personal ornaments in the
shape of necklaces, glass beads, buttons, bronze and bone pins.
Numerous examples of these finds are recorded, amongst them being
some pieces of red ochre, the rouge of that period, used for decorating
the body. Although the use of iron was then unknown, pieces of
rubbed and polished iron-ore have been found in barrows, as if they
had some special significance as charms.
“Stone and bronze weapons are sometimes found in the same
grave, the two materials evidently being used at the same period,
probably this marking the time when bronze first came into use
and before it had been generally adopted. A leaf-shaped dagger is
the principal bronze weapon found in a grave, bronze implements
being much less numerous than those of stone. The pins in bronze
and bone and the buttons in Kimmeridge Coal show that some
form of dress was worn which these were intended to fasten.” (p. ix.)
Mr. Howarth draws the following conclusions :—‘“ It would appear
from the teachings of the tombs of the ancient Britons that they
were in a semi-savage state, without any fixed religion, with the
sagacity to make tools, vessels, weapons, and implements for daily
use. That the use of stone only gradually gave place to the use of
bronze from an acquired knowledge of the properties of the ores
of copper, tin, zinc, and lead. While no special differentiation
of purpose is shown in their manufactures, yet they indicated
a separation of certain objects for distinct uses. Clothing was worn
amongst them, consisting of skins and probably manufactured stuffs,
such as jute and flax. They cultivated the soil to a certain extent,
and had domestic animals for labour and sustenance. While
believing in a future state, their ideas of religion were of a very
vague character, and they still practised certain barbarous rites
which belong only to savages. The period which is covered by the
history of Celtic barrows probably extends over many hundreds of
years, and they show the advance the people had made during that
time, ranging through the later or neolithic stone-period to the
opening of the age of bronze, the people of the Paleolithic period
being much more ancient than the architects of these barrows, and
of a much more primitive type.” (p. xviii.)
Space does not permit us to give a fuller notice of this very
excellent and well-illustrated Catalogue and Guide to one of the
most valuable collections of its kind to be seen in any museum in
this country. We venture to suggest to the author that the very
beautiful necklaces, said to be of ‘Kimmeridge Coal,’ figured on
p- 09 (J. 98, 431, G. 79), p. 61 (J. 98, 484, G. 113), and p. 63
(G. 158), were really originally made of jet from Whitby, which,
owing to damp, ete., have lost their pristine lustre and become decom-
posed by age and long interment in the earth, until they resemble
Kimmeridge Coal or ‘Brown-coal’ in aspect. We compliment
Mr. Howarth upon the production of this excellent Catalogue of the
Bateman Collection, and the Committee of the Sheffield Museum in
authorizing the publication with such ample illustrations. The
Collection itself is well worthy of a pilgrimage to Sheffield, nor is it
the only one to be seen in this admirable Museum.
Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 41
Xl.—Tuae Gerotocy or THE CouNTRY BETWEEN ATHERSTONE AND
Cuarnwoop Forest. By C. Fox-Srraneways, F.G.S. With
Norrs on CuHarnwoop Forest by Professor W. W. Warts,
M.A., F.G.S. 8vo; pp. 102. (London: printed for H.M.
Stationery Office, 1900. Price 2s.)
{FVHIS Memoir, which has been written in explanation of the New
Series map, Sheet 155, contains a good deal of detailed
information of practical value respecting the northern part of the
Warwickshire Coalfield and the southern part of the Leicestershire
Coalfield. A number of records of borings and sinkings are given.
Professor Watts contributes a summary of the interesting observations
which he made while mapping in detail the old rocks of Charnwood
Forest. These he groups in the ‘Charnian System,’ whose position
in the great Pre-Cambrian sequence cannot at present be determined.
Among the other rocks dealt with by Mr. Strangways are the
Stockingford Shales (Cambrian), the Permian and Trias, the Glacial,
and more recent deposits. With the aid of Mr. Whitaker he con-
tributes a useful geological bibliography of Leicestershire.
Ea On ws Ai» ROC Hha DENG sS-
GroLocicaL Society or Lonpon.
I.—November 7, 1900.—J. J. H. Teall, Esq., M.A., F.R.S., President,
in the Chair. The following communications were read :—
1. “Additional Notes on the Drifts of the Baltic Coast of
Germany.” By Professor T. G. Bonney, D.Se., LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S.,
and the Rev. E. Hill, M.A., F.G.S8.
The authors, prior to revisiting Riigen, examined sections of the
Drift to the west of Warnemiinde, with a view of comparing it with
that of the Cromer coast. Where the cliffs reach their greatest
elevation, two or three miles from that town, they are composed of
a stony clay, which occasionally becomes sandy. At intervals,
however, sand interbanded with clay occurs, filling what appear to
be small valleys in the Drift. A layer of grit and stones, occasionally
associated with a boulder, occurs once or twice between these sands
and clays. The valleys are excavated in the great mass of stony
clay which extends for four or five miles to the west of Warnemiinde;
and the synclinal slope of the layers and the contortion of the under-
lying bedded sands indicate that the mass filling them has been let
~ down as a whole, either by solution of the Chalk beneath the Drift
or by the melting of underlying ice. Of these two hypotheses the
authors view the latter with the more favour, but it also has its
difficulties.
In Riigen, Arkona was visited; here Chalk occurs, apparently as
a sort of island in the Drift. At the well-known locality by the
lighthouse it seems to overlie a drift, but on closer examination the
latter appears more probably to have filled a cavity excavated in the
Chalk, this apparent inlier of Drift probably being only a remnant
of a much larger mass; therefore it is likely that this part of the
42 Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London.
coast nearly corresponds with a pre-Glacial chalk-cliff against which
the Drift was deposited.
In the Jasmund district the authors lay special emphasis on three-
points:— (1) The ‘inliers’ of Drift appear to occupy valleys
excavated in the Chalk; (2) these valleys can be traced for some:
distance inland; (8) the steep walls of Chalk towards which the
Drift dips sharply, and against which it ends abruptly (usually on
the southern side), often trend gradually inland, as if the present
coastline had passed obliquely across an old valley. In one or
two instances the Drift is slightly twisted up against this steep
face of Chalk. The authors call attention to cases where the Drift
clearly rests against old surfaces and cliffs of Chalk; and to one in
particular, which was not visible in 1898, where (a) clay, (b) sand,
and (c) clay occupy a shallow valiey, and have assumed a synclinal
form. The authors give reasons to show that neither solution of
the Chalk, nor ice-thrust, nor folding, nor even faulting, can
satisfactorily explain the peculiar relations of the Drift and Chalk
in Riigen; and they can find no better explanation than that offered:
in their previous paper.
2. “On certain Altered Rocks from near Bastogne and their
Relations to others in the District.” By Catherine A. Raisin, D.Sc.
(Communicated by Professor T. G. Bonney, D.Sc., LL.D., F.R.S.,
F.G.8.)
Professor Renard, from the petrographical study of specimens,
and Professor Gosselet, after description of the district and its
stratigraphy, have attributed the changes in these rocks to:
mechanical disturbances. Dumont had previously described many
examples and inclined to the view of contact-alteration, which was-
favoured by Von Lasaulx’s discovery of a granite in the Hohe Venn
and M. Dupont’s identification of chiastolite from Libramont.
The present paper treats especially of the garnetiferous and
hornblendic rocks, giving the full petrographical and field details.
of a few examples. It points out that the effects of pressure are
evident over the whole district, while mineral modifications.
resembling the results of slight contact-action are found in certain
areas. In a few cases these modifications are more marked, and
sometimes increase as we approach veins composed of quartz,
felspar, and mica, such as might be connected with a concealed
granite.
The peculiar garnetiferous and hornblendic rocks, although
occurring within the zone of alteration, are extremely limited,
often forming patches or bands a few feet across. They differ, as.
described in the paper, from ordinary contact-altered rocks. The-
evidence, in the authoress’s opinion, is in favour of Prof. Bonney’s.
suggestion that they are due to some form of hot-spring action.
1L.—Nov. 21, 1900.—J. J. H. Teall, Esq., M.A., F.R.S., President,
in the Chair. The following communications were read :—
1. “A Monchiquite from Mount Girnar, Junagarh (Kathiawar).”
By John William Evans, D.Sc., LL.B., F.G.S.
Reports and Proceedings— Geological Society of London. 43.
After a brief account of the rocks of the monchiquite type, in
which ferromagnesian silicates are embedded in an isotropic matrix
with the chemical constitution of analcime, the author describes an.
example from Mount Girnar, where it is associated with a nepheline-
syenite intrusive in a mica-augite-diorite.
The most striking feature of this rock is the occurrence of
colourless spheres of various sizes up to about 1mm. in diameter.
The rest of the rock is mainly composed of a hornblende of the
barkevikite type; a pale-green augite is also present. Both the
spherical spaces and the interstices between the ferromagnesian
silicates are usually filled with an isotropic material which has the
composition and most of the physical properties of analcime. This
material does not, however, show the anomalous double-refraction
which is characteristic of that mineral, nor has it any crystalline
outlines, being simply an allotriomorphie glass-like groundmass. It
contains a large number of acicular inclusions, most of which do not
affect polarized light; they exhibit a parallel arrangement in one or
more directions, and appear to indicate a high degree of symmetry.
Cleavage -cracks with similar orientation may be occasionally
observed. As it is clearly a crystalline body, its isotropic nature
refers it to the cubic system, and its identity with analcime may
be considered proved. It is evident that this mineral, growing
outward from different centres, has formed the spherical spaces by
pushing aside the previously crystallized minerals until they came
into contact one with the other, and has afterwards crystallized in
the interstices between them.
The presence of a groundmass of analcime (or one having the
same composition) in all the members of the widely distributed
monchiquite group of rocks implies the occurrence in different
localities of a residuary magma of uniform composition, which
remains liquid after the other constituents of the rock have
crystallized out. Analcime must, therefore, represent an eutectic
compound. If the cooling were sufficiently rapid the magma
would consolidate as a glass, as may be the case with some
monchiquites. On the other hand, where such a magma has
separated and cooled slowly enough, a nepheline-syenite will be
formed.
At some points the analcime in the spheres and in the interstices.
has become decomposed into alkali-felspars and nepheline, as in the
pseudo-leucites of Dr. Hussak, so that in these places the rock
might be described as a hornblende-tinguaite. In other parts much
of the analcime has passed into cancrinite.
The presence of a mineral of the eudialyte-eucolite group is also
noticed.
2. “The Geology of Mynydd-y-Garn (Anglesey).” By Charles A.
Matley, Esq., B.Sc., F.G.S.
Mynydd-y-Garn, a hill of less than 600 feet elevation, stands
above the village of Llanfair-y’nghornwy in North-West Anglesey.
The mass of the hill is an inlier of sericitic and chloritic phyllites
(Garn Phyllites), surmounted by a massive conglomerate (Garn
44. Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London.
Conglomerate), and surrounded by black slates and shales of
apparently Upper Llandeilo age. The general dip of all the rocks
is northerly and north- easterly.
The Garn Phyllites are usually green altered shales and fine
gritty rocks, and are intensely contorted near their southern
boundary. Even where not contorted they show under the micro-
‘scope evidence of powerful earth-movement. They are considered
by the author to be part of the ‘Green Series’ of Northern
Anglesey. They are cut off to the west and south by a curved
fault, probably a thrust, which brings them against Llandeilo slates
and breccias.
The Garn Conglomerate, Grit, and Breccia, a formation perhaps
400 feet thick, rests upon the Garn Phyllites and contains fragments
derived from them, as well as pebbles of quartz, grit, gneissose and
granitic rocks, etc. It passes up gradually into black slates, from
which a few Upper Llandeilo fossils have been collected. In the
black slates an oolitic ironstone or ferruginous mudstone has been
found, which may perhaps be on the same horizon as the similar
xock recorded by the author in Northern Anglesey.
On the eastern side of Mynydd-y-Garn is another group of rocks,
the Llanfair-y’nghornwy Beds, which the author correlates with
the basal part of his Llanbadrig Series. They consist of phyllites
resembling those below the Garn Conglomerate, but they contain
also beds and masses of quartzite, grit, and limestone. They are
much broken, and partly in the condition of crush-conglomerates.
They have been thrust over the Llandeilo black slates, and the
thrust-plane has been traced to the coast at Porth yr Ebol. This
thrust is continuous with that which forms the southern boundary of
the ‘Green Series’ of Northern Anglesey.
The district around Mynydd-y-Garn has been affected since
Llandeilo times by two powerful earth-movements, acting one from
the north, the other from the north-east. The first-mentioned
prevailed in the area west and north-west of the hill, where the
pre-Llandeilo rocks are frequently shattered to crush-conglomerates.
Around Mynydd-y-Garn itself and east of it the principal direction
of movement has been from the north-east; south of the hill the
structure is perhaps the result of the interference of these two
movements.
9
8. “On some Altered Tufaceous Rhyolitic Rocks from Dufton
Pike (Westmorland).” By Frank Rutley, Hsq., F.G.S. With
Analyses by Philip Holland, Esq., F.1.C., F.C.S.
The specimens described were collected by the late Prof. Green
and Mr. G. J. Goodchild from the Borrowdale volcanic series which
constitutes the central mass of Dufton Pike, and the chief interest
attaching to them is their alteration, probably as the result of
solfataric action. One of the rocks, which has the composition of
a soda-rhyolite, contains felspar, augite, magnetite, and possibly
‘spinel or garnet, scapolite, and ilmenite. The porphyritic crystals of
felspar are much corroded, and are sometimes mere spongy masses in
which mica and opal-silica have been developed, together with small
Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 45.
quantities of carbonates. In a second example, felspar fragments-
appear as a meshwork of rods which extinguish simultaneously,
and are embedded in an isotropic groundmass crowded with globu-
lites and little rods. A faint streakiness, which cannot be fluxion-
structure, passes through the matrix of the rock and the meshwork
of the felspar fragments without deflection. Analyses of the rocks.
and diagrams constructed from their molecular ratios correspond
closely with those of soda-rhyolite and potash-rhyolite respectively.
IlI.—Dee. 5, 1900.—J. J. H. Teall, Esq., M.A., F.R.S., President,
in the Chair. The following communications were read :—
1. “On the Corallian Rocks of St. Ives (Hunts) and Elsworth.”
By C. B. Wedd, Esq., B.A., F.G.S. (Communicated by permission
of the Director-General of the Geological Survey.)
Starting 24 miles south-west of Elsworth, the author traces the
Elsworth Rock at intervals through Croxton, Yelling, Papworth
Everard, etc., to Eisworth, and thence towards Fen Drayton and
near Swavesey. The Oxford Clay is found to the west of it, and the
Ampthill Clay to the east. Frequent fossil lists are given, and
the character of the rock is described at the different exposures.
Again, from Haughton Hall, west of St. Ives, the ‘St. Ives Rock’
is traced through that town and towards Holywell. The actual
connection with the Elsworth Rock cannot be seen owing to an area
of fen. But that the two rocks are identical the author considers
is proved by the consistency of the two rocks, the absence of any
other rock-bed, the dip of the strata, and the presence of Ampthill
Clay above. The Corallian strata of the area appear to have been
deposited more slowly than the Oxfordian strata. Of the two
zonal ammonites of the Corallian, the dominant form in the Elsworth
Rock and in the stone-bands of the Ampthill Clay is of the plicatilis
and not the perarmatus type.
2. “The Unconformity of the Upper (red) Coal-measures to the
Middle (grey) Coal-measures of the Shropshire Coalfields, and its
bearing upon the Extension of the latter under the Triassic Rocks.”
By William James Clarke, Esq. (Communicated by W. Shone,
Esq., F.G.8.)
The Upper Red Measures have a much greater extension in the
Shropshire Coalfields than the productive measures below. In the
Shrewsbury field they are the only Carboniferous rocks present, and
rest on pre-Carboniferous rocks.
When the sections of collieries at and near Madeley are plotted
on the assumption that the base of the Upper Carboniferous rocks
is horizontal, the Lower Measures are found to be bent into a
syncline rising sharply to the north-north-west and more gently to
the south-south-east. A second syncline, broader and deeper,
extends from Stirchly towards Hadley, but the westerly rise is often
hidden by the boundary-fault of the coalfield. This phenomenon is
known locally as the ‘Symon Fault’; and instead of taking Scott’s
view that it represents a hollow denuded in the Lower Coal-measures,
the author considers it due to folding before late Carboniferous times.
46 Obituary—Mr. C. J. A. Meger.
A third little syncline occurs at the Inett and Caughley. Similar
‘phenomena are exhibited in the Forest of Wyre Coalfield, where
a series of unproductive measures come in between the Lower and
Upper Coal-measures. The axis of the folds runs east-north-east-
ward, and their amplitude and length diminish in proceeding from
north-west to south-east. Inter-Carboniferous folds also occur in
“the North Wales and North Staffordshire fields.
3. “Bajocian and Contiguous Deposits in the Northern Cottes-
-wolds: the Main Hill Mass.” By S. S. Buckman, Hsq., F.G.S.
After giving comparative sections at Cleeve, Leckhampton Hill,
and Birdlip, to show the disappearance of three horizons at the
second locality and five more at wag third, the author interprets the
absence of the beds as due to ‘ pene-contemporaneous erosion,’
brought about by the elevation of rocks, due to small earth-
movements along a main south-west to north-east axis and subsidiary
axes north-west to south-east. In the Northern Cotteswolds the
beds which come in at Cleeve disappear, while there is a development
-of the Harford Sands, the Tilestone, and the Snowshill Clay above
the Lower Trigonia-Grit. A series of detailed sections along the
main hill-mass is given. On tracing the rocks from west to east
across the Northern Cotteswolds, the whole of the Inferior Oolite
disappears, except quite the upper portion, which rests directly on
Upper Lias, and the Upper Lias itself undergoes denudation;
eastward the latter thickens again, and basal beds of Inferior Oolite
yeappear. ‘Thus the axis of an important anticline is along the
Vale of Moreton. The general result of the observations does not
‘confirm Professor Hull’s view that these members of the Jurassic
are thinning and disappearing eastward. The observed phenomena
were really brought about by contemporaneous erosions; whereof
‘the principal one occurred before the deposition of the Upper
Trigonta-Grit. A revised map of Bajocian denudation is given,
and it is shown that, owing to anticlinal axes along the Vales of
Bourton and Moreton, pene-contemporaneous erosion must have
had considerable influence in determining the position of these
valleys. Such erosion is likely to have taken place along similar
lines at different times, and therefore may be connected with folds
in Paleozoic rocks and may have a bearing on the thickness of
rocks overlying the Coal-measures. A table of the dates of the
-chief erosions in Jurassic times is appended to the paper.
OBITUARY.
CHARLES JOHN ADRIAN MEYER,
Born May 23, 1832. Diep Juny 16, 1900.
By the death of Mr. Charles Meyer we have lost a geologist who
‘has contributed largely to our knowledge of Cretaceous rocks and
fossils. He belonged to a family in whom a love of natural history
was inherent, and from the time of his leaving school until his
appointment to the Civil Service he greatly assisted in the pre-
.paration of a new edition of H. L. Meyer’s “ Illustrations of British
2 dm a
_Obituary—Mr. C. J. A. Meer. 47
Birds.” Always a careful and patient observer, he acquired a close
acquaintance with the habits and song-notes of British birds, and
never ceased to take an interest in them.
In July, 1857, he was appointed to a post in the Accountant
‘General’s Office of that time, in a division which was subsequently
transferred to the Chancery Courts under the title of the Supreme
Court Pay Office. At that time his family lived near Godalming,
and his attention was attracted to the fossils to be found in an old
quarry in the Lower Greensand near the house. These interested
him so much that he began to study them and the rocks containing
‘them, and this laid the foundation of that interest in geology which
bore good fruit in after years. From that time he always devoted
his short holidays to visiting places of geological interest, chiefly
along the south coast, and almost always where rocks of Cretaceous
age were to be seen.
He had a remarkably keen eye for fossils, and knew the value of
recording the exact bed from which they came; hence his notebooks
contain carefully measured sections, and his published papers show
that he had always the correlation of beds in different places before
his mind.
He gradually gathered together a fine collection of Cretaceous
fossils, comprising many thousand specimens, obtained entirely by
his own hands. It comprises fossils from the Lower Greensand,
Gault, ‘Upper Greensand,’ and Blackdown Beds, from the Devon-
shire Cenomanian, and from the several stages of the Chalk, and it
contains many unique specimens. This collection, by the generosity
of his sister, Miss OU. Meyer, has been presented to the University of
Cambridge, together with a smaller but fine collection of London
‘Clay fossils collected by his brother, Mr. Christian H. Meyer, C.E.,
during the dockyard extension works at Portsmouth.
The first paper published by Mr. C. J. A. Meyer was a note on
the age of the Blackdown Beds in 1863, and from that time to 1878
he contributed frequently to the pages of the GronoaicaL Magazine
and of the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society. A list of
his papers is given below, but two of the most notable may be
specially mentioned,
In his paper “On tie Relations of the Weaiden and Punfield
Formation” he took a view which was opposed to that held by
another well-known geologist, and maintained it with such success
that it is now generally accepted as correct.
His paper on the Cretaceous Rocks of Beer Head is really a very
condensed account of his exploration of the Devon cliffs from
Sidmouth to Lyme Regis. He visited this coast again and again,
-collecting carefully from every bed in the succession; and as he
was practically the first to explore this fine collecting ground, he
obtained a large number of excellent specimens, especially from
those beds which he numbered 10, 11, and 12, and which lie at the
base of the Chalk. He continued to collect from these cliffs for
many years after the publication of his paper, and the value of his
researches was acknowledged by Messrs. Jukes-Browne and W. Hill
48 Obituary—Mr. C. J. A. Meijer.
in their paper on the “ Delimitation of the Cenomanian” (1896),
when he communicated to them a list of the many additional fossils.
he had obtained from these beds, with notes on some of the species.
Specimens from his collection have been figured by Messrs.
Davidson, Lycett, and Woods in the volumes of the Palzonto-
graphical Society, and no doubt others will appear in the monograph:
Mr. Woods has undertaken.
Mr. Meyer was distinguished for his quiet and courteous manner,
his habit of patient enquiry and of accurate observation, and by his.
willingness to impart any information that he possessed. When we
remember that his life was really spent in the routine of office work,
and that all his scientific work was done in his evenings and in his.
short holidays, we may well wonder that he did so much, and
regret that he was not able to give more time to a pursuit for which
he was so well qualified.
We are indebted to Miss C. Meyer for some of the information
in the above notice.
LIST OF PAPERS.
Meyer, C. J. A.
Age of the Blackdown Greensand. (Geologist, vol. vi, 1863, pp. 50-86.)
Three Days at Farringdon. Position of Sponge-gravel. (Geologist, vol. vii, 1864,
pp- 5-11.)
A New Sots otf Zerebrateila, trom the Bargate Stone (Z. trzfida). (Geologist,
vol. vil, 1864, pp. 166-7.)
Notes on Brachiopoda from the Pebble-bed of the Lower Greensand of Surrey ; witlr
descriptions of the new species, and remarks on the correlation of the:
Greensand Beds of Kent, Surrey, and Berks, and of the Farringdon Sponge-
gravel, and the Tourtia of Belgium. (Gro. Mae., Vol. 1, 1864, pp. 249-257.)
On the Discovery of Ophiura Wetherelli at Herne Bay. (Gzox. J Mae., Vol. II,
1865, p. 572.)
Notes on the Correlation of the Cretaceous Rocks of the South-East and West of
England. (Grou. Mac., Vol. III, 1866, pp. 138-18, Pl. II.)
Notes on Cretaceous Brachiopoda, and on the Development of the Loop and Septum:
in Zerebratella. (Grou. Mac., Vol. V, 1868, pp. 268-272.)
On the Lower Greensand of Godalming. (Geol. Assoc.—separate paper, 20 pp.
Read before the Association 4th Dec., 1868.)
Note on the Passage of the Red Chalk of Speeton into an underlying Clay-bed..
(Gzou. Mage., Vol. VI, 1869, pp. 13-14.)
On Lower Tertiary Deposits recently exposed at Portsmouth. (Quart. Journ. Geol.
Soc., vol. xxvii, 1871, pp. 74-89; Phil. Mag., vol. xli, 1871, p. 546.)
On the Wealden as a Fluvio-lacustrine Formation, and on the Relation of the:
so-called ‘ Punfield Formation’ to the Wealden and Neocomian. (Quart.
Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxviii, 1872, pp. 243-255.)
Further Notes on the Punfield Section. (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxix, 1873,
. 10-76.
On the Cretaceous Rocks of Beer Head and the adjacent Cliff-sections, and on the
relative Horizons therein of the Warminster and Blackdown Fossiliferous.
Deposits. (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxx, 1874, pp. 369-893.)
Micrasters in the English Chalk.—Two or more species? (Grou. Mac., Dec. II,.
Vol. V, 1878, pp. 115-117.)
Notes respecting Chloritic Marl and Upper Greensand. (Grou. Mac., Dee. II,.
Vol. V, 1878, pp. 547-551.)
An Excursion to Guildiord. (Report in Proc. Geol. Assoc., vol. v, 1878, pp. 161, 163.)
Meyer, C. J. A., & Juxes-Browne, A. J.
Chloritic Marl and Warminster Greensand. (Gon. Mac., Dec. IV, Vol. I, 1894,.
_ pp. 494-499.)
pS I ST NL LT LAS
THE
GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE.
NEW -ceRlES. | DECADE LV. “VOU VII;
No. Il.—FEBRUARY, 1901.
HER MOST GRACIOUS MAJESTY
QUEEN VICTORIA
PASSED AWAY 22 JANUARY, 1901,
BELOVED AND MOURNED BY ALL HER PEOPLE, AFTER
A GLORIOUS REIGN OF 64 YEARS.
OEE HEINF ALA -ANEe ECS ee SS.
I.—Britiso Puetstocene Fisues.
By KE. T. Newron, F.R.S., F.G.S., ete.
[[\HE search for small vertebrates in deposits of Pleistocene age
has, within the last few years, been prosecuted with much zeal
by several workers, and has brought to light the remains of many
species of mammals, as well as birds, reptiles, and amphibia; the
bones in some instances occurring in great numbers. The remains of
fishes, however, have but rarely been found with the bones of other
vertebrata, and never in any abundance. Some interesting discoveries
of fish-remains have nevertheless been made; but the records of
them are scattered through various publications, and it seems very
desirable to bring all this information together.
It is sixty years since Sir C. Lyell,’ in a paper read before the
Geological Society (January, 1840), first made known that remains
of fresh-water fishes had been found, by himself and Mr. J. B.
Wigham, in the fresh-water deposit which occurs in the cliffs at
Mundesley, Norfolk. These remains had been examined by the
Rev. Leonard Jennings and Mr. Yarrel, and were referred by them
to Perch, Carp, Pike, and Trout.
In the following year (January, 1841) Sir C. Lyell * made
a further communication to the same society, in which he stated that
the fish-remains noted in the earlier paper, together with some
additional specimens from the same locality, had been submitted to
M. Agassiz, who thought the Perch, Pike, and Trout differed from
the living species, and that the remains referred to Carp were really
' Proc. Geol. Soc., vol. iii (1843), p. 171. Lond. & Edinb. Phil. Mag., May, 1840.
2 «On the Fresh-water Fossil Fishes of Mundesley as determined by M. Agassiz’? :
Proc. Geol. Soc., vol. iii (1843), p. 362. Ann. Mag, Nat. Hist., vol. vii (1842), p. 61.
DECADE I[V.—VOL. VIII.—NO. II.
50 E. T. Newton—British Pleistocene Fishes.
a species of Leuciscus. No statement was made as to the nature of
the remains which had been found, nor what became of the specimens.
M. Agassiz seems to have been impressed with the idea that
no fossil forms could be identical with living species, and this,
apparently, led him to attach greater importance to the slight
differences, which he saw between the Mundesley remains and the
corresponding parts of living fishes, than would be allowed by
naturalists of the present day. Certain fish-remains, more recently
obtained from these fresh-water deposits at Mundesley, which in
all probability represent the same forms as those found by Lyell,
cannot, I think, be separated from living species.
In the year 1854 Professor J. Morris’ recorded Esox sp., from
the Pleistocene of Copford, Essex : the specimens were jaws and
teeth in the collection of Mr. Brown, and they are now preserved in
the British Museum, South Kensington (Nos. 86,658-60). Other
remains of Pike from Copford were presented to the British
Museum by the Rev. O. Fisher (No. 4,848).
Twenty years elapsed before Mr. William Davies* recognized, in
1874, the remains of Pike in the collection of Sir Antonio Brady,
from the Brickearth of Ilford, specimens which are now in the
British Museum, South Kensington (No. 45,810). These remains
were doubtfully named Zsox lucius?, but were acknowledged to be
inseparable from that species, and in 1890 were so named, without
doubt, by Messrs. A. Smith Woodward and C. Davies Sherborn.*
During Mr. Clement Reid’s* Geological Survey of the ‘Country
around Cromer,” he obtained a number of specimens from the
classical Mundesley river bed, and among them remains of Pike,
Esox lucins (M.P.G.—C.R. 665-6). Since the Survey Memoir
was published, Mr. Reid has collected from the same place scales
and teeth referable to Perca fluviatilis (M.P.G.—C.R. 666) and
a tooth of the genus Zeuciscus (M.P.G.—C.R. 869). We are
thus able to confirm the occurrence of three of the forms recorded
by Sir C. Lyell; and there seems no sufficient grounds for referring
them to other than recent species. ‘T'wo or three different kinds of
scales remain at present unidentified, but none of them can be
definitely named Salmo, the fourth genus mentioned by Sir C. Lyell.
Mr. Reid’s researches in the neighbourhood of Holderness, York-
shire, enabled him to record Perca fluviatilis from both Hornsea
(M.P.G.—C.R. 1.119) and Withernsea (M.P.G.—C.R. 1,071).
In the year 1888 Mr. G. W. Lamplugh® gave an account of
a deposit at Sewerby, near Bridlington Quay, which yielded bones
of Klephas, Rhinoceros, Hippopotamus, etc., and is doubtless of
Pleistocene age. With these mammalian bones were also found
vertebra of fishes, which almost certainly belong to Codfish. This
record is the more interesting as it is the only known instance of
1 Catalogue of British Fossils, 2nd ed. (1854), p. 326.
? Cat. Pleistocene Vert. Coll. Sir Ant. Brady, 1874, p. 61.
3 Catalogue of British Fossil Vertebrata.
4 Mem. Geol. Surv., 1882, p. 126.
5 Mem. Geol. Surv., 1885, pp. 82 and 85.
© “An Ancient Sea Beach near Bridlington Quay’’: Brit. Assoc. Report for 1888.
E. T. Newton—British Pleistocene Fishes. ol
marine fish-remains being found in a British Pleistocene deposit.
The proximity of the sea would easily account for the presence of
these fish bones, as well as for the marine molluscs which were
found with them; but it also suggests the possibility of a more
recent introduction. Mr. Lamplugh’s careful work is, however,
a guarantee that the fish bones were cotemporary with those of the
Mammoth, and the condition of the specimens, which are now in
the Jermyn Street Museum, is precisely the same.
Two teeth, probably of Pike, found by Mr. B. B. Woodward in
the Crayford Brickearth in 1891, are now in the British Museum.
In the year 1894 Mr. F. C. J. Spurrell presented to the Museum
of Practical Geology a number of specimens from the Brickearth of
Erith, and among these were some teeth of Hsox luctus (No. 5,646).
Mr. Clement Reid’s most interesting work on the series of strata
found at Hoxne,' in Norfolk, not only brought to light a large
number of plants, but also of small bones of vertebrata, among which,
from Bed EH, were remains of Perca fluviatilis (M.P.G., 6,084) and
Leuciscus rutilus (M.P.G., 6,085). In the following year, 1897, the
results of Mr. Reid’s similar researches at Hitchin® were published,
and from beds on the same horizon as D and E at Hoxne he was
able to record Perca fluviatilis, Hsox lucius, Tinca vulgaris, Leuciscus
erythrophthalmus, and L. rutilus (M.P.G., 6,801).
For some time past Mr. M. A. C. Hinton and Mr. A. §.
Kennard have been searching the various Pleistocene beds at
Grays Thurrock, and have obtained a good number of bones and
teeth of small vertebrates, among which are many belonging to
fresh-water fishes. Some account of these was read before the
Essex Field Club* on October 27th, 1900. About a dozen otoliths,
which agree most nearly with those of the Ruff, are provisionally
referred to Acerina vulgaris ?; a number of teeth doubtless belong
to the Pike, Hsox lucius; several pharyngeal bones and numerous
isolated teeth are referred partly to Roach, Zeuciscus rutilus, and
partly to Dace, Z. vulgaris; one tooth has the characteristic curved
and crenulated crown of the Rudd, Z. erythrophthalmus; and there is
a single vertebra, having the peculiar tubular neural arch found in
the Eel, which is with much hesitation named Anguilla? vulgaris ?
There is a series of small vertebrata from Grays Thurrock in the
Brown Collection in the British Museum (No. 28,079), among which
are remains of fishes referable to Pike, Rudd, and probably Dace.
Many otoliths of fishes have been collected by Mr. Clement Reid
from Pleistocene beds on the foreshore at Selsea; they belong to
about sixteen different forms, but none of them have been definitely
recognized as of living species. It is almost certain that the greater
number of these otoliths have been derived from the denudation of
Kocene strata in the neighbourhood, and they cannot, therefore, be
included among the British Pleistocene fishes.
The discoveries of Pleistocene fish-remains on the Continent have
1 Brit. Assoc. Report for 1896.
2 Proc. Roy. Soc., vol. 1xi (1897), p. 45.
3 Essex Naturalist (in the press, not yet published).
52 Professor G. A. J. Cole—On Belinurus kiltorkensis.
been even fewer than in England. Dr. Alf. Nehring,’ in his “Ueber-
sicht tiber 24 mitteleuropiische Quartiir-Faunen,” mentions the
following :—From (1) ‘“‘ Westeregeln bei Magdeburg ” (p. 474), Hsox
luctus; (2) ‘‘Die Rauberhéhle am Schelmengraben zwischen Niirnberg
und Regensburg” (p. 488), Silurus glanis, Esox luctus, Cyprinus carpio ;
(3) “Der Hohlefels im Achthal bei Ulm” (p. 490), Cyprinus carpio
(or Perca fluviatilis) ; (4) ‘“‘ Die Fuchslocher am Rothen Berge bei
Saalfeld” (p. 495), Esoa lucius; (5) “ Die Hohle von Balve in West-
falen” (p. 504), Hsox lucius. The age of the specimens from the
first two localities is doubtful.
Dr. A. Smith Woodward has kindly called my attention to
Professor F. Bassani’s* record of Anguilla vulgaris, Cyprinus carpio,
and Leuciscus aula from beds at Pianico, Lombardy, which
Dr. Forsyth-Major assures me are of early Pleistocene age.
British Puieistrocene FIsHES AT PRESENT KNOWN,
With the Localities from which they were obtained and the Collections
in which they are preserved.
B.M. = British Museum. M.P.G. = Museum of Practical Geology.
H. & K. = Collection of Messrs. Hinton and Kennard.
Perca fiuviatilis, Linn. (Perch) : Mundesley, Hornsea, Withernsea,
Hitchin, Hoxne (M.P.G.).
Acerina vulgaris ?, Cuv. & Val. (Ruff) : Grays Thurrock (H. & K.).
Salmo sp. (? Trout): Mundesley (fide Lyell).
Esozx lucius, Linn. (Pike): Erith, Hitchin (M.P.G.) ; Copford, Ilford
(B.M.); Grays Thurrock (B.M. and H. & K.).
Leuciscus rutilus, Linn. (Roach): Mundesley ?, Hitchin, Hoxne
(M.P.G.) ; Grays Thurrock (H. & K.).
Leuciscus vulgaris, lem. (Dace) : Grays Thurrock (B.M. and H.&K.).
Leuciscus erythrophthalmus, Linn. (Rudd) : Hitchin (M.P.G.) ; Grays
Thurrock (B.M. and H. & K.).
Tinca vulgaris, Cuv. (Tench) : Hitchin (M.P.G.).
Anguilla ? vulgaris ?, Turton (Hel) : Grays Thurrock (H. & K.).
Gadus morhua ?, Linn. (Codfish) : Sewerby (M.P.G.).
IJ.—On Barinurus kitTorRKENsis, Baty.
By Professor Grenvinie A. J. Contz, M.R.I.A., F.G.S.
rE 1899 Messrs. Rupert Jones and Henry Woodward stated that
Belinurus “has not at present been found in rocks of earlier age
than the Coal-measures.” Belinurus grand@vus, described in the same
paper, was referred, with probability, to the Lower Carboniferous.
A writer (“ R. W. EH.) in the Ottawa Naturalist* for January,
1900, thereupon called attention to the record of Belinurus from the
Kiltorcan Beds of Ireland. This record is founded on Mr. W. H.
1 Zeitsch. d. Deutsch. geol. Gesell., 1880, p. 468, where reference will be found
to the original records.
* Atti Soc. Ital. Sci. Nat. vol. xxix (1886), p. 344.
3 “« Contributions to Fossil Crustacea’’: Gzou. Mac., 1899, p. 389.
* Quoted in Grou. Mac., 1900, p. 177.
Professor G. A. J. Cole—On Belinurus kiltorkensis. 58
‘ Baily’s discovery ' of “a well-marked head (or carapace), to which
is attached portions of two of the thoracic segments.” Dr. Henry
Woodward,’ in 1878, accepted this determination, on the basis of
sketches furnished to him by Mr. Baily, who had by this time
discovered a second, though distorted, specimen. The Kiltorcan
Beds, it may be remarked, are of Upper Old Red Sandstone age,
and are part of the ‘ Yellow Sandstone Series,’ which passes con-
formably up into the Lower Carboniferous Shale. They are not,
therefore, of such high antiquity as the writer in the Ottawa
Naturalist suggests.
Fic. 1.—Sketch of the less imperfect specimen of Belinurus kiltorkensis, Baily,
showing the principal features visible with a platyscopic lens. Natural size.
The carapace is viewed from the under side.
Fic. 2.—Sketch of the distorted specimen, viewed from the upper side with the aid
of a platyscopic lens. Natural size. The details of the central portion are
best seen in this example, though the whole is greatly broadened.
The question having thus been raised, I obtained the permission
of the Director-General of the Geological Survey to examine the
specimens preserved in the collections in the Dublin Museum.
Mr. Baily’s specimens have, at some later time, been relabelled
as ‘Limuloides’; but the carapace is certainly not of the hemiaspid
type. It presents the continuous unnotched margin shown in
Mr. Baily’s original drawing. The better specimen is, I feel
confident, presented to us from the under side, and shows more
detail than has hitherto been attributed to it. The flat border,
1mm. wide, is followed by a smoothly curving region, from which
the protuberances rise which correspond in part to the glabella in the
trilobites. The form of these is best seen from the annexed
sketches, which, like Mr. Baily’s, have been made from the original
specimens. The distorted example is seen both as an external cast
and in relief, and the four elevated portions stand out distinctly
on it. They seem to have been highest at their margins, a rim
thus occurring about a depressed area on each. This feature is also
_ seen in Mr. Griesbach’s drawings of the better known species of
Belinurus.?
The eyes indicated by Baily are based on a thickening that occurs
on the edge of the ‘ glabella,’ where it descends to meet the
smoother lateral area. The evidence is slight, but agrees with what
is already known of Belinurus.
There are indications of radial ribbings on either side of the
‘ «¢ On Fossils obtained at Kiltorkan Quarry, Co. Kilkenny’’?: Report Brit. Assoc.
for 1869, p. 78.
2 «* British Fossil Crustacea ’’ (Paleeontographical Society), p. 238.
3 «Brit. Foss. Crust.’? (Pal. Soe.), pl. xxx.
d4 Professor T. Rupert Jones—History of Sarsens.
‘olabella,’ like those that have been attributed to impressions of
the limuloid limbs.
The ‘pleure’ (if we may use the nomenclature adopted in the
case of trilobites, with which these forms provide so valuable a link)
are furrowed, while in Hemiaspis (Limuloides) they are unfurrowed.
Traces of three segments are preserved in the more perfect specimen.
Even the somewhat abrupt posterior bend, so characteristic of the
pleuree of #elinurus reging, is noticeable in the first segment of
Belinurus kiltorkensis, aud was doubtless repeated in the others.
Protolimulus (Prestwichia) eriensis, described from the Devonian
of Pennsylvania by H. S. Williams and A. 8. Packard,’ is only
known by its under surface; but the cephalic shield does not
resemble that of the Kiltorkan specimens.
I feel, then, that Belinurus may safely be regarded as occurring
in the Upper Old Red Sandstone of Ireland, which some authors have
proposed to inciude in the Lower Carboniferous Series. There seems
no reason to depart from the determination made by Mr. Baily and
Dr. Woodward thirty years ago, a determination that has become
widely known through the works of Zittel and other paleontologists.
II].—History oF THE SARSENS.
By Professor T. Rupzrr Jonzs, F.R.S., F.G.S., ete.
AppITI0NAL Notres.—These further references and fuller quotations
are here given with the view of making the History of the Sarsens,
or Sarsen Stones, more complete and more easily available,
especially by indicating the chronological succession of observed
facts and published opinions.
§ 1. Origin and Constitution of the Stones called ‘ Sarsens.’
§ 2. Fossils in Sarsens.
§ 3. Localities. I. In the Counties north of the Thames: (1) Northamptonshire,
(2) Suffolk, (3) Essex, (4) Hertfordshire, (5) Buckinghamshire, (6) Oxford-
shire, (7) Middlesex. Il. In the Counties south of the Thames: (8) Kent,
(9) Surrey, (10) Hampshire, (11) Berkshire, (12) Wiltshire, (13) Dorset,
(14) Somerset, (15) Devon.
§ 4. Bibliographic List.
§ 1. Onicin anp ConstituTIoN oF SARSENS.
(See also Part i in Wilts Mag., 1886, p. 126.)
1819. G. B. Greenough, in his “Critical Examination of the
First Principles of Geology,” p. 112, says that the Greyweather
Stones (‘ Greywether sandstone,’ etc., p. 293), scattered over the
southern counties of England, have been evidently derived from
the destruction of a rock which once lay over the Chalk.
1871. In the Transactions of the Newbury District Field Club,
vol. i, p. 99, Sarsens are referred to as “‘indurated blocks of sand-
stones and conglomerates.”
1882 and 1885. Sir Archibald Geikie, treating of siliceous
cements in sandstones, writes, ‘‘where the component particles are
1 Packard, ‘‘ Carboniferous Xiphosurous Fauna of North America’’: Mem. Nat.
Acad. Sci. Washington, vol. iii (1886), p. 150.
Professor T. Rupert Jones —History of Sarsens. ay)
bound together by a flinty substance, as in the exposed blocks of
Eocene sandstone known as ‘Grey-weathers’” in Wiltshire, and
which occurs also [Landenian, sandstone] over the north of France
towards the Ardennes” (‘“ T'extbook,” 2nd ed., 1885, p. 162).
In a letter, Sir Archibald has obligingly stated that the first and
best account on which the reference to the above was based is by
Dr. C. Barrois, Ann. Soc. Géol. du Nord, vol. vi (1878-9), p. 366.
See also his short paper in the Assoc. Frangaise, 1879, p. 666.
Gosselet quotes Barrois in his great work “ L’Ardenne,” 1888, p. 829.
Further references are also given by these two authors.
1885. The Rev. A. Irving, taking it for granted that a large river
in Eocene times flowed from a region of Paleozoic rocks in the west,
in the direction of the Thames Valley to the east, said that the detritus
would be quartzose and felspathic; the felspars would ultimately be
decomposed by the agency of carbonic acid, and gelatinous hydrated
silica would be produced. (Proc. Geol. Assoc., vol. viii, pp. 156, 157.)
1887. The Rev. A. Irving, in a letter dated March 6th, 1887,
writes :—‘* You have overlooked one point which I have tried to bring
out in some relief—the fact that the surface acquires a porcellanous
texture, not due to cementation by iron (for from the superficial
layer the iron is entirely leached out), but to an actual change of the
material by a solution-process. I suggested (three or four years
ago) CO, as the chief agent ; but later work has shown me that the
organic acids contained in peaty water have played a far more
potent part in this sub-metamorphic change.”
1888. In the Geronogican Macazine, Dec. III, Vol. V,
Dr. T. G. Bonney states that the Sarsens of the Tertiaries are of
concretionary origin: ‘ In the Sarsen Stones, and with matrix of
the Hertfordshire Puddingstones, there is chalcedonic silica converting
sandstone into quartzite” (pp. 298-500).
1888. J. Prestwich: ‘‘ Geology,” etc. vol. ix, p. 342. These
sands [cf the Woolwich and Reading Series] also occasionally
contain concreted blocks in irregular local beds of sandstone,
sometimes with very hard siliceous cement.” Footnote at p. 342:
“Mr, Whitaker and Prof. Rupert Jones think that in Berkshire and
Wiltshire they [the Sarsens] are more frequently derived from the
Bagshot Sands.” The ‘Puddingstone’ of Bucks and Herts is here
referred to the Reading Beds. Further on, at p. 364, it is stated
that Sarsens occur in the Bagshot Sands of Frimley and Chobham.
N.B. — Concretionary action has produced in many Sarsens
mammillations on a large scale, which show on some surfaces
irregular, coalescent, smooth swellings, with shallow, valley-like
slopes and depressions, like those on the so-called ‘ bowel-stones ’
of the Lower Greensand near Aylesbury. H. B. Woodward’s
“Geology of England and Wales,” 2nd ed. (1887), p. 877. Such
mammillated Sarsens occur in Suffolk, Wiltshire, and elsewhere.
N.B.—The convexity of the lower face of a Sarsen lying in its
original sand-bed is due to the concretionary formation of the stone.
1901. J. W. Judd’s “Note on the Structure of Sarsens”
(Guoxt. Mac., January, 1901, pp. 1, 2) gives definite descriptions
56 Professor T. Rupert Jones—History of Sarsens.
of the intimate constitution of many Sarsens from authenticated
localities.
N.B.—Besides the Tertiary sandstones, other and older white
sandstones have yielded large and small blocks, now on the surface
or in superficial deposits; for instance, Upper and Lower Greensand,
Liassic sands, Millstone Grit, etc.
§ 2. Fosstzs.
(Refer also to pp. 142-147 of Part i in Wilts Mag., 1886.)
1871. Professor John Phillips, in his “Geology of Oxford,” 1871,
p. 447, states :—‘‘I have never found shells in any of these stones
lying in their native beds, and have some scruple in mentioning that
they do occur in a layer in one of the blocks at Stonehenge. But,
as I did not choose by chiselling that monumental stone to attract
attention to it, probably it may for many years to come escape all
injury except that which it must suffer from the strokes of time.”
1878. In the churchyard of Sandhurst, a large Sarsen perforated
with pipe-like holes lies at the foot of the old yew-tree there.
(T. R. J., Trans. Newbury Distr. F. Club, vol. ii, p. 249.)
1887. C. ©. King suggested that in the Avebury district the
Sarsens were more particularly perforated by rootlets, and that, if so,
the shoals or sandbanks formerly bearing the trees were better
conditioned for the vegetation than other parts of the formation.
1888. J. Prestwich: “Geology,” etc. vol. ii, p. 344. The
indications in the Sarsens of the former presence of rootlets, possibly
of Palms, are here mentioned.
1888. ‘The same kind of fossil tubular marks in Sarsens may be
seen in some blocks on the side of the Newbury-Hermitage road, or
Long Lane, west of Coldash Common.
1897. Rootlet-holes, mostly vertical, occur in a Sarsen in a brick-
field near Watford, Herts.—C. D. Sherborn.
N.B.—The perforations due to rootlets have been widened on the
exposed surfaces of the stones by water-action and blown sand, so as
to leave the surface variously pit-marked.—T. R. J.
N.B.— Analogous pipe-like remains of rootlets occur as long,
amall, vertical holes, in the Hastings sand-rock, East Cliff, Hastings
(Geologist, vol. v, 1862, pp. 185, 136, fig. 9; and Grou. Mage.,
1875, p. 589) ; in the Triassic (?) Sandstone of South Sweden; and
in some of the estuarine, Jurassic shales of Yorkshire, near Whitby
(A. C. Seward) and near Scarborough.—T. R. J.
§ 3. Locaxrtiss.
I. (1) Northamptonshire.—1896. Mr. Edwin Sloper observed in
a pit at the Northampton Brickworks at Blisworth a Sarsen that
had evidently fallen from the base of the Drift overlying the Lias
clay there. This Sarsen was to be cared for by being placed in the
gardens of the Hotel at Blisworth. It consists of a white sandstone
with siliceous cement, and with filamentous cavities, which are
faintly stained with limonite.
(2) Suffolk.—1889. Sarsens are abundant in the neighbourhood
of Nayland, at corners of cross-roads and elsewhere. Fine-grained
Professor T. Rupert Jones—History of Sarsens. o7
ssaccharoidal, and stained. Many with large and small tubular holes,
some of which are split open and form furrows on the surfaces, often
due to old natural splitting.
1889. Hartest Green, Suffolk. A large brownish Sarsen (5 ft. 8 ins.
x 5 ft. Zins. x 3 ft. 6ins.), much rounded (almost like a boulder),
fine-grained and whitish inside, where wounded by blows of stones.
Much pitted naturally on the outside. Flattened at the top, and
worn smooth by boys’ play. It was taken years ago out of a field
now occupied by Mr. Griggs, and required eight horses to drag it.
It is stated in a letter from a resident there that “it measures 12 feet
round (probably touching the ground for 6 feet of its length), and
about 4 feet across, weighing 5 or 6 tons.” It is not alluded to
as a boulder by the Committee on Boulders, ete. (British Association).
1889. At Newton Green there is a large Sarsen stone (43 X
3 xX 2 feet) by the side of the pond next to the ‘Saracen’s Head ”
Inn, which shows on one side a ‘bowelly’ surface, and the other
sides split flat.
1889. One stone (3 feet long) with bowelly surface, and with
tubules, is at Frost Farm, Stoke, near Nayland. Near Nayland, at
the corner of cross-road from Bures to Colchester, there is a Sarsen
7 ft. 6in. long, roughly oval in outline. By the side of the high
road near the Popsey bridge, a little east of the Anchor bridge, Nay-
Jand, a Sarsen standing on the bank (3 x 1} feet) shows a natural
surface with a large hole, also a boldly mammillated surface
{bowelly). Its upper end and sides are split flat; lower end buried.
1889. Ina letter dated Ipswich, September 12th, 1889, the late
Dr, J. E. Taylor obligingly informed me, with regard to some Sarsen
stones found at Ipswich, that “the Reading stone-bed specimen [not
a Sarsen] is highly calcareous, but I have found no traces of
Foraminifera in it. The mammillated stone is purely siliceous.
. . The siliceous stones are abundant hereabouts; the others not
so. I got them both [the stones referred to] during the excavation
of the deep sewers in one of the streets of this town.”
(3) Hssex.—1896. T. V. Holmes: Proc. Geol. Assoc.,. vol. xiv,
p. 190. A large Sarsen is here mentioned that has been removed
from the Glacial Gravel at Writtle Wick, near Chelmsford. Spirifer, Sp. } Dielasma
(ef. D. formosa, Hall). These were obtained in an exposure of
138 Reviews—Geological Survey of Canada.
“black shales and flaggy cream-weathering limestone,” three miles
below Henry House.
Rocks of undoubted Cambrian age were met with on the north-
east side of the valley between Téte Jaune Cache and Canoe River.
“The squeezed conglomerate of the lower part of the series may
be without much hesitation assigned to the horizon of the Bow.
River Series [Lower Cambrian], while the overlying schists and
argillites probably belong to the same series, but may include,
towards the top, beds of the upper division of the Cambrian or
Castle Mountain group.” No granite or other plutonic rocks were
met with in the vicinity of the route traversed.
A great series of mica-schists were seen on the south-west side of
the valley opposite Téte Jaune Cache, on Mica Mountain. The
whole series, though differing somewhat from the Shuswap Series
of the southern interior of British Columbia, shows the main
characteristics of that series, and may be classed as such. The
age of this series, as given by Dr. Dawson, is Archean. The line
of contact between these rocks and those of Cambrian age on the
opposite side of the valley is hidden by superficial deposits.
The glaciation of the mountainous part of the region surveyed is
briefly described, and evidence is found for the statement that the
valley of the Athabasca contained a large glacier flowing north-
ward down the stream. After the glacier had disappeared the
valley was occupied by a large lake standing at a level of 550 to
600 feet above that of Jasper Lake, or 3,260 feet above sea-level.
A long, distinct terrace, composed of silt and sand on the west side
of Jasper Lake, marks this level.
The report concludes with a brief account of the distribution of
the principal trees and of the game, large and small.
2.—On some ADDITIONAL OR IMPERFECTLY UnpeErstoop Fossits
FROM THE Cretracrtous Rocks oF THE QUEEN CHARLOTTE
IsLaANDS, WITH A Revisep List or THE SPECIES FROM THESE
Rocks. By J. F. Wuirnaves, LL.D)., F.G.S., F.R.C.S. Mesozoic
Fossils, Vol. I, Part IV, pp. 263-307, pls. xxxiii to xlix.
(Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, November, 1900.)
hw explained in the Prefatory Note by the Director, Dr. G. M.
Dawson, the present memoir is an illustrated description of
two collections of fossils from the Cretaceous rocks of the Queen
Charlotte Islands, made by Dr. C. F. Newcombe, of Victoria, British
Columbia, in 1895 and 1897. It contains also a revision of the
nomenclature of some of the fossils previously collected from the
same rocks by Mr. James Richardson in 1872 and Dr. G. M. Dawson
in 1878. A brief summary of its contents will suffice, and this may
be taken from Dr. Whiteaves’ prefatory remarks. The revised list
of species at the end of the memoir shows that 89 species of marine
invertebrates are now known from the Lower Shales of the coal-
bearing rocks of the Cretaceous system in the Queen Charlotte
Islands. Of these one is a Coral (Astrocenia), three are Brachiopods,
Reviews— Geological Survey of Canada. 139
representing the genera Terebratula and Rhynchonella, one is a
Crustacean (Homolopsis), and the rest are Mollusca. The Cephalo-
poda are much more numerous, both in species and individuals, than
the Gasteropoda, and the Ammonites are specially abundant. The
latter seem to be remarkable for the presence of several species of
Desmoceras (inclusive of Puzozia), and for the absence of Baculites,
and of the numerous species of Pachydiscus which are so character-
istic of the Vancouver Cretaceous. The number of species ot
Pelecypoda appears to be much larger even than that of the
Cephalopoda.
The Canadian species have been in many instances compared
with the original types contained in museums in the United States
and in Europe. Thus every effort seems to have been made to
ensure the utmost degree of accuracy in the identification of the
fossils described in this work, which, it may be mentioned, appears
fourteen years after the previous (third) part. The new species are
well illustrated in the seven lithographic plates by Mr. L. M. Lambe.
3.—GENERAL INDEX TO THE Reports oF Progress, 1863 to 1884.
Compiled by D. B. Dowttne, B.A.Sc. Svo; pp.475. (Geological
Survey of Canada, Ottawa: S. E. Dawson, 1900.)
HOSE who have researches to undertake in any subject having
a voluminous literature know well the value of that time-saving
adjunct, a good index. The arrangement of the one before us is as
follows :—Part I (pp. 5-20) contains the Reports, so classified that
any country or district in a province can be found in its chronological
order, the counties being set alphabetically under their respective
provinces. The reports indexed date from 1868 (a summary from
the commencement of the Survey) to 1884. ;
Part II (pp. 21-84) contains an alphabetical list of the “ special
examinations ”’ of ores, minerals, or fossils that have been subjected
to assay, analysis, microscopical examination, or scientific description.
Part III (pp. 85-475) forms the great bulk of the volume, and
is termed “General Index to Reports, 1863-84.” The arrangement
in this part under reference to a place is usually chronological,
commencing with the earliest, while under a subject the references
are alphabetical, or in the case of substances of frequent occurrence,
as gold, iron-ores, coal, etc., the localities may be grouped under
provinces. t
Special publications on paleontology and botany, which are issued
by the Survey from time to time, are not included in this Index,
but the “List of Publications” brought out at intervals supplies
this deficiency.
We doubt not that the present Index will prove of great use to
all who require to consult the publications of the Geological Survey
of Canada, and they will not be chary of their commendation of the
compiler whose zeal and industry made its completion possible.
May his example be followed by many !
/ ; : Artuur H. Foorp.
140 Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London.
REPORTS AND PROCHEHDINGS.-
GeroLocicaL Society oF Lonpon.
I. — January 23, 1901.—J. J. H. Teall, Hsq., M.A., BRaos
President, in the Chair.
After the formal business had been taken, the President,
having requested all those present to rise from their seats, said:
“T feel sure that the Fellows will desire to express their
deep sense of the grievous loss which this nation has sustained
in the death of our late beloved and most gracious Sovereign,
by assenting to the immediate adjournment of the meeting.”
The meeting was accordingly adjourned.
II.—February 6, 1901.—J. J. H. Teall, Esq., M.A., F.R.S., President,
in the Chair.
Dr. F. A. Bather, in exhibiting rock specimens, microscope
sections, and photographs illustrating blavierite, ophitic diabase,
felsitic porphyry, petro-siliceous breccia, and other igneous and
metamorphic rocks of the Mayenne, said that the specimens had
been collected by him in the course of an excursion of the Highth
International Geological Congress, under the guidance of M. D. P.
Oehlert. In the basins of Laval and Coévrons were many peculiar
rocks due to the folding and crushing of stratified rocks penetrated
by eruptive dykes. The tectonic features were illustrated by the
maps of M. Oehlert and by the photographs. The slides were
prepared in the Mineralogical Department of the Natural History
Museum, where all the specimens would be preserved.
Mr. H. T. Newton exhibited some graptolites, which had been
obtained by Mr. Herbert J. Jessop in the course of a prospecting
expedition in Eastern Peru. The locality was in lat. 15° 40'S. and
long. 72° 20’ W.; Limbani, near Crucero, in the neighbourhood
of the Rio Inambari. The graptolites are closely related to
Diplograptus foliaceus, and indicate deposits of late Ordovician age.
Mr. A. K. Coomara-Swamy exhibited and commented on a lantern
‘slide showing spherulitic structure in sulphanilic acid. This had
been described and figured by Mr. Henry Bassett, Jun., in the
GrotocicaL Macaztne for January, 1901, pp. 14-16.
The following communications were read :-—
1. “On the Structure and Affinities of the Rheetic Plant Vaiadita.”
By Miss Igerna B. J. Sollas, B.Sc., Newnham College, Cambridge.
(Communicated by Professor W. J. Sollas, M.A., D.Sc., LL.D.,
F.R.S., V.P.G.S.)
This plant, the remains of which are found in Gloucestershire,
was considered to be a monocotyledon by Buckman, but a moss by
Starkie Gardner. Material supplied by Mr. Seward and Mr. Wickes
has given the authoress ground for the belief that Naiadita is an
aquatic lycopod, and that it is the earliest recorded example of
Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 14}
a fossil member of the Lycopodiacez, resembling in proportions and
outward morphology the existing representatives of the group.
The specimens described show stems, leaves, and sporangia which
appear to be borne laterally on the stem and to be embraced by the
bases of the leaves. Stomata do not appear to occur, and the
association of leaves of different types leads to the conclusion that
the three described species are in reality but one. The stems
consist mainly of long, thin-walled tubes covered with an epidermis
of long rectangular cells; the leaves, in vertical section, show only
a single layer of complete cells. The absence of stomata and
cortical tissue may be explained, if the plant was submerged when
living; but it is possible that the lower tissues of the leaf are lost,
together with any stomata which may have been present.
2. “On the Origin of the Dunmail Raise (Lake District).” By
Richard D. Oldham, Esq., F.G.S.
The author considers that the gap through the Cumberland hills
is a natural feature whose remarkable character has not attracted
the attention which it deserves. In form it is an old river-valley,
now occupied by much smaller streams than that which formed it.
A windgap of this character cannot have been formed by recession
of watersheds or capture through erosion, for in such a case the
stream on one side or the other of the watershed must necessarily
fit its valley, while in the Dunmail Raise there is a misfit on both
sides. The gap was in existence before the Glacial Period, and
consequently cannot have been formed by ice. So, by a process
of exclusion, the explanation is arrived at, which fits in with the
surface forms, that the gap of the Dunmail Raise was formed by
a river, which flowed across the hills from north to south, and cut
down its channel pari passu with the elevation of the hills. The
fina] victory of upheaval over erosion, whereby this river was divided
into two separate drainage systems and the barrier of the Dunmail
Raise upheaved, may have synchronized with a diversion of the
head-waters' and consequent diminution of volume and _ erosive
power. It is pointed out that this explanation comes into conflict
with previously published theories of the origin of the drainage
system of the Lake District, inasmuch as the elevation postulated
seems too slow to be explicable by the intrusion of a laccolite; and
that the existence of a large river crossing the area of upheaval,
and the maintenance of its character as an antecedent river-valley
for a long period, show that the surface was originally a peneplain
of subaerial denudation, and not a plain of marine sedimentation or
erosion. From this it follows that the course of the main drainage
valleys may not have been determined by the original uplift, but,
with the exception of those which are old river-valleys, whose
direction of flow has been reversed on the northern side of the
uplift, may have been formed by the cutting back by erosion into
the rising mass of high ground—in other words, that the principal
valleys of the Lake District may be subsequent, not consequent
in origin.
142 Correspondence—G. W. Lamplugh.
CORRESPONDENCE.
NAMES FOR BRITISH ICE-SHEETS OF THE GLACIAL PERIOD.
Sir,—It has often occurred to me that the discussion of our
British Glacial phenomena would be facilitated by the adoption of
regional names, such as have been found so useful in this respect in
North America, for the different portions of the confluent ice-sheets
by which our Islands were partly surrounded and covered at the
period of maximum glaciation. I have especially felt the want
of such names in describing the supposed condition of the basins
of the North Sea and of the Irish Sea in Glacial times. The term
‘Scandinavian Ice-sheet’ often applied to the North Sea ice-field
appears to me to be misleading, since it seems to imply that the basin
was occupied solely by the outflow of glaciers from Scandinavia,
whereas it is far more probable that it was maintained and
augmented principally by the snowfall upon its own surface. The
term ‘Irish Sea Ice,’ sometimes used to denote the ice-sheet filling
that sea-basin, is likewise objectionable, as I found in a recent
discussion where it was understood to imply the marine ice of
a frozen sea.
After due consideration and discussion with colleagues interested
in the subject, I am inclined to think that the term ‘ Hast British
Tce-sheet’ will be found suitable for the mass which occupied the
bed of the North Sea off our eastern coasts, and spread thence, in
places, inland. This will then find its complement in the term
‘West British Ice-sheet’ for the land-ice which filled the basin
of the Irish Sea, and encroached upon our north-western lowlands.
We already speak of the ‘Pennine Ice’ for the great confluent
glaciers which covered the greater part of the Pennine region,
and of the ‘Lake District Ice’ for the masses of that region, and
these terms need no revision.
Then, for the ice which overspread the greater part of Scotland to
the exclusion of the ‘Hast British’ and ‘ West British’ sheets, we
might apply the general term ‘Caledonian,’ with such local sub-
division as may be hereafter found convenient. And, similarly, the
‘Hibernian’ (or ‘Ivernian’) would be that which covered Central
Ireland, and the ‘Cambrian’ that which shielded the greater part of
Wales.
More restricted local terms might still be introduced to distinguish
well-defined portions of these sheets, and the lobes into which they
probably split towards their termination.
I shall be glad to learn whether the terms above suggested are
likely to be approved of by glacialists who hold the ‘land-ice
theory ’ in regard to our drifts. G. W. Lampiues.
TONBRIDGE.
January 20, 1901.
Obituary— James Bennie. 148
CHEVIOT PORPHYRITES IN THE BOULDER-CLAY OF EAST
YORKSHIRE.
Sir,—I can confirm Mr. Stather’s opinion’ (expressed in the
GwotocicaL Macazine for January, 1901) that the porphyrites of
the East Yorkshire Boulder-clay were probably derived from the
Cheviots. When I was stationed at Bridlington Quay on the
Geological Survey, Mr. C. T. Clough, who mapped the Cheviots,
eame to the Quay in order to identify, if possible, the far-travelled
erratics in the Boulder-clay. We examined the shore and cliffs
from Bridlington Quay to Filey, and found a large number of
porphyritic rocks, which Mr. Clough said might very well have
come from the Cheviots. J. R. Daxyns.
Snowpon View, Nant Gwynnan, BEDDGELERT, CARNARVON.
7 February 11, 1901.
MUSEUM EXHIBITION CASES.
Srr,—The new Geological Museum now being erected here will
have high windows and a long south aspect. The effect of this
will be that the sun will fall suddenly on glazed cases and as
suddenly pass off them, thus by the expansion and contraction of
the air causing dust-carrying currents to force themselves through
every chink. From this cause it costs about three times as much to
keep cases and specimens clean on the side exposed to the sun as
it does in the shaded part of a museum. This may be obviated by
elastic diaphragms (which would hardly allow sufficient movement
for such large cases as ours) or by small sliding shutters packed
with cotton-wool something like Tyndall’s respirators.
Can any of your readers refer us to museums in which such
a system has been tried or give us any advice on the subject before
our cases have been built ? T. McKenny Hucues.
Woopwarpian Museum, CAMBRIDGE.
_ February 19, 1901.
OBtetuA BR Yy-
=
JAMES BENNIE.
Born SEPTEMBER 23, 1821. Drep JANUARY 28, 1901.
We regret to record the death of Mr. James Bennie, at the
age of 79 years. For many years he was one of the fossil
collectors of H.M. Geological Survey, and was well known to
local geologists in the west of Scotland. In early life, before he
_ joined the Survey, he was employed in a paper manufactory in
Glasgow, where he devoted his leisure hours to. the examination
of the glacial, interglacial, and post-glacial deposits of the west of
Scotland. He likewise collected fossils from the various Carboniferous
horizons in that region. he results of his labours were published
in the Transactions of the Glasgow Geological Society, and his
glacial researches were communicated to Dr. Croll in 1867, as
acknowledged in the “Life and Work” of that investigator. His
Survey career, which commenced in 1869, was marked by his great
1 See “The Sources and Distribution of the Far-Travelled Boulders of Kast
Yorkshire,’’ by J. W. Stather.
144 Miscellaneous.
knowledge of the fossiliferous bands in the Carboniferous rocks of
Central Scotland. He paid special attention to the occurrence of
micro-organisms in the weathered shales of that series, which resulted
in the discovery of many forms new to science, described and figured
by various specialists. He was the first to record the occurrence
of Holothurians in the Carboniferous rocks of Scotland, and was
likewise the first to obtain the remains of Arctic plants in the silt
and peat of vanished lakes that formerly occupied hollows in the
Boulder-clay. With the remains of Arctic plants he discovered
fragments of a phyllopod Crustacean, which is now found living only
in fresh-water lakes in Greenland and Spitzbergen. Two years ago.
he received the Murchison Fund from the Geological Society of
London, in recognition of his work. Quiet and unobtrusive in
manner, and fond of literature, he showed throughout his life a keen
love of nature.—Scotsman, January 30.
IMEIGS Cpa IE eA IN PIO) wi Se
aie wEn
Tue New Director oF THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF THE UNITED:
Kinepom anp oF THE Museum or Practica GroLogy, JERMYN
Srrent, Lonnon.—We have just been informed that J. J. H. Teall,
Esq., M.A., Vice-President of the Royal Society, President of the
Geological Society of London, has been appointed to succeed
Sir Archibald Geikie, F.R.S., as head of the Geological Survey.
Mr. Teall is an eminent Petrologist and the author of many
important papers on geology; he has published a most valuable
monograph on British Petrography, with which special branch of
the science his name will always be connected. He is universally
esteemed amongst geologists, and especially by the members of the
staff of the Geological Survey, for his geniality and urbanity to all
his fellow-workers. As President of the Geological Society he has
also won golden opinions.
Tue New Proressor or Grotogy at University CoLLEcs,
Gower Streret.—The Rev. Professor Thomas George Bonney, D.Sc.,
LL.D., F.B.S., F.G.S., who succeeded Professor John Morris, F.G.S.,
in the chair of Geology at University College, in June, 1877, and
has occupied that post with such eminent success for 24 years,
retires this month and is succeeded by Mr. Edmund Johnstone
Garwood, M.A., F.G.S., of Trinity College, Cambridge, a gentleman
already distinguished by his geological observations and writings
in the Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, the Geological
Magazine, the Royal Geographical Society’s and other scientific
journals. Mr. Garwood has done excellent field work in the Alps,
the Himalayas, in Spitzbergen ; and in writing upon the Magnesian
Limestone and the ‘Great Whin Sill,’ and the Life-zones of the
British Carboniferous Rocks. He has been for some years a Lecturer
at Harrow, and as a University Extension Lecturer is well known
and esteemed by the scientific public.
Although Professor Bonney is relinquishing the Chair of Geology
at University College, he intends still to pursue his scientific and
literary work and will continue his clerical duties as heretofore.
Geol Mag. 1901. Decade IV.Vol VULPIVII. »
GM Woodward del. et hth. West,Newman imp.
Cirripedes and trilobites.
THE
GHOLOGICAL MAGAZINE.
NEW SERIES: DECADE IV. VOL. Vill:
No. IV.—APRIL, 1901.
Orr EGE INVA Ty, AIR rie mms?
—
T.—On ‘Pryrcowa creracea, aA CrrripEDE, FROM THE Upper
Cuatk or Norwich and MarGatre.
By..Henry Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S., V.P.Z.S., F.G.S.
(PLATE VIII, Fries. 1-3.)
N the year 1865 I noticed the occurrence of what appeared to be
a sessile Civripede from the Upper Chalk of Norwich, and
referred it to Leach’s genus Pyrgoma. For this unique example the
name of Pyrgoma cretacea was then proposed,' and afterwards, in
1868, it was more fully described and figured by me in the
Gerotocircat Magazine.” I also pointed out that Charles Darwin,
in his Monograph on the Fossil Cirrepedia,’ had described a fossil
form belonging to this genus under the name of Pyrgoma anglicum,
from the Coralline Crag of Ramsholt, Suffolk, a species found living
off the south coast of England and of Ireland, Sicily, Madeira, Cape
de Verde Islands, etc.; while Michelotti had named, but not
described, a species (Pyrgoma wndata) from the North Italian
Tertiary strata.
The only other form of sessile Cirripede known, which extends
back in time to the Chalk formation, is the genus Verruca, which
M. Bosquet of Maestricht first described in 1855 from the Chalk of
Limbourg under the name of Verruca prisca.* This species was
likewise discovered by J. de C. Sowerby in the Upper Chalk of
Norwich, and described under the same name by Charles Darwin.?
_ Like the genus Pyrgoma, Verruca occurs fossil (Verruca Strémia) in
the Glacial beds of Scotland, the Red and Coralline Crag of Suffolk,
and recent on the shores of Great Britain and Ireland, ete.
' Brit. Assoc. Birmingham (1865), Reports, p. 521. ree
2 Geox. Mac., Dec. I, Vol. V (1868), pp. 258-9, Pl. XIV, Figs. 1, 2.
3 ‘.
beds ; the Great Oolite, Stonesfield and Eyeford ; the Oxiord Clay, the Gault,
T. n tore cla 4 . 7
Upper Greensand, Upper Chalk, the Eocene Tertiary, Isle of Wight ; the
Tertiary of Messina ; and living in the seas of Europe, ete., at the present day.
Fic. 2.—Catophragmus polymerus, Darwin. Living: Australian Coast. Cee
oe ery . 7 mY Joa d . . or >
C. Darwin’s figure, op. cit., pl. xx, figs. 4a—4e.) _“ Interior compartme nts
eight, with several exterior whorls of small supplemental compartments ;
basis membranous.” ‘‘ In large old specimens there are ten, or even more,
whorls of compartments, but it is scarcely possible to count them with any
aceuracy.’’ This genus does not occur in a fossil state.
Fic. 2a.—External view of one of the imbricated scales or valves, from the second
whorl, counting from the inside.
at first sight to have been forced apart, or else that two additional
lateral compartments of the shell-wall have fallen out and been lost ;
bnt this does not seem to have been the case. The important
difference lies in the fact that, whereas in the Norwich specimen
(Pl. VIII, Fig. 3) the shell-wall is exposed and bare to its basis, in
the Margate specimen the base is concealed by a quite undisturbed
semicircular quadruple row of shelly imbricated scales (PI. VIII,
Fig. 4a, t.s., i.s.), analogous to those at the base of the capitulum of
148 Dr. H. Woodward—A New Cirripede from the Chath.
Pedunculated Cirripedes (Lepadide), such as Pollicipes mitella
(Pl. VIII, Figs. 2a, 2b) and P. polymerus (Woodcut, Fig. 1), but
which are absent in ordinary sessile forms (Balanide). —
Thus, in Dr. Rowe’s specimen we have presented to us a Cirripede
of the greatest interest, offering a most important connecting link
between the more ancient PEpuNcULATA or Lepapipm and the more
modern OrERcULATA Or BALANID&.
Turning to the genus Catophragmus of Sowerby (Woodeut, Fig. 2),
we find a sessile Balanid which assists us in the interpretation of
Dr. Rowe’s most interesting Chalk Cirripede, and also that Charles
Darwin had, in 1854, already pointed out the significance of the
structure of the shell in Catophragmus as a means of bridging over
the interval between the sessile and pedunculated forms of Cirripedia
which Dr. Rowe’s specimen had suggested to my mind when he first
placed it in my hands at the end of last year. “This genus of
Catophragmus,” writes Darwin,’ “‘is very remarkable among sessile
Cirripedes, from the eight normal compartments of the shell being
surrounded by several whorls of supplemental compartments or
scales: these are arranged symmetrically, and decrease in size, but
increase in number towards the circumference and basal margin.
A well-preserved specimen has a very elegant appearance, like
certain compound flowers, which when half open are surrounded
by imbricated and graduated scales. The Chthamaline, in the
structure of the mouth and cirri, and to a certain extent in that
of the shell, fill up the interval between the Balanine and
Lepadide ; and Catophragmus forms, in a very remarkable manner,
the transitional link, for it is impossible not to be struck with the
resemblance of its shell with the capitulum of Pollicipes (see
Fig. 1). In Pollicipes, at least in certain species, the scuta and
terga are articulated together; the carina, rostrum, and three pairs
of latera, making altogether eight inner valves, are considerably
larger than those in the outer whorls; the arrangement of the latter,
their manner of growth, and union, all are as in Calophragmus. If
we in imagination unite some of the characters found in the
different species of Pollicipes, and then make the peduncle so
short (and it sometimes is very short in P. miéella) that the valves
of the capitulum should touch the surface of attachment, it would be
impossible to point out a single external character by which the two
genera in these two distinct families could be distinguished: but
the more important differences in the arrangement and nature of the
muscles, which are attached either to the opercular valves or surround
the inside of the peduncle, would yet remain.”
Although Dr. Rowe’s Cretaceous Cirripede lacks the opercular
valves, it enables us to conclude, from the presence of the three or
four rows of imbricated scales around the base of the capitulum, that
this form must at once be removed from the genus Pyrgoma, with
which, as one of the Balaninz, it has only a very remote affinity,
1 A Monograph of the Subclass Cirripedia: The Balanide, ete., pp. 485-7,
pl. xx, fig. 4. Ray Society, 1854.
-
Dr. H. Woodward—A New Cirripede from the Chalk. 149
Nor can we place it, as I at first conceived to be possible, in
Darwin’s subfamily Chthamaline, which embraces Chthamalus,
Chamesipho, Pachylasma, Octomeris, and Catophragmus, all of
which are very irregular and aberrant forms of Balanine, of
which the same author observes that they differ in many important
respects from the Balaninz proper and approach the Lepadide,
as, for instance, in the supplemental whorls of imbricated scales or
compartments in Catophragmus, etc.
We should, I think, rather regard this Cretaceous type as an
ancient pedunculated Cirripede, which, judging from the form and
thickness of its carina and rostrum, appears to be assuming a more
sessile condition of growth, and by a later and further modification
may have become completely so.
From the undisturbed triple or quadruple arrangement of imbri-
cated scales enclosing the base it is quite certain that the carina (c.)
and rostrum (7.) (Pl. VIII, Fig. 4a) could not have united to form
a conical shell-wall like that in Pyrgoma anglicum (Pl VIII, Fig. 5),
as I originally supposed, nor do I think it could have had other
lateral compartments between 7. and c. to complete the shell-wall
on the Balanus type of structure, the large size of the scales in the
centre suggesting rather that they were the sub-latera, as in the
capitulum of Pollicipes. It seems much more probable that the
scuta and terga and perhaps a small and narrow latus took part, as
in Pollicipes, in building up the capitulum, the basis of which was
protected by a series of imbricated shelly plates. In point of fact
we have here a Pollicipes which has abandoned its peduncle, and
whilst still retaining the rows of imbricated scales at the base of its
capitulum, has settled down into the preliminary stage of becoming
a permanently sessile form.
y. = rostrum. e. = carma.
i.s. = imbricated scales. i.s. = imbricated scales at
s.d. = sub-latera. base of capitulum.
Fic. 3.—Brachylepas cretacea, gen. nov. (capitulum restored). The original figure
of Dr. Rowe’s specimen is here reproduced and restored by the addition of
7. latus: s. scutum; ¢. tergum. ‘The rostrum (7.) and carina (c.) and the
imbricated scales (i.s., i.s.) are copied from the original figure.
As Lepas was the name originally given by Linnzus to embrace
both the pedunculated and sessile species, the designation Brachylepas
may serve to express the present type, which embraces characters
apparently common to both divisions of Cirripedia. The trivial
name ecretacea is of course retained.
The new form should, I think, be placed in a separate family,
intermediate between the Pedunculata and Operculata, as—
150 Dr. H. Woodward—A New Cirripede from the Chatk.
Family BRACHYLEPADIDA.
BRACHYLEPAS, gen. nov., 1901.
Non Pyrgoma (as applied by H. Woodw., 1865, Brit. Assoc. Rep., p. 321).
Valves about 100 in number; latera of lower whorl numerous;
lines of growth directed downwards ; peduncle absent.
BRACHYLEPAS CRETACEA, H. Woodw. (PI. VIII, Figs. 4a, 6.)
Capitulum with three or four whorls of valves under the rostrum ;
apparently only three rows under the carina; sub-latera larger than
the rest. The base on the side figured shows about fifty-four *
shelly imbricated plates or scales forming eighteen vertical rows,
arranged partly in three and partly in four rows; they are smaller,
narrower, and more pointed under the rostrum (r.), and largest and
broadest in the centre below the latus (see restoration, Fig. 3, .),
as we see is the case in Pollicipes polymerus (Woodcut, Fig. 1),
where the latera are regularly graduated in size from the uppermost
to the lowest of the series. The scales under the carina (c.) are
larger than those beneath the rostrum (r.); but they are narrower
and more pointed than those of the lateral series (which are
reproduced enlarged on Pl. VIII, Fig. 4b). The scales have
a strong median ridge with lateral divaricating lines, giving the
free-edges a delicately plicated border. The median ridge is narrower
and sharper in the scales beneath the rostrum, and broadest on the
lateral scales.
The carina (c.) is marked by strong vertical ridges, which are
crossed by numerous finer encircling bands, running parallel to the
base, giving to both the carina and rostrum a delicate reticulated
surface. The walls of both are thick, and so far as can be seen
quite smooth on the inner surface. On the opposite aspect of the
carina to that drawn, the base of the capitulum is seen to be nearly
wholly exposed and bare, save for the presence of three of the
shelly scales which remain in siti adhering to the carina, the
largest of which is 4mm. in length. The semicircular wall of
the carina measures about 17mm. near its base around its outer
face, and its height on the side not covered by the sheath of
imbricated scales is 8mm. The rostrum is considerably smaller
than the carina; it measures 15mm. around the outer surface near
the base, and is 6 mm. in height.
The sheath of imbricated scales covers the base of the rostrum, on
the side drawn in the Plate, 2mm. deep, and extends also 2 mm.
below the base of the rostrum, the whole series of scales being
a little over 4mm. deep.
Viewed from above, the body-cavity, enclosed in the convexities
of the carina and rostrum, is seen to be oval, being 8mm. long by
6mm. broad. The walls of the capitulum are very steep, the carina,
which is also much the highest, seeming almost to overhang at its
summit.
1 That is, 54 plates on the side figured ; if perfect, there would have been an equal
number on the other side, or about 108 in all.
Dr. H. Woodward—A. New Cirripede from the Chalk. 151
The imbricated scales or plates, which extend below the base of
the rostrum and carina, spread outwards at a considerably wider
angle than the capitulum. he attached valve of some small mollusc
is seen adhering to the imbricated scales below the rostrum.
From the disparity in the proportions of the rostrum and carina,
and the absence of alz, we arrive at the conclusion that the terga
and scuta were not mere opercular valves, but formed a part of the
capitulum ; that latera were also present is proved by the increase
in size of the sub-lateral scales, which are much larger than those of
the rostral or carinal series (see Pl. VIII, Figs. 4a, b).
There can, I think, be no reasonable doubt that Brachylepas forms
a distinct family, from which at a later period probably the modern
Operculata have arisen.
The place of Brachylepas in the phylogeny of the subclass may be
indicated as follows :—
CIRRIPEDIA.
PEDUNCULATA OPpERCULATA
(Lepadide) (Balanida, ete., etc.).
Lepas Scalpelinm — Pollicipes Catophragmus Balanus, ete., ete.
SO \ \ < ¥
Sealpelron (Gault) Bracuy epas (Chalk)
Pollicipes (Rhietic)
|
Turrilepas (Silurian)
EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII, Fics. 1-5.
Fic. 1.—Balanus Hameri, Asc. Recent: British. (Ad nat.) }. (See also Darwin’s
«‘ Balanide,”’ p. 277, pl. vii, fig. 5.) 7. rostrum ; ¢. carina ; r./. rostro-lateral
compartment; /. lateral compartment ; /.c. cario - lateral compartment ;
b. basis; ov. opercular valves. :
Fic. 2a.—Pollicipes mitella, Linn. Recent: East Indies. (Ad nat.) 7. ¢. carina,
é. tergum ; s. scutum ; 7. rostrum ; /. latus; s.7.sub-rostrum ; .¢. sub-carina ;
between s.r. and s.c. the valves of the lower latera are seen; p.s. peduncular
scales.
Fic. 26.—Four of the lower latera, with some of the peduncular scales enlarged.
Three times natural size. us i
Fig. 3.—‘ Pyrgoma cretacea? = Brachylepas eretacea (the original specimen figured
Grou. Mac., Dec. I, Vol. V, 1868, p. 258, Pl. XIV, Figs. 1, 2). From the
Chalk of Norwich. Preserved in the British Museum (Natural History).
Enlarged twice naturai size.
152 Dr. H. Woodward—Carboniferous Trilobites.
Fic. 4a.—Brachylepas cretacea. Specimen obtained and developed by Dr. Arthur
Rowe, M.S., M.R.C.S., F.G.S., from the Chalk of Margate. Enlarged
three times natural size. Original preserved in Dr. Rowe’s cabinet. ¢. carina;
rv. rostrum; i.s., i.s. imbricated scales at base of capitulum.
Fic. 4b.—Sub-lateral scales, enlarged six times natural size. From the centre of
series just below the latus (see restoration in text, Fig. 3, /).
Fic. 5.—Pyrgoma anglicum, Leach (viewed from above). From the Coralline Crag,
Ramsholt, Suffolk. Enlarged four times natural size. Recent: Great Britain,
Europe, Cape de Verde. (Copied from Darwin’s ‘‘ Balanidie”’: Pal. Soe.
Mon., 1854, tab. ui, fig. 7a.)
II.—NorE on some CARBONIFEROUS T'RILOBITES.
By Henry Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S.
(PLATE VIII, Fics. 6-8.)
HE problems of life which the biologist is called upon to solve
present so many and such varied aspects that they are never
likely to become exhausted, or to weary by reason of their monotony.
Among these the appearances and disappearances of groups in time
(like the players on Shakespeare’s mimic stage) are certainly not the
least interesting questions awaiting solution.
In the case of the Trilobita, we are indebted to Walcott in
America, Hicks in Wales, Lapworth in England, Peach and Horne
in Scotland, Nathorst in Sweden, Mickwitz in Russia, and Holm in
Lapland for extending the Olenellus zone back in time to the Lower
Cambrian, thus giving to the Trilobites a vast increase in antiquity,
without by any means reaching the dawn of life of this group.
The existence of Trilobites in the Carboniferous Limestone was
made known as early as 1809, but no upward extension has occurred
during the lapse of nearly one hundred years, save their discovery
in the Culm of Waddon-Barton, Chudleigh, and Barnstaple, Devon-
shire,’ still within the Lower Carboniferous series. One is tempted
to ask, did they survive beyond the seas of the Lower Carboniferous
period, and, if not, what was the cause of their extermination? 'To
these inquiries our researches have at present yielded no reply.
It seems difficult to understand why the conditions which pre-
vailed in the seas during the slow building up of the vegetable
deposits of the Coal-period on the adjacent low-lying lands were
inimical to the life of the Trilobita, seeing that near those old lands
several species of small king-crabs (Zimuli) were living, larger
Eurypterus - like Crustaceans, small aquatic forms of Cyclus,
numerous Brachyurans (the first lobsters), Anthrapalemon, Pygo-
cephalus (a Stomapod), with Phyllopod and Ostracod Crustaceans
in great abundance: apparently offering an undoubted certificate as
to the salubrity of this marine resort. Yet the Trilobites disappeared.
Although limited in the number of genera and species, the
Carboniferous and Culm Trilobites form a most elegant and attrac-
tive group, but they do not display that great variety of form or
ornamentation which characterized their predecessors in Silurian
‘times.
a H. Woodward, “<'Trilobites from the Culm of Devon’”’: Pal. Soc. Mon., 1884,
‘Carboniferous Trilobites, pp. 59-70, pl. x. Also Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. li
(1895), pp. 646-9.
Dr. H. Woodward—Carboniferous Trilobites. 153
Since I published my monograph on Carboniferous Trilobites
(1883-1884, Pal. Soc. Mon., pp. 1-86, pls. i-x), I have given in this
Magazine for 1894 (Dec. IV, Vol. I, pp. 481-489, Pl. XIV)
descriptions of two new species, namely, Phillipsia Van-der-Grachtii
and P. Polleni, from the Carbonaceous shale, banks of the River
Hodder, Stonyhurst, Lancashire.
In November, 1895, I examined a number of specimens submitted
to me by Dr. G. J. Hinde and Mr. Howard Fox, from the Culm of
Devonshire and from a white siliceous rock at Hannaford Quarry,
near Barnstaple. These represented forms already described as
Phillipsia Leei, Ph. minor, Ph. Cliffordi, Phillipsia? (a larval form),
Griffithides acanthiceps, G. longispinus, Proetus sp. A, Proetus sp. B
(Q.J.G.8., vol. li, 1895, pp. 646-649, pl. xxviii, figs. 1-8).
Mr. J. G. Hamling, Miss Partridge, and Mr. A. K. Coomara-
Swamy, F'.G.8., have also sent me specimens from Barnstaple for
examination, some of which I hope to figure and notice shortly.
Last year, when visiting my friend Mr. E. Howarth, F.R.A.S.,
F.Z.8., the energetic Curator of the Public Museum, Weston Park,
Sheffield, I discovered that this museum possesses a most excellent
series of Trilobites from the Carboniferous Limestone of Derbyshire,
of the existence of which I was previously unaware.
The collection was derived from two sources:—(1) Purchased
with the geological collection of the Rev. Urban Smith, vicar of
Stoney Middleboro’ (near to Eyam), Derbyshire, an ardent geologist
who during many years’ residence in this district formed a large
collection chiefly obtained from the Carboniferous Limestone of his
own immediate neighbourhood. The specimen H. 88. 1108,
Griffithides longiceps, Portlock, figured on our Pl. VIII, Fig. 6,
enlarged three times nat. size, is from this collection. (2) The
second collection was purchased as a part of the museum of ‘Thomas
Bateman, Esq., of Middleton Hall, near Bakewell, Derbyshire.
Mr. Bateman wrote several books on the antiquities of Derbyshire
and Yorkshire, and his archeological and geological collections were
purchased for the Sheffield Museum (see Review of Mr. Howarth’s
Catalogue of Bateman Collection, Gron. Mac., 1901, p. 37). The
specimen H. 93. 118, of G. longiceps, figured on our Plate (PI. VIII,
Figs. 7, 8, enlarged three times nat. size), is from the Bateman
Collection. From the Carboniferous Limestone of Wettin Hill,
Derbyshire. r
It is most rare to meet with specimens from the Carboniferous
Limestone, such as the two here figured, in which the head, thorax,
and abdomen (or pygidium) are preserved united in the same
individual; the thoracic segments are very commonly absent, and
the head-shield and pygidium are usually found separately, so that
their description is often attended with considerable difficulty and
uncertainty.
I set out with the full conviction that the above examples, the
details of which are so remarkably well preserved, entitled them to
specific distinction ; but after more careful study I can only conclude
them to represent a more slender variety of G. longiceps, the axis of
154 Messrs. Barron & Hume—Eastern Desert of Egypt.
which is distinctly narrower than that figured by me in 1888 (Pal.
Soc. Mon., pl. vi, figs. 7 and 8).
The description given at pp. 33-384 closely agrees with our present
specimens, save in one particular, namely, the axis is there stated
to be equal to half the entire breadth of the thorax, whereas in
Fig. 6 of our Plate VIII it is shown to be exactly one-third the
entire breadth of the thorax. This form might therefore be
recognized as Griffithides longiceps, var. angusta, H. W.
The following is a list of the Trilobites from the Carboniferous.
Limestone in the Sheffield Museum, all from Derbyshire :—
Phillipsia Derbiensis, Martin, sp., 1809.
a gemmulifera, Phillips, sp., 1836.
ie Hichwaldi, Fisher, sp., 1825.
Griffithides globiceps, Phillips, sp., 1836.
33 Carringtonensis, Hiheridge MS. (H. W., 1884).
a longispinus, Portlock, 1843.
33 seminiferus (a very good specimen in ‘ Rotten stone’),
Phillips, sp., 1836.
3 longiceps, Portlock, 1848.
Ms var. angusta. (Pl. VIII, Figs. 6-8.)
Brachymetopus Ouralicus, De Verneuil, 1845 (a Tar ge series of very
good detached head-shields and pygidia).
Proetus, sp. ind. (some small detached pygidia).
Some large detached pygidia in this collection may be new.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII, Fies. 6-8.
Fic. 6.—Gviffithides longiceps, Portlock, var. angusta, H. W. Carboniferous Lime-
stone: Stoney Middleboro’.
Figs. 7, 8.—G. longiceps, var. angusta. Carboniferous Limestone: Wettin Hill,
Derby shire.
Figures enlarged three times natural size. Original specimens preserved im
the Sheffield Museum.
JII.—Nores on tHe Grotocy or THE Hastern Desert or Heyer.
By T. Barron, A.R.C.S., F.G.S., ete., and W. F. Hume, D.Sec., A.R.S.M., ete
(By permission of the Under-Secretary of State for Public Works, and the
Director-General of the Survey Department.)
The paper is divided into two parts, viz. :—
1. Sedimentary Rocks.
2. Igneous and Metamorphic Rocks.
Parr I.—1. Pleistocene and Recent. (a) Igneous Gravel and Conglomerates.
(b) Newer and older Beach Deposits.
2. Pliocene. Nile Valley Limestones and Conglomerates.
3. Miocene Beds.
4. Eocene Limestones and Shales.
5. Cretaceous Limestones.
6. Nubian Shales and Sandstones.
1. (a) Igneous Gravels, etc.—These consist of granite, gneiss, and
many other igneous and metamorphic rocks similar to those met
with in the Red Sea Hills, and occur up Wadi Qena and spread
~
Messrs. Barron §& Hume—Eastern Desert of Egypt. 154
out in a fan-shaped delta at its mouth. Although abundant in
this wadi, they are unknown in the side-valleys, even where they
are now connected with the igneous hills. The explanation of this
is as follows :—Hast of Qena the Hocene plateau has been broken
up into a series of outliers, which until quite recently were connected
by a long ridge, the sole break being that where Wadi Qena passes
between the main plateau and the outlier of Abu Had. Previous
to the formation of the latter fracture, the southern end of Wadi
Qena was a bay, in which flint containing conglomerates and Pliocene
limestones were being deposited, but when the above-mentioned gap
was formed, the drainage from the Red Sea Hills passed through to
the Nile Valley. Similar gravels cover the Red Sea Coast-plain.
The age of these beds has now been shown to be Post-Pliocene,
as there is a marked unconformity between them and the latter,
and also because on the Coast-plain they are found underlying and
overlying limestones containing Pleistocene fossils.
This throws a strong light on the age of the Nile. Mr. Beadnell
found these gravels on the western side of the valley, and they are
apparently continuous under the Nile alluvium, thus showing that
the Nile as a river is later than these gravels, and could not have
begun to flow until late Pleistocene times. These gravels are also
suggested as the origin of the igneous pebbles reported by Professor
Judd in the Royal Society’s boring at Zaqaziq. All the rocks
mentioned can be matched from the gravels near Qena. (Since this
paper was read similar pebbles, but worn thin as by long rolling,
have been found in cuttings in the lake deposits to the north of
Heluan.) The theory of the derivation of the pebbles from the
northern part of the Red Sea Hills is untenable, as it is known that
Wadi Qena received all the drainage from that area in early
Pliocene times.
These gravels are believed to have been deposited in a fresh-water
lake, a series of which were formed as the sea retreated down the
Nile Valley.
1. (b) Raised Beaches and Coral Reefs.—Five series are recognized,
of which the youngest is below sea-level, their succession being as
follows :—
(1) The coral reefs at present forming in the Red Sea.
(2) The raised beaches and lower coral reefs which flank the coast,
varying in height from near sea-level to 25 metres above
the sea. .
(3) A higher coral reef series on an average four to seven kilo-
metres from the sea, and at various levels between 115 and
170 metres.
(4) A disturbed coral reef dipping 20 degrees eastward, closely
related to the previous one. _
(5) An old coral reef in which the affinities are as much
Mediterranean as Erythrian, regarded at present as Miocene.
Along the shore ‘storm-beaches’ are common ; in some places the
shells form well-marked zones; while the higher beaches and reefs
156 9 Messrs. Barron & Hume—Eastern Desert of Egypt.
are distinguished more or less from the lower by a different fauna.
The disturbed reef has been formed previous to the formation of the
parallel ranges of Jebel Hsh and Zeit, thus bringing up the fault-
movement to very recent times.
In this area there is an inversion of the stratigraphical arrangement,
the higher beds being the older, the reefs being formed during
a period of secular elevation. There is also apparently a long break
between the two reefs, the explanation suggested being as follows :—
The first great Tertiary earth-movement in the Red Sea region
was previous to the Upper Miocene and subsequent to the Hocene,
the latter being faulted, and beds of the former deposited in the
troughs produced. Later, as the result of further movements, coral
reefs were formed on the sides of the igneous hills, but as soon as
(owing to continued elevation and denudation) valleys had formed,
down which torrents carried masses of pebbles, etc., the conditions
became unfavourable for the formation of true reefs, and only gravels
were deposited. This view assumes the existence of marked pluvial
conditions, as maintained by previous writers, and it was only when
the present desert conditions set in that the reefs again began
to grow.
2. Pliocene.—Mayer-Eymar and Dawson have both regarded the
Nile Valley as an arm of the sea in recent times as far up as Assuan.
A foraminiferal limestone, found by Mr. Barron near Hrment and
which has been described by Mr. F. Chapman, contained two out of
five species described not older than Miocene, while one is not
known before Pliocene times, thus proving the above theory. Beds
of the same age are found in Wadi Qena. They form a plateau
consisting of flint conglomerates, white limestone, and at the base
marls and fissile sandstones which vary greatly, the limestones
being lenticular and thinning out to the east. The conglomerates
are formed by the denudation of the Eocene limestone. The
succession of these beds is as follows :—
(1) On the boundary-line with the Eocene rocks, breccias of flinty
and cherty limestone with lenticles of limestone interbedded.
(2) Conglomerates of well-rounded pebbles.
(9) Pure white limestones, perhaps partly siliceous.
(4) Marls and clays.
(0) Sandy clays.
These beds are regarded as Pliocene on three grounds—(1) They
have no resemblance to known Miocene beds in Hgypt; (2) they
are identical in all essential particulars with the foraminiferal series
of the Nile Valley ; and (8) the Pleistocene gravels are younger and
unconformable to them.
These beds owe their origin to the faulting which produced the
Nile Valley and Wadi Qena, and there must have been a subsidence
of at least 400 metres to allow of their deposition.
The Pliocene has been a period of great movement marked by the
formation of the great rifts such as the Red Sea, with the invasion
of the fauna of the southern seas, the Gulf of Suez, the great scarp
of the Red Sea Hills and its parallel ranges, and the main trend of
Messrs. Barron & Hume—Eastern Desert of Egypt. 157
the Nile Valley and Wadi Qena, the two latter being in part arms of
the sea extending far into the land.
3. Miocene Beds.—There are no new facts to be added to the
results obtained by Mitchell and Mayer-Eymar in this area.
4. HKocene Beds.—These can be divided into two main series—
(a) a thick group of limestones which are locally named Serrai
Limestones, and (b) a thick group of shales, marls, and marly
limestones termed by the Survey the ‘ sna Shales.’
(a) The summit of the plateau is a bed containing a small
nummulite, underlying which is a nodular limestone forming
a distinct, precipitous, undercut cliff 5 metres high. Beneath this
are limestones with flint-bands -having a thickness of 200 metres,
and having at their base a chalky limestone weathering pink. The
total thickness of this series is 225 metres.
(b) The Esna shales are composed of yellow limestones (Pecten
Marls) forming the base, succeeded by green shales, in the middle
of which is a limestone, the total thickness being 122 metres.
The Eocene here belongs to the ‘Libysche Stufe’ of Zittel or
Londinian stage.
By the discovery of the unconformity between the Hocene and
Cretaceous strata in Wadi Hammama, the presence of hitherto
unsuspected Eocene has been proved on the eastern side of the
Red Sea Hills, such as the faulted area of Jebel Duwi and Nakheil,
near Qosseir, and the limestone range of Jebel Mellaha, near Jebel
Zeit. The former is a bold white cliff facing south and dipping
away at angles of 15 to 20 degrees, and is the result of complicated
folding and strike- and dip-faulting, the flinty series being some-
times tilted at angles of 40 degrees. and lying in succession against
Nubian Sandstone, metamorphic rocks, and granite, as in Jebel
Hamrawein. Jebel Nakheil is an Eocene and Cretaceous syncline
in which the succession is the same as that near Qena. Other
outliers are noted in Wadi Hamrawein, the country north of
Wadi Saga, at the confluence of Wadi Safaja and Wadi Wasif, and
to the north-west of Wadi Um Tagher.
Jebel Mellaha.—Professor Zittel, in his map, following Schwein-
furth’s researches, refers the whole series to the Cretaceous, but the
latter seems to have become aware of the presence of Hocene later.
This range is composed of the same beds as Jebel Nakheil.
The Eocene beds have covered the whole of the Eastern Desert
north of lat. 26° N., but have been entirely removed except where
let down by faults. They are everywhere unconformable to the
Cretaceous rocks.
5. Cretaceous Limestones.—After pointing out some gross errors
recently published by Dr. M. Blanckenhorn, the most important
points to be noted are these :— mghee
(1) The occurrence of a Cretaceous plateau at Wadi Hammama
containing numerous Cephalopoda, Ptychoceras, etc., and a coprolite
bed about one metre thick, and extending over 20 kilometres to the
north, where it runs to ground at the foot of Abu Had. The coprolite
bed contains 50 per cent. phosphate of lime.
158 Messrs. Barron & Hume—Eastern Desert of Egypt.
(2) There is a distinct unconformity between the Hsna Shales
and the Cretaceous.
(3) Cretaceous Plateau at the foot of Jebel Duwi.—This was
hitherto scarcely known, and differs from the previously described
area in the absence of the Ptychoceras, etc., and by their replacement
by large Nautili, associated with Libycoceras Ismaeli and beds of
Trigonoarca multidentata, etc., below which comes a bed crowded
with Ostrea Ville. A strong unconformity is also here present
between these beds and the Eocene. At the north end of this
range, near Saga Plain, the coprolite beds are of unusual thickness.
(4) Confluence of Wadi Safuja and Wadi Wasif.—Here there are
two well-developed coprolite beds, and a very prominent layer of
Baculites. The conclusion arrived at is that the Cretaceous lime-
stones of the area described are of shallower-water origin than those
occurring to the north in Wadi Araba, and entirely Campanian in
age, being characterized by the abundance of their oysters, their
well-marked coprolite beds, and small thickness. This main type
is of great paleontological variability, the beds near Qena, Qosseir,
and Mellaha differing in essential particulars.
Gypseous Deposits near the Red Sea.—These occur only in the
‘Raised Beach’ area, and are almost always intimately connected
with the limestones of this series. They crop out from under these
beds, and, by their invariable unconformity and constant height
above sea-level, suggest a “plain of marine denudation.” They
are the Lower Eocene and Cretaceous Limestones which have
been altered, not from below as has been previously believed, but
from above, as will be shown in the Report on Western Sinai by
Mr. Barron.
6. The Nubian Shales and Sandstone.—These consist of soft green
and black carbonaceous shales and marls, and dark-brown and red
sandstone. ‘The former being easily weathered are accountable for
the formation of the large plains which are met with in the areas
occupied by this series. The sandstones show evidence of ripple-
marking, sun-cracks, rain-prints, and worm-tracks. In the softer
upper beds, the vertebrae of a (?) Mosasaurus and pieces of fossil
wood in excellent condition were found. It is everywhere
unconformable to the underlying igneous rocks.
The age of the deposit in this district is Santonian or Lower
Senonian, as shown by a bed of oysters found in the sandstone near
El Geita by Mr. Barron. No traces of Carboniferous fauna have
been discovered. It is later than the igneous range, and not earlier
as maintained by Floyer and Mitchell.
PAR ree lide
Iqnzous anp Meramorruic Rocks.—These rocks, forming a wide
band running parallel to the Gulf of Suez and the Red Sea,
practically constitute the mass of the Red Sea Hills. The latitude
of 27 degrees N. closely agrees with an important geological
boundary, the granites playing a considerable part among the
components of the mountain ranges north of this line, while south
Messrs. Barron & Hume—Eastern Desert of Egypt. 159
of it the metamorphic rocks become increasingly prevalent as
the Qena-Qosseir road is approached, the granite forming sharp
isolated ridges rising abruptly from among low hills of sheared
diabase or slates. Almost on the southern edge of the area, well-
marked gneisses and schists give rise to the range of Meeteg, whose
rugged peaks dominate the upper portion of Wadi Sodmein.
Meramorpuic Rocxs.—In the following pages only the most
important new facts can be touched upon, these being briefly as
follows :—
Gneiss, etc., near Qosseir.—The northern track from Qena_ to
Qosseir, after passing through a granite and dolerite region, suddenly
enters a district composed of a grey, slightly schistose rock, breaking
off into long splinters. Through it run numerous solution veins
of quartz, bands of calcite and carbonate of iron, all of which have
been extensively worked. ‘These slates, having a distinct satiny
lustre, and forming low ridges on the western edges of the two high
ranges of El] Rebshi and Meeteg, dip steeply south-west, but at the
base of the former mountain system are replaced by underlying
green phyllites, into which numerous dykes of dolerite have been
intruded, quartz veins being also common.
The main range of Meeteg itself is composed of a still older
series of quartz-mica schists, the younger members of which are
of a yellowish colour, splitting readily into blocks more or less
cubical in outline. Near the base of the mountain small veins
of granite penetrate into the schists, in some places being pinched
into these in a lenticular manner. The core of the range is com-
posed of a massive red and closely banded grey gneiss, which,
in a fine section displayed in the upper portion of Wadi Sodmein,
is seen to be successively overlaid by a gabbro, mica-schists, @ massive
dark dolerite, hornblende-schists, and reddish-white mottled slates.
From a little north of this point the valley wanders through a maze
of hills of grey and green colour, consisting of micaceous, chloritic,
and hornblendic ‘schists,’ capped by beds of dolerite and diabase,
erushed or uncrushed. A question of terminology makes a difficulty,
as the same term schist is here applied to these rocks in the foothills,
which are far less compact than the typical varieties occurring in
the main range.
Sheared Diabases and Dolerites.—The Wadi Sodmein section is
useful because it shows the relative age of the gneiss and the sheared
diabases, ashes, and other volcanic rocks, which occupy an enormous
area of the southern portion of the Red Sea Hills, viz. 2,500 square
kilometres approximately, being the main constituent of the region
to the north-west and west of Qosseir, except where sedimentary hills
have been faulted in. The sheared diabases and compacted ashes
chiefly occur in this district, but further west, as in Wadi Atolla,
are replaced by massive dolerites, which in many other localities
are found in close association with volcanic members of many
different types. This volcanic series is by no means limited to
the area above mentioned, but reappears throughout the whole of
the Red Sea region at most unexpected localities. Thus, in the
160 Messrs. Barron & Hume—Lastern Desert of Egypt.
central range, dolerites and other basic rocks are seen capping some
of the highest granite hills, still remaining as a thin coating, which
otherwise has been almost entirely removed by denudation. Again,
the base of the same range is fringed by a belt of the same character,
the presence of which is probably directly referable to faulting on
a large scale.
South-west of the central range, too, extends the Fatiri Hl Iswid
district, consisting of range after range,in which dolerites, serpentines,
compacted ashes, now practically slates, and agglomerates play an
important part. While on the south of lat. 27° N. these rocks
only give rise to iow hills of complex character, to the north
of that line they take part in the formation of scenic features of
the first magnitude, rising to 1,800 metres in Jebel Dokhan, and
composing some of the principal longitudinal ranges forming the
eastern boundary of the Red Sea Hills.
The members of this volcanic series are of somewhat different
character from those previously mentioned, dark andesites being as
conspicuous as the dolerite sheets associated with them, while the
sheared diabases have been replaced by tuffs and ashes far less
compact than those near Qosseir. The agglomerates, too, are very
striking in the El Urf chain, where blocks of ‘imperial porphyry ’
are included among the rock fragments. Indeed, the most interesting
member of this series is the imperial porphyry of Jebel Dokhan,
typical specimens of which are withamite, containing andesites,
though the same mineral is present in some of the tuffs.
Relative Age of the Volcanic Series.—It has already been
stated that the dolerites, diabases, etc., rest upon the Metamorphic
Schists and Gneisses, and are younger than the latter, but it
is equally possible to show that the gneissose granites and
diorites, which underlie them over wide areas, are of still later
date. Thus, to take a few typical cases, a mass of mica-diorite has
been intruded into the agglomerate, while in Wadi Hsh, near
Qosseir, the sides of the valley are formed of grey granite which is
overlaid by the compact dolerite, but the former has sent numerous
veins into the latter. Other examples will be mentioned in the
report, but one of the best is close to the pass leading from Wadi
Um Sidri to Um Messaid, where a dyke of red microgranite in the
andesite has for a time prevented another vein of grey granite from
penetrating into the lava, but finally, after running parallel for
a short distance, the latter has succeeded in bursting through, and
has sent long veins and branches into the porphyry.
Granites.—The rocks of granitic character in the Red Sea Hills
are sharply divided into two groups, giving rise to very different
types of scenery. The most prominent variety is a coarse red
granite, poor in mica, which forms some of the finest summits north
of and on the latitude of 27 degrees N., these being usually
characterized by steepness, the mountains being seamed by bouldery
ravines which cause the crests to have a highly serrated outline,
while nearly all the lower country consists of bouldery ridges of
a gneissose biotite, or hornblende granite, which has its south-eastern
Professor T. G. Bonney—Schists in Lepontine Alps. 161
boundary along a line joining Ras El Barud and Missikat El Qukh
ranges. This gneissose granite is especially conspicuous owing to
the abundance of the dykes of quartz-felsite and dolerite which vein
it, in a north-east and south-west direction, the differential weathering
of the two giving rise to a typical alternation of parallel ridges and
sandy valleys to which the name ‘dyke-country’ may be applied.
Where the above two varieties come in contact, it can be clearly
seen that the red granite is the younger of the two.
GENERAL RECAPITULATION.
We are now in a position to give the general succession for the
Arabian Desert between Jebel Gharib and the Qena-Qosseir line.
1. The metamorphic are older than the igneous rocks.
2. The gneiss of Meeteg is the oldest member of the metamorphic
series, the schists coming next in order, followed by slates, grauwacké
(altered ash), sheared diabases, and dolerites.
3. Volcanic action had already begun during the period of
formation of the grauwackés and slates, as the sheared diabases and
dolerites are in places closely associated with them, but the main
mass of the dolerite is younger than the slates. Thus the next in
succession is a volcantc series in the south, consisting mainly of
dolerites and sheared diabases, and in the north of dolerites,
andesites, tuffs, and agglomerates.
4. These are themselves underlain, and in most cases intruded
into, by a third series, a quartz-diorite or grey granite, in many
cases gneissose.
5. Through the volcanics and grey granite rise masses of red
granite, which may be almost contemporaneous with dykes of quartz-
felsite and dolerite, seaming the members of the preceding series.
IV.—Scuists anp Scurstose Rocks 1x tHE Lepontine ALps:
Rerty to Criticisms By Proressor A. Hem.
By Professor T. G. Bonney, D.Se., LL.D., F.R.S,
OME three years ago, on referring to the twenty-fifth volume
of the “ Beitriige zur Geologischen Karte der Schweiz,” I found
Professor Heim had devoted a few pages (pp. 316-819) of that
work to my criticisms of his attempts to prove that Jurassic rocks
had been metamorphosed into schists containing authigenous garnets,
staurolites, etc. Had he brought forward any new fact of importance
or pointed out any serious error in my work I should have replied
at once, but as he was unable to do this, and as the justice of one of
my criticisms was indirectly admitted in the petrographical appendix
by Dr. C. Schmidt, I allowed more pressing and interesting matters
to take precedence of one which had become chiefly personal.
On reading Professor Heim’s remarks I perceive that we labour
under a similar disadvantage, viz., that neither is a master of the
language in which the other writes. He complains of a difficulty
in understanding my meaning, though I think it was plain enough
to most of my English friends. I am in the same position, because
he appears to me to avoid the direct issues and to repeat assertions
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. IV. ll
162 Professor T. G. Bonney—Schists in Lepontine Alps.
which I have challenged. So, before going further, I will state the
dispute as clearly and concisely as I can. It arose out of a paper
read at the London Meeting of the International Geological Congress
in 1888.1 Then, or soon afterwards, Professor Heim made the
following assertions: (1) that at Guttannen stems of a plant of
Carboniferous age had been found in a gneiss; (2) that near
Andermatt a crystalline marble was associated with a Jurassic
limestone, so that they must be of the same geological age; (38)
that in the Lepontine Alps a transition could be traced between
fossiliferous Jurassic rocks and schists with authigenous garnets,
staurolites, etc.
I have disputed the accuracy of all these statements. As regards
(1) it is now admitted that the supposed stems are not organisms,
but merely imitative markings. Hence this assertion is invalidated,
but, as I have apparently made a mistake as to the nature of the
rock, neither side in this controversy can ‘score honours.’? About
(2) there is nothing fresh to be said. I have discussed Prof. Heim’s
evidence, which he has not been able to strengthen, and think
myself justified in claiming a verdict of ‘not proven,’ even if I have
not shown his interpretation to be improbable.* My remarks
accordingly will be confined to (3). Here sections are more
numerous; the issue is simpler, and the initial difference between
us largely concerns matters of fact. In the first place, Prof. Heim
maintains that I have misunderstood him, and that he never affirmed
those altered Mesozoic sedimentary rocks to be true crystalline
schists. The very lax use of the term ‘schist’ by Continental and
some English authors undoubtedly leads to confusion in expression
as well as in thought, and I am prepared to admit that it might some-
times be difficult to draw a hard and fast line between a schistose
rock (i.e. cleavage followed by a certain amount of secondary
mineral development) and some foliated schists. This, however,
does not really affect the present issue. Professor Heim asserted
that certain schists with authigenous garnets, staurolites, etc., were
proved to be of Jurassic age, not only by stratigraphical evidence,
but also, where the minerals were less well developed, by the
presence of fossils. I asserted that the schists with garnets, etc.,
were both truly crystalline and belonged to a group distinct from
the Jurassic rocks in question; that this group could be shown to
be much older than the Trias, and to differ in important respects
from the fossiliferous schistose Jurassic rocks, which never contain
authigenous garnets, etc., but only certain hydrous silicates, pre-
senting a merely superficial resemblance to garnets, staurolites, etc.
In other words, I gave reasons to show that Professor Heim’s
interpretation of the stratigraphical facts was untenable, and his
identification of the important minerals was incorrect.
1 Compte Rendu de la 4™° Session, p. 80. See also Natwre, Sept. 27 and Oct. 4,
1888, and Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xlvi (1890), p. 286.
2 Grou. Mae., 1900, p. 215.
3 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xlvi (1896), p. 67; vol. 1 (1894), p. 285; vol. litt
(1897), p. 16.
Professor T. G. Bonney—Schists in Lepontine Alps. 163
Passing now to the stratigraphy, I claim to have proved—
(a) That the schistose and fossiliferous Jurassic rocks in the
Scopi and Nufenen districts overlie the rauchwacke.!
(b) That this rauchwacke (commonly a friable yellowish lime-
stone, sometimes including layers of gypsum, but without any
marked indications of metamorphism) often contains fragments of
crystalline rocks corresponding with those which are elsewhere
associated with the black garnet-bearing schists. Also, that this
rauchwacke differs conspicuously from the crystalline limestone or
dolomite, which occurs both on the northern side of the Campolungo
Pass (south of the Val Bedretto) and in association with similar
dark schists above Binn in the Binnenthal.
(c) That the rauchwacke generally overlies the group of crystal-
line schists, and where it is apparently interstratified with them
a closer examination always suggests that it is a later rock ‘ nipped’
in by overfolding and thrust faulting.
(d) In the noted Val Canaria section, where, according to Professor
Hein, crystalline schists* are included ina fold of which an ordinary
rauchwacke forms the base, not only does this rauchwacke contain
fragments of more than one variety of the schists supposed to overlie
it, but also the band of black garnet-bearing schists occurs three
times, and the other beds are not in pairs. These facts prove
a simple fold to be impossible,’ and if faults be once admitted the
key of Professor Heim’s position is surrendered.
Tn addition to this I have shown, from stratigraphical, chemical, and
microscopic evidence, that the schistose Jurassic rocks and this group
of schists, locally garnet-bearing (a group which I have examined
in many places from the Viso to the Gross Glockner, and to which
I refer in my papers as the ‘Upper Schists’), are quite distinct one
from the other; the only possible confusion arising from specimens
either badly preserved or in which their distinctive characters have
been locally obliterated by extreme pressure. This, however,
is no ground for asserting contemporaneity. In such rocks the
metamorphism has been destructive, not constructive.
I pass, then, to the mineral differences. The group of schists, of
which the dark one containing garnets is a member, consists, as
I have shown elsewhere, of truly crystalline rocks, no less in the
Val Canaria section than in the rest of the Alps, and never affords
a trace of a fossil. Here and there in its dark schists are little
streaks of crystalline calcite. These to a lively imagination may seem
the ghosts of departed belemnites, but to a more prosaic mind they
appear only a vein product. The rocks are true crystalline schists,
no doubt of sedimentary origin, but greatly metamorphosed. They
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xlvi (1890), p. 219, and vol. xlix (1893), p. 89.
2? T suppose trom what I have read that Professor Heim will refuse to call these
rocks crystalline schists. If so, there is no erystalline schist—either garnet-mica,
cale-mica, staurolite-mica, or quartz-mica schist—in any part of the Alps that
I know of.
3 The situation of the outcrops and their breadths make it impossible to escape
this difficulty by supposing one black garnet schist to have been the top bed and to be
doubled back on itself.
164 Professor T. G. Bonney—Schists in Lepontine Alps.
have been affected by pressure, but they were crystalline schists
before that acted, for the larger minerals are sometimes distorted
or even crushed, the garnets in one or two localities being distinctly
cleaved. Pressure, in fact, has injured more than it has originated
the crystalline condition. But the Jurassic rocks are only schistose ;
they have been affected by pressure, and it has produced the usual
mineral changes on a comparatively small scale. But besides this,
in some localities a number of ovoid and of rudely prismatic bodies
have formed (the knoten and prismen of Von Fritsch). These, which
occur along with fossils (belemnites, bits of crinoids, etc.), are not
either garnets or staurolites, but only very impure silicates, more or
less hydrous; some probably belong to the chloritoid, others perhaps
to the scapolite group, with possibly a third mineral of the same
general character.'| Professor Heim asks almost ina tone of triumph *
whether I have not seen ‘die Verquetschungen und die Veranderung
(Marmorisirung) in der Structur der Belemniten . . . . die
ganz mit der Umanderung des Muttergesteines parallel geht.”
Certainly I have: indeed have mentioned it (loc. cit., p. 219). But
by this question he shows that he can have given very little time to
the study of metamorphism. Otherwise he would have known that
this ‘marmorosis,’ notwithstanding its fine name, proves but little,
for calcite is one of those minerals which are always ready to
crystallize, and particularly so when it is ‘organic.’ We constantly
see this illustrated in rocks (especially Palaeozoic) from English
localities. There are no signs of pressure, yet fragments of
fossils may be often found under the microscope to become partially
or even wholly crystalline, to the obliteration of the original
structure. I have also seen tests or spines of echinids from the
Chalk break as if they were crystalline calcite, and a fractured
stalactite showing the cleavage surface of large crystals.° Professor
Heim, however, seeks to minimize my criticisms by intimating
that I am a prejudiced witness, and have from the first shown
signs of a distinct bias (tendenz). Of this I am convicted by
my own confession, because I stated that, when I saw the
specimens on which he rested his case, and which he exhibited at
ee House in 1888, “
“+1061 ‘OVIN "10d
174 Notices of Memoirs—Dr. D. H. Scott-— Fossil Plants.
For instance, Heligoland in the year 800 is shown in Myers’ map
to be of great size; this is in conflict with our curve, as the year
800 being near the high-water period, the island should have been
small in size. On investigation we find that we have testimony
equally strong that the island was small at that time. The description
of the island by Adam of Bremen shows that it was not much larger
than now in the time of Charlemagne (768 to 814), (‘ Principles,”
9th ed., p. 829). (For this map of Heligoland in 800, see Von Hoff’s
* Geschichte,” etc., vol. 1, p. 56.)
Another item tending to invalidate our curve is the legend as to the
submergence of lands now beneath the sea in Cardigan Bay, Wales.
Pennant states that these lands—the Cantre’r Gwaelod—were over-
whelmed by the sea about the year 500 (Pennant’s “ Tours in Wales,”
vol. ii, p. 274). In “The Gossiping Guide to Wales,” however, we
read, ‘“‘ We are not aware that any date is assigned ” to this disaster
(p. 37). It seems that what little is known of this inundation is
derived from a poem by one Prince Gwyddno, who flourished between
the years 460 and 520. There is no evidence that Gwyddno witnessed
the event he describes, and it can be readily surmised that he merely
reduced to verse the current traditions of an event that may have
occurred three or four generations before his time. If this was the
case, the Sarn Badrig and its attached legends would be evidence
confirmatory of our curve. In any case we are assured that the date
fixed by Pennant is uncertain and offers no reliable testimony
against us.
(To be continued in our next Number.)
IN(@ tere SS) Oia Vises VE @ra Se
On THE StrRuctuRE AND AFFINITIES OF F'ossIL PLANTS FROM
THE Panmozoric Rocks. IV. Tur Seep-Like FRUCTIFICATION
or Leprpocarroy, a GENUS OF LycopopIACEOUS CONES FROM
THE CARBONIFEROUS Formation. By D. H. Scorr, M.A.,
Ph.D., F.R.S., Hon. Keeper of the Jodrell Laboratory, Royal
Gardens, Kew.
SHORT account of the new genus Lepidocarpon has been given
in a note communicated to the Royal Society last August ;* the
present paper contains a full, illustrated description of the fossils in
question, together with a discussion of their morphology and affinities.
The strobilus of Lepidocarpon Lomazi, the Coal-measure species, is,
in its earlier condition, in all respects that of a Lepidostrobus, of the
type of L. Oldhamius.
In each megasporangium, however, a single megaspore or embryo-
sac alone came to perfection, filling almost the whole sporangial
cavity, but accompanied by the remains of its abortive sister-cells.
An integument ultimately grew up from the sporophyll, completely
enclosing the megasporangium, and leaving only a narrow slit-like
1 “¢ Note on the Occurrence of a Seed-like Fructification in certain Paleozoic
Lycopods’’: Roy. Soc. Proc., vol. lxvii, p. 306.
Reviews — Prof. Weinschenck—The Graphite Mines of Ceylon. 175
opening, or micropyle, along the top. As shown in specially favour-
able specimens, both of Lepidocarpon Lomazi and of L. Wildianum,
the more ancient Burntisland form, the functional megaspore became
filled by a large-celled prothallus, resembling that of the recent
Isoétes or Selaginella. The whole body, consisting of the sporophyll,
bearing the integumented megasporangium and its contents, became
detached from the strobilus, and in this isolated condition is identical
with the ‘seed’ described by Williamson under the name of Cardio-
arpon anomalum, which, however, proves to be totally distinct from
the Cordaitean seed so named by Carruthers.
The seed-like organs of Lepidocarpon are regarded by the author
as presenting close analogies with true seeds, but as differing too
widely from the seeds of any known Spermophyta to afford any
proof of affinity. The case appears rather to be one of parallel or
convergent development, and not to indicate any genetic connection
between the Lycopods and the Gymnosperms, or other Phanerogams.
ie, oS VP Es WV Se
—
B®. Weinscuenck. Zur KeEnnrnisS DER GRAPHITLAGERSTATTEN.
TIl. Dre GRAPHITLAGERSTATTEN DER INsEL Cryton. Abh.
k. bay. akad. Wiss., Cl. 11, Bd. xxi, Abth. 11; Miinchen, 1900.
ROFESSOR Weinschenck has examined a series of rock and
vein specimens from the graphite mines of Ragedara, Ampe,
Pushena, and Humbuluwa, in Ceylon, collected by Dr. Griinling.
He discusses the nature of the granulitic rocks and the mode of
occurrence and origin of the graphite.
A general petrographical description of the granulitic rocks is
given, illustrated by three plates of microphotographs. Massive
habit, granulitic structure, and variable chemical composition are
characteristic. Except in the more basic varieties, intergrowths of
two felspars are very noticeable. The granulitic rocks include
a continuous series ranging from aplites (weiss-steine) to pyroxene-
plagioclase rocks (trapp-granuliten) and even pyroxenites. A rather
oily lustre and greenish colour are very characteristic features. The
constituent minerals are in a remarkably fresh condition, except in
the immediate neighbourhood of the graphite veins. It is interesting
to note that Professor Weinschenck does not mention any pleochroic
monoclinic pyroxene.
There are certain other rocks in Ceylon which include coarse-
grained dolomites and ‘cipolins,’ containing blue apatite and contact
minerals such as forsterite, chondrodite, phlogopite, and spinel, and
also the peculiar andalusite, sillimanite, and corundum bearing rocks
described by Lacroix.
The granulitic rocks show no trace of the operation of dynamic
causes; they are regarded as an eruptive mass which may form
a single unit or be compound in character. Ihe occurrence of
coarse crystalline dolomites in the midst of the granulitic series
seems to show that different eruptive units are separated by contact
176 Reviews—Prof. Weinschenck— The Graphite Mines of Ceylon.
rocks. The existence of still younger eruptive masses of granite has
not yet been demonstrated, for the few rocks as yet described from
Ceylon as granite are rather varieties of the granulitic series.
Professor Weinschenck compares the Saxon and Ceylon granulites,
thinking with Naumann that the former are truly eruptive rocks.
Had the Ceylon rocks been studied before those of Saxony this view
would have been more widely held. They differ from the Saxon
rocks chiefly in their non-schistose character and coarser grain.
Lehmann regarded the peculiarities of the Saxon granulites as the
result of dynamo-metamorphism. He regarded the microperthitic
intergrowths of two felspars as the result of such a process, but as
these are characteristic of quite unaltered rocks in Ceylon they may
also be original in the Saxon rocks. The absence of sericite in
the latter presents a difficulty to those who favour the dynamo-
metamorphic view. Lehmann supposed that its place was taken by
biotite, but this mineral is not infrequently an original constituent
in Ceylon rocks. Garnets are characteristic of typical granulites,
and their presence is the result of chemical peculiarities in the
magma, or peculiar physical conditions obtaining at the time of its
consolidation. The chemical composition of Ceylon and Saxon
granulites resembles those of truly igneous rocks. Perhaps in
Saxony we are dealing only with the outer margin of an eruptive
mass intruded into surrounding schistose rocks, while in Ceylon
the heart of the eruptive mass is exposed. In both cases there has
been extensive magmatic differentiation, and this may be considered
characteristic of granulites in general.
It is only in immediate contact with the graphite veins that the
granulite matrix is chemically altered and finally impregnated with
graphite. Fragments of rocks included in the veins are also specially
affected. In the altered rocks the felspars are largely changed to
nontronite, a feature associated with the occurrence of graphite in
the Passau district also. The pyroxenes change to a fine scaly
material with aggregate polarization. Mica and garnet alter less
readily. Impregnation with rutile and titanite is characteristic, as
in the Bavario-Bohemian area. Beside the rock fragments, pieces
of various minerals occur in the veins—quartz, pyrite, orthoclase,
microperthite, apatite, biotite, augite—the formation of these being
previous to that of the graphite, while calcite, and sometimes biotite,
seem to have been deposited contemporaneously.
In the Passau district (Bavaria) the formation of nontronite and
impregnation with graphite affect the whole schistose complex,
while in Ceylon the graphite occurs in veins. This difference
depends chiefly on the harder and more massive character of the
Ceylon rocks. In Ceylon, Siberia, and Cumberland the graphite
occurs in veins; in Passau and Taconderoga (U.S.A.) in veins and
beds; in Bohemia in beds: these differences depend on the varied
character of the matrix and not on different modes of origin of the
graphite. Emanations of carbon monoxide, with or without
cyanogen-bearing compounds, may have given rise to the graphite
veins ; while the introduction of iron oxide and manganese peroxide
Reports and Proceedings— Geological Society of London. 177
in their neighbourhood may argue that metal carbonyls were also
present.
Finally, Professor Weinschenck would suppose the following to
have been the sequence of events in Ceylon:—A fluid magma
intruded into beds of unknown age consolidated as a_ peculiar
‘schlierig*® rock, while contact-metamorphic structures were
developed in surrounding beds. Contraction-joints developed on
cooling, allowed the formation of pegmatites, including pure quartz
veins to some extent. But, contemporaneously with the formation
of the pegmatite, there were emanations of carbon monoxide and
cyanogen-bearing compounds, which followed the same paths as
the pegmatites and then gave rise to the graphite veins. The
system of veins traversing the whole massif played in later
mountain movements the role of buffer, the soft yielding mineral
absorbing the mechanical effects, and thus the Ceylon granulites
remained unaltered by dynamic changes.
I have attempted in this review merely to give an abstract of
Professor Weinschenck’s views as expressed in his important paper.
A. K. Coomara-Swanmy.
a Oormieos AND PROCHEDINGS.
GeronogicaL Soctery or Lonpon.
J.— February 15th, 1901.—J. J. H. Teall, Esq., M.A., V.P.RS.,
President, in the Chair.
ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING.
The reports of the Council and of the Library and Museum
Committee for the year 1900, proofs of which had been previously
distributed to the Fellows, were read. The Council stated that,
although there was a decrease in the number of Fellows, the financial
prosperity of the Society continued undiminished.
The report of the Library and Museum Committee enumerated
the increasingly extensive additions made to the Society’s Library.
The reports having been adopted, the President handed the
apes =
Wollaston Medal, awarded to Professor Charles Barrois, F.M.G.S.,
of Lille, to Sir Archibald Geikie, for transmission to the recipient,
addressing him as follows :—Sir Archibald Geikie,—
In these days of specialization few men are endowed with those faculties which
enable them to contribute with marked ability to all branches of our many-sided
science; but among those few Professor Barrois must unquestionably be ranked,
In the monograph on the Caleaire d’Erbray and many other papers he has
established his reputation as a paleontologist ; in numerous Memoirs on the Granitic
and Metamorphic Rocks of Brittany he figures as an accomplished petrologist ;
while in the many geological maps of the same district he has constructed a lasting
monument to his skill and energy as a geological surveyor.
His published work represents a vast accumulation ot tacts carefully observed,
clearly described, and lucidly arranged. More than this, it is often full of suggestive-
ness. He has had the satisfaction of initiating lines of research which have been
followed up with great success by others. ie ;
It was he who first taught us how to zone our English Chalk by the aid of the
fossils which it contains, and the friendships which he formed during the progress
9
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. Iv. 12
178 Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London.
of that work have been strengthened by the lapse of time. He might repeat with
truth the words of another visitor to these Islands from the other side of the Channel :
vent, vidi, vici.
In his recent publications on Brittany he has correlated the breadth and character
of the metamorphic zones surrounding the granitic masses with the thickness of the
cover under which the intrusions took place, and has suggested ideas that may prove
of great importance in connection with such questions as the origin of the crystalline
schists and igneous magmas.
But he has aided the progress of geology in other ways than as an original worker.
The illustrious pupil of an illustrious master, he has contributed to maintain the great
reputation of Lille as a centre of geological teaching; while his extensive knowledge
and exceptional organizing ability have ever been at the disposal of the International
Geological Congress and kindred associations.
Many years have elapsed since I had the privilege of making his acquaintance, and
it is therefore with the greatest pleasure that I now ask you to transmit to him
the Wollaston Medal, which has been awarded to him by the Council as a mark
of their appreciation of the great services that he has rendered to all branches of
Geological Science.
Sir Archibald Geikie replied in the following words :—Mr.
President,—
It has been to my friend Professor Barrois a matter of very keen regret that he is
prevented from being here to-day, to renew his personal relations with the Fellows
of the Geological Society, and to receive from them the highest distinction which it is
in their power to bestow. We must all deeply sympathize with him in the causes that
deprive us of his presence. Bowed down by one of the greatest afflictions that can
befall a father—the death of a son in the full bloom and promise of early manhood—
he has manfully struggled with his numerous duties, until at last his health has given
way under the strain. Let us hope that he may soon be restored to his former
vigour, and be able to resume the researches in Brittany and the detailed description
of them on which he has so long been engaged. He has asked me to receive this
Medal for him, and I count it a great privilege and honour to be the intermediary
between the Geological Society of London and one of the most distinguished and
widely esteemed geologists of Hurope. Professor Barrois has sent a letter of thanks,
which I will now read :—
‘Mr. PRESIDENT, —
“* Allow me to express my gratitude for the new honour which the Geological
Society has bestowed upon me, by the award of the Wollaston Medal, as I cannot
but recall that the Council has on a former occasion encouraged me in my scientific
work by the award of the Bigsby Medal.
“«T have since made long wanderings along the Channel cliffs on both sides, from
chalk to granite, for the sake of science, in the steps of Dela Beche, Fitton, Godwin-
Austen, and the founders of stratigraphical geology ; and itis for me a very unexpected
erent to see my name written to day, for ever, with theirs, in the Proceedings of the
ociety.
“‘No distinction can be more gratifying to a geologist than to receive its highest
award from the Council of the illustrious Society which for nearly a century has
extended our knowledge in every branch of geology, and promoted progress in every
part of the earth. I so greatly appreciate this great honour, that I feel as if the
work that I have been able to accomplish was too small to merit the Wollaston
Medal, granted as a reward, but rather as a friendly incitation to go on in my labour—
“upward and onward.’ ”’
CHARLES BaRROIs.
“Lille, February 9th, 1901.’’
The President then presented the Balance of the Proceeds of the
Wollaston Donation Fund to Mr. Arthur Walton Rowe, M.B., M.S.,
of Margate, addressing him as follows :—Dr. Rowe,—
It will, I am sure, be a source of gratification to you to be associated with
Professor Barrois on the present occasion, for you have done much to confirm and
extend the principles which he first applied to the elucidation of the structure of the
Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 179
English Chalk. We recognize, however, that, although your work has been of very
great stratigraphical importance, your main object is biological, and that the task
you have set yourself is that of working out the evolution of organic forms durine
the Upper Cretaceous period. ;
In your paper on Mieraster you have set an example which I trust will be followed.
You have shown how it is possible to deal with a vast mass of material, so as to
bring out the main facts of evolution, without burdening science with hosts of new
names and long lists of synonyms.
By the application of the dental engine to the preparation, and of micro-photography
to the illustration, of fossils, you have also rendered signal service to science. _ ,
The Council of the Geological Society, in making this award, have been desirous
of expressing their gratitude to you for the work that you have already accomplished,
and their lively sense of favours to come. ;
In handing the Murchison Medal, awarded to Mr. Alfred John
Jukes- Browne, B.A., of H.M. Geological Survey, to Mr. W. Whitaker,
for transmission to the recipient, the President addressed him as
follows :—Mr. Whitaker,—
Mr. Jukes-Browne, whose absence we all deeply regret, has aided the progress
of geology in many ways. His numerous writings on the Upper Cretaceous Rocks
are too well known to make it necessary for me to refer to them in detail. He has,
from the first, recognized the enormous importance of associating palwontological
with stratigraphical work, and by original research, as well as by a critical study
of the writings of others, has made himself master of the geology of that period
to which he has especially devoted himself.
But he possesses also a good all-round knowledge of geology. His Handbooks on
Physical and Historical Geology have been of great service to students, and his
suggestive work on the Building of the British Isles has been the means of directing
attention to many problems of considerable theoretical interest.
There is yet another way in which he has rendered great service to geology, and
that is as a stimulator of work in others. I am sure that no one will be more ready
to acknowledge this than Mr. William Hill, with whom Mr. Jukes-Browne has
been so long associated.
In recognition of these many services to our science, the Council have awarded to
him the Murchison Medal, which I, an old College friend and fellow-student, now
ask you to transmit to him with our heartiest good wishes.
Mr. Whitaker, having expressed his gratification at the privilege
of receiving the Medal on behalf of an old colleague and valued
friend, read the following extracts from a letter which he had
received from Mr. Jukes-Browne :—
“
194 T. Mellard Reade—Erosive Action of Sand-blasts.
three nails in preserving the wood in the rear or lee of the nails, the
course of the sand-blast having been from left to right. These are
wire nails that fastened the board horizontally to the upright posts.
The heads of these nails mark the original sawn surface of the board,
and indicate well the amount of the general denudation the board
has undergone. In the year 1875 I contributed a short article to
this Magazine on “‘ Wind Denudation,” describing little ridges of
sand on the shore left on the leeside of fragments of shells, or
sometimes whole shells, which have protected the sand from the
general denudation which always takes place in the upper moist
part of the shore during a strong breeze. These little ridges
I ventured to call ‘eolites.’ The wood ridges left in the rear of
the nail heads are the counterparts of these eolites, but they are
actually carved out of the board by the mechanical battering of the
sand-grains, whereas the eolites are due to the wind first drying
the surface of the sand and then blowing the grains away, except
where protected by the shell fragments.
Another interesting feature is the rope-like appearance caused by
the truncation of bundles of fibres, shown by the minute transverse
markings on the photograph. This happens only where the grain is
not parallel to the surface of the wood.
The effect on the oak staves is equally characteristic. Here, in
consequence of the regularity and parallelism of the grain, grooves
have been cut by the sand with the precision of a planing machine
(Fig. 2).
Since the preceding was written another pine board has been
brought to me. It measures 2ft. 6in. x 62in. The timber is
rather harder than in the one already described, and the grain more
regular. The sand has cut grooves of segmental section from three-
sixteenths to half an inch wide, deeply undercut on one side, the
ridges between the grooves being like a knife edge. There are
hardly any of the transverse markings to be seen, the grain being
parallel to the surface, and the whole has a smooth polished surface
to the touch.
It is interesting to find that the continual attrition of these
quartzose sand-grains, many of them much rounded, in time cuts
deeply into the wood and develops the structure by differential
action on the harder and softer parts it operates upon, and also
polishes the surface. The time the wood has been exposed to the
blast is about seven years. What the velocity of the grains was in
a high wind I have no means of judging, but no doubt the air
currents were intensified in this wind-gap, and it must not be taken
as representative of the whole shore.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE X.
Fig. 1.—Portion of a pine board, 1ft. lin. x 5in., eroded by sand-blast of the shore.
Fic. 2.—Portion of a split-oak stave, 4in. x 2kin., ,, an 96
E. T. Newton—Graptolites from Peru. 195
II.— Notre on GRaAprorites FROM PERv.
By E. T. Newton, F-R.S:,, F.G.S., ete.
\ R. HERBERT J. JESSOP, who has recently returned from
a journey in Eastern Peru, kindly placed in my hands, for
examination, some specimens of graptolites which he had obtained
on the River Macho, one of the tributaries of the Inambari, near the
celebrated mountain Capac Orco, or Monte Bello, in the province of
Carabaya, Peru (lat. 13° 40’ S.; long. 70° 10’ W.). The locality is
situated on the north-east of the main watershed, and the rivers flow
eventually into the Amazon. ‘The difficulties of travelling make it
likely that a long time will elapse before other specimens are
forthcoming from this locality; it seems desirable, therefore, that
some account of these should be published.
Brgt) ilt
Fic. 1.—Fragment of black shale with Diplograptus ; natural size; Cavabaya, Peru.
From a photograph kindly taken by Mr. A. Strahan.
Fig. 2.—Specimen marked on Fig. 1; enlarged 14 times. The virgula has been
added from another example.
Mr. Jessop tells me that the pieces of black shale containing the
graptolites were portions of a mass of rock about two feet square
and one foot thick, which was not found in place, but loose upon
the ground ; its unrolled and unweathered condition convincing him
that it could not have travelled far from the parent bed. Similar
shaly rocks are in place near by, but he was prevented from making
a careful exploration. The specimens obtained seemed to him
sufficiently interesting to be brought home, notwithstanding that
everything had to be carried by the men for many miles, the place
being inaccessible for horses or mules.
196 E. T. Newton—Graptoltes trom Peru.
The whole mass of shale seems to be full of these graptolites, for,
wherever split open, many white examples are displayed upon the
surface of the black shale (Fig. 1), all of which are referable to the
genus Diplograptus, and although differing somewhat in width they
are so similar in other respects that they can hardly represent more
than one species. The longest and most perfect specimen (Fig. 2)
does not exceed 25mm. in length and 3 mm. in width at the widest
part; but this example has no projecting virgula, such as is seen on
other specimens extending perhaps 4 or 5 mm. beyond the thecz.
Some examples are a little narrower, while one is as much as 5 mm.
wide. The polypary has a small radicle and two cornua at its
proximal end, and thence increases somewhat rapidly in width for
about a third of its length and then decreases slightly and very
gradually to the distal extremity, from which, in several specimens,
a virgula extends. In one instance the virgula may be traced
throughout the length of the polypary. The thece diverge from
each side of the axis at an angle of rather less than 45°; the
apertural margin is nearly at right angles with the axis, and the
outer free margin is in most cases slightly convex; but there is some
variation in all these particulars, even in the same polypary. There
are 11-13 thece in 10mm. These Peruvian Diplograptids very
closely resemble the D. truncatus of Lapworth,’ and Professor
Lapworth, who saw the specimens for a few minutes, was good
enough to point out this near resemblance. The small differences
which may be noticed, namely, the distinct virgula, the somewhat
smaller thece, and the less oblique apertural margin, as well
apparently as the shorter polypary, probably indicate that specific
difference which one is led to expect from the widely separated
habitats of the two forms; at the same time one hesitates to give
them a new name, and would prefer to record them as Diplograptus,
cf. truncatus, Lapw., and as probably of Bala age.
Little is known of the geology of the immediate area from which
Mr. Jessop obtained his graptolites; but David Forbes, in his paper on
“The Geology of Bolivia and Southern Peru,’’* not only gives a large
area of Silurian rocks extending from the south-east to the north-west
border of his map, which is perhaps within a hundred miles of Monte
Bello, but says that these Silurian strata extend as far as Cuzco, and
this would be as far north and well to the west of the district now
in question. David Forbes does not appear to have visited this area
himself, and the fossils collected further south, which were described
by J. W. Salter, were said to indicate beds of Upper Silurian age, and
probably Lower Silurian also. The fossils doubtfully referred to
the Lower Silurian certainly left much to be desired. No graptolites
were found, and consequently a most important guide to the age of
these old rocks was wanting.
D’Orbigny, during his travels in Bolivia,’ found certain graptolites
at Tacopaya, near the Rio Grand (lat. 19° §.; long. 68° 40’ W.),
1 Proc. Belfast Nat. Field Club, ser. 11, vol. i, pt. 4, Appendix, p. 1388, 1876-7.
2 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xvii (1861), p. 53. ;
* « Voyage dans l’ Amérique Méridionale’’: Paleont., vol. iv (1842), p. 28.
.
KH. T. Newton—Graptolites from Peru. 197
which he named Graptolites dentatus ; but finding that they had
two branches, united them with Graptolites (now Didymograptus)
Murchisoni; Grap. foliaceus was likewise included, and as this is
a Diplograptid there must be much doubt as to the specific identity
of his Bolivian forms, although the published figures leave little
doubt as to their belonging to the genus Didymograptus, and
consequently point to beds of Llandeilo or Arenig age; that is, if
we are right in using the zonal distribution of Old World Graptolites
as an index for those of Central South America.
Both Cambrian and Silurian fossils have been described from
Northern Argentina (lat. 284° and 25° 8.) by Professor Kayser,’ and
from Portezuelo many examples of a Didymograptus are noticed
which he thinks may be the same form as that brought from
Bolivia by D’Orbigny, thus again pointing to Llandeilo or Arenig
rocks a long way to the south-east, and confirming the occurrence
of strata of that age in the central part of South America.
M. J. Balta, in his note on “ Fosiles de Carabaya,”* mentions the
occurrence of graptolites and annelid burrows at Huayna Tacuma,
Santo Domingo, in the province of Carabaya. Iam unable to find
this locality on any map I have consulted, but Mr. Jessop tells me
there is a Santo Domingo a few miles from where his graptolites
were found, and this is probably the place indicated. M. Balta refers
his graptolites to Diplograptus palmeus, Barrande, and D. pristis, His.,
and he remarks that only Lower Silurian rocks have at present been
observed in South America. The genus Diplograptus, however, is not
confined to Lower Silurian (Ordovician) deposits, and if the reference
of specimens to D. palmeus and D. pristis be correct, then, while the
latter points to beds of Bala age or the uppermost part of the
Lower Silurian, the former, D. palmeus, indicates Upper Silurian
rocks, that is, strata of Llandovery or Tarannon age; moreover,
Salter had already in 1861 recognized Upper Silurian fossils among
those brought over by David Forbes.
The Diplograptus obtained by Mr. Herbert J. Jessop, whether
referable to D. truncatus, Lapw., or to a new but closely allied
species, may be taken as indicative of beds near the uppermost
part of the Lower Silurian.
So far as we can judge from the evidence of the graptolites now
known to occur in Central South America, there are in that country
deposits of Arenig or Llandeilo age with the characteristic Didymo-
graptus Murchisoni ; beds approximately of Bala age, with Diplo-
graptus pristis and Diplograptus near to truncatus; and possibly strata
of Llandovery age, as indicated by D. palmeus. It is to be hoped
that before long definite graptolitic evidence of Upper Silurian
rocks will be obtained by the discovery of some characteristic
Monograptids.
1 Zeitsch. deutsch. Geol. Gesell., vol. xlix (1897), p. 274.
-
2 Rev. Cienc, Lima, vol. i (1898), p. 7.
198 Dr. W. F. Hume—Rift Valleys of Eastern Sinai.
Il1.—Tur Rirr VALLEYS or Hastern Srvat.!
By W. F. Hume, D.Se., A.R.S.M., F.G.S., etc.
N this paper the author deals with some of the results obtained
in the course of a survey of Hastern Sinai during the season
of 1898-99, his remarks being based on a map carefully prepared
by his colleague, Mr. H. G. Skill, F.R.G.S., and on his own
topographical and geological observations.
The region specially under consideration is bounded on the west
by the central range of Sinai, which is familiar to every Indian
traveller, forming as it does a prominent rock-wall to the east of
the Gulf of Suez. This mountain mass in reality consists of a series
of narrow crests separated by few but high mountain passes, and
capable of being traversed only by heavily loaded camels at two
points, viz. at the head of Wadi Tarfah and Wadi Hebran. If this
range be crossed, and Mount Sinai (Jebel Musa) itself ascended,
the view to the east is decidedly disappointing. ‘To the north-east
the long white limestone wall of Jebel Gunnah runs more or less
east and west, far to the east breaking into isolated masses, and
ending in the fine truncated cone of Jebel El Ain. South of, and
parallel to it, extend sandy plains and precipitous plateaux of
sandstone, these being succeeded by an apparently flat or undulating
granite plateau (the rift-valleys in it being hidden), out of which
sharp-peaked mountain masses rise as isolated projections or long
ridges. To the south-west is a mountain-wall, which hides all the
southern land from view, and constitutes the most important scenic
feature in Hastern Sinai, extending across the country from the
Central Range to the Gulf of Akaba. This Transverse Divide claims
special attention, not only from the fact that it separates two different
types of country, but also because at many points these two regions
are at markedly different levels, there being an abrupt fall to the
south. The divide is also crossed by five passes, which all have this
remarkable feature in common, viz. : that the valleys they connect form
jiwe roughly straight lines, all parallel to one another and to the Gulf of
Akaba, that is, running in a direction somewhat west of south. ‘Two
of these are then specially considered with a view to showing that
they belong to the category of Rift Valleys, of which the Gulf of
Akaba is itself a striking example, it being premised that these are
not necessarily single depressions, but rather a series of basins or
grooves separated by barriers, which, though higher than the main
valley, are of no great altitude compared with the bordering hills.
Thus, the Shelala Um Raiyig rift is shown to have a length of over
72 kilometres, being almost perfectly straight and bounded by very
steep slopes throughout the greater part of its course.
The geological features are still more striking, the hills on the
1 Abstract of a paper read by permission of Sir William Garstin, Under-Secretary
of State for Public Works, and Captain H. G. Lyons, R.E., Director-General of
the Egyptian Survey Department, before the International Geological Congress
at Paris, August, 1900.
Dr. W. F. Hume—Rift Valleys of Eastern Sinai. 199
two sides being frequently of different geological structure, this
contrast having often a very marked effect upon the scenery, as,
for instance, where the rift separates the granite range of Ashara
from the felsitic hills of Ferani, the former rising in sharply peaked
red-coloured crests scored by wild gorges, while the latter are of
dark-green colour, and possess less rugged outlines.
Still more noteworthy is the presence of sandstones in the valley
itself, having all the typical characters of the Nubian Sandstone,
yet situated 25 kilometres south of the main mass of that formation ;
similarly, at the head of Um Raiyig, a ridge of Cenomanian lime-
stone, with sandstone at its base, block the valley, being enclosed
between two walls composed of Nubian Sandstone resting on granite.
Still further to the north the reverse is met with, a granite ridge
running north and south, rising steeply through the surrounding
sedimentaries. The examination of the relations of the beds over
the area shows that the actual displacement of strata in the
production of the rift varies from 200 to 600 metres (2,000 feet).
The Raib Melhadge rift is in some respects even more striking,
the granite range extending far further to the north on its eastern
than on its western border, which for some distance is formed by
lower country, geologically a complex of granite, sandstone, and
Cenomanian limestone. As a result, in the upper part of Wadi
Raib, Cretaceous limestone forms low ridges dipping steeply eastward
at the foot of a granite range, which rises immediately above them
to a height of over 300 metres. Descending Wadi Raib the
conditions become simpler, the Nubian Sandstone on the west giving
way to granite cliffs, and the valley becoming a broad highway
bounded on both sides by precipitous height. Yet scattered all
along its course are low hills of white Nubian Sandstone, and in one
place Cenomanian limestone, so that the surprising result is realized,
that Cretaceous fossils were collected from a limestone on both sides of
which tower granite clif's to a height of over 500 metres (themselves
in places capped by Nubian Sandstone), the eatent of dislocation being
here at least 700 metres. Further to the south, the same rift gives
rise to a Coastal Watershed Range of some importance.
The other valleys are considered to be rifts on account of their
parallelism to those already described, while they also must have
been produced by the same series of movements which gave rise to
the Gulf of Akaba.
Correlation of Eastern Sinai Rifts with those of neighbouring
districts—In returning from Hastern Sinai the writer was struck
by the resemblance of the western valleys to those already
described, the clefts, viz. Nagb Hawa and El Watiyeh, which
break through the granite hills, barring the Sinai convent region
to the north, being the continuations of remarkable lines of depression
which can be traced far to the north-west. One of these, which
includes the Convent Valley and runs to Wadi Suwig, is especially
straight and well defined, but, in common with the other western
valleys, is parallel, not to the Gulf of Akaba, but to the Gulf
of Suez.
200 Dr. W. F. Hume—Geology of Eastern Sinai.
The conclusion arrived at is as follows :—To the west of a north-
south line (practically longitude 54° HE.) extend a series of N.W.—
S.E. rifts, the Suez type, which include not only the Western Sinai
valleys and the Gulf of Suez, but also Wadi Qena, and in all
likelihood part of the Nile Valley itself; while to the east of
this line is an Akaba rift-series, not only giving rise to the Gulf
of Akaba, but to all the important longitudinal valleys of Hastern
Sinai, and probably producing effects on the opposite coast of
Midian comparable for extent and interest to those of Egypt itself.
A third, or transverse, type of dislocation is also considered, special
attention being called to the regularity and parallelism of the valley
directions. Thus, in a space north of the transverse divide, the
valleys run mainly east-of-north, west-of-south, or north-east, while
in other parts of the eastern side of the peninsula the dominant trend
is slightly east-of-north, west-of-south, or south-east. On the western
side, on the contrary, they run north-west and south-east, or south-
west. Many of these transverse valleys are in places deep clefts,
bounded by precipitous rock-walls, but the geological evidence of
rifting is wanting. The general conclusion is thus stated, after
a summary of the leading results:—The principal features of
Southern Sinai have been produced by dislocation rather than
erosion, fracture in three directions, either directly proved or in
the highest degree probable, having determined the general struc-
ture of the country. It is, in fact, the meeting-point of two great
longitudinal rift-systems, parallel to the Gulf of Suez and Gulf of
Akaba respectively, traversed by a third or transverse type, the
result being the apparently intricate maze of sharp crest and deep
valley characteristic of this region.
Notr.—It should be observed that the Akaba system of rifts does
not extend far south of lat. 28° N., the ranges to the east of the Red
Sea being apparently also of the Suez type.
IV.—Grotocy oF Hasrern Srnat.!
By W. F. Hume, D.Sc., A.R.S.M., F.G.S., ete.
ge paper under consideration deals briefly with the geological
features of Eastern Sinai, and more especially with the
characters of the sedimentary rocks developed in that region,
a short note on the igneous rocks being also appended. The subject
is treated under the following headings :—
I. Pebble Gravels, Travertine, etc.
II. Coral Reefs.
III. Cretaceous Limestones of Cenomanian age.
IV. Nubian Sandstone.
V. Igneous Rocks, ete.
I. Pessre Gravers.— Attention is here again called to the
remarkable development of high gravel terraces in the principal
" Read by permission of the Egyptian Government before the International
Geological Congress, August, 1900.
Dr. W. F. Hume—Geology of Eastern Sinai. 201
valleys, these being often over twenty metres high, the gravels being
characterized by the fact that they contain fragments of all shapes
and sizes derived from the surrounding hills, largely embedded in
a sandy matrix consisting of materials of the same derivation, their
source being thus strictly local. While found in almost all the
principal valleys and many of the side tributaries, they are often
particularly well developed at points where longitudinal and transverse
depressions cross one another. Their probable age can be but
determined on the coast of the Gulf of Akaba, where they are found
to overlie raised coral-reefs containing such typical Pleistocene or
recent forms as Laganum depressum and Heterocentrotus mammillatus.
The gravels are therefore not earlier than the Pleistocene, thus
agreeing with the conclusion arrived at by Mr. Barron for those
on the west coast of the Red Sea.
One of the most striking features connected with these gravel
plateaux is the perfectly flat nature of their upper surfaces, even
in the upland wadis, a character which appears inconsistent with
their having been produced by rushing torrents, but in accordance
with the hypothesis of their formation in lakes or marine fjords.
Unfortunately, no shells having been obtained in these beds, their
mode of origin still remains doubtful.
Attention is also called to several special varieties of these
gravels, the most notable being :—
(a) The Manganiferous Pebble Gravels of Sherm, in which the
cementing material of the conglomerate consists of the hydrous
black oxide of manganese, psilomelane, the beds being in places
as much as four metres thick, while underneath are strata coloured
red by ferruginous ochre. These gravels are closely connected with
a core of red granite, ending abruptly where the latter is no longer
exposed at the surface, and only overlying it along the edge where
it faces the sea. It is of interest to note that the 8.8. “ Pola”
expedition found manganiferous deposits forming on the floor of
the Gulf of Akaba, a fact which also suggests the marine origin
of the Sherm Gravels.
(b) Oolitic Valley Deposits.—An oolitic rock is described from the
neighbourhood of Ras Muhammed, whose components closely agree
in their characters with oolitic grains found by Professor Walther
at the mouth of Wadi Dehése, near Suez, and which he believed to
be a marine deposit in statu nascendi, mineral fragments being
enclosed by successive calcareous layers.
In Wadi Hashubi, where these beds are best developed, they are
composed of grains of quartz and orthoclase, cemented by carbonate
of lime, which frequently surrounds them in a series of concentric
coats, while the strata themselves also show traces of ripple-marking
and very fine sun-cracks. In the lower part of the valley they are
often strongly current-bedded, and contain lenticular masses of
pebbles, while in its upper part they give rise to striking ravines,
bounded on both sides by vertical walls of the light-coloured sand-
rock. An interesting feature, too, is the height at which these beds
are met with, a typical example being still present at 696 metres
202 Dr. W. EF. Hume—Geology of Eastern Sinai.
above sea-level, so that, if its marine origin be admitted, a differential
movement of at least 2,000 feet has taken place in the southern end
of the peninsula during comparatively recent times.
(c) Gravels cemented by Calcite—At the mouth of Wadi Nasb,
near Dahab, the gravels composed of igneous rocks are cemented
together by crystalline calcite developed in scalenohedra (dog-tooth
spar), while in the hills themselves the igneous fragments are
enclosed in well-marked travertine, especially in the smaller water-
courses.
The theoretical deductions which may help to explain the presence
of the various types of gravels are thus summarized :—
1. In South-Hastern Sinai earth-movements have produced three
high watershed lines, only one of which is now broken through.
If these were formed at the same period all the water draining into
the basin enclosed by them would collect to form narrow lakes.
This would account for—
(a) The flat character of the plateaux.
(b) The absence of marine organisms.
2. A marine depression, resulting in the invasion of the sea, and
amounting to at least 700 metres, is also suggested, and might
account for—
(c) The oolitic beds of Wadi Hashubi.
(d) The manganiferous gravels of Sherm.
(e) The travertines of the higher valleys.
(f) The calcite-cemented gravels of Nasb.
This hypothesis would also account for their flat character, and only
the absence of marine organisms prevents the absolute acceptance of
the view that many of these gravels were laid down beneath the
surface of the sea. Indeed, it is of interest to note that Mr. Beadnell
has obtained these calcite-cemented gravels and travertines in his
Nile Valley lacustrine series, thus affording an additional reason for
not arriving at hasty conclusions regarding the marine origin of those
in Sinai.
3. A subsequent elevation, accompanied by earth - movements
resulting in the uptilting of the older coral-reefs, brought the
formation of these special features to a close, the gravels subsequently
formed being now distributed irregularly over the surface, in places.
overlying the oolite beds, and being interbedded with the younger
Pleistocene coral-reefs.
II. Conran Reers anp Ratsep Beacuzs.—This portion of the
paper opens with a correction of Professor Walther’s statement that
the Gulf of Akaba is poor in coral-reefs, it being pointed out by the
author that his colleague, Mr. Skill, had now practically mapped
continuous reefs from Dahab to Ras Muhammed. This Fringing Reef
and the isolated coral terraces, up to 25 metres high, standing only
a little way back from the sea-shore (viz. the Lower Coral Series),
are first considered, and shown to be typically Pleistocene, the
raised beaches which in many places line the shore being closely
associated with them. The Upper Coral Limestone or Older Fossil
Reef of Walther, though apparently overlying the lower one, is-
Dr. W. F. Hume—Geology of Eastern Sinai. 203
evidently of older date, the coral having undergone much alteration
and being now of a dirty brown colour, though still in large measure
possessing the cavernous character of a modern reef. The fauna of
these beds has not yet been fully studied, but there is sufficient
evidence to show that we have here a remarkable combination of
Pectens of older aspect and Mediterranean character, associated with
modern Hrythrean species similar to that revealed by a study of
Mr. Barron’s collection of shells from the older reef on the west
side of the Red Sea (see R. Bullen Newton, Grou. Maa., Dec. IV,
Vol. VII, pp. 500-514 and 544-560, Nov.—Dec., 1900). Thus, in
one bed of this series, Pecten Vasseli, Fuchs, and Chlamys latissima,
Brocchi, are associated in the same bed as Kchinus verruculatus,
previously only recorded from Mauritius (identified by Dr. Gregory).
South of Sherm there is a tilted series of coral-reefs, rising nearly
200 metres above sea-level, whose fauna, although very obscure, is
probably very early Pleistocene, judging from similar beds occurring
on the west side of the Gulf of Suez. It is of special interest to
note that these older reefs are only present at the southern end of
the Gulf of Akaba.
After maintaining the general proposition that the coral-reefs
here are formed in a region of elevation, the question is raised (on
the ground of the observation made by Walther that an apparently
dead coral-reef was present 6 metres below the present one),
whether this elevation is being continued, and it is pointed out
that the formation of bays at the mouths of several of the principal
valleys suggests that a small local depression is at present taking
place in the Gulf of Akaba, which thus differs from neighbouring
regions. The writer then considers the series of questions which
Professor Walther set himself to answer in his “ Die Korallenriffe
der Sinai-halbinsel,” and agrees with him—(1) that a coral-reef
(sensu stricto) does not attain any great thickness; (2) as to the
role which detrital materials play in filling up a coral-reef; and
(8) the passage of coral limestone to dolomite by the increase of
magnesia. On the other hand, he has been unable to accept
Walther’s view as to the basis of a coral-reef, the latter laying
stress on the importance of compact sedimentary rocks as a base
compared with igneous rocks, while in the paper under discussion,
after pointing out that the fringing reef of the Gulf of Akaba is
largely founded on igneous or metamorphic rock, the writer main-
tains that the deposition of a coral-reef is practically independent of
-the nature of the rock forming its base, red granite, diabase, sand-
rock, and marls (probably also gneiss and hornblende - granite)
having been noted as its basal members.
III. Cenomanran Limesrones; IV. Nusran Sanpsrone.—This is
a description of the relations and characters of the strata at the
northern end of the area examined, limestones forming the main
escarpment of Jebel Gunnah overlying a highly characteristic striped
series of green marls containing such typical Cenomanian fossils
as Hemiaster cubicus, Pseudodiadema variolare, and Heterodiadema
libycum. These marls are themselves only the surface capping of
204 Dr. W. F. Hume—Geology of Eastern Sinai.
a thick series of white sands, which are now cut deeply into by
ravines, giving rise to battlements and castellated ridges, sometimes
over 100 metres high, forming one of the most striking features on
the road from Sinai to Akaba. These are based on a series of
variously coloured ferruginous sandstones, forming broad, low,
smooth plateaux, themselves resting on a planed-down surface
of granite. Unfortunately these sands and sandstones are all
unfossiliferous.
The thicknesses in Jebel Gunnah are as follows :—
metres.
Compact limestones, with few fossils ... 100
Striped Cenomanian marls ade sib 20
Sands and sandstones... sis 500 207
Total thickness Ba 327 (over 1,000 feet).
The most important points noted are:—(1) The Nubian sandstones
resting on a planed-down surface of granite; (2) the Cenomanian
beds belong to Professor Zittel’s ‘ Africano - Syrian’ series, which
since Mr. Beadnell’s discovery of these beds in Baharia Oasis are
shown to have an enormous extension north of latitude 28° N.,
while Dr. Schweinfurth has shown them to be of great thickness to
the north of the Red Sea Hills; (3) the dip and present position
of the beds show that these strata once extended over the whole of
the present igneous mountain region; (4) the Carboniferous sand-
stones of Western Sinai are apparently absent.
V. Tse Ieneovus Rocks or Hastern Sr1nar. — After a brief
general description this portion of the paper lays stress on the
importance of dykes of every petrographical variety, which, though
the youngest members of the igneous series, never pass into the
Nubian Sandstone, so that they are at least Pre-Cretaceous. While
generally trending N.N.E. and $.8.W., there is frequently a second
system, running practically at right angles to this direction. Though
in general aspect resembling the mountains on the opposite side of
the Red Sea, the fundamental rocks of the central axis of the
peninsula are granitoid gneiss and hornblende-granite, not the red
granite which forms many of the main summits in the Red Sea
Hills. The latter is, however, also widely distributed in the
peninsula itself.
Of special interest are beds of andesite, tuff, and agglomerate,
which form some of the principal summits, capping the granite and
gneiss, while in the Ferani range, etc., this Volcanic series is closely
associated with a metamorphic type, varying from spotted slates and
slightly foliated mica-schists to dark-green chlorite and hornblende-
schists pierced by innumerable dykes of dolerite. Some special
points are dealt with in closing, such as the development of gneisses
on a magnificent scale in Wadi Um Gerat, the importance of
tourmaline-granite in some of the southern summits, the presence
of spherulitic felsites forming dykes in many parts of the district,
and the probable absence of the basalt recorded near Sherm by
Burckhardt.
—
Dr. Holst—The Glacial Period and Oscillation of Land. 205
V.—TuHeE Connection OF THE GLACIAL PERIOD WITH OSCILLATION
OF THE LAND, ESPECIALLY IN SCANDINAVIA.
By Dr. Nits Oror Housr. ‘Translated by F. A. Barner, D.Sc.
[In a recently published paper! Dr. N. O. Holst, of the Geological
Survey of Sweden, has given a detailed description of the Post-
Glacial deposits of the Baltic Sea and the Gulf of Bothnia. The
paper is accompanied by a map showing the chief points of observation.
The determination of the different horizons depends on (1) the
stratigraphy ; (2) the sub-fossil diatomaceous flora; (5) the sub-
fossil higher flora. The stratigraphical evidence is in the form
of numerous sections, taken all along the coast. The diatoms are
used chiefly, but not solely, to distinguish the marine from the
fresh-water deposits; their determinations, nearly 5,000 in number,
are due to Professor P. T. Cleve and his daughter, Dr. Astrid Cleve.
The remains of the higher plants have been determined by
Dr. Gunnar Andersson.
The fresh-water (Ancylus) epoch and the salt-water (Zitorina)
epoch are divided by the author as follows :—
1. The oldest Ancylus epoch, the deposits of which age in
southern Sweden partly are barren, partly contain Arctic plants.
2. The middle Ancylus epoch, of which the deposits contain
the remains of fir and birch. During this epoch the land-ice melted
away from the lower parts of central Sweden, and the sea came
into the Baltic, making the water temporarily salt.
3d. The youngest Ancylus epoch, or the older half of the oak
epoch.
4. The Litorina epoch, or the younger half of the oak epoch,
when the present communication with the sea was opened, and the
water of the inland sea, which during the Ancylus epochs had been
fresh as a rule, now became salt.
The fact that the climate became temporarily colder in the middle
of the Zitorina epoch is established by finds of boreal diatoms:
Navicula semen, N. amphibola, Pinnularia streptoraphe, ete.
Wider interest attaches to the concluding pages (115 et sqq.), in
which the author deals with the question of oscillation of the land
in Scandinavia and with the explanation of the Glacial Period, on
which matters he expresses some new views. We therefore offer
a full translation of this part of Dr. Holst’s memoir. |
HAVE elsewhere * shown that the events immediately connected
with the melting of the Scandinavian land-ice occurred in rapid
succession. The same was the case with the oldest Post-Glacial
events. Thus it has been demonstrated in the present paper that
the Glacial marine clay and sand, deposited along the present coast
1 <*Bidrag till kinnedomen om Ostersjons och Bottniska Vikens postglaciala
eologi’’: Sveriges Geologiska Undersékning, Afhandl., ser. C, No. 180. 8vo;
28 pp., 1 map; 1899 (published March, 1901). ;
2 N. O. Holst, ‘‘ Har det funnits mer in en istid i Sverige?’’: Sver. Geol.
Unders., 1895, ser. C, No. 151, see pp. 36-39. German translation by W. Wolff,
“¢ Hat es in Schweden mehr als eine Kiszeit gegeben*’’ pp. 38-42; Berlin, 1899.
$
u
206 Dr. N. O. Holst—The Glacial Period and
of Blekinge and of the Kalmar district, were exposed by elevation
of the land and were weathered before the deposition of Post-Glacial
beds upon them had begun. It was this elevation of the land that
connected Scania with Denmark and permitted the immigration of
the larger land animals.’ It appears as though not only this
elevation, but also the succeeding depression, during which the
oldest Ancylus beds were deposited in the government districts of
Blekinge and Kalmar, took place in the former district before the
Arctic plants had found time to immigrate thither. But when this
depression reached the neighbourhood of Kalmar, the Arctic plants
were already there. In Blekinge and the Kalmar district there
followed an elevation, probably of less importance, and it was not
until the succeeding depression, which marks the beginning of the
middle Ancylus epoch, that southern Sweden saw the deposition of
beds that can be paralleled with the oldest Post-Glacial beds of
central Sweden. But these latter lie without break conformably on
the Glacial beds. This implies that southern Sweden incurred two
elevations and their succeeding depressions, in which central Sweden
had no share. No explanation of these facts is more natural than
that southern Sweden, relieved of its ice-load, rose” and began to
oscillate, while the land-ice continued to keep central Sweden depressed.
In other words, this means that there was a clear and definite con-
nection on the one hand between the weight of the land-ice and the
depression of the land, on the other hand between the removal of
the weight and the elevation of the land. But this is a result
pregnant with the most important consequences for the whole of
glacial geology.
It is clear that the depression, if dependent on the weight of the
land-ice, should yield evidence of having been greater the nearer
one comes to the centre of the ice; in other words, the nearer one
comes to those regions where the ice-load was greatest. A glance
at a map indicating the extent of the depression shows at once that
such was the case. While in the south the curve of depression
1 That the aurochs already existed in the province of Kalmar at the beginning of
the fir period, i.e. at the beginning of the middle Ancylws epoch, has been proved
on a preceding page. But the only Post-Glacial elevation of importance that
occurred in southern Sweden before that period was the very one that immediately
followed the deposition of the Glacial marine beds.
2 It is quite probable that this elevation during the oldest Post-Glacial Period also
reached northern Germany. If such was the case, may it not in part have been the
reason why the Vistula and Oder during that period did not flow into the Baltic but
had their outlet through the Elbe? Of. F. Wahnschaffe, ‘‘ Die Ursachen der
Oberflachengestaltung des norddeutschen Flachlandes”’ ; Stuttgart, 1891.
It is also very probable that the same upward pressure of the land outside the
periphery of the land-ice took place in North America, and that this affords the
correct explanation of many phenomena which otherwise appear inexplicable.
3 See Gerard De Geer, ‘‘ Om Skandinaviens geografiska utveckling,”’ 2. Kartor,
pls. 2, 8, 4; Stockholm, 1896. ‘The criticism must, however, be passed on these
plates that they do not, as they profess, give the depression-curves for different
epochs of the melting of the ice, but that all three show only the same thing, namely,
the extent of the depression at the time of the final melting of the ice. According to
the plates, the depression during the melting of the ice remained the same for a long
period, while, on the contrary, all the facts tend to prove that throughout that time
the extent of the depression altered very rapidly.
Oscillations of Land in Scandinavia. 207
that crosses the southern Baltic, and in the east that which passes
by the southern end of Lake Ladoga, both mark zero, as one proceeds
from south to north or from east to west the curves mark higher
and higher numbers, until the greatest depression known, so far as
established by tracing the highest Glacial marine coastline, attains
in northern Sweden no less than 280 metres.’ Lately, indeed, it
has been said that in Norrland the Glacial marine coastline is at
a lower level in the interior than near the present coast. But if
that is the case, we may recall the fact that the highest Glacial
coastline was formed at different times in different places. It is
therefore quite possible that the apparently abnormal conditions in
Norrland spring from nothing else than the formation of the Glacial
coastline, first at the coast and afterwards at the interior, for the
simple reason that “the ice did not melt from the interior of
Norrland until the elevation had been in progress for some time.” *
The conditions in Norrland are therefore in no way opposed to
the rule that increased depression and increased ice-load point in
the same direction.
Scandinavia under its load of land-ice may be compared to
a depressed spring. When the load is removed the land tends to
’ resume its original position. This explains the great rapidity with
which the land rose at the close of the Ice Age, a rapidity for which
in my above-quoted paper of 1895 I gave conclusive evidence,
although I then did not fully understand what caused the rapid rise
of the land. But although this demands a certain elasticity in the
crust of the earth, yet it cannot be supposed that this elasticity was
so great as to permit the land, pressed down as it was during a large
part of the Ice Age, to regain the state of equilibrium in which it was
at the beginning of the Ice Age; some of the upward tension must
in the meantime have been neutralized. The highest Glacial marine
coastline therefore marks only the final result of the depression at
the moment when the ice melted. Now the position of this line
no less than 280 metres above sea-level is alone enough to show
that the depression was considerable. But for the reason just
mentioned this height indicates only a part of the Glacial depression.
This line of argument has already led us to the conclusion that at
the beginning of the Ice Age Scandinavia lay much higher than now.
But that this elevation was in itself enough to afford a simple and
natural explanation of the Glacial Period will be proved in the sequel
by more conclusive evidence.
From what has been said it is clear that the Glacial and Post-
Glacial changes of level in Scandinavia (and the same applies to
North America) are due to a special cause, and therefore cannot be
compared with volcanic or continent-building oscillations. All
attempts to generalize from such comparisons are foredoomed to
failure.
1 A.G. Hoégbom, ‘ Till fragan om den senglaciala hafsgriinsen i Norrland’’: Geol.
Foren. Stockholm Foérhandl., 1899, xxi, p. 595.
* A. G. Hégbom, ‘Om hégsta marina gransen i norra Syerige’’: Geol. Foren.
Stockholm Férhandl., 1896, xviii, p. 488.
208 Dr. N. O. Holst—The Glacial Period and
No better success has attended the attempts to discover the cause
of the Glacial Period in directions other than that here indicated.
Especially is this true of the struggles after some far-fetched
astronomical explanation of this terrestrial phenomenon. The
geologist who perambulates the universe in search of such
explanations may be likened to an erudite bookworm who turns
his study upside down in search of his pencil, which all the time
is behind his ear.
To the view here stated as to the cause of changes of level in
Glacial and Post-Glacial times, I have been led by my own researches,
and my ideas already tended in this direction before I realized that
T. F. Jamieson, and other geologists after him, had expressed views
almost identical with my own. Subsequently I have perused
Jamieson’s writings on this subject more closely, and, with sincere
admiration for his acumen, have found that so early as 1868,'
supported by comparatively few observations, he put forward the
leading idea which in 1882 * he developed in more detail, and which,
confirmed as it now is by more numerous observations, can without
hesitation be accepted as the only correct one.
From the papers by Jamieson I think it right to make the
following instructive extracts :—
“Tt has occurred to me [Jamieson] that the enormous weight of
ice thrown upon the land may have had something to do with this
depression [the great glacial depression]. . - \« |) We idonit
know what is the state of the matter on which ‘the solid crust of
the earth reposes. If it is in astate of fusion, a depression might take
place from a cause of this kind, and then the melting of the ice
would account for the rising of the land, which seems to have
followed upon the decrease of the glaciers.” (Q.J.G.S., loc. cit.)
“Assuming the specific gravity of the ice to have been 875,
compared with water as 1,000, or in other words to have been
seven-eighths of the weight of water, then the weight of a mass
of ice 1,000 feet thick would be 378 pounds to the square inch, or
equal to fully 25 atmospheres, and would amount to 678,675,690
tons on every square mile. If the ice was 3,000 feet thick, it
would at this rate amount to over 2,000 million tons on the square
mile.” (Grou. Mac., 1882, p. 403; Jamieson here quotes some
geologists who have supposed that the thickness of the ice has been
much greater, and then he continues as follows :—) “It is evident
that a thickness of even 3,000 feet of ice will give us a weight by
no means despicable, a weight which would require a marvellous
rigidity indeed in the earth beneath it to sustain such a load with-
out yielding in some degree” (p. 404).
“That the crust of the earth is flexible and elastic the phenomena
of earthquakes sufficiently demonstrate. The surface heaves like
the billows of the sea, sometimes causing trees to bend so as to
1 T. F. Jamieson, ‘“‘ On the History of the last Geological Changes in Scotland’? :
Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., 1865, xxi, p. 178.
2 < Aitken, op. cit.
E. D. Wellburn—Fish Fauna of Millstone Grit. 221
Family CAALACANTHIDA.
Genus COALACANTHUS, Agassiz, 1836, 1843.
Celacanthus, sp. nov. ?
I have found several slabs showing the remains of this genus, but
am as yet not satisfied as to the species, although I am inclined to
regard it as new on account of the proportion and ornamentation of
the head bones and the sculpture of the scales.
Form. and loc.: D Shales, Middle Grits, Summit.
Family PALAONISCID.
Genus RHADINICHTHYS, Traquair, 1877.
Rhadinichthys, sp. nov.
Form. and loc.: D Shales, Middle Grits, Summit.
Rhadinichthys, sp. nov. ?
Form. and loc. : D Shales, Middle Grits, Summit.
Genus ELONICHTHYS, Giebel, 1848.
Elonichthys Aitkeni, Traq., 1886.
Several fragments of this fish have been found.
Form. and loc. : D Shales, Middle Grits at Summit and Wadsworth
Moor ' (also B and C Shales, Middle Grits and the Rough Rock,
localities not given’).
Elonichthys, sp. nov.
Form. and loc. : D Shales, Middle Grits, Summit.
Elonichthys, sp. nov.
Form. and loc.: D Shales, Middle Grits, Summit.
Genus ACROLEPIS, Agassiz, 1833, 1844.
Acrolepis Hopkinsi, McCoy, 1855.
Several fine fragmentary specimens of this fish have been found,
notably those from Wadsworth Moor which are in the Woodwardian
Museum, Cambridge.*
Form. and loc.: D Shales, Middle Grits at Summit and
Wadsworth Moor.
Norr.—I intend to fully describe the new species later. Mr. John
Ward, F.G.S., who has seen the specimens, quite agrees with me
that they are undoubtedly new. The fish remains, with two or three
exceptions, are in the author’s cabinets.
Before concluding, I must acknowledge, with warmest thanks,
the great obligation I am under to Dr. Henry Woodward, F.R.S.,
etc., and Dr. A. Smith Woodward, F.L.S., for allowing me to
examine and compare my fish remains with those in the Natural
History Museum, Cromwell Road. I am also indebted to Mr. John
Ward, F.G.S., for giving me his opinion on the new Palaoniscide.
1 Wellburn, op. cit.
2 Spencer, op. cit.
3 Wellburn, op. cit.
f Millstone Grit.
©
E. D. Wellburn—Fish Fauna o
yO)
c
yD)
‘(410 *do) xeyrpepy Jo ‘raonedg somep ‘xy oye] OY} Jo APIIOYINE O43 VO OATS suOZIIOY 90.149 OST, ;
“AqrpRooy SITY} ULOTZ poqiiosep Teeq OALT SULeTMOL YS] 4VYY OUT, 49XY OT} St STI, ;
“BOOK FIT) OUOFSTITIA OF} 07 MONT x
Jono ‘simydoy sidajouy
“Aout “ds ‘shygyaruopy
“sou “ds ‘shypyaruopsy
uenbery, “imay27 shyzyaruop yr
“gaou “ds ‘shiygzyouupnyy
“aout “ds ‘shyzyouupnyar
| “IINKUALAONILOW JOpAy
KOK OK
*
KOK
«
00 g°Aout *ds ‘snypumamany
| P Sop | AoyyyV 2® yooourvyy ‘seaprajns snposdasgs)
| | | | “IIOKUMLAOSSOALY eps,
| ‘TM0ISORTAT, ssvfoqng
| | ms OK “sou ds go Wad ‘sesdopouazongy
| | 0° 900 “ards ‘snygumanphpuos pr
| | | | | | “SHLITAMOGOXHLHOT
*
g ds ‘snagnuyy
“aot “ds ‘sapoyzimaR
WOWOS PAL sapoypuvay
‘IGOHLNVOYW IapIQ
g ds ‘snpojazy
sav ‘sngvhuoja snpo.w)
2h ae AON, “e2savop snpoprowmy
us sis " “sou “ds ‘snpoydasq
oo aU “stan ‘sngvoywf snpogsriy
| | | | | ‘ITHOVTEY IOpig
x OK
XK
*
2c
= ~
bd
*
*
KOK OK
| | # | d sae oe. ZISSB.8 YW ‘signa snpopniy
| | ‘INOLOAHLHOT A9pig
| | ‘IIYOUBIGOUISB[ | ssvpoqng
|
i!
|
2 ¢ {qyeoorT
“ooy Fonoy
9)
a
“OTLYSY.IO
‘{qramog ‘ysnoyH
y oltyseoue’y
“aATYSYIO ‘LOOP |
Y}IOMSpe A ‘SJILD
Jeptnog ‘sq1145
PPI ‘s7eIS C
a 6 AV[B00'T ce
STPPHAL “SeTeUS
“aITYSY10 A ae
qeou ‘dnooy ‘s}t1y
APPL “SeTeqS
*sy10 JX ‘XVpI[e yp vou
‘TUBYWOppN'y ‘poo AA
asnNoF] oUpLy ‘S}IIO
PPA “SPS CG
aPPIN ‘SVS
“qu ‘STD
STPPIL “SeTVUS
2d AyeooT ue
FPP “SAPUS
“NOILNATALSTIG TVOIHGVUOILVULS GNV ALITVOOT AO ATAVI
H. W. Pearson—Oscillations of Sea-level. 223
VII.—Oscinnations IN THE SEA-LEVEL. (Parr II.)
By H. W. Pearson.
(Continued from the April Number, p. 174.)
N the “Gallery of Nature,” Milner, p. 388, it is stated that Brighton
(then a mere village) in the time of Elizabeth (1558-1603)
‘stood upon a site where the sea now rolls, and where the chain
pier stands.” We might infer from this statement that at Brighton
the sea, since the date mentioned, had been elevated over the land.
We cannot draw this conclusion, however, with certainty, for the
reasons following :—
During the last century the eastern coast of England has been
constantly eaten into by the sea; churches, farms, and towers have
been repeatedly devoured by the waves. In this district, however,
we know that these results have not been caused by a rise in surface-
level of the waters; we know that erosion by waves and currents
has been the sole cause for these changes. It is absurd, therefore,
to assume that Brighton during the last few centuries has alone
suffered submergence, while all Britain has elsewhere undergone
continual upheaval. Erosion, then, is the more probable explanation
of this item, and it should not be held as evidence conflicting with
our curve.
A conflicting point of great weight was found in Rear-Admiral
Smyth’s statement, that the city of Spina in the time of Scylax ‘‘was
about 24 miles from the sea, but in less than 600 years afterwards
Strabo describes it as being 90 stadia, or more than eleven miles
inland” ( ‘‘'The Mediterranean,” p. 47). This remark of Smyth’s
as to the 600 years disturbed me. Our period of vibration in the
sea-level at the time mentioned being perhaps a little short of
600 years, there should have been little change in Spina’s distance
from the sea at these two epochs. On investigation, however,
I found that there were two or three writers of thisname. I believe,
therefore, that Smyth, like others before him, has confounded Scylax
of Caryanda, author of the “ Periplus ” of the Mediterranean, who
wrote about 335 B.c. (Miiller) or 852 B.c. (Niebuhr), with the Scylax
of Caryanda who explored the Indus for Darius perhaps 515 B.c.
or a little later. (See Encyc. Brit., article Scylaz.)
It seems much more probable to me that information as to the
shores of the Adriatic should be found in the writings of the later
Scylax. I therefore, with some reason, assume that in this case
I am more liable to find two points confirmatory of my curve, one for
the low-water period of the epoch of Strabo, the other fer the high-
water period of the later Scylax, rather than a conflicting point as it
first appeared on my diagram.
Strabo (Bk. xvi, chap. 4) describes the harbour of Charmothas,
Arabia, as, at the time of his writing, apparently in actual existence.
Under the same chapter, however, in a footnote from Gossellin, we
learn that to-day, from the accumulation of soil, this harbour “is
more than a day’s journey into the interior of the country.” This
recession should not be; no retreat of the sea, if our curve is to
224 H. W. Pearson—Oscillations of Sea-level.
be depended on, can have occurred since Strabo’s epoch; this
observation is therefore strongly antagonistic to our conclusions.
On investigation, however, we learn that Strabo’s statement was
borrowed from Artemidorus, who in his turn had borrowed his
description from Agatharchides, 146 3.c. or thereabouts. We find,
when we thus trace the observation to its true date, that all
antagonism disappears. Agatharchides flourished during a high-
water period, consequently the observed recession could have been
foretold from inspection of our curve. (For discussion of true date
see Hamilton & Falconer’s Translation, vol. iii, p. 192.)
On theoretical grounds, the high sea-level culminating about
250 B.c. may, it seems to me, need moving back perhaps 50 years
or thereabouts. This idea is derived from the following
considerations :—
Our curve was drawn centrally through the preponderating
masses of dots. Now it is well known that information such as
used in this work becomes more and more scanty as we go
backwards in time. While much evidence exists between the era
of Augustus and the fall of the Western Roman Empire, 476 a.p., it
rapidly decreases as we pass to the period before Cesar; therefore
we must anticipate that our observed points will be relatively
greater in number for the same high sea-level as we approach from
250 B.c. to the time of Christ. The greater accumulation of points at
the later dates consequently has probably brought the apex of our
curve somewhat too near the time of the Christian era. How
much distortion there may be found properly due to this cause
further research may determine.
If later investigation shall allow this shifting of the curve at the
epoch 250 3.c. as suggested, it would result in removing one more
of our conflicting points, viz., that Reclus tells us at the time of the
Battle of Thermopyle (480 3.c.) the sea extended much farther into
the land than now. The curve as now drawn would show the sea-
level at the date of battle but slightly above the present level; this
shifting would increase considerably its altitude at that time, and
would better satisfy the requirements of Reclus’ remark.
A few points I am at present unable to explain: for instance,
Rear-Admiral Smyth calls attention to certain ruins near the town
of Nettuno, Italy, “among which is Astura, so long the residence
of Cicero . . . . now submerged in the sea.” During
the later years of Cicero (106-43 3.c.) our curve calls for a sea-
level differing but little from the present; a sea-level, in fact,
.slightly above that of to-day. No building, therefore, then above
the sea should be now submerged. I feel confident that some
mistake will eventually be found in this statement. It may be that
the residence of Cicero has not been identified with certainty, or it
may be that near Nettuno, as in the Bay of Baie, foundations of
buildings were erected in the sea. At present however, this item
remains a conflicting point, antagonistic to our curve. I have no
item more unyielding than this.
The above analysis illustrates the character of the examination
bestowed on the testimony found conflicting with our curve. Lack
H. W. Pearson—Oscillations of Sea-level. 225
of space now forbids a more complete discussion of this matter.
I will say, however, that a recent canvass of over 500 manuscript
pages of these changes demonstrates that the conflicting points,
accumulated during many years of continuous search, aggregate
less than 4 per cent. of the total items collected. Over 96
per cent. of the testimony thus indiscriminately gathered falls into
harmony with our curve.
It seems impossible that the extraordinary method appearing in
this matter should be the result of chance. I believe firmly,
therefore, that law prevails in these oscillations, and while this
preliminary examination has as yet not been carried far enough to
establish this position, it renders our conclusions most extremely
probable. When this work was first entered upon, some years
since, I had little knowledge of what had been done before me
in this field, but I soon found much had been done; I am far from
being the first to announce “ Oscillations in the Sea-level.”
- Aristotle (884-322 B.c.) had suspected them ; he stated ‘there is
reason for thinking that these changes (replacement of land by sea,
and vice versd) take place according to a certain system and within
a certain period ” (“ Principles,” 9th ed., p. 18).
Ovid (43 B.c. to 17 a.p.) makes Pythagoras say in regard to these
oscillations—
*« The tace of places and their forms decay,
And that is solid earth which once was sea :
Seas in their turn retreating from the shore,
Make solid land what Ocean was before ;
Antissa, Pharos, Tyre, in seas were pent,
Once isles, but now increase the continent ;
While the Leucadian coast, mainland before,
By rushing seas is severed from the shore,
And men once walked where ships at anchor ride,
Till Neptune overlooked the narrow way,
And in disdain poured in the conquering sea.”’
Metamorphoses, Bk. xy, Addison’s translation.
Ovid has introduced here events that occurred both before and after
the time of Pythagoras (580 to 500 B.c.). They all bear testimony,
however, to the ever recurring nature of these changes, even if the
dates and order of sequence be somewhat confused. (See “ Popular
History of Science,” Routledge, p. 17.)
Sir Charles Lyell (“ Principles,” 9th ed., p. 526) had reason to
suspect that the upheaval of Scandinavia, in progress at the time of
his visit, had not always proceeded at the same rate, and that the
motion had not been invariably in one direction. He says: “Some
phenomena in the neighbourhood of Stockholm appear to me only
explicable on the supposition of the alternate rising and sinking of
the ground since the country was inhabited by man.”
Mr. R. C. M. Brown has many times denied the doctrine of
upheaval of coastline, and has urged change in absolute level of the
sea from astronomical causes in its stead.'
1 See Report Brit. Assoc. Ad. of Science, 1890, p. $24; Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc.,
vol. xlvi, p. 122.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. V. 15
226 H. W. Pearson—Oscillations of Sea-level.
Elisée Reclus, in ‘‘The Earth,” discusses at length the subject of
upheaval and depression of shore-lines; he shows the inability of
sedimentary processes to account for the shoaling of the many ports
of the Mediterranean or for the advance of the coastlines into the
sea; he says, in these matters, ‘we are witnessing the phenomena
of a vertical impulse” (p. 539); on p. 542 he shows us that. this
“vertical impulse” has affected the entire area of the Mediterranean.
The study of these and similar upheavals and depressions over the
earth’s surface leads him to say: ‘As will be understood, these
regular oscillations must take place in obedience to some general
law still unknown, although none the less certain” (p. 566). We
should note here, that while Reclus attributes these oscillations to
movements of the earth, it is impossible to distinguish such move-
ments from oscillations in the sea; the effect is precisely the same in
either case.
Rear-Admiral Smyth seems to have noted these oscillations; he
says: “It is decided, upon what appears to be sound geological
evidence, that a great part of the Italian coast has been raised and
lowered several times within the historical era, while the sea must
have ever maintained the same level ” (“‘ The Mediterranean,” p. 26).
Again, on p. 28 he remarks: “It may be safely concluded that the
land has risen and fallen twice since the Christian era, and that each
movement of elevation and subsidence has exceeded twenty feet.”
Mr. P. Thompson, in ‘‘The History and Antiquities of Boston,”
has shown that these same oscillations have occurred in the Fens
of England. On p. 660 he demonstrates these changes to have been
four in number since the time of the Romans, two periods of
inundation and two periods of desiccation, but these periods can
also be determined from the data attached to this argument. Oscil-
lations of the sea-level have also been shown at Rye and Winchelsea
and in the English Channel, the latter by Peacock.
We note, however, that the above quoted authorities, although
they may have suspected these oscillations, or may have actually
observed them, have in no case attempted to control these phenomena
by law or to determine the period of vibration. Law has been
invoked, however, by Professor Edouard Suess and by Trautschold,
a quotation from this latter having been previously given, notwith-
standing the “resolve to abandon the doctrine of secular oscillations
of continents” (Suess), and the adoption of periodic fluctuations
in the sea-level in its stead. JI am unable to learn that either of
these gentlemen has attempted determination of the period of these
fluctuations ; it may therefore be possible that this is the first attempt
in that direction.
I show no curve beyond the 400 8.c. At this period the evidence
which I have been able to collect becomes uncertain, scanty, and
the dates are very unreliable. The Deucalion Deluge, the Ogygian
Deluge, and the Deluge of Samothrace furnish data at remote and
uncertain periods. The books of Homer, of Herodotus, of Strabo,
of Ptolemy, and other ancient writers supply much information as
to the position of the sea-level at periods from 600 to 200 B.c.; but
H. W. Pearson— Oscillations of Sea-level. 22
owing to the habit those ancient writers had of describing a city,
an island, a peninsula, or a coastline, in terms borrowed from some
still earlier and more ancient writer, it is at times difficult to decide
as to the particular date at which the description fitted the object.
The testimony so gathered is therefore very conflicting in its nature.
I believe, however, that we find the amplitude of vertical vibration
in the waters very much greater at that time than now, and the
period of change reduced to approximately 500 years.
It is evident from what has gone before, that these oscillations
have had a continuous existence for the last 2,400 years. In this
paper we show strong evidence that these phenomena are periodic
in their nature, and that the periods of these cycles are capable of
determination. It is also equally evident, if any weight be attached
to the facts herein contained, that the whole Northern Hemisphere,
during the last three hundred years or more, has been subject to
a general protrusion above the level of the sea.
Let us now consider, then, those evidences as to present opposing
movement of shore-lines, to which attention has already been called ;
movements which, at the first glance, seem to deny so positively the
conclusions arrived at in the above discussion.
To open the argument, I believe we maintain with great reason,
that if there has been a bodily transference during the last few
centuries, of a considerable mass of water from the Northern
Hemisphere to the Southern, there must, coexistent with this
transfer, have been considerable decrease in flow of currents running
to the north and corresponding increase in currents flowing to
the south.
Now then, acting on this assumption, the writer has shown in the
American Geologist for September, 1899, perfect explanation of
these apparently irregular motions; it is there shown that every
observed case of apparent upheaval on one coastline, coincident
with subsidence on another, can be foretold by law, and that instead
of these motions being opposed to our conclusions, they are directly
confirmatory thereof, it being demonstrated that no transference
of water to the south can occur, no upheaval of northern shore-
lines can take place, without a corresponding subsidence on
the coasts of the Eastern United States, and also on the borders of
such other lands as may be similarly situated with regard to ocean
currents.
I will not repeat all the arguments used in the paper mentioned,
but will state that our case hinges on the law of deformation of
ocean levels by ocean currents, as announced by William Ferrell
in Science, vol. vii. He says: “In the North Atlantie the
tendency to flow eastward in the middle and higher latitudes causes
a slight heaping up of the water and a rise of surface-level adjacent
to the coast of Europe, and a drawing away of the water and
a depression of sea-level along the north-east coast of the United
States” (p. 76).
I have shown in the periodical mentioned that the waters
around the British Islands and on the Scandinavian shores are
228 H. W. Pearson—Oscillations of Sea-level.
now piled, certainly 5 feet (probably much more on the coast of
Norway) above the normal sea-level, and that the waters on the
eastern borders of the United States are correspondingly depressed.
It follows, therefore, that if the Gulf Stream—that force which
now restrains these waters in their abnormal position—should
decrease but slightly in its velocity of flow, the oceanic surface
would at once return in part towards that normal level from which
it has so long been displaced; in other words, Scandinavia and the
British Islands would enter upon an epoch of upheaval, the Carolinas
upon an epoch of subsidence. As we have seen, the recent
protrusions of the north renders certain the fact that a great mass of
water has recently disappeared from this hemisphere. The transfer
of this water to the south makes an equal certainty that coexistent
with this removal all northward-flowing currents should have
decreased in their velocity of flow. It is clear, therefore, that these
opposing motions in our coastlines can be reduced to law and fore-
told in advance of observation.
We have reason to believe, however, that apparent upheavals or
subsidences due to this cause will not at any time exceed 2 or
3 feet in vertical movement, and they consequently are of little
importance as compared with the periodic vibrations of 15 or
20 feet over an entire hemisphere, as developed herein. It never-
theless is important to detect and eliminate these minor deviations,
when we attempt the general investigation of coastal phenomena.
For a more extended, although still very incomplete discussion of
Ferrell’s law, see the American Geologist, as before mentioned.
To those who may wish to extend these investigations—and there
is great opportunity for such extension—caution should be given
against relying on evidence as to changes in the sea-level gathered
near the mouths of great rivers or in deltas like those of the
Nile, Po, Rhone, Rhine, Mississippi, etc. These delta deposits,
independent of their surroundings, are all sinking bodily and
spreading laterally, probably under some process of disgorgement
of their water contents. Much evidence of this exists. For instance,
E. L. Corthell says the delta lands of the Mississippi are unstable
both in vertical and lateral direction. A base-line 700 feet long,
measured accurately, had in five years increased to 712 feet. He
also quotes from the Report of the Mississippi River Commission :
“Discrepancies in beach marks, level heights, and gauges couid
only be satisfactorily accounted for by the most plausible explanation
of the subsidence of the whole delta” (The National Geographic
Magazine, December, 1897).
M. Staring is of the opinion that the gradual depression of Holland
“is caused only by the subsidence of the alluvial ground, the weight
of the dikes, and the incessant passage of men and cattle” (Reclus,
“The Earth,” p. 547). Regions like the northern and western
shores of the Adriatic, the deltas of the Rhine and Mississippi, should
thus be avoided ; the settlement of these delta deposits may obliterate
the vertical movements in the aqueous envelope; observations made
along rock-bound coasts only are trustworthy.
H. W. Pearson—Oscillations of Sea-level. 229
From the argument preceding it seems necessary to conclude that
in future study of changes in the sea-level, discrimination must be
made between each of the following causes which may affect the
oceanic borders :—
1. Seek the effects produced by the bodily transference of water
to and from the north. These effects would be universal over one
hemisphere.
2. Detect and eliminate those movements of upheaval or depression
due to variation in flow of ocean currents under the operation of
Ferrell’s law. These effects are local in their nature.
3. In deltas always suspect that any observed depression may be
due to a local settlement of the ground itself, and such data there
gathered may offer no argument whatever in favour of a rise in
sea-level.
4, Hliminate and avoid such coastal changes as may be due to
erosion of or accretion to shore-lines. In changes of this: century
it is generally possible to do this. In changes that have occurred
in the distant past we shall find much difficulty in separating results
of erosion or accretion from the results of real changes in the
sea-level; therefore, in past ages much testimony will be found
accumulated against us which our analysis will be unable to
remove; we must expect, therefore, many of these apparently con-
flicting observations.
All the evidence discussed hereto has been gathered on the oceanic
coastlines ; these data, as we have seen, testify to a recent protrusion
of the entire north, and that this apparent vertical uplift increased
in amount as we approach the Pole. There is, however, evidence in
existence, obtained from our great lakes, showing the same law of
greater elevation to the north.
Mr. G. K. Gilbert, in the 18th Ann. Rep. U.S. Geol. Survey, has
shown that this excess of upheaval at the north has been of recent
occurrence in the interior of our continent. A careful study of the
changes in level, during the present century, of the great lakes
enables Gilbert to announce this law with certainty.
With his inferential conclusions, however, in the light of our own
investigation, we are compelled to differ. He assumes that this
motion may continue indefinitely, and if so, he shows that in time
the Niagara Falls will cease their flow, and a new outlet to the great
lakes be placed in operation near Chicago. This result he reaches
in a logical manner from the data examined, but we see that
observations reaching back only one hundred years allow us to form
no certain opinion as to whether this motion will continue indefinitely
in one direction or otherwise. Then, again, the area of investigation
was of too limited a character. We have seen that to obtain the law
governing these risings and sinkings, it is not only necessary to
study at one field of view the entire Northern Hemisphere, but to
carry our investigation back in time as far as history or tradition
will allow. When this has been done we see that Gilbert’s observed
changes in level fall into line as part and parcel of one complete
system, universal over the entire North.
230 H. W. Pearson—Oscillations of Sea-level.
The cause of this vibration in the oceanic waters it is perhaps
too early to discuss; the oscillations should be first established
beyond a doubt. The most plausible explanation of the last change,
however, would seem to rest in a possible continued increase in
growth of the South Polar glaciers during the last few centuries,
contemporaneous with that general decrease in nearly all Northern
glaciers which, during the period mentioned, we know has been
in progress. If we could invoke this cause, the recent oscillation
mentioned would then be a physical necessity.
The question raised in this paper, and the results that have been
reached, seem to warrant certain inferences or speculations, some of
which are liable to be of considerable importance. For instance,
we know that the landing-place of Columbus in 1492 has not yet
been positively identified ; our curve, however, calls for a sea-level
at that latitude and date some 12 to 15 feet higher than at present.
The question is, would the change in topography produced by
assuming the sea at its old position aid us in reaching final con-
clusion in this matter.
As our curve for time past indicates a series of regular cycles
with a period of about 640 years, must we not suppose our oceanic
surface will again rise in the north, reaching its maximum shortly
after the year 2100. If we prolong this curve, as suggested, we
must conclude that disaster, as repeatedly in the past, will soon
again overwhelm our northern coastlines. Are such cities as London,
Liverpool, and New York ready for this advancing sea, and has
such a region as Holland any too much time for preparation ?
If our curve has been correctly mapped out, we must suppose that
the northerly movement of the waters has already commenced, or
that it will very shortly appear. This movement should be first
shown in cessation of the so-called upheaval of Scandinavia, and
that region should soon appear to be undergoing subsidence, while,
at the same time, the coasts of New Jersey will enter an epoch of
upheaval. We might, with great propriety, be on the look out for
these changes.
Lord Kelvin has shown us how one inch of water taken from the
surface of the sea, and piled up as ice at the Pole, would appreciably
affect the rotation of the earth; we can reasonably expect, therefore,
that these oscillations to and fro from the Poles to the Hquator
of 15 or 20 feet, as our arguments and facts seem to require,
should have considerable effect in altering the length of our day.
In fact, in this discussion we may, and probably will, find
confirmation of Newcomb’s surmise, that the hitherto unexplainable
irregularities in the moon’s motions may be due to slight changes in
the earth’s axial rotation, which rotation perhaps ‘‘ varies from time
to time in an irregular manner” (‘ Popular Astronomy,” p. 101).
We thus see that there are reasons, many and weighty, inducing us
to pursue this investigation to greater extent. Notwithstanding the
considerable attention given to the subject by this writer, a research
involving the labour of many years, we are as yet merely on the
threshold of the inquiry. Years could be devoted to the comparison
Reviews—Prof. V. Amalitzky—The Permian of Russia. 231
of ancient and modern maps and charts. A lifetime could be
expended on the emerged and submerged ruins of Ostia, Carthage,
Utica, the Piraus, Alexandria, the Bay of Baie, Tyre, Miletus, and
other places too numerous to mention on the ancient elevated or
depressed coastlines of the Mediterranean. This task is far beyond
the capacity of an individual. Law, if once established in this
matter, is of universal value and importance. The obscurity
shrouding these emerged and submerged cities already seems less
dark than before.
I earnestly hope, therefore, that some scientific body will under-
take to assist in extending this investigation, thus enabling us to
shed still additional light on these perplexing oscillations of the sea
which we have been considering.
(To be concluded in our next Number.)
154 dal] WA JE DSH wwA Se
Sur utes Fourttes pe 1899 pe piBRis DE VERTEBRES DANS
Les Déprors Permiens DE LA Russe pu Norp. Par V.
AMALITZKY. pp. 25, with 5 plates. Exposé fait 4 l’Assemblée
générale de la Soc. Imp. des naturalistes a St.-Pétersbourg, le
28 Décembre, 1899. (Varsovie, 1900.)
ROFESSOR AMALITZKY has for several years past been
engaged in working out the structure and history of the fresh-
water deposits of Paleozoic age in the northern governments of
Russia, and in the present paper he treats of some general questions
in connection with his investigations, and further gives a detailed
account of some explorations in Upper Permian strata on the banks
of the Little Dwina, which resulted in the discovery of numerous
plant and animal remains of considerable interest from their close
relationship to the flora and fauna of the Gondwana beds in India,
the Karoo formation of South Africa, and deposits of corresponding
age in Brazil and Australia. Some of the reptilian remains, more-
over, present a close resemblance to the genera Hlginia and Gordonia
described by E. 'T. Newton from the Elgin sandstones.
The lowest fresh-water deposits recognized by Amalitzky in the
north of Russia are red sandstones situated at Mount Andoma, on
the east side of Lake Onega, and, more to the east, at Oust-Pinéga
on the Northern Dwina. They contain lamellibranch shells be-
longing to the genera Carbonicola, Anthracosia, Archanodonta, etc.,
allied to the Anthracoside of the Russian Carboniferous. The beds
are of Upper Devonian age, and may be ranked with the Old Red
Sandstones of Scotland, the Kiltorkan beds of Ireland, and the
Catskill formation of North America. The only fresh-water for-
mations of Carboniferous age observed by the author are the sands
of the Lower Carboniferous at Mount Patrova, in the Vytégra
district, which have been shown by Inostrantsev to be a direct
continuation of the Devonian sandstones of Andoma. Higher up
in the geological series, exclusively marine deposits persist from
the Lower Carboniferous sandstones with Productus giganteus in the
232 Reviews—Prof. V. Amaliteky—The Permian of Russia.
Vytégra district, and more eastward at Oust-Pinéga, from the Upper
Carboniferous sandstones with Spirifer mosquensis, quite up to the
Lower Permian. The Upper Permian deposits, on the other hand,
shown on the banks of the lower part of the River Suchona and near
the sources of the Little Dwina of the North, exhibit fresh-water
characters very distinctly. They consist of nearly horizontal beds
of marl with intercalated lenticular beds of sand and sandstone.
For a long period these strata were considered to be destitute of
fossils; none were found in them by Murchison, Keyserling, or
Blasius, and they were neglected by the Russian geologists by reason
of this reputed barrenness.
Professor Amalitzky has, however, demonstrated by his dis-
coveries during the last four years that they contain a rich flora
and fauna. Amongst the plant remains the most important are
Glossopteris indica, Gl. angustifolia, (Vertebraria), Gangamopteris
major, Teniopteris, Sphenopteris, Callipteris cf. conferta, besides
Equisetum, Noeggerathiopsis, and forms like Schizoneuree. The fauna
includes a number of fresh-water lamellibranchs, such as Pal@omutela
Inostranzewi, P. Keyserlingi, P. Verneuili, Oligodon, Paleanodonta,
Carbonicola, Anthracosia, and Anthracomya; the Crustacean genera
Estheria and Cypris, together with the plates and impressions of
Ganoid fishes. Land animals are represented by amphibians
approaching Melanerpeton and Pachygonia, and a great number of
bones of theromorphian reptiles belonging to the Pareiasauria and
Dicynodontia, amongst which Pareiasaurus and Dicynodon have been
definitely determined, and also forms much resembling Elginia and
Gordonia.
These discoveries have confirmed the opinion of the author as
to the great resemblance from a paleontological point of view
between the Continental fresh-water deposits of the Upper Permian
and those of the Lower Karoo in Africa and of the Gondwana in
India; and he is led to conclude that the compact continent which
during the Permian epoch occupied Central and Southern Africa,
India, Australia, Argentina, and part of Brazil extended as far as
European Russia, and that the bond which united these countries
was on one side the Continental deposits of Gondwana in India and
on the other the similar deposits of Kouzniets in Siberia.
The explorations carried out by Professor Amalitzky during the
Summer of 1899, which form the main subject of the present paper,
were made at a spot on the steep right bank of the Upper Dwina of
the North, near the village of Kotlas. For a distance of about ten
kilometres the river bank is composed of Permian rocks overlain by
beds of clay, with pebbles and large stones of crystalline rocks, of
Post-Pliocene age. The Permian beds have a slight dip towards
the N.N.E.; they consist of a series of marls of very uniform
characters; the upper beds are of a reddish-brown tint, with
a persistent layer of white siliceo-dolomitic limestone, in some
places becoming dolomitic, in others a siliceous rock. These upper
marls rest with a slight discordance on lower marls, also reddish-
brown, and not dissimilar to the upper beds; a thickness of about
Reviews—Prof. V. Amalitsky—The Permian of Russia, 233
24 metres is exposed of the lower marls. At the line where these
marls come together there is a series of remarkable lenticular beds
of sand resting in trenches eroded in the lower marls and uncon-
formably overlaid by the upper beds. Five of these lenticular sand
beds are shown in section in the steep river banks in the course
of the ten kilometres referred to. The particular bed excavated,
situated at Sokolki, was 12 metres thick in its central portion,
with a breadth of about 80 metres. The bed contained numerous
irregular, hard concretions of sand cemented with carbonate of lime,
and in some of these the reptilian bones were enclosed. As the
bank at this place was vertical, and the higher portions were even
overhanging, the only practicable means of reaching the fossiliferous
lenticular deposit was by digging down to it from above, which
entailed much labour, and a further difficulty was caused by the fact
that at a depth of 15m. from the surface the soil, at the end of
June, was frozen hard, and the small fissures and cavities were lined
with ice.
Many impressions of large fronds of Glossopteris were met with
in some of the sandy beds, but they broke up on exposure to the
air. The position of the fossiliferous concretions was discovered only
after several fruitless trials. Some of the concretions contained only
single detached bones, whilst in others all the bones of a complete
skeleton were embedded together. Three skeletons were found side
by side, evidently of predatory animals allied to Rhopalodon; under
these were three, more or less imperfect, skeletons of Pareiasauria.
The sand surrounding the concretions was carefully removed and
the surface of each layer exposed so that the positions of the
skeletons could be distinguished. They appeared to be all extended
in the same direction as if they had been carried down and deposited
in the bed of astream heavily charged with sediment. The skeletons
in the central portions of the lenticular deposit were heaped together
as if they had been buried up with silt before the flesh had
decomposed, whilst those nearer the margins seem to have been
exposed long enough for decay to have set in, so that the bones
became detached.
No fewer than thirty-nine groups of concretions were discovered ;
about twenty of these contained complete or imperfect skeletons,
whilst in the others the bones were detached and commingled
together. These concretions have not as yet been properly
examined, and their contents are but partially known. Of the
remains of Amphibians, there are skulls and other bones of forms
allied to Melanerpeton and Metopias.
Both in numbers and importance the reptilian remains form the
chief part of the collection. They nearly all belong to the
Theromorpha, and the three suborders, Anomodontia, Pareiasauria,
and Deuterosauria, are represented. The Pareiasauria are the most
abundant ; amongst them are some small forms with skulls not more
than 380 centimetres in length, whilst others are 4-5 metres long
with skulls 1 m. in length and 0:66 m. in width. Some have their
heads and part of their backs covered with shield-shaped plates, like
234 Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London.
the Pareiasauria from the Karoo beds; others possess horn-like
projections on their heads like the Elginia from the Triassic deposits:
of Scotland. All are characterized by the good preservation of their
notched, spatula-shaped teeth. The Deuterosauria, though some--
times 8 metres in length, do not attain the proportions of the
Pareiasauria. Their dental apparatus is very powerful and of
a distinctly rapacious type. They belong to Rhopalodon, Fischer.
The Anomodontia are represented by small forms of Dicynodon
about the size of a bear, with two powerful tusks on the sides of the
head. Some of the skulls and skeletons discovered probably belong
to altogether new species of reptiles.
The only invertebrates mentioned from this lenticular deposit are
lamellibranch shells belonging to the Anthracoside, whilst the plant
remains, though numerous, are limited to forms of Glossopteris.
The plates accompanying the paper show the position of the
lenticular sandy beds in the cliffs of Permian marls, and the manner
in which the concretions with the bones embedded in them occurred
in the sands. G. J. H.
Isai OiSwaus! VNISMD) ISssJOp=apzaDsoaNie Ss .
GEOLOGICAL Soctrry or Lonpon.
I.—March 6th, 1901.—J. J. H. Teall, Esq., M.A., V.P.RB.S.,
President, in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
1. “Recent Geological Changes in Northern and Central Asia.”
By Professor George Frederick Wright, F.G.S.A.
The present paper is the outcome of a journey made by the author
in company with Mr. Frederick B. Wright in 1900-1901.
In North America an area of about 4,000,000 square miles was
brought under the direct influence of Glacial ice during the Glacial
Epoch. The result of six weeks spent in Japan was to show that
there are no signs of general glaciation in Nippon or Yesso. Neither
is there any sign of glaciation along the border of the Mongolian
Plateau, where the general elevation is 5,000 feet, but the whole
region is covered with loess. This has usually accumulated like
immense snow-drifts on the south-eastern or lee-side of the
mountains, and in it houses and villages are excavated. In the
mountainous region, strata of gravel and pebbles are so frequent
in the loess, that it is necessary to invoke both wind and water in
order to explain fully the origin of the deposit. At the present time
the loess in the interior is being washed away by streams much
faster than it is being deposited by the wind. The journey across.
Manchuria from Port Arthur along the Lao-Ho and Sungari rivers
was through valleys choked with alluvium, and there was no evidence
that the drainage of the Amur had ever been reversed by ice, like
that of the St. Lawrence; nor was there any other evidence of
glaciation. The lower course of the Amur indicates subsidence.
Again, there are no signs of glaciation on the Vitim Plateau.
Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 235
Lake Baikal appears to be of recent origin; it is 4,500 feet deep,
and has not been filled by the great quantities of sediment brought
down by the Selenga and other rivers. Although glaciers could
frequently be seen on the mountains which border the Central
Asiatic Plateau to the north-west, there was no evidence that the
glaciers had ever deployed on the plain. ‘The loess-region of
Turkestan, and indeed the whole area from the Sea of Aral to the
Black Sea, appears to have been recently elevated, in some places as
much as 3,000 feet. Desiccation took place at the same time, so that
the larger lakes are only brackish or still fresh. Direct evidence of
this in the form of deposits is given. The author thinks it likely
that the absence of glaciation in Northern Asia may have been due
to the rainlessness of the region, and that while America was
elevated, Asia was depressed during the Glacial Epoch.
2. “The Hollow Spherulites of the Yellowstone and Great
Britain.” By John Parkinson, Esq., F.G.S.
A recent journey to the National Park of the United States,
resulting in a study of the obsidians and rhyolites in the field and at
home, suggested a direct comparison between the hollow spherulites
characteristic of these rocks and those of the rhyolites of Shropshire,
Jersey, and elsewhere.
The first part of the paper is concerned with the spherulites of
the Yellowstone region. A brief description is given (i) of the
small bluish-grey solid spherulites common in the obsidian of
Obsidian Cliff, and (ii) of a hollow variety in which radial structure
is barely discernible. In the latter, the spherulitic part is repre-
sented by a whitish, rather crumbly material consisting of felspar,
tridymite, and quartz.
The hollow spherulites proper are divided into two groups—
(i) those containing cavities without definite form, and (ii) those in
which the cavities are related to the shape and structure of the
spherulite. The latter include the well-known lithophyse. The
manner in which these occur, and the relation of the cavities to
the enclosing spherulite, are described. Attention is drawn (a) to the
porous character of the latter, and (b) to the network of felspathic
fibres, studded with crystals of tridymite, which usually distinguish
the spherulite near a cavity.
Hypotheses framed to account for these varying structures would
take one of two directions :—(i) Hollow spherulites are the result
of some property of the fas magma, or (il) are due to the
decomposition of an originally solid spherulite by heated waters.
Taking the second alternative first, a description is given of the
effect of solfataric action on the rhyolites of the Yellowstone Cafion.
The conclusion reached is ‘that the action of hot waters charged
with silica may be to remove portions of the rock, or to permeate it
without destroying its characteristic structure; that we obtain,
however, no evidence to show that the spherulites are most easily
attacked, but rather the reverse.” Explanation, therefore, is most
naturally sought in some property of the original magma, and that
propounded by Professor lddings appears the nearest in accord with
236 Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London.
facts. Exception is taken to certain physical processes postulated
by Professor Iddings in a recent memoir, but with his earlier work
the present writer is substantially in agreement.
In the second part of the paper direct comparison is drawn between
the structures exhibited by the hollow spherulites from Obsidian
Cliff and those of examples from Shropshire, Jersey, and other
localities. Attention is called to the presence in the latter of
quartzose amygdaloids, crescentic in shape, and having a relation to
the edge of the nodule. Sometimes a series of such are found
parallel one to the other, not infrequently (at Wrockwardine)
becoming more or less completely circular. Projecting into such an
amygdaloid, or occupying an end, we find in many instances a
network of felspathic fibres comparable with the fibrous structure
which characterizes the American examples.
A description is given of a series of rocks from Boulay Bay, once
very vesicular, and containing the remains of crystals—probably
felspars—analogous to the crystals found encrusting the cavities of
lithophysze from Obsidian Cliff. Traces of a mineral which resembles
the tridymite from the latter locality are described from Wrock-
wardine.
Taking into consideration the resemblances between the hollow
spherulites of the Yellowstone region and those of Great Britain,
the conclusion is drawn that the hypothesis of corrosion is as
inapplicable to the latter as to the former. On the contrary, the
author believes that the cavities of the spherulites are the result of
the hydrous state of the magma.
II.—March 20, 1901.—J. J. H. Teall, Hsq., M.A., V.P.R.S., President,
in the Chair.
Mr. H. B. Woodward called attention to a polished slab of
Landscape Marble, or Cotham Stone, from the Rhetic Beds near
Bristol, which had kindly been lent for exhibition by Mr. Frederick
James, Curator of the Maidstone Museum. The specimen showed
that after the arborescent markings had been produced in the soft
mud, some irregular and partial solidification took place in the
upper layers of the deposit; and then during contraction a kind of
subsidence occurred of the upper and harder portions into the
lower and softer materials. This subsidence was accompanied by
a breaking up of the harder portions, suggesting a comparison (in
miniature) with ‘broken beds’ and even crush-conglomerates. The
specimen was of considerable interest as illustrating the mechanical
changes produced during solidification.
The following communications were read :-—
1. “On a Remarkable Volcanic Vent of Tertiary Age in the Island
of Arran, enclosing Mesozoic Fossiliferous Rocks.”
(Communicated by permission of the Director-General of H.M. Geological Survey.)
Part I.—“On the Geological Structure.” By Benjamin Neeve Peach,
Esq., F.R.S., L. & E., F.G.S., & William Gunn, Hsq., F.G.S.
The rocks which form the subject of this paper cover an area of
about 7 or 8 square miles, and culminate in Ard Bheinn A’Chruach
Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 237
and Beinn Bhreac. They are in contact with formations ranging
from the Lower Old Red Sandstone to the Trias, and are later in
date even than the important faults of the area. They are made up
partly of fragmental volcanic materials, and partly of various
intrusive masses, confined within an almost unbroken ring of
intrusive rocks. In addition to igneous fragments, the clastic
volcanic rocks contain fragments derived from the surrounding
formations ; and also masses of shale, marl, limestone, and sandstone
belonging to formations not now found in siti in the island. One of
these is several acres in extent, contains fossils, and is in part of
Rhetic age; a second is a fragment of Lias; and a third is of
limestone and chert resembling the Antrim Cretaceous rocks, and
yielding fossils. The absence of Oolitic and older Cretaceous seems-
to indicate a resemblance between a former succession in Arran and
that now seen in Antrim. If these fragments fell into the vent from
above, the igneous rocks must be of Post-Cretaceous age, and they
give an impressive picture of the amount of denudation which has
occurred since the period of vulcanicity.
Part I].—* Paleontological Notes.” By EH. 'T. Newton, Esq., F.RB.S.,
F.L.S., F.G.S.
The masses of Rhetic strata yield Avicula contorta, Pecten
valoniensis, Schizodus (Axinus) cloacinus, etc.; those of Lower Lias,
Gryphea arcuata, Ammonites angulatus, and new species of Nuculana
and Tancredia, which are figured and described. Thin slices of the
Cretaceous limestones prove to be very like those of the Antrim
Chalk, and the rocks yield determinable Foraminifera, Inocerami,
Sponges, and Hchinoderms.
2. “On the character of the Upper Coal- measures of North
Staffordshire, Denbighshire, South Staffordshire, and Nottingham-
shire; and their Relation to the Productive Series.” By Walcot
Gibson, Esq., F.G.S.
(Communicated by permission of the Director of H.M. Geological Survey.)
The Upper Coal- measures of North Staffordshire are capable of
a fourfold subdivision, the groups representing a definite sequence
of red and grey strata :—
4. The Keele Series. Red and purple sandstones and marl with occasional seams of
coal, and bands of entomostracan limestone.
3. The Newcastle-under-Lyme Series. Grey sandstones and shales, with four thin
seams of coal, and at the base an entomostracan limestone.
2. The Etruria Marl Series. Mottled red-and-purple marls and clays, with thin
green grits ; a thin coal occurs 150 yards above the base.
1. Black Band Series. Grey sandstones, marls, and clays ; numerous thin seams of
coal and Blackband ironstone; one of many thin bands of limestone is
constant, 36 to 40 feet above the base.
Spirorbis- and entomostracan limestones attain a maximum in the
Upper Coal- measures, but are not unknown in the productive
measures below. Indeed, the two sets of measures are closely allied
lithologically, paleeontologically, and stratigraphically in this region.
The chief movements are pre-T'riassic and post-Carboniferous.
No attempt has been made to recognize the Black Band Series in
238 Obituary—J. Hopwood Blake, F.G.S.
the Denbighshire, South Staffordshire, and Nottinghamshire coal-
fields, as they are indistinguishable from the productive measures in
the absence of Blackband ironstones. In each of these areas there
are divisions in the Upper Coal-measures which correspond with the
three highest divisions in North Staffordshire, and in all cases,
except near the margin of the basin, where overlap occurs, they are
underlain by ordinary Coal-measures with coal-seams. It is there-
fore concluded that these higher Cval-measures were deposited in one
basin which included all the four areas dealt with, and that whatever
movements occurred were of a local, and not of a regional character.
Judging by published descriptions, the higher series of measures
appear to be present in other Midland and North-Western coalfields,
and in most of them the Keele Series corresponds to the Salopian
Permian of Professor Hull.
@ FS raw PASE INS
JOHN HOPWOOD BLAKE,
Assoc. M. Inst. OC. E., F.G.S., of THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF
ENGLAND AND WALES.
Born Juny 22, 18458. Diep Marcu 5, 1901.
Mr. J. H. Buaxe was a son of Mr. George John Blake, of the
firm of Messrs. Allen & Blake, Wine Merchants, and was born
in Great Tower Street in the city of London. After completing his
education at King’s College, London, he was apprenticed to Mr. R. P.
Brereton, M. Inst. C. E., under whose directions he was engaged for
several years with Mr. 8. H. Yockney in railway work in Cornwall
and South Wales. Having been attracted to the science of geology
while at King’s College, he became further interested in the subject
during his engineering experiences, and was thereby tempted to
join the Geological Survey in April, 1868, at a time when the staff
under Murchison was considerably augmented. During the first
few years of his official career he was engaged in the re-survey of
portions of Somerset, along the Mendip and Polden Hills, at Shepton
Mallet, Street, Chewton Mendip, and Axbridge, and subsequently
at Watchet and Minehead. He was also occupied for a time in the
first detailed Drift Survey of the area north-west of London. Later
on he was transferred to Suffolk, to survey the country around
Stowmarket, and that bordering the sea north and south of Lowestoft,
whence he proceeded to Yarmouth and continued his investigations
inland and along the coast as far north as Palling in Norfolk. Much
time was then devoted to a careful study of the Forest Bed Series,
and his published section of the cliffs at Kessingland, Pakefield,
and Corton (1884) bears evidence of the painstaking character of
his work. East Dereham then became his home, and much field-
work was done in that part of Norfolk until 1884, when the primary
one-inch Geological Survey of England was completed. Mr. Blake
then removed to Reading, and was for many years occupied in
the re-survey on the six-inch scale of that neighbourhood, giving
ee oe
Obituary—J. Hopwood Blake, F.G.S. 239
especial attention to the Drifts, which before had only been
partially mapped. A few years ago he proceeded to Oxford, from
which important and interesting centre he laboured with much quiet
enthusiasm, until on March 5 he suddenly and quite unexpectedly
succumbed to angina pectoris at the age of 57.
The record of his geological work is chiefly embodied in the
geological maps of the districts be surveyed, and in sundry Survey
memoirs. He contributed notes to the Geology of Hast Somerset
(1876), to the Geology of Stowmarket (1881), the Geology of
Norwich (1881), and the Geology of London (1889); and he
personally wrote “The Geology of the Country around East
Dereham” (1888) and ‘‘ The Geology of the Country near Yarmouth
and Lowestoft” (1890). He had also prepared, in conjunction with
Mr. Whitaker, a Memoir on the Water Supply of Berkshire, which
is in the press, and had made some progress with a Memoir on the
Geology of Reading.
Mr. Blake’s extra-official contributions to geological literature
were by no means large considering his long experience. In 1872
he contributed (with H. B. Woodward) ‘‘ Notes on the Relations
of the Rheetic Beds to the Lower Lias and Keuper Formations in
Somersetshire ” (GrotoaicaL Magazine, Vol. IX, pp. 196-202).
In 1877 he published in the same Magazine (Deo. II, Vol. IV,
pp. 298-300) an article “On the Age of the Mammalian Rootlet-bed
at Kessingland ” ; and in 1881 he contributed to the Proceedings of
the Norwich Geological Society (vol. i, pp. 126-128) a paper on
a ‘“ Well-boring at East Dereham Waterworks.” To these may
be added his addresses to the Norwich Geological Society (of which
he was elected President in 1880-81), dealing with the Age and
Relation of the so-called ‘ Forest-Bed,’ and with the Conservancy
of Rivers, Prevention of Floods, Drainage, and Water Supply; and
also his Presidential Address to the Reading Literary and Philosophical
Society in 1885, when he discoursed on the Coalfields of the United
Kingdom with special reference to the Royal Commission on Coal.
From 1885 until near the close of his life he conducted a number
of excursions of the Geologists’ Association, on three occasions to
Reading, and on other occasions to Henley-on-Thames and Nettlebed,
Taplow and Bowsey Hill, Lowestoft and Kessingland, Goring, and
Silchester, reports of which were contributed to the Proceedings
of the Association.
Mr. Blake’s early training as an engineer had made him an
excellent draughtsman, so that his maps and the sections he con-
structed were models of neatness and precision. This training in
the exact methods of topographic surveys to some extent hampered
his field-work, as his constant aim to secure positive evidence for
geological boundaries led often to prolonged and inexpedient
investigation. Thus he would return again and again to obscure
tracts in the hopes of gaining exact information, a process theoretically
laudable, but practically detrimental to the progress of work. This
timidity in forming conclusions, perhaps to a certain extent con-
stitutional, had proved such a serious bar to official advancement,
240 Miscellaneous.
that it caused him grave anxiety. Imbued, however, with a true
love of science he laboured on with infinite patience to the end,
and it is distressing to think that he did not live to partake of
the benefits which quite recently accrue to the Survey through
a reorganization of the staff. Personally his colleagues and many
others will long lament the loss of a genial and tender-hearted
friend. EE BS We
IMEES Ciba AINE OUS-
——_—
INTERNATIONAL GeoLocicaL ConcRress, Paris, 1900.—The pupils,
friends, and admirers of Professor Albert Gaudry, who in 1852
started his scientific career with his “These de Géologie: Sur
Vorigine et la formation des Silex de la Oraie,” intend to present
him with a commemorative medal. Whilst heartily associating
ourselves with this proposal, we venture to suggest that something
more might be done. In one of his books Professor Gaudry
terminates the description of his new paleontological gallery with
the following words :—“ J’aimerais que, pour terminer notre galerie,
on placat une statue représentant une figure humaine, figure
douce et bonne, figure d’artiste et de poete, admirant dans le passé
la grande ceuvre de la Création et réfléchissant & ce qui pourrait
rendre le monde encore meilleur.”’ Apart from his eminent
scientific attainments, Professor Gaudry has revealed himself as an
artist and a poet as well, especially in his “ Essai de Paléontologie
philosophique ” ; and whoever has approached him can testify that
the ‘douce’ and ‘bonne’ expression of his face truly reflects his
character. We therefore think that his own bust would be the most
suitable couronnement d’édifice of the paleontological gallery, which
in the main is his own work.
Prorrssor ALBERT GaupRyY, President of the International
Geological Congress for 1900, announces that the Committee
appointed by the International Congress of Geologists to award
the International Spendiaroff Prize of 456 roubles (£48) has pro-
posed as subject for 1908, “Critical Review of the Methods of
Rock-classification.” ‘Two copies at least of any work competing
for the prize should be sent before August, 1902, to Dr. Charles
Barrois, Secretary of the Congress, 62, Boulevard Saint-Michel, Paris.
Erratum.—Brachylepas (Pyrgoma) cretacea, H. Woodw.: GEOL.
Mac., April, 1901, pp. 145-152, Pl. VIII.—Dr. Arthur Rowe,
F.G.S., calls attention to an error in Dr. Woodward’s paper as to
the locality of his new specimen of this Cirripede, which, like the
original specimen described in 1868, was also obtained from the
zone of Belemnitella mucronata in the Norwich Chalk, and all
references to Margate and Thanet should be deleted and the word
Norwich substituted.—Eprr. Grou. Mac.
1 A.Gaudry: ‘‘ Tes ancétres de nos animaux dans les temps géologiques,”’ p. 296 ;
Paris, 1888.
THE
GHOLOGICAL MAGAZINE.
NEW “SERIES. DECADE IV: . VOLE. VIII:
No. VI—JUNE, 1901.
@lRE GIN ASEy, (ASE EC ae ees:
1.—On tHe EvIpENCcE OF THE TRANSFERENCE OF SECONDARY SEXUAL
CHARACTERS OF Mammats From Mates To FEMALES.
By C. I. Forsyrn Mayor, M.D., F.Z.S.
HEN Darwin stated in the first edition of the ‘Descent of
Man,” “as probable that horns of all kinds, even when they
are equally developed in the two sexes, were primarily acquired by
the male in order to conquer other males, and have been transferred
more or less completely to the female,’! the “ various facts ” from
which he drew this inference did not include any paleontological
evidence. At the present day we are familiar with the notion that,
as regards the deer family, the oldest members known, from the
Oligocene, were absolutely devoid of antlers, and that the subsequent
phylogenetic evolution of the latter has a close parallel in their
ontogenetic development.
Except in the case of the reindeer, fossil Cervidz cannot be expected
to throw any direct light on our special subject of inquiry, since
up to the present day the females of the great majority of Cervidz
are, as a rule, devoid of antlers. The generally received view is that
amongst recent Cervide the females of the reindeer always have
antlers, and the females of other deer never have.
According to a statement by Eversmann, quoted by A. Brandt,?
the female wild reindeer in the Orenburg district are devoid of
antlers. With regard to the Cervide generally, there is abundant
testimony, to be found amongst older writers especially, of antlers
occurring in females of Capreolus and Cervus elaphus.® Riitimeyer
states that traces of pedicles are never absent in the doe;* and
Nitsche confirms that this is in fact the rule in old individuals.’
1 Charles Darwin: ‘‘ The Descent of Man and Selection in relation to Sex,’’
1871, vol. ui, p. 248.
2 Eversmann: ‘‘ Naturgesch. v. Orenburg,’’ ii, p. 261. Cf. A. Brandt in
** Festschrift f. Rudolf Leuckart,’’ 1892, p. 412.
5 See the numerous bibliography, together with original observations, in A. W.
Otto, ‘‘Lehrb. d. pathol. Anatomie d. Menschen und der Thiere,” 1830, i, p. 167
and note 18.
4 L. Riitimeyer: ‘‘Beitriige zu einer natiirl. Geschichte der Hirsche,”’ i:
Abh. schweiz. palaeont. Ges., 1881, viii, p. 42.
° H. Nitsche: ‘‘ Studien iiber Hirsche, 1898, i, pp. 23, 49, 50,
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. VI. 16
242 Dr. C. I. Forsyth Major—Characters of Mammals.
The phenomenon, however, is by no means restricted to senility.
Otto himself dissected an antlered doe pregnant with two foetuses,’
and Nitsche shows that the presence of antlers in the female Capreolus
is independent of senile sterility.”
Instances of the occurrence of antlers in the female Virginia and
Columbia deer are adduced by Caton.’
If we survey the cases recorded in the literature, no doubt remains
that the capacity of developing antlers is latent in the female
Cervide, and only an impulse is required.
In a case recorded by W. Blasius, of a doe, the abnormal antler on
the right side could be traced to a mechanical lesion produced by
the presence of a piece of glass, and Blasius is probably right in
supposing that the exostosis occasioned by the lesion assumed the
shape of an antler, owing to its occurring in the region where the
antlers are developed in the male.*
The remarkable case communicated to the Linnean Society by
James Hoy on December 16th, 1791, is a curious parallel to the male
plumage exhibited in female game-birds as a consequence of a lesion
of the ovaries. ‘A hind, the female of Cervus elaphus, was shot by
the Duke of Gordon, which had one horn perfectly similar to that of
a stag three years old. It had never had a horn on the other side of
its head, for there the corresponding place was covered over by the
skin, and quite smooth. It did not seem to have ever produced
a fawn, and upon dissection the ovarium on the same side with the
horn was found to be schirrous.” *
Next in order comes the constant presence of rudimentary pedicles
in old does, viz. at a time when the sexual functions have ceased.
Moreover, it appears, especially from Nitsche’s observations
alluded to above, that the females of Capreolus, at any rate, are
beginning to develop antlers before senile sterility sets in; so that
this new character of the doe has every chance of being transferred
to her offspring, independent of the sex, and to become general in
the does also, as it has become already almost general in female
reindeers.
Girafide.—For reasons formerly given,’ I agree with Lydekker,
by including in the family Giraffide the Sivatheritum group
of Ruminants from the Sivaliks (Sivatherium—Brahmatherium—
Hydaspitherium— Vishnutherium).
The two recent species of Giraffa develop horns in both sexes.
Gaudry made known a hornless form, Helladotherium Duvernoyt,
from the Upper Miocene of Pikermi; the skull described by him
1 A.W. Otto: ‘Seltene Beobachtungen zur Anatomie, Physiologie, und Pathologie
gehorig,’’ 1816, i, p. 71 (xxx).
2 Op. cit., p. 50, where is quoted also a former paper by the same author in
Tharander forstliches Jahrbuch, 1883, xxii, p. 118.
3 J. D. Caton: ‘ The Antelope and Deer of America,’’ 1881, 2nd ed., pp. 282, 233.
; : fase d. Vereins f. Naturw. zu Braunschweig, ix, Sitzungsber., pp. 11-13
1894-95).
° Trans. Linn. Soc., vol. ii, p. 356.
® Forsyth Major, ‘‘ On the Fossil Remains of Species of the Family Giraffide ”*:
Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1891, p. 316.
Dr. C. I. Forsyth Major—Characters of Mammals. 243
is the only one known of this genus, although various large-sized
Giraffoid hornless skulls have in turn been called Helladotherium,
and even united with the Pikermian species. For the present it
cannot be decided whether the Helladotherium was hornless in both
sexes or in the female only. The Giraffoid genus from the
contemporary deposit of Samos—which occurs also at Maragha in
Persia—has been founded by me ona form provided with supraorbital
horns and on a hornless form, which otherwise agrees perfectly
with the former; I therefore have considered them to be male andl
female forms respectively of one species, Samotherium Boissiert, Maj.
A smaller, closely allied form, Palgotragus Rouenii, Gaudr. (Pikermi,
Samos, Maragha), originally believed to be an antelope, is also
represented by a form provided with, and one devoid of, horns.
“In the skull of an aged specimen of Samotherium, just above
the orbits, where the large horns are placed in the horned specimens,
there occur very small processes separated by a suture from the
underlying part of the frontal.”! The explanation I then submitted
was, that in aged individuals of the female Samotherium male
characters occasionally make their appearance. Another specimen,’
of which but a portion of the frontal is preserved, exhibits above
the right orbit only a similar epiphysis as the one just mentioned ;
its height is no more than 9mm., with a longitudinal extension
of about 32mm. To judge from the size of the fragment and the
texture of the bone, it belonged to an adult, although not an aged
individual. It cannot therefore be considered to be a young
specimen of the horned form ; in the latter the horn attains a size
of upwards of 210mm.° Several other adult hornless skulls of
Samotherium, one of which is in the British Museum, show no
trace of an incipient horn.
From the foregoing we may conclude that in this Tertiary member
of the Giraffide the females are beginning to develop horns, which
primarily were male sexual characters of the Samotherium, whether
used as weapons or purely ornamental.
Boving.—With regard to all their salient characters the Bovine
are the most terminal group of Ruminants. No instance of the
occurrence of hornless females in recent wild bovine animals is known.
When working in the Paleontological Museum at Florence I came
upon the hornless skull of a Ruminant from the Pliocene of the
Val d’Arno, which had been discovered a few years previously and
variously interpreted ; the statement published somewhere that in
the Val d’Arno fauna occurred a Ruminant closely allied to the
camel, refers to the skull in question. On close examination I found
that the fossil presented all the cranial and dental characters of
Falconer’s Bos etruscus from the same deposits, with the essential
difference that no traces of horn-cores were present. My conclusion
was that the skull was that of a female ‘ Bos etruscus.’ I published
! Forsyth Major, op. cit., p. 319.
2 Nos. 712, 712a of my first collection from Samos, which is the property of
Mr. William Barbey in Geneva.
3 No. 17 of the Swiss Collection.
244 Dr. C. I. Forsyth Major—Characters of Mammals.
the fact at the time,! and also ventured to transmit the information
to Charles Darwin, who embodied it in the second edition of his
“ Descent of Man.”’”
Unaware of my previous statement, Riitimeyer announced in
1878 as a novel fact the discovery of a hornless fossil member of
the Bovine. The skull in question, B.M. No. 48,037, from the
older Pliocene of the Sivalik Hills, he described and figured as
Leptobos Falconeri, Rit. From the absence of horn-cores, from the
great extension of the parietal zone, and from its general slender
and elegant build, the skull is considered to be that of a female.
But at the same time it is conjectured that part of the horned
skulls attributed to the same species might equally be of the female
sex; this on account of their weaker horns.‘
The skull from the Val d’Arno is described and figured in the
same memoir, together with the cast of a second equally hornless
skull from the same locality, the original of which is preserved
in the private collection of the Marchese Strozzi. Riitimeyer’s
conclusion is very different from mine; the hornless skulls from
the Val d’Arno are named Leptobos Strozzii, and thus placed in
a different genus and group from Falconer’s Bos etruscus, which
becomes the Bibos etruscus.2 As Riitimeyer was indisputably the
highest authority in this particular branch of paleontology, my
previous most positive statement must have been considered in the
light of a rather rash proceeding.
Years afterwards my excavations at Olivola (Upper Pliocene)
brought to light several hornless bovine skulls, and made it in-
cumbent on me to reinvestigate the whole matter, the more so
as some additional horned skulls from the Val d’Arno had in the
meantime enriched the Florence Museum. The result arrived at®
was a confirmation of my former view, that the hornless and horned
bovine skulls from the Upper Pliocene of Italy are one and the
same species. This species is nearly related to the Sivalik Leptobos,
as Riitimeyer had already shown with respect to the hornless form
of the Val d’Arno. The obvious conclusion was to collocate the
bovines from the Italian Pliocene in the genus Leptobos: Lepiobos
elatus (Croiz.).’
Stehlin, another pupil of Riitimeyer, has quite recently studied
the Florentine collections; with regard to the above question, he
declares that after repeated examination of the materials he agrees
with my view that Riitimeyer’s ‘ Leptobos Strozzii’ is nothing else
than the female form of his ‘ Bibos etruscus.’ °
I do not think it necessary to enter into the particulars of the
case, which are published. For the present purpose it is sufficient
1 Paleontographica, 1873, 11, 2 (xxii), p. 128. 2 1874, p. 505.
3 L. Riitimeyer, ‘‘Die Rinder der Tertiaer-Epoche,” etce.: Abh. schweiz.
palaeont. Ges., 1878, p. 162.
4 Op. cit., p. 164. 5 Op. cit., pp. 167-175.
§ Forsyth Major, ‘‘L’Ossario di Olivola in Val di Magra’’: Proc. Verb. Soc.
Tosc. Sc. Nat., March 3, 1890, pp. 71-75.
7 Forsyth Major, op. cit., p. 75.
8 Abh. schweiz. palaeont. Ges., 1900, xxvii, p. 466, note.
Dr. OC. I. Forsyth Major—Characters of Mammals. — 246
to point out that in the earliest known—Pliocene—representatives
of bovine animals, part, at any rate, of the females were devoid of
horns, whereas, as stated before, the females of all the wild recent
species, without exception, have acquired them. The occurrence of
hornless forms in domestic races has been explained by Riitimeyer
as a reversion.'
Suide.—The male weapons of Suid are the tusks. Stehlin has
recently shown that the male Potamocherus provincialis (Gerv.) from
the Lower Pliocene of Montpellier was already provided with equally
strong developed canines as the recent species. In the female fossil
form they are about equally developed as in Sus scrofa.* Some
years ago I figured on two plates male and female skulls of
recent species of Potamocherus,? from which it can be seen that in
the Malagasy and Hast African Potamocheri the canines of the
females are almost equal in size and shape to those of the males.
The same occurs in the case of the Bornean Sus barbatus,* and, to
judge from a skull described and figured by Rolleston,® may occur
also in the female of Sus andamanensis.
In the West African Potamocherus, according to Stehlin’s
observation, the canines of the female are weaker than in the eastern
species.®
Stehlin has strongly insisted upon the importance of this instance
of transmission of male sexual characters to the female, in Potamo-
cherus. ‘Dieselbe ist in doppelter Hinsicht von allergrostem
Interesse. Einmal darum weil durch sie im allerletzten Abschnitt
der Erdgeschichte nochmals ein evidenter Fortschritt gegentiber dem
Pliocaen erzielt wird, sodann aber auch in rein morphologischer
Hinsicht, insofern als mit ihrem Hintreten ein vollig neuer, bis
dahin unbetretener Weg in der Umformung und Weiterbildung der
ganzen Species betreten wird.”’ (‘It is of the greatest interest,
firstly, because by means of this transmission there is again an
evident progress in the last chapter of the earth’s history, as compared
with the Pliocene; secondly, from a purely morphological point of
view, because by it a hitherto completely new and untrodden road
in the transformation and progression of the whole species is now
opened.’’)
In our own species the modern aspirations of women are, to all
appearances, the incipient signs cf the same natural law. Physical
and mental characters of man, originally acquired in the struggles of
the males, are apparently being slowly transferred to women. They
only require time for their full evolution.
PaO pecite ps Lio ye.
2 H. G. Stehlin, ‘“‘ Uber die Geschichte d. Suiden-Gebisses’?: Abh. schweiz.
palaeont. Ges., 1899, xxvi, pp. 256, 257.
3 Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1897, pls. xxv, xxvi.
Stehlin : op. cit., xxvii, p. 466.
Trans. Linn. Soc. London, 1876, p. 286, pl. xli, fig. 3.
l.c., xxvi, pp. 255, 256. ;
Abh. schweiz. palaecont. Ges., 1900, xxvii, p. 466.
4
5
6
7
246 =F. R. Cowper Reed—Salter’s Undescribed Species.
TI. — Woopwarpian Museum Notes: Satrer’s UNDESCRIBED
Species. IV.
By F. R. Cowrrer Regp, M.A., F.G.S.
(PLATE XI.)
GASTEROPODA (continued).
Horiostoma Discors (Sowerby), var. Marim (Salter MS.). (PI. XI,
Figs. 5 and 6.)
1873. Euomphalus Marie, Salter: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 156
(a 859, « 860).
1891. Huomphalus Marie, Woods: Cat. Type Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 103.
There are four specimens of this form in the Woodwardian
Museum, labelled a 859 and a 860 by Salter, and all come from the
Wenlock Limestone of Dudley. Saiter (loc. cit. supra) says of it:
“Related to H. discors, but with most regular ridges of growth.
A beautiful shell, dedicated to a most worthy lady—the patient
preparer of this collection [Mrs. Fletcher].” All four specimens
belong to the Fletcher Collection.
Dracenosis.—Shell nearly discoidal ; spire short, usually low and
depressed; whorls rounded, five or six in number, ornamented on
their apical surface by four or five weak and inconspicuous
longitudinal keels, which are crossed nearly at right angles by
prominent transverse, equidistant, and regular sharp lamelle, not
very closely set together, and only very slightly undulated where
they cross the weak keels. As they pass round to the umbilical
surface of the whorls they bend back gently, but again curve
forward to the line of contact of the whorls. The umbilical surface
of the whorls is devoid of longitudinal keels, except in young
individuals. Umbilicus deep, wide, open, exposing all the whorls.
Aperture not preserved.
MEASUREMENTS.
mm.
Breadth of one specimen (a 859) ... sh 609 200 50°0
Approximate height of the same... a 000 500 20°0
Average distance of varices on upper surface 000 be 1°5
Breadth of specimen (4 860) showing the under surface of
shell ie se 500 S00 ae 200 ee 64:0
Depth of umbilicus of same... .. 12:0
Remarks. — The distinguishing feature of this form is the
regularity and prominence of the transverse lamelle and their
slight undulation in crossing the keels. Otherwise it closely
resembles H. discors and its varieties, including H. rugosum,
Sowerby.’ It does not seem possible to retain it as an independent
species, as it nearly approximates many specimens of this very
variable species H. discors, and transitional forms with intermediate
characters are not uncommon.
Horrostoma piscors (Sowerby).
1873. Reema pacificatus, Salter: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 156
a °
1891. ipso pacificatus, Woods: Cat. Type Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 103.
1 Lindstrém: Silur. Gastrop. Pterop. Kongl. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 19, No. 6
(1884), pp. 157-159, pl. xvi, figs. 20-26 ; pl. xvii, figs. 1-10.
F. R. Cowper Reed—Sailter’s Undescribed Species. 247
There is only one specimen of this form in the Museum thus
labelled by Salter (a 861), and it comes from the Wenlock Limestone
of Dudley.
Draeyosts.—Shell discoid ; spire short; whorls six? (only three
are preserved), angulated slightly by longitudinal keel near margin
of flattened apical surface ; sides of whorls ornamented by two weaker,
equidistant, longitudinal keels. No keels on umbilical surface.
Surface of whorls crossed by small, closely-set, transverse growth-
lamelle, slightly undulated and irregular, and curving backwards
from the mouth outside the inner longitudinal keel of apical surface.
Umbilicus not seen. Aperture apparently oblique. Breadth 36 mm.
Remarks.—There is no feature by which this form can be separated
from the variable H. discors, and the species therefore must be
dropped. The indentation on the outer whorl of the specimen is
manifestly due to an injury to the shell, and cannot be considered
as a character of any specific importance. It is not even desirable
to separate this form as a definite variety of H. discors, a conclusion
I have reached after examining a large series of the latter species.
Pievrotromaria F'Lercuert, Salter. (PI. XI, Fig. 4.)
1873. Pleurotomaria Fletcheri, Salter: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus.,
p- 154 (@ 851).
1891. Plewrotomaria Fletcheri, Woods: Cat. Type Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 112.
There is only the one original specimen (a 851) in the Wood-
wardian Museum from the Wenlock Limestone of Dudley and
belonging to the Fletcher Collection. It is not quite perfect and
is slightly compressed laterally, but the shell is preserved on the five
whorls. The figure of a Pleurotomaria given by Salter (op. cit. supra,
p. 154) in the margin closely resembles this species.
DracGnosts.—Shell broadly conical; apical angle 50°-60°; whorls six
in number (only five are preserved), convex, with slit-band grooving
middle of body-whorl, but situated below middle line of other whorls
though above suture-line. Two weak longitudinal keels, of which
the lower is the stronger, are present on apical surface of body-whorl
above slit-band at equal distances between it and suture-line. On
the upper whorls the keel nearer the slit-band is more prominent
and slightly angulates the apical surface of the whorl, but the other
keel nearer the suture-line is almost obsolete. Slit-band concave
and sunken as a groove between sharp, prominent, narrow borders ;
crescents fine, closely packed, sharply curved. Ornamentation of
apical surface consists of obliquely transverse, slightly sigmoidal
stri#, and wrinkles bending back sharply near the slit-band to meet
it as an acute angle. The ornamentation below the slit-band is
similar, the strize being sharply curved back to meet it. Aperture
not preserved. Height of specimen ca. 45 mm.
Remarxs.—The broadly conical shape of the shell and the position
of the slit-band on the whorls, as well as its groove-like nature,
are features found also in Pl. biformis (Lindstrom),’ but the orna-
mentation of the surface is quite distinct, and only one keel is figured
in that species above the slit-band.
1 Lindstrom: op. cit., p. 98, pl. vii, figs. 39-42.
248 F. BR. Cowper Reed—Salter’s Undescribed Species.
PLEUROTOMARIA CYCLONEMA (Salter). (Pl. XI, Figs, 1-3.)
1873. Murchisonia cyclonema, Salter: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus.,
p. 155 (a 848, a 849, a $50).
1891. Murchisonia eyclonema, Woods: Cat. Type Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 107.
There are in all fourteen specimens labelled Wurchisonia cyclonema
by Salter, varying in size from 10mm. to 36mm. in length.
Several are in an excellent state of preservation, and all come from the
Wenlock Limestone of Dudley and belong to the Fletcher Collection.
Draenosts. — Shell conical, turbinate; whorls five, ventricose.
Apical angle 50°-60°, being smaller in the older and larger
individuals. Body-whorl large, equal to half the length of shell or
even more. Slit-band a little above middle line of body-whorl, but
in other whorls half-way between the suture-lines. Apical surface
with distinct swollen band immediately below upper suture-line of
each whorl, and with one rounded, prominent, longitudinal keel
between this band and the slit-band. Six or seven longitudinal
keels below slit-band on body-whorl, of which the uppermost three
or four are prominent rounded ridges, usually nearly equal in size,
and nearly equidistant. The other three or four longitudinal keels
on the body-whorl are on the umbilical surface, and grow
successively much narrower, fainter, and less prominent. On the
upper whorls the uppermost three longitudinal keels are alone
developed in the adult, the number varying from one to three
according to age. Slit-band prominent, of moderate width,
bordered on each side by narrow ridge. Surface concave, but
marked along centre by longitudinal keel, varying in degree of
development, but making profile of slit-band very characteristic.
Crescents not very numerous, gently arched backwards, but strongly
marked, and in some of the smaller individuals sub-lamellar. Apical
surface of whorls crossed obliquely by fine sigmoidal thread-like
raised lines, at regular distances apart in young individuals but more
closely and less regularly packed in adults. Below slit-band the
whorls are ornamented by similar transverse lines, but crossing the
keels nearly at right angles instead of obliquely. On both sides of
the slit-band the lines are sharply bent back.
Mouth large, subcircular or oval, slightly oblique to axis of shell.
MEASUREMENTS.
I II III
mm. mm. mm.
Length ... Be ee ae HID vaag “BO ooo UO
Breadth (across body-whorl) ... ATO eas | HERO cag ere
Apical angle te 6 OO grat st) 00 ance an OOM
Remarxs.—This species bears much resemblance to Plewrotomaria
laqueata (Lindstrém),! from the corresponding beds of Gotland, in
its general shape, in the distribution and number of the keels, and
in the position of the slit-band, but differs in the minute characters
of the latter, which is an important point.
It has the general aspect of Pl. Zloydi, Sow., but differs in having
only one keel above the slit- band and fewer and larger keels
1 Lindstrém : op. cit., p. 102, pl. ix, figs. 4-6.
Decade IVVolMIL PL XI.
Ceol Mag 1901.
Newmanimp,
West
ith.
GMWo odward del. et
Limestone, Dadley .
Gaster opoda, Wenlock
J. P. Johnson—COretaceous Rocks of Glynde. 249
below, and in the lower position of the slit-band and its minute
characters. The slit-band, in fact, resembles more closely that of
Pl. bicincta (Hall)* than that of any other species in the presence
of the keel along the middle of the band and its sharp borders.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI.
Fic. 1.—Pleurotomaria cyclonema, Salter, sp. Nat. size.
Fic. 2.—Ditto, showing mouth. Nat. size.
Fic. 3.—Ditto, slit-band. x 5.
Fic. 4.—Plewrotomaria Fletcheri, Salter. Nat. size.
Fie. 5.—Horiostoma discors, var. Marie, Salter, sp. Nat. size.
Fic. 6.—Ditto, umbilical surface. Nat. size.
III.—Some Sxcrions 1n tHE Cretaceous Rocks arouND GLYNDE,
AND THEIR Fosstn CoNnrTENTS.
By J. P. Jonnson.
N the memoir recently published by the Geological Survey” on
the Selbornian strata of England, no mention is made of an
interesting section in the Gault near Glynde, which was certainly
in existence up to 1898, when I last visited the district. The object
of the present note is to put this section on record, together with
some observations on two chalk quarries, from which I have at
various times collected fossils.
The pit in the Gault is situated on private land about a quarter of
a mile from the railway station, with which it is connected by
a railroad. As far as I can remember, it showed some 15 feet of
slate-blue clay, containing an abundance of pyrites, and consequently
a quantity of selenite, though in small crystals. The only organic
remains that were at all plentiful were the ammonites, Schlenbachia
varicosus, Hoplites denarius, and -Ancyloceras spinigerum. The
finding of a big tooth of Protosphyrena ferox is noteworthy.
The large quarry in the Chalk at the railway station exhibits
a fine section of the well-known limestone, which here contains
a very small proportion of clayey matter and occasional nodules of
marcasite. It is of Cenomanian age, as shown by the occurrence of
Schlenbachia varians. The commonest fossils are the Selachian
remains, amongst which I may especially mention a nice series of
the teeth of Scaphanorhynchus subulatus and forty-seven associated
teeth of Ptychodus decurrens. It was from here that I obtained the
fine mandibular ramus of Pachyrhizodus Gardneri which is in the
British Museum.
Just outside the village, on the right-hand side of the road to
Lewes, and joined to the above-mentioned quarry by a railroad,
is another large excavation in the Chalk. This is at a higher level,
and is in the face of the escarpment. The Chalk differs from that
already described in being free from argillaceous matter; it also
yields nodules of marcasite and, in the topmost beds, a few flints.
It is mostly of Turonian age, as shown by the abundance of
Rhynchonella Cuvieri, Inoceramus mytiloides, I. Cuviert, and Lima
1 Lindstrém: op. cit., p. 106, pl. viii, figs. 21 and 23.
2 « Or co bo
Family IV.—ESSEXITES.
Turee InpEx Mrinerats: Labradorite; augite or diopside ;
and biotite (or an alkaline amphibole or pyroxene).
SiO, % 50-48.
1. Multifels -essexite (includes Essexites of Cabo Frio;
Jacupiranguinha; Rongstock; and
Dignaes).
2. Mediofels-essexite (includes Hssexites of Salem, Mass. ;
and Sélvsberg).
3. Paucifels - essexite (includes Essexites of iAbieianel ;
Montreal; Penikkavaara, near
Kuusamo and Brandberq).
Family V.—THERALITES. (= Theralites and Shonkinites.)
THREE InpEx Minerats: 4 pyroxene; felspar (plagioclase
or Oppel) ; and nepheline, or sodalite, or leucite.
SiO, % 50-40
Subfamily A—NATROTHERALITES.
1. Augi-natrotheralite | (= Theralite, sen. str. ; and includes
most of the Teschenites).
2, Aigi-natrotheralite (— Natronsussexite).
3. Barke-natrotheralite (= certain Teschenites).
Subfamily B—KALITHERALITES.
1. Augi-kalitheralite* (= Shonkinite).
2. Aigaugi-kalitheralite (= Pyroxene-malignite).
3. Amphi-kalitheralite (= Amphibole-malignite).
4, Melano-kalitheralite (= Garnet-malignite).
1 The a@ of natro- and of /ali- is pronounced long as in ‘ state.” The z of kali- is
short as in ‘ pit,’ but it is dropped i in the name kalijolite, i in which the first i should
be pronounced long as in ‘ write.’
314 HH. Stanley Jevons—Nomenclature of Igneous Rocks.
Family VI—IJOLITES. (= Ijolites and Missourites.)
Two Inpex Minerats: Pyroxene; and nepheline, or sodalite,
or leucite.
SiO, % 47-40.
Subfamily A—NATRIJOLITES.
1. Augi-natrijolite’ (includes Tjolites of Imandra See, Kola
Penin. ; Eleolite-syenite (Ridge-
type) of Magnet Cove; and
Jacupirangite).
2. Aigaugi-natrijolite (includes Ijolites of Kuusamo; Kal-
jokthal; and Alno).
3. Aigi-natrijolite (= Urtite).
4, Aneph-sodali-natrijolite (includes Tawite ; and Sodalite-
syenite of Square Butte, Montana).
Subfamily B.—KALIJOLITES.'
(Includes at present only Missourite.)
VIII. CHaNncEs IN THE SUBDIVISION OF FAMILIES.
The subdivisions of the families contained in the above table are
in almost every case those suggested by Rosenbusch in the most
recent editions of his works, but I have not adopted them without
testing their validity whenever possible. The aligranites he does
not subdivide, but as I see no reason why they should not be treated
in the same way as the granites, I have subdivided the family on
the basis of its coloured minerals. Amongst the midalkalites, the
subdivision melano-midalkalite is new. Rosenbusch places borolanite
in the leuci-midalkalite (leucite-syenite) group; but, considering
that Horne and Teall distinctly state that they give that name to
a rock consisting essentially of orthoclase and melanite, and that
leucite only occurs in parts of the mass which they describe, I think
that borolanite and rocks of that composition should be entitled to
rank as a distinct sub-group in the great midalkalite family. Garnet
plays an important rdle as an original constituent in many basic
rocks of the alkaline series; to a much greater extent indeed than is.
generally recognised.
The two rocks urtite and tawite are removed from the midalkalite
(nepheline-syenite) family, with which they are classed by
Rosenbusch, presumably because of their association. They will
be found in the family to which their mineral composition assigns
them, that is to say, the Ijolites.
The principal difficulty which I experienced in naming sub-
divisions was the frequent want of definite information as to the
relative proportions of the constituents of a rock. Many descriptions
even of recent date fail in this respect, and it would be well if all
petrologists realized, as a few already do, that a mere statement of
the minerals found in a rock is not a complete description of it. On
1 See footnote on preceding page.
2 See ‘‘ Elemente der Gesteinslehre,’’ 1898, and Mikr. Phys., 1896, vol. ii.
H. Stanley Jevons—Nomenclature of Igneous Rocks. 315
the contrary, it is the relative proportions of the constituents which
establishes the identity of the rock. For instance, a kalitheralite
(e.g. malignite) may contain the same minerals as an alisyenite.
The former may contain 25 per cent. orthoclase, 25 per cent.
nepheline, and 50 per cent. of ferromagnesian minerals, and the
latter 90 per cent. orthoclase, 5 per cent. nepheline, and but
5 per cent. of ferromagnesian minerals. They may be composed
of exactly the same minerals, and yet in such different proportions
that they belong to widely separated families.
Another example will show how unsatisfactory is this practice of
merely giving a qualitative description of a rock. I have, of late,
frequently had to read descriptions of rocks in order to determine
to which subdivision of a family they should be consigned in cases
where the subdivisions are distinguished by the most abundant ferro-
magnesian mineral. In one description, after two or three pages had
been devoted to an amphibole and two pyroxenes which the rock
contained, it was just mentioned at the end that the rock contained
biotite. The impression given was that the amphibole and pyroxenes
were the important ferromagnesian minerals, whilst biotite was quite
subordinate in quantity. On examining a slice of the rock, however,
I saw at a glance that the biotite was far more abundant than both
the amphiboles and pyroxenes taken together, and that it had received
so little attention merely because it presented no point of special
interest. Now that an easy method of determining the relative
proportions of constituents is known, namely, that of Rosiwal already
referred to (see footnote, p. 305), it is to be hoped that there will be
speedy reform in this matter.
Although I believe that the names given to the rocks in the
above table generally represent their composition correctly, I cannot
vouch for the fact. Owing to the vagueness of many descriptions
in the above-mentioned respect, and because I have not thought it
worth while merely for the purpose of illustration in a preliminary
notice tospend much time in consulting literature not to be obtained
in Cambridge, it may be that a few of my names will bear correction.
That cannot, however, affect the value of the system of nomenclature
itself; and I trust that authors who are acquainted with any rocks
which I may have misnamed will be so kind as to set me right.
IX. Tue Naminea or Newry Discoverep Rocks.
In conclusion, I may perhaps offer some suggestions as to how
_ newly discovered rock-species should be named in the future. The
first step in identifying a rock is to determine its essential con-
stituents, that is to say, those which make up more than 5 per
cent. by weight of the whole rock. According to their nature,
whether they are of the alkaline type or not, the rock is first
assigned either to the Alkaline or the Calc-alkaline Series. Amongst
the essential constituents it will next usually be possible to find
two or three which coincide with the index minerals of some
particular family, and the rock can then be forthwith placed in
that family. Should the essential constituents include the index
316 Lieut.-Gen. MeMahon—Tourmaline of White Granite.
minerals of more than one family, which will rarely be the case,
the rule is to choose those which are most abundant. The family-
name being thus obtained, observe next upon what basis the family
is subdivided, whether it is by the nature of the ferromagnesian
mineral, by the kind or quantity of felspar present, or by some
other property. All the constituents of the rock, essential and
accessory, being now considered, it will be easy to assign the rock
to its right subdivision, supposing one already exists. If, on the
other hand, the rock is a new type and no place awaits it, a new
subdivision can be created and named in accordance with the
general system.
The only rocks which it will be found difficult to name are those
which do not contain the index minerals of any family. In such
cases the association of the rock is the first point to be considered.
If any such rock clearly forms part of an igneous mass which can be
readily assigned to a family, let the doubtful rock also be assigned
to the same family, and give it a name in which the missing index
mineral is preceded by the privative a-. If, however, besides being
entirely new, the rock does not appear to be associated with any
known type, it becomes a question whether a new family should
be established. This course must be adopted only when there is
really no other way of naming the rock, and the family name
selected should be, as far as possible, descriptive of the rock’s
peculiarity in mineral or chemical composition.
I cannot end without expressing my gratitude to Prof. Bonney,
my first master, for the interest with which he has followed my work
upon classification and nomenclature and for the many suggestions
which he has freely offered. To Prof. Rosenbusch also I am deeply
indebted for the kindly instruction received at Heidelberg, which
has opened my eyes and smoothed my path in many ways, but more
especially in this research.
IIJ.—Nores on THE TOURMALINE OF THE WHITE GRANITE OF
Meupon, Dartmoor.
By Lieutenant-General C. A. McManon, F.R.S.
‘W\HIS “remarkable variety of granite” was briefly described by
Mr. J. J. Harris Teall, F.R.S., in his “ British Petrography ”
(1888), p. 816, and an interesting account was given in a footnote
of the process by which the author was able to identify the topaz
found in the rock.
In a paper on Dartmoor published in 1893 (Q.J.G.S., vol. xlix,
p. 585), I described in some detail the mode of occurrence of this
intrusive rock and some of its characteristics; and in the following
year (Q.J.G.S., vol. u, p. 338) I noted the occurrence of a second
outcrop on the flank of South Down.
None of the above references to the white granite of Meldon
contain a description of the tourmaline found in it, and as this
mineral presents some unusual features a few remarks on it may
interest students of petrology.
Lieut.-Gen. McMahon—Tourmaline of White Granite. 317
White tourmaline (achroite) has not yet, so far as I am aware,
been found in the British Islands, but the tourmaline of the Meldon
granite approximates to colourless tourmaline sufficiently closely to
render it probable that if the attention of mineralogists is drawn to
the subject true achroite may yet be detected in British rocks.
The following remarks are based on the study of a good suite
of thin slices made from hand specimens collected by me, and of
numerous fragments of tourmaline separated from these specimens
with the aid of a heavy solution. When I was at Meldon the
granite was being quarried, and I was able to get unweathered
samples.
Fragments of tourmaline examined with a powerful pocket lens
are seen to be in part colourless and in part of pale-brown colour.
Under the microscope, when examined with the aid of transmitted
light, the tourmaline in thin slices (as thin as those ‘‘made in
Germany” for instance) is absolutely colourless and devoid of
dichroism. It is consequently difficult to distinguish from the topaz
with which it is associated. This difficulty is increased by the fact
that both minerals, as seen in thin slices of the Meldon rock, closely
resemble each other in habit. Both are allotriomorphic and occur
in irregular shaped grains. The tourmaline rarely presents itself in
prismatic form, whilst the cleavage, usually so characteristic of topaz,
is rarely to be seen in the topaz of the Meldon granite. As, moreover,
the refraction of both minerals is higher than that of Canada balsam,
and of the felspar and quartz with which they come in contact,
the difference in the refraction of topaz, as compared with that of
tourmaline, does not help one to discriminate between them.
The positive character of the double refraction of topaz could not
be made out in any of my slices, as no bisectrix could be seen in
converging polarized light. The axial angle in topaz from different
localities varies very much, and it is probably large in the variety
found in the Meldon granite.
The rock under consideration affords an illustration of the help
that may sometimes be afforded by our much abused thick slices
of English manufacture. In such slices the Meldon tourmaline
presents a somewhat more normal appearance. Even in thickish
slices, however, the mineral is sometimes colourless in whole or in
part, but more often a reddish or reddish-brown streak or patch is
to be seen in the otherwise colourless grains which exhibits the
characteristic dichroism of tourmaline.
The appearance of these coloured stripes and patches suggests
to me the possibility that the colour may be due to the alteration of
an originally colourless tourmaline ; namely, to the oxidation of the
iron contained in the mineral. Iron is not an essential constituent
in this complex silicate, and my previous studies have familiarized
me with the idea that iron may be removed, or oxidized, without
breaking up the fundamental silicate of which it is more or less
a casual unessential member.
The tourmaline in the Meldon granite very rarely exhibits
prismatic outlines in thin slices, but in the isolated fragments both
318 Lieut.-Gen. McMahon—Tourmaline of White Granite.
this mineral and the topaz show a slightly increased tendency to
do so. The tourmaline, however, even in thin slices, is frequently
elongated in the direction of the vertical axis (c’); and as the
greatest absorption takes place at right angles, and compensation
with the quartz wedge occurs parallel to this direction (viz. to c’),
a ready and sure means of identifying the mineral exists in such
cases.
When this observation can be made one cannot remain in doubt
as to which is tourmaline and which is topaz, as the latter is not
dichroic in thin slices, and compensation with the quartz wedge,
in the case of topaz takes place at right angles to ec’, and in the case
of tourmaline parallel to ¢’.
When dichroism is apparent in the Meldon tourmaline the change
is from colourless (e) to a yellowish or reddish-brown (0).
In cases where the above-mentioned observation cannot be made,
namely, when dichroism is absent, I have found the following
methods very useful.’
I have often, when examining the topaz in my slides, been able
to obtain in converging polarized light the interference figure of an
optic axis, namely, a single bar, or a bar bisecting the first ring of
the interference figure, which remained without change of character
during a revolution of the crossed nicols through 360°. When this
interference figure is obtained it shows clearly that the mineral is
a biaxial one, and consequently that it is topaz and not tourmaline.
Axial sections of the latter mineral, on the other hand, may be
obtained in my thin slices, which in converging polarized light
yield a negative uniaxial cross which does not open out en revolving
the nicols. Sometimes when the section has not been cut quite
normal to the vertical axis of the crystal, only two of the arms
of the cross can be seen, and sometimes their point of junction
is outside the field. In such cases, with one of Swift’s improved
one-sixth objectives, I can generally get the two arms just on or
just outside the edge of the field, and can make sure that the arms
are those of an uniaxial mineral. In cases of doubt I am able to
confirm this observation by inserting the one-fourth undulation mica
plate, when the double refraction of tourmaline being negative,
one dot (only half of the cross being visible) appears in a line with
the axis of the mica plate and well within view.
Observation of the strength of the double refraction also affords,
in some cases, a method of distinguishing between the two minerals.
The birefringence of topaz does not exceed 0-010, whilst that of
tourmaline is 0:020. The colour of the former mineral, as seen
in thin slices, does not rise above the indigo-blue of the second
order of Newton’s scale, and very often falls below that. On the
other hand, the colour shown by the tourmaline in my sections
frequently rises to the indigo-blue of the third order.
Lastly, the character of the metamorphism effected by aqueous
agents affords a useful test. Tourmaline alters to steatite, mica,
1 T confine myself to optical tests and those which can be applied to thin slices.
A. Strahan—Chloritic Marl, Dorset. 319
chlorite, and cookeite;! whilst topaz changes to steatite, mica, and
kaolin.
In my Meldon specimens the green tint seen in some of the
tourmaline is probably due to the birth of ultra-microscopic particles
of chlorite in the originally colourless crystals. The topaz, on the
other hand, sometimes exhibits partial kaolinization, and when it
does so it is clear that the mineral is topaz and not tourmaline.
On the whole, I think it probable that the somewhat partial and
patchy colour seen in the Meldon tourmaline is due to the post-
genital alteration of an originally colourless variety of this mineral.
I do not think the faint colour now visible is due to the bleaching
of an originally dark-coloured tourmaline. An operation of this
kind would imply the bleaching of the whole of the white granite
itself, which I do not think probable. Moreover, it would involve
chemical action to an extent that must have left very powerful
marks on the felspars and other susceptible minerals contained in
the rock, that could not remain unobserved.
IV.—An Apyormat Section oF Cutoritic Mart at Mure Bay,
Dorset.
By A. Srrawan, M.A., F.G.S.
[* “The Geology of the Isle of Purbeck and Weymouth” (p. 152)
I referred to some green sand which occurs next below the
Chalk in Mupe Bay, Dorset, as somewhat resembling Chloritic
Marl, but as being too thick for that bed. As it was followed by
the Gault, I concluded that it belonged to the Upper Greensand.
The section was subsequently visited by Mr. W. Hill, who collected
from the sand in question Holaster subglobosus, var. altus, and
Echinoconus castanea among other fossils, and inferred that it was
Chloritic Marl. He considered that though it passed up insensibly
into the Chalk it was faulted against the Gault, but that there had
been also considerable contemporaneous erosion of the Upper Green-
sand. In April of this year I revisited the section in company with
Mr. Hill, and was fully satisfied as to the correctness of his views.
The following account has been drawn up from our observations :—
The Lower Chalk becomes extremely impure in its lower part,
and contains much glauconite; it thus graduates insensibly down-
wards into a gritty glauconitic sand. The sand contains a few
phosphatic casts, more or less worn or corroded, scattered throughout
it, but has a well-marked nodule-bed crowded with these casts at
its base; other fossils with the shell preserved and not filled in with
phosphate occur also throughout the whole bed.
Below the sand comes a sandy glauconitic clay, forming part of
the Gault, but the fact that the separation is sharp, and that the
chert-beds of the Upper Greensand and the passage-beds down
into the Gault are absent, proves that the two are faulted together,
although the fault-plane is parallel to the highly inclined bedding.
1 See Dana’s textbook, last edition.
320 A. Strahan—Chioritic Marl, Dorset.
The thickness of sand between the fault and what may be taken as
the base of the Chalk amounts to 15 feet.
The following list of fossils includes those collected in April, 1901,
and those obtained previously by Mr. Hill. ‘They prove that the
whole of the sand should be referred to the Chloritic Marl. The
identifications are by Mr. E. T. Newton. .
CHLORITIC MARL, MUPE BAY.
ScATTERED THROUGH THE BED.
Terebratula squamosa, Mant. Holaster subglobosa, var. altus, Ag.
Cidaris Bowerbanki, Forbes. Holaster suborbicularis ? Defr.
Echinoconus castanea, Brongn. Plocoscyphia ?
Holaster subglobosa, Leske.
From NopvuLE-BED AT BASE.
Helicoceras, sp. Cardita, sp. (?° tenwicosta).
Columbellina ? Pleuromya (Panopea).
Turritella, sp. Cytherea plana, Sow.
Cucullea carinata ? Sow. Plicatula, sp.
Cucullea mailleana? D’ Orb. Exogyra, sp.
Isocardia, sp. Polyzoon on Lamellibranch.
Trigonia, sp. Rhynchonella (near to grasiana).
Cardium, sp.
A section at the top of the cliff (referred to on p. 151 of the
Memoir on the Isle of Purbeck) shows that the Chloritic Marl
maintains an abnormal thickness for 200 yards at least west of
the section on the beach. It is there succeeded downwards by
a considerable thickness of Upper Greensand, in which, however,
no representative of the Chert Beds could be found, and which
presumably belongs to the lower part of the formation. Two
explanations for this sequence may be offered: firstly, that the
fault which throws Chloritic Marl against Gault on the beach does
not follow the bedding precisely, but cuts obliquely through the
Upper Greensand, so as to throw Chloritic Marl against that forma-
tion westwards; secondly, that the upper part of the Upper Greensand
suffered erosion before the deposition of the Chloritic Marl.
The first explanation is supported by the fact that the section on
the beach places the existence of a fault beyond doubt, and shows.
also that the fault is approximately parallel to the highly inclined
beds. In favour of the second explanation it may be urged that the
abnormal thickness and character of the Chloritic Marl point to the
Upper Greensand having undergone erosion. The phosphatic casts
of fossils, though but little water-worn, are fragmentary. While,
therefore, they have neither travelled far nor been rolled upon
a beach, they are not in their original matrix. The absence of
any fragments of chert among the nodules in the Chloritic Marl
appeared to me to point to the erosion of the Upper Greensand
having been but slight, but in explanation of this Mr. Hill suggests
that the chert-nodules were formed at a later date, and that the beds
were all soft when the erosion took place. For myself I am inclined
to think that the segregation of nodules followed as a rule closely
upon the deposition of the sediments in which they occur.
Notices of Memoirs. 321
The fossils, generally speaking, have too wide a range to determine
exact horizons in the Upper Greensand, but Mr. Jukes-Browne
points out to me that Cytherea plana, which occurs as a phosphatic
cast in the nodule-bed, favours the idea of erosion to below the
Chert Beds, for he has not observed it from any higher horizon.
In the Memoir on the Isle of Purbeck (pp. 161, 162) I referred
to the general consensus of opinion that there had been some slight
erosion of the Upper Greensand before the deposition of the Chloritic
Marl, and gave some instances, but I know of no other case in which
the evidence is so strong or where the erosion appears to have been
so great as at Mupe Bay. That it was strictly local is proved by
the fact that in Lulworth Cove to the west, and in Warbarrow Bay
to the east, the sequence is normal, and the Chloritic Marl resumes
its normal thickness of 3 to 4 feet. It is unfortunate that the
existence of a fault introduces a doubt how far the incompleteness
of the sequence should be attributed to contemporaneous erosion and
how far to subsequent movement. While accepting the evidence
that there was erosion, perhaps considerable, of the Upper Green-
sand, I am disposed to call in the aid of the fault at the top as well
as at the bottom of the cliff, to account for some of the missing beds.
My thanks are due to Mr. Hill for giving me the opportunity of
making this correction, and for supplying much of the material on
which it is founded.
NWOQRtECHS GO WeEEVeO@rsS=
I.— Ortern oF THE AncrENT CrystaLtiIngE Rocxs.— Dr. Frank
Dawson Adams gives an account of the excursion to the Pyrenees
in connection with the Kighth International Geological Congress
(Journ. Geol., 1901, ix, pp. 28-46). The object of the excursionists
was to examine, under the leadership of Professor Lacroix, certain
intrusive granite masses, which have not only intensely altered
the strata through which they pierce but which have produced
a wholesale transformation of the sedimentary rocks in question
into granite, the granite now occupying the space formerly occupied
by the sediments. The districts examined were Aix-les-thermes,
L’Etang de l’Estagnet, L’Etang de Baxouillade, Cirque de Camp
Ras, Foix, Arignac, Cabre, Vicdessos, Sem, Massat, Bagnéres-de-
Bigorre, Pouzac, Payole, Cirque d’Arbisson, and Baréges. While
recognizing that the excursion was merely a rapid traverse of
a district which has received detailed attention from the French
petrographers, Dr. Adams sums up as follows: ‘“ While the
transfusion of a certain amount of material into the limestones
along the immediate contact of the intrusions and also a solution
of the limestone to a limited extent in certain cases seems highly
probable ; the wholesale transformation of limestone into diorite, or
of shale into gneiss and granite, which has been described in the
case of these contact zones of the Pyrenees, is as yet very far indeed
from being proved.”
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. VII. 21
322 Notices of Memoirs.
II.—Nopvutar Granite From Pine Laks, Ontario. By Frank
Dawson Adams, Ph.D. (Bulletin of the Geological Society of America,
1897, vol. ix, pp. 163-172, pl. xi; February 10, 1898.)—Professor
Adams, while carrying out some work for the Geological Survey of
Canada in the eastern part of the Province of Ontario, has discovered
a remarkable occurrence of orbicular or nodular granite in the
township of Cardiff, in the county of Peterborough. In this part
of the country the fundamental rocks are Crystalline Limestones,
associated with Gneisses and Amphibolites, broken through by great
intrusions of Granite. The nodule-bearing Granite occurs on the
north and south sides of Pine Lake. It is rather fine-grained and
usually gneissic in places, but often massive. The nodules are
confined to a portion only of the Granite, and are not in proximity
to the Amphibolite; and therefore the nodular structure is not
a contact phenomenon. The nodules are spherical or ellipsoidal,
and occur either scattered through the rock or, more rarely, in
lines. When the nodules occur in rows they gradually get closer
together until they seem to fuse or coalesce into a continuous band
or vein. The centres of the nodules exhibit little segregation
bunches of schorl. Professor Adams concludes that these nodules
are due to a primary differentiation of the magma, for the reason
that they do not include certain minerals such as Microcline, which
have evidently crystallized from the magma latest, and which are
abundant in the surrounding Granite; while on the other hand Silli-
manite occurs in the nodules, being one of the first to separate from
the magma, but does not occur in the surrounding Granite.—F. C.
III.—An ExperimentaL INvEsTIGATION INTO THE FLow oF
Marsie. (Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of
London, 1901, vol. cxcv, pp. 363-401.)—These experiments have
been carried out by Messrs. Frank Dawson Adams and John Thomas
Nicolson; pure Carrara marble being the rock selected. The paper
deals with the methods employed, deformation of the dry rock at
ordinary temperature, at 300 C., and at 400 C., and at 300 C. in the
presence of water. Comparison is made of the structures produced
in Carrara marble by artificial deformation with those produced by
deformation in the case of metals, and comparison of the structures
produced with those observed in the limestones and marbles of
highly contorted portions of the earth’s crust. The following is
the summary of results:—(1) By submitting limestone or marble
to differential pressures exceeding the elastic limit of the rock
and under the conditions described by the authors, permanent
deformation can be produced. (2) This deformation, when carried
out at ordinary temperatures, is due in part to a cataclastic structure
and in part to twinning and gliding movements in the individual
crystals composing the rock. (8) Both of these structures are seen in
contorted limestones and marbles in nature. (4) When the deforma-
tion is carried out at 300 C. or, better, at 400 C., the cataclastic structure
is not developed, and the whole movement is due to changes in the
shape of the component calcite crystals, by twinning and gliding.
(5) This latter movement is identical with that produced in metals
Notices of Memoirs. 323
by squeezing or hammering, a movement which in metals as
a general rule, as in marble, is facilitated by increase of temperature.
(6) There is therefore a flow of marble just as there is a flow of
metals under suitable conditions of pressure. (7) The movement
is also identical with that seen in glacial ice, although in the latter
case the movement may not be entirely of this character. (8) In
these experiments the presence of water was not observed to
exert any influence. (9) It is believed, from the results of other
experiments now being carried out but not yet completed, that
similar movements can, to a certain extent at least, be induced in
granite and other harder crystalline rocks, and that several structures
developed in these rocks in nature in highly contorted regions can
thus be reproduced. Photo-micrographs of the marble are given.
IV.—Grotogy oF West Cornwati.— Mr. J. B. Hill, who has
been studying the geological structures of Western Cornwall for
some years, has been talking to the Royal Geological Society of
Cornwall about them. His paper has appeared in the Transactions
(1901, vol. xii, pt. 6), and his conclusions, given in his own words,
are as follows:—‘The structures of the stratified formations in
West Cornwall are identical with the structures of crystalline schists.
In the Falmouth district, so far as yet examined, true slates have
not been met with. The strata have been thrown into a series of
isoclinal folds, accompanied by small faults. With these folds and
faults minor structures have been set up until the whole rock has
often become a mass of minute folds and thrusts, with their
accompanying strain-slip cleavages. These processes have been
carried so far that ‘crush-conglomerates’ have been produced on
a large scale. It is evident, from a study of this district, that had
the rocks been subjected to those stresses at a greater depth and
below the zone of fracture, where they would not have been so free
to move, they would have been converted into true schists. They
possess now every structure of schists, but the mineralization has
been wanting.”
“The visible dip of the rocks is of no value, except as registering
the inclination of the limbs of folds. As an illustration of this fact,
it may be pointed out that although the strata have a general dip to
the south-east, between Falmouth and Truro, we are apparently
crossing the strike from the coast to the heart of the county, yet,
instead of getting deeper in the stratigraphical series, we are on
precisely the same geological horizon as at Falmouth, the intervening
- ground being made up of a succession of isoclinal folds.”
This last paragraph is, we believe, confirmatory of De la Beche’s
view, and does not support the view sometimes expressed, that in
this district we have a great thickness of sedimentary deposits.
V.—ARGONAUT FROM THE TERTIARY OF JAPAN.—Mr. Yoshiwara has
just published in Annotationes Zoologice Japanenses (1901, vol. iii,
pp. 174-176) a description of a supposed new Argonaut from the
Neogene tuff of Agenokimura, near Matsue, Iugori, province Izumo,
Japan. This was found by Mr. J. Asai, and mentioned by Professor
324 Notices of Memoirs.
Jimbo as long ago as 1896 in the Journal of the Tokyo Geographical
Society, vol. viii. 'The specimens, of which there are two, can only
be distinguished from ‘ A. tuberculosa, Linn.’ (said by Yoshiwara
to be identical with A. nodosa, Sol., and A. oryzata, Mensh.), by
the general outline of the shell, the size of the whorls near the
centre, and the rows and numbers of the ribs. It is of considerable
interest to find that this tuberculate form of the genus, which has
never been found living in Japan, existed there in Tertiary times.
VI.—Tue Granp Canyon or THE Cotorapo.—Professor W. M.
Davis has published in the Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology at Harvard College (Geol. Series, v, No. 4, May, 1901) an
account of an excursion to the Grand Canyon of the Colorado. His
results may be summarized as follows :—‘“‘ There is some probability
that the San Rafael swell, like the Waterpocket flexure, is of
pre-Tertiary origin. The other deformations of the region, both
flexures and faults, are almost exclusively of much earlier date than
the canyon cycle, and they may have been formed relatively early
in the erosional history of the district. The total denudation of
the region thus far accomplished may be considered in two parts,
of which the first—the great denudation—was far advanced before
the general uplift by which the second—the erosion of the canyon
and the stripping of weak strata from the plateaus—was introduced.”
“But the great denudation was complicated by repeated move-
ments, after each of which the processes of erosion may have
reached an advanced stage before the occurrence of the next series
of disturbances. It is only by an analysis of these repeated
movements and revived erosions that the origin of the drainage
system can be determined. As far as this analysis can be attempted
at present for the Grand Canyon district, the side streams seem to
be of various origins, except that none of them appear to be
antecedent. The Colorado itself may be in part antecedent to some
of the many dislocations that the district has suffered, but it seems
to be for the most part consequent on the displacements caused by
faulting in the later part of the great denudation, and on the form
that the surface had assumed at that time.”
“The floor of the Toroweap valley is higher than the neighbouring
valley floors, because it is sheeted with heavy lava flows which have
effectively withstood the intermittent erosive effects of wet-weather
floods. The past climate of the region cannot be safely determined ;
a change from a humid to an arid climate at the close of the Miocene
does not appear to be demanded by the facts that have been appealed
to in its support.”
Professor Davis gives a bibliography and some illustrations, many
of which are new, and one of which, a general photographic view of
the Grand Canyon, is especially good. T. BR. J.
VII.— Sorter GeronogicaL Notres.— Enkanan Briuines, for
twenty years paleontologist to the Geological Survey of Canada,
and the founder of the Canadian Naturalist and Geologist, formed
the subject of Dr. Ami’s address as president of the Ottawa Field
Reviews—Heddle’s Mineralogy of Scotland. 325
Naturalists’ Club, last December. The material has now been
extended, a bibliography added, and the whole published in the
American Geologist for May.
Proressor E. W. Hitearn’s “ Historical Outline of the Geological
and Agricultural Survey of the State of Mississippi,” which appeared
in the publications of the Mississippi Historical Society, has been
reprinted in the American Geologist tor May. It gives an interesting
picture of the origin, rise, and progress of one of the United States
Surveys, and provides an official account of the publications, always
of value.
Mr. J. A. Cunnrncuam has published a contribution to the
Theory of the Order of Crystallization of Minerals in Igneous
Rocks, in the Scientific Proceedings of the Royal Dublin Society
(1901, vol. ix, pt. 4). The paper should be read in connection with
Dr. Joly’s paper, “Theory of the Order of Formation of Silicates in
Igneous Rocks,” published by the same Society in 1900.
5% Jah Wh aE 22h WW Se
I.—Tue Mrveratocy or Scornanp. By the late M. Forstmr
Heppiz, M.D., F.R.S.E. Edited by J. G. Gooncutrp, F.G.S.
2 vols.: 360 pp., 80 figures in text, 117 plates. (Edinburgh:
David Douglas, 1901. Price 36s. nett.)
URING the greater part of a long life the late Professor Heddle,
for many years Professor of Chemistry in the University of
St. Andrews, spent his holidays in the mineralogical exploration
of his native country, and scarcely a single locality from which
there was a likelihood of obtaining good specimens can have been
left unvisited by him ; he was thus able to bring together a collection
of Scottish minerals remarkable for its completeness and for the
excellence of its material; to its examination, chiefly chemical, he
devoted all his available time. Some years ago the collection was
purchased for the nation and deposited in the Museum of Science
and Art at Edinburgh; there it was arranged and labelled, for
public exhibition, by Dr. Heddle during the latter years of his life.
Of the topographical and chemical mineralogy of Scotland,
Professor Heddle had thus an unsurpassed knowledge, and he made
voluminous notes with a view to the eventual publication of
a treatise by means of which the information so laboriously acquired
might be preserved to posterity. Unfortunately, like too many
other investigators, he was called to his rest when his work was
still far from complete; there was thus a great danger that his notes
might never be printed and made available for general use. His
family has done what was possible to avert the threatened
catastrophe, and have obtained help for the completion and editing
of the work; the notes have been prepared for press and the treatise
has been edited by Mr. J. G. Goodchild, who is now closely
associated with the custody of the collection itself.
To complete the work, Mr. Alexander Thoms, son-in-law of
326 Reviews—Buckman on Brachiopoda.
Professor Heddle, has compiled a list of the mineral species which
have been found in each of the counties of Scotland; Mr. James
Currie has prepared a list of Scottish Pseudomorphs, and an index
of Scottish paleosomatic minerals; Mr. J. G. Goodchild has added
an alphabetical list of minerals, indicating by means of asterisks
those which occur in Scotland, and has further prepared a series of
beautiful gnomograms and stereograms of the crystallographic forms
of the more common mineral species.
The result is the issue of the two fine volumes now before us ;
the book is well printed, and illustrated regardless of expense; an
excellent portrait of the author is given as frontispiece, and is
followed by a short memoir. No more impressive memorial of
Dr. Heddle could have been devised by his family.
The work is of course of the dictionary type, and designed, not
for continuous reading, but for the purposes of reference; its
usefulness depends, to a large extent, on the completeness and
accuracy of the specification of the localities. No pains have been
spared over this part of the book; all the places mentioned in
Dr. Heddle’s notes have been identified as far as possible, a tedious
task, involving much difficulty and enquiry when the localities are
remote from railways, are not recorded on the best maps, and are
represented by names of which there is much diversity of spelling.
Fortunately, Dr. Heddle had left a set of Ordnance Survey Maps,
on which his annual wanderings had been traced; with the help of
these, and much aided by the wide information of Mr. James Currie,
Mr. Goodchild has prepared a Synonymic Index (83 pages) to the
Scottish Mineral localities, specifying for each locality the position
on the Ordnance Map and the names of the mineral species to be
found there.
The numerous plates illustrating the forms of crystals have been
prepared at great cost, and they add to the beauty of the volume;
but Dr. Heddle left behind him no information as to whether the
figures were original or not. Some, at least, were doubtless taken
from works illustrating the minerals of other countries, though
probably they at the same time illustrate Scottish minerals preserved
in his own collection.
It should be mentioned that in the text there are numerous.
illustrations of agates, to the mode of origin of which Dr. Heddle
had given much study.
It would add to the usefulness of the work if in a subsequent
edition an alphabetical index to the mineral species and varieties,
with page-references, were placed at the end of it.
I].— Homa@omorpuy amone Jurassic Bracuropopa. By S&S. S.
Buoxman. Proc. Cotteswold Naturalists’ Field Club, 1901,
vol. xii, pt. 4, pp. 281-290, pls. xiii-xiv.
ii this paper Mr. Buckman performs a welcome service by drawing
attention to the occurrence of what he terms ‘homceomorphy”
in Jurassic Brachiopoda. The part played by parallelism in
producing striking similarities between members of separate
Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 327
stocks has hitherto been sadly neglected, and the failure to
recognize this independent acquirement of similar general features
has doubtless repeatedly led to confusion. ‘T'wo of the most striking
examples of this phenomenon, described by the author, are furnished
by Terebratula imitator and Zeilleria subcornuta, and by Terebratula
subomalogaster and Zeilleria anisoclines.
Some of the descriptions of new forms in this paper are
unfortunately too brief, and might with great advantage have been
amplified. The value of generic separations among the Jurassic
Terebratuloids is, to some extent, admittedly a matter of personal
opinion. But it may seriously be doubted whether any useful
purpose is to be attained by the adoption of such a ‘genus’ as
Pseudoglossothyris, proposed in this paper. It appears, at least, to
be hardly justified by the somewhat slender distinctive characters
embodied in the definition provided. Abuses of the word ‘genus’
are now unfortunately common, and there is a widespread and
regrettable tendency to burden an already involved nomenclature
by such additions.
The expression ‘date of existence’ scarcely commends itself
when employed in relation to fossil shells. Doubt may be enter-
tained whether the elaborate ‘time-table’ provided by the author
can ever have more than a local value, and perhaps this is all that is
claimed for it. For his useful and suggestive contribution to our
knowledge of homeomorphy, Mr. Buckman is to be congratulated.
REPORTS AND PROCHEDINGS.
GEOLOGICAL SoorEty oF Lonpon.
I.—May 8th, 1901.—J. J. H. Teall, Esq., M.A., V.P.R.S., President,
in the Chair. The following communication was read :—
“The Influence of the Winds upon Climate during the Pleistocene
Epoch: a Paleo-Meteorological Explanation of some Geological
Problems.” By F. W. Harmer, Esq., F.G.S.
Winds are an important factor in determining the distribution of
climatic zones. Deviations of the isotherms from the normal are
generally connected with the direction of the prevalent winds. The
influence of marine currents is indirect rather than direct. Changes
of wind cause marked and sudden changes in the weather, though
the general direction of ocean-currents remains the same. Permanent
alterations in climate during past epochs would have equally resulted
from permanent changes in the wind. Anomalous weather is due to
some unusual arrangement of high and low-pressure areas. Former
cases of anomalous climate can only have occurred when the
meteorological conditions were favourable.
Continental areas tend to be cyclonic in Summer and anticyclonic
in Winter, while the reverse is broadly true of the oceans. During
the Glacial Period ice-covered areas would have remained more or
less anticyclonic throughout the year, while low-pressure areas must
have prevailed in regions to the south of them and over the adjoining
|
328 Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London.
oceans. This would have altered the prevalent direction of the winds
and the distribution of rainfall; thus the anticyclone of the European
ice-sheet may have caused cyclonic storms to pass farther south than
at present, bringing oceanic winds over the Sahara, which formerly
enjoyed a humid climate. Dead shells are rarely found now on
the eastern shores of Norfolk and Suffolk, though they are driven.
on to the Dutch coast by westerly gales. Shell-débris in the Upper
Crag-beds of East Anglia shows that easterly gales were common at
that period. This may have been due to the altered path of cyclones,
caused by the glacial conditions which were becoming established in
regions to the north of Great Britain. The abundance of mammoth-
remains along the shores of the Polar Sea and the alternate humidity
and desiccation of the basin of Nevada may have resulted from
allied causes.
It is difficult, however, to restore hypothetically the meteorological
conditions of the Pleistocene epoch on the theory that the maximum
glaciation of the eastern and western continents was contemporaneous.
In that case an enormous anticyclone would have extended from the
pole southward over both continents at the same time, causing
cyclonic conditions in the Atlantic both in Summer and Winter.
Such a condition of things would have flooded Western Europe with
warm southerly winds. No such meteorological difficulties arise if
the hypothesis that the more important glacial and interglacial
periods alternated in the western and eastern continents be adopted.
Thus persistent and excessive cold in North America during the
Winter of 1898-99 was coincident with abnormal warmth in Europe ;
the winds were northerly and polar in America, southerly and
strictly complementary in Europe.
On the other hand, the effect of an ice-sheet anticyclone extending
from Greenland to Central Europe might have been to force the
storm-tracks of the North Atlantic to the south-west, producing
warm south-easterly winds in Labrador, which would have tended,
moreover, to divert the surface-currents of the North Atlantic from
the European to the American coast. The glaciation of Great
Britain could only have happened at a time when the Icelando-
British Channel was closed. No permanent ice-sheet could have
existed in Britain and Scandinavia while the influence of the Gulf
Stream was as it is at present.
It is possible that the shifting of glacial conditions from one side
of the Atlantic to the other may have been due to differential
earth-movements.
The views taken in this paper afford a simpler explanation of
geological facts than those usually adopted. Instead of supposing
that the climatic changes of the Great Ice Age, several times
recurrent at intervals of a few thousand years, were due to
astronomical or physical causes, it is suggested that the climate of
the Northern Hemisphere being, from some unexplained cause, colder
than that of our era, conditions of comparative warmth or cold may
have been more or less local, affecting the great continental areas
at different periods.
Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 329
Il;— May 22nd, 1901.—J. J. H. Teall, Esq., M.A., V.P.RB.S.,
President, in the Chair.
Mr. George Abbott, in exhibiting some specimens of Cellular
Limestone from the Permian beds at Fulwell, Sunderland, which
he proposed to present to the British Museum (Natural History),
remarked that their interest depended upon the assumption that
they were entirely inorganic. Although showing a remarkable
resemblance to corais, yet no zoologist or geologist had yet claimed
them as organic. If this surmise were correct, the carbonate-of-
lime-molecules—probably when amorphous—must have had some
inherent molecular directive force which produced the numerous
distinct patterns in their structure. ‘These fall into four distinct
classes—honeycomb (two kinds), coralloid, and pseudo-organic,
the last-named being remarkable for having a constant discoidal
shape, and therefore those of this class must have had their external
form also controlled by the hypothecated force. Hach class appears
to have passed through four stages of ‘growth’ and to have
undergone some marvellous rearrangements of the particles while
in the solid condition. So far as he knew, no one had previously
attempted to classify the different patterns, nor had anyone, except
Mr. William King, in his work on “ Permian Fossils,” offered any
theory as to the formation of this cellular structure in the Magnesian
Limestone. (See Prof. G.A.J.Cole’s letter, Grou. Maa., April, p. 187.)
The following communications were read :—
1. “On the Skull of a Chiru-like Antelope from the Ossiferous
Deposits of Hundes (Tibet).” By Richard Lydekker, Esq.
Twenty years ago the author proposed the provisional name of
Pantholops Hundesiensis for an extinct species of antelope typified
by an imperfect skull figured in Royle’s “ Botany, ete., of the
Himalaya Mountains,” pl. iii, fig. 1. The specimen is in the
Museum of the Geological Society, and an examination has confirmed
the original determination. The skull, although of rather smaller
dimensions, comes very close to that of the existing chiru (Pantholops
Hodgsoni) of Tibet in general form of brain-case, in the strong ridges
marking the upper limits of the temporal fosse, and in the contour
of the occipital surface. The horn-cores have the same highly
elliptical cross-section, and the same general setting-on and upright
direction. The fossil apparently came from the horizontal deposits
of Hundes, and its age is probably not greater than Upper Pliocene.
2. “On the Occurrence of Silurian (?) Rocks in Forfarshire and
Kincardineshire along the Eastern Border of the Highlands.” By
George Barrow, Esq., F.G.S. (Communicated by permission of the
Director of H.M. Geological Survey.)
These rocks occur in three lenticular strips between the schistose
rocks of the Highlands and the boundary-fault next the Old Red
Sandstone. The largest is about 20 miles long, and extends almost
from Cortachy to beyond the Clattering Bridge; it is about { mile
wide at its widest. The rocks are divided into two groups: the
Jasper and Green Rock Series below and the younger Margie Series
000 Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London.
above. A section along the North Esk River is described in detail,
and other sections referred to it. The lower division consists of
fine-grained sandstones (bearing microcline), grey slaty shales,
jaspers (sometimes containing circular bodies resembling radiolaria),
and a variable series of basic igneous rocks (‘ green rock’) of coarse
texture and probably intrusive origin. The upper division consists
of conglomerates, pebbly grits, dark and white shales, pebbly
limestone, and grey shale. The age of the series cannot be definitely
ascertained, but the lower division is compared with the Arenig
cherts, etc., of the Southern Uplands, while the Margie Series is-
newer than this, but older than the Old Red Sandstone. Both
groups have been much deformed, but the sediments contain clastic
micas and have undergone practically no recrystallization, and the
igneous rocks are never changed into hornblende-schists. The
deformation is greatest near the junction with the Highland Schists,
giving rise to a deceptive appearance of an upward succession and
an apparent transition in crystalline character, but the crushing
never extends more than a few yards into the Highland Series.
A major thrust separates the Highland Schists from the Jasper and
Green Rock Series, and a minor thrust generaliy separates the
latter from the Margie Series. The position of the major thrust
and that of the later great boundary fault skirting the Old Red
Sandstone have been determined by the outer limit of the aureole
of crystallization of which the South-Eastern Highlands form a part.
The harder crystalline schists to the north-west have snapped off
from the softer portions, now covered by newer rocks to the
south-east.
3. “On the Crush-Conglomerates of Argyllshire.” By J. B. Hill,
Esq., R.N. (Communicated by R. 8. Herries, Esq., M.A., Sec.G.S.,
with the permission of the Director of H.M. Geological Survey.)
While the sedimentary origin of the Highland Boulder-bed is
proved by the foreign boulders contained in it, there occur in the
Loch Awe region certain conglomerates, often along definite horizons,
which may have been confused with it, but which the author is.
able to prove have originated by crushing. The sedimentary rocks
of the area include all the members of the Loch Awe Series, consisting
of grits, slates, and limestones, the latter being mostly gritty in
character. Associated with these is an enormous amount of igneous.
material of Dalradian age, ranging from intermediate to basic in
composition, together with porphyrite-dykes probably of Old Red
Sandstone age and a plexus of Tertiary dykes. The sediments are
everywhere folded, the folds being of isoclinal type. The Dalradian
igneous material consists of epidiorites; and evidence is brought
forward to prove that these rocks are intrusive, while their great
apparent bulk is probably to be accounted for by repetition due to
folding. A petrographical description is given of the various types
of rocks represented among the epidiorites, the minerals of which
include hornblende and felspar, with chlorite, epidote, calcite, quartz,
and iron-ores. There is every gradation in texture from a coarse
Correspondence—A. M. Davies. 331
gabbro-like type to the finest schists, and some of the rocks are
vesicular. The rocks are frequently foliated.
The crush-conglomerates have been observed in the limestones,
quartzites, and epidiorites ; but they are most conspicuously developed
at the junction of rocks of dissimilar character, and especially when
the limestone and epidiorite are in juxtaposition. The junction of
the two rocks is intricately folded: folded knobs of epidiorite
measuring from a few inches to a foot or more being packed
together in a limestone matrix. In the sections big blocks may
be seen in process of division by shearing movements, which have
succeeded the folding. The limestone seems generally to have
played the part of a plastic body, and has accommodated itself
as a matrix to the folded and isolated fragments of epidiorite,
between which it has been squeezed. Thus the origin of the
conglomerate is satisfactorily proved by the fact that it contains
fragments of rocks newer than the sediments in which the crush-
conglomerates are embedded. The author considers that it would be
safer to regard such conglomerates in this area as have a calcareous
matrix as having been formed by crushing.
CORR HSL ON Saiwes-
——_—_<——
THE MAMMILLATUS-ZONE IN EAST SURREY.
S1z,—In a short communication to this Magazine for May, 1899
(pp. 234-5), evidence was brought forward of the persistence of the
zone of Hoplites interruptus along the Gault outcrop through Kent
and Surrey. Since then Mr. Jukes-Browne’s valuable memoir on
the English Gault and Upper Greensand has appeared, and in this
certain beds at the extreme base of the Gault in West Kent and
East Surrey are considered as probably belonging to the lower zone
of Acanthoceras mammillatum, though paleontological evidence of
this is wanting. This evidence can now fortunately be supplied.
About a mile and a half south-south-east of Merstham, at a point
marked on the new 1-inch sheet 286 as “ Stocklands Farm,” there is-
a small brickfield where the extreme base of the Gault is dug. The
junction with the Folkestone sands is not actually seen, but these
sands are dug within a few yards of the section. In the lowest
part of the clay there are abundant large and irregular phosphatic
nodules, full of glauconite grains and with many quartz-grains also.
In these nodules fossils occur, including two species of Ammonites,
Acanthoceras mammillatum and Desmoceras Beudanti, the latter being
particularly abundant. (These determinations have been kindly
verified by Mr. Crick, of the Natural History Museum.) Other
fossils occur, but not abundantly, and I cannot give a list, as most
of them were dispersed among a party of my students before the
special interest of the section was discovered. Coniferous wood
occurs abundantly, beautifully preserved.
The section is closely similar in appearance to one at Reigate,
described in Proc. Geol. Assoc., vol. xvi, p. 162, and there said to:
be unfossiliferous. On a recent visit, however, I found a piece of
332 Correspondence—T. G. Bonney—J. RK. Dakyns.
coniferous wood there just like that at Stocklands, but no Ammonites.
I would suggest to local geologists the advisability of a persistent
search for the latter. A. M. Davizs.
25, Mortimer Street, WV.
NAMES FOR BRITISH ICE-SHEBRTS.
Srr,—To discuss fully the wide questions raised by Mr. Lamplugh’s
reply to my letter of last April would require far too much
space, so I content myself with repeating that to propose a name
for that which has not been proved to exist is, to say the least,
premature. It is also objectionable, because so many persons cannot
-become familiar with a name without assuming that it implies the
existence of a reality. As man is naturally prone to idolatry, which
in the present age commonly takes the form of phrase-worship, I am
sure that if the North Sea Ice-sheet passed without protest it would
quickly materialize into a geological fact. I had no objection to
using the term ‘Scandinavian Ice-sheet,’ because something of the
kind must have existed in that country, yet I was careful to speak
only of ‘Caledonian ice.’ So I cannot allow Mr. Lamplugh to
smuggle in an East British Ice-sheet under the cover of any phrase
in my letter. As for the late Glacial age of the Dogger Bank, that
of course is possible; but I think whoever makes use of it as an
argument should indicate under what circumstances such a long
shoal-like mass of morainic matter was deposited in that position.
Also, I should like to have an explanation of the causes which would
lead to an exceptional precipitation of snow on any particular part of
a comparatively level plain which had considerable land masses on
three sides. My complaint against the school of glacialists to which
Mr. Lamplugh belongs is, that they insist on those facts which seem
to favour their ideas and ignore all which have the contrary effect.
Thus, like the defenders of the Ptolemaic system of Astronomy, they
support hypothesis by hypothesis, and invent epicycles to escape
from difficulties. It is, however, a gain to have it admitted that
boulders did not take an inside or outside passage on an ice-sheet
the whole way from Scandinavia to Eastern England. This
encourages me to hope that a course of sea-bathing early in the
Glacial Epoch may embolden some geologists to repeat the process
later in the same, and to extend southward the submergence which
must have occurred then (Grou. Mac., 1877, p. 72, and 1900,
p- 289) in a more northern region. T. G. Bonney.
CURIOUS BRECCIAS IN THE HIGHLANDS.
Srr,—There are in the Scottish Highlands between Loch Katrine
and the upper part of Loch Lomond several bosses of diorite
surrounded by brecciated schist. These are very curious, for each
boss of diorite is surrounded by a narrow fringe of breccia consisting
entirely of schist without any admixture of igneous matter. It seems
to me that the diorite must have been forced up in a solid state
through the schist, which in consequence got broken up; for had the
diorite been in a molten state when it came up, some of it would
surely have flowed among the fragments of schist.
Geol. Mag, 1901. Dee. 1V,., Vol. VOU Te eae
Obituary— Gustaf Lindstrom. 3303
Further north, in Glenfalloch, there is a more extensive area of
similar brecciated schist, where, however, as far as I remember, no
igneous rocks are to be seen.
The researches of Lapworth, Peach, and Horne in the Highlands,
of Lamplugh in the Isle of Man, and of others elsewhere, have
taught us that solid rocks have been broken up or ground into
powder by mechanical violence on a far larger and more extended
scale than had been previously dreamed of.
If I am right in my conjecture as to the origin of the breccias
mentioned above, they are instances of the same sort of thing.
June 4, 1901. J. R. Daxkyns.
P.S.—I am reminded by my friend, Mr. C. T. Clough, that the
breccias may be due to explosions. They are mentioned by Sir
Archibald Geikie in his work on “ Ancient British Volcanoes,” but
I have not the book at hand to refer to.—J. R. D.
GSR EAD UN AR Ge
Ta
GUSTAF LINDSTROM.
(WITH A PORTRAIT, PLATE XIII.)
Born at Wisspy, AvuG. 27, 1829. Diep at SvockHomm, May 16, 1901.
How vividly comes to one’s mind that little room looking into the
courtyard of the Riksmuseum at Stockholm, with its plain deal
floor, deal tables and writing-desk, and the rough deal shelves for
books covering three of its walls, the only decoration a few portraits
(as of Angelin and Darwin), the only sign of comfort an old horse-
hair sofa. Here for twenty-five years, day after day, Gustaf
Lindstrém pursued his quiet labours on that wonderful collection
stored in the adjoining room, a collection rich chiefly in the fossils
of Silurian Gotland amassed by the successive exertions of Hisinger,
Angelin, and Lindstrom himself. At one of the windows in that
room, overmuch darkened though it was by the tall houses opposite,
one would see G. Liljevall developing some rare fossil or making
those exquisite drawings that illustrated Lindstrom’s papers; at
another window the attendant boy, usually a Gustaf too, made
cardboard trays or sorted out new accessions; while a third window
was generally occupied by some foreign paleontologist who had
journeyed far to study the famous collection. Many are there of
these who to-day mourn Lindstrom, not merely as a leader gone from
among them, but as an ever attentive host, and as a dear friend.
Born among the medizval ruins of Wisby, in whose cliifs and on
whose strand fossils are to be had for the mere taking, the meditative
and retiring youth could not fail to have his interest aroused by the
relics of the past. He might have been a great archeologist, in fact
his academic thesis was on the history of his native island in Queen
Christina’s reign, and in after years he published two thick volumes
on the Middle Ages in Gotland ; but the direct incentive to paleeonto-
logical studies was early furnished. “In 1845,” he once wrote,
“when I was quite a boy, much wondering at the marvellous things
I saw enclosed in the limestone rocks of my native island of Gotland,
334 Obituary—Gustaf Lindstrom.
Sir Roderick, accompanied by M. de Verneuil, visited the island and
ranged its strata, along with the other old ‘transition rocks’ of
Sweden, in his newly-founded realm ‘Siluria.’ This fact acted upon
me as a fresh revelation, and indicated the path upon which to
proceed.” It was no doubt also Murchison’s visit which suggested
his enquiry into the elevation of Gotland, the subject of his first
paper (1852).
But Lindstrém, though he continued to the last to study the
geological relations of the Gotland rocks, did not become a mere
stratigraphical paleontologist. In 1848 he commenced student at
Upsala University and took the opportunity of attending a course of
lectures delivered by Lovén in Stockholm. Thus was impressed on
him the need to the paleontologist of a thorough understanding of
living animals, and so, after taking his doctor’s degree in 1854, he
served for a time as extraordinary amanuensis at the zoological
museum of the University, and published purely zoological papers—
on the invertebrate fauna of the Baltic, on the larva of Peltogaster,
and on the development of Sertularia. In 1856 he accepted a post
as school-teacher in Wisby, and in 1858 a mastership at the
Grammar School in that town. During these years he translated
a textbook of zoology by H. Masius, and produced his “‘ Geologiens
Grunder,” which was an adaptation of the works of Lyell to Swedish
students, and contained numerous original illustrations from the
geology of Sweden; it speedily ran through two editions, and did
much to increase the study of geology in that country.
Now settled in Wisby, Lindstrém, without dropping his zoological
researches, as proved by a paper on the fish of Gotland (1867),
devoted more attention to the fossils of the island. He began with
the Brachiopoda (1860), but soon turned to the Ccelentera, and in
1865 published the first of that valuable series of papers on the
rugose corals which led up to his memoir on the operculate corals
of the Paleozoic formations (1883). These papers, while disclosing
hitherto unsuspected facts of coral structure, finally solved the problem
of the systematic position of the peculiar Calceola, previously regarded
as an aberrant brachiopod. A remarkable type of madreporarian
was fully described by him in 1868 under the name Calostylis, and
again discussed in his memoir on the Anthozoa perforata of Gotland
(1870). He wrote also on the tabulate corals, and was at the same
time investigating the deep-sea corals of the Atlantic. To
complete the account of his work on the corals, we may mention
his papers on Silurian corals from Russia (1882), on Rhizophyllum
(1884), on Prisciturben (1889), on the ‘Corallia baltica’ of Linnzeus
(1895), a description of some Silurian corals from Gotland, including
the new genera Nodulipora, Holophragma, and Dinophyllum, with re-
descriptions of his Helminthidium, Pachypora, Polyorophe, Actinocystis,
and others (1896), on a Tetradium from Beeren Hiland (1899), on
the Neocomian Thecocyathus Nathorsti from King Charles Land
(1900), and his great memoir on the Heliolitide (1899).
But before these last-mentioned papers were written occurred the
death of the Keeper of the fossil Invertebrata in the State Museum
at Stockholm, N. P. Angelin, and the Academy of Sciences appointed
Obituary— Gustaf Lindstrom. 335
Lindstrém to the post (1876). One of his first tasks in this new
and more favourable position was the completion and publication
of the ‘ Fragmenta Silurica” (1880), for which some plates had
been prepared by Angelin. There also fell on him the difficult
and ungrateful labour, shared with Lovén, of editing Angelin’s
“Tconographia Crinoideorum.” These tasks accomplished, Lindstrém
found time to attack other groups of Gotland fossils. Thus, in 1884
we have from him a beautifully illustrated memoir ‘“ On the Silurian
‘Gastropoda and Pteropoda,” of importance as indicating the varying
nature of the fauna in correspondence with the varying conditions in
different parts of the Gotland sea. In 1885 he issued a revision of
the trilobites and Merostomata, containing descriptions of many new
species. while in the same year he was associated with T. Thorell
in a publication that awoke profound interest, namely, the description
of a scorpion, Palgophonus nuncius, from a bed of Lower Ludlow age
at Wisby.!. This was the oldest air-breathing animal then known,
but there have since been described Proscorpius, Whitfield, from
the Waterlime group of New York, Palgoblattina, Brongniart, from
the Middle Silurian of Calvados, and Protocimex, Moberg, from the
Upper Ordovician of Sweden. He then turned his attention to the
remains of Cephalopoda preserved in a hard, splintery limestone of
Southern Gotland, and requiring the utmost patience for their
extraction and elucidation. The result of this was the important
memoir on “The Ascoceratides and the Lituitide,” in which he
lucidly explained the complicated structure of that extraordinary
nautiloid, Ascoceras. The year 1895 produced another discovery of
the greatest interest, namely, a Cyathaspis from beds of Lower
Wenlock age at Lau in Gotland; the minute structure of the plates
was very fully described by Lindstrém.
These important memoirs by no means exhausted the activities
of Professor Lindstrom. He visited Gotland every summer and
pursued his enquiries into its geology, as many minor papers bear
witness. On these wanderings through the island he also collected
the materials for his archeological studies. He published a list of
the fossils of Gotland, followed by lists of the Cambrian, Ordovician,
and Silurian faunas of Sweden. He took an active part in the affairs
of the Academy, and occasionally gave popular lectures on subjects
of general geological interest. Of recent years, as the burden of age
began to press more heavily, he rejuvenated himself (as he expressed
it) by visits to Italy, in which both as naturalist and archeologist he
took the greatest possible delight. But this did not cure the gradual
failure of eyesight that was his greatest trouble, and rather more
than two years ago he finally lost the use of one eye. When I saw
him last, in 1899, he was dreading the loss of the other, but was
still hard at work, and greatly excited over an important discovery
just made in the trilobites. Oddly enough, this concerned certain
macula, believed by him to be vestigial eye-spots, occurring on the
hypostome of many genera. This gave rise to the last paper he ever
wrote, a wonderfully detailed study of these macule and of the
1 Another Silurian scorpion, referred to Lindstrém’s genus Paleophonus, has been
discovered by B. N. Peach at Lesmahagow, Lanarkshire.
336 Obituary— Gustaf Lindstrom.
visual organs of the trilobites in general, with important bearings on
the zoological position of those animals (February, 1901).
The scientific work of Gustaf Lindstrém, though not greatly
affecting the more theoretical and philosophical questions of zoology
and geology, was marked, as we have seen, by many discoveries:
of great interest and importance. But the discovery of to-day is the
stale news of to-morrow, and it is not by any sensational features of
his work that his fame will continue. It will continue and it will
increase by reason of the immense care he bestowed on all details,
the accurate descriptions, and the exquisite illustrations. He
recognized the futility not merely of the ordinary semi-diagrammatic
figures but also of the more pretentious photographs, when there
was question of such perplexing detail and variation as is presented
by the corals. It is only just to say, and Lindstrém himself always
insisted, that in his attempts he received the greatest help from the
remarkable artistic talents of Mr. G. Liljevall. His work will live
because of the absence of unwarranted speculation, because of its
thoroughness, because of its honesty. He had always, in the rich
collection at his elbow, and in the appeals of his contemporaries, the
temptation to publish much more than he did, but future generations
will rejoice that he understood how it was better to do one thing
conscientiously than many things superficially.
Lindstrom indeed was thorough and true-hearted in all relations
of life. Though retiring and careless of popular applause, he was
more sensitive of the opinion of others than he might have been had
he mixed more with the world. It were far from the truth, however,
to regard him as a narrow-minded recluse. He interested himself
in many subjects outside those of pure science, and one soon per-
ceived the sly and kindly humour that twinkled behind his spectacles.
He was ever ready to discuss English literature or politics. Those
of other countries too, perhaps; but he had a great affection for
England, which he visited last in 1874, and he was always full of
reminiscences of Murchison and our ancient heroes of geology.
Huxley also he met and was much impressed by, and hoped that
a day would yet come when a “ Life” would be written that would do
justice to “that great and good man.” Most of his important works
were written in English, while of some he published translations in
the Geonoetcat Magazine. To the workers from all countries who
made pilgrimage to Gotland or to Stockholm he was attentive and
hospitable, but I have thought that the particular kindness he
showed to me at all times, and specially when I first came to
Sweden an unknown student, must have been due to my nationality.
He was member of the Russian and Prussian Academies of Science,
of the Belgian Geological Society and many others, but few honours
pleased him more than those received from the Geological Society of
London, of which he was elected Foreign Correspondent in 1888,
Foreign Member in 1892, and whose Murchison Medal he received
in 1895. There are many in this country who now sorrow for his
loss, and while all will ever honour him as a great palzeontologist,
there are not a few who will long remember him with affection as
a personal friend. F. A. Batuer.
THE
GHOLOGICAL MAGAZINE.
NEW SERIES. ~“BDECADE IV., VOL. VIII.
No. VIII—AUGUST, 1901.
OE eG ae IN Ae PAS ea eae Sse
= a
J.—Tue Harutest Traces oF Man.!
By Sir Henry H. Howorrn, K.C.I.E., F.R.S., F.G.S.
HE origin of Man remains an unsolved problem. In spite of
very keen and anxious researches, extending over many years,
we are still without a real clue to the difficulty. Whence and how
and when he came we do not know, and we had better say so. :
In the valley of the Nile, where the earliest knowledge of writing
has been traced, our written records take us back perhaps 7,000
years. At that period the various races and varieties into which
the human race is divided by the naturalist were apparently com-
pletely differentiated. The different families of language which
the philologer has discriminated were sharply defined, while his
thought and the products of his thought (of which language is an
index), of comparative archeology, mythology, etc., etc., show that
these races were as trenchantly distinguished as they are now.
Whatever else this means it must mean (if the history of mankind
has been continuous) that the origin of man is a long way off,
a much longer way off than people were once willing to admit.
The differences and distinctions here pointed out must have taken
a very long time to mature, and if man originated in one stock,
which has overspread and conquered the earth, as some of us think,
it must have taken a vast time for the many languages, religions,
customs, and thoughts, which characterize his many and varied
clans and tribes and nations, to diverge so much from each other.
It may be that presently with the assistance of comparative
methods applied scientifically to language, religion, and art, we may
be able to disentangle the crooked threads into which the web of
human progress has been woven ; but this must take a long time.
It will involve a wide and searching analysis of difficult details,
1 ¢ Paleeolithic Man in Africa,’’ by Sir John Evans, K.C.B., F.R.S.: Proc. Roy.
Soc., 1900, vol. lxvi.
‘< Eolithic Implements,’’ by Rev. R. Ashington Bullen, B.A., F.L.S., F.G.S.:
Trans. Vict. Inst., 1900.
‘* A Collection of Stone Implements in the Mayer Museum,”’ by H. O. Forbes,
LL.D.: Bull. Liverpool Mus., 1900, ii.
“‘The Age of the Surface Flint Implements of Egypt and Somaliland,’ by
H., O. Forbes, LL.D.: Bull. Liverpool Mus., 1901, iii.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. VIII. 22
338 Sir H. H. Howorth—The Earliest Traces of Man.
and will probably depend a good deal more on the ethnographer
and the linguist than on the archeologist.
With that great problem we have not at present to do, however.
If we are to make any progress at all we must limit it very con-
siderably, and detach ourselves completely from such ambitious
issues as the origin of Man, etc., etc., as we must from all attempts
at surveying the universe from China to Peru. Our geographical
as well as our archeological frontiers must be sharply limited.
Let us for a few paragraphs, therefore, limit ourselves to a smaller
area and narrower conditions, and try to realize what we have
been able to learn of the oldest inhabitants of the European area.
It will readily be seen that the problem means that we must
summon the geologist to our help. The problem is, in fact, as much
a geological as it is an archeological one. It depends for its solution
quite as much upon clearly distinguishing the geological horizon
where the test object is found as upon the character and appearance
of the object itself. If an object is found in an undisturbed bed
of sand, gravel, or clay, it must if thus in sita& be as old as the
laying down of the bed in question, and that is a geological problem.
The first step taken in answering the question we are discussing
was a long time ago. In 1713 an implement made of black flint
and of the type now known as Paleolithic was discovered with the
tooth of an elephant in digging gravel in Grays Inn Lane. This
implement was distinctly recognized as of human workmanship,
and was presented to the British Museum, in which collection it
has since remained.
In the catalogue of the Sloane Collection we find the following
entry in regard to this very famous relic:—“ No. 246, a British
weapon found, with elephant’s teeth, opposite to black St. Mary’s near
Grayes Inn Lane (Conyers). It is a large black flint shaped into
the figure of a spear point (K.).” It appears, says Sir John Evans,
to have been found at the close of the seventeenth century, and
a rude engraving of it illustrates a letter on the antiquities of
London, by Mr. Bagford, in 1715, and printed in Hearne’s edition
of Leland’s “ Collectanea,” 1, lxiv. From his account it would seem
that the skeleton of an elephant was found not far from Battle-
bridge by Mr. Conyers, and that near the place where it was found
‘‘a British weapon made of a flint lance, like unto the head of a spear,
was dug out” (Evans, “Stone Implements,” 2nd ed., pp. 582-3).
Sir J. Evans gives a full-sized illustration of this very interesting
implement. The importance of this discovery was not recognized.
Neither the geological position of the gravels in the Thames Valley
nor the fact of the elephant in question having been an extinct
animal could then be known or appreciated, and the discovery was
doubtless treated as in no sense an extraordinary one from the
archeological side.
The next recorded step taken in this inquiry was also made in
Britain, namely, the discovery by John Frere in 1797 of three flint
implements of the same type in the beds at Hoxne in Suffolk, which
have since become so famous, and in company with bones of great
Sir H. H. Howorth—The Earliest Traces of Man. 339
size. The objects in question were found twelve feet deep in the
ground, and Frere, who clearly discriminated them as of human
workmanship, says of them, “I think they are evidently weapons of
war, fabricated and used by a people who had not the use of the
metals” (Archgologia, xiii, 103). This statement was the first one
in which the position was maintained by a scientific person that man
had passed through a stage of culture in which he used stone only for
his tools and weapons, and when he was still ignorant of the use of
metals. Beyond this Frere could not of course go. The key to the
whole position was not yet available. What it is very important
to remember is, that long before the question was sophisticated by
discussions about the antiquity or origin of man, and when it was a
mere question of discriminating early specimens of human workman-
ship, these flint objects from the gravels of the Thames and the
so-called diluvial beds of Suffolk were distinctly recognized as
having been made by human hands.
The key necessary to unlock the next difficulty in the progress
of discovery was produced by Cuvier in 1813, when he showed that
the remains of elephants and other great beasts found in the
superficial beds belong to species no longer living.
This conclusion ought to have been followed by its natural
corollary, namely, its application to the discoveries already
mentioned, and the admission that man was contemporaneous with
the extinct animals; but the geology of the surface beds (since
known as Post-Tertiary and Pleistocene) was still an unexplored
province of that science; the discoveries in question were buried and
forgotten, and Cuvier, whose researches had been almost entirely
confined to the Tertiary beds, where he had chiefly to do with a fauna
all of which had passed away, not unnaturally adopted a sceptical
attitude in regard to man having lived with animals now extinct.
He had met with no examples of the kind himself, and naturally
appealed to other explanations when evidence to the contrary which
seemed ambiguous was produced.
Such evidence was, in fact, forthcoming in 1828, when Ami Boué
brought before the same great anatomist the discovery of some
human bones found in the widespread loamy deposit of the Rhine
Valley known as loess or lehm. This discovery was made near
Lahr. (See Annales des Sciences Naturelles, 1829-50.)
When this discovery was brought before Cuvier he refused to
accept its testimony. Discussing it in 1831 (“Discours sur les
révolutions du globe,” p. 29), he says, “Toute porte a croire, que
Vespéce humaine n’existait point dans les pays ou se découvrent les
ossemens fossiles, 4 l’6poque des révolutions qui ont enfoui ces os.” It
can well be believed that such a pronouncement from such a source
largely dominated European opinion on the subject, for Cuvier’s
authority was naturally paramount.
Tournal, in a communication addressed to the Annales des Sciences
Naturelles in October, 1828, says of the caverns at Bize, near
Narbonne, “human bones occur in the same beds as the bones of
extinct animals, and both exhibit the same chemical and organic
840 Sir H. H. Howorth—The Earliest Traces of Man.
characters,” and he urges that the existence of actually fossil human
remains must be treated as a question in suspense. Inasmuch,
however, as Tournal tells us that with the human bones were found
pottery and modern marine shells, it would seem that the remains
must in part, if not altogether, have belonged to so-called Neolithic
times. (See Annales des Sciences, vol. xv, pp. 348-350.)
In 1829 M. Tournal communicated to this publication further
remarks on the same subject. In this letter he refers to the
researches of M. Christol, and says they were both agreed that
the existence of man was not separated from that of the extinct
animals, but they had been contemporaries. He says that M. Christol
had shown him the human bones which he had found in the
department of the Gard, i. in the caves of Sauvignargues,
Poudres, etc, and that it was impossible to distinguish their
condition from that of the bones of tigers, lions, and hyenas found
with them. Their physical and chemical condition was the same,
and they were found in the same beds; while in regard to the
bones of some of the extinct animals he had himself found in the
caverns of Bize, they bore the character of having been cut by human
weapons. (Id., vol. xviii, pp. 142 seq.)
These remarks fell upon deaf ears, and the long and dreary process
of sapping and undermining the prejudices of the dominant school
of geologists had to be pressed for many a long year before the
position was stormed. The two most effective workers in this field
both died without their conclusions being accepted. One of them,
who spent his life and his fortune in exploring the caves of Belgium
and died broken-hearted, was Schmerling. The other, a Roman
Catholic clergyman called McHnery, did corresponding work at
Kents Hole. In each case the explorer claimed to have shown
from evidence that was irreproachable that man had lived con-
temporaneously with the extinct beasts, and had left his remains
mingled with theirs in the red earth beneath the stalagmite floors of
the caverns.
It must not be forgotten that the person who persistently in
England refused to accept the conclusion of the contemporaneity of
man and the extinct beasts, and who caused McHnery’s now famous
memoir to be locked up at the Royal Society for years after his
death, was Huxley, while Owen’s views on the matter were much
more enlightened.
Meanwhile, M. Boucher de Perthes, an antiquary at Abbeville,
became convinced, after years of patient search, that implements of
human workmanship occurred in the undisturbed gravels of the
Somme Valley, and must date from the time when those gravels
were deposited. He had preached for years in vain, when fortunately
a great English paleontologist, the late Dr. Falconer, passed that
way and was persuaded by the evidence he saw that M. Boucher de
Perthes was right, and he eventually persuaded Professor Prestwich,
Sir John Evans, and Sir John Lubbock to visit Abbeville and
Amiens and to explore and report upon the facts. The result of
their labours was embodied in a famous memoir in the Philosophical
Sir H. H. Howorth—The Earliest Traces of Man. 341
Transactions. This made the position so clear and patent that the
pendulum, which had been obstinately pointed to the recency of
man, swayed right over, and the great mass of scientific men accepted
what they had previously refused to credit.
It must be remembered by all those who turn to this famous
memoir that its authors proved nothing whatever new. Their
conclusions were those which had been arrived at by Tournal
and Christol, by Schmerling and McEnery, long before. They
merely stamped with a kind of official sanction what ought to have
been generally received before.
The memoir in question, however, gave a great impetus to the
inquiry about early man in Europe, and the credit of the next step
in the enquiry is due to Lord Avebury (then Sir John Lubbock)
and Professor Dawkins. It was Professor Dawkins, I believe,
who first definitely showed that there was a gap in the history of
early man, which was indexed and measured by a very important
paleontological fact, namely, that of the separate coexistence of man
with extinct animals and his coexistence with domesticated animals,
the remains of the two sets of beasts never overlapping so far as
we know. ‘This remains the real touchstone separating the earliest
known men in Europe from their successors.
Sir John Lubbock completed Professor Dawkins’ distinction by
giving a special name to each section of early man. The men who
lived with the extinct beasts and used roughly chipped tools and
weapons he styled Paleolithic, while those who used finely chipped
or polished weapons and tools and had domesticated animals he
called Neolithic.
After this mapping of the general problem a vast deal of work
was done in many countries defining the geographical area where
Paleolithic man lived, and describing his mode of life and sur-
roundings, and among those who worked most assiduously in this
behalf none have earned our gratitude more than Messrs. Christy
and Lartet.
A great problem still remained to be solved, which involves
a polemic, though one in which the strugglers on the old platform
are becoming fewer and fewer. This is the question whether
Paleolithic man lived before or after the distribution of the Drift ;
on this question I have myself written a good deal, and in a large
work to be shortly published have tried to condense a vast mass
of evidence justifying those geologists, and I believe they are now
the large majority, who hold that Paleolithic man lived before the
distribution of the Drift, and that the great gap, which is recognized
by everyone, between Palzolithic and Neolithic man is coincident
with that distribution and in all probability connected with it.
In quite recent years a further step has been taken which I believe
will be eventually justified. The period before the Drift, which is
specially marked by the presence of two elephants — EF. antiquus
and primigenius — was, I believe, perfectly continuous with that
known as the Forest Bed, and marked by the presence of a special
fossil elephant known as &. meridionalis. ‘The two were, I believe,
342 Sir H. H. Howorth—The Earliest Traces of Man.
simply phases of one continuous period. It would not, therefore, be
prima facie improbable if the remains of Paleolithic man should be
found in the Forest Bed.
Such remains are claimed to have been found at that horizon
in Norfolk by Mr. Abbott and Mr. Savin, in Dorsetshire by
Dr. Blackmore, and they have been also reported from the same
horizon at St. Prest in France and in the Val d’Arno, north of
Italy, in each case the remains of human workmanship being
accompanied by those of H. meridionalis. I believe these finds
are quite genuine. They are what we should prima facie have
expected, and so far as we know they are the earliest remains of
man hitherto found.
So far there is a fairly general agreement among geologists and
archeologists in regard to the evidence about primitive man. At
this point, however, a clear divergence must be recognized. A small
and pertinacious body of inquirers, including especially Mr. B.
Harrison, Mr. W. J. Lewis, and the Rev. R. A. Bullen, have in
season and out of season insisted that traces of human workmanship
have been discovered at a much earlier horizon in the form of very
rude flint implements which have been found in the so-called
plateau gravels of Southern England. To these implements the
name of eoliths has been given, and the champions of their age and
authenticity number among them no less important persons than
Professor Prestwich and Professor Rupert Jones. They have
failed, however, to secure the countenance of a large number of
sceptical critics, among whom I confess I find myself. I have seen
many hundreds of these eoliths, but I have seen very few which
seem to me to have any purpose or motive of any kind in their
shape or construction. ‘This was fully admitted by Prestwich, who
confessed that the number of these stones which showed any rational
purpose in their shape was a very small percentage indeed, and
surely this ought to be the first and prime necessity in attributing
them to human handiwork. It was this special feature in the
palzoliths of the river gravels and the caves which made men first
assign them to human handiwork. How can this same conclusion
be applied to thousands of shapeless stones, whose irregular outlines
defy all classification? The champions of the stones fall back upon
a class of tools whose shape need not be very precise, and to read
their lucubrations one would suppose that the men and women who
used these eoliths were engaged from January to December in
nothing else but scraping skins. Some have, in fact, suggested that
they did nothing else than scrape their own skins, and that the
eoliths performed the double function of strygils and vermin-killers !
There are no arrow-heads amongst these stones, no lances, no
tools such as we are accustomed to find among recognized palzoliths.
What we do find, and what needs explanation, is a large number
of once angular flints whose angles have been rubbed down by
trituration, probably in a stream, and whose edges have been snipped
all round their sinuous outlines. This snipping seems to be the only
reasonable ground for attributing them to human hands. I am
Sir H, H. Howorth—The Earliest Traces of Man. 348
bound to say it appears to me a very crude and remote reason
upon which to base such a stupendous hypothesis.
_Apart from the characters of the stones themselves, there is the
difficulty of their geological age. In the book already referred to
which I am about to publish, the age of the southern gravels will,
among other things, be discussed. JI have ventured to argue in it
once again that these plateau gravels, as now distributed, were not
the result of diurnal causes, fluviatile or otherwise, but of the same
general cause which laid down the great mass of the drift and which
acted independently of the contour of the country. I cannot, there-
fore, see in these gravels any traces of that vast lapse of time
postulated by the champions of the human origin of the eoliths, and
on the supposition that they were of vastly greater age than
palzoliths.
We must remember another fact, namely, that the types we style
Paleolithic, which are well marked, can now, as we have seen, be
traced back to the horizon of the Forest Bed. It is very strange
that some of them should not occur with these eoliths in the plateau
gravels, that in many places they should not overlap and be found
mixed together, and that nowhere, so far as we know, should these
same eoliths be found with the remains of extinct animals by which
their real age could be tested. How is it they do not occur in the
caverns or in the brickearths and gravels of the valleys, and how is
it there is no continuity of shape and contour with their successors ?
It is these questions which stiffen our obstinacy and increase our
scepticism about these so-called eoliths,
A few words about another matter. As we have seen, the real
and logical distinction in Europe between the so-called Paleolithic
and the so-called Neolithic age is the existence of a gap hitherto
unbridged. On the one side we find articles of human workmanship
associated with extinct beasts, and on the other with domesticated
animals, the two never having been found mixed together. This is
the real and supreme distinction; for in regard to the shapes of the
implements, their mode of tooling, etc., intermediate forms occur—
perhaps I ought to say necessarily occur. The significance of
this gap is a polemical subject. To me it has always meant a great
catastrophe, and I have urged it in many ways and produced the
evidence for it in many quarters, and was never more convinced
of its occurrence than at this moment. I have never, however,
argued that this catastrophe, whatever it was, overwhelmed the
_ greater part of Africa. That continent seems to have a very long
history as a continuous subaerial surface. Its black races represent
very primitive forms of man, many of them hardly changed for
thousands of years, and living apparently very much in the same
way and with the same surroundings as Paleolithic man had in
Europe.
Paleolithic man may therefore be said to still survivein Africa. It
is consequently not wonderful that in several places on that continent,
notably in South Africa, in Somaliland, and in the Sahara, implements
called Paleolithic have occurred in large numbers, not buried in
344 Professor J. Joly—Salt and Geological Time.
gravel beds containing the bones of extinct animals, but lying about
on the surface, their age being therefore quite indefinite. To call
them paleoliths seems a misnomer, for that term has an archzological
sense in Europe and defines a geological horizon which it is im-
possible to equate with anything in Africa, where traces of the
catastrophe we have mentioned and of the gap which it caused
are not available. And if we are to justify the use of the term,
it must be apart altogether from its defining a geological period
or a particular archeological horizon, and merely as marking
a stage of culture. Hence we have had recently a mighty fight,
which has been largely upon the connotation of a name. This
fight has occupied the pens of Sir John Evans and Dr. Forbes,
both of whom have written with the skill and knowledge that
might have been expected of them. The issue has been com-
plicated by the fact that Africa north of the Atlas Mountains
is zoologically and archeologically a part of Hurope. In Algiers
evidence is ample that the same destruction of Pleistocene animals,
marked by their rapid entombment in gravel and brickearth, took
place as occurred in Europe; and there, as in Europe, the traces of
Paleeolithic man, properly so called, have been found in the gravels
and drift-beds associated with the extinct beasts, a fact to which
Sir John Evans has called especial attention. In the valley of the
Nile similar remains of man were found long ago by General Pitt-
Rivers in the breccias and coarse gravels of the great valley, and
here also may claim to be truly Paleolithic. But in the case of the
surface implements from Somaliland and the country of the bushmen,
we must, if we are to be precise, be careful that in applying the
term Paleolithic we do not in some way imply great age, for all it
may mean is a mere survival, just like the survival of the stone
lamps of the Hsquimaux and the stone pots and pans of the
Hebridean cottiers.
I].—Tue Crrounation oF SALT AND GEOLOGICAL TIME.
By Professor J. Jouy, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.
ROM time to time I have received from correspondents
suggestions that the method of determining the geological
age of the Harth by the rate of solvent denudation of sodium might
be open to considerable error if the allowance made in my paper
(Trans. R.D.S., ser. 11, vol. vii), for sodium chloride carried from
the sea by winds and washed from the atmosphere by rain, was
seriously at fault. These suggestions arise from incomplete study
of the quantities involved. Had more space been given in my
paper to this question, the hasty criticisms I have had to contend
with, doubtless, would be less often advanced. The whole matter
is capable of the simplest arithmetical statement, and the limit of
error arising from this source easily defined. Recently one
gentleman has written at considerable length on the matter in the
pages of the Chemical News. I have replied to Mr. Ackroyd in
that journal. But the definition of the limit of error referred to,
Professor J. Joly—Salt and Geological Time. 345
and the consideration of some other points raised in the discussion,
are more in place in a geological than in a chemical journal.
I would therefore seek for space in the GxrorocrcAL MaGazine
wherein to repeat in part what I have said in the Chemical News,
adding some matters more especially suited to geological readers.
If all the chlorine in rivers were combined with sodium present
in the river-water, much the larger part of the sodium would remain
over. The guantity of sodium in river-water which finds its
equivalent of chlorine in the water requires special consideration.
It obviously may in part be derived from the ocean by the agency
of winds and rains. That this part only can be considered as
derived from such a source a simple proof is given later on. The
question then arises as to what amount of sodium chloride is
observed to fall in rain, or what amount of chlorine falls with rain ;
the assumption being made, not quite accurately, that the sodium
carried by rain is measured by the chlorine present.
Very full information relating to the chlorine content of rain-
water falling in various parts of England and Scotland, and some
other coastal parts of the world, is on record. What is wanted is
fuller knowledge of the chemical character of rains falling in inland
areas, more especially as to their content of sodium. The broad
fact at our disposal is, that as we proceed inland a rapid diminution
of the percentage of chlorine appears. In inhabited parts of
Europe but 200 miles from the sea, the proportion observed appears
to be one-twelfth, normally, of what is observed 30 or 40 miles
from the sea. In India, about 300 miles from the sea it was found
to be 0:04 per 100,000.
In a country like ours where no point is more than a few score
miles from the sea, coastal conditions prevail over its entire area.
Even within the small British area, however, there appears to be
a rapid diminution in the proportion of chlorine carried by the
wind to more inland parts. This is observed even in the more
inhabited parts, notwithstanding the fact pointed out by Dr. Angus
Smith that where coal is being consumed on a considerable scale
this proportion must be expected to rise. Although this is so, I do
not think it can be doubted that a large part of the chlorine of
British rivers, and of well waters also, must be sea-derived.
A simple comparison of the chlorine content of British surface
waters and of rain, bearing in mind the inevitable concentration of
the latter by evaporation, sufficiently demonstrates this fact.
_ This is pointed out in my paper “ An Estimate of the Geological
Age of the Harth” (p. 35).
In inland countries on the other hand it is extremely doubtful,
according to our present knowledge, if any of the chlorine observed
in rain is derived from the sea, for the circulation of salt from the
earth to the air or from inland salt deposits, along with other mineral
dust, may be accepted as inevitable. Raised with every wind, again
washed down with rains, evaporated to dryness, and again raised
mingled with the light dust of soils, an amount of saline matter
comparable with so minute a quantity of chlorine as was observed
346 Professor J. Joly—Salt and Geological Time.
in India might well circulate from the earth to the air, and be
returned by the rains to the rivers. Such chlorine is, of course,
derived by solvent denudation from the soils.
Mr. Ackroyd (Chemical News, June 7th, 1901) goes so far as to
assume that the inland salt lakes must owe their salts mainly to
wind-borne chlorine. That some of the salt lakes of the earth
situated near the ocean, or in the track of storms, or even of
prevailing winds from the sea, derive contributions of salts from
the ocean, is probable. Calculations have been made by Pierre in
France and others showing how considerable in amount the salts
carried from the sea in immediate coastal regions may be. It is,
however, only necessary to refer to the chemical composition of the
salt lakes themselves to see that any such origin for the greater
mass of the salts present is totally inadmissible. The Dead Sea,
for instance, shows a very large excess of magnesium salts over
sodium salts, their chlorides constituting 15°9 per cent. and 3-6 per
cent. respectively of the total solids. ‘There is even a large excess
of calcium over sodium in its waters. In the Great Salt Lake the
proportions are just the other way; the percentages are nearly
marine, 11:9 of sodium chloride and very little magnesium chloride,
but 1:1 per cent. There is relatively very little calcium. Now
this is the more embarrassing for Mr. Ackroyd’s hypothesis, in that
the first lake is close to the sea, the latter very remote from it.
Thus the lake which is most favourably situated for the rain supply
of sea-salts is just that one which most completely departs in its
chemical composition from that of the ocean. Again, we find a lake
such as the Hlton Lake of the Kirghis Steppe, 200 miles from the
Caspian, possessing a chemical composition approximating to that of
the Dead Sea: 19-7 per cent. of Mg Cl, 5:3 per cent. of MgSO,, and
3°8 per cent. NaCl. Calcium is, however, in its case absent or
inappreciable. Now while the observed wide differences in chemical
composition are entirely at variance with a pluvial origin, the rain
being supposed to derive its burden from the common reservoir of
the ocean (almost homogeneous in composition), they are quite in
accord with an origin by solvent denudation, as a glance at the
considerable differences of river analyses will show, and as indeed
would be a priori inferred from the wide range of solubility and
chemical composition of the surface materials of the earth.
But all indirect arguments as to the magnitude of the error which
might arise from the circulation of sea-salt must be used in sub-
ordination to a simple demonstration, on the known facts, of the
magnitude of the maximum error possible from this source. The
estimation of the maximum error is easily arrived at.
Professor Dittmar in his report on the chemical composition of
the ocean shows that the amount of chlorine present is in excess
of the sodium, so that attaching chlorine ions to sodium ions there
remains over a large excess of chlorine, appearing in the statement
of total solids as 10:8 per cent. of MgCl. We have, in fact, 77-7
per cent. of Na Cl and 10:8 percent. of MgCl. A simple calculation
will show that it results that 18 per cent. of the Cl must be
Professor J. Joly—Salt and Geological Time. 347
otherwise allocated than to the sodium, or is, in short, in excess
of the Cl equivalent of the sodium present.
Now it is certainly a fair assumption that if rain receives its saits
from Sea spray a similar excess of Cl ions over Na ions will obtain
in rain-water. We must at least conclude (in deference to the
current belief that the proportions of salts in rain-water and sea-
water are not generally quite in accord) that the sodium equivalent
of the chlorine found in rain-water constitutes an excessive estimate
of the former. Pierre’s results, to which I have already referred,
fully confirm this statement. He finds, in kilogrammes received
per hectare per annum, quantities of sodium chloride and other
chlorides, as well as of sodium sulphate, which afford 29-7 kilos
of chlorine and 17:72 kilos of sodium. Ascribing to this amount
of sodium its equivalent of chlorine, we have still a balance of
over 8 per cent. of the chlorine.!
We now turn to what we know of the chemical constitution
of river salts. I take Sir J. Murray’s mean analyses of nineteen chief
rivers of the world. Here we find the striking fact that there
is a large excess of sodium over chlorine: or the conditions of the
sea are reversed. We find, in fact, 157 x 10° tons of sodium and
84 x 10% tons of chlorine carried to the ocean per annum, and as
the combining weights of these elements are to one another as
23 : 35 it will appear that considerably the larger part of the sodium
of rivers must exist otherwise combined than with chlorine, were the
ionizing conditions removed. Let us now go so far as to assume
that all the chlorine in rivers is derived from rain, and that this
brings into the rivers its full equivalent of sodium, and we can
obviously calculate the maximum possible effect upon the age of
the Earth arising from the circulation of salt. (This can fall short
of the maximum only on the assumption of a selective retention of
chlorine in soils, for which I know of no evidence.) In this method
of treating the quantities at our disposal we leave, in short, the
whole of the sodium equivalent of the chlorine of rivers out of
account in deducing the age of the Earth. The result of the new
calculation is that the previous estimate of 96 millions of years
rises to under 148 millions of years. This result is, however, over
the maximum deducible even from the foregoing assumptions, for
as we diminish our estimate of the chlorine derived by solvent
denudation during geological time we increase the estimate we
necessarily make for original sodium in the ocean derived by
-a primeval acid denudation effected by free HCl (for we must
1 Pierre’s figures for the several salts in the units mentioned above are —
Na Cl ~~ = he ae ane 37°65
KCl : mae ne 8-2
Mg Cl, 25
Ca Cl, 1°8
Na,S O4 8:4
K,8 O,4 8-0
CaSO, ... see 6°2
Mg 8 0,4 ece . 5°9
A rainfall of 60 cm. per annum is assumed.
348 Professor J. Joly—Salt and Geological Time.
assume so much more chlorine to have been free in the original
atmosphere), and thus we are bound to diminish our numerator
as well as our denominator. The final result would be 141 x 10°
years. In obtaining this figure we simply assume that no part of
the chlorine now in the ocean was at any time contained in the
rocks, and that in a period of primeval acid denudation it acted
as HCl to bring chlorides into the original ocean. In other words,
that the 28,316 x 10” tons of Cl now in the ocean took part
in the primeval denudation, 6:7 per cent. of it uniting with sodium,
and thus bringing 1,250 x 10” tons of sodium into the primeval
ocean, the calculation being made on the basis defined in my paper.
Deducting this from the 15,627 x 10” tons of Na now in the ocean,
we have 14,877 x 10” tons to be accounted for by the annual river
supply. On our present assumptions the annual supply is not to be
taken at its full value of 157 x 10° tons, but this reduced by the
sodium equivalent of the whole of the chlorine in rivers (that is, the
equivalent of 84 x 10° tons), i. 55 x 10° tons. The geological
age is therefore the quotient of 14,8377 x 10” by 102 x 10°, which
is rather less than 141 million years.
The assumptions made in obtaining this upper limit are, I need
scarcely point out, unjustifiable. We are not at liberty to ascribe
all the chlorine of the rivers to rain. Whether derived directly
from the rocks and soils, extravasated deposits (as when contained
in ore deposits), or from accumulations due to past or present inland
denudation in ‘rainless’ areas, this element, so far as it is a carrier
of sodium, must enter our denominator. Nor can we assume the
chlorine of rain-water a fair measure of sodium transported from
the sea, seeing that such chlorine, if directly sea-derived, should, to
the extent of 18 per cent., exist combined with magnesium or other
element, and according to observation does so exist to the extent
of over 8 per cent. And again, what chloride of sodium is found
in rain-water is very surely in part derived from the land. Finally,
what we know of the percentage of chlorides in inland rains
points to a supply inadequate to furnish the quantities appearing
in Sir J. Murray’s analysis of mean river-water, for of coastal rains
by far the greater part finds its way back quickly and directly to
the sea by the small rivers and streams, and does not enter into the
composition of the larger rivers, the catchment areas of which are
either far inland or rise on the land side of the great. mountain
ranges. The amount of chlorine appearing in the mean river-water
is a little over 0°30 part per 100,000. Contrast this with the
estimate 0:04 obtained 300 miles from the sea in India, or the
Darmstadt estimate 0:09 part per 100,000, both localities being
still relatively close to the sea. On all these grounds I have
restricted my allowance for rain-borne chloride of sodium to 10 per
cent. of what appears in rivers.
We might base an allowance on the scanty knowledge we possess
as to the chlorine content of rains falling some 800 miles from the
sea. Let us accept 0:10 per 100,000 as the average amount of Cl
carried by rains to the rivers after evaporation, and assume that all
Professor J. Joly—Salt and Geological Time. 349
this was of marine origin and brought with it its full equivalent of
sodium. We thus assume that one-third of the chlorine in rivers is
derived from the ocean. We will now calculate what correction on
the 96 millions of years this allowance will involve.
The total chlorine discharged by rivers annually into the ocean is
84 x 10° tons, and 385 per cent. of this is 28 x 10° tons; this is,
we assume, derived from the ocean. Of the total Cl discharged by
rivers we see that 56 x 10° tons (the part derived from the rocks)
are not cyclical.
The 33 per cent. of chlorine which is wind-carried, as we assume,
has a sodium equivalent of 18-4 x 10° tons. Deducting this from
the total annual river supply of sodium, i.e. from 157°3 x 10° tons,
we have 138:9 x 10° tons derived from the rocks.
Let now N = the sodium now in the ocean = 15,627 x 10”.
n= the quantity of sodium derived from solvent
denudation and discharged annually by rivers
= 138:9 x 10°.
C = quantity of chlorine now in the ocean
= 28,316 x 10”.
¢ = quantity of chlorine derived by solvent denudation
and annually discharged by rivers = 56 x 10°.
(All in tons.)
If now X= Geological Time, we see first that the quantity of
chlorine eX was derived from the rocks during the time X, and
therefore the amount C — cX must have originally been free in the
primeval atmosphere. I have shown in my paper on the Age of the
Earth that there is reason to believe that 6°7 per cent. by weight of
such free chlorine would take up sodium from the earth-crust.
Consequently, the weight of sodium brought in, expressed as
a fraction of the free chlorine, is 5%; x 3%, the last fraction being
the ratio of the combining weights. This factor becomes 0-044
when reduced. In other words, the mass of sodium brought into the
primeval ocean was 0:044 (C — cX).
Hence the equation for Geological Time will be—
x_v¥ 0-044 (C —cX)
VW
and from this we have—
N — 0:044 €
~ n — 0044 ¢
Inserting the numbers given above, we get X = 105 x 10°.
Allowing, as I have done in my first paper, a deductive correction
for direct coastal denudation, we may state our final result as just
about one hundred millions of years. We are not justified in stating
our result more definitely. We keep in mind that our knowledge of
river analysis and of ocean mass are certainly not final.
So far, then, as error from rain-borne chloride of sodium can affect
our result, surely the limits are fixed with sufficient straitness !
We have, without any further deductions, 96 millions of years if we
accept the correction of 10 per cent. on the chloride of sodium of
350 Professor T. Rupert Jones—The Enon Conglomerate
rivers; we have 105 millions of years if the correction should be
38 per cent. I do not believe an unbiassed consideration of the
knowledge at our disposal will permit of an allowance larger than
the latter.
I have given the foregoing estimation in its algebraic form in
consequence of the remark of a writer in Wature (in a review of my
paper) that it was a pity that the age of the Harth has to be assumed
in making allowance for the primeval acid denudation. Such
assumption of the duration we seek to determine is not, however,
necessary, as the foregoing algebraic statement shows.
The teaching of the calculation which I gave in my original
paper, that the missing sodium of the rocks is equal to or in excess
of that added to the ocean during geological time, has been taken by
some as by no means opposed to the view that the ocean may have
primevally contained the greater part of its present sodium, or to
a rapid convergence in the rate of solvent denudation.
The greater part of these sediments, we are assured, were laid
down under conditions not even inimical to life, or, as Sir Archibald
Geikie has contended for the very ancient Torridonian rocks, under
physical conditions much as obtain to-day. But this is not all.
The oldest sediments are just those which are chemically the least
impoverished and the least washed out of the whole series, and,
indeed, might almost be identified by their higher alkali percentages.
This fact is obviously quite opposed to the view that they were
exposed to more intense solvent actions than obtain to-day. In
a word, the internal evidence, chemical, physical, and organic,
afforded by the successive strata, controverts the convergence of
denudative activity which some have casually assumed, and in
the light of this fact the calculation in question does oppose the
theory of a sodium-charged primeval ocean. We are assured, in
fact, that the introduction of sodium age by age had to wait upon
the denudation of the rocks, and was thus regulated by a rate to
which we know of no disturbance.
TII.—On tHe Enon ConGLOMERATE OF THE CAPE oF Goop Hops,
AND ITs Fosstn HsTHERLz.
By Professor T. Rurprrr Jonzs, F.R.S., F.G.S., ete.
N the “ Annual Report of the Geological Commission ” published
at Cape Town in 1895, Dr. Corstorphine refers at pp. 16-19
to the extent and features of the Enon Conglomerate, and to the
occurrence of fossil Estherig@ in some of its strata. His two assistant
geologists, Messrs. A. W. Rogers and H. H. L. Schwartz, in their
“Reports on the Southern Districts between Breede River and
George” and “On Oudtshoorn,” at pp. 73, 76-79, describe in detail
the position and characters of the Enon Conglomerate and its
‘ Estheria shale.’
This Conglomerate (with its sandstones and shaly beds) occurs in
the Breede River valley, Worcester Division of the Western Province,
and its Fossil Estherie. 351
and extends to Ashton and the Swellendam Division, just south of
the Langebergen; it covers also a large area eastwards as far as
Mossel Bay, and along the valley of the Olifant’s River in the
Oudtshoorn District, just south of the Great Zwarteberg range. This
formation consists of a quartzose conglomerate with a ferruginous
cement, and with intercalated, variable, lenticular sandstones. In
general it is less than 50 feet thick, but in some places the con-
glomerate hills rise 400 feet above the valleys (pp. 16 and 17).
At about 80 miles east of Swellendam, and 20 miles from the sea,
there is an outlier of Enon Conglomerate, on which are the two towns
of Heidelberg and Riversdale. In the vicinity of the former rises
the Duivanhocks River, which runs down to the sea at St. Sebastian
Bay. Near Heidelberg occur the shaly arenaceous strata, with
multitudes of flattened Estheriz on the bed-planes.
The name ‘ Enon Conglomerate’ was first used by Dr. W. Guybon
Atherstone (astern Province Monthly Magazine, vol.i, No. 10, June,
1857, p. 528), for the quartzose conglomerate which he noticed at
Enon, in the Alexandria Division of the Eastern Province, among
the upper waters of the Sunday’s River, on the flank of the
Zuurberg. The name has been adopted by others, and used
particularly in Mr. E. J. Dunn’s Geological Map of South Africa.
Mr. A. G. Bain’s section and remarks at p. 58, vol. vii, Trans.
Geol. Soc., ser. 11, 1845, indicate this conglomerate and some over-
lying portions of the Wood-bed series of the Uitenhage Jurassic
formation, in Lower Albany, north of the Bushman River. Mr. Bain
also noticed (op. cit., p. 184) the occurrence of the Enon Con-
glomerate, with ferruginous cement, “at Lange Kloof and other
parts of the district of George,” as well as “on the flank of the
Zuurberg ” and “at Grobbelar’s Kloof near Graham’s Town.”
In the Mining Journal for July 3rd, 1886, the following arrange-
ment was given by me for this conglomerate and associated strata :—
Trigonia Beds
Wood Bed
Jurassic: Uitenhage Formation! Saliferous Bed
Zwartkop Sandstone ...
Enon Conglomerate ... 300 feet.
(Unconformable or Devonian and other old rocks in Albany.)
At pp. 76-78 of the Rep. Geol. Comm. for 1898 it is stated
that “The Enon Conglomerate extends from the Paardeberg
eastwards, as a huge sheet covering up the Bokkeveld Beds on the
south and the Malmesburg Beds on the north. It lies in the middle
of the valley between the Zwartebergen and Langebergen. ‘T'ypically
it consists of pebbles of quartz and quartzite, imbedded in a dark
red matrix, but varieties occur which are very similar to those in
the conglomerate south of the Langebergen. Along the Gamka
Flats there are white gravels with large boulders similar to those
in Honig Klip’s Kloof, and along the Olifant’s River on the west
there are green sandstones and white claystones [?], the same as
*** | 400? feet.
1 See also Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., 1867, vol. xxiii, pp. 149 and 167.
302 Professor T. Rupert Jones—The Enon Conglomerate
one finds north-west of Heidelberg. The Enon Conglomerate of the
Oudtshoorn District closely resembles, in its lithological character
and relation to the older rocks, the similar deposits in the country
to the south of the Langebergen. Although determinable plant-
remains, with the possible exception of lignite, in which the minute
structure has been preserved, have not yet been found in the rock,
there are indefinite casts of fragments of wood in the sandstone near
Oudtshoorn, which are very like the casts in the sandstone of Cape
St. Blaize and Heidelberg.”
At p. 19 Dr. Corstorphine remarks :—‘ The character of the Hnon
Series—thick banks of conglomerate, passing in most localities
within a short distance, vertically and horizontally, into coarse,
lenticular beds of sandstone, the latter containing stems and other
plant-remains, with fresh-water stheria, and in one instance
a coleopterous wing-cover—points to a fluviatile origin for the whole.
It is, with the exception of the recent sand-dune limestones and
other superficial deposits, the youngest formation in the area so far
surveyed.”
At p. 18 he states: — “Shales and claystone [?] also occur,
sometimes gray, sometimes black and almost coaly in appearance.
Near Herbertsdale and Heidelberg the shales are common, and at
the former locality they contain numerous plant-remains. At
Heidelberg a white shale [shaley arenaceous bed] occurs with
abundant Hstheria casts.”
In March, 1899, I received from Mr. A. W. Rogers, one of the
Geological Surveyors of Cape Colony, three specimens of Enon
Conglomerate collected at Heidelberg, Swellendam District. Two
of the specimens (500 a and 802 a) consist of hard, white, laminated,
fine-grained sandstone (not argillaceous nor calcareous), showing
bed-planes, covered with flattened valves of Hstheria. The other is
an irregular and slickensided fragment of similar siliceous rock
(296 a). A large part of it is not laminated, and the matrix seems
to have been crushed after consolidation ; it contains some imperfect
and indeterminable casts and fragments of valves, modified by
pressure. These relics are distinguishable by their being stained
with yellow ochre. The rest of the piece is laminated, and the bed-
planes show many valves crowded together, flattened and modified
in their outlines. Their surfaces mostly present the appearance as
if the outer layer or film of shell had been dissolved or melted, as it
were, into a very thin, sometimes brownish varnish or glaze; and
no reticulate or other ornament between the concentric ridges can be
discovered in these valves.
Looking at the striking general similarity of the numerous
variable, sub-oblong, and sub-oval shapes in the crowds of extremely
flattened valves on these bed-planes, we evidently see the result of
shoals of probably one kind, or local tribe, of Hstheria having been
suddenly enveloped in heavy deposits of mud; and it is difficult to
distinguish any specific difference among the individuals.
Venturing, however, to place them all under one quasi-specific
title, I group them as EstHmr1a ANoMALA, sp. nov. (Figs. 1-4).
and its Fossil Estherie. 399
On specimen 302 a there is one individual (Fig. 1) which has
retained in great part the shape of the bivalved carapace, but is
rather narrowed vertically. The left valve remains exposed, and
a portion of the dorsal region of the other valve protrudes beyond it.
This left valve has the oblong-ovate shape common in the genus,
and bears indications of numerous concentric close-set lines or
ridges. It measures 5 mm. in length and 3 mm. in height.
Fic. 1.—Estheria anomala, sp. nov. Carapace showing the left valve, somewhat
narrowed by crush. Magnified 8 diam.
Fic. 2.—A right valve, crushed quite flat. Magnified 8 diam.
A modified right valve (Fig. 2), on the same specimen, quite
smooth, and widened out by pressure until it is almost suborbicular,
measures 5°75 mm. in length and 45 mm. in height, and yet may be
of the same species as the foregoing, there being many intermediate
shapes on the bed-planes of this rock.
On specimen 300a are other flattened valves, often nearly sub-
orbicular. Fig. 8, which has a short and broad ovate form, with an
apparently short but distinct dorsal border or hinge-line, measures
6:25 by 4:25 mm., and may be taken as belonging to the specific
type. The spaces between the concentric ridges (Fig. 4) exhibit no
ornament,
Fic. 3.—Estheria anomala, sp. nov. A right valve, somewhat misshapen by pressure.
Magnified 8 diam.
Fic. 4.—Part of the surface of Fig. 3. Magnified 75 diam.
None of the Estherie above mentioned from the Enon Con-
glomerate of Heidelberg correspond with the three known South
African species :—
Estheria Greyii, Jones: Grou. Mac., 1878, p. 100, Pl. III, Fig. 1.
This differs altogether in the general shape. It was from the
Lower Karoo beds, near Cradock, Cape Colony.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VUI.—NO. VIII. 23
3854 Dr. Forsyth Maor—Reported Fossil Camel and Nilghai.
Estheria Draperi, Jones: Grou. Mac, 1894, p. 289, Pl. IX,
Figs. la, 6, c. This sub-oblong form is much larger, and
has ornamented interspaces, but is the nearest in general
form. It was from the Uppermost Karoo beds, in the
Drakensberg, Natal.
Estheria Stowiana, Jones: Grou. Mac., 1894, p. 290, Pl. IX,
Figs. 2a, b. This little valve differs from the others
especially in its sub-elliptical outline. Having its full
complement of numerous concentric ridges, it is not a young
form, as suggested in 1894. From the Uppermost Karoo
beds, in the Drakensberg, Natal.
TV.—On tHe ReEportTED OccURRENCE OF THE CAMEL AND THE
NinGHal In THE Upper MiocrenrE or Samos.
By C. I. ForsytH Masor, M.D., F.Z.S8.
N a notice on “ Fossil Camels in Europe,” inserted in the
periodical Natur und Haus (1901, ix, 5, p. 179), it is stated
that amongst the fossils from Samos in the Stuttgart Museum there
occurs, under a wrong name, the well-preserved skull of a Camel,
and likewise ‘‘a near relative of the Indian Nylgau, Portax pictus.”
On a visit to the Stuttgart Museum a few weeks ago, I was kindly
allowed to examine the above-named specimens, with the result that
the skull supposed to be a Camel is found to be that of a hornless
member of the Giraffides, agreeing almost exactly in form with horn-
less skulls of Samotherium Boissieri, Maj., but considerably smaller.
It is doubtless the female skull of Palgotragus Rouenii, Gaud.
Breadth of frontals behind the orbits in a Samotheriwm Boissierti Q ... 240°5mm.
Breadth of frontals behind the orbits in the Stuttgart skull... ... ... 187 ,,
Breadth of frontals across the orbits in the Stuttgart skull ... ... ... 161 ,,
Breadth of frontals across the orbits in Paleotragus Rouenii, according
to Gaudry Luan aatled (were! Tieeeh Gbaibieas) Aaa ees |ilee Gees) fecal OOM
The hornless Camelopardalis parva, Weith., from Pikermi, is the
same species as Palgotragus Rouenii. The difference in the shape of
the molars is only apparent, the examination of the type-specimen
of the latter in the Paris Museum showing that the teeth are not
correctly drawn in fig. 2, pl. xlv of the “‘ Animaux fossiles et Géologie
de l’Attique.”
The fossil claimed to be a near relative of the Portax is likewise
a Giraffoid, intermediate in size between Samotherium Boissiert and
Palgotragus Rouenii; the incorrectly repaired supraorbital horn of
the left side is preserved. In size and shape the molars correspond
with (1) some isolated teeth doubtfully assigned by Gaudry to his
Camelopardalis Attica; (2) an “isolated upper tooth series ” from
Maragha (Persia), described by Rodler & Weithofer; (3) isolated
teeth, also from Maragha, in the British Museum (M. 3,867 and
3,869) ; (4) the teeth of the type-specimen of Giraffa vetusta (Wagn.),
from Pikermi, if due account is taken of the latter’s rather worn
condition. The Stuttgart skull shows the characters of Palgotragus
Geol Mag 1901.
GMWoodward del. etlith. West,Newmen imp
Silvie Caster opoda .
a
F. R. Cowper Reed—Salter’s Undescribed Species. 398
and Samotherium (the unfortunate former name will presumably, as
previously stated by me, supersede the latter) ; it is therefore probable
that its anterior and posterior limbs were of approximately the
same relative length as in Samotherium Boissieri, and not giraffe-like
asin Camelopardalis Attica. If this suggestion proves to be correct,
the proper name for this intermediate-sized member of the Giraffide
will be Palotragus vetustus (Wagn.).
The hornless skull and the teeth described under the name of
Alcicephalus Neumayri in Rodler & Weithofer’s paper on the
Ruminants of Maragha (1890) belong to Samotherium Boissieri
(1888) ; not so the limb-bones ascribed to 4. Newmayri, which agree
better with the size of Palgotragus Rouenit.
It is but fair to state that there are labels in the Stuttgart
Museum to show that the Giraffoid affinity of the two fossils in
question had been duly recognized.
V.—Woopwarpian Museum Notes: Saurer’s UNDESCRIBED
Species. V.
By F. R. Cowrrr Rezezp, M.A., F.G.S.
(PLATE XV.)
PLEUROTOMARIA STRIATISSIMA (Salter). (Pl. XV, Figs. 1 and 2.)
1878. Pleurotomaria striatissima, Salter: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus.,
p- 171 (a 987, a 991).
1891. Plewrotomaria striatissima, Woods: Cat. Type Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 113.
There are two specimens of this species in the Woodwardian
Museum, both of which were named and labelled by Salter. The
smaller and more perfect one, a 987 (Fletcher Collection), is first
mentioned, and is stated to have come from the Lower Ludlow of
Dudley. The larger specimen is from the same horizon of Green
Quarry, Leintwardine, and shows only a portion of the upper surface.
Dracnosts. —Shell much flattened, discoidal; very low, short
spire; whorls five or six in number, much flattened, coiled into
a nearly flat spiral; outer whorl with acute margin furnished with
small, narrow projecting band, marked off by groove from rest of
whorl, and bordered by a raised thread-like line above and below
(shown in Leintwardine specimen). On the inner whorls this band
lies on the suture-line and is almost hidden. Apical surface of
whorls ornamented with regular, equidistant, longitudinal, revolving
strize, 80-40 in number. At about one-third the distance from the
outer margin is a raised thread-like line or keel, parallel to the
stri and more conspicuous on the inner whorls. Umbilical surface
of shell flattened or very weakly convex, swelling slightly
towards the mouth (which is not preserved). This surface is
ornamented with revolving strie, similar to the apical surface,
but there is no raised thread-like line or keel amongst them.
Umbilicus deep, circular, and about one-fifth the width of the base.
306 =6F. R. Cowper Reed—Salter’s Undescribed Species.
M&EASUREMENTS.
mm.
Diameter of larger specimen ... Ade a ep 35
Diameter of smaller specimen ... ft oat 22
PLEUROTOMARIA UNIFORMIS, Salter. (Pl. XV, Fig. 3.)
1873. Pleurotomaria uniformis, Salter, n.sp.: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw.
Mus., p. 155 (a 879).
Salter (loc. cit. supra) described this species as ‘large, quite
without ridges except band.” His original specimen (a 879), from
the Fletcher Collection, is the only one which we possess, and it is
poor material on which to base a new species, as it is distorted and
the shell mostly missing. It was found in the Wenlock Limestone
of Dudley, and measures approximately 65 mm. in length and 60 mm.
in width across the body-whorl.
Draenosis.—Sheli large, broadly conical, of few whorls (the three
upper ones are alone preserved). Whorls convex, with apical face
oblique to axis and having its surface slightly raised in the middle
between the suture-line and slit-band. Slit-band of moderate width,
marginal, separating apical face from convex portion of whorl below,
and situated above the middle line of the whorl; with rounded
prominent borders, and with a convex surface crossed by transverse
crescentic striz and occasionally by thicker lamelle. Suture-line
shallow. Body-whorl large, apparently nearly half the length of
shell. Ornamentation of apical face of whorls consisting of trans-
verse sigmoidal lines; rest of whorls crossed by transverse non-
sigmoidal striz, with a few thicker striz interspersed at irregular
intervals.
PLEUROTOMARIA ? HELICOIDES, Salter.
1873. Platyschisma helicoides, Salter: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 186
6 140, ¢ 26).
1891. Bat nelicoidee, Woods: Cat. Type Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 111.
The two specimens on which Salter founded this species are both
from the Upper Ludlow of Lesmahagow. Neither is at all well
preserved, and but very few characters are visible. Salter says of
this species: ‘A shell very like the Trochus helicites of the British
Ludlows, but flatter and having a marked subangular band.”
Draenosis.— Shell small, coiled into a low spiral of five or six
whorls. Whorls angulated ; apical surface narrow, flat, horizontal,
with elevated keel round edge; sides steeply sloping. Margin of
last whorl appears to be expanded into horizontal lamellar band.
No slit-band visible. Surface ornamentation unknown.
MEASUREMENTS.
Height ...
Width ... 000 500 ae 060
Remarks.—As Salter remarks, this species is quite distinct from
Sowerby’s Trochus [ Platyschisma] helicites,: but it is unfortunate
1 Sil. Syst., pp. 603, 706, t. iii, figs. le, 5. Siluria, 4th ed., p. 162, Foss. 26,
fig. 9; t. xxxiv, fig. 12.
F. R. Cowper Reed—Salter’s Undescribed Species. 357
that the material is so badly preserved that even the genus is
doubtful. It is quite possible that it is a Horiostoma, but the
apparently alate margin reminds one of Plewrotomaria alata (His.),"
and the shape of the whorls is also similar, especially in the variety
subcarinata.
Trocuonema Brsucosa, Salter. (Pl. XV, Fig. 4.)
1873. Trochonema bijugosa, Salter, n.sp.: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus.,
p- 156 (a 875).
1891. Trochonema bijugosa, Woods: Cat. Type Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 115.
There are only two specimens of this species in the Woodwardian
Museum, and they are the original ones determined by Salter. The
larger one shows a portion of the body-whorl and succeeding whorl
with the shell well preserved ; the smaller one is merely an imperfect
internal cast of the two basal whorls, and it is doubtful if it is
rightly attributed to the same species. Both are from the Wenlock
Limestone of Dudley and belong to the Fletcher Collection. Salter
describes the species as “much resembling T. (Turbo) trochleatus
of McCoy and Hall,” and the figure in the margin appears to be
a rough restoration of it.
Dracnosts. — Shell conical, turbinate ; of six (?) whorls; apical
angle 60°. Whorls angulated by two parallel longitudinal keels,
between which their surface is flattened and vertical. Apical
surface of whorls sloping down steeply from suture-line to upper
keel, but swollen into a low, revolving ridge close below suture-line,
defined below by distinct groove. Lateral surface flattened vertical,
about one-third height of whorl, bounded above by upper keel and
below by lower keel; lateral surface meets apical surface at
angle of 45°, and in basal whorl meets umbilical surface at same
angle. Umbilical surface sloping, faintly convex. Keels forming
rounded, projecting, parallel bands, marked off above and below by
faint narrow grooves. The lower keel is rather the larger of the
two. Surface of valves ornamented by regular, continuous, strong,
equal striz. On apical surface the striae are oblique, and close to
the upper keel bend sharply back and cross it in a series of sharp
crescents resembling those on the slit-band of Pleurotomaria.
Between the keels on the lateral surface the striae are nearly
straight and vertical, and cross the lower keel directiy without
bending back, and continue thence on to the umbilical surface,
where they become sigmoidal.
MEASUREMENTS.
mm.
Width of larger specimen... Abe “bt uae 20°0
Estimated height of ditto... e . : 20°0
Remarks. —It is unfortunate that the material on which this
species is based is not more complete, and accordingly the species
does not admit of very satisfactory definition. At any rate, it seems
to be distinct from any previously described.
1 Lindstrém: Sil. Gastrop. Pterop. Gotl., p. 118, pl. x, figs. 33-37.
308 Dr. C. Davison—British Earthquakes, 1900.
BriiEroPHon Ruruvent, Salter. (PI. XV, Figs. 5 and 6.)
1873. Bellerophon Ruthveni, u.sp., Salter: Cat. Camb. Sil. Foss. Woodw. Mus.
661
Ne
1891. Bellerophon Ruthveni, Woods: Cat. Type Foss. Woodw. Mus., p. 96.
It is to be regretted that the four specimens on which Salter
founded this species are so poorly preserved and distorted. They
are all from the Kirkby Moor Flags of Benson Knot, near Kendal,
and were labelled by McCoy B. expansus (Sow.). Salter describes
B. Ruthvent as “Smaller than B. dilatatus and with the band
angular, and the whorls angular where the band becomes so. Very
common, 1+ inch wide.” The shape of the shell resembles B. expansus
with large expanded aperture, with inner lip bent down considerably
and outer lip possessing a wide acuminate V-shaped sinus. The
slit-band is comparatively narrow, and lies sunk between faintly
elevated margins. Near the aperture the whorl seems to be slightly
carinated and compressed, though this appearance may be due to
crushing in the rock. In one of the smaller specimens there are
traces of one or two longitudinal thread-like lines running parallel
to the slit-band on the surface of the shell, slightly diverging
towards the mouth, but no other ornamentation or surface-markings
are visible. The specimens are so poor that it is impossible to give
any satisfactory definition of the species, and it is extremely doubtful
in my mind whether Salter’s species can stand.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV.
Fic. la.—Pleurotomaria striatissima, Salter, viewed from above, enlarged twice
natural size.
Fic. 14.—The same, viewed from beneath, enlarged twice natural size.
Fig. 1c.—Side-view of same, enlarged twice natural size.
From the Lower Ludlow of Dudley.
Fic. 2.—Pleurotomaria striatissima, Salter, natural size; from the Lower Ludlow,
Leintwardine.
Fic. 3.—Pleurotomaria reniformis, Salter, natural size; Wenlock Limestone,
Dudley.
Fic. Realy sere bijugosa, Salter, enlarged twice natural size; Wenlock
Limestone, Dudley.
Fie. 5.—Bellerophon Ruthveni, Salter (side-view), natural size; Kirkby Moor
Flags, Benson Knot, Kendal.
Fic. 6.—The same (carinal aspect), enlarged twice natural size; same locality.
VI.—On tHe British HartHquakes or 1900.
By Cuartzs Davison, D.Sc., M.A., F.G.S.
(WITH A MAP.)
URING the past year there were only two undoubted earth-
quakes in this country. Some may have occurred in Glen Garry,
one of our most sensitive regions; but the construction of a new
railway through the valley renders it difficult to identify true
earthquakes with certainty. The total number of British earth-
quakes during the last twelve years thus amounts to 116, of which
46 had epicentres in England and Wales and 70 in Scotland, 42 of
the latter number being confined, or almost confined, to Glen Garry.
Dr. C. Davison—British Earthquakes, 1900. 309
Ocuit Eartruquakes or Sept. 17 anp 22, 1900.
The two undoubted earthquakes occurred on Sept. 17 at 10.15 p.m.
and Sept. 22 at 4.30 pm. There were also four other reported
shocks, whose seismic character is not established, at the following
times :—
(a) Sept. 17, 5.30 p.m., Menstrie.
(6) Sept. 17, 10.5 p.m., Alva.
(c) Sept. 18, 2 a.m., Alva.
(d) Sept. 18, about 2.55 a.m., Bridge of Allan.
The first two were noticed by several persons at each of the places
mentioned, but I have no record of them except the statement that
slight shocks were felt.
Karthquake of Sept. 17, at 10.15 p.m.—lI have received 56 accounts
of this earthquake from 26 places, in addition to negative records
from 11 other places.'| The epicentre is situated among the Ochil
Hills, and consequently the intensity of the shock in the central
region is unknown. At places near the boundary, in the valleys of
the Forth and Allan, the intensity was 4, and it can hardly have
exceeded this degree in any part of the disturbed area.
The boundary of the disturbed area, which corresponds to an
isoseismal line of intensity slightly less than 4, is roughly elliptical
in form, 15 miles long and 94 miles broad, and includes 117 square
miles. Its longer axis is directed H. 138° N. and W. 138° S., and the
centre of the area is 3 miles N. 82° W. of Alva. In spite of the
absence of observations from the neighbourhood of Glendevon, it is
probable that the curve is drawn with a fair approach to accuracy.
The shock seems to have been nearly uniform in its character all
over the disturbed area, a single prominent vibration succeeded by
a tremor such as would be caused by a heavy weight falling on the
floor and making the building shake, and lasting altogether not more
than three seconds. :
Of the 55 observers who provide detailed accounts of the earth-
quake, 48 distinctly heard the sound, 4 are doubtful or fail to
answer the question, while 3 state that they heard no sound at all.
Thus, the percentage of those who heard the sound is not less
than 87.
MnO see aes ue 0°95 ats See 0°99
UO! cidcy yi cnt wf cca OOO, 04 ul ening acne
CaO ae AGE sate 12°29 mae ae 12°82
Wamp ie sie aes Si Vy eager 2°41
RAO Ge: te © Aan Ses O62 0 eit a wen 0-99
H,0 ay te sit 3°96 Sac ... (not given)
99°87 9 94°22
1 «¢ Blemente der Gesteinelehre,” p. 361. See also ‘* Mikroscop. Physiogr. der
massigen Gesteine,’’ p. 811. Ee
“© Mitt. der Grossher. Badischen Geol. Landesanstalt,’’ ii, p. 405.
‘¢ Petrology for Students,” 1895, p. 179.
“* Aids to Geology,’’ 1898, p. 262.
Rosenbusch: ‘‘ Klemente,”’ p. 361.
Graeff: loc. cit. 8 From a pamphlet by Professor Steinmann.
‘* Elemente,’’ p. 363. 9 Traces also of Cu and Ni.
2 2 oO er wD
412 Professor Bonney—On Limburgite from Sasbach.
In eight other analyses quoted by Rosenbusch as representing
limburgites we find that
The percentage of SiO, ranges from 40°20 to 44:54
%. Al, Os Af 8-66 ,, 14:89
i MgO ce 6°80 ,, 13°34
5 alkalies Rs 3°50 ,, 8:88!
But the analysis of a very typical peridotite (dunite) is:* SiQ,,
39°61; Al, O,, 1:68; FeO, 8:42; MgO, 42:29; Na,O, 0:01; K,O,
0:02; H,O, 5:89. Total, 97:92 (trace of CaO). Among the other
analyses of peridotites,®> we find that the percentage of Si O, is often
a little higher and that of MgO rather lower, the former rising to
about 45, the latter falling even as low as about 20, when, however,
the CaO and FeO usually increase, so as to bring the total of the
three protoxide bases above 40. The chemical composition of a rock
consisting mainly of olivine (i.e. a peridotite) obviously cannot differ
materially from that of an olivine; a slight rise in the silica per-
centage will indicate the incoming of enstatite, or, with addition of
Ca O, of a monoclinic pyroxene; when the percentage of Al, O, is very
low, that is probably present in a spinellid, but with a higher rise
(say above 4 per cent.) biotite* or white chlorite® or anorthite may
be expected. Thus, as I pointed out several years ago,° limburgite
must be much more closely related to the picrites than to the
peridotites, and I suggested that it should be regarded as a glassy
form of that group.’
None, however, of these authors name felspar or a felspathoid as
a constituent of limburgite, though some hint at the possibility of
their being present, so that it may be worth while to put on record
a demonstration of the fact which I obtained in the Summer of 1895.
I then collected two varieties of limburgite from a large heap by
the roadside, approaching the village of Sasbach, rather more than
amile from the southern quarry at Limburg. One was much less
vesicular (or amygdaloidal) than the other, and looked less likely to
have a vitreous groundmass, so that on my return to England I had
it sliced. Microscopic examination proved it to contain a considerable
quantity of felspar, and I should have published a description of it
at once had I obtained it from the quarry.? So I waited in the hope
1 Generally under 5:5.
2 Wadsworth: ‘‘ Lithological Studies,’’ p. xxiv.
These remarks do not apply to the list given by Professor Rosenbusch, wt supra,
p. 165, but from personal knowledge I must refuse to admit either the Schriesheim
picrite or kimberlite into the peridotites.
* As in the mica-peridotite of Kentucky.
° Asin the Rauenthal serpentines. Here the alumina only amounts to 1-35: see
C. A. Raisin, Q.J.G.8., 1897, pp. 251, 257.
® Pres. Add. Geol. Soc.: Q.J.G.S., 1885, p. 69.
’ This is virtually admitted by Rosenbusch (‘‘ Elemente,’ p. 361, and ‘‘ Mikro.
Phys.,’’ p. 818). Zirkel (iii, 76) will not allow even this, and uses limburgite as
‘a synonym for magma-basalt.
8 Professor Steinmann writes ‘ Limberg’ for the place.
° It is not my custom to be satisfied with specimens thus collected. But I had
been unable to get a carriage at Riegel (as I had been led to expect), and thus had
been obliged to go on foot. It was a hot afternoon, a long and fatiguing walk, and
my time was limited by trains, so that I had to turn back without reaching the hill.
ce
Professor Bonney—On Limburgite from Sasbach. 413
that I might either go there myself (it is now more easy of access)
or get a friend to ascertain the actual relation of this to the more
familiar variety of limburgite. Last Spring, Mr. P. Haas, B.Sc.,
one of my former students at University College, informed me that
he proposed attending lectures at the University of Freiburg, so
I asked him to visit Limburg. Early in the Summer he forwarded
to me a small box of specimens and a rough sketch of the quarry,
on which the position of each was marked, and of which I annex
acopy. This quarry, Mr. Haas informs me, is on the south side of
the hill marked by the ruined castle of Limburg, near the south-
eastern angle; the one from which Professor Rosenbusch obtained
and described specimens being on the north-west side, near the ruin
and overlooking the Rhine.
RirGeelts
Upper flow, limburgite (inaccessible).
Upper tuff.
Middle flow, limburgite.
Lower tuff, much foreshortened, with path on cliff edge. All this is covered by
slipped-down loess, but Mr. Haas saw the tuff at D and in two places near
D’, where also limburgite was exposed in two places (2 marking one of
them), and the relations of the lava and tuff appeared to be irregular here.
Lower flow, limburgite.
Loess, often slipped.
The numerals indicate the positions of the specimens described inj the text,
5 being the dark rock.
Den >
Es
It will save time to arrange the specimens for description
according to their structure rather than their situation in the mass.
The first (1) has a general resemblance to a specimen (purchased)
which has been in my collection for some five and twenty years,
except that its vesicles are a little smaller and more thinly lined
with (white) secondary minerals.' There is a slight but unimportant
difference in the tint of the groundmass, and the visible crystals of
augite are a little smaller. Microscopic examination proves the
larger crystals to be imbedded in a matrix consisting of small
elongated prisms of brownish augite, with a few rods of iron oxide,
1 T have a couple of slices of limburgite, bought nearly as long ago. They show
the usual minerals, imbedded in a rich brown glass, in which also are scattered a few
microliths, apparently a pyroxene.
414 Professor Bonney—On Limburgite from Sasbach.
and of an interstitial material, which sometimes is a brown glass,
sometimes a clear substance, more or less crowded with brown
granules. The latter not unfrequently acts on polarized light, and
in its clearer parts the outlines of a prismatic mineral, apparently
a felspar, may be detected.
(2) Base of the middle mass, right-hand side. The hand specimen
exhibits many crystals of black augite about the same size as in the
first specimen, and small light-rust-brown spots, indicating partly
decomposed olivine, in a chocolate-brown compact matrix. Vesicles
are far from numerous, generally not larger than a mustard-seed,
and usually filled with secondary white minerals. As the larger
minerals—augite, olivine, and iron oxide—as well as the secondary
minerals, zeolites and carbonates, in the vesicles, have been so fully
described by Rosenbusch in his classic memoir on this rock,’ I shall
content myself with referring the reader to its pages, for they are
practically identical. The olivines (hyalosiderite), I may remark,
are frequently, though not universally, idiomorphic, and the augites
generally show a slight pleochroism. This is more marked in
longitudinal sections, giving a distinctly yellowish tint with vibrations
parallel to the vertical axis, and puce-brown with those perpendicular
to it. As in the normal limburgite, the larger minerals, augite,
olivine, and iron oxide, are rather thickly scattered in a groundmass
composed of felted minute prisms of puce-brown augite, with specks
of opacite, flakelets of ferrite, and some colourless belonites,’ and
a clear interstitial material, which in parts is doubly refracting, but
mostly behaves as a glass. This sometimes (though less frequently)
is of a rusty-brown colour, and recalls the base of the typical
limburgite. These augite prisms do not exceed 005” in length,
and are commonly four or five times longer than broad. The ferrite
flakelets act on polarized light, as do some little prisms of the same
colour, but I suspect this material to be little more than a staining.
The groundmass, I may add, is not unlike one figured by Boricky.?
(3) “From the left-hand side of the middle mass of limburgite,”
and (4) ‘From the central part of the pit, a few feet above the floor.”
Both these specimens hardly differ megascopically from No. 2,
except perhaps in being a shade less vesicular; but this is not true
of their groundmass, which, however, is so similar in both, that one
description may serve. No. 8 contains numerous transparent lath-
shaped microliths, up to about -015” long, though in one case double
of this, and the clear material between these and other microliths
(augite, etc.) is doubly refracting, affording low polarization tints,
and resembling an indefinitely crystalline mass of felspar. The
microliths show the characteristic twinning of plagioclase, and
measurements of extinction angles incline me to refer them to
labradorite. The small prisms of augite are much less numerous
than in No. 2, but generally a little larger. The opacite and ferrite
are more or less inclined to cluster in rod-like patterns, and the
1 Neues Jahrbuch, 1872, p. 33.
2 T defer the description of these.
3 «« Petr. Stud. an den Gesteinen Bohmens,”’ pl. ii, fig. 8, and pl. iii, fig. 3.
Professor Bonney—On Limburgite from Sasbach. 415
groundmass is rather variable, being in some parts fairly clear, in
others a sort of micro-ophite or micropegmatite, composed of ferrite
(or some rust-brown mineral) and felspar. The colourless belonites,
mentioned already, are rather abundant. Evidently they con-
solidated at a very early stage, for they are often numerous in the
felspar ; they have a higher refractive index than the felspar, and
the general aspect of fibrolite, but rather low polarization tints and
oblique extinction. This prevents me from referring them to that
mineral, which otherwise they resemble.
(5) Comes from the bottom of the pit (about the middle),
representing the lowest rock exposed. This apparently differs much
from the others. Its colour is greenish-black, slightly mottled in
places with a paler green, so that the augite crystals are less
conspicuous. Cavities are very few, small, and filled with a pale
grey-green mineral. Had I been asked to name the specimen
without knowing whence it had come, I should have replied,
“probably a picrite.” But the microscope shows the differences
to be only varietal, the colour being due to the absence of the rust-
brown iron oxides so common in the others, and the substitution of
a green alteration product in the olivines,’ as is commonly seen in
dark-green serpentines. The groundmass of this specimen is also
a little variable, some parts exhibiting the intercrystallization of
a basic material and felspar described above, while the latter mineral
more commonly forms a clear groundmass of fair-sized crystals, in
which the others are scattered ; it is, in fact, still more nearly
a normal holocrystalline rock than any of the preceding specimens.
The specimen which I collected in 1895 is megascopically very
like Nos. 2, 3, and 4, but under the microscope presents a close
resemblance to Nos. 3 and 4, as well as (allowing for the absence of
the green mineral) to No. 5, with one or two varietal differences.
The elongated little prisms of brown augite are more numerous than
in the latter three; the micropegmatitic structure is much rarer,
for it occurs only as an outgrowth from two or three of the large
augites ; the minerals, large and small (including numerous colour-
less belonites), being imbedded in a clear material, which (as in parts
of those specimens) is a mass of crystallized felspar (without any
separate microliths of the same) often showing the characteristic
twinning of plagioclase.
When engaged in putting together these notes I learnt from Miss
Raisin that she had visited the north-west quarry at Limburg. She
has kindly allowed me to examine her specimens, and slices from three
of them. The resemblance between these rocks from the original
locality and those described above is so close, that a very brief descrip-
tion will suffice. The minerals occurring porphyritically are the same
in all. As regards the groundmass: that of a moderately vesicular
specimen from about the middle part of the crag is much darkened
with opacite and augite microliths, but the clear interstitial material
(not abundant) appears to bea glass. Here and there dark belonites
(? a pyroxene encrusted with a brownish iron-oxide) occur, arranged
1 It affects only the exterior, or penetrates into some of the cracks.
416 Professor Bonney—On Limburgite from Sasbach.
in a sort of ‘fern-leaf’ pattern. The groundmass of a second
specimen (almost free from vesicles) taken not far from the bottom
of the cliff, very closely resembles those I obtained in 1895. The
smaller augite microliths are not numerous, and all the other
constituents are embedded in a clear crystalline groundmass of
plagioclase felspar. In a third specimen, generally similar in
structure, taken from the base of the cliff, aggregated granules of
augite occur locally in a similar groundmass, in which I think
a little nepheline is also present. Thus, felspar is abundant in
much of the rock at both ends of the hill, of which the original
limburgite, with the base of brown glass, is only a local condition.’
According to a section of the Limburg Hill from north-west to
south-east, published by Professor Steinmann in a pamphlet (for
Fie. 2.
Upper flow, limburgite (spheroidal).
Upper tuff.
Middle flow, nepheline-basalt.
Lower tuff (with wood, etc.).
Lower flow, black limburgite.
Upper flow, limburgite (without olivine).
Upper tuff.
Middle flow, limburgite (with phillipsite, etc.).
Lower tuff.
10. Lower flow, ? limburgite or nepheline-basalt.
11. Loess.
From the top of the hill to the bottom of the southern quarry is about 200 feet.
a copy of which I am indebted to Mr. Haas), three flows, parted by
tuffs, are exposed in each quarry. He speaks of the top one in the
northern quarry as limburgite, the middle as nepheline-basalt, the
lower as black limburgite.? In the southern quarry, from which
the specimens described in this paper are taken, the upper is
limburgite without olivine, the middle limburgite, the lower
limburgite or nepheline-basalt. Of the specimens here described,
Nos. 1, 2, and 3 are from the ‘ middle limburgite,’ Nos. 4 and 5
from the ‘lower stream.’ I may say that during my examination of
these rocks (before I read Professor Steinmann’s notes) I was on the
look-out for nepheline. Most of the groundmass is indubitably
felspar, but one or two small crystals included in that, and a little
interstitial mineral (neither very well preserved), are very suggestive
of that mineral, which the analysis would lead us to expect.
These notes, I hope, will make it clear to English readers that the
typical limburgite (like tachylite) is only a local glassy condition
0 SONI? Guy 99 1D
1 Miss Raisin informs me that the specific gravity of a compact specimen is 37058.
2 Herr F. Graeff (loc. cit.) also gives a section, naming the top and bottom flows in
each limburgite and the middle one nepheline-basalt. He notices the different colour
of the mass at the bottom of the southern quarry, and says this has a different habit
from typical limburgite.
T. Mellard Reade—Keuper Maris at Great Crosby. 417
of a rock which elsewhere contains a considerable quantity of felspar,
the one passing into the other in the same quarry, and almost
certainly in the same mass. In a classification it must be completely
separated from the peridotites, for it is related by composition,
on the one hand to the picrites, on the other to the olivine-dolerites,
and so occupies, whether in its glassy or holocrystalline condition,
a transitional position. Thus, if limburgite be restricted to the
vitreous type, a new name must be coined for the other one. It is,
however, I think, worth considering whether it would not suffice to
speak in future of Limburg-tachylite, Limburg-basalt, ete.
V.—AnotHer Srotrion or Kervupsr Maris at Great Crossy,
. LANCASHIRE.
By T. Metuarp Reapg, C.E., F.G.S., F.R.I.B.A.
|‘ 1884 I described in the GrontocicaL Magazine a section of
Keuper Marls exposed by the excavation of the Boulder-clay
at Moorhey, Great Crosby.' This was our first knowledge of their
existence in the neighbourhood, the whole area being covered with
a thick mantle of Boulder-clay excepting where the Lower Keuper
Sandstone comes to the surface in the villages of Great and Little
Crosby.
The Great Crosby Machine Brickworks Company in extending
their operations in Cooks Lane have sunk a well at the bottom
of their brick-pit, proving the Boulder-clay to be 35 feet thick
from the surface at this point. It is of a remarkably homogeneous
constitution and plastic character throughout down to the very base,
there being only a vein of sand 1 foot thick at about 3 feet from
the bottom. ‘The most interesting result of the sinking is, however,
the discovery that it rests upon the Keuper Marls. These Marls
are of a bright blue colour and micaceous. From a personal
examination of the well I found that here the Boulder-clay rested
upon a well-defined surface of the marls which do not appear to be
worked up and mixed with the clay. The well had penetrated
5 feet of the Marls, which fail to show very regular bedding, but
appear to have a general dip to the south-east. A bed of more
gritty material was to be seen on one side of the well, which is
5 feet in diameter, but it became pinched out on the other side.
At a distance of about 440 yards, in a direction 32° south-east,
the Lower Keuper Sandstone crops out near the Police Station,
so that there must exist between the two places a considerable
fault to which may be due the disturbed appearance of the Marls.
It is the intention of Mr. Peters, the managing director of the
Company, to ultimately clear out the whole of the Boulder-clay
to the full depth over most of the area. It was in this Boulder-clay
that the celebrated “‘Gypsum Boulder of Great Crosby,” weighing
18 tons, now erected in the village, was discovered at a depth of
about 20 feet from the surface.’
' Dec. III, Vol. I, pp. 445-7. See also Q.J.G.S., 1885, vol. xli, p. 464.
2 See ‘The Gypsum Boulder of Great Crosby’: Proc. Liverpool Geol. Soc.,
Sess. 1898-99, pp. 347-356.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. IX. 27
418 Notices of Memoirs.
Moorhey, the only other locality where the Keuper Marls have
been proved, is about 7 furlongs to the south-east of the Crosby
Brickworks, and the Lower Keuper Sandstone of the village
intervenes. The Marls at Moorhey, I should say, are somewhat
lower down in the series than those just described. If the whole
area of the pit is bottomed many interesting facts may come to light.
INO tke S] © Ves EVE@is= =
+
I.—Le Dosstrr Hypronocique du régime aquifére en terrains
calcaires, et le réle de la Géologie dans les recherches et études des
travaux d’eaux alimentaires. (Bull. Soc. Belge géol., 1901, x, pt. 5.) —
In a paper of some 180 pages Mr. Van den Broeck replies to the
note of Mr. Thomas Verstraeten entitled ‘‘ Hydrologie des roches,
necessité de préciser les situations et les termes.” The bulk of the
paper is of a controversial nature, but Mr. Van den Broeck has
brought together a great deal of valuable matter relative to the
subject. With a courteous consideration for his readers the author
has provided a detailed table of contents, which occupies 12 pages, and
from this we gather that the paper deals with the following items :—
Hydrology of the Carboniferous rocks; Hydrology of the Chalk ;
of the district round Han-Rochefort, of Bocq and Hoyoux, and of
Remouchamps; the réle of geology in the search for water and in
the application of hydrology, especially in the study of the
aquiferous resources of the Carboniferous System; Hydrology of
Condroz, and of the horizontal beds of Tournai. The author
concludes his paper by saying that it is thanks to the progress
of Geology and Spelzology that these practical questions of applied
hydrology can be easily solved to the great benefit of human
populations.
I].—Maryianp GzoLocicaL Survey: Eocene. (Baltimore, 1901,
pp. 332, 64 plates, map.)—The Eocene deposits of the State of
Maryland are described in this volume by William Bullock Clark
and George Curtis Martin. The description is prefaced with an
excellent map and a bibliography. The deposits are divided into
two formations, the Nanjemoy above and the Aquia below. Both
are rich in fossils, full lists of which are given. The systematic
paleontology begins on p. 93, and is treated of by various specialists.
The Vertebrata are few in number and consist of four crocodiles
and two tortoises, beside the usual tertiary rays and sharks; there
are also remains of Xiphias and Phyllodus. The Crustacea include
some interesting Ostracods described by Ulrich. The Foraminifera,
of the usual Hocene types, are described by R. M. Bagg, who is doing
careful work on these Protozoa, in an area where they have been for
some reason much neglected. The Mollusca by Clark and Martin,
the Coelenterata by Vaughan, and the Bryozoa by Ulrich are all well
illustrated, and will be of great use for comparison. Two small
Carpolithi are described and figured by Arthur Hollick.
Notices of Memoirs. 419
IlJl.—Tue Hontertan Oration, Fepruary 14, 1901. By N. C.
Macnamara, F.R.C.S. 8vo. London, 1901.—This Oration, to which
no title is given, seems to deal with the labours of Hunter and
others on the subject of craniology and the light which it is capable
of throwing on the prehistoric inhabitants of Western Europe, and
of the evolution of the race of men to which we belong. Mr.
Macnamara points out that the inhabitants of Western Europe in
the later Tertiary and early Quaternary period, as regards the
ossification and form, especially of the frontal region, of their
skulls, more closely resembled that of the chimpanzee than the
race of men now inhabiting Europe. Our search for knowledge
is still hampered by the limited supply of the remains of man, but
a good deal of general evidence has been obtained from the stone
implements so common when properly searched for. Mr. Macnamara
believes that the evidence collected proves the existence of man in
Tertiary times. With regard to the skull of Pithecanthropus, he
concurs with the conclusion arrived at by Professor Schwalbe, that
taking both its form and capacity into consideration, ‘‘ it is on the
border line between that of man and anthropoid apes”; it is more
nearly allied to the skulls of the Neanderthal group of men than it
is to the crania of the higher apes; but it is much nearer in
anatomical characters to the skull of the chimpanzee than it is to
the cranium of the average adult European of the present day. The
fact that the inferior gyri of the frontal lobes of the brain are well
marked, and that the superficies of this convolution of the brain is
double that possessed by the largest known anthropoid ape, suggests
that the Java man had in some slight degree the faculty of speech,
and that his intellectual capacity was higher than that of any
anthropoid ape we are acquainted with.
Mr. Macnamara also points out that it should be clearly understood
that up to the present no bona fide human remains belonging to the
early Palzolitic period have been discovered in Western Europe
which are not of the same type as those of the Neanderthal group of
men, whose fore and hind limbs indicate that they were a short ape-
like and powerful race of beings whose average stature did not
exceed five feet. The skulls of men found in geological formations
of the Post-Glacial period have the same physical type as those of the
strictly early Paleolithic epoch of Western Europe, but with increased
brain capacity. These skulls, in the opinion of the author, indicate
a gradual transition in form from the ape-like characters of the
previous period to a higher standard, and certainly to a much
greater skull capacity, especially in the frontal region. Mr.
Macnamara remarks on. the fact that in the recent elections held
in this country, when the question at issue was one in which the
whole of the people of Great Britain were deeply interested, a large
proportion of the inhabitants of England and Scotland, mainly of
Anglo-Saxon origin, voted together on the subject; whereas
a contrary opinion regarding the same question was held by the
greater proportion of the people of Ireland, and to a large extent
by the Welsh, most of whom are derived from Ibero-Mongolian
420 Notices of Memoirs.
ancestors. It is difficult, he says, to account for this diversity in
the sentiments of the people, unless we consider it due to their
racial mental qualities.
The Oration is illustrated with an excellent chart of skulls
belonging to the Paleolithic, Neolithic, Bronze, and existing races
of men.
IV. — Geonocican Lirerature aDDED TO THE GEOLOGICAL
Society’s Lisrary DuRInG THE YEAR ENDED DecempBer 31, 1900.
(London, Geological Society, price 2s.)—This, the seventh annual
record of publications received by the Society, contains 12 pages of
titles of serials and academies, of which parts have been added to
the library during the past year; 109 pages of titles of papers
published in those parts and other separate publications received ;
and 80 pages of treble-entry, double-column index, analytic of the
titles recorded. The work, which is compiled by the librarian,
Mr. Rupert Jones, and edited by the Secretary, Mr. Belinfante,
deserves to be more widely known than to the Fellows themselves,
especially as it is published at so cheap a rate. It provides the best
general annual list of geological literature, the index being of
especial value, and might be made a really first-class record, if the
Society would spend a little more money upon it and include all
publications of a geological nature whether received by the Society
or not. This system of recording—an alphabetical list, properly
indexed—is far and away the most convenient form, and its handy
size can be favourably contrasted with those clumsy quartos which
are the bugbear of the ordinary man’s library.
V.—Buiminz anp Casstpuninz.—No more useful work is done
than that of monographing particular groups. Carlo Fornasini,
most active of the students of the Foraminifera, has just published
a paper on the Italian forms of these genera (Boll. Soc. Geol.
Ital., xx), which he divides into 75 species. He has also published
a paper on the Adriatic forms of the genus Bulimina (Mem. Ac. Sci.
Ist. Bologna, ix). Taking the two papers together they form
a valuable contribution to the subject, one of the most interesting
points being the publication of some of d’Orbigny’s original drawings
of the species founded by him in 1826, and which have since re-
mained difficult of absolute identification. Fornasini has put a note
in the Riv. Ital. Paleont., vii, on the dates of O. G. Costa’s works on
the Foraminifera, dates unknown to Sherborn when he published
his Bibliography in 1888.
VI.—Orner Foramintrerat Pusrications to which the attention
of the student may be profitably directed are: Brown’s list and digest
of the papers published during 1899 (Zool. Record) ; Chapman’s
Foraminifera from the Lagoon at Funafuti (J. Linn. Soc. Zool.,
XXvili), which gives us for the first time a correct account of the
distribution of these organisms across a lagoon, from side to side of
the reef; Adalbert Liebus’ Foraminiferenfauna des Bryozoenhori-
zontes von Priabona (N. Jahrb., i, 1901) ; and Silvestri’s Nodosarine
del Neogene Italiano (Atti Ac. Pont. N. Lincei, liv).
Notices of Memoirs. 421
VII.—Distrisution or VERTEBRATE ANIMALS IN INDIA, CeyLON,
AND Burmaun.—Dr. Blanford, writing in the Proc. Roy. Soc., lxvii,
considers that whilst it is quite possible that other explanations may
be found, it is evident that the peculiarities of the Indian fauna may
have been due to the Glacial epoch. During the coldest portion of
the Glacial epoch a large part of the higher mountains must have
been covered by snow and ice, and the tropical Oriental fauna which
occupied the Himalayas, and which may have resembled that of the
Indian Peninsula more than is the case at present, must have been
driven to the base of the mountains or exterminated. When the
country became warmer, the Transgangetic fauna appears to have
poured into the Himalayas from the eastward. Dr. Blanford, after
discussing the whole matter, says the theory is only put forward as
a possible explanation of some remarkable features in the distribution
of Indian vertebrates. At the same time it does not serve to account
for several anomalies of which some solution is necessary. If thus
accepted, it will add to the evidence, now considerable, in favour of
the Glacial epoch having affected the whole world, and not having
been a partial phenomenon induced by special conditions, such as
local elevation.
VIII.—Spumricat Conoretions oF Grapuite.—The spherical
concretions of graphite in the Granite of the Il/menj were first
noticed by Auerbach in 1856, and afterwards described by Rose in
1872. Messrs. Vernadsky and Schklarevsky now show (Bull. Soe.
Imp. Nat. Moscou, 1900, No. 8) that the inclusions in these con-
cretions consist of crystals of the minerals characteristic of the
Granite—orthoclase, muscovite, biotite, and quartz. The result of
their investigations also show that this form of graphite cannot have
had a pseudomorphic origin, as considered by Rose, but ought to be
considered as a concretion in a granitic magma, analogous to other
cases of large spheroidal inclusions in granite.
IX.— Gxrotoey or Scortanp.—The Geological Society of Glasgow
has recently distributed vol. xi, pt. 2, of their Transactions for
1897-99, but has dated it 1900. We had hoped that this
reprehensible practice had been discontinued in this country, and
hope that on the next occasion the Society issues publications it will
date them accurately. There is a great deal of interesting matter,
of which the following is the chief. The late Dr. Heddle’s paper
on the structure of Agates occupies twenty pages, and is well
illustrated ; it may be termed a systematic treatment of the subject.
Each form is described in detail, and the whole are grouped in
a convenient arrangement according to structure. William Gunn
gives a detailed description of the old volcanic rocks of Arran, with
notes on the sedimentary rocks associated with them, and an
account of the faunz of those beds. Robert Craig writes of the
Greenhill quarries, Kilmaurs, Ayrshire, now closed, and gives an
historical sketch of the various discoveries made in them. Peter
Macnair treats of the physical geology and paleontology of the
Giffnock sandstones, and their bearings on the origin of sandstone
422 Notices of Memoirs.
rock generally. This is illustrated. He refutes the view that they
were of fresh-water origin, and supposes that the contained organic
remains have been destroyed, with the exception of the annelid
burrows, which he points out are invariably the last things to
disappear from percolated sandstones. John Smith has a paper on
the Barite veins of south-west Scotland, which mineral he regards
as probably an exfiltration product, leached out of the rocks by
water, and afterwards re-deposited by the same agent in the veins,
but he cannot yet say which of the rocks it was originally derived
from. ‘The same writer has a note on the ‘China-clay’ mine and
the Water-of-Ayr stone bed at Troon, and gives some details of
localities for radiolarian cherts in Scotland. ‘Two other papers from
his pen are ‘“ The Permian outlier of the Snar Valley, Lanarkshire ”
and “Spango Granite,” the boulders of which latter he considers
were weathered into shape and ready for transport long before the
Glacial Epoch. The other original papers, which are all in abstract
only, are: Goodchild, the Dolerite of Aberdour; Macnair, the
problem of the marginal Highlands ; Smith, detached microliths
from the Pitchstone Sill at Corriegills (in full, with a plate) ;
Ballantyne, a Bute post - Glacial shell - bed; Cowie, Glacial
phenomena of Loch Ranza Glen, Arran; and Horne, the Silurian
Volcanic rocks of the southern uplands of Scotland.
X.—Gerotocy 1n Norrorx.—There are only two papers on
Norfolk Geology in the Transactions of the Norfolk and Norwich
Naturalists’ Society, vol. vii, pt. 2, 1901. The first, by F. D. Longe,
is on the formation of flints in chalk. The second, by Professor
Newton, records the occurrence of bones of the common Crane, from
peat, obtained so long ago as 1867-69, while excavating the
Alexandra Dock at Kings Lynn. These bones show a remarkable
variation in size of the tibiz. In the course of his examination of
the Woodwardian Museum collections for purposes of comparison,
Professor Newton found a right tarso-metatarsus of the Pelican,
which further confirms his own and Dr. C. W. Andrews’ statement
that the Pelican was once a native of the Fens in this country.
XI.—TueE Grotogicat Distrizution oF Extinct British Non-
Marine Moztvusca.—R. Bullen Newton contributes a valuable
paper on this subject to the Journal of Conchology. He shows at
a glance the geological range of every recorded species of terrestrial
and fluviatile shells, excluding only those with manuscript names, or
any forms insufficiently described, from the strata of the British
Islands. In his list, as no synonymy is attempted, he has introduced
the original generic name under which the shell was described, and
gives a bibliography of the subject. From a note appended to his
paper, we learn that this list was lent to another person for
incorporation in a recent publication, but on reference to that
publication we find that Mr. Newton’s generosity has been studiously
ignored by the author in his preface, though the list has apparently
been extensively used.
Notices of Memoirs. 423
XII.—Gerotocy or Avustro-Huncary.— Part iii of the new
geological map of the Austro-Hungarian monarchy has just
appeared. It contains two maps, those of the Oberdrauberg-
Mauthen and the Kistanje-Dernis districts, with their accompanying
descriptive pamphlets by Geyer and v. Kerner. In these pamphlets
a full bibliography precedes the descriptive text.
XJ.—Laccorirus or Montana.—Messrs. Weed and Pirsson deal
with the geology of the Shonkin Sag and Palisade Butte Laccoliths
in the Highwood Mountains of Montana in the American Journal of
Science for July, 1901. These laccoliths occur in Cretaceous beds,
and show a central mass of syenite, surrounded by transition rock,
which is in its turn surrounded by shonkinite, the whole having
a rind of leucite basalt porphyry. ‘The authors say that these three
laccoliths form a transitional group; the Shonkin Sag is the flattest,
and also the lowest, and therefore the one most protected from erosion.
Its top, in fact, is just beginning to emerge, and from its laccolitic
character would not be so evident if it were not for the trenching
in it by the former river action which has given such good cross
sections. Square Butte stands much higher and has been exposed
to much greater denudation ; its cover, save in small areas around
the base, has been stripped off, and a considerable part of the
igneous rock removed. Palisade Butte, standing at the same level
as Square Butte, has suffered from the same amount of erosive
agencies, but being smaller in size the relative effect has been
greater and the cover has entirely disappeared, as well as a large
part of the laccolith, so that around it the floor is exposed and only
the central portion of the mass remains. From their observations
the authors have been enabled to provide us with an excellent
account of these interesting structures, which they have illustrated
in a clear and exact manner.
XIV.—Birumen 1n Cusa.—S. F. Peckham shows in the same
Journal that extensive deposits of solid asphaltum exist near the
north coast of Cuba, while springs and wells give indications of the
existence of liquid bitumens of varying density beneath the surface,
over an area of some 4,500 square miles. He is, however, doubtful
if, in view of the enormous production which recent developments
in Texas and Indiana promise, that there is at present any
encouragement fer even experimental drilling in Cuba.
XV.—Gerotocy or Lonpon.—As President of the Geologists’
Association of London, Mr. Whitaker in his annual address to that
energetic body dealt with a subject which he has made peculiarly
his own. The result is a valuable summary of the papers which
have been written on London Geology (to the base of the Drift)
since 1888. No less than fifty-nine papers are summarized, and
thus rendered easily accessible to general readers. Mr. Whitaker
regrets that tendency to over-division of the beds of the Drift so
bewildering, as he says, to “simple-minded people like himself.”
He has also some pertinent remarks on gravels and their ages.
424 Correspondence—J. Adam Watson.
XVI.—Suorter Nortces.—A Geological Map and Report on
the Tarcoola District, by H. Y. L. Brown, has just reached us. It
is part of the Records of the Mines of South Australia, and deals
mainly with gold supply.
Tue Carnegie Museum at Pittsburgh, which was opened in 1895,
is described in the Popular Science Monthly for May, 1901, by
Dr. J. W. Holland, the Director. Professor Hatcher is making full
use of Mr. Carnegie’s special fund for research in paleontology, and
it is interesting to read that the most perfect specimen of Diplodocus
longus, six imperfect skeletons of Brontosaurus, and the largest
known Mastodon are in the Museum.
Mr. J. C. Manset-Pieypext has published in the Proceedings
of the Dorset Field Club for 1900 a paper on the Influence of
Climatic and Geological Changes upon the British Flora. His
annual address for 1900 dealt with the geological history of Pisces.
That for 1901, still to be published, dealt with the geological history
of the Amphibia and Reptilia.
CORRESPONDENCE.
A SUGGESTED LINK IN THE ‘BREAK’ BETWEEN PALAOLITHIC
AND NEOLITHIC MAN.
S1tr,—In the very interesting paper by Sir Henry Howorth in the
August number of your Magazine, we find that to him the great
gap between Paleolithic and Neolithic Man means a great
catastrophe. In the present attitude of geological opinion, such
a statement appears somewhat startling. But if we restrict the
meaning of the word ‘catastrophe,’ as used by Sir Henry, to the
occurrence in ancient times of climatic and physical changes of
similar nature to those taking place around us at the present day,
though of very much greater intensity, probably no geologist is now
so rigidly uniformitarian in his views as to refuse to accept it.
The facts before us are these:—During some portion of the
Pleistocene Period, probably owing to the co-operation of astro-
nomical and geographical causes, climatic and physical changes, of
an intensity which it is difficult for us to realize, were brought about.
One of the results of these changes was the distribution of the
Drift. There can be little doubt that when this took place man
had already made his appearance upon earth. Indeed, Sir Henry is
satisfied with such evidence as we possess that his existence dates
back even into the previous Pliocene Period. However that may
be, and whether we hold that earliest man was Holithic or
Paleolithic, all physical traces of him disappear, with the exception
of his imperishable flint implements and a few doubtful bones; and
when he next appears on the scene, he has undergone the very
considerable advance in development indicated by his entrance on
the Neolithic stage. Sir Henry holds that the great gap between
Paleolithic and Neolithic man is coincident and in all probability
connected with the distribution of the Drift.
Correspondence—J. Adam Watson. 425
However catastrophic in its occurrence the distribution of the
Drift may have been, it is obvious that the progress made by man
in his passage from the Paleothic to the Neolithic stage was not
characterized by that suddenness which is ordinarily associated with
the term. Of the history of that progress, of the place of man’s
abode during it, we know nothing. ‘There is a true ‘gap’ or ‘break.’
In geology and archeology these two words simply imply that
our knowledge as to the periods of time concerned is imperfect, and
we always expect to find certain of the missing links of the chain
of evidence come to light, which they sometimes do in unexpected
places.
Is there any link to be found, however remote, to help to bridge
over that extraordinary gap between Paleolithic man and his
Neolithic successors? I believe there is one, and that it is to be
found in the almost universal tradition of a ‘deluge’—a tradition
which appears to me to have been handed down from our Paleolithic
ancestors through the Neolithic, Bronze, and Iron ages of their
successors, and to have reached us as a dim and misty conception of
their ideas of the—let us call it very bad weather—of the Pleistocene
Period. That the story as conveyed to us from Asiatic sources is
very different from that written on the page of the rocks in Northern
Europe, is not surprising. All tradition undergoes a process of
corruption as it is handed down from age to age, and the particular
form in which the deluge tradition has reached us is obviously no
exception to the rule. Unfortunately, when such a theory is
advanced, it is usually seized upon as a confirmation of the
miraculous inspiration of Scripture. It is no such thing.
I cannot claim originality for the theory, because I find in
Mr. Tiddeman’s “Work and Problems of the Victoria Cave Ex-
ploration,” 1875, the following passage :—“ As similar evidences of
a submergence late in the glacial period have been observed over
large areas in the Old and the New World, and in both hemispheres,
in mean latitudes, it may be that the traditions so common to many
races and religions of a great deluge are but lingering memories of
this great event. It matters not that these myths all differ in their
surroundings. The central core still has the solid ring of truth,
albeit masked and disfigured by the rust of time.”
I venture to suggest that the theory that the deluge tradition
is the one and only link which bridges over the gap between
Paleolithic man and ourselves, his descendants, is one which is
worthy of more attention than it has hitherto received.
J. Apam Watson.
‘“s Hay Tor,’’ Denntneton Park Roap, Hampsteap.
August 18, 1901.
EOLITHIC MAN.
Srr,—It is remarkable that in a quasi-geological paper by a well-
known writer should have been allowed to pass current such
a statement as that at p. 340 (Geor. Maa., August issue), to the
effect that “Huxley caused McEnery’s now famous memoir to be
426 Correspondence—T. Rupert Jones.
locked up at the Royal Society for years after his death.” The
Rev. McHEnery’s reports on Kents Cavern were finished about 1826,
and Professor Huxley having been born in 1825 must have been
always under age and without influence in the Royal Society whilst
McEnery’s paper was supposed to be ‘lost,’ but really kept
in the background by influence of the Rev. Dean Buckland, who
ascribed the occurrence of anything like human implements to
burials of late date, as I myself have heard him affirm at a meeting
of the Geological Society.
The reference to Professor Huxley in the paper alluded to above
is probably only one of the evidences of the hasty character of
the paper; but at first sight it appears, not only uncalled for, but
unkind.
Some of his friends, like the writer of this critique, will regret
Sir H. Howorth’s inability to recognize the actual classification of
eoliths as practically established by Prestwich, and illustrated in
his own and B. Harrison’s collections, as well as in the Museum
of the Geological Survey, Royal College of Science, the British
Museum (Natural History Branch), and elsewhere. Also, it is
lamentable that he cannot appreciate Prestwich’s lucid explanation
of the geological history and settlement of the eolithic gravel of the
Chalk Downs, as reproduced in Mr. Bullen’s pamphlet, to which he
alludes as having read.
To other shortcomings we need not refer; it is a pity that there
should be any, for the author is doubtless an industrious gatherer
of facts and notions, evidently so when he seems to have searched
one set of about twenty volumes, “1829-50” (!), for the history of
Ami Boué’s discovery of bones near the Lahr (p. 339).
T. Rupert Jones.
EOLITHIC IMPLEMENTS.
Srr,—Sir H. H. Howorth, F.R.S., has done me the honour of
mentioning in the GxoLnocicaL Magazine for August my little
paper on the above subject.
Like Balaam, having set himself to curse Israel, he has instead
blessed them altogether. On p. 342 he says (assuming their identity
with paleoliths), ‘Such remains are claimed to have been found
at that horizon [the Forest Bed] in Norfolk by Mr. Abbott and
Mr. Savin, in Dorsetshire by Dr. Blackmore, and they have been
also reported from the same horizon at St. Prest in France and
in the Val d’Arno, north of Italy, in each case the remains of
human workmanship being accompanied by those of EH. meridionalis.
I believe these finds are quite genuine.” (Italics mine.) The im-
plements referred to as Dr. Blackmore’s, pl. iii in my paper, have,
as a matter of fact, an eolithic facies, and Sir H. H. Howorth’s
admission concedes all that for which Sir Joseph Prestwich’s followers
contend. “I thank thee, Roderick, for that word !”
Sir Henry mentions five men as upholding eoliths, including their
original discoverer, Mr. Benjamin Harrison, and that paladin of
Correspondence—R. Ashington Bullen. 427
geologists, Sir Joseph Prestwich, who first employed his vast
geological learning in their defence; but the list may be largely
extended, especially among the rising generation of geologists and
anthropologists, not omitting, of course, Professor Rupert Jones and
the late acute and careful observer Dr. H. Hicks.
Let the following extract from M. A. Rutot’s letter serve as
a sample of the encouraging letters received since my paper has
been issued. He says: “ En Belgique, il n’y a pas beaucoup a com-
battre pour faire admettre les eolithes comme industrie humaine.
Depuis plus de 15 ans, nous sommes habitués & Vindustrie Me-
svinienne, et la connaissance de cette industrie nous a facilité la
comprehension des industries plus primitives, eutel-mesvinienne
et Reutelienne, et aussi celle des eolithes d’Angleterre et des silex
tertiaires. . . . . Dans la question des eolithes vous pouvez
étre certain d’étre vigoureusement soutenu en Belgique.”
[‘*In Belguim, there is not much opposition to overcome in causing eoliths to be
accepted as of human workmanship. For more than 145 years we have been used
to the work of the Mesvinian period []’iudustrie Mesvinienne], and our acquaintance
_with this has rendered easier the understanding of more primitive types of work-
manship, e.g., Reutel-mesvinian and Reutelian, as well as that ot the English
eoliths and of flints of the Tertiary period [des silex tertiares] :
With regard to the question of the eoliths you can be sure of 1 vigorous support in
Belgium. 2
The time is approaching when there will be few or no sceptics
on the authenticity of eoliths, and I thank Sir Henry for having,
though unconsciously, ranged himself on their side. By the way,
“W. J. Lewis,” Grot. Mac., p. 342, must be a slip for W. J.
Lewis Abbott, F.G.S. The late ardent collector of palzoliths was
Henry Lewis. R. Asnineton Buen.
‘‘THE EARLIEST TRACES OF MAN.”
Sir,—In this article the author (Sir Henry Howorth, K.C.1.E.,
F.R.S., F.G.S.) taxes the upholders of EHolithic man with an
insistence on their views both ‘‘in season and out of season.”
This charge comes rather strangely from the author of the “ Glacial
Nightmare,” etc., and one is at a loss to see either the force or
even the meaning of it. All true workers in any science should
gladly welcome from others any fresh views, even if they do
conflict with previously accepted ones; and had these tended to
strengthen those of Sir Henry, they no doubt would have been
eagerly accepted by him, and would always have been in season
even if forced.
Sir Henry admits to an obstinacy which he says has been stiffened
and his scepticism increased by those so-called Holiths. Now we
all welcome honest scepticism, but surely obstinacy is out of place,
or should be, in the truly scientific mind. Obstinacy, too, is
generally the outcome of prejudice, and this seems to be the case
in this Holithic question.
He speaks as if the uses of all the Paleolithic implements were
well known—we can only guess at most of them—and expects to find
in the Eoliths forms parallel with them, and hence by inference
428 Correspondence—F. D. Bennett—A. R. Hunt.
a race of men of similar habits and modes of life, and because
such is not the case dismisses them with a sarcasm. All hairy
animals do scratch a great deal, and even Job scraped himself, and
so we may infer that scraping with a kind of ‘scraper’ was
common in his by no means very early period. He expects man
to have sprung at one bound over the vast period that separates
him from the mere animal to that of the comparatively highly
specialized being he was in the Paleolithic period. He thus ignores
the fact that the rudest existing savage, who lives mostly on roots,
and so needs very few tools of any kind, was far surpassed by
Paleolithic man, the hunter of the Mammoth, etc.
In reference to the implements from the Forest Bed we regard
them as Koliths, and even Sir John Evans would hardly class them
as Paleoliths. Also Holiths do occur with the Paleoliths both on
the plateau and in the valley gravels. Again, as to M. Boucher
de Perthes, an exact parallelism exists between his case and that
of Mr. Harrison, and one has only to substitute the one name
for the other in Sir Henry’s account; yet Sir Henry evidently
cannot see the identity of position; one wonders much if he
would have been on the side of M. Boucher de Perthes. We
maintain, too, that Mr. Harrison’s case is the stronger, as he has
had all the past experience of others to aid him, coupled with the
extensive knowledge he has gained since. Sir Henry speaks of
thousands of shapeless stones with no classification; let him call
and see Mr. Harrison’s collection with an open mind. Is it likely
that the men who find and bring these stones to those who collect
them—and they do not bring them by cartloads—could do so unless
they perceived that these objects had a distinctive type of their own.
But I must now leave Sir Henry to those whom he has directly
attacked by name; they will no doubt answer him in greater detail
and more conclusively. F. D. Brnyert.
West Malling.
THE LATE REV. J. McENERY.
Str,—Referring to Sir Henry Howorth’s suggestion that Professor
Huxley was instrumental in suppressing McEnery’s Kents Cavern
evidence,’ it is important to bear in mind that McEnery died in
1841, when Huxley was 16 years of age; that McHEnery’s
MSS. were left in an incomplete state; that they are in the
possession of the Torquay Natural History Society ; and that they
were never in the custody of the Royal Society. The suppression
of the Kents Cavern and Brixham Cave evidence is a very long
story, and one long subsequent to McHnery’s death. The late
Edward Vivian, in 1859, in his “Cavern Researches” published
the pith of McEHnery’s investigations, and subsequently Pengelly
published McHnery’s MSS. in their entirety, so far as they have
been preserved, verbatim et literatim. A. R. Hunt.
Southwood, Torquay.
August 10, 1901.
1 Grou. Mac., August, 1901, p. 340.
Obituary—Baron Nils Adolf Erik Nordenskiold. 429
RECENT DENUDATION IN NANT FFRANCON.
Str,—When examining the scene of the flood described in this
Magazine last February I could not satisfy myself as to whether
any channels had previously existed at the same place. My friend
Mr. Dakyns informed me, however, that destruction of culverts is
mentioned in a description of the damage done to the road. It is
clear, therefore, that former channels did exist, and that the whole
of the excavation cannot be ascribed to the flood of last August.
I think, though, that the old channels must have been small, for if
deposition be a measure of denudation, the recent excavating work
done must have been very great.
I should like to take this opportunity to again suggest how
valuable some regular record would be of denudation observed at the
present time. Epwarp GREENLEY.
@ 3 OA rea
————
BARON NILS ADOLF ERIK NORDENSKIOLD,
Pu.D., For. Meme. Grou. Soo. Lonp., Naruratisr anp ARcTIC
EXPLoRER.
Born Novemper 18, 1832. Diep Aveust 13, 1901.
Wirt deep regret, we have to record the sudden death near
Stockholm of Professor Baron Nordenskidld, the eminent Naturalist
and Arctic Explorer. Of a Swedish family long settled in Finland,
Nordenskiéld was born in Helsingfors, the capital of that country,
his father, Dr. Nils Gustaf Nordenskidld, the eminent mineralogist,
who died in 1866,' being at that time Director of Mines for Finland.
Naturally, therefore, his ardent sympathies were always enlisted in
favour of the land of his birth.
His family had long been eminent in science, and his inherent
tastes were fostered and developed by the surroundings of his home
at Frugard, which contained extensive collections of minerals and
natural history specimens, and by his journeys with his father. On
entering the University of Helsingfors in 1849 he devoted himself
almost entirely to scientific studies, spending his vacations in
excursions to the rich mineral localities of Finland. In 1855 he
took his degree as licentiate, and was immediately appointed a mining
official of the Government. From this post, however, he was
dismissed in the same year for having indulged in pleasantries at
the expense of the Russian Government at a private students’ feast.
A temporary absence being deemed advisable, he continued his
studies at Berlin, but in 1857 returned to take his doctor’s degree at
Helsingfors. As ill-luck would have it, however, a deputation from
the Swedish Universities was then entertained at Helsingfors, and the
young doctor in an after-dinner speech again showed his sympathies
1 See Gror. Maa., 1866, Vol. III, p. 288.
430 Obituary—Baron Nils Adolf Erik Nordenskiold.
too plainly. The affair might have been smoothed over, but
Nordenskidéld refused to apologise, and was banished the country.
As may be supposed, the viking philosopher was received with
open arms by the Swedes, and after little more than a year was
appointed Professor and Keeper of the Mineralogical collections at the
Vetenskaps-Akademi in succession to Mosander. Earlier in the same
year (1858) he had entered on his Arctic travels by accompanying
Torell to Spitzbergen, and in 1861 the two geologists undertook
a more complete exploration of the island. Three years later
Nordenskiold headed an expedition, which mapped the southern
part of Spitzbergen, and started the great work of measuring an
arc of the meridian in those regions. The explorers met with some
shipwrecked walrus hunters, however, and were obliged to return,
their provisions being inadequate to maintain so large an addition
to the party. Nordenskiold now had higher ambitions, but money
was lacking, and turning for help to the rich merchants of Gothenburg
he initiated the long alliance with Oskar Dickson, productive of so
much good to Arctic exploration. The steamer Sofia, which carried
the winter post to Gotland, was obtained, and in 1868 Nordenskiold,
with the present cabinet minister, Baron F. W. von Otter, as
navigating officer, managed to attain the high latitude of 81 deg.
42 min.—a latitude previously exceeded only by Parry, who in
1827, going with sledges from the Hecla in the same direction,
reached 82° 45’N. Subsequently this attainment has been surpassed
more than once, as by Charles Hall, who in 1871 reached 82° 16’,
Payer in 1874 (82° 5’), A. Markham in 1875-6 (88° 20’), Lockwood
of the Greely Expedition in 1884 (83° 24’), while the exploits of
Nansen (86° 14’) and the Duke of Abruzzi, 22 miles further north,
will be fresh in the memory of our readers.
In 1870 Nordenskidld set out on a short visit to Greenland to
ascertain if possible whether Esquimaux dogs would be suitable
for sledge-journeys to the pole. During his stay in Greenland he
made an expedition into the interior over the inland ice-sheet and
examined the Tertiary plant deposits at Atanekerdluk, where he
discovered erect bituminized tree-trunks of Tertiary age in siti,
proving that they had grown upon the spot (some were 2 feet in
diameter), associated with beds of lignite and layers of dicotyle-
donous leaves. He also made important observations upon the
inland ice-sheet and the glaciers on the coast, and discovered the
great blocks of so-called meteoric iron at Ovifak, the largest of
which weighed about 19 tons, the next 8 tons, and the third 6 tons.
(See Prof. Nordenskiéld’s account of his voyage, Guo. Maa., 1872,
Vol. IX, pp. 289, 355, 409, 449, 516, and 88.) These masses are
now shown to be of telluric origin and to have been ejected
probably in Miocene Tertiary times, with the deep-seated basaltic
flows through which metallic iron, of a similar character, is found
to be disseminated. His belief in their cosmic origin, however, was
fortunate in so far as it led Nordenskidld to the further study of
meteorites, while his observations on the surface of the Arctic
ice-fields led to the well-known speculations on the falling of
cosmic dust.
Obituary—Baron Nils Adolf Erik Nordenskiold. 431
Nordenskiéld felt convinced that he could reach a much higher
latitude by wintering in Spitzbergen and_ utilizing sledges.
Accordingly he sailed thither in 1872 in the Polhem, accompanied
by two tenders. Unfavourable conditions of the ice rendered the
geographical results less important than he hoped; but he discovered
fossil plants of great importance to the history of climatology during
former geological epochs. Moreover, with Lieutenant Palander,
now the Swedish Minister of Marine, he successfully surveyed part
of North-East Land, and in the following July the vessels were
extricated from their winter quarters at Mossel Bay, on the north
coast of Spitzbergen, and returned home richly laden with important
scientific collections.
Nordenskiéld now turned his attention to the exploration of
Siberian waters, and in 1875, following the pioneers Carlsen (1869)
and Wiggins (1874), he sailed through the Kara Sea to the Yenissei,
and ascended the river in a small boat, returning home overland.
In the following year, after a flying visit to the Philadelphia
Exhibition, he introduced merchandise by sea to Siberia, returning
in the autumn with his steamer by way of the Kara Sea and
Matotschkim Sound. These experiences gave Nordenskisld a
reasonable hope of accomplishing the North-East Passage, and
the King of Sweden, Mr. Oskar Dickson, and Mr. Sibiriakoff at
once lent their aid to the project.
In July, 1878, Nordenskidld, with Palander as navigator, started
in the Vega, accompanied by two smaller ships. She was the first
vessel to double the most northern point of the Old World—Cape
Tchelyuskin. She wintered near Behring’s Straits, and once more
free in July, 1879, reached Japan on September 2. After a triumphal
passage home around Asia and Europe, Nordenskidld was enthu-
siastically welcomed at Stockholm on April 24, 1880, and laden
with honours, being created Baron and appointed a Commander of
the “ Nordstjerne Orden” (Order of the North Star). In 1883
Nordenskiodld made his second voyage to Greenland, where he
investigated the inland ice, and succeeded in penetrating with a ship
through the dangerous ice-barrier along the east coast of that country
south of the Polar circle, a feat in vain attempted during three
hundred years by different Arctic expeditions.
Thus, at the age of 51, he brought to a close a career of
exploration comparable in the magnitude of its results with that
of a Vasco di Gama or a Maghelhaéns. But his intellectual activity
was by no means ended. His own explorations furnished material
for numerous books and memoirs, such as the account of his first
visit to Greenland in 1870 (see Grou. Maa., loc. cit.), “The
Voyage of the Vega round Asia” (1881), and the ‘Second Swedish
Expedition to Greenland” (1885). His professional work as Keeper
of the Mineralogical Division of the State Museum in Stockholm
led him to contribute many valuable papers to the publications of
the Academy of Science and various technical journals, as those in
which he described the new minerals Crookesite, Laxmannite,
Thaumasite, and Cleveite. Combined with his love of active
432 Obituary—Baron Nils Adolf Erik Nordenskiold.
exploration was a deep interest in the history of past geographical
discovery and the development of cartography, This gave rise to
the preparation of his great “ Facsimile Atlas to the Early History
of Cartography” (1889), translated by Ekel6éf and Sir Clements.
Markham, and to the equally large complementary work, illustrated
with numerous facsimile reproductions of ancient manuscript maps
and portolani, and issued in 1897 under the title “ Periplus: an
essay on the early history of Charts and sailing directions,” the
English translation being by F. A. Bather. Nordenskidld, indeed,
was half a bookworm, and thus it is that when the Vega reached
Japan, he employed his stay there in buying up every book and
manuscript he could lay hands on, thus forming the finest collection
of Japanese books in Hurope. A catalogue of it, by Professor
Léon de Rosny, was published at Paris in 1883.
A feature of Nordenskidld’s work, even in its most active
manifestations, was always the underlying philosophy, sometimes
appearing to the public very remote and speculative, sometimes
fantastical if not absolutely erroneous, but leading as a rule to
success and to results of practical value. Thus his views on the
origin of cracks in igneous rock, originally sketched out thirty-three
years ago in a paper on the geology of Spitzbergen, led ultimately
to numerous deep borings for water in the gneiss and granite of
Sweden and Finland; some account of these was published in.
Natural Science for September, 1895. Nordenskiold also busied
himself with a project for an expedition to the Antarctic, which,
however, came to nothing at the time. It is interesting, however,
to note that his nephew Otto Nordenskiold has been appointed to
take command of the Swedish Antarctic expedition.
At various periods from 1869 onwards Nordenskiold added to
his other duties those of politician, sitting in the Swedish Parliament,.
first as Liberal member for Stockholm, and subsequently in the
Upper House. It is not long since he took part in the deputation
that journeyed in vain to St. Petersburg to lay before the Tsar
a petition on behalf of the Finnish nation.
Baron Nordenskiold leaves a widow, a married daughter, and
a son, whose mourning is shared by the whole Swedish nation, and
by people of culture throughout the world. The son, Hrland, is now
on an exploring expedition in Patagonia; his elder brother, Gustaf
Hrik Adolf, died in 1895, at the age of 27, thus cutting short
a career that promised to be one of excellence both as geologist
and archeologist.—F. A. B.
Errata.—Mr. J. P. Johnson asks us to make the following
corrections in his article ‘‘Some Sections in the Cretaceous Rocks
around Glynde,” which appeared in the June number: p. 249,
last line of text, and p. 250, line 11 from bottom, for Cuvieri read
Brongniarti.—In Mr. F. R. Cowper Reed’s article, August number,
page 358, for Pleurotomaria reniformis, Salter, read Pleurotomaria
uniformis, Salter.
THE
GHOLOGICAL MAGAZINE.
NEW SERIESU7 (DECADE IV." VOL. VINK
No. X—OCTOBER, 1901.
OBRELGENAL AR TrLChaesS-
—S—s
J.—On some CARBoNIFEROUS SHALE FROM SIBERIA.
By Professor T. Rupert Jonzs, F.R.S., F.G.S., etc.
(PLATE XVI.)
Introduction.
N December last M. J. Tolmatschow, Conservator of Geology in
the Museum of the Imperial Academy of Sciences in St. Peters-
burg, sent for my examination a quantity of two fossiliferous shales
from the (Upper?) Coal- measures in the Basin of Kousnetzk,
thinking that specimens of Estheria might be found in them.
Both the shales came from sections on the Upper Ters River,
a right affluent of the Tan River. From one locality (on the
Toostooérr River) most of the shale, like that from the other locality
(Boogtasch Mountain), is very flaky and friable; but some beds of
the former constitute a hard and thick Posidonomya-shale.
Both shales are dark in colour, here and there somewhat bitu-
minous, and accompanied by a film of coal in one specimen. The
surfaces of the shale bear crowds of flattened valves of Anthracomye
and Posidonomye, often much distorted by pressure, rarely keeping
the shell, and usually presenting only a black shiny film.
Description of Specimens. (Plate XVI.)
No. I (Figs. 1-4).—This is a right valve, flattened and lengthened
by pressure ; obliquely ovate, nearly straight above, elliptically
rounded below; higher behind than in front; extremities rounded ;
the posterior more produced than the anterior end, at an angle of
25°-30° with the superior border (hinge-line). Concentric lines
thin and numerous.
These features seem to agree with some of Dr. W. Hind’s figures
of Anthracomya minima (Ludwig), as published in his Mon. Pal.
Soc., 1895, pt. ii, p. 116, pl. xvi, figs. 21, 22, 24-30. Fig. 23 is
referred (perhaps wrongly) to a variety of A. levis, Dawson, but has
much of the appearance of 4. minima.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. X. 28
434 Prof. T. Rupert Jones—Carboniferous Shale from Siberia.
Posidonomya membranacea, McCoy (Synop. Carb. Foss., p. 78,
pl. xiii, fig. 14), is an elongate form with delicate concentric lines;
but it is larger, and differs in shape from Fig. 1; it also has some
longitudinal lines crossing the others. P. lateralis, Sowerby &
Phillips, is also one of the obliquely elongate species, but it is much
larger, and it has coarse concentric wrinkles.
No. II (Figs. 6 and 7).—This right valve is evidently allied to
the foregoing, but has proportionately less length, a fuller convexity
of the postero-inferior margin, and a greater obliquity, at an angle
of 40° with the hinge-line. This may probably belong to Anthra-
comya levis, Dawson.
No. III (Fig. 5).—This is a left valve, having features similar to
those of Figs. 6 and 7, but much more pronounced. The obliquity
is 65° instead of 40°. The hinge-line is short, and the postero-
inferior margin is elongate - elliptical, The concentric lines are
not so neat. This is possibly a variety of A. levis, modified by
pressure.
No. IV (Figs. 16, 17).—This left valve has a much more truly
rounded inferior margin than that of Fig. 5, and approximates
to a semicircle; its obliquity to the hinge-margin is greater (75°).
It may be compared with some of the figures of Anthracomya
Valenciensis, R. Ktheridge, jun., given by Dr. W. Hind (Mon. Pal.
Soc., 1895, p. 113, pl. xvi, figs. 44-48).
No. V.—Figs. 8-15 are subovate Posidonomye (P. subovata), having
the umbo either more or less excentric or just in the middle of the
hinge-line. They have a nearly semicircular inferior margin, and
numerous concentric lines, ridgelets, or rugule. Fig. 10 has the
umbo near the middle of the upper margin ; and is very similar in
shape to Posidonomya punctaiella, Jones, from a Lower Carboniferous
shale in Western Scotland. It measures 8mm. transversely, by
6mm. in height. Many larger valves, found in the same shales,
having a similar shape, but with fewer and stronger concentric
ridges, have been regarded as adult individuals, measuring 32 x 22,
30 x 18, 29 x 22, 28 x 20, 20 x 11, as I was informed by my old
friend the late Dr. J. Young, of Glasgow, who sent me many
sketches of them, with strong concentric ridges and nearly semi-
circular valves. These shales, especially at Dalry in Ayrshire and
Thornliebank near Glasgow, bear crowds of Posidonomye, con-
centrically ribbed, oblong-ovate in shape, mostly equilateral, with
more or less median umbo and semicircular inferior margin. Among
them, at Linn Spout,’ Dalry, and at Arden quarry, Thornliebank,
occurred the P. punctatella, Jones,” once regarded as an /stheria
(1869), but afterwards proved to be a Posidonomya (1890), and it is
1 For a section of the Upper Linn limestone and Posidonomya bed of the Lower
Carboniferous Series at Linn Spout, see the Mon. Brit. Pal. Phyll., Paleont.
Soc., 1899, pt. iv, p. 208.
2 Trans. Geol. Soc. Glasgow, 1867, vol. ii, p. 71, pl. i, fig. 5; 1890, vol. ix,
pp. 85-87, pl. v, fig. 7.
\
Prof. T. Rupert Jones—Carboniferous Shale from Siberia. 435
well-matched in shape by our Fig. 10; but the latter is destitute
of the punctate ornament, and the former may be the young form
of a different species (P. subovata, nov.).
The shell-structure in our specimens is not pitted nor clearly
prismatic, but is full of delicate lines of fissure, parallel with the
thick, radiating breakages, corrugations, or pressure-folds; and
causing the shell to come away in subquadrangular pieces, which
are variously modified by decomposition before they are quite
removed from the internal cast. The straightness of the micro-
scopic fissures, and the regular edges of the separated pieces of
the shell, may be due to the presence of a crystalline or quasi-
prismatic structure not otherwise indicated.
In Figs. 8-15, as also in Figs. 5-7, the vertical markings crossing
the concentric lines and riblets are due to pressure reducing the
convexity of the original shell.
P. corrugata, R. Etheridge, jun. (Gon. Mae., 1894, p. 304,
PL XIU, Figs. 4-6), occurring in the same shale at Linn Spout,}
has a distant relationship with P. punctatella and subovata. Its
concentric lines, however, are crossed by rough crumplings; and
in its shape it differs from the other. Its variable and coarse
radial lines are evidently regarded by the author as congenital,
like the vertical ribs in P. costata, McCoy (Synop. Carb. Foss., p. 78,
pl. xiii, fig. 15), and, if the figures which he gives are of the
natural size, P. corrugata is much larger than Figs. 8-15.
No. VI. Fig. 18 (Postdonomya concinna, nov.).—This is part of
a larger Posidonomya, with numerous, distinct, narrow, concentric
ridges, with smaller parallel lines between. There are more perfect
specimens of this rotundo-ovate form in the collection, measuring
18 mm. vertically and 20 mm. transversely.
This is characteristically abundant in some of the more solid shale
at the Toostooérr River, accompanied by small Posidonomye and
numerous obscure organic fragments.
No. VII (Beyrichia Kirkbyana, nov.).—Scattered throughout the
shales, especially those from the Boogtasch Mountain, are numerous
specimens of a small Beyrichia, about 1 mm. long.
It is characterized by the two moieties of the valve being always
swollen, and separated by a dorso-medial sulcus, within and on one
side of which is a little tubercle; and the whole surface is neatly
reticulate.
This little Entomostracon is related to other Carboniferous
Beyrichig, such as B. impressa (McCoy) and 2B. cratigera (G. S.
Brady).
I propose to dedicate it to my lately deceased friend and fellow-
worker James Walker Kirkby, for whose work among the minute
fossils of the Carboniferous and Permian Series geologists owe great
thanks.
1 Catal. West. Scot. Fossils, 1876, p. 52.
436 Dr. C. W. Andrews—Extinct Egyptian Vertebrates.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI.
Fic. 1.—Anthracomya minima (Ludwig), Hind. Right valve. Natural size,
10 by 5mm.—Fig. 2, magnified.
», 8.—A. minima (Ludwig), Hind. Rightvalve. Natural size, 13 by 8 mm.—
Fig. 4, magnified.
», 5.—A. levis, Dawson. Variety. Left valve, magnified. Natural size,
8 by 6mm.
» 6.—A. levis, Dawson. Right valve. Natural size,7 by 5mm.—Fig. 7,
magnified.
», 8.—Posidonomya subovata, sp. nov. Left valve. Natural size, 7 by 5mm.—
Fig. 9, magnified.
», 10.—P. subovata, nov. Right valve, magnified. Natural size, 8 by 6 mm.
», 11.—P. subovata, nov. Left valve. Natural size, 44 by 3mm.—Fig. 12,
magnified.
», 18.—P. subovata, nov. Left valve. Natural size (of Fig. 15), 6 by 44 mm.
», 14.—P. subovata, nov. Left valve, showing the interior; magnified. Natural
size, 8 by 6mm. This is not the magnified view of Fig. 13.
», 15.—P. subovata, nov. Magnified view of Fig. 13.
5, 16.—Anthracomya Valenciensis, Etheridge. Left valve. Natural size,
7 by 7mm.—Fig. 17, magnified.
5, 18.—Posidonomya concinna, nov. Fragment. Size of the original shell,
20 by 18 mm.
The enlarged Figures are magnified about three times.
I].—Pretiminary Note on some Recentty DiscovereD Hxtinct
VERTEBRATES FROM Heypr. (Parr II.)
By Cuas. W. Anprews, D.Sc., F.G.S., British Museum (Nat. Hist.).
Mammatta (continued).
Kotherium egyptiacum, Owen.
N the lower beds remains of a Sirenian are very common, and
several more or less complete skulls associated with some portions
of the skeleton were found. The skull in most respects resembles
that of Halitherium. The snout is strongly deflected and bears
_ a pair of downwardly directed incisor tusks. There are about seven
cheek-teeth, resembling in pattern those of Halitherium. The roof
of the skull between the temporal fossz is flat. A cast of the brain-
case has been made, and in most respects it resembles that described
by Owen’ as the type of Hotherium egyptiacum, from the Mokattam
of Cairo. Since this seems to have come from nearly the same
horizon as our specimens, I believe that there is the highest
probability that they are referable to this same species, in spite of
some differences between the shape of the natural cast described by
Owen and that artificially made from one of our specimens.
The mandible has a sharply deflected symphysis, which is much
thickened below, and it appears that teeth occurred along nearly
its whole length. The vertebra, scapula, and os innominatum are
almost exactly as in Halitherium. It is, in fact, very remarkable
that in a form so old as this (possibly Mid-Hocene, see below)
there is no trace of a more generalized structure than in the later
Halitherium, and we are apparently no nearer the primitive mam-
malian stock from which the Sirenians sprang.
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxxi (1875), p. 100.
Geol Mag 1901. Decade IVVoLVIIEPL XVI.
GMWoodward del. etlith. West,Newmanimp.
Siberian Anthracomye &c.
Dr. OC. W. Andrews—Extinct Egyptian Vertebrates. 437
Zeuglodon Osiris, Dames.’
Zeuglodon remains are not uncommon, and we obtained many
vertebra, a fine mandible, and a large part of two skulls, from one
of which it will be possible to get a cast of the brain-case. There
are two forms, a large and a small, as described by Dames. The
smaller is certainly the Zeuglodon Osiris of that author, who con-
siders that the differences between the larger and smaller species
are merely sexual. Of this there seems to be much doubt, but
for the present, until further information is available, it will be
convenient to accept this view.
REprTILIA.
The reptilian remains collected were very numerous and include
some forms of great interest. In many cases the bones were in
a wonderfully perfect state of preservation and had been almost
completely freed from the matrix. Some of the more important
new forms only will be noticed here; these include two species of
snakes, three Chelonians, and a Crocodilian.
Fic. 1.—Vertebre of Gigantophis. Two-thirds naturalsize. (A) Three articulated
vertebre from above; (B) vertebra from front; (C) vertebra from side.
a.z. anterior zygapophysis ; hyp. hypapophysis; .s. neural spine ;
p.z. posterior zygapophysis ; 7. articular facet for rib ; zyg. zygosphene.
Ophidia.
The fossil remains of snakes are, as a rule, very rare, but in the
lower beds in which our collections were made Ophidian vertebra
1 Palaeont. Abhand., neue Folge, Bd. i (1894), p. 189.
438 Dr. C. W. Andrews—Extinct Egyptian Vertebrates.
were very common. They belong to two types, one an extremely
large Python-like form, and the other a smaller, though still large
snake, the chief characteristic of which is the great height of the
neural spines. These two types are briefly described below.
Gigantophis Garstini, gen. et sp. nov. (Fig. 1.)
The large vertebre of this species occur very commonly in the
lower beds associated with remains of Meritherium, Zeuglodonts,
and Sirenians. In one case a series of about twenty vertebree
were found in their natural relations to one another and beautifully
weathered out of the matrix by the action of sand-drift (Fig. 1a).
The form of these vertebree (Fig. 1) approaches most nearly
to that seen in Python, to which genus it seems probable that this
species was nearly related. The articular region of a mandible
lends support to this view.
In the vertebra the anterior cup of the centrum is transversely
oval, and the corresponding posterior convexity is similar in shape
and looks somewhat upwards. The neural spine (n.s.) is short and
stout, and has a flat truncated extremity; the neural canal is
relatively much smaller than in the recent type, but has the same
somewhat trilobate form. The articular surfaces of the anterior
zygapophyses (a.z.) are slightly above the level of the floor of the
neural canal. The form of the zygosphene (zyg.) and zygantrum are
as in Python. The transverse processes form massive protuberances,
bearing on their outer ends articular surfaces (r.) for the ribs, and are
of similar form to those seen in Python. The hypapophysis (hyp.)
in most of the vertebra is small, and consists mainly of a small
tuberosity near the hinder end of the centrum.
These vertebra are all of large size, much larger than in any
existing Ophidian. If the proportions of this snake were the same
a A the existing Python sebe it probably reached a length of about
eet.
-The dimensions of one of these vertebrae are as follows :—
mm.
Greatest height (from top of neural spine to end of hypapophysis) ... 57°5
Greatest width (between the ends of the transverse processes) . 63
Width of zygosphene ... as 600 San 369 es ona 2g)
Width of articular cup of centrum... us ia ae Bho 23
Height of articular cup of centrum... Oss BS abe snay
Width of articular ball of centrum... ie wee ap .. 23
Extreme length of centrum... Ses 300 one aie ean 4.0
Width of neural canal ... ae as we sive (approx.) 12
To this form the generic name Gigantophis, referring to its large
size, may be given, the specific name being Gigantophis Garstini,
in honour of Sir William Garstin, K.C.M.G., the Under Secretary
of State for Public Works in Egypt.
Meeriophis Schweinfurthi, gen. et sp. nov. (Fig. 2.)
| Perhaps the commonest fossils in the lower beds are the vertebrae
of a large snake, which in the main points agree with those upon
which Owen founded the genus Palzophis. Owen’s specimens are
Dr. C. W. Andrews—Extinct Egyptian Vertebrates. 489
from the Eocene (Lower and Middle) of Sheppey and Bracklesham,
and it is very interesting to find a similar form occurring in the
Lower Tertiary deposits of Egypt. Some shells which occur asso-
ciated with these remains have lately been described by Cossmann
from almost the same locality; they are referred by him to the
Middle Eocene (Nummulitic), so probably it may turn out that
the beds in which Meritherium, Bradytherium, and the reptiles
described in this paper are found, are somewhat older than stated
in Part I, and are in fact Middle Eocene. This question will no
doubt be settled by Mr. Beadnell in the section relating to the
stratigraphy of the district.
Fic. 2.—Vertebra of Meriophis. Two-thirds natural size. (A) From side;
(B) from front. .z. anterior zygapophysis ; hyp. hypapophysis ; ”. process
on back of neural arch; x.s. neural spine; y.z. posterior zygapophysis ;
ry. facet for rib; zyg.s. zygosphene.
The chief characteristic of these vertebra is the great height of
the neural spine (Fig. 2, n.s.), and with this seems to be correlated
the relative narrowness of the centrum in proportion to its length
and the ventral and downwardly directed position of the transverse
processes (r.). All these characters occur to a less degree in
Palgophis. Another point of similarity is the presence on either
side of the posterior part of the neural arch of a large backwardly
and upwardly projecting process (Fig. 2, n.), from the tip of which
a ridge runs downward and forward to the base of the anterior
zygapophysis. This process is more developed here than in
Pal@ophis, to which, according to Owen, it is almost peculiar,
only a trace being found in other Ophidian vertebra.
The transverse processes project downward below the level of
the centrum, and their lower ends may even be slightly bent in
1 Cossmann: ‘‘ Additions 4 la Faune Nummulitique d’Egypte’’ (Institut Egyptien,
Cairo, 1901).
440 Dr. C. W. Andrews—Extinct Egyptian Vertebrates.
towards the middle line. The hypapophysis (hyp.) consists of two
processes, one near the middle of the centrum, the other close to
its anterior border; the latter, together with the transverse pro-
cesses, is strongly inclined forward.
The whole form of the vertebra seems to me to indicate that the
body was deep and laterally compressed, as in some water-snakes,
and to point strongly to the conclusion that this animal was aquatic
in its habits. Its association with the remains of Zeuglodonts,
Sirenians, and marine turtles seems to support this.
This snake is no doubt a close ally of Palgophis, and must
be referred to the same family; but the greater height and
narrowness of the vertebre, the more ventral position of the trans-
verse processes, and of their surfaces for articulation with the
ribs (7.), as well as several points in the structure of the neural
arch and its articulations, justify the generic separation of this type.
I propose for it the name Meriophis, referring to the locality in
which it was found, and its specific name will be M. Schweinfurthi,
after Dr. G. Schweinfurth, who has done so much to add to our
knowledge of Egypt in so many directions, and who seems to have
been the first to collect vertebrate remains in the Fayim.
The dimensions of one of these vertebra are as follows :—
mm
Greatest height (from top of neural spine to end of ELSE L) .. 85
Greatest width (between ends of transverse processes) .. Ss,
Width of zygosphene _... 606 ane sate nae ee
Width of articular cup of centrum ae 00 366 200 cco le
Height of articular cup of centrum 300 200 000 a0 coo
Extreme length of centrum 550 ee 30 500 p00 oon
Width of neural canal... 356 St6 200 a: 260 say aaedl
Chelonia.
Chelonian remains are fairly common in the lower beds in which
Meritherium and Gigantophis occur, and some nearly complete skulls
and carapaces were collected. The latter are not in very good
condition for the determination of their characters, being, as a rule,
traversed in all directions by cracks and coated with gypsum, so
that the sutures cannot be clearly made out.
The Chelonians collected include representatives of the three
chief groups, viz., the Athece, Pleurodira, and Cryptodira.
Psephophorus eocenus, sp. nov.
The Athece are represented by a humerus and possibly some
masses of scutes. ute
The humerus (Fig. 3) differs widely from that of all land and
fresh-water tortoises and of all the marine turtles, except Sphargis..
In fact, it belongs to the most specialized type of swimming humerus
found among the pelagic Chelonia (parathalassic type of Wieland,
Am. Journ. Sci., ser. tv, vol. ix, 1900, p. 420). Among the forms
of Athecate Chelonia of which the humerus is known, the present
species (Fig. 3) seems to approach most nearly to Psephophorus,
the chief points of difference being that the ulnar crest (a) is more
Dr. O. W. Andrews—Extinct Egyptian Vertebrates. 441
prominent and rises farther above the head (b), and the form of
the proximal portion of the radial process (c) is different in several
respects. For the present, until further remains are collected, it
will be best to refer this form to Psephophorus. The specific name
will be P. eocenus.
Dimensions oF HuMERUs.
Total length ... ... 190mm.
Width of shaft immediately below radial proces aot 42°,
Width of head . Ne: 40 ,,
Thalassochelys libyea, Sp. Nov.
Another Chelonian, represented in the collection by several more
or less crushed skulls, is a Cryptodiran with roofed temporal fossz,
apparently closely allied to Chelone. In two cases the skulls are
greatly crushed from above downward, giving them a quite mis-
leading appearance of being low and flattened, but another specimen,
including the back of the skull as far forward as the epipterygoid
(columella), is quite uncrushed, and is here referred to.
Fic. 8.—Dorsal and ventral views of left humerus of Psephophorus eocenus,
Andrews. One-fifth naturalsize. (a) Ulnarcrest; (4) head; (c) radial crest ;
(d) entocondyle.
The form of the tympanic ring, which is incomplete posteriorly,
resembles that seen in Chelone, showing that this species is not
a Pleurodiran. The presence of the columella shows that it is not
one of the Athecate group, as from the occurrence of the humerus
above described seemed not impossible. The roofing of the temporal
fossa, as far as can be seen, is the same as in the Chelonida, and it
may be referred provisionally to that family. The occipital condyle
is trilobate, the basi-occipital extending up to the foramen magnum.
The basi-sphenoidal platform is much less prominent than in Chelone,
and there is no deep fossa beneath its hinder border as in that genus.
442. Dr. C. W. Andrews—Extinet Egyptian Vertebrates.
In this region the skull resembles that of Thalassochelys very nearly.
There are some differences, however, the most notable of which
being the greater length of the quadrate in the fossil. Nevertheless,
I prefer at present to refer this species provisionally to Thalassochelys,
with the specific name T. libyca.
Stereogenys Cromeri, gen. et sp. nov.
The most interesting of the Chelonian remains are several more
or less complete skulls of a Pleurodiran tortoise, which presents
a number of peculiar features. The Pleurodiran nature of this
species is shown by (1) the completeness of the quadrate ring for
the tympanum ; (2) the form of the articular surface of the quadrate.
The temporal fossa is roofed as in Podocnemis alone among living
Pleurodira. In the Mesozoic Rhinochelys also the temporal fossa is
roofed in, but in quite a different manner from that occurring in
Podocnemis and our fossil. So far as I can determine, this species
approaches Podocnemis more nearly than any other Chelonian, but on
the other hand there are some very important differences. The most
important of these are found in the structure of the palate (Fig. 4),
Fie. 4.—Skull and mandible of Stereogenys Cromeri. One-half natural size..
(A) Palatal surface of skull; (B) upper surface of mandible. The pre-
maxille are restored from another specimen. 6.0. basi-occipital ; ma. maxilla ;
na. internal nares; p.mz. premaxille; pal. palatines; pt. pterygoids;
g. quadrate ; s.occ. supra-occipital ; sq. squamosal.
in which the palatine bones (pal.) are much longer than in
Podocnemis, and are produced inward towards the middle line,
where in some specimens they seem to have united in a median
suture, in others to have remained separated by a narrow cleft,
which in life was no doubt closed by membrane, so that in either
case the opening of the internal nares (na.) was carried far back
to the level of the ectopterygoid wings. This arrangement of the
palatines seems to be unique among Chelonia. There is a small
anterior vacuity between the hinder ends of the palatal portions of
the premaxillee (p.ma.) and the maxillee (mx.). The pterygoids (pt.)
Dr. C. W. Andrews—Extinct Egyptian Vertebrates. 4438
are short and broad, and have a very small extension on the palate
compared to that seen in Podocnemis, and they seem to have been
nearly excluded from the middle line by the backward prolongation
of the palatines.
Four or five more or less complete skulls of this type were
collected, and it will be possible from them to give a detailed
account of the cranial characters.
The symphysis of the mandible (Fig. 48) is very long, and the
symphyseal region forms a broad pentagonal plate, the two anterior
sides of which form the labial borders, while the two lateral bear
the high pointed coronoid processes. The posterior side is slightly
concave. The dorsal surface of the symphyseal surface was probably
covered by a strong horny plate, which, judging from the large size
and anterior position of the coronoid process and the depth of the
muscle impressions, must have formed a powerful crushing apparatus.
The backward position of the internal nares seems to be correlated
with the existence of this arrangement, the union of the palatines
extending just far enough backwards to bring the opening behind
the level of the symphysis. Probably the anterior part of the palate
in front of the narial opening was also covered with a horny plate.
To this new form I propose to apply the generic name Stereogenys,
the species being called S. Cromert, after the Earl of Cromer, the
British Agent and Consul-General at Cairo.
The dimensions of the figured skull and mandible are :—
SKULL.
Extreme length as figured ... “Bn 30h see “on 96 mm.
Extreme width ! Ld ia ne oF set at 98 ,,
Width between ends of ectopterygoid wings ie as 635 ,,
Width between outer ends of articular surtace of quadrates (Coe
Width of articular surface of quadrate_.... ons 50 ates
MANDIBLE.
Total length ... a0 36 ab Sod ae 568 71mm.
Length of symphysis 306 aa: S00 50 aoe sO;
Width at coronoid ... oe ae ee he ee 55.555
Width at articulation for quadrate ... Ay ae F Gai.
Several carapaces and plastra were collected which probably belong
to this form. Their Pleurodiran character is shown by the fusion of
the lower ends of the pubes and ischia with the plastron. As a rule
the mode of preservation is such that it is extremely difficult to
make out the position of the sutures, even in specimens otherwise
in excellent preservation. In one plastron, however, it seems fairly
clear that there were small lateral mesoplastrals and that a large
intergular plate was present.
Crocodilia.
Tomistoma africanum, sp. nov.
Remains of Crocodilians are very common in the lower beds in
some localities, and in some cases attain a very large size. Vertebras
and scutes, either isolated or in groups, most commonly occur,
but occasionally a large part of the skeleton was seen. When
1 This specimen is somewhat crushed, so that the width is slightly exaggerated.
444. Dr. C. W. Andrews—Extinet Egyptian Vertebrates.
the material is fully examined it is probable that two or three
species will be found. At present it will only be necessary to
mention one, to which the finest specimens collected are referable.
These include an almost perfect mandible and the anterior portion
(about 34cm. in length) of a snout, with the upper and lower jaws
in their natural positions with regard to one another.
In the mandible the symphysis is very long and Gavial-like, but
in this region there are only 14 teeth on each side, the total number
in each ramus being 19-20. The splenial enters largely into the
formation of the symphysis. The first and second teeth are large,
the third smaller, the fourth large again, then the remainder some-
what smaller, and of nearly the same size throughout except a few
-of the hindermost.
There are four premaxillary teeth, of which the second and third
are the largest; the fourth is small, and behind it there is
a diastema into which the large fourth lower tooth bites. Only the
first four of the maxillary teeth are preserved. The teeth are nearly
circular in section. The premaxillary region is very slightly
flattened and expanded, and the nasal opening is heart-shaped, with
the point directed backwards: the relations of the premaxillaries
and nasals to it cannot be made out, none of the sutures being
visible.
Comparison of this Crocodile with other types shows that without
doubt it is referable to the genus Tomistoma, the only living species
of which occurs in the rivers of the Malay Peninsula, Borneo, and
the neighbouring islands, while fossil representatives, or very closely
allied types, occur in the Miocene of Malta and Eggenburg.
This species differs from the recent form in the slightly greater
expansion of the premaxillary region and the somewhat greater
length and slenderness of the articular process of the mandible.
Apart from these and some other peculiarities, the difference in the
horizon and locality of this form entitles it to specific distinctness ;
it may be called Tomistoma africanum.
The dimensions of the mandible are :—
em.
Total length... ath ee ah a6 560 coo LOS
Length of symphysis 660 300 es wae 0 49°
Width of jaw at symphysis... a6 906 666 ee alte?
Width of articular surface for quadrate ... ae Hes 6°8
Depth of ramus at symphysis 900 000 (approx.) 4-2
In another specimen of the front of the snout the premaxillary
expansion is nearly 8 cm. wide, while the somewhat contracted region
immediately behind the premaxillary teeth is only 5 cm. in width.
Piscrs.
Fish remains were collected in considerable quantity, but have not
yet been examined in detail; they seem to be mostly portions of the
skeleton of large Siluroids, but remains of a Saw-fish (? Propristis
Schweinfurthi, Dames) are not uncommon, one complete rostrum
being obtained.
W. Ackroyd—The Circulation of Salt. 445
III.—On tHe Creovunation oF SALT IN 1Ts RenatIons TO GEOLOGY.
By Wituram Ackroyp, F.I.C., F.C.S., Public Analyst for Halifax.
SEA-BREEZE is salt-laden in varying degree. On a fine
dry day it may contain as much as 22 milligrams of salt
per cubic metre of air (Armand Gautier, Bull. Soc. Chim., 1899
[iii], 21, 391-392). This invisible salt is washed out of the
atmosphere by rains, and finds its way back to the sea.
Salt circulation is more evident in times of storm, when the
amount carried on to the land from the sea may be enormous.
Thus, during the storm of January 6th and 7th, 1839, newspaper
records make it apparent that tons of salt per acre were spread over
Lancashire and Yorkshire, which had been brought by the gales
from the Irish Sea; right away over the Pennine hills the trees
were white with salt.
The phenomenon has been entirely ignored in our physiographic
literature, and credit is due to Professor Joly for having made an
allowance of 10 per cent. for such transported salt in his calculation
of the age of the Earth. I have attempted to give the subject of salt
circulation its due importance in a paper read before the Yorkshire
Geological and Polytechnic Society, which will duly appear with
Addenda in the Society’s Proceedings. A preliminary report
appeared in the Chemical News for June 7th, 1901. In the course
of the paper I venture the opinion that 99 per cent. ought to be
allowed for cyclic sea-salt in employing soluble river contents as
a measure of time; to this Professor Joly replied on June 28th,
and my rejoinder in the same journal will be found on August 2nd.
I am here concerned with his article in the August number of this
Magazine.
On the Origin of the Saltness of Salt Lakes.—Many determinations
of chlorine in rain-water are on record, but a fulness of information
is decidedly wanting. The chlorine fluctuates widely, and the laws
determining the variations have yet to be experimentally worked
out. A six months’ study of one locality will be found in my paper
“On the Origin of Combined Chlorine” (Journ. Chem. Soc., 1901,
vol. lxxix, pp. 673 and 674), where records of the fluctuations of
chlorine in the rain-gauge and reservoir of Widdop on the Lanc.-
Yorks. border are given. It is necessary to say here, a point which
will again be referred to, that it is customary among chemists to make
chlorine a measure of sodium by calculating the chlorine in rainfall into
sodium chloride. Employing this convention, Bellucci calculates that
37°8 lbs. of common salt per acre is deposited every year at Perugia,
some 75 miles from the sea-coast, and I may add that I find in the
Pennine hills the deposit calculates out to 172 lbs. per acre per year.
Such facts, taken in conjunction with observations like Gautier’s,
make it probable that wherever sea-winds reach to carry moisture
there the falling rains bring down chlorides, and the general disposition
of iso-chlors proves this. It is justifiable, then, to suppose that an
inland lake may owe much of its salt to this source. I have shown
by calculations that the Pennine reservoir already referred to with
446 W. Ackroyd—The Circulation of Salt.
a capacity of 640:5 millions of gallons has in it some 55 tons of salt,
and as the water is being continually drawn off for municipal use, and
as continually being replenished by rains falling on a saltless area
of Millstone Grit, it follows that its chlorides must be derived from
the sea. The available data show further that if it had no outlet
and the inflow were balanced by the effects of evaporation it would
become salter than the Dead Sea in a period of time less than one-
seventh of that usually assigned to the Pleistocene Age. The mind
naturally turns from such considerations to a case like that of the
Dead Sea, for it is little further removed from the Mediterranean
than Widdop is from the Irish Sea; there is a rainfall in Palestine
higher than that of the Pennine hills, and in the past there has been
an intensity of meteorological conditions of which we at the present
day can form but an inadequate conception (Tristram, “The Land
of Israel,” p. 320). All the conditions are present, but what of the
results? The various points of similarity and of dissimilarity are
in favour of such a hypothesis; it will be convenient to deal with
them after the next paragraph.
Indiscriminate comparisons of salt-lake analyses lead to confusion.
This is illustrated by Professor Joly’s remarks on p. 346 of this
Magazine for August. A principle is here overlooked which may
be thus briefly stated :—Where a solution of mixed salts, among
them being magnesium chloride and sodium chloride, undergoes
concentration, as the more soluble magnesium chloride increases in
amount the common salt is precipitated. The only reference on
which I can lay my hands at the moment is to the work of Precht
and Wittjen in 1881 (Journ. Chem. Soc., November, 1881, p. 978),
who show that a 20 per cent. solution of magnesium chloride at
20° C. dissolves only 5:1 per cent. of potassium chloride and 5:8 per
cent. of sodium chloride. Now in this strong light let us examine
the waters of the Elton Lake of the Kirghis Steppe as they vary
with the season :—
In Sprine | In Summer | In AuTUMN
(Gobel). (Erdmann). (Rose).
Sodium chloride, Na Cl ate ee 13:1 74 3°8
Magnesium chloride, Mg Cl, ... 10°5 16°3 G7
Potassium chloride, K Cl 0:2 — 0-2
Calcium chloride, Ca Cl, ae an — = =
Potassium sulphate, K,8 O, ... — 0-04 =
Magnesium sulphate, Mg S O, 1-6 2°20 5°3
Water ... oe aad a 74:4 73°50 70°8
99°8 99-44 99°8
On Professor Joly’s line of argument the first and last analyses
ought not to belong to the same lake, but they are beautifully in
keeping with the principle I have enunciated. Nor does it at all
seem strange that in the case of the Great Salt Lake, where there is
so little magnesium chloride there should be so much common salt.
W. Ackroyd—The Circulation of Salt. 447
To return now to the Dead Sea. It will be at once recognized
that the large percentage of magnesium chloride present, arising
from ages of concentration, is favourable to precipitation of common
salt, which in the southern parts of the Jake forms quite a paste
(Tristram). The ratio of chlorine to bromine in the surface
waters of the Dead Sea and of the Mediterranean are nearly alike
(100 : 2-1), and the only divergence one looks for is in the increase
of the bromine figure for the Dead Sea as its sodium chloride is
precipitated, and this one finds to be the case. It is also to be
noted here that all attempts to find traces of bromine in the springs
and rivers of Palestine have hitherto failed (Watts’ Dictionary of
Chemistry, vol. v, p. 183). All these points are compatible with
the Dead Sea having derived the greater part of its salts from the
Mediterranean. As one recognizes, however, that solvent denudation
must play an important part in adding to the soluble contents of
inland lakes, it is to its extensive limestone gathering-ground that
the Dead Sea must owe its calcareous character, and the contrast
in this respect with the Mediterranean is increased by the latter
possessing and the former being without a lime-secreting fauna.
On the Proportion of Chlorides supplied by Solvent Denudation.—
It was of interest and of importance to know approximately what in
a river water was due to solvent denudation and what to atmospheric
transportation. To find the proportion of chlorides due to solvent
denudation the following line of reasoning suggested itself to me.
A sample of Malham Cove water in Craven had a hardness of 10°,
ie. it contained 10 grains of calcium carbonate per gallon or its
equivalent of dolomitic compound. Analysis showed the limestone
to have in it ‘01 per cent. of combined chlorine. The 10 grains
therefore contained ‘001 grain of chlorine. Now the whole gallon
of water gave ‘7 grain of chlorine, whence it follows that only
a fifth of 1 per cent. of all the combined chlorine in the water was
due to solvent denudation, or of the load of salt carried to the sea
approximately 99:8 per cent. was sea-salt. Professor Joly, in his
criticism in the Chemical News, does not appreciate this result; in
the Gronocioan Magazine he ignores it altogether. It is capable
of wide application. Thus, in some 40 full analyses of limestones
and dolomites published by the United States Geological Survey
(Bull., 148, pp. 254-274), 31 samples show no trace of chlorine,
2 only traces, and 9 samples from ‘01 up to ‘14 per cent. The
average quantity of chlorine in the last 9 samples is -06 per cent.,
and in the whole 40 samples ‘01 per cent. Limestone is one of the
most soluble of all rocks, and will probably furnish the largest
share of chlorine to the rivers, and these figures demonstrate that
so far as the North American continent is concerned its limestones
are not likely to supply any greater proportion of this element than
the limestones of Yorkshire. Reference to other facts confirm this
view of things. Before proceeding farther let me give the atomic
proportions of sodium and chlorine in some of the bodies we have to
deal with, premising for the benefit of the non-chemical reader that
448 W. Ackroyd—The Circulation of Sait.
a molecule of common salt or sodium chloride contains two atoms,
one of chlorine and one of sodium.
Atomic PROPORTIONS.
Sodium. Chlorine.
ae ea
1. In common salt Bs eae le
2. In the solids dissolved i in "sea water ahh a Te eas LOL?
8. In Pierre’s rain Tea AS 3 9 LCR
4. In the solids dissolved in average river- -water
(from Sir J. Murray’s data) ane il “3 2) 103340
5. In the older crust of the earth (from Professor
F. W. Clarke’s data) ... bd ins 1 :. 0°0024
Compare 4 and 5. In the earth’s crust there is only one atom
of chlorine to 417 atoms of sodium, while in river-water to each
atom of chlorine we have three atoms of sodium. Therefore
average river-water contains a proportion of over 140 times more
chlorine atoms than the earth’s crust could supply it with. Where
does it get them from if transported sea-salt does not enter into the
composition of the so-called average river-water? This difficulty
presented itself in another form to the Rev. Osmond Fisher when he
asked: ‘‘ Whence came the chlorine? The amount of 0:01 per cent.
stated to occur in crystalline rocks seems insufficient” (Guon. Mac.,
March, 1900, p. 129).
The Age of the Earth.—Now come we to the knotty question of the
bearing of the foregoing facts on the rate of solvent denudation used
as a measure of time. Here I have to point out the important fact
that in estimating the numerator all the sodium of the sea has been
calculated from sodium chloride. This involves the tacit assumption
that all the sodium going into the sea throughout the ages has either
gone there allied with chlorine or has finally taken the form of
sodium chloride. In either case the chemist’s convention of taking
chlorine as a measure of sodium in rain- and river-water is serviceable,
and cannot involve more final error in connection with this problem
than that indicated by the ratio of these elements in sea-water.
Our estimate of 99 per cent. for cyclic sea-salt therefore still
stands, and, being applied to Professor Joly’s calculation, brings
the age of the Harth to over 8,000 millions of years; and even if
we were inclined to be prodigal in this respect and only deduct
so little as 80 per cent. for cyclic salt the age of the Harth would
still come to over 400 millions of years !
I will not go further into this matter here than to point out that
Professor Joly’s grounds for making an allowance of 10 per cent.
for cyclic sea-salt is not convincing reading. We are invited to
contrast the chlorine content of average river-water, put at -3 part
per 100,000, with the chlorine content of rainfall at Ootacamund in
India, which is given as -04 part per 100,000. It would have been
more conducive to progress in this discussion if relevant particulars
had been given of the Ootacamund region. Knowing as I do that
chlorine content and amount of rainfall bear an inverse relation to
each other, and that in some parts of India the rainfall is prodigious
in amount, any isolated fact concerning the chlorine content of
a sample of rain does not add to our enlightenment, because for
R. D. Oldham—The Periodicity of Earthquakes. 449
anything we know to the contrary the nearest river-water may give
no higher figure; the Mahanuddy, emptying itself into the Bay of
Bengal, has only a chlorine content of -17 per 100,000 after passing
over 440 miles of its course (Nicholson, Journ. Chem. Soc., 1873,
p. 229).
IV.—Tue Prriopiciry or HArTHQuakEs.
By R. D. Oxpuam, Superintendent of the Geological Survey of India.
N ANY are the attempts that have been made to discern some law
in the occurrence of earthquakes, and to trace the influence
of the sun, the moon, or even of the planets as a cause, if partial,
of their origin. Many patient investigators have discovered, or
thought they have discovered, periods of fluctuating seismic activity,
varying in length from semi-diurnal to annual or even longer,
but so conflicting have been their conclusions that little weight
can be, or has been, attached to the results of their calculations ;
and one of the most industrious of all these investigators, the
Commandante de Montessus de Ballore, has declared his conviction
that no periodicity can be detected, and that the causes of earth-
quakes are purely terrestrial and in no way affected by any celestial
body. Yet, in spite of this, the attempts and the calculations go
on, and one of the most recent of these is a discussion by Herr M.
Becke of some three hundred earthquakes recorded in the region
round Karlsbad between 24th October and 25th November, 1897."
Tabulating these, according to the hour of occurrence, he finds
that there are two well-defined maxima at about three hours on
either side of midnight, while the minimum is at midday with
a minor one at midnight. He rightly observes that if this be due
to the influence of the sun a similar but much more marked relation
should be observed in the case of the moon, and after dividing
each lunar day into twenty-four hours and tabulating the earth-
quakes according to this lunar time he finds that the curve of
frequency so obtained does not correspond to that deduced from
solar times. From this he concludes that the apparent maxima
do not represent real maxima of occurrence of earthquakes, but
merely maxima of record, due to the fact that slight earthquakes,
which would be noticed and recorded in the morning and evening
hours of repose, would be overlooked in the active prosecution of
daily avocations, or in the slumber of the night. To this the obvious
objection may be raised, that persons who are asleep by midnight
are not likely to be awake at 3 o’clock in the morning.
Apart from this, there seems to be a more serious flaw in the
argument. Herr Becke appears to have expected that the curve
of frequency by lunar time should show maxima at about three
hours on either side of the time of lower meridian passage of the
moon. This again depends on the assumption, tacitly made by
every calculator with whose work I am acquainted, that the
frequency may be expected to be a function of the hour angle.
1 M. Becke, ‘‘ Bericht iiber das Graslitzer Erdbeben, 24 October bis 25 November,
1897’: Sitzber. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, 1898, cvii, Abth. 1, pp. 789-959.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. X, 29
450 R. D. Oldham—The Periodicity of Earthquakes.
This would be true if the frequency were such a function of the
zenith distance of the sun or moon that the one might be expected
to increase or decrease continuously with the other. This is,
however, by no means necessarily, or even probably, the case, for
if the attraction of the sun or the moon have any effect it is probably
through the strains set up by the tide-producing forces.
Now these have three separate maxima distributed in two points
and three circles: at the extremities of the diameter pointing to the
sun or moon, as the case may be, the upward vertical tide-producing
force is at its maximum; the maximum of the downward tide-
producing force lies along the great circle at right angles to this
diameter ; while the maximum horizontal tide-producing force lies
along the small circles half-way between. If, then, external attraction
is in any way the cause of earthquakes, we may look for the frequency
to have some relation to the times of passage of one or other of these
points or circles over the place where the earthquakes originated.
I am at present engaged in a discussion of the records of the after-
shocks of the great earthquake of 1897, with a view to seeing
whether any such relation can be traced ; the discussion is not yet
far enough advanced to have yielded any results, and the matter
would not have been referred to but that in the paper quoted above
the records are tabulated in a form which makes it possible, without
lengthy calculation, to roughly test the hypothesis that the frequency
of earthquakes is influenced by the tide-producing force generated
in the earth by the sun and moon.
The three hundred earthquakes, recorded during a period of little
over a lunar month, are classified, according to time of occurrences,
and also with regard to the phases of the moon, as to whether the
earthquake occurred nearer to the syzygies or the quadratures. In
the table printed below the figure opposite to 0 is the total recorded
Sotar Times. Lunar TIMEs.
Hour.| Syz. | Quad.) Total.) Syz. | Quad. | Total.
0 vl 13 20 9 6 15
2 14 3l 45 4 9 13
4 16 17 30 9 13 22
6 16 16 32 13 11 24
8 4 14 18 12 17 29
10 4 4 8 18 12 30
12 3 8 il 8 21 29
14 9 9 18 14 15 29
16 15 6 21 13 14 27
18 18 12 30 17 11 28
20 19 17 36 12 20 32
22 14 13 27 10 ll 21
24 7 13 20 9 6 15
in the hour preceding and that following the lower culmination,
that opposite 2 being the total recorded between one and three
hours after the lower culmination, and so on.
R. D. Oldham—The Periodicity of Earthquakes. 451
Taking the solar times first, the sun’s declination was south, and
increasing slowly throughout the period of the record; the mean
value may be taken as 16° south and the mean latitude of the
origins of the earthquakes 50° north. Hence the sun was always
more than 60° from the zenith at its upper culmination, and the circle
of maximum horizontal tide-producing force nearest the sun never
reached the place of origin of the earthquakes. That furthest away
from the sun did, however, cross this, and an easy calculation shows
that, for a latitude of 50° north and a declination of 11° south, the
times of crossing would be about 24 hours before and after midnight.
The observed maxima accord very fairly well with the times of
passage of the circle of maximum horizontal tide-producing force
due to the attraction of the sun.
Turning to the moon, the problem is not so simple, for, instead
of preserving a fairly constant declination like the sun, the moon
ranged from its extreme northerly to its extreme southerly declina-
tion. Luckily, however, the syzygies happened to nearly coincide
with the extreme declinations, while the quadratures were as close
to the times when the moon crossed the equator. Now when on
the equator the circles of maximum horizontal tide-producing force
would never reach 50° north latitude, and only when the declination
increased to 5° would one of them touch it, at the upper or lower
culmination as the case might be. Moreover, as the rate of change
has probably more effect than the amount of the force, and as this
rate of change would be small in the case of such tangential passage
of the circle, we might expect the effect to be small, but so far as it
goes to show a slight tendency to maxima coincident with the upper
and lower culmination.
As a matter of fact, there is no marked sign of periodicity except
a small increase in frequency about the upper and a decrease at the
lower culmination which may be accidental.
At the syzygies the moon was near its maximum declination, and
for a declination of 25° one circle of maximum horizontal tide-
producing force would aever touch latitude 50° north, while the
other would cross the place of origin at five hours before and after
the upper or lower culmination, according as the moon’s declination
was north or south. As the declination decreased this interval
would decrease, but would not fall much below three hours before
the moon passed the half-way point between the syzygies and
quadratures; and as the declination was north during half the
period of record and south during the other half, the result is
that we should expect to find no well-defined maxima, but a greater
number of earthquakes occurring more than three hours from the
culminations and fewer occurring within three hours of them.
Such is practically the case, and the accordance is as close as could
reasonably be expected from so limited a record.
So far, then, from the tabulated results showing no indication of
any influence of the sun and the moon, they distinctly support the
hypothesis of a maximum frequency at the time of passage of the
circle of maximum horizontal tide-producing force. They are far
452 British Association—J. Horne, F.R.S., ete.—
from sufficient to establish this hypothesis, but as it has been clearly
shown that there is no relation between hours and frequency which
holds good for all times and places, it is in this direction that
investigation must now be turned before we can finally say that
the attraction of the sun and moon has or has not an effect on the
occurrence of earthquakes. If it be found that there is no diurnal
periodicity corresponding to the tidal forces produced by them, it
may safely be said that any periodicity of longer period, which may
appear to correspond with the movements of these or any other
heavenly bodies, cannot be due to their attraction; and, unless we
assume a hyperphysical or astrological influence of the sun and
planets, we must finally conclude that earthquakes are as purely
terrestrial in their cause as in their effect.
NSi@ sea @ ae SS) Oe eV aa VEO ee
—_—<_<_—_
J.— British ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE.
Guascow, SEPTEMBER 127TH, 1901.
AppREss To THE GEOLOGICAL SEcTion, BY JoHN Horne, F.R.S.L. &E.,
F.G.S., President of the Section.
Recent Advances in Scottish Geology.
ae return of the British Association after the lapse of a quarter of
a century to the second city of the empire, which since 1876 has
undergone remarkable development, due in no small measure to the
mineral wealth of the surrounding district, suggests the question, Has
Scottish geology made important advances during this interval of time ?
Have we now more definite knowledge of the geological systems
represented in Scotland, of their structural relations, of the principles of
mountain-building, of the zonal distribution of organic remains, of the
volcanic, plutonic, and metamorphic rocks so largely developed within its
borders? It is true that many problems still await solution, but anyone
acquainted with the history of geological research must answer these
questions without hesitation in the affirmative. In the three great
divisions of geological investigation —in stratigraphical geology, in
paleontology, in petrology—the progress has indeed been remarkable.
The belt of Archean gneisses and schists, which may be said to form
the foundation-stones of Scotland, have been mapped in great detail by
the Geological Survey since 1883 along the western part of the mainland
in the counties of Sutherland and Ross. In that region they occupy
a well-defined position, being demonstrably older than the great
sedimentary formation of Torridon Sandstone and overlying Cambrian
strata. The mapping of this belt by the Survey staff and the detailed
study of the rocks both in the field and with the microscope by Mr. Teall
have revealed the complexity of the structural relations of these crystalline
masses, and have likewise thrown considerable light on their history.
These researches indicate that, in the North-West Highlands, the Lewisian
(Archean) gneiss may be resolved into (1) a fundamental complex,
composed mainly of gneisses that have affinities with plutonic igneous
products, and to a limited extent of crystalline schists which may
without doubt be regarded as of sedimentary origin ; (2) a great series of
Presidential Address to Geological Section. 453
igneous rocks intrusive in the fundamental complex in the form of dykes
and sills.!
The rocks of the fundamental complex which have affinities with
plutonic igneous products occupy the greater part of the tract between
Cape Wrath and Skye. Mr. Teall has shown that they are essentially
composed of minerals that enter into the composition of peridotites,
gabbros, diorites, and granites ; as, for example, olivine, hypersthene,
augite (including dialiage), hornblende, biotite, plagioclase, orthoclase,
microcline, and quartz. In 1894 he advanced a classification of these
rocks, based mainly on their mineralogical composition and partly on
their structure, which has the great merit of being clear, comprehensive,
and independent of theoretical views as to the history of the rock-masses,
Stated broadly, the principle forming the basis of classification of three
of the groups is the nature of the dominant ferro-magnesian constituent,
viz., pyroxene, hornblende, or biotite, while the members of the fourth
group are composed of ferro-magnesian minerals without felspar or quartz.?
The detailed mapping of the region has shown that these rock-groups have
a more or less definite geographical distribution. Hence the belt of
Lewisian gneiss has been divided into three districts, the first extending
from Cape Wrath to Loch Laxford, the second from near Scourie to
beyond Lochinver, and the third from Gruinard Bay to the island of
Raasay. In the central area (Scourie to Lochinver) pyroxene gneisses and
ultrabasic rocks (pyroxenites and hornblendites) are specially developed,
while the granular hornblende rocks (hornblende gneiss proper) and the
biotite gneisses are characteristic of the northern and southern tracts.
These are the facts, whatever theory be adopted to explain them.
In those areas where the original structures of the Lewisian gneiss have
not been effaced by later mechanical stresses it is possible to trace knots,
bands, and lenticles of unfoliated, ultrabasic, and basic rocks, to note the
imperfect separation of the ferro-magnesian from the quartzo-felspathic
constituents, to observe the gradual development of mineral banding and
the net-like ramification of acid veins in the massive gneisses. Many of
these rocks cannot be appropriately described as gneiss. Indeed,
Mr. Teall has called attention to the close analogy between these
structures and those of plutonic masses of younger date.
In the Report on Survey Work in the North-West Highlands published
in 1888, the parallel banding, or first foliation, as it was then termed, of
these original gneisses was ascribed to mechanical movement.* But the
paper on ‘‘ Banded Structure of Tertiary Gabbros in Skye,” by Sir
A. Geikie and Mr. Teall,‘ throws fresh light on this question. In that
region the gabbro displays the alternation of acid and basic folia, the
crumpling and folding of the bands like the massive gneisses of the
Lewisian complex. Obviously in the Skye gabbro the structures cannot
be due to subsequent earth-movements and deformation, The authors
maintain that they are original structures of the molten magma, and,
consequently, that much of the mineral banding of the Lewisian gneisses,
as distinguished from foliation, may be due to the conditions under which
the igneous magma was erupted and consolidated. Whatever theory be
adopted to explain the original mineral banding of the Lewisian gneisses,
1 Report on the Recent Work of the Geological Survey in the North-West
Highlands of Scotland, based on the field-notes and maps of Messrs. B. N. Peach,
J. Horne, W. Gunn, C. T. Clough, L. W. Hinxman, and H. M. Cadell: Quart.
Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xliv, p. 887; and Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv., 1894, p. 280, and
1895, p. 17.
2 Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv., 1894, p. 280.
3 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xliv, p. 400.
4 Ibid., vol. u, p. 640.
454 British Association—J. Horne, F.R.S., etc.—
it is certain that they possessed this banding, and were thrown into gentle
folds before the uprise of the later intrusive dykes.
The crystalline schists that have affinities with rocks of sedimentary
origin occupy limited areas north of Loch Maree and near Gairloch. The
prominent members of this series are quartz schists, mica schists,
graphitic schists, limestones and dolomites with tremolite, garnet and
epidote.1_ They are there associated with a massive sill of epidiorite and
hornblende schist. The relations which these altered sediments bear to
the gneisses that have affinities with plutonic igneous products have not
been satisfactorily determined. But the detailed mapping has proved
that north of Loch Maree they rest on a platform of Lewisian gneiss, and
are visibly overlain by gneiss with basic dykes (Meall Riabhach), and
that both the gneiss complex and altered sediments have been afiected
by a common system of folds. In the field, bands of mylonized rock
have been traced near the base of the overlying cake of gneiss, and the
microscopic examination of the latter by Mr. Teall has revealed cataclastic
structures due to dynamic movement. It is obvious, therefore, that,
whatever may have been the original relations of the altered sediments
to the gneiss complex, these have been obscured by subsequent earth-
stresses.
The great series of later igneous rocks which pierce the fundamental
complex in the form of dykes and sills is one of the remarkable features
in the history of the Lewisian gneiss. In 1895 Mr. Teall advanced
a classification of them,” but his recent researches show that they are
of a much more varied character. For our present purpose we may omit
the dykes of peculiar composition and refer to the dominant types. These
comprise ; (1) ultrabasic rocks (peridotite), (2) basic (dolerite and epidiorite,
and (3) acid (granite and pegmatite). ‘The evidence in the field points
to the conclusion that the ultrabasic rocks cut the basic, and that the
granite dykes were intruded into the gneisses after the eruption of the
basic dykes. The greater number of these dykes consists of basic
‘materials. It is important to nete that the basic rocks best preserve
their normal dyke-like features in the central tract between Scourie and
Lochinver, where they traverse the pyroxene gneisses. But southwards
and northwards of that tract, in districts where they have been subjected
to great dynamic movement, they appear as bands of hornblende schist,
which are difficult to separate from the fundamental complex. The acid
intrusions are largely developed in the northern tract between Laxford
and Durness ; indeed, at certain localities in that region the massive and
foliated granite and pegmatite are as conspicuous as the biotite gneisses
and hornblende gneisses with which they are associated.
After the eruption of the various intrusive dykes the whole area was
subjected to enormous terrestrial stresses, which profoundly affected the
fundamental complex and the dykes which traverse it. These lines of
movement traverse the Lewisian plateau in various directions, producing
planes of disruption, molecular rearrangement of the minerals, and the
development of foliation. It seems to be a general law that the new
planes of foliation both in the gneiss and dykes are more or less parallel
with the planes of movement or disruption. If the latter be vertical or
nearly horizontal the inclination of the foliation planes is found to vary
accordingly.
Close to the well-defined disruption planes, like those between Scourie
and Kylesku, the gneiss loses its low angle, and is thrown into sharp folds,
the axes of which are parallel with the planes of movement. The folia
1 Ann. Rep. Geol. Sury., 1895, p. 17.
2 Ibid., p. 18.
Presidential Address to Geological Section. 455
are attenuated, there is a molecular rearrangement of the minerals, and
the resultant rock is a granulitic gneiss. Indeed, the evidence in the
field, which has been confirmed by the microscopic examination of the
rocks by Mr. Teall, seems to show that granulitic biotite and hornblende
gneisses are characteristic of the zones of secondary shear. Special reference must be made to the
remarkable series of papers by Professor Lapworth on “The Secret of the
Highlands,” in which he demonstrated the accuracy of Nicol’s main con-
clusions, and pointed out that the stratigraphical phenomena are but the
counterpart of those in the Alps as described by Heim.® His researches,
moreover, led him to a departure from Professor Nicol’s views regarding
the age, composition, and mode of formation of the Eastern Schists, for in
the paper which he communicated to the Geologists’ Association in 1884
he announced that their present foliated and mineralogical characters had
been developed by the crust-movements which operated in that region
since the time of the Durness quartzites and limestones.’ Allusion must
1 Tbid., vol. xv, p. 353.
2 Ibid., vol. xlviii, p. 227.
3 Nature, vol. xxxi, p. 29, November, 1884.
4 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxxvi, p. 93.
5 Ibid., vol. xxxix, p. 416.
6 Grou. Maa., Dec. II, Vol. X (1883), pp. 120, 193, 337.
7 Proc. Geol. Assoc., vol. viii, p. 438; Gzox. Maa., Dec. III, Vol. II (1885),
p- 97.
458 British Association—J. Horne, F.R.S., etc.—
be made also to his great paper ‘‘On the Discovery of the Olenellus Fauna
in the Lower Cambrian Rocks of Britain,” in which he not only chronicled
the finding of this fauna at the top of the basal quartzite in Shropshire,
but suggested the correlation of the Durness quartzites and limestones
with the Cambrian rocks elsewhere.1 That suggestion was strikingly
confirmed within three years afterwards by the discovery of the Olenellus
fauna in Ross-shire.
The detailed mapping of the belt of Cambrian strata has proved the
striking uniformity of the rock sequence. There is little variation in the
lithological characters or thicknesses of the various zones. Basal quartzites,
pipe-rock, Fucoid-beds, Serpulite (Salterella) grit, limestone, and dolomite:
form the invariable sequence, for a distance of a hundred miles, to the west
of the line of earth-movements. This feature is also characteristic of the
fossiliferous zones, for the sub-zones of the pipe-rock, the Olenellus fauna in
the Fucoid-beds, and the Sadterella limestone have been traced from Eriboll
to Skye. Owing to the interruption of the sequence by reversed faults or
thrusts, the higher fossiliferous limestone zones are never met with between
Eriboll and Kishorn, but they occur in Skye, where they were first detected
by Sir A. Geikie.?
Regarding the paleontological divisions of the system, my colleague,
Mr. Peach, concludes ‘‘that the presence of three species of Olenellus in
the Fucoid-beds and Serpulite grit of the North-West Highlands, nearly
allied to the American form Olenellws Thomsoni—the type species of the
genus—together with Hyolithes, Salterella, and other organisms found with
it, prove that these beds represent the Georgian terrane of America, which,
as shown by Walcott, underlies the Paradoides zone.” Hence he infers
that there can be no doubt of the Lower Cambrian age of the beds yielding
the Olenellus fauna in the North-West Highlands. Mr. Peach further
confirms Salter’s opinion as to the American facies of the fossils obtained
from the higher fossiliferous zones of the Durness dolomite and limestone.
He states that ‘the latter fauna is so similar to, if not identical with, that
occurring in Newfoundland, Mingan Islands, and Point Levis, beneath
strata yielding the Phyllograptus fauna of Arenig age, that the beds must be
regarded as belonging to the higher divisions of the Cambrian formation.”
The intrusive igneous rocks of the Assynt region, of later date than
Cambrian time, and yet older than the Post-Cambrian movements, have
been specially studied by Mr. Teall, who has obtained results of special
importance from a petrological point of view. This petrographical province
embraces the plutonic complex of Cnoc na Sroine and Loch Borolan, and
the numerous sills and dykes that traverse the Cambrian and Torridonian
sediments, and even the underlying platform of Lewisian gneiss. He
infers that the plutonic rocks have been formed by the consolidation of
alkaline magmas rich in soda. -At the one end of the series is the quartz-
syenite of Cnoc na Sroine, and at the other the basic augite-syenite,.
nepheline -syenite, and borolanite. The basic varieties occur on the
margin, and the acid varieties in the centre. The sills and dykes comprise
two well-marked types, camptonites or vogesites, and felsites with alkali
felspar and egirine, which he believes to represent the dyke form of the
magmas that gave rise to the plutonic mass.®
The striking feature in the geology of the North-West Highlands is the
evidence relating to those terrestrial movements that affected that region
in Post-Cambrian times, which are without a parallel in Britain. The
geological structures produced by these displacements are extremely com-
plicated, but the vast amount of evidence obtained in the course of the
1 Grou. Mac., Dec. III, Vol. V (1888), pp. 484-487.
2 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xliv, p. 62.
3 Grou. Mac., Dec. IV, Vol. VII (1900), p. 385.
Presidential Address to Geological Section. 459
survey of that belt clearly proves that, though the sections vary indefinitely
along the line of complication, they have certain features in common which
throw much light on the tectonics of that mountain chain. Some of these
features may thus be briefly summarized :—
1. By means of lateral compression or earth-creep the strata are thrown
into a series of inverted folds which culminate in reversed faults or thrusts.
2. Without incipient folding, the strata are repeated by a series of minor
thrusts or reversed faults which lie at an oblique angle to the major thrust-
nae and dip in the direction from which the pressure came, that is, from
the east.
3. By means of major thrusts of varying magnitude the following
structures are produced: (a) the piled-up Cambrian strata are driven
westwards along planes formed by the underlying undisturbed materials ;
(6) masses of Lewisian gneiss, Torridon Sandstone, and Cambrian rocks
are made to override the underlying piled-up strata; (c) the Eastern
Schists are driven westwards and, in some cases, overlap all major and
minor thrusts till they rest directly on the undisturbed Cambrian strata.
When to these features are added the effects of normal faulting and
prolonged denudation, it is possible to form some conception of the
evolution of those extraordinary structures which are met with in that
region. Some of the features just described occur in other mountain
chains affected by terrestrial movement, as in the Alps and in Provence ;
but there is one which appears to be peculiar to the North-West Highlands.
It is the remarkable overlap of the Moine Thrust-plane—the most easterly
of the great lines of displacement. Along the southern confines of the wild
and complicated region of Assynt, that plane can be traced westwards for
a distance of six miles to the Knockan cliff, where the micaceous flagstones
rest on the Cambrian Limestone. In Durness we find an outlier of the
Eastern Schists reposing on Cambrian Limestone, there preserved by
normal faults, at a distance of about ten miles from the mass of similar
schists east of Loch Eriboll, with which it was originally continuous.
Though many of these structures appear incredible at first, it is worthy
of note that some have been reproduced experimentally by Mr. Cadell.’
He took layers of sand, loam, clay, and plaster of Paris, and after the:
materials had set into hard brittle lamine, in imitation of sedimentary
strata, he applied horizontal pressure under varying conditions. The
results, some of which may here be given, were remarkable.
1. The compressed mass tends to find relief along a series of gently
sits thrust-planes, which dip towards the side from which pressure is:
exerted.
2. After a certain amount of heaping up along a series of minor thrust-
planes, the heaped-up mass tends to rise and ride forward bodily along
major thrust-planes.
3. The front portion of a mass being pushed along a thrust-plane tends
to bend over and curve under the back portion.
4, A thrust-plane below may pass into an anticline above ; and a major
thrust-plane above may and probably always does originate in a fold below.
Now these important experiments confirm the conclusion reached by
the Geological Survey from a study of the phenomena in the field, viz., that
under the influence of horizontal compression or earth-creep the rocks in
that region behaved like brittle rigid bodies which snapped across, were
piled up, and driven westwards in successive slices. But, further, these
displacements were accompanied by differential movement of the materials
which resulted in the development of new structures. These phenomena
culminate along the belt of rocks in immediate association with the Moine
1 Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, vol. xxxv, p. 337.
460 British Association—J. Horne, F.R.S., e¢tc.—
Thrust, where the outcrop of that thrust lies to the east of a broad belt of
displaced materials. There, Lewisian gneiss, Torridon Sandstone, and
Cambrian quartzite are sheared and rolled out, presenting new divisional
planes parallel with that of the Moine Thrust. The Lewisian gneiss
shades into flaser gneiss and schist, and ultimately passes into a banded
rock like a platy schist. The pegmatites show fluxion structure with
felspar ‘eyes’ like that of the rhyolites. At intervals in these zones of
highly sheared rocks, phacoidal masses of Lewisian gneiss appear, in
which the Pre-Torridonian structures are not wholly effaced. The sills of
camptonite and felsite intrusive in the Cambrian rocks become schistose,
and together with the sediments in which they occur appear in a lenticular
form. All these mylonized rocks show a characteristic striping on the
divisional planes, due to orientation of the constituents in the direction of
movement.
Still more important evidence in relation to the question of regional
metamorphism is furnished by the Torridon Sandstone. In the case of
the basal conglomerate the pebbles have been flattened and elongated, and
a fine wavy structure has been developed in the matrix. In the district of
Ben More, Assynt, planes of schistosity, more or less parallel with the
planes of the Ben More Thrust, pass downwards from the Torridon con-
glomerate into the underlying gneiss. Both have a common foliation
irrespective of the unconformability between them. Again, along the
great inversion south of Stromeferry, foliation has been developed in the
Torridon conglomerate and overlying Lewisian gneiss, parallel to the plane
of the Moine Thrust. The Torridon grits and sandstones south of Kin-
lochewe and between Kishorn and Loch Alsh are similarly affected by the
Post-Cambrian movements. Mr. Teall has shown that the quartz grains
have been drawn out into lenticles and into thin folia that wind round
‘eyes’ of felspar. A secondary crypto-crystalline material has been
produced, sericitic mica appears in the divisional planes, and in some
instances biotite is developed. In short, he concludes that in these
deformed Torridonian sediments there is an approximation to the
crystalline schists of the Moine type. The stratigraphical horizon of these
rocks can be clearly proved. The subdivisions of the Torridon Sandstone
have been recognized in those displaced masses which lie to the east of the
Kishorn Thrust and to the west of the Moine Thrust. It is worthy of
note also that in the belt of highly sheared gneiss south of Stromeferry
that comes between the Torridonian inversion in the west and the Moine
Thrust on the east Mr. Peach has found folded and faulted inliers of the
basal division of the Torridon Sandstone that have a striking resemblance
to typical Moine schists.
Regarding the age of these Post-Cambrian movements, it is obvious that
they must be later than the Cambrian Limestone and older than the Old
Red Sandstone, for the basal conglomerates of the latter rest unconformably
on the Eastern Schists, and contain pebbles of basal quartzite, pipe-rock,
limestone, and dolomite derived from the Cambrian rocks of the North-
West Highlands.
East of the Moine Thrust or great line of displacement extending from
Eriboll to Skye, we enter the wide domain of the metamorphic rocks of
the Highlands, a region now under investigation, and which presents
difficult problems for solution. Two prominent types of crystalline schists
(Caledonian series, Callaway, and Moine schists of the Geological Survey)
have been traced over wide areas in the counties of Sutherland, Ross, and
Inverness, and across the Great Glen to the northern slopes of the
Grampians. Consisting of granulitic quartzose schists and muscovite-
biotite schist or gneiss, they appear to be of sedimentary origin, though
crystalline. They are associated with recognizable masses of Lewisian
Presidential Address to Geological Section. 461
gneiss covering many square miles of ground and presenting many of the
structures so characteristic of that complex in the undisturbed areas
already described. Within the belt of Lewisian gneiss at Glenelg
Mr. Clough has mapped a series of rocks presumably of sedimentary
origin, including graphitic schists, mica schists, and limestones, but the
gneiss with which they are associated possesses granulitic structure like
that of the adjoining Moine schists.!_ Further, in the east of Sutherland,
and also in the county of Ross, foliated and massive granites appear
which are interleaved in the adjoining Moine schists, forming injection
gneisses and producing contact metamorphism.’
In the Eastern Highlands the Moine series disappears and is replaced
by a broad development of schists, admittedly of sedimentary origin,
which have been termed the Dalradian series by Sir A. Geikie. Within
recent years it has been divided into certain rock-groups which have been
traced by the Geological Survey from the counties of Banff and Aberdeen
to Kintyre. It has been found that, though highly crystalline in certain
areas, they pass along the strike into comparatively unaltered sediments,
as proved by Mr. Hill in the neighbourhood of Loch Awe.’ Before the
planes of schistosity were developed in these Dalradian schists they were
pierced by sills of basic rock (gabbro and epidiorite) and acid material
(granite), both of which must have shared in the movements that affected
the schists, as they merge respectively into hornblende schists and foliated
granite or biotite gneiss. Both seem to have developed contact meta-
morphism ; indeed, Mr. Barrow‘ contends that the regional metamorphism
so prominent in the South-East Highlands is mainly, if not wholly, due
to the intrusion of an early granite magma, now exposed at the surface
in the form of local bosses of granite and isolated veins of pegmatite.
The age of the Dalradian schists has not been determined. Though
there seems to be an apparent order of superposition, in this series it is
still uncertain whether that implies the original sequence of deposition.
Since Sir A. Geikie applied the term Dalradian to the Eastern Highland
schists in 1891,5 evidence has been obtained ° that suggests the correlation
of certain rocks along the Highland border with the Arenig and younger
Silurian strata of the Southern Uplands. Consisting of epidiorite, chlorite
schist, radiolarian cherts, black shales, grits, and limestone, they have
been traced at intervals from Arran to Kincardineshire. In the latter
region Mr. Barrow contends that they are separated by a line of dis-
ruption from the Highland schists to the north ; but no such discordance
has been detected in the Callander district or in Arran. Though these
- rocks of the Highland border have been much deformed, yet their occurrence
in the same order of succession in that region and in the Southern Uplands
is presumptive evidence for their correlation.
In view of this evidence it is not improbable that the Dalradian series
may contain rock-groups belonging to different geological systems. Indeed,
the result of recent Survey work in Islay tends to support this view.
For in the south-west part of that island there is a mass of Lewisian
gneiss overlaid unconformably by sedimentary strata which have been
correlated with the lower and middle divisions of the Torridon Sandstone.
Unfortunately the sequence ends here, as both the gneiss and overlying
1 Summary of Progress Geol. Sury. 1897, p. 37.
2 « On Foliated Granites and their Relations to the Crystalline Schists in Eastern
Sutherland ’’: Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. lii, p. 633.
3 Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv., 1893, p. 265.
4 « Tntrusion of Muscoyite-biotite Gneiss in the South-East Highlands and its
accompanying Metamorphism’’: Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xlix, p. 330.
5 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xlvii, p. 72.
6 Ann. Rep. Geol. Sury., 1893, p. 266; 1895, p. 25; 1896, p. 27.
462 British Association—J. Horne, F.R.S., etc.—
sediments are separated by a line of disruption or thrust-plane from the
strata in the eastern part of the island. And yet, notwithstanding this
break, the evidence obtained in the latter district is remarkable, whatever
theory be adopted to explain it. There the Islay limestone and black
slates appear to be covered unconformably by the Islay quartzite con-
taining Annelid tubes and followed in ascending sequence by Fucoidal
shales and dolomites, suggestive of the Cambrian succession in Sutherland
and Ross. The Islay quartzite passes into Jura, thence to the mainland,
and it may eventually prove to be the Perthshire quartzite, while the
Islay limestone and black slate are supposed to be the prolongations of
the limestone and slate of the Loch Awe series in Argyllshire.'
From the foregoing data it will be seen that much uncertainty prevails
regarding the age and structural relations of the metamorphic rocks of
the Highlands, but the difficulties that here confront the observer are
common to all areas affected by regional metamorphism.
A prominent feature in the geology of the Eastern Highlands is the
great development of later plutonic rocks chiefly in the form of granite
ranging along the Grampian chain from Aberdeenshire to Argyllshire.
In connection with one of these masses a remarkable paper appeared in
1892 which in my opinion has profoundly influenced petrological inquiry
in Scotland from the light which it threw on the relations of a connected
series of petrographical types in a plutonic complex. I refer to the paper
on the “Plutonic Rocks of Garabal Hill and Meall Breac,” by Mr. Teall
and Mr. Dakyns.?
The authors showed that this plutonic mass comprises granite, tonalite,
augite-diorite, picrites, serpentine, and other compounds. Mr. Teall
regards the members of this sequence as products of one original magma
by a process of differentiation, the peridotites being the oldest rocks,
because the minerals of which they are composed are the first to form in
a plutonic magma. As the process of consolidation advances, rocks of
a varied composition arise, in the order of increasing acidity, viz., diorites,
tonalites, and granites. The most acid rock consists of quartz and
orthoclase, which may represent the mother liquor after the other con-
stituents had separated out. Mr. Teall concludes that progressive
consolidation of one reservoir gives rise to the formation of magmas of
increasing acidity, and hence that basic rocks should precede the acid
rocks. This theory of magmatic differentiation—so strenuously advocated
by Brégger, Vogt, Rosenbusch, Iddings, Teall, and others—was first applied
to the interpretation of varied types of plutonic masses in Scotland by
Mr. Teall in the paper referred to. Since then he has extended its
application to the granite masses in the Silurian tableland of the south
of Scotland, which include rocks ranging from hyperites at the one end
to granitite with microcline and aplite veins at the other.» Many of
the phenomena presented by the newer granite masses of the Eastern
Highlands seem to lend support to this theory. These views, indeed,
have permeated the petrological descriptions of the granitic protrusions
in the counties of Aberdeen and Argyll which have been given by Messrs.
Barrow, Hill, Kynaston, and Craig * in recent years.
One of the remarkable advances in Scottish geology during the period
ander review is the solution of the order of succession and tectonic
1 Summary of Progress Geol. Surv. 1899, p. 66.
2 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xlviii, p. 104.
3 Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv., 1896, p. 40; see also “‘ The Silurian Rocks of Scotland,”’
Geol. Surv. Memoir, 1899, p. 607.
4 Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv., 1897, p. 87; 1898, pp. 25-28. See also paper on
‘¢ Kentallenite and its Relations to other Igneous Rocks in Argyllshire’’: Quart.
Journ. Geol. Soe., vol. lvi, p. 581.
Presidential Address to Geological Section. 463
relations of the Silurian rocks of the south of Scotland by Professor
Lapworth. The history of research relating to that tableland, and of all
his contributions to the problems connected with it, has been given in
detail in the recent volume of the Geological Survey on that formation.
At present it will be sufficient to refer to his three classic papers, which,
in my opinion, record one of the great achievements in British geology.
The first, on ‘‘The Moffat Series,’ ! demonstrated, by means of the
vertical distribution of the graptolites, the order of succession in those
fine deposits (black shales and mudstones), which were laid down near the
verge of sedimentation, and are now exposed in anticlinal folds in the
central belt. The second, on ‘‘The Girvan Succession,” * showed how
certain graptolite zones of the Moffat shales are interleaved, in the Girvan
region, with conglomerates, grits, sandstones, flagstones, mudstones,
shales, and limestones, charged with all the varied forms of life found in
shallow seas or near shore. In the third, on “The Ballantrae Rocks of
the South of Scotland and their Place in the Upland Sequence,” he
indicated the distribution and variation of the Moffat terrane (Upper
Llandeilo to Upper Llandovery) and of the Gala terrane (Tarannon), which
form the greater part of the uplands. He further pointed out how the
rocks and the fossils vary across the uplands according to the conditions
of deposition. Finally, he proved that the complicated tectonics of the
Silurian tableland, its endless overfolds, its endoclinal and exoclinal
structures, can be unravelled by means of the graptolite zones. These
researches disposed of the order of succession based on Barrande’s doctrine
of Colonies, and established the zonal value of graptolites as an index of
stratigraphical horizons. So complete was the zonal method of mapping
adopted by Professor Lapworth, and so accurate were his generalizations,
that few modifications have been made in his work.
In the course of the re-examination of the Silurian tableland by the
Geological Survey some important additions were made to our knowledge
of the Silurian system as there developed. Underlying all the sediments
of the uplands there is a series of volcanic and plutonic rocks of Arenig
age, the largest development of which occurs at Ballantrae in Ayrshire,
where their igneous character was recognized by Professor Bonney. But
they appear in the cores of numerous anticlines over an area of about
1,500 square miles, forming one of the most extensive volcanic areas
of Paleeozoic age in the British Isles. These volcanic rocks are overlain
by a band of cherts and mudstones, succeeded by black shales yielding
Glenkiln graptolites of Upper Llandeilo age. The cherts, which are
abundantly charged with Radiolaria, implying oceanic conditions of
deposition, are about 70 feet thick, and have been traced over an
area of about 2,000 square miles. The deposition of the Radiolarian
ooze must have occupied a long lapse of time. Indeed, the cherts and
mudstones represent the strata which, in other regions, form the Upper
Arenig and Lower Llandeilo divisions of the Silurian system. They
furnish interesting evidence of the oceanic conditions which here
prevailed in early Silurian time, and form a natural sequel to Professor
Lapworth’s researches bearing on the graptolitic deposits of the Upper
Llandeilo period, which must have been laid down on the sea-floor near
the limit of the land-derived sediment.
Of special interest is the new fish fauna found by the Geological Survey
in the Ludlow and Downtonian rocks between Lesmahagow and
Muirkirk, which the researches of Dr. Traquair have shown to be of
great biological and paleontological value. This discovery has enabled
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxxiv, p. 240.
2 Tbid., vol. xxxviii, p. 537.
3 Gro. Mac., Dec. III, Vol. VI (1889), p. 20.
4 Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb., vol. xxxix, p. 827.
464 British Association—J. Horne, F.R.S., ete.—
him to give a new classification of the Ostracodermi, and to enlarge the
order of the Heterostraci, which now includes four families, instead of the
Pteraspide alone. He has further shown that the Ccelolepide were not
Cestraciont sharks to which the Onchus spines belonged, but Heterostraci,
though probably of Elasmobranch origin, judging from the shagreen-like
scales. The Ceelolepide are common fishes in the Ludlow and
Downtonian rocks of Lanarkshire. The genus Vhelodus, first described
by Agassiz from detached scales in the Ludlow bone-bed, and subsequently
figured and described by Pander and Rohon from scales in the Upper
Silurian rocks of Oesel, is here represented for the first time by nearly
complete forms. But it is remarkable that no Onchus spines, nor any
Pteraspide, nor Cephalaspidee have been found in the Lanarkshire strata,
the nearest related genus to Cephalaspis being Ateleaspis, which, however,
represents a distinct family.
The group of sandstones, conglomerates, shales, and mudstones that
form the passage-beds between the Ludlow rocks and the Lower Old Red
Sandstone in Lanarkshire are now regarded as the equivalents of the
Downtonian strata in Shropshire, and are linked with the Silurian
system. The mudstones of this group, containing the new fish fauna,
likewise yield ostracods, phyllocarid crustaceans, and eurypterids—forms
which connect these beds with the underlying Ludlow rocks. The band
of greywacke-conglomerate, that extends from the Pentland Hills into
Ayrshire, composed largely of pebbles derived from the Silurian tableland,
is now taken as the base-line of the Lower Old Red Sandstone on the
south side of the great midland valley of Scotland.
The period under review has been marked by important additions to.
our knowledge of the Old Red Sandstone formation. In 1878 appeared
a valuable monograph by Sir Archibald Geikie on “The Old Red Sand-
stone of Western Europe,”! by far the most important treatise on this
subject since the publication of Hugh Miller’s classic work in 1841.
Following up the view maintained by Fleming, Godwin-Austen, and
Ramsay, that the deposits of this formation were laid down in lakes
or inland seas, he defined the geographical areas of the various basins in
the British area, giving to each a local name. He gave an outline of
the development of the rocks north of the Grampians in Caithness,
Orkney, and Shetland. He advanced an ingenious argument in favour of
correlating the Caithness flagstone series (middle division, Murchison)
with the Lower Old Red Sandstone south of the Grampians. He
contended that “the admitted paleontological distinctions between
the two areas are probably not greater than the striking lithological
differences between the strata would account for, or than the contrast
between the ichthyic faunas of adjacent but disconnected water basins at
the present time.” Sir A. Geikie further gave a table showing the vertical
range of the known fossils of the Caithness series from data partly
supplied by the late Mr. C. Peach.
During the last quarter of a century Dr. Traquair has made a special
study of the ichthyology of the Old Red Sandstone and Carboniferous
strata of Scotland, which has enabled him to throw much light on the
distribution of fossil fishes in these rocks and on their value for the
purpose of cerrelation. His researches show that the fish fauna of the
formation south of the Grampians resembles that of the Lower Old Red
Sandstone of the West of England and adjoining part of Wales in the
abundance of specimens of Cephalaspis, the common species in Forfarshire
(C. Lyelli, Ag.) being also indistinguishable from that in the Herefordshire
beds. Péeraspis occurs in both regions, though of different species. Of
Acanthodians Parexus recurvus, Ag., occurs in both, together with
1 Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb., vol. xxviii, p. 346.
Presidential Address to Geological Section. 465
Climatius (C. ornatus, Ag.). The abundance of Cephalaspis (C. Campbell-
tonensis, Whit., OC. Jexvi, Traq.) and of Climatius spines is characteristic
of the Lower Devonian rocks of Canada.
The Old Red Sandstone of Lorne has recently yielded organic remains,
akin to those found in Forfarshire, south of the Grampians, viz.
Cephalaspis Lornensis (Traq.), and two species of myriapods (Campecaris
Forfarensis and a species of Archidesmus).'
In the deposits of Lake Orcadie, north of the Grampians, quite
a different fish fauna from that of Forfarshire appears. Dr. Traquair has
noted that there are no species common to the two areas, and only two
genera, viz. Mesacanthus and Cephalaspis. The latter genus is, however,
represented in Caithness only by a single specimen of a species
(C. magnifica, Traq.) different from any found elsewhere. It might here
be observed that Cephalaspis is represented also in the Upper Devonian
rocks of Canada by a single specimen of a peculiar species (C. laticeps,
Traq.), and hence Dr. Traquair has shown that, though Cephalaspis is
most abundant in the Lower Devonian, it extends also into the upper
division of that system. It further appears that Osteolepide (Osteolepis,
Diplopterus), Rhizodontide (Zristichopterus, Gyroptychius), Holoptychiide
(Glyptolepis), Asterolepidee (Pterichthys, Microbrachius), Ctenodontide
(Dipterus) are abundant in the Orcadian fauna, none of which has occurred
in the Lower Old Red Sandstone of Forfarshire, the West of England, or in
the Lower Devonian rocks of Canada. Dr. Traquair recognized, however,
the identity of the fishes from the well-known fish band in the basin of the
Moray Firth with those brought from the west part of Orkney, though
these forms did not quite agree with the fossils from the Thurso district.
He subsequently found that the fish fauna from the Orcadian beds in the
Moray Firth basin is represented in Caithness by that of Achanarras ;
and, further, that two other faunas occur in the Caithness area—that of
Thurso and that of John o’ Groats, as given below :—
( Tristichopterus alatus, Egert.
\ Mierobrachius Dicki, Traq.
Coccosteus minor, H. Miller.
John 9’ Groats
Thursius pholidotus, Traq.
Osteolepis microlepidotus, Pander.
Pterichthys, three species.
Thurso
Cheirolepis Trailli, Ag.
Osteolepis macrolepidotus, Ag.
In 1898 appeared an important paper by Dr. Flett on ‘‘The Old Red
Sandstone of the Orkneys,”? in which he described the results of his
detailed examination of the islands. He proved the existence there of
three fish faunas, and their correspondence with those identified in Caith-
ness by Dr. Traquair. - From the evidence in the field he adopted the
following order of succession and correlation of the strata :—
3. Eday Sandstones and John o’ Groats beds.
2. Rousay and Thurso beds.
1. Stromness, Achanarras, and Cromarty beds.
A further important result of Dr. Flett’s researches in the Old Red
Sandstone of these northern isles was communicated to the Royal
Society of Edinburgh this year. He has found in the Shetland beds,
which had previously yielded no fossils save plants, fragments, identified
by Dr. Traquair as Holonema, a fish new to Britain, but occurring in the
Chemung group of North America, the subdivision of the Upper Devonian
that immediately underlies the Catskill red sandstones, with remains of
1 Summary of Progress Geol. Surv. 1897, p. 83.
2 Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb., vol. xxxix, p. 383.
Achanarras
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. X. 30
466 British Association—J. Horne, F.R.S., etc.—
Holoptychius. Dr. Traquair has also recognized in Dr. Flett’s collection
fragments of Asterolepis, a genus characteristic of the Upper Old Red
Sandstone, and which, as proved by Dr. Flett, occurs in the ‘ Thurso beds’
of the Orkneys. The interest attaching to this discovery is very great, for
Dr. Flett contends that it indicates a fourth life-zone in the Orcadian
series, and, further, that it tends to span the break between the Orcadian
division and Upper Old Red Sandstone.
In the Upper Old Red Sandstone on the south side of the Moray Firth,
Dr. Traquair recognized two life-zones, and subsequently, with the assist-
ance of Mr. Taylor, Lhanbryde, a third; in the following order. The
lowest is that of the Nairn sandstones with Asterolepis maxima (Ag.) ; the
second, that of Alves and Scaat Craig with Bothriolepis major (Ag.),
Psammosteus Taylori (Traq.); and the highest, that of Rosebrae, the fauna
of which, according to Dr. Traquair, has a striking resemblance to the
assemblage in the Dura Den Sandstones in Fife.
Before 1876 all the Carboniferous areas in the great midland valley of
Scotland had been mapped by the Geological Survey. The extent and
structural relations of the various coalfields were determined according to
the information then available, and shown in the published maps. But
the rapid development of certain fields in the east of Scotland necessitated
a revision of them, which has lately been done. The Fife Coalfield has
been re-examined by Sir A. Geikie, Mr. Peach, and Mr. Wilson, and the
oil-shale fields in the Lothians have been mapped by Mr. Cadell. An
important memoir by Sir A. Geikie on “The Geology of Central and
Western Fife and Kinross” has just been issued by the Geological Survey,
in which the structure of these coalfields is described. Mr. Cadell lately
gave an account of the geological structure of the oil-shale fields in his
presidential address to the Edinburgh Geological Society.
Within the period under review detailed researches of great importance
on the fossil flora of British Carboniferous rocks have been carried out by
Mr. Kidston, to which reference ought to be made. The results are of the
highest value for correlating the strata in different areas.!_ By means of
the plants he arranges the Carboniferous rocks of Scotland in two great
divisions : a lower, comprising the Calciferous Sandstone and Carboniferous
Limestone series; and an upper, including the Millstone Grit and the
Coal-measures, there being a marked paleontological break at the base of
the Millstone Grit. He shows that the upper and lower divisions of the
system, not only in Scotland but in Britain, are characterized by a different
series of plants, not one species passing from the lower division, save in
the case of Stigmaria, into the upper. From his researches it appears
that, among ferns, Veuropteris is all but unknown in the lower division,
whereas in the upper it is very abundant. The Sphenopterids are pro-
portionately common in both divisions ; but those of the lower are usually
characterized by cuneate segments, while those of the upper have generally
rounded pinnules. Alethopteris, so common throughout the whole of the
upper series, is entirely absent from the lower. The genus Calamites,
which is extremely plentiful in the upper, is almost entirely absent from
the lower division, where its place is taken by Asterocalamites. ‘The
Cordaitee are also rare below the Millstone Grit, though very plentiful
above that horizon. Sigillaria, so rare in the Lower Carboniferous rocks,
is extremely abundant in the upper division, and particularly in the middle
Coal-measures. In short, Mr. Kidston concludes that the floras of the two
main divisions of the Carboniferous system, though belonging to the same
types, are absolutely distinct in species and in the relative importance of
the genera.
* “© On the various Divisions of British Carboniferous Rocks as determined by
their Fossil Flora’’: Proc. Roy. Phys. Soc. Edinb., vol. xii (1893), p. 183.
Presidential Address to Geological Section. 467
By means of the fossil plants Mr. Kidston correlates the Coal-measures
of Scotland underlying the red sandstones with the lower division of the
Coal-measures of England, and the overlying red sandstones of Fife with
the middle division of the English Coal-measures.
It is remarkable that the evidence supplied by the fossil fishes has led
Dr. Traquair independently to a similar conclusion. He holds that fossil
ichthyology proves the existence of only two great life-zones in the
Carboniferous rocks of Central Scotland—an upper and a lower—the
boundary-line between the two being drawn at the base of the Millstone
Grit. The Scottish Carboniferous rocks, being mostly estuarine, give an
opportunity of comparing the estuarine fishes of both divisions. He
finds the Coal-measure fishes of Scotland to be the same as those in the
English Coal-measures, while those occurring below the Millstone Grit in
Scotland are mostly different in species, and often, too, in genera, from the
forms above that horizon.
Of special interest, as bearing on the former extension of this system in
Scotland, is the discovery made by Professor Judd! in 1877 of a patch
of Carboniferous sandstones and shales, with well-preserved plant remains
in Morven. Another small outlier of this formation has recently been
found in the Pass of Brander by the Geological Survey.?
The reptiles from the Elgin sandstones, recently described by Mr. E. T.
Newton,’ add fresh interest to the study of these rocks. The structural
relations of these sandstones have been fully treated by Professor Judd in
his great paper on the Secondary Rocks on the East of Scotland,* and
again in his presidential address to this Section at Aberdeen,® who con-
firmed Huxley’s well-known correlation of these beds with the Trias, The
Dicynodont skull, identified by Professor Judd and Dr. Traquair at the
Aberdeen meeting of the British Association in 1885, and other remains
found in the reptilian sandstones in Cutties Hillock Quarry, where they
rest on Upper Old Red Sandstone with Holoptychius, have been described
by Mr. Newton. He confirmed their affinity with Dicynodonts, though
they were referred to the genera Gordonia and Geikia. But the most
remarkable specimen was the skull named by Mr. Newton Elginia mirabilis.
This extraordinary creature, with a pair of horns projecting like those of
a short-horned ox, and with smaller spines and bosses, numbering thirty-
nine, is related to the great Pareiasawrus from the Karoo beds of South
Africa. Two other reptiles are described by Mr. Newton from this quarry,
namely, a small crocodiie-like animal, Hrpetosuchus Granti, apparently
nearly allied to Stagonolepis, and Ornithosuchus Woodwardi, which is
probably a small Dinosaurian.
Mr. Newton has raised an interesting point in connection with his
researches. He calls attention to the fact that the reptilian remains from
the Cutties Hillock Quarry differ from those found at other localities in
the Elgin district. For example, the Lossiemouth sandstones have
yielded Stagonolepis, Hyperodapedon, and Telerpeton; and the Cutties
Hillock sandstones, the Dicynodonts (Gordonia and Geikia), the horned
reptile (Hlginia), the small crocodile-like Erpetosuchus, and the little
Dinosaurian Ornithosuchus. Does this distribution indicate different
stratigraphical horizons? is virtually the point raised by Mr, Newton.
In connection with this inquiry he cites the evidence obtained in other
countries. Thus, in the Gondwana beds of India, the series of reptiles
similar to those of Elgin occur at different localities and on different
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxxiv, p. 686.
* Summary of Progress Geol. Surv. 1898, p. 129.
Phil. Trans., vol. clxxxiv (1893), p. 431; ibid., vol. clxxxv (1894), p. 578.
4 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxix, p. 98.
Rep. Brit. Assoc., 1885, p. 994.
wo
oe
468 British Association—J. Horne, F.R.S., etc.—
stratigraphical horizons Dicynodonts and Labyrinthodonts being found
in the lower Panchetr ocks, while Hyperodapedon and Parasuchus (allied
to Stagonolepis) are met with in the higher Kota-Maleri beds. Again, in
the Karoo beds of South Africa the Dicynodonts and the great Pareia-
saurus—the latter being the nearest known ally of the horned reptile
(Elginia mirabilis) from Cutties Hillock, Elgin—occur low down in that
formation. Further light is thrown on the question by the interesting
discoveries of Amalitzky in Northern Russia, where a number of reptilian
remains have been found closely allied to Pareiasaurus, Hlginia, and
Dicynodon, in beds which are referred to the Permian formation, and
accompanied by plants and mollusca which seemingly confirm this
reference. !
In view of these foreign discoveries Mr. Newton concludes that the
Elgin sandstones may probably represent more than one reptilian
horizon, and that we are confronted with the possibility of their being
of Permian age.
The difficulty of drawing a boundary-line between the Trias and the
Upper Old Red Sandstone of Elgin, which impressed the mind of the late
Dr. Gordon, has had to be faced elsewhere in Scotland. In Arran, my
colleague Mr. Gunn has shown that the Trias there rests on the Upper Old
Red Sandstone, both formations having a similar inclination. Even he,
with his ripe experience, has had great difficulty in drawing a boundary
between them on the west side of the island ; but when the base-line of
the Trias is traced eastwards to Brodick it passes transgressively on to
Carboniferous rocks.
Of special importance is the recent discovery in Arran of the fossils of
the Avicula contorta zone* by Mr. Macconochie, of the Geological Survey,
to whose skill as a fossil collector Scottish geology owes much. With
these occur Lower Liassic fossils, in sediments which are not now found
in place in the island. These fossiliferous patches are associated with
fragmental volcanic materials filling a great vent, the age of which will be
referred to presently. This discovery has fixed the Triassic age of the
red sandstones and marls in the south of Arran. The detailed mapping
of the island by Mr. Gunn has demonstrated that the Triassic sandstones
rest partly on the Old Red Sandstone, partly on the Carboniferous Lime-
stone Series, and partly on the Coal-measures.
In 1878 appeared the third of Professor Judd’s great papers on the
Secondary Rocks of Scotland, wherein he unravelled the history of these
strata as developed in the east of Scotland and in the West Highlands.
His admirable researches, in continuation of the work done by Bryce,
Tate, and others, embraced the identification of the life-zones, their
correlation with those of other regions, the history of the physical con-
ditions which prevailed in Scotland during Mesozoic time, and the working
out of the structural relations of the strata.* He showed that their
preservation on the east of Scotland was due to the existence of great
faults, and those in the West Highlands to the copious outpouring of the
Tertiary lavas. He was the first to detect the occurrence of Cretaceous
rocks in the West Highlands, and to show the marked unconformability
which separates them from the Jurassic strata. His main life-zones and
his main conclusions regarding the Secondary Rocks of Scotland have so
far been confirmed by the detailed mapping of the Geological Survey. An
interesting addition to our knowledge of these rocks was made by my
colleague Mr. Horace B. Woodward, in the course of his field-work, who
1 Y. Amalitzky: ‘‘Sur les fouilles de 1899 de débris de vertébrés dans les dépdts
Permiens de la Russie du nord,’’ Varsovie, 1900.
2 Summary of Progress Geol. Surv. 1899, p. 133.
3 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxix, p. 97; vol. xxxiv, p. 660.
Presidential Address to Geological Section. 469
found the oolitic iron-ore in the Middle Lias of Raasay, the position of
which corresponds approximately with that of the Cleveland ironstone.!
The extensive plateau of Tertiary volcanic rocks in the Inner Hebrides
has been a favourite field of research ever since the time of Macculloch,
the great pioneer in West Highland geology. During the period under
review much work has been done in that domain. According to Professor
Judd, that region contains the relics of five great extinct volcanoes and
several minor cones, indicating three periods of igneous activity. The
first was characterized by the discharge of acid lavas and ashes, the molten
material consolidating down below as granite; the second by the outburst
of basic lavas, now forming the basaltic plateau, connected with deep-
seated masses that appear now as gabbro and dolerite ; the third by the
appearance of sporadic cones, from which issued minor streams of lava.?
In 1888 Sir A. Geikie communicated his elaborate monograph on the
history of Tertiary volcanic action in Britain to the Royal Society of
Edinburgh,’ which has been incorporated, with fuller details, in his recent
work on ‘The Ancient Volcanoes of Great Britain.” His main conclusions
may thus be briefly stated : (1) The great basaltic plateaux did not emanate
from central volcanoes, but are probably due to fissure eruptions ; (2) the
basaltic lavas were subsequently pierced by laccolitic masses of gabbro,
which produced a certain amount of contact alteration on the previously
erupted lavas ; (3) the protrusion of masses of granophyre and other acid
materials by means of which the basic rocks were disrupted.
During the last six years Mr. Harker has been engaged in mapping the
central part of the Isle of Skye and in the petrographical study of the
rocks, the results of which have been summarized in the annual reports
of the Geological Survey. As regards the basaltic lavas, he finds that
while they have been of vast extent the individual flows have been of
feeble volume, and show no evident relation to definite centres of eruption.
There were two local episodes, however, which took the form of central
eruptions : one represented by a number of explosive outbursts at certain
points ; the other, in the basalt succession, gave rise to rhyolitic rocks.
Mr. Harker further finds that the succeeding plutonic phase of activity,
confined in Skye to what is now the central mountain tract, is represented
by three groups of plutonic intrusions, in the following order : peridotites,
gabbros, and granites. The metamorphism set up in the basaltic lavas
near the large plutonic masses presents points of interest, especially
the widespread formation of new lime-soda-felspars from the zeolites in
the lavas.
After the intrusion of the granite of the Red Hills, Mr. Harker finds
that igneous activity took the form of intrusions of smaller volume, but
in some cases of wide distribution. The great group of dolerite sills
belongs to this period. An enormous number of acid and basic dykes
followed, of several distinct epochs, A set of minor basic intrusions
of quite late date is found in the gabbro district of the Cuillins, the
most interesting of which takes the form of sheets of dolerite, parallel at
any given locality, but always dipping towards the centre of the gabbro
area. Mr. Harker considers that this remarkable system of injections
presents a new problem in the mechanics of igneous intrusion. The latest
phase of vulcanicity in the Cuillin district is a radial group of peridotite
dykes. As regards the local group of rock in Central Skye Mr. Harker
finds that the order of increasing acidity which ruled in the plutonic
phase was reversed for the minor intrusions which followed.
In connection with the great development of volcanic activity in the
1 Grou. Mac., Dec. III, Vol. X (1893), p. 4938.
2 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. xxx, p. 220.
3 Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb., vol. xxxy, pt. 2, p. 23.
470 Notices of Memoirs.
West of Scotland in Tertiary time reference must be made to the remark-
able volcanic vent in Arran, the recognition of which is due to the
suggestion of my friend Mr. Peach. This volcanic centre covers an area
of about eight square miles, and lies to the south of the granite area of
the island. The vent is now filled with volcanic agglomerate and large
masses of sedimentary material, some of which have yielded the Rheetic
and Lower Lias fossils already referred to, the whole being pierced by
acid and basic igneous rocks. One of the interesting features connected
with it is the occurrence of fragments of limestone with the agglomerate,
which has yielded fossils of the age of the Chalk, thus proving that the
vent is post-Cretaceous. There is thus strong evidence for referring
the granite mass in the north of the island and most of the intrusive,
acid, and basic igneous rocks to the Tertiary period. It furnishes remark-
able proof of the Tertiary age of the Arran granite suggested by Sir A.
Geikie in 1873.2, The story unfolded by this discovery is like a geological
romance. The former extension of Rhatic and Lower Lias strata and
of the Chalk in the basin of the Clyde, and the evidence of extensive
denudation in the south of Scotland, appeal vividly to the imagination.
This outline of the researches in the solid geology of Scotland would be
incomplete without reference to the publication of Sir A. Geikie’s great
work on “The Ancient Volcanoes of Great Britain” (1897), in which the
history is given of volcanic action in Scotland from the earliest geological
periods down to Tertiary time. To investigators it has proved invaluable
for reference. Nor can I omit to mention the new edition of his volume
on “The Scenery of Scotland,” wherein he depicts the evolution of the
topography of the country with increasing force and fascination. In this.
domain it may be said of the author, “ Nihil quod tetigit sed ornavit.”
I].—Eeyrtian Grotogy.—We have much pleasure in noticing
“Geological Survey Report, 1899, Part III, Farafra Oasis; its
topography and geology, by Hugh J. L. Beadnell,” issued in July,
1901, by the Survey Department, Public Works Ministry at Cairo.
This, the second report issued, follows closely on Part II, and consists.
of 39 pp., 4 maps, and many sections. The report is divided into
Introduction; Topography, with notes on the Wells, Population,
etc.; Geology; the Desert between Farafra and Dakhla; and
Geological Summary. The geological summary shows that in the
district under notice the lowest rocks met with are correlated with
the Danian of Europe. These consist of, from below up, clays and
sandstones of Ain el Wadi, with plant remains and silicified wood ;
hard blue-grey limestones and White Chalk with brachiopods,
lamellibranchs, annelids, etc. Above these come shales, occasionally
present, with an abundance of fossils, beds probably representing
locally the upper part of the White Chalk. ‘The Eocene is repre-
sented in its lower part only by limestones of the plateau with
numerous echinids, lamellibranchs, and many foraminifera (Libyan
series) at the top, while below come the Hsna Shales, in part
fossiliferous and with Operculina limestone occasionally at the base.
The recent deposits are seen in the soils and clays of springs with
recent fresh-water shells, blown sand, and local and unfossiliferous.
marls and clays. The report will be of the highest value, and like
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., vol. lvii (1901), p. 226.
2 Trans. Geol. Soc. Edinb., vol. ii, p. 305.
Notices of Memoirs. 471
its predecessor is exceedingly well got up; we await the future
parts with the greatest interest. One thing we would ask of the
Director-General, Captain Lyons, and that is, to allow the word
‘Keypt’ to appear somewhere on the title-page.
III.—Evconomio Guotocy.—Messrs. John C. Branner and John
F. Newsom have issued a second edition of their “Syllabus of
a course of Lectures on Hconomic Geology,” 1900, in a volume
printed on one side of the paper only, of 368 pp. One of the
most important things a student of economic geology needs to learn
is where to find and how to use information that has been published.
The authors have therefore given references, first, to works on the
general subject ; second, to periodicals in which articles are to be
looked for upon various economic subjects; third, to papers and
reports on special subjects. Naturally in a book issued by the
Professors of the Leland Stanford junior University, more space
is given to the economic geology of the United States than to that
of other countries. The book has a good index, and is illustrated
by a number of charts and sections. The compositions of minerals
are mainly taken from Dana.
TV.—Canap1an Grotoey. Sessional Paper No. 26, 64 Victoria,
Summary Report of the Geological Survey Department, for the
year 1900, is an octavo of 203 pages and forms an important and
interesting document. It has, moreover, a melancholy interest in
that it is the last report from the pen of the late G. M. Dawson.
In this report especial prominence is given to the results of field-
work, “thus affording an early publication of a preliminary kind
for any new facts obtained,” an object that entitles this report to
especial attention. During the year 1900 twelve new maps were
completed and finished, and eighteen others were either in the
engraver’s hands or in the press. Mr. James White has completed
his Altitudes in the Dominion of Canada, and this will shortly be
issued. Attention is again drawn to the inadequate safety of the
present Museum and offices. It is a penny-wise-and-pound-foolish
policy to allow such precious and costly records to continue exposed
to the danger of fire. After a series of reports on economic minerals,
a good account is given of the exhibit sent by Canada to the Paris
Exhibition, and the report proper opens on p. 387 with a detailed
account of the Yukon district. The areas explored are those of the
Stewart and Yukon rivers, the coals and lignites of the Klondike
river, and the copper deposits of White Horse. From p. 52 work
accomplished in British Columbia is detailed, and a map of the
Atlin Goldfields is appended, the geology of which is provided by
Mr. J. C. Gwillim. Mr. J. M. Bull reviews the explorations carried
out in the Mackenzie district, after which the report deals with
Canada proper, New Brunswick, and Nova Scotia. As regards
zoology, the chief item of interest is the announcement that Professor
H. F. Osborn is at work upon the vertebrate remains collected from
the Cretaceous rocks of the Red Deer River, and drawings have
already been prepared for the report which it is hoped will soon
A472 Notices of Memoirs.
be issued. Lambe’s ‘ Revision of the Genera and Species of the
Madreporaria Aporosa and Madreporaria Rugosa” has been pub-
lished, and Whiteaves’ fourth part of Mesozoic Fossils was issued in
November, 1900.
V.—Canapian Patmozorc Corats. — Lawrence M. Lambe has
issued part ii of his Revision of the Genera and Species of Canadian
Paleozoic Corals, as Contributions to Canadian Paleontology, vol. iv,
pt. 2. This part deals with the Madreporaria Aporosa and the
Madreporaria Rugosa, and consists of 200 pages and 13 plates. The
work is of considerable value and seems to have been prepared with
much care; there is little new in it, but that perhaps shows more
exactly the attention which the author has paid to his predecessors.
Perhaps Nicholson’s work might have been more carefully studied.
We do not grasp the author’s reasons for rejecting the genus Helio-
phyllum and placing the species under Cyathophyllum, or for using
Arachnophyllum in the place of Strombodes. The monograph is
a valuable addition to the literature of the Paleozoic Madreporaria,
and we hope the author will be encouraged to continue it.
VI.—Patzozo1co Crustacza.—In the 54th annual report of the
New York State Museum, 1900 (1901), J. M. Clarke has some notes
on new Crustacea. One of these, the peculiar, eyeless, semi-trilobitic
merostome, called Pseudoniscus by Nieszkowski in 1859, has been
found in the Hurypterus dolomites of Litchfield, Herkimer County,
and is described under the name of P. Roosevelti. Some of the
American specimens are perfect, and Mr. Clarke has been enabled
to add a good deal to our knowledge of the animal. The other new
Crustacea described in his paper are Ceratiocaris precedens, Emme-
lezoe decora, and Estheria Ortoni; the latter is a Coal-measure form
and was found at Carrollton.
VII.—Nerew Gzrorocicat Map or tHE Mont Branco Massrr.—
Professors Dupare and Mrazec have issued the map to accompany
their memoir on Mont Blanc, published in 1898 by the Société
Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle de Genéve. They had the col-
laboration of Dr. Pearce for the Val Ferret region and for the
Courmayeur synclinal. The map is based on that of Albert Barbey,
but includes Mont Catogne; its scale is 1:50,000, and it is clearly
printed and lightly tinted in colour. The publisher is Comptoir
Minéralogique et Géologique Suisse, Minod, 6, Rue St. Léger,
Geneva. Price not quoted. The publishers also announce the
completion of collections of rocks referred to in Professors Dupare
and Mrazec’s memoir, 49 specimens for 180 francs.
VITI.—Gxrotoey or THz Pairippine Isuanps.—The United States
Geological Survey has included in its twenty-first annual volume
a report on the Geology of the Philippine Islands. The work was
entrusted to George F. Becker, who has produced an admirable
resumé of the work of all who have gone before, and has added to
that observations of his own, taken at considerable disadvantage
owing to the unsettled state of the Islands. The report is rather an
attempt to bring together all that is known than to provide a new
and complete account of the geology of the Philippines. Becker lists
Reviews—Permo-Carboniferous Fauna, Bohemia. 473
some 100 papers on the subject, and has provided a translation of
Martin’s paper on the Tertiary Fossils which was published in 1895.
He also gives two excellent maps of the Islands, drawn by the
Jesuit Fathers, and has utilized a sketch of the mineral resources
compiled for him from the archives of the Inspeccion de Minas by
Luis Espina. Becker accompanied General Otis to Manila, and
remained in the Islands fourteen months, but could accomplish little
original work because of the attitude of the natives. The paper will
be very useful to all subsequent workers, and this seems to be its
real purpose.
IX.—New Braonropopa, erc.—(1) Suppl. zu d. Beschreibung der
Silurischen Craniaden der Ostseelainder. Frrepricn HoynineGEn
Hvuens. K. Russ. Mineralog. Gesellsch. zu St. Petersburg, 1900,
Ser. 11, Bd. xxxviii, No.1, with 3 plates. (2) Ueber Aulacomerella,
ein neues Brachiopodengeschlecht. Idem, with plate. (8) Beitrage
zur Beurtheilung der Brachiopoden. F. H. Hurng. Centralblatt
fiir Mineralogie, etc., 1901, woodcut. (4) Cambrian Brachiopoda :
Obolella, subgenus Glyptias; Bicia; Obolus, subgenus Westonia ;
with Descriptions of New Species.. C. D. Watcorr. Proc. U.S.
National Museum, 1901, vol. il.
The first of these four pamphlets contains figures and descrip-
tions of species belonging to different genera of Silurian Craniade,
illustrations of the shell-structure of two genera, Pseudocrania and
Pseudometopoma, geographic-geologic tables, and other important
matter. In the second contribution two species of a new genus,
Aulacomerella, are described and figured. The genus is said to show
senile characters; and also to be a homeomorph of Aulacorhynchus,
a fact referable, the author suggests, to ‘repetition of develop-
ment.” The third paper is a later contribution by the same author.
It discusses the bearing of certain facts upon studies of Brachiopods,
dealing especially with some important anatomical results of
¥. Blochmann. The author also calls attention to the great confusion
in the nomenclature of the shell muscles, pleading for a uniform
Latin system. The last paper is a forerunner of a monograph.
A new genus, two new subgenera, and several new species are
described ; but there are no figures. We much regret to find so
eminent a paleontologist as Dr. Walcott countenancing so very
undesirable a practice.
9Sy SDH Wes JES) WA Se
I.— Fauna DER GASKOHLE UND DER KALKSTEINE DER PERM-
FORMATION, Bounrems. By Dr. Anton Frirscu. Vols. i-iv:
pp- 552, 394 text-figures and 165 chromolithographic plates.
FTER devoting thirty years of almost continuous work to its
study and elucidation, the author, Dr. Anton Fritsch, has
completed the illustration and description of the Permian Fauna of
Bohemia, the marvellous richness of which has surprised all students
of paleontology ; and we congratulate our distinguished fellow-
worker upon having lived to achieve so important an undertaking.
474 Reviews—Permo- Carboniferous Fauna, Bohemia.
In 1860 only thirteen species of vertebrates were known from
these formations in Bohemia ; now 123 species have been recorded,
and 66 of invertebrates, making together 189 species, all figured
and described.
In monographing and carefully drawing more than sixty species
of Stegocephalia, the author has been cautious not to advance any
phylogenetic speculations, seeing that the group does not lend much
help in explaining the evolution of amphibians, and we are led to
the conclusion that a long series of unknown vertebrates must have
existed before these formations were deposited—the ancestors, in
fact, of these Permian forms.
The osteological details given in this work will certainly prove
of great value in future comparative anatomical investigations.
The beautifully preserved remains of Dipnoi, including even an
entire specimen, demonstrate how little that group has changed
from the Carboniferous Ctenodus to the living Ceratodus of Australia..
In the order Selachii the author has adduced important evidence as
to the structure of the fins in Plewracanthus (Xenacanthus), and his
Opinion that they have been developed from a series of parallel rays.
has only a short time subsequently been confirmed by the discovery
of the fin of Cladoselache in the Upper Devonian of Ohio. Many
figures from this work have been reproduced by Wiedersheim and
other authors who have written lately on the fins of recent Selachii.
The tribe of Acanthodians has been augmented by two new and
important genera—Traquairia and Protacanthodes, which latter is
a predecessor of the true Acanthodians of later times. The notes.
on Silurian Acanthodians are very interesting and most valuable.
Amongst the Palzoniscide, the new genus Trissolepis, with three
kinds of scales, is most remarkable, showing the gradual development
of the ganoid scales beginning near the tail.
In the fourth volume, which is devoted to the Invertebrata,.
evidence is brought forward to show that insects with complete
metamorphosis were already represented in Paleozoic times by the
Trichopteroid genus Phryanea and by the larva of a beetle (Archi-
carabides pater). The myriopods, of which thirty-five species have
been recorded, are treated with especial care, being represented in
Permian times by a greater number of distinct families than at the
present day. The discovery that they possessed three simple thoracic
segments is very important. The Arachnida were represented by
Tetrapneumonous spiders, and the Merostomata by Prelimulus Wood-
wardi, a Limulus with simple extremities toitslegs. The Hntomostraca.
have long been determined with the valuable assistance of Professor
T. Rupert Jones, and the plates show that in some specimens the
soft parts and internal structures of the animal have been preserved
within the test, and even embryos. To the systematic worker in
the Malacostraca the restored figure of Gampsonyx from Lebach will
be of the greatest interest, as it shows that this Crustacean was not
provided with bifurcated appendages, like Mysis, but with simple
ones. A new genus of Crustaceans, Gasocaris (a rather barbarous
name), has also seven equal pairs of simple legs, and forms with
Reviews—Geology of the Transvaal, South Africa. 475
Gampsonyx and the American genus Acanthotelson a new suborder—
Simplicipoda.
In a supplement, Dr. Anton Fritsch introduces the figure of a true
reptile, Naosaurus, which, like the American species from the Permian
of Texas, possessed lateral spines attached to the long neurapophyses
of the vertebral column. Amongst the new Stegocephalia is a very
fine skeleton of the remarkable genus Ptyonius.
It is not too much to say that during the past century no single
worker has produced a monograph on Paleozoic paleontology of
equal importance. We are glad to be able to record that the value
of Dr. Fritsch’s labours has been recognized by the Council of the
Geological Society of London, who awarded him the Lyell
Geological Fund in 1881, on the issue of the author’s first volume ;
whilst the Paris Academy presented Dr. Fritsch with the Cuvier
Prize on the completion of his great work. We feel sure that all
paleontologists will rejoice to see the completion of this important
monograph, and will join with us in complimenting its author on
the successful termination of his arduous labours.
I].—GeroLtoey or THE Sourn ArricaN RepusLic oF THE TRANS-
vaaL. By G. A. F. Moneneraar. Bull. Soc. Géol. de France
(4), 1901, i, pp. 18-92, 19 text-figures and 2 plates. Pl. 1:
Geological Sketch at 1: 1,500,000. Pl. ii: Geological Sections.
HE geological researches in the Transvaal are considerably
favoured by the dry and mild climate and the scarce vegetation,
as well as by the simplicity of the structure of the country. The
greatest drawback is the absence of determinable fossils in the
sedimentary formations, with the exception of the Upper Karroo.
The geological map must therefore be considered as a mere diagram-
matical sketch.
Viewed in the abstract, after passing the Jurassic, Cretaceous, and
more recent formations near the littoral, the chief rocks of the
Transvaal are as follows, in descending order :—
III. The Karroo System.
II. The Cape System.
I. The Primary South African System.
This classification had already been adopted by Bain for the Cape:
Colony and by Schenk for the whole of South Africa.
I. Prrmary Sourn Arrican SYSTEM.
The Primary South African System is composed of stratified
deposits associated with numerous intrusive massifs of granite; the
structure of the former has been subjected to contact-metamorphism
produced by the intrusion of the latter.
The gold-mines are chiefly in the Primary System and in the
neighbourhood of Barberton; the series of the famous Wit-
watersrand has been calculated by De Launay at 7,500 metres.
The gold is mostly found in the conglomerates, there being much
less in the quartzites.
The age of the Primary South African system is unknown. In
the Cape Colony, however, an undoubtedly Devonian formation
476 Reviews—Geology of the Transvaal, South Africa.
overlies unconformably the Malmesbury Series and the massifs of
granite by which it is traversed. The Malmesbury Series being
part of the Primary South African System, this last must be
Pre-Devonian, viz. either Silurian or Pre-Cambrian.
II. Care System.
The Cape System is composed of the following divisions,
enumerated from above downwards :—
5. Series of the Waterberg Sandstone.
4. Plutonic Series of the Boschveld.
3. Pretoria Series.
2. Series of the Dolomites.
1. Series of the Black-reef.
The Bokkeveld strata of Cape Colony, corresponding to the
Dolomites of the Transvaal, are the only deposits anterior to the
Karroo System in which fossils—marine organisms of the Lower
Devonian—have been found.
The physical features of the deposits where the Dolomites pre-
dominate offer a great resemblance to the Austrian Karst. Caves are
frequent, many of them being ossiferous; the organic remains have
not, up to the present, been studied. In many places rivulets,
penetrating through fissures at the surface, form subterranean
watercourses and lakes, and reappear again in the form of
numerous and voluminous watercourses, which scarcely diminish
during the dry season. ‘To these remarkable constant sources of
supply almost all the perennial rivers of the Western Transvaal
owe their existence.
II]. Karroo SystEm.
In the Transvaal the Karroo System rests unconformably on the
before - mentioned older formations, and generally in a horizontal
position. Two primary subdivisions are to be distinguished, the
Lower and the Upper Karroo.
1. Lower Karroo.
Generally speaking, the strata of the Lower Karroo are
horizontal, although following more or less the undulations of the
ground. In the whole of South Africa geologists have adopted
the subdivision of the Lower Karroo into two étages, viz. the
Dwyka Conglomerate and the Lcca strata.
The author adheres to the opinion of those geologists (Sutherland,
Griesbach, Stow, Schenk, etc.) who consider these two ééages as
deposits of undoubtedly glacial origin, probably of the Permian
period. We must be prepared to find all the phenomena of a pro-
longed glacial action in much larger and more imposing proportions
than the diluvium of the Northern Hemisphere.
The problem of the glaciation of South Africa, during the Permo-
Carboniferous period, presents more than a local interest. The
geological researches in India and Australia have shown that in
these countries formations exist of striking analogy. In India the
Gondwana System may be identified with the system of the Karroo.
Reviews— Geology of the Transvaal, South Africa. 477
At its base are found the Talchir Conglomerates, absolutely comparable
with the Dwyka Conglomerate. The older underlying rocks ( Vindhyan
limestones) have been found to be polished and striated in various
localities, e.g. near Chanda in the Central Provinces of India. The
Talchir shales are associated with this conglomerate ; they offer all
the characters of the Heca strata, and like the latter they are almost
everywhere devoid of fossils. On these glacial deposits rest sand-
stones comparable to the sandstone of the Upper Karroo, and in
which has been found a Glossopteris flora, very similar to that of
the Karroo.
In Australia the traces of an ancient glaciation are not less
evident, and the glacial deposits which there also, as in the Salt
Range of India, are associated with sediments containing marine
fossils, show that the glaciation of these two continents was con-
temporaneous and took place during the last period of the Palaeozoic
era. Moreover, the general affinities between the Karroo and the
Gondwana System are so evident that we must admit the con-
temporaneity of the Permian glacial deposits in South Africa,
India, and Australia.
2. Upper Karroo.
The strata of the Upper Karroo are almost everywhere found in
a normal and horizontal position; they are composed of sand-
stones, argillites, arenaceous argillites, Carboniferous clays, and
Carboniferous strata.
Horizon of the Coal.—In the Upper Karroo of the Transvaal,
provisionally called by the author the Hoogeveld formation, are
found the Carboniferous strata which, on account of the continual
increase of the Witwatersrand mining industry, must prove a great
wealth to the country. The deposits are immense: the coal-mines
of the Transvaal will certainly supply the demands of the whole of
Africa for at least a hundred years.
The Carboniferous strata of the Transvaal seem to be vegetable
alluvia, deposited by the action of torrents. Fragments of trunks
of Sigillaria, and trunks, branches, and leaves of several species of
Glossopteris, largely compose these coal-beds.
The mode of formation of the Upper Karroo may be imagined
to have taken place in the following manner. After the retreat of
the glaciers the paysage morainique predominated in this region,
where the Dwyka Conglomerate was in a great measure covered,
and on all sides surrounded, by the Kcca strata. Erosion soon
began to exercise its destructive action, and the Lower Karroo
deposits were doubtless, in places, completely remaniés; at the
same time a series of sediments, constituting the Upper Karroo,
were being deposited. These fresh-water deposits were accumulated
partly in the watercourses, partly in the lakes; they were made up
of obliquely stratified sandstones and clays, and sometimes also of
strata of plant-remains, transported by the torrents; the latter
strata have become the present Carboniferous beds. Only a small
portion of the enormously developed Karroo System has been
478 Correspondence—S. S. Buckman.
preserved, the remainder having been destroyed during the period of
denudation following its formation ; this period continues at the
present day.
As to the age of these deposits, the researches of Seward and.
Zeiller on the plant-remains have shown that the lower étage of the
Upper Karroo of the Transvaal is of Permo-Carboniferous age.
The wording of the title of the paper here reviewed is somewhat
surprising. We remember that the author figured as delegate of the
“South African Republic” at last year’s International Geological
Congress. But then the Congress was somehow connected with
the Exhibition. In the present instance we are sorry to state that
a scientific society does not refrain from imparting a political bias
to a purely scientific paper, which, coupled with the expressions of
the President of the French Geological Society when welcoming the
author (p. 9), seems hardly friendly towards this country.
CORRHSPON DENCE.
JURASSIC BRACHIOPODA.
Sir,—May I beg a little of your valuable space to make a cor-
rection in my paper “ Homceomorphy among Jurassic Brachiopoda ”
(Proc. Cotteswold Nat. F.C., vol. xii). Therein I have figured and
described a new species as Zeilleria subcornuta, the specific name
being the same as was used between Dr. Davidson and myself
twenty years ago in correspondence about the same shell. But
there is already a subcornuta used by Quenstedt, and it would also
be Zeilleria subcornuta. Wherefore I desire to change the name of
my species to Zeilleria cornutiformis. I would take this opportunity
to thank you for your kindly notice of this paper, but may I ask if
your reviewer has quite separated ‘‘time-table ” from a table of strata
when he surmises that perhaps I claim no more than a local value
for my “elaborate time-table.” Certainly I made no definite claim ;
but I own to thinking that a time-table, as such, is of worldwide
application. There is no local limit to time, and there can be no
local limit to a time-table. Whether the records of the rocks in
distant localities may be sufficiently perfect to enable their dates
to be stated with as great exactitude as in my time-table, is another
matter. But the table of strata which I have given in connection
with this time-table shows that from Yorkshire to Dorset, from
Dorset to Wiirtemberg, the time-table is a means of exactly dating
Jurassic events; therefore it has much more than a local value.
But in that table I gave the results of only my own work, and
refrained, except in one or two striking instances, from quoting
literature. Had I done so, it would have shown even more clearly
that the time-table is a means whereby Jurassic events over a large
part of Hurope can be exactly dated now; and there is good reason
to think that the same may be said of a far wider field in the future.
8. S. Buoxman.
Obituary—John Storrie, A.L.S. 479
FOSSILS AND GARNETS.
Srz,—On p. 165 of the current volume of this Magazine we
read that to the writer of the article there printed “it is very
difficult to understand how such a fossil as a belemnite could have
retained its characteristic form while molecular changes of such
importance were taking place in the matrix of the rock ‘
The results of contact- metamorphism most nearly resemble the
crystalline schists. In them, so far as my [the writer’s] experience
goes, garnet, and still more staurolite, are not formed until the
materials of the rock have undergone such great molecular changes
as to obliterate all traces of a sedimentary origin’
On p.' 140 of “ Etudes Synthetiques de Géologie expérimentale
par A. Daubrée,” dated 1879, we read statements which when
translated into English are to the following effect :—
“Tt is well known that the crystallization that is brought about
by the proximity of eruptive rocks has not always effaced the traces
of the fossils. There still remain very distinct vestiges of them in
the middle of rocks crowded with crystalline silicates. One need
only recall the fossiliferous Silurian limestone of Norway, which
contains at Brevig paranthine and garnet, and at Gjellebeck
amphibole and epidote . . . . and lastly, in the Vosges the
amphibole rock of Rothau, in which the corals have been replaced,
without being deformed, by crystals of amphibole, garnet, and
axinite. In some places the rock now consists entirely of a mixture
of lamellar pyroxene, epidote, and compact garnet, with flecks of
galena. In the middle of this rock, composed entirely of silicates
of this nature, I have recognized perfectly preserved impressions
of numerous corals (more especially of Calamopora spongites, Goldf.)
and Flustras . . . . More than this, the very cavities left by
the partial disappearance of the calcareous matter of these corals
are lined with crystals of the same minerals as form the bulk of
the rock :
“Now it is the same thing in the case of the crystalline masses
we are considering . . . . MM. Lardy and Strider have found
in the neighbourhood of St. Gotthard belemnites in the middle of
micaceous schists with garnets.” Versum Sap.
(@ SOs £40 ly ae
JOHN STORRIE, A.L.S.
Born 1844. Disp May 2, 1991.
_Joun Srorriz, for many years Curator of the Cardiff Museum,
and an earnest worker at the natural history of Glamorganshire,
was born at Muiryett, in Lanarkshire. His early years were spent
at Glasgow, where he was apprenticed to the printing-trade, and
about the year 1872 he found employment in the Western Mail
printing works at Cardiff. The writings of David Page had given
to Storrie an interest in geology, and he pursued the subject with
zeal when he came to reside in South Wales. The Silurian rocks of
480 Obituary—J. W. Kirkby, Prof. Claypole, M. F. Woodward.
Rumney and the Rhetic beds of Penarth attracted his special
attention. He obtained a new Silurian alga which was named
Nematophycus Storrei, and he found in Triassic strata a new species
of Mastodonsaurus. His researches on these subjects, and many
important articles on local botany and archeology, were published
in the Transactions of the Cardiff Naturalists’ Society. He was
awarded the proceeds of the Barlow-Jameson Fund in 1896 by the
Geological Society of London. An interesting account of his life
and labours, accompanied by a portrait, appeared in the “ Public
Library Journal” of Cardiff for June, 1901.
JAMES WALKER KIRKBY, F.G.S. Epine.
Born Aprit 10, 1884.. Diep Jury 30, 1901.
Tuts well-known geologist of Leven, Fife, was author of many
good papers on the strata and fossils, Permian and Carboniferous,
of Durham and Fifeshire. One paper, in 1882, was written in
company with E. W. Binney, for whom he managed the Pirnie
Coal-mine. His first paper was published in 1858, and the two last
appeared in the Transactions of the Edinburgh Geological Society,
1901, vol. viii, pt. 1. From 1859 onwards numerous papers on the
Upper Paleozoic Ostracoda were produced by Messrs. J. W. Kirkby
and T. Rupert Jones, as joint authors, having worked together in
determining and describing these microzoa.
He was an invalid for years, yet his persistent energy enabled
him to throw much light on the succession and characters of the
long series of Carboniferous and Permian strata, by his personal
research, and largely by the aid of his exact knowledge of the
Ostracoda and their associated fossils. The Murchison Geological
Fund was awarded him in 1879 by the Geological Society of London.
Having a retiring and modest disposition and very poor health,
Mr. Kirkby did not move much beyond the circle of home
neighbours and loving friends, but he had many admirers abroad
who knew and appreciated his work.
Wz have to record the death from apoplexy of Professor H>warp
Waturr Crayporr, D.Sc. Lond., B.A., F.G.S., of Throop Polytechnic
Institute, Pasadena, California, U.S.A., one of the founders and for
many years editor of the American Geologist.
Martin Fountain Woopwarp, Demonstrator in Biology, Royal
College of Science, South Kensington, and Secretary of the Malaco-
logical Society of London, was unfortunately drowned on the night
of September 15th by the capsizing of a boat in a squall at Moyard,
near Letterfrack, co. Galway, Ireland, whilst in charge of the Marine
Biological Laboratory of the Joint Committee of the Department of
Agriculture (Fisheries Branch) and the Royal Dublin Society, at
Ballinakill, during the Summer vacation. He was a naturalist of
great promise and author of several important papers on the dentition
of the Mammalia, on Pleurotomaria and other Mollusca, ete. He was
the second son of the Editor of the GzonocicaL MaGazine.
THE
GHOLOGICAL MAGAZINE.
NEW: SERIES: | DECADE, 1V; VOLK.) VIL:
No. XI—NOVEMBER, 1901.
ORIGINAL ARTICLES.
J. — On tue Bonu-Beps oF Pikermi, ATTICA, AND ON SIMILAR
Deposits 1n NortHern Husaa.
By A. Smita Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S.
T the suggestion of the British Minister at Athens, Sir Edwin
H. Egerton, K.C.B., the Trustees of the British Museum
recently undertook a series of excavations in the well-known bone-
beds of Pikermi, in Attica, and I was honoured by being entrusted
with the supervision of the work. The owner of the estate,
Mr. Alexander Skousés, former Minister of War, most cordially
assented, and gave every possible facility for the undertaking;
while Sir Edwin Egerton’s unflagging interest and zeal combined to
ensure the greatest success. My wife and I went into residence at
the farm of Pikermi early in April, and we continued to occupy the
simple but comfortable room which Mr. Skousés had kindly placed
at our disposal, until the cessation of digging in the middle of July.
During much of the time we were accompanied by Dr. Theodore
Skouphos, Conservator of the Geological Museum in the University
of Athens, which claims some share of the results of all such
excavations made in Greece. We have to thank him for much
help in dealing with the workmen, who spoke only a language with
which I was at first unfamiliar.
The bones are occasionally exposed by the small stream in the
ravine of Pikermi, and they seem to have been first observed by
the English archeologist George Finlay, who presented some to
the Athens Museum in 1855. Three years later a Bavarian soldier
took a few specimens to Munich, where Pikermi and its fossils
were first brought to the notice of the scientific world by Professor
Andreas Wagner. Within the next decade, more bones were sent
to Munich by Lindermayer and described by Wagner; while during
the Winter of 1852-58 the young Bavarian naturalist Roth made
the great collection which was described by himself and Wagner
in 1854, and still constitutes one of the chief treasures of the
Munich Old Academy. About the same time Choeretis presented
a few specimens to the Paris Museum; while the late Professor
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. XI, Sl
482 Dr. A. Smith Woodward—The Bone-beds of Pikermi.
Mitzopoulos, uncle of the present distinguished Rector of the
University of Athens, made a valuable and extensive collection
for the Athens Museum, which seems to have remained unnoticed
until 1888, when the late Professor Dames, of Berlin, studied it,
and wrote a brief account of some unique specimens contained in it.!
By far the most important excavations hitherto made at Pikermi,
however, are those which were undertaken by Professor Albert
Gaudry, under the auspices of the Paris Academy of Sciences,
between 1855 and 1860. These researches made known nearly all
the essential facts concerning the extinct mammalian fauna entombed
in the Pikermi formation, and led to several brilliant generalizations
first published in Professor Gaudry’s well-known work on the
geology and fossils of Attica in 1862.2 During the last 40 years
only insignificant diggings have been attempted, among them being
those of the late Professors Neumayr, of Vienna, and Dames, of
Berlin.
Owing to the permanent mark left by former excavations it was
easy to choose sites for the new explorations of the British Museum.
Three pits dug in continuation of former workings soon yielded
bones, and eventually furnished a very extensive collection. Two
trial pits at other points and in slightly different horizons produced
nothing except two decayed bone-fragments. Water still occurs
even in dry weather a little beneath the bed of the stream; but the
difficulties from this source are now much less than formerly, owing
to Mr. Skousés’ system of irrigation, by which the flowing stream
of the ravine is usually diverted at a point high up in its course.
The Pikermi formation has already been well described by
Professor Gaudry. It consists chiefly of red marl, varied with
lenticular masses of rounded pebbles and occasional yellowish sandy
layers. Some of the pebble-beds are cemented into hard con-
glomerate. The materials are such as might have been derived
from the mountain mass of Pentelicon which forms the neighbouring
high ground, the marl itself being apparently the detritus of marble
or other calcareous rock. The formation is of great extent in Attica,
and has only attracted special notice at Pikermi because a stream
happens to have cut a deep ravine through it and exposed fine
sections of the beds.
As already observed by Professor Gaudry, the bones at Pikermi
occur on two definite horizons, those in the lower bed being less
fragile and better preserved than those in the upper bed.* In two
of our new pits where the upper horizon is well exposed, it is
subdivided into two distinct layers by a nearly barren deposit of
marl from 30 to 45cm. in thickness. The rotten nature of the bones
is partly due to their having once been close to or at the surface,
1 W. Dames, ‘‘ Hirsche und Mause von Pikermi in Attika’’: Zeitschr. deutsch.
geol. Ges., 1883, p. 92, pl. v.
2 A. Gaudry: ‘‘ Animaux Fossiles et Géologie de |’ Attique,’’ Paris, 1862. This
work contains references to previous literature.
3 A. Gaudry, ‘‘ Résultats des Recherches faites 4 Pikermi (Attique), sous les
Auspices de I’ Académie’: Comptes Rendus, vol. xlii (1856), p. 291.
Dr. A. Smith Woodward—The Bone-beds of Pikermi. 483
and eroded by the present stream before being covered with the
three or four metres of superficial gravel which now preserves them.
The bones are also broken by the penetrating rootlets of trees.
The lower horizon is at a depth varying from one to two metres
below the upper horizon, and thus secure from destruction by surface
agencies. Like each of the two upper bone-beds, it is rarely more
than 30cm. in thickness; while the marl above and below it is
almost destitute of bones, rarely yielding more than rotten fragments,
but quite prolific in scattered land and fresh-water shells. The
deepest excavations beneath the lower bone-bed descended for about
three and a half metres, and furnished the bone-fragments and shells
throughout. No traces of vegetable matter were observed in any layer.
So far as can be judged at present from the new excavations, the
three bone-beds of Pikermi are all of the same nature and contain
the same mammalian remains. The bones are massed together in
inextricable confusion, and are often mixed with a few pebbles.
Large and smal! bones, whole specimens and splintered fragments,
all occur together; but the small bones are usually most numerous
at the bottom of the layer. Several specimens of approximately the
same shape and size are often met with in groups, as if they had
been sorted by water in motion. On one occasion, for example, the
scattered remains of many gazelles were found together; in another
spot there were several skulls of T’ragoceras in one mass; in other
cases nearly all the bones belonged to limbs of Hipparion; while
one area was specially characterized by pieces of vertebral columns
of Ruminants and Hipparion. The elongated bones and elongated
groups, however, were never observed to trend in one definite
direction, but were always disposed quite irregularly ; thus
indicating that in the region where the bones eventually
accumulated, the water by which they had been transported either
became still or moved only in gentle eddies.
Very few nearly complete skeletons occur, and even when chains
of vertebrae are preserved most of the ribs are lacking. The only
approximately complete skeletons observed during the recent
excavations were those of some Carnivora (Ictitherium, Metarctos, and
Macherodus). It is, however, obvious that many of the bones were
still held together by ligaments at the time when they were buried ;
for numerous complete feet and nearly complete limbs are found
with all the bones in their natural position. It is also to be noted
that in most cases these limbs are sharply bent so that the two or
three segments are almost parallel, as if they had retained the
contraction assumed at death. Some decomposition of the soft parts
had already taken place even in these instances; for a few of the
phalanges of the hipparions and ruminants are often wanting when
the other bones of the limb are still in their natural association,
while the phalanges of the rhinoceros feet seem to be always lost,
though the three associated metapodials are quite common.
Similarly, the loosely articulated mandible of the Ungulata is nearly
always removed from the skull; it is only commonly preserved in
place in the Carnivora and Quadrumana.
484 Dr. A. Smith Woodward—The Bone-beds of Pikermi.
The majority of the bones are quite isolated, and most of the
skulls of the antelopes are so much broken that only the frontlets
with horn-cores remain. A large proportion of the limb-bones are
also sharply fractured, some having completely lost both extremities ;
and small pointed splinters of bone, apparently most of Rhinoceros,
are often very numerous. Some of the breaking must have taken
place before the soft parts had entirely decayed, as is shown by
certain feet of Rhinoceros and many limbs of Hipparion and antelopes.
In a few cases I found the three associated metapodials of Rhinoceros
with the distal ends as sharply removed as if they had been cut off
with one blow of a hatchet. In several instances I carefully
extracted the nearly complete hind limbs of Hipparion from the
soft marl, and in all except one I found that the tibia ended
abruptly in a sharp, oblique fracture at its middle, with no trace
of the proximal end of this bone or of the femur. Moreover, nearly
all the isolated tibias of Hipparion were similarly fractured ; while
among about fifty examples of humerus of the same animal only
three complete specimens were found, all the others being sharply
broken at the weakest point of the shaft. It is therefore evident
that the limbs were often torn from the trunk by a sharp break at
the weakest point before the decomposition of the soft parts had
proceeded far enough to destroy the ligaments.
The new researches make scarcely any additions to the known
fauna of the Pikermi bone-beds, and confirm Professor Gaudry’s
statement that the smaller rodents, insectivores, and bats are absent.
The only striking discovery consists in fragmentary evidence of
a gigantic tortoise, at least as large as the largest hitherto found
in HKurope. Many specimens, however, afford important new in-
formation concerning the species already described. Notable among
these are a few portions of skull and a mandible of Pliohyrax,
a skull of Samotherium, a skull of Hystrix primigenia, and the greater
part of a skeleton of Metarcios. Remains of Hipparion are the
most abundant fossils, and the new series of specimens illustrates
variations and growth-stages more satisfactorily than any collection
hitherto made. Isolated bones and skulls of Rhinoceros are also
common, and antelope remains occur everywhere in great profusion.
Limb-bones of Giraffidee are found abundantly in the lower bone-
bed. Mastodon is rarer, but two small skulls were obtained from
the new excavations, and several very large limb-bones were found.
Among Carnivora, Ictitherium is the commonest form ; but remains
of Hyana are not infrequent, and evidence of four individuals of
Macherodus was discovered during the present diggings. Coprolites
of some bone-feeding Carnivore, probably Hyena, also occur. Skulls
and other portions of IMesopithecus are frequently met with. The
shells of the small Testudo marmorum are sometimes complete, but
always lack the skull and other bones of the skeleton. The
Chelonian shells themselves are, indeed, more frequently broken
and disintegrated, and a large proportion of the bone-fragments
discovered between and below the bone-beds are recognizable as
pieces of them. It is noteworthy that a good specimen of Testudo
Dr. A. Smith Woodward—The Bone-beds of Pikermi. 485
marmorum was found in the marl between the upper and lower bone-
beds in one pit; and a small undetermined snake was discovered in
a similar position in another pit.
While the excavation of these fossils was in progress at Pikermi,
Mr. Frank Noel, of Achmet Aga in Northern Eubcea, accompanied
Sir Edwin Egerton on one of his visits. He recognized that the
Pikermi marls were similar to some containing fossil bones on his
own estate.. He also perceived the identity of the remains of
Hipparion at Pikermi, with the commonest fossil bones with which
he was familiar at Achmet Aga. Many years ago he had sent some
of these bones to the Athens Museum; but they seemed to have
been lost and had never received any attention from the Greek
naturalists. He therefore invited the British Museum to examine
the discovery on his estate, and decide whether or not the extinct
Pikermi fauna was there represented.
A brief visit to the locality where the bones occur, near Achmet
Aga, sufficed to confirm Mr. Noel’s impressions. The interesting
spot is in a deep ravine on the steep slope just below the
village of Drazi, at an elevation of nearly 200 metres above the
sea-level. The torrent has cut through a thick deposit of red,
indurated marl, much like that of Pikermi: and bones are noticeable
in the section at many points. Three days’ digging at one place
revealed two bone-beds separated by a thin layer of marl. The
bones seem to be as abundant and varied as those at Pikermi,
and they exhibit exactly the same features. Hipparion is again
the commonest fossil, and mingled with the complete bones are
splintered fragments. Land and fresh-water shells also occur in
great abundance, especially a species of Planorbis.
Nearly all the bones discovered during this brief visit were too
rotten for preservation; but the weathered face of the section alone
was explored, and the fossils would doubtless be found in good con-
dition further inwards. Among them could be recognized, besides
the innumerable remains of Hipparion, parts of a skull and tibia of
Rhinoceros, a frontlet of Gazella brevicornis, jaws of a small ruminant,
a large ruminant metapodial (probably Samotherium), part of a skull
and mandible of Ictitherium, and some small carnivore vertebra.
There was also part of the skull of a small species of Orycteropus,
which I was able to preserve and bring for comparison with the
skull of the same genus from Samos now in the British Museum.
From these observations it is evident that the Pikermi bone-beds
are not merely a local accident, but are due to some widespread
phenomenon. The two localities described are about 60 miles
apart, and seem to be situated in two distinct Tertiary basins
separated by a barrier of Cretaceous limestones and earlier rocks.
Whatever the catastrophe may have been by which the animals
were suddenly destroyed, it clearly happened in both places at least
twice, if not three times, within a comparatively short period. The
1 For a brief account of the district see F. Teller, ‘‘ Der Geologische Bau der Insel
Euboea’’: Denk. k. Akad. Wiss., math.-naturw. Cl., vol. x] (1880), pp. 156-160.
486 Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark.
powerful force which broke up and transported the bodies before
they had completely decomposed, was probably the same in each
case; while the final resting-place of the bones both at Pikermi
and Drazi must have been beneath comparatively tranquil water,
where they could be quickly buried in mud. ‘The absence of all
trace of vegetable matter is curious; but the most plausible
explanation of the broken limbs and torn portions of trunks seems
to be, that the bodies were hurried by torrential floods through
thickets or tree-obstructed watercourses, before they reached the
lakes in which they finally rested. Accompanying stones in rapid
motion may account for some of the bone-fragments.
II.—On some CrustackA coLLEcTED By Miss Caronine BiruEy
AnD Miss L. Cornanp From tHE Upper Creracrous or Faxes,
DENMARK.
By Henry Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S., V.P.Z.8., F.G.8.
(PLATE XII.)
T is, I regret to say, some long time since my friend Miss Caroline
Birley placed in my hands the series of Crustacea which she
had, with the assistance of Miss L. Copland, collected from the
Upper Cretaceous of Faxe, Denmark.
As in the interval, K. O. Segerberg has figured and described
many of these species in Sweden,’ I propose to give a translation
of his descriptions of such species as I find to be identical with
those in Miss Birley’s collection, it being obviously needless to
describe them over again.
Miss Birley has favoured me with the following note on the
Upper Cretaceous quarry of Faxe, Denmark :—
‘‘Dr. Henry Woodward, having kindly undertaken to report on
the Crustacea obtained by Miss L. Copland and myself on two
visits to the Upper Cretaceous (Danian) beds of Faxe, Denmark,
has asked for a note on the locality, known to English geologists
far better by repute than from actual experience.
“Situated in the south-east of the island of Zealand or Seeland,
where, though the land is rich and fertile, the scenery is merely
pretty with beech-woods and grass meadows, Faxe offers little to
the ordinary tourist, and when we were there only three trains
daily connected it with Copenhagen, the journey occupying from
23 hours to 63. There were then three stations with the name of
Faxe—Faxe, Faxe Strand (now Stubberup), and Faxe Laderplads—
and Faxe being an inland hill, and not an island, as the usual
misspelling of the name indicates, we dismounted at the first,
and saw opposite, a little hostel, the only visible building. Here
a genial couple made us so comfortable, in homely Danish fashion,
that I can only add the fact that there is a more orthodox-looking
inn in Faxe village, a mile or so away. From either end, the quarry
is reached in a few minutes walk. Danish is the only language
1 Geol. Féren. Stockholm, 1900.
Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark. 487
spoken, but a little of it goes a long way with the intelligent and
friendly people.
“ Approaching the quarry from the north, the low green hill rises
before one like a high railway embankment, and on entering by an
upland path, or through the cutting for the transport railway, one
finds that a large portion of the hill has already been excavated, in
a shape between the letter L and a high boot narrowed at the top.
The greatest length, about half a mile, is from east to west, and the
cliffs or walls which practically surround the quarry, rise to heights
varying from 60 to 80 feet. The character of the rock ranges from
@ compact creamy or pale yellow limestone, used for building
purposes, to ordinary white chalk, coral occurring in large masses
in this ancient coral-reef. Unfortunately I have no notes of the
sequence of the beds, and probably the zones have not yet been
worked out. The fossils of most frequent occurrence are the coral
Cladocora dichotoma, carapaces of Dromiopsis rugosa, and casts of
Nautilus (Hercoglossa) danicus and Trochus levis. Baculites Fawjusit,
always mentioned as characteristic of this deposit, must be more
frequent or better preserved in the ‘ Faxelaget’ of Stevns Klint and
the island of Moen. If we met with it at all in Faxe, it was rarely.
The prevalence of Gasteropods is a marked feature, and among the
more striking of our acquisitions are a Voluta allied to V. Lamberti
and a large Pleurotomaria. The shells almost always occur as casts.
“ Fallen boulders of pink granite may occasionally be noticed in
the quarry, and one at least was then in siti near its northern
entrance.”— C, Birley.
The youngest member of the Cretaceous formation of Scandinavia
is the Danian of Faxe (spelt incorrectly ‘Faxoe’ by Darwin,’
Prestwich, and others). This stage is wanting in England, but has
its equivalent in the Danian and Maestrichtian systems of Belgium
and Holland, and the Calcaire Pisolitique and Calcaire & Baculites
of France. According to Prestwich it is from 45 to 50 feet thick,
and consists almost entirely of fragments of corals and Polyzoans
(Bryozoa), with Nautilus Danicus, Belemnitella mucronata, Baculites
Fawasti, Cyprea bullaria, ete.?
K. O. Segerberg* writes: —‘“The lower layer of the Faxe
Chalk is composed of compact or hard tubular limestone, largely
composed of corals, hence called coral-chalk. Here and there one
finds a lighter and less compact bed almost wholly composed of
Bryozoa. Both the coral-chalk and the Bryozoa-chalk are very rich
in fossils, contrasting in this respect with the Saltholms Chalk,
which is a more homogeneous, and in its upper layer looser, chalk-
rock, formed under other conditions than the Faxe Chalk, which
is the remains of an old coral-reef.”
1 Charles Darwin described some remains of Cirripedia (Pollicipes striatus,
P. elegans) from Faxe (incorrectly spelt Faxoe), Denmark: Pal. Soc., 1851, pp. 70, 76.
It is, I regret, spelt ‘ Faxoe’ on the Plate « accompanying this p aper. —H. W.
2 Prestwich’s “ Geology,’’ 1888, vol. ii, pp. 7 and 302.
3 *¢ De Anomura och Brachyura Dekapoderna i inom Skandinaviens Yngre Krita”’
Geol. Foren. I Stockholm Férhandl., 1900, Bd. xxii, H. 6, p. 1.
488 Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark.
In Miss Birley’s collection there is (in addition to various
portions) an entire carapace of Galathea which agrees best with
Galathea munidoides, K. O. Segerberg (Pl. XII, Fig.8). I have also
referred to this species the small detached chela (Pl. XII, Fig. 9).
I mentioned the carapace of Galathea in my second year’s
Anniversary Address to the Geological Society of London.
The subjoined descriptions have been most obligingly translated
for me by Mr. C. A. Ryman, from Mr. K. O. Segerberg’s paper
“De Anomura och Brachyura Dekapoderna inom Skandinaviens
Yngre Krita.” ?
MACROURA—ANOMALA.
Fam. GALATHEIDA, Dana.
1888. Galatheide, Henderson: Anomura, p. 116.
1894. Gaiathéidés, Milne-Kdwards et Bouvier: Galathéidés, p. 191.
1897. Galathéidés, Milne- Edwards et Bouvier: Dredging by ‘‘ Blake,’”’ xxxy.
One often finds both in the coral-chalk and the Bryozoan-chalk
fragments or casts of carapaces with those peculiar cross strize which
are characteristic of the different genera of this family. Steenstrup
had already noticed these, and created the species Galathea strigifera.
Lundgren was the first who attempted to describe and illustrate such
fragments. Along with these Crustacean remains are found small
claws, which from their size, flat form, and finely serrated edges
agree with the type peculiar to this family. Von Fischer-Benzon
was the first who noticed and identified these claws. This is all that
is mentioned about the fossil representatives of this group in the
earlier literature. In 1897 Moericke has contributed some valuable
information on the genus Galathea in “ Die Crustaceen der
Sternberger Schichten.” In this are recorded no less than four
species of this family from the youngest Jurassic formation, all,
however, of a type alien to the Danian. We may also refer to
Pelseneer (Decapod. du Maestricht, p. 166) and Ristori (Crost.
Pliocen, p. 36).
- When studying the collections from Faxe in the Mineralogical
Museum at Copenhagen, K. O. Segerberg says, ‘‘I was fortunate
enough to find amongst the matrix of Bryozoan-chalk several well-
preserved specimens with the rostrum in more or less good condition.
By means of this material I have also been able to give a complete
description of Galathea strigifera, Steenstrup.” [This species is
not represented in Miss Birley’s collection. |
GALATHEA STRIGIFERA, Steenstrup, sp.
P Galathea strigifera, Steenstrup, sp.
1866. ae e, Von Fischer-Benzon : Das Alter d. Faxekalkes, p. 28,
pl. v, figs. 4-6.
1867. 55 55 Lundgren: Faxekalken, p. 11.
1900. i 59 Segerberg: De Anomura och Brachyura Dekapoderna in.
Skandinav. Yngre Krita, pl. i, figs. 1, 2 ?
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., February 21, 1896, vol. lii, p. cviii.
* Geol. Foren. I Stockholm Férhandl., 1900, Bd. xxii, H. 5, pp. 42, 3 plates.
Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark. 489
Length (of the specimen in the diagram), 6mm. ; breadth, 4mm.
The greatest breadth is just behind the middle.
Rostrum triangular; its superior surface is concave, with three
or four sharp spines on each side, which are directed forwards
and diminish in size from before backwards. Anterior margin
narrow and a little elevated near the point. Lateral margin curved
somewhat outwards behind the centre, and provided anteriorly
with small pointed teeth which are directed forwards, and of which
the anterior one is a little larger than the rest. The occipital
sulcus and its branches are shallow. The surface of the carapace is
characterized by more or less well-marked cross-lines, of which the
two anterior ones are drawn out into a short point directed forwards
and the posterior ones run from side to side. Between these,
as well as on the rostrum, the surface is more or less granulated.
Cardiac region more or less prominent, and in some specimens pro-
vided with a sulcus in front.
This species varies in this respect, that the teeth on the rostrum
are sometimes fairly large, and sometimes are very minute, needle-
shaped, and nearly invisible.
Regarding the carapace, G. strigifera shows a great similarity
with G. strigosa (found in the North Sea), and is perhaps a precursor
of this form.
This species occurs abundantly both at Annetorp and Faxe.
The following species of Galathea is in Miss Birley’s collection :—
GALATHEA MuNIDoIDES, K. O. Segerberg. (Pl. XII, Figs. 8, 9.)
(Figures enlarged 4 times nat. size.)
K. O. Segerberg: Geol. Foren. I Stockholm Férhandl., 1900, Bd. xxii, H. 4,
Pir iy Hes Of
This species is represented by two rather incomplete specimens,
preserved as casts, both from Faxe. The length of the specimen
figured in Pl. XII, Fig. 8 is 7 mm., the breadth about 4:5 mm.
The rostrum is narrow aud triangular, its superior surface smooth
and slightly concave, the borders are smooth and provided on each
side of the base with a tooth directed forwards. The anterior margin
of the rostrum is fairly well raised; the iateral margin is curved
in front of and behind the antero-lateral branch of the occipital
furrow, but is otherwise straight with indistinct, blunt teeth. The
occipital furrow and its branches are well marked. The cross-lines
are elevated, and run posteriorly from side to side in a way peculiar
to this species. The cardiac region is not prominent. The gastric
region anteriorly is sharply distinguished from the frontal region,
which is situated on a lower level; in the centre it is provided
with a ridge which is continued on to the rostrum. On both sides of
this ridge, a little behind the front border, are four small prominences
arranged in a semicircle and diminishing in size outwards.
This species exhibits, particularly in the form of its rostrum,
an interesting transitional form between the genera Galathea and
Munida. The triangular form of the rostrum and its superior
490 Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark.
surface being slightly concave show its relationship to Galathea,
and on the other hand the non-serrated ridges and the two teeth
situated at the base on either side are found in the Munida-type,
which is represented by Munida primeva, u.sp.
Several existing species are known which, as regards the formation
of the rostrum, are transitional forms between Galathea and Munida,
which, however, have been arranged as separate genera. Such are
the Pleuroncodes of Stimpson and the Grimothea of Dana. In both
these genera one finds a small, triangular, non-serrated rostrum,
provided with teeth on each side at the base,
Pleuroncodes} differs, however, both from Galathea and Iunida,
amongst other peculiarities, in its breadth. Recent authors” consider
Grimothea to belong to the genus Munida. Of the living species of
Galathea, G. pusilla, Henderson,’ is nearest to G. munidoides; but
its rostrum is provided with a small tooth on each side in front.
Mounipa primava, K. O. Segerberg.
K. O. Segerberg: Geol. Féren. I Stockholm Férhandl., 1900, Bd. xxii, H. 5, p. 8,
pl. i, fig. 6.
Only one specimen of this species has been found from Faxe,
preserved as a cast; still, the shell can be partially seen at the
sides, but the rostrum and lateral teeth are broken. The greatest
breadth at the centre of the carapace is 5 mm.; the length from the
base of the rostrum to the posterior margin is 6 mm. The rostrum
is narrow, spear-shaped, provided with a small tubercle on its
superior surface, from which runs a fine ridge along the middle line
as far as the occipital furrow ; at the base of the rostrum there is
on each side a pointed tooth. The anterior margin is well defined
on either side of the rostrum, and still more along the lateral
margin. The lateral margins are slightly but evenly curved, and
provided with small pointed teeth directed forwards; of these the
anterior one is much larger than the rest, and forms the demarcation
of the angle between the anterior margin and the lateral margin.
The occipital furrow and its branches are deep and distinct. The
regions on the border are well defined, and are thinly but sharply
granulated. Besides this the superior surface shows several ridges,
anteriorly alternately longer and shorter, and here and there are
small tubercles. The cardiac region is short and broad, with
a narrow, straight sulcus in front and behind; it is crossed by three
lines, the two anterior ones converging towards the sides. The
middle part in front of the occipital furrow forms an oval area
pointed towards the sides. On the gastric region, near the middle
line, in front, are two tubercles (on the carapace itself there have
probably been teeth corresponding to these); outside and below
these are smaller, more or less pointed ones (on both the cast and
1 Ortmann: Arthropoda, p. 1150.
? Milne Edwards: ‘‘ Crustacés du Cap Horn,’’ p. 32.
3 Henderson: Anomura, p. 121, pl. xii, fig. 1.
4 After the original specimen had been drawn it was being still further developed,.
and in this operation the rostrum was unhappily destroyed.—K. 0. S.
Dr. Henry Woodward—COretaceous Crustacea, Denmark. 491
the test). A similar form of rostrum, with lateral teeth placed
closely together at the base, is also found in recent species of
Munida, e.g. M. forceps, Milne-Kdw.'
Lundgren says, in the description of Galathea strigifera, “that
the lateral parts, defined by the above-mentioned curved lines, are
granulated, and that the middle one is most prominent.” This
shows probably that Lundgren, amongst his specimens of Galathea,
had also the above described species of Munida.
BRACHYURA—ANOMALA.
Fam. DROMIDZ, Stebbing.
Gen. Dromropsis, Reuss.
1859. Dromiopsis, Reuss: Fossil. Krabben, p. 18.
1866. Dromia, Von Fischer-Benzon: Alter d. Faxekalkes, p. 23.
1900. Dromiopsis, K. O. Segerberg: Geol. Féren. I Stockholm Forhandl.,
IBdS xxi Hos p09.
The carapace is circular or pentagonal, a little broader than long,
much arched in front, flatter behind. The rostrum is triangular
and bent downwards, with a shallow sulcus or furrow along the
DriaGRAM OF REGIONS AND Divisions oF CARAPACE IN A BRACHYURAN DEcAPOD
CRUSTACEAN.
Se- Wy
YY
Yih
Sl -- Wy, .
es Ws ait
Mn
Upper Surface. Under Surface.
Sf. frontal furrow. Ge. . epigastric lobe.
Tif rostrum. Gm. mesogastric lobe.
0. orbits. Gp. _ protogastric lobe.
Mila. antero-lateral margin. Gu. urogastric lobe.
Mip. postero-lateral margin. H. hepatic region.
Mp. posterior margin. C. cardiac region.
Se. cervical or occipital furrow. Ba. antero-branchial lobe.
Si. lateral furrow. Bp. postero-branchial lobe.
Sbre. branchio-cardiac furrow. ie pterygostomial region.
middle line; its borders are even and raised; the orbits are rather
small, somewhat close together, and are open internally towards the
rostrum, from which they are only separated by a small ridge of
the posterior wall. The inferior orbital border is provided with
1 Milne-Edwards et Bouvier: Dredging of SS. ‘‘ Blake,”’ p. 28, pl. ii, fig. 8.
492 Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark.
two teeth, of which the external one is the larger. The antero-
lateral margins (Mla.) are long, much curved, and provided with
teeth varying in number and often confluent. The postero-lateral
margins (Mpl.) are shorter, nearly straight, and curving inwards;
they are provided in front with one or two more or less indistinctly
marked teeth. The posterior margin (Mp.) is generally short and
somewhat incurved. The superior surface of the carapace is
divided transversely into three areas by two sulci (or furrows),
the anterior of which is named the cervical furrow (Sc.) (called
also the occipital furrow), and the posterior the branchio-cardiac
furrow (Sbre.) or lateral furrow (SI.). The branchio-cardiac
furrow is more or less bent backwards, and often takes a sharp
curve forwards, and, having received a smaller sulcus from the
part in front, it continues on to the arched margin of the carapace
forming the lateral furrow (SI.). This sulcus, which marks the
middle of the superior surface of the carapace, is indicated only
by a notch on the lateral margin over which it passes, and is
continued forwards upon the inferior orbital border of the pterygo-
stomial region (P.). -
Of the different regions observed on the carapace the epigastric
(Ge.) and the mesogastric lobes (Gm.) appear in front of the occipital
furrow (also called the cervical furrow) (Sc.). The two epigastric
lobes (Ge.) are nearly always well marked, and are separated by the
frontal furrow (Sf.). The mesogastric lobe (Gm.) is prolonged in
front into a narrow point, and divided behind into two parts by
a sulcus running lengthwise, and in decorticated specimens, from
which the shell has been dissolved away, this furrow is always well
defined by two well-marked raised surfaces (these marks being due
to the insertion of muscles on the interior of the carapace). Behind
the occipital furrow (also called the cervical furrow), in the front
part of the centre of the carapace, is the broad urogastric lobe (@u.)
(not always well defined). This is separated from the next region
by a narrow, plane or concave surface. The cardiac region (C.) is
pentagonal, with the pointed portion directed backwards, and on
decorticated specimens nearly always marked by three tubercles,
forming a triangle; on each side, behind the occipital furrow, are
the two large branchial regions (Ba. and Bp.). The anterior
branchial regions (Ba.), situated in front of the lateral sulcus or
furrow, possess on decorticated specimens, in the centre, a pointed
elevation. The posterior branchial regions (Bp.) are of a more
or less marked rhomboidal form. Two tubercles can always be
seen in decorticated specimens in the middle of the occipital furrow.
The pterygostomial region (P.) is very narrow. On this, behind
the lower border of the orbit, is a transverse furrow or sulcus,
which is often sharply marked, particularly on the inner part,
where the region behind is more or less pointed.
The superior surface is granulated or smooth, the curved part
nearly always smooth. In the collections both from Annetorp and
Faxe there are isolated well-preserved claws, which in their short,
stout form and the direction of the index and pollex resemble the
Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark. 493
Dromia-type, but which are devoid of the denticulations peculiar
to Dromia. These claws belong, no doubt, to representatives of the
genus Dromiopsis, which is so stated in one case (cf. D. levior) ;
among others of the figured species one is granulated in the same
way as the shell of D. rugosa, and belongs probably to that species.
Of the genus Dromiopsis four species are already described, all
belonging to the newer Chalk formation, and all except D. elegans
known only from the Faxe Chalk. Dromiopsis gibbosus, Schliit.,’
from the Belemnites mucronatus Chalk formation of Westphalia, does
not belong to this family, but ought probably to be referred to the
family Homolopsis of Bell.
Dromiopsis resembles in many respects Dromia, and Von Fischer-
Benzon considered these two to be identical. Lundgren is also
of the same opinion. This is easily explained, as the genus Dromia
formerly comprised many more types than are now included with our
present knowledge of the genus. (Ortmann, “ Arthropoda,” p. 114.)
“ After examining recent specimens in the Zoological Museum
of Copenhagen I have been able to show distinct generic differences
between Dromia and the genus Dromiopsis as proposed by Reuss.
Dromia differs very distinctly from Dromiopsis by its three-toothed
rostrum, and also by its long, nearly straight posterior border, much
larger pterygostomial region, and its very peculiarly serrated claws.
The genus Dromiopsis ought thus to be maintained and to be
considered as a precursor of Dromia. This last-mentioned genus
appears first in the Tertiary period, from which Bittner? has
described several types all with the rostrum three-toothed. But
as regards the pterygostomian region these Tertiary species of
Dromia resemble Dromiopsis (cf. Bittner, ‘Brachyuren v. Vicenza,
Neue Beitriige,’ p. 307).”
“The genus Dromilites of Milne-Edwards,? belonging to the
Tertiary formation, with which Dromiopsis has also been considered
as identical, ought necessarily to be revised. The species belonging to
this genus differ more or less from Dromiopsis by the denticulations
on the lateral borders, by more distinct regions, and by the shape
of the branchial regions. Zittel’s * diagnosis of the relationship both
of Dromiopsis and Dromia is now inapplicable.”
Dromiopsis RuGosA, Schlotheim, sp. (P]. XII, Figs. 8a, b, and 4a-c.)
1820. Brachyurites rugosus, Schlotheim: Petrefactenkunde, p. 36, pl. i, fig. 2.
1851. Brachywrites rugosus, Quenstedt : Petrefactenkunde, p. 401, pl. xxxi, fig. 11.
1859. Dromiopsis rugosa, Reuss: Fossil. Krabben, p. 10, pl. ui, figs. 2, 3;
pl. v, fig. 6.
1866. Dromia rugosit, Von Fischer-Benzon: Alter d. Faxekalkes, p. 24, pl. iii,
figs. 1-3.
1867. Dromia rugosa, Lundgren: Faxekalken, p. 10.
1900. Dromiopsis rugosa, Schlotheim, sp.: K.O. Segerberg, Geol. Foren. I Stock-
holm Foérhandl., Bd. xxii, H. 5.
1 Schliiter: Krebse d. nérdl. Deutschl., p. 610.
2 Bittner: Brachyuren vy. Vicenza, Neue Beitrage, p. 306, pl. i, fig, 5; Decapoden
d. pannon. Tertiar, pp. 21, 25, pl. ii, figs. 5, 6
5 Bell: ‘‘ Crust of London Clay,’’ p. 27, pl. v, figs. 1-9; pl. vi.
* Zittel: Palaeont., ii, p. 703.
494. Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark.
The carapace in outline is of a rounded pentagonal form, with its
greatest breadth a little anterior to the middle; of nearly the same
length as breadth (1 : 1:1); very convex, particularly anteriorly, the
posterior part being flatter and often having a depression in the centre.
In size it varies from a breadth of a few millimetres up to 40 mm. ;
generally it is from 20 to 25mm. The rostrum (R.) is strongly
depressed; the orbits (O.) are deep; their inferior border forms
a blunt process with two teeth. The antero-lateral margin
commences with a sharp tooth somewhat below the inferior orbital
border; in other respects the lateral margins agree generically.
The posterior margin is sometimes short and much curved, in
others long and less curved; this is probably due to difference
in sex. The occipital and lateral sulci or furrows are deep and
sharply defined; somewhat broader on the superior surface than on
the curved part. On the inner half of the anterior branchial regions
there runs parallel to these a much shallower middle sulcus, which
forms a right angle externally and ends in the lateral furrow (on
some specimens there are traces of such a curved furrow going off
anteriorly towards the occipital or cervical furrow). The epigastric
lobes form two pointed eminences. The mesogastric lobe is well
defined, and elevated posteriorly. The protogastric lobes are not
so well defined in this type. The urogastric lobe is characterized
by irregular eminences. Between this and the cardiac region there
is a saddle-like depression, the anterior part of which, towards the
sides, blends with the above described middle sulcus. The centre
of the cardiac region is more or less elevated, and anteriorly it is
externally defined by the branchio-cardiac furrow, which on some
specimens is shallower, and runs forwards and outwards and unites
with the occipital or cervical furrow. The superior surface is
ornamented with granules varying in size, which become less
posteriorly and are not so well defined (except on the nearly smooth
sulci). The inferior surface has granules only on its anterior part.
The above described details are readily seen on all decorticated
specimens and are present on even very small specimens; on larger
and older examples they have often been more or less obliterated.
Specimens with the surface of the shell well preserved are not rare ;
the granules in these are very distinct, and do not diminish in size
posteriorly, and are seen also on the arched part of the carapace.
Dromiopsis rugosa is not only without doubt one of the most
common decapods of the Faxe Chalk, but also generally one of its
most common fossils.
Of this little varying type Segerberg records having found the
following different forms (see Pl. XII, Figs. 4a—c, x 2 nat. size).
(a) Korma inflata, small, more strongly and more uniformly arched,
with the regions less markedly distinguished ; several specimens.
(Segerberg, op. cit., 1900, pl. i, fig. 10.)
(8) Forma angusta, small, strongly arched from side to side;
somewhat longer than broad, quickly tapering behind the occipital
furrow towards the very short posterior margin. The posterior
part of the mesogastric lobe separated by a well-marked sulcus from
Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark. 495
the protogastric lobes, which are pointed downwards and inwards.
This is probably a variety of D. rugosa. (Segerberg, op. cit., 1900,
pl. i, fig. 2.)
(y) Forma nodosa, large, with its middle lobes much accentuated
and elevated (particularly the posterior part of the mesogastric lobe
and the inner half of the antero-branchial regions) ; the protogastric
lobes on the antero-lateral border are also elevated. (K. O. Segerberg,
op. cit., 1900, pl. i, fig. 12.)
Dromiopsis minor, Von Fischer-Benzon, sp.
1866. Dromia minor, Yon Fischer-Benzon: Alter d. Faxekalkes, p. 26, pl. ii,
figs. 4-6.
1867. 5 », Lundgren: Faxekalken, p. 11.
1900. 9 53 K. O. Segerberg: Geol. Féren. I Stockholm Forhandl.,
Bd. xxii, H. 5, pl. i, fig. 14.
Circumference nearly round; the breadth is to the length as
16:15; the arching is fairly uniform all over, but a little flatter
posteriorly. The size varies from 15 to 27mm. in breadth. The
rostrum is broad, triangular, and not so much depressed as in
D.rugosa. The lateral margins are evenly curved ; the antero-lateral
margin begins close to and on the same level as the inferior orbital
border, and has 5-6 short conical teeth, generally well separated.
The postero-lateral margin anteriorly is marked by a tooth. The
posterior margin is longer and less curved than in D. rugosa.
The occipital furrow is fairly deep, forming an angular bend on the
pterygostomial region. Lateral furrow shallow. The different
regions much less prominent than in the preceding species. The
cardiac region is defined anteriorly by a fine straight line.
The superior surface sparsely provided with small, mostly pointed
tubercles, forming a row on each side of the lateral furrow. The
cardiac region and the postero-branchial lobes are provided with
much fewer tubercles, or they are absent altogether. In other
respects it corresponds with D. rugosa.
This species, described by Von Fischer-Benzon, was by him
supposed to be identical with D. minuta of Reuss.' The description
by Reuss, however, is very vague, differing little from D. elegans as
this species is described and illustrated by Reuss* himself, and
it is therefore probably only a form of this very variable species
from which he has formed his description. DD. minuta, Reuss,
ought thus to be abolished.
D. minor appears rarely both at Annetorp and at Faxe.
Dromiopsis ELEGANS, Steenstr. et Forchh., sp.
by Dromilites elegans (elegantulus), Steenstr. et Forchh. MS.
1859. Dromiopsis elegans, Reuss: Fossil. Krabben, p. 15, pl. iv, figs. 1, 2.
1859. Dromiopsis minuta (?), Reuss: Fossil. Krabben, p. 13, pl. iv, fig. 3.
1866. Dromia elegans, Von Fischer-Benzon: Alter d. Faxekalkes, p. 26, pl. iv,
fig. a
1867. 5p a Lunderen : Faxekalken, p. 11.
1900. as aes aK 0. Segerberg: Geol. Foren. I Stockholm Férhandl.,
Bd. xxii, H. 5, pl. i, figs. 16, 18, 19.
1 Reuss: Fossil. Krabben, p. 13, pl. iv, fig. 3.
2 Op: cit. p. 15, pl. iv, figs, 1, 2.
496 Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark.
This species is very variable in form, but the following characters
seem to be fairly constant :—
The circumference is more or less elliptical; the ratio between the
length and the breadth is generally as 1 : 1:2; the arching often
less than in the preceding species, particularly across the posterior
part. The size varies from 5 to 20mm. in breadth. The lateral
margins are provided with small, often indistinct teeth, 7-8 in
number. The lateral furrow is shallow, but distinct, being defined
behind by a small raised border which is generally noticeable even
behind the cardiac region. The posterior part of the mesogastric
region and the epigastric lobes is well marked and elevated; the
last-mentioned are elliptical and situated transversely. The limit
anteriorly being often indistinct. On some specimens the anterior
angle seems to run out into a fine line, which ends in a small
tubercle.
Of this species two types can be distinguished. One of these
particularly is more arched posteriorly, and a little broader than
long, with the largest breadth a little in front of the middle of the
carapace. The posterior margin is short, strongly curved, and
nearly smooth. The second type is broader, with its greatest
breadth over the middle. The posterior margin is long and
faintly curved; it is more or less granulated, the granules being
small, thinly and irregularly scattered. Both types, however,
pass by many intermediate forms into each other, and seem to
appear just as frequently, and thus it is impossible to distinguish
between a typical specimen and its variety.
D. elegans is fairly common at Faxe, and still more so at
Annetorp. This species appears also in Maestrichtien supérieur at
Mont de Saint-Pierre and at Ciply.’
Dromiopsis L&vior, Steenstr. et Forchh., sp.
P Dromiopsis levior, Steenstr. et Forchh. MS.
1859. », Reuss: Fossil. Krabben, p. 16, pl. iii, figs. 4-6.
1866. Dromia levior, Von Fischer-Benzon : Alter d. Faxekalkes, p. 27, pl. iv,
fig. 1.
1900. Dromiopsis levior, Steenstrup: K. O. Segerberg, Geol. Féren. I Stockholm
Foérhandl., Bd. xxii, H. 5, pl. i, fig. 15.
Larger, more strongly and evenly arched than the preceding
species. Circumference rounded. The size varies between 25 and
42mm. The rostrum is broad, triangular, with its borders strongly
raised. The orbits are deep. The external angle of the orbit is
interrupted by a broad incision which runs outwards into a wide
sulcus. The external tooth of the inferior orbital border is
considerably larger than the inner one. The antero-lateral margin
begins a little below the inferior orbital border, and its teeth are
generally confluent, forming a sharp ridge which is divided by the
occipital furrow ; both serrations are pointed anteriorly and blunt
posteriorly. The posterior margin is somewhat curved inwards.
Both the occipital furrow and the lateral furrow are shallow; the
last-mentioned is broad, defined behind by a sharp crest, which is
1 Pelseneer: Decapod. du Maestricht, p. 172.
Dr. Henry Woodward— Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark. 497
pointed at the lateral margin, and is continued on to the inferior
surface. The epigastric lobes are placed transversely and provided
with small prominences. Between these and the antero-lateral
margin there are some elevated tubercles, arranged ina row. From
an area in the middle of the anterior lateral region, which is full
of small depressions and nearly circular in shape, another row of
similar tubercles runs in a curve backwards and inwards. The
mesogastric lobe is only distinct posteriorly by its conspicuously
raised surface. The middle area of the antero-branchial lobes is well
marked by the dotted elevation already referred to in the description
of the genus. Otherwise the surface of the carapace in the cast is
quite smooth, and this is also the case when the shell is preserved.
_Of this species one specimen appears with the claw belonging to
it, although this is incompletely preserved.! The shell of this
species is smooth, except a few granules on the shortest side; the
cast is more or less reticulated. The claw referred to in Segerberg’s
paper, p. 17, pl. ii, fig. 2 belongs probably to this species. Only
rarely met with at Annetorp and Faxe.
Dromtiorsis? pEprEssa, K. O. Segerberg, 1900.
1900. Droimiopsis? depressa, K. O. Segerberg: Geol. Féren. I Stockholm Férhandl.,
Bd. xxii, H. 5, p. 18, pl. ii, figs. 3, 4?
Of this species only one specimen was obtained from Annetorp.
The rostrum is not preserved. The specimen is decorticated. The
form of the carapace is nearly pentagonal; breadth 26mm. The
distance from the superior orbital border to the posterior margin is
24mm. In front of the lateral furrow the carapace is strongly
arched ; behind the same it becomes narrower, with the lateral parts
depressed. ‘The orbits are small, narrow, and transverse. The two
teeth on the inferior orbital border are of nearly equal size. The
antero-lateral margins commence in a line with the inferior orbital
border ; in front of the occipital furrow the margin is marked by
a prominence and is curved; behind the same it is prolonged
forwards into a tooth or point, but otherwise (as on the postero-
lateral margins) it is only faintly marked, and curved inwards. The
posterior margin is long and slightly curved. The occipital furrow
is very indistinct, particularly in its inner course. The lateral
furrow (SI.), on the other hand, is distinct, but very shallow, with-
out any well-defined margin. Behind the cardiac region there is
a transverse depression. Otherwise the details of the carapace are
fairly similar to the preceding species.
This species is in some respects very similar to Dromia lator,
a recent form from the West Indies.” But as only one specimen of
the former has been found without a rostrum, and as on the whole
it is nearly related to D. levior, I have (with some doubt) referred
it to the genus Dromiopsis.
In the collections from Faxe, K. O. Segerberg has figured a very
incomplete specimen, which he thinks is probably a younger form
of this species.
1 K. O. Segerberg : op. cit., pl. ii, figs. 1, 2.
2 Loe. cit., fig. 5.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. XI. 32
498 Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark.
Dgomiorsis Brrtevm, H. Woodw., sp. nov. (PI. XII, Figs. 1a, 6.)
Derscription.—Carapace broader than deep (16 mm. broad and
12mm. deep); antero-lateral border slightly concave ; frontal
margin prominent, with a central depression. Lateral margins
rounded ; postero-lateral margin sloping inwards; posterior margin
(8 mm.) broad and nearly straight; surface sparsely granulated, but
generally smooth ; with the exception of the epigastric prominences,
and the posterior margin of the mesogastric region, the lobes of the
carapace are generally very obscurely defined; the cervical furrow
(Sc.) is most distinct and is very slightly curved; the lateral furrow
(SI) is faintly rugose, but less distinct than the cervical furrow ;
at the base of the mesogastric lobe is a short granulated band in
front of the cervical furrow, and two small pointed prominences
(divided by the median furrow), the points directed backwards, each
being marked by a minute tubercle; the cardiac region is depressed
and only faintly outlined, its surface being marked by three small
equidistant tubercles, two in front and one behind; four small
tubercles mark the border of the antero-branchial lobe, and three
the antero-lateral border. The two rounded prominences near the
anterior border of the epigastric lobes are very distinct. The
rostrum, which is rounded, is bent downwards between the orbits,
and is deeply indented by the frontal furrow. The orbits are
elongated transversely, and are open internally towards the rostrum.
Remarxs.— Two apparently full-sized specimens of this well-
marked species (16 x 12mm.) are in Miss Birley’s collection, also
one young specimen measuring 9 mm. in breadth by 6 mm. in depth ;
all three are preserved in hard compact limestone, which contains
also traces of the limbs. The species is distinguished by its well-
marked form, being broader in proportion to its depth than D. rugosa,
although specifically they are no doubt nearly related. The rostral
and frontal border is less prominent in D. Birleye, and the posterior
margin is wider and straighter than in D. rugosa. All three
examples have been decorticated.
I dedicate this species to my friend Miss Caroline Birley, who
has given so much time and attention to the study of geology and
palzontology both at home and abroad, and whose private collection
bears testimony to her devotion to science.
Formation anp Locariry.— Hard Upper Cretaceous Limestone
(Danian) of Faxe: coll. Miss Birley.
Dromtorsis Coptanpz, H. Woodw., sp.nov. (PI. XII, Figs. 2a, b.)
Desoription.—Carapace slightly broader than deep (9 X 7mm.) ;
anterior border semicircular; frontal region broad, depressed ;
orbits large, prominent, visible from above, and placed somewhat
diagonally ; enclosed externally, but open towards rostrum ; postero-
lateral margins contracting rapidly towards the posterior margin,
which is narrow, only 3 mm. wide, and emarginate. Cervical furrow
distinct; lateral furrow faint, but more strongly marked on the
margin of carapace ; antero-lateral margin very bluntly dentated or
undulated ; mesogastric and epigastric lobes slightly prominent ;
carapace generally smoothly rounded and lobes obscure.
Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark. 499
Remarxs.—This is a very well-marked glabrous form and quite
distinct in outline from any of the other species; the sides being
narrower and contracting posteriorly, and more rounded and
depressed in front; with the orbits visible from above, which is
not the case in any other species of Dromiopsis.
Among the smaller specimens of Dromiopsis I have detected
a minute, very round, smooth form; the carapace is 6mm. broad
and 5mm. deep; it agrees generally with the larger example
(Figs. 2a, 6). The cardiac region in this small specimen is more
clearly defined, and has three equidistant tubercles on its surface ;
the orbits are large and prominent, and the outline of the back is
very globular; this latter character is probably due to its being
a young individual.
I dedicate this species to Miss Copland, who participated with
Miss Birley in her geological labours and collected many of the
specimens with her own bands at Faxe.
Formation and Locatrry.— Uppermost Cretaceous (Bryozoa
Chalk), Faxe: original specimens in Miss Birley’s collection.
Homo.orsis TRANSIENS, K. O. Segerberg.
1900. Homolopsis transiens, K.O. Segerberg: Geol. Féren. I Stockholm Forhandl.,
Bd. xxii, H. 4, pl. ii, figs. 6-8.
K. O. Segerberg obtained several specimens of this species both
from Annetorp and Faxe, preserved as casts, nearly all, curiously
enough, without frontal or lateral margins being preserved (cf.
Carter, Decapod. Crust., p. 22).
Anteriorly depressed, otherwise nearly even; the length about
22mm. (on the larger, figured specimen). Rostrum narrow,
triangular, and depressed, provided with a small tubercle on each
side. Lateral and posterior margins long, straight, elevated into
aridge. Occipital furrow deep and broad at the sides, narrower
between the mesogastric and the urogastric lobes, and having two
pointed elevations in the centre. Lateral furrow narrow, faintly
defined ; nearly straight on each side of the middle line; directed
outwards and forwards. The different regions are all very
conspicuous and limited by deep sulci. The epigastric lobes are
marked by two distinct tubercles. One sees three other similar
tubercles on the protogastric lobes. The mesogastric lobe is well
defined on all sides. The urogastric lobe is pointed at the sides.
The cardiac region is pentagonal and elevated. The antero-
branchial lobes are divided on the inner side into two parts, of which
the superior one is the shorter. ‘The postero-branchial regions are
triangular and large; there is a tubercle on the inner posterior part.
The superior surface is more or less thinly and irregularly granulated.
On a younger specimen (op. cit., pl. ii, fig. 7) similar granules can
be seen, particularly on the mesogastric and cardiac lobes. On an
older one (op. cit., pl. ii, fig. 6) one sees these granules both on the
cardiac and postero-branchial lobes arranged transversely in short
rows; on account of this arrangement the casts have a somewhat
ridged appearance. Another old specimen, on the contrary (pl. ii,
fig. 8), has the posterior part nearly smooth, and the tubercles on
500 Dr. Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark.
the protogastric lobes are but little conspicuous. (This is also the
case with a single specimen preserved in Miss Birley’s collection.)
This species is in many respects very similar to H. Edwardsii,
Bell,’ from the Gault and Greensand of England, a very peculiar
form, to a knowledge of which the late Mr. James Carter*® has
made some very valuable contributions. In regard to the granulation
on the postero-branchial lobes the species from the Uppermost Chalk
(here described by Segerberg) is very similar to the Tertiary genus
Drowmilites,> which is also closely related to Homolopsis, and seems
thus to be a transitional form between these two genera.
A single, very imperfect carapace is preserved in Miss Birley’s
collection from the Danian of Faxe.
CARPILIOPSIS.
CaRPILIOPsIS ORNATA, Von Fischer-Benzon, sp. (Pl. XII, Figs. 5a, b.)
1867. Carpiliopsis ornata, vor Bere ee sp.: Alter d. Faxekalkes, p. 28,
. li, figs. 1-3.
a x10. Segerberg : Geol. Foren. I Stockholm Férhandl.,
Bd. xxii, H. 5, p. 28, pl. iii, figs. 15, 17, 18 ?
Desoription.—The carapace is sub-elliptical, equally convex
longitudinally ; the lateral margins are acute ; the antero-lateral
margins are short, rounded, and curved backwards. The postero-
lateral margins are longer and are curved inwards. The orbits are
oval, and when seen from above marked by emarginations on either
side (Pl. XII, Fig. 5a) of a broad, bluntly rounded, and slightly
notched rostrum (Pl. XII, Fig. 5b). The posterior margin is narrow
and emarginate. The upper surface of carapace is punctate, and
ornamented by raised lines and tubercles peculiar to the species ;
the general surface is very minutely ornamented with microscopic
granules.
The mesogastric lobe is marked by two minute tubercles and
a small, short, raised line behind, probably affording the only
evidence of the presence of the cervical furrow ; there is a slight
trace of a median ridge and furrow, and a rather larger tubercle
marks the centre of each epigastric lobe. One tubercle on either
side and a few minute granules scattered over the protogastric and
hepatic regions are the only interruption to the otherwise smooth
anterior surface of the carapace. ‘The cardiac region bears three
minute tubercles, and is enclosed on either side by a lyre-shaped
ridge and furrow, which bending back upon itself forms the short
lateral furrow.
_ Remarxs.— This well-marked form is represented by two
examples in Miss Birley’s collection, the larger measuring 12 mm.
in breadth by 7mm. in depth, the lesser example being 9mm. broad
and 6mm. in depth. Both are from the uppermost Cretaceous
formation of Faxe, Denmark.
The following is a list of the species of Crustacea from Faxe
recorded by K. O. Segerberg and H. Woodward :—
4 1 Bell, Crust. of Gault and Greensand: Mon. Pal. Soc., 1862, p. 23, pl. vy,
8.1, 2.
2 Carter: Decapod. Crust., 1898, p. 21.
> Bell: Crust. of London Clay, p. 27.
1900. A
Geol Mag 1901. Decade IVVelVIITPI XI.
emivee gyre del.etlith. West,N ewman imp.
Cretaceous Crustacea from Faxoe.
Dr, Henry Woodward—Cretaceous Crustacea, Denmark. 501
GALATHEID®.
Galathea strigifera, Steenstr. Danian: Annetorp and Faxe.
*
Mu
», munidoides, K.O. 8. Danian: Faxe.
nida primeva, K.O.8. Danian: Faxe.
DROMIACEA.
*Dromiopsis rugosa, Schiliit., sp. Danian: Faxe.
* minor, Von Fischer-Benzon, sp. Danian: Annetorp and Faxe.
op elegans, Steenstr. et Forchh., sp. Danian: Annetorp and Faxe.
rn levior, Steenstr. et Forchh., sp. Danian: Annetorp and Faxe.
Ns depressa, K.O.S. Annetorp and Faxe.
op Birleye, H. Woodw., sp. nov. Danian: Faxe.
*
Coplande, H. Woodw., sp. nov. Danian: Faxe.
* ”
Plagiophthalmus pentagonalis, K.O. 8. Faxe.
* Homolopsis transiens, K. O. 8. Annetorp and Faxe.
RANINOIDEA.
Raninella Baltica, K. 0.8. Faxe.
OXYSTOMATA.
Necrocarcinus senonensis, Schlit., sp. Annetorp and Faxe.
5 insignis, K. O. 8. Annetorp.
x6 bispinosus, K. O. S. Saltholm’s Chalk; Limhamn.
CYCLOMETOPA.
Titanocarcinus, sp. Annetorp.
*Oarpiliopsis ornata, Von Fischer-Benzon, sp. Annetorp and Faxe.
Xanthilites cretaceus, K.O.S. Annetorp.
Panopeus faxensis, Vou Fischer-Benzon, sp. Annetorp and Faxe.
”?
subellipticus, K.O.S. Faxe.
incertus, K. O. 8. Annetorp and Faxe.
Nors.—Those marked by a * are represented in Miss C. Birley’s collection.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII.
CRUSTACEA FROM THE Uppermost Cuatk (‘Dantan’) or Faxe, DENMARK.
Fic. 1.—Dromiopsis Birleye, H. Woodward, sp. nov. x 2 times nat. size.
a, dorsal aspect of carapace or cephalo-thorax.
b, frontal aspect of carapace, showing orbits and rostrum.
2.—Dromiopsis Coplande, H. Woodward, sp. noy. x 3 times nat. size.
a, dorsal aspect of carapace.
b, frontal aspect of carapace, showing orbits and depressed rostrum.
3.—Dromiopsis rugosa, Schlotheim, sp. Small, round, much granulated
variety. x 2 times nat. size.
a, dorsal aspect of carapace.
b, frontal aspect of carapace, showing arched form of carapace and
depressed rostrum.
4.—Dromiopsis rugosa, Schlotheim, sp. Typical, most abundant form. x 2
times nat. size.
a, dorsal aspect of carapace.
b, frontal aspect of carapace, showing rounded form of back.
c, side view, showing inflated form of frontal region and strongly
marked, transverse cervical and lateral furrows.
5.—Carpiliopsis ornata, Von Fischer-Benzon, sp. x 3 times nat. size.
a, dorsal aspect of carapace, showing the peculiar lyre-shaped markings
on the centre enclosing the cardiac region.
b, frontal aspect of carapace, showing the broad blunt rostrum which
widely separates the small orbits.
6.—Portion of a chela. x 3 times nat. size.
7.—Portion of a chela. x 2 times nat. size.
8.—Galathea munidoides, K. O. Segerberg. Dorsai aspect of cephalo-thorax.
x 4 times nat. size.
9.—Galathea munidoides, K. O. Segerberg. Penultimate joints of chela.
x 4 times nat. size.
502 Professor W. J. Sollas—Underground Temperature.
II].—On rue Rate or Increase oF UnprrGRoUND TEMPERATURE.
By Professor W. J. Sottas, LL.D., D.Se., F.R.S.
N the 22nd Report of the Committee appointed to investigate the
rate of increase of underground temperature, read this year
before the British Association in Glasgow, some remarks previously
made by me are animadverted upon; and as the Secretary, Professor
Everett, has invited me to discuss the matter with him, I take the
opportunity of entering somewhat more fully into the question of
conductivity than has hitherto seemed necessary. We read in the
Report “. . . . in view of the fact that the President of
Section C last year characterised the variation in the British Isles
‘from 1° in 384 feet to 1° in 92 feet’ as ‘a surprising divergence
of extremes from the mean,’ it is well to emphasise the connection
between gradient and conductivity. If there is anything like
uniformity in the annual escape of heat from the earth at different
places, there must necessarily be large differences in geothermic
gradients, since the rate of escape is jointly proportional to the
gradient and the conductivity.”
So well known a fact as the statement in the last sentence seems
to me scarcely to require emphasis, since it must assuredly be
present in the mind of everyone capable of discussing the question :
but it is not sufficient to make general statements of this kind; it
must also be shown, if the argument is to be of any real value, that
the known divergences of extremes from the mean may be definitely
connected with known differences in conductivity. Hitherto this
has not been attempted, and in the Address to Section © last
year it was expressly stated that ‘many cases exist which cannot
be explained in such a manner, but are suggestive of some
deep-seated cause, such as the distribution of molten matter below
the ground.” Before proceeding to enter into calculations which
may illustrate this statement, it may be worth while to observe
that we have no evidence to suggest, much less to prove, that
“there is anything like uniformity in the annual escape of heat
from the earth at different places’; the indications are altogether
to the contrary: the mere existence of volcanos obviously invalidates
the statement as an absolute affirmative, and ancient laccolites show
that in past time at least concealed sources of heat have existed not
very remote from the surface.
If, then, there is not uniformity in the annual escape of heat from
the earth at different places it may be thought unnecessary to labour
the question in greater detail, yet in view of the importance of the
subject to geological inquiry it may be worth while to consider
some special cases. If we turn to the ‘Summary of the Resulis
in the first 15 Reports by Professor Everett” (1882) we shall find
a table of mean conductivities from several kinds of rocks given in
C.G.S. measure, from determinations made by Professor Herschel,
but these, following the direction of Professor Hverett, must be
multiplied by a correcting factor 1:4 for use in calculation. For
our purpose we select the following :—
Professor W. J. Sollas—Underground Temperature. 503
Rock-salt —... eis 0113 Clays Sa. we 0025
Sandstone... das 0060 Shale... 60 0019
Flagstone... ate 0046 Coal tte AA? 0008
Rock-salt heads the list, and consequently in borings made through
this mineral the thermometric gradient should be lower than the
average. If, now, we turn to the results given on p. 88 of the
British Association Report for i882 we find that the deep Sperenberg
boring, which passed chiefly through rock-salt, shows a temperature
increase of 1° for 514 feet, and this result is regarded by the
Committee as so remarkably accurate that the effect of quadrupling
it when calculating a mean rate is thought worthy of consideration.
On p. 84 we read, ‘“‘ The Sperenberg bore, near Berlin, in rock salt,
with a depth of 8,492 English feet . . . . gave an average of
1° in 51°5 feet. This result is entitled to special weight, not only
on account of the great depth, but also on account of the powerful
means employed to exclude convection.” The mean result for all
observations given in the same Report is 1° for 64 feet, which was
corrected in a later Report to 1° for 60 feet.
Thus, the gradient of the Sperenberg bore, so far from being below
the average, such as the conductivity of rock-salt would have led
a believer in the uniform rate of loss of heat to expect, actually rises
above it. The average rate at which heat escapes through the earth
is given in the Report (1882) as 41:4 gramme degrees annually
through each square centimetre of a horizontal section of the earth’s
substance. There is an error in this number, no doubt typographical ;
it should read 51:4.
Let us calculate from the data afforded by Sperenberg the average
flow of heat through the rock-salt of that district. The gradient of
1° in 51:5 feet reduces to 0:0008537 of a degree Centigrade per
centimetre. The conductivity of rock-salt, according to the Report,
is -0113 x 14=-:01582 and 0-00035387 x 01582 = 55955 x 10-™,
which is the flow of heat in gramme degrees per second across one
square centimetre, or 55955 X 3815 x 10-*= 176-2 gramme degrees
per year per square centimetre. In other words, if the influence of
conductivity be fairly considered, it leads to the conclusion that the rate
of escape of heat at Sperenberg is more than thrice as great as that of
the mean (51°4). The data at our disposal in the case of coal-mines
do not appear to be sufficient for the purposes of discussion ; all that
can be said is, that while the sinkings were made in similar rocks
the temperature gradients obtained differ widely among themselves.
Without detailed information of the thickness and nature of the
various beds passed through in the several cases from which the
average is reduced, calculation is impossible.
A matter of extreme importance has, however, to be mentioned
in this connection. In the Report for this year we read (p. 6,
separate copy) : “In some condensed reports of Bergrath Kobrich’s
communication (but not in the full paper as given in ‘Gliickauf’),
the irregularities are attributed to chemical action in the coal seams,
causing in some cases a heating and in others a cooling; but in the
absence of more direct evidence this explanation seems rather
504 Professor J. Joly—Circulation of Salt.
forced.” Putting aside the possibility of cooling, the effect of
chemical action in evolving heat from coal-seams is well known,
and an important paper on the subject was read in 1899 by
Dr. Haldane and Mr. Meachem before the Society of Mining
Engineers. It was clearly shown by these investigators that the
heat resulting from the oxidation of marcasite in coal-seams is three
times as much as is required to account for the total rise in
temperature which the air of the ventilating current undergoes in
passing through the mines. Dr. Haldane, who has given great
attention to this subject, informs me that he considers the effect of
this chemical action has been too little considered, and that he has no
doubt it has led to an exaggerated estimate of the mean thermometric
gradient in coal borings. While recognizing the great value of the
Reports issued by the Committee of which Professor Everett is
Secretary, to whom all geologists must feel grateful for the
investigation of a question which is of the first importance to
their inquiries, I still consider that, owing to various disturbing
factors, the average rate of temperature increase with descent into
the crust may have been overestimated, and that divergence from
the mean may in some cases be connected with an irregular
distribution of molten matter below the ground.
TV.—Crrecunation oF Satt anp GronogicaL TIME.
By Professor J. Jouy, M.A., D.Sc., F.R.S.
ie the GrotocrcaL Macazine for August I gave the major limit
to the period of time we can assign to the geological age of
the Earth by the solvent-denudation method, when it is assumed
that all the chlorine of rivers is derived directly from the ocean,
and that all such chlorine (falling, as assumed, in rain) carries its
full complement of sodium from the ocean. The major limit with
these assumptions is 141 million years. A second estimate is given
on the more moderate assumption that one-third the amount of
chlorine in rivers is derived from the sea and brings with it its
full equivalent of sodium; this affords 105 millions of years as the
age. Finally, there is the original estimate based on a 10 per cent.
deduction from the chlorine of rivers as rain-borne, affording 96
millions of years.
Among such numbers we may take our choice. Outside the
upper limit we cannot go if we rely on the mean river analyses
of Sir John Murray, and of course accept the principle of uniformity
involved. It is a perfectly simple matter, which may be stated as
follows :—There is a large excess of sodium over chlorine appearing
in the mean analysis of 19 chief rivers of the world. The numbers
are 157 x 10° tons of sodium and 84 x 10® tons of chlorine carried
to the ocean per annum; or, dividing by the atomic weights, the
relative numbers of ions are as 68 sodium to 24 chlorine. The
consequence is that even if the whole of the chlorine be supposed
derived from the sea and none at all from denudation, and to reach
the rivers fully satisfied with marine sodium, there remains over such
an excess of sodium that the age cannot exceed 141 x 10° years.
Professor J. Joly—Circulation of Salt. 505
Now this was fully pointed out in my previous paper; it should
be perfectly well known to Mr. Ackroyd; but we find still that
Mr. Ackroyd maintains that ‘the chemist’s convention of taking
chlorine as a measure of sodium in rain- and river-water is service-
able, and cannot involve more final error in connection with this
problem than that indicated by the ratio of these elements in sea-
water.”
As regards the first part of this statement, we have seen that ‘the
chemist’s convention” would give hopelessly erroneous results if
applied to river analysis. As to the ratio of the chlorine and
sodium in sea-water, this has nothing to do with the matter beyond
indicating that as there is a large excess of chlorine over sodium in
the sea we may expect a similar excess to obtain in rain-water.
We may also observe that if “the chemist’s convention” were
applied to sea-water an entirely erroneous result would be obtained
on the other side; the sodium would be greatly overestimated.
On the strength of this convention, however, Mr. Ackroyd again
quotes his analyses of the Aire (a small coastal stream), and, preferring
it to the mean analysis of the large rivers, again arrives at some
thousands of millions of years. That, following similar reasoning,
a stream could be found giving an infinite age to the earth, goes
without saying. Why will Mr. Ackroyd not have the 19 rivers ?
The only objection I have heard urged against them (and it is one
of considerable weight) is that they are not numerous enough.
This is Professor Sollas’ criticism.
Coming now to the question of the origin of the salts of inland
seas, a question which Mr. Ackroyd has raised in connection with
the allowance proper for rain-borne sodium, | see in his last paper
in this Magazine that Mr. Ackroyd would explain the wide differences
in chemical composition of these waters by the effects arising from
concentration. The enormous amounts of precipitated salts required
by this hypothesis must, however, here be considered. Let it be
assumed, as he desires, that sea-water reaching closed lakes in rain-
water has concentrated until the balance between 20 per cent. of Mg Cl,
and 5 per cent. of NaCl is attained. In sea-water there is but 0°38
per cent. of MgCl,. There is, on the other hand, 2°75 per cent. of
NaCl. To reach the required percentage of Mg Cl, a concentration
of 538 times the original is necessary. This involves a concentration
of the NaCl amounting to 145 per cent. Deducting the 5 per cent.
that remains in solution, but remembering that NaCl will by no
means be the only salt precipitated, also allowing the small imported
amount of Mg SO, as a set-off against dolomitizing actions, we
finally arrive at the conclusion that the precipitated salts amount
to well over 14 times the entire mass of the existing inland sea.
This is the least quantity we must look for in such a case, for it
is the amount thrown down if the concentration had only just
attained the existing state.
I do not contend that the existence of such masses is out of com-
parison with known salt deposits ; but their absence in the particular
localities would constitute a fatal objection to supposing such extreme
506 Alfred Harker—Iagneous Rocks of Skye.
concentration. When it is remembered that the Dead Sea sinks to
depths of 400 metres we may realize that very great deposits must
be supposed existing immediately around and beneath its waters
if Mr. Ackroyd’s views are to be entertained. The fact quoted by
Mr. Ackroyd that “common salt in the southern parts of the lake
forms quite a paste” will evidently not suffice.
It is needless to quote here the views of geologists on this question.
The observations of Lartet (Bull. 8.G.F., [2] xxiii, p. 719) quoted
by De Lapparent show that “tous les sels contenus dans l’eau de
la mer Morte et celle du Jourdain sont également (a l’exception
peut-étre du brome) renfermés dans les eaux des sources chaudes du
méme bassin, notamment celles de Zara, de Callirhoé, et d’Emmaiis”
(vol. i, p. 488). The absence of iodine, so characteristic of sea-
water, the presence of bituminous and sulphurous odours, the very
local variations in composition, further lead M. de Lapparent to
the view that the intervention of sea-water cannot be looked for in
accounting for its composition; but that it represents a fresh-water
lake modified by volcanic agencies of comparatively recent date.
Having no leisure to discuss the matter further, I would close my
remarks by stating once more that the carriage of sea-salts into
many inland lakes is very certainly a fact. The difference between
Mr. Ackroyd’s and my own views on the matter is one of degree
only. If my own original estimate, that 10 per cent. of river
chlorine is from the ocean, were correct, this would involve con-
siderable importations of sea-salts in process of time into inland
waters.
V.—TueE SEQUENCE OF THE TERTIARY IGNEous Rocks oF SKYE.
By Atrrep Harker, M.A., F.G.S.
(Published by permission of the Director of the Geological Survey.)
HIS communication is the outcome of work carried out during
the years 1895-1901 in the service of the Geological Survey
of Scotland. Although this systematic work has been confined to
the Isle of Skye, information incidentally acquired, and the published
literature of the British Tertiary rocks, indicate for the conclusions
arrived at a much wider application. In this place the results must
be set down without the detailed observations upon which they
are based.
Here, as in numerous other areas and at various geological periods,
igneous activity has manifested itself successively under three
different phases, the Volcanic, the Plutonic, and the Phase of Minor
Intrusions (often called the Dyke Phase). There is further an
important distinction to be observed, neglecting which the whole
sequence is thrown into confusion. The various events recorded in
the succession fall into two distinct categories of very different orders,
which may be termed the Regional Series and the Local Series.
Those of the former class affected a very wide area—perhaps in
some cases the whole Brito-Icelandic Province, extending from the
Alfred Harker—Igneous Rocks of Skye. 507
British Isles to beyond the Arctic Circle. The episodes of the
Local Series, on the other hand, were closely related to certain
special foci of activity, declared at a very early epoch, one of
which was situated beneath what is now the mountain district of
Central Skye. While events of the two classes often alternated in
our area, and are integral parts of one complete record, they may
be regarded as in some degree independent and as bound up with
two distinct orders of crust-movements, viz. the continent-building
and the mountain-building respectively. Of the two parallel series
of eruptions, the Regional retained throughout a basic character,
while the Local developed wide petrographical differences among
the several groups. It follows that the successive episodes of the
Regional Series are much more difficult to separate and arrange in
order than those of the Local Series, and the following condensed
scheme is confessedly imperfect, especially as regards the basic lavas
and the basic dykes.
(0) Pre-Votcanic Puase: Locai Series—Here may be noticed
certain plutonic intrusions nowhere exposed at the surface and
known only from fragments in the volcanic agglomerates. They
are confined to the central mountain district, and include, in order,
(a) gabbro and (b) granite.
(1) Vorcanic Puase.—Regional activity almost continuous ; local
chiefly confined to two well-marked episodes.
Regional Series.—Fissure-eruptions of basic (with some sub-basic)
lavas throughout the region. Besides the prevalent olivine-basalts,
there are some hypersthene-basalts, augite-andesites, etc., but no
ordered sequence has been made out.
Local Series.—Central, not fissure-eruptions.
(a) Paroxysmal outbursts at certain centres, marked by great
accumulations of volcanic agglomerate; the large vents confined to
the mountain district. The chief masses of agglomerate underlie
all the lavas, and thus represent the earliest overt manifestation of
igneous activity.
(b) Eruptions, only in part paroxysmal, of intermediate and acid
rocks in one limited area on the northern border of the Cuillins.
Generalized sequence : (i) trachytes, (ii) rhyolitic tuffs and breccias,
(iii) rhyolites. This group is intercalated as a local episode in the
midst of the basic lavas.
(2) Puurontc Puase.—Regiona! activity in abeyance; local at
maximum of intensity and at the same time narrowly localized.
Local Series. — Plutonic intrusions in the forms of complex
laccolitic masses and bosses. Three groups, in order of increasing
acidity, with little or no intervals.
(a) Peridotites of the south-west Cuillins; viz., olivine-anorthite
rocks, picrites, and typical peridotites, including dunite.
(b) Gabbros of the Cuillins, ete.
(c) Granites and granophyres (plutonic) of the Red Hills.
(2 to 8) Transrrionat Puase, Local Series only.—The phase of
Minor Intrusions shows, as compared with the Plutonic, a reversal
of order among the groups of local intrusions. There seems to have
508 Alfred Harker—Igqneous Rocks of Skye.
been a certain critical epoch, at which in some places basic and acid
rocks were intruded almost simultaneously, the basic, however, being
slightly the earlier. Remarkable reactions resulted between the two
rocks so intimately associated. Here belong :—
Composite sills and dykes, composed of basic and acid rocks,
usually with triple symmetry ; occurring along a belt outside the
border of the Red Hills.
(3) Pas or Mrnor Inrrvusions in the form of sills, sheets, and
dykes. Resumption of regional activity in a new form (intrusive
instead of extrusive); local activity at certain epochs. Waning
intensity indicated during this phase by generally diminishing volume
of intrusions, both individually and as groups, and, at least in the
Local Series, by intervals of quiescence.
Regional Series.—Rocks still exclusively basic and (exceptionally)
sub-basic, so that no law of chemical variation in time can be laid down.
(a) Great group of basic sills. These are by far the most important
intrusive rocks in the whole suite, making up more than half of the
total thickness of the basaltic group over most of the area, besides
appearing in considerable force in the underlying Jurassic. Their
intrusion constituted the first episode of the Phase of Minor Intrusions.
They are here included in the Regional Series as having clearly no
relation to the special focus of Central Skye. They are most
developed in the north and west of the island, and die out towards
the mountains.
(b) Basic dykes, mostly with directions near N.W.—S.E., intruded
in vast numbers throughout the region at various epochs, the division
into successive groups being possible only in a very partial degree.
These basic dykes are to be regarded as self-constituted intrusions ;
others of earlier dates being merely the feeders of lava-flows and sills.
Local Series.—Three chief groups, having restricted areas of
distribution, each standing in relation with the corresponding
plutonic centre. Order of increasing basicity.
(a) Minor acid intrusions (dykes, irregular sills, etc.). Area of
distribution a roughly elliptic tract, centring in the granite of the
Red Hills but extending beyond, with long axis in the general
direction of the dykes (N.N.W.-S.S.E.).
(b) Minor basic intrusions. Area of distribution nearly coincident
with the gabbro of the Cuillins. The most remarkable set of
intrusions takes the form of numerous parallel sheets inclined
inwards, towards the centre of the area. In addition there is
a radiate set of dykes, partly feeders of the sheets, partly older;
also, much less perfectly developed, a tangential set of dykes.
(c) Minor ultrabasic intrusions, in the form of a radiate set
of dykes; distributed with reference to the Cuillins, or rather to
the south-western half of the Cuillin area, where the plutonic
peridotites occur.
Subsidiary Groups.—There remain certain groups of dykes, of small
importance as regards number and magnitude, concerning which more
data are needed. They belong in all cases to very late episodes, but
their precise places in the sequence have not been satisfactorily fixed.
Dr. H. Exton—Geology of Ladysmith. 509
(a) Trachyte and trachy-andesite dykes. Most of these, occurring
about Broadford and in the Sleat district, seem to belong to a group
which has its chief area of distribution farther south-east, on the
Scottish mainland, and these rocks therefore cannot be attached to
the local series of the Skye focus.
(6) Augite-andesite dykes, usually with glassy base, and others
of acid pitchstone. Dykes and sills of these two rocks are more
numerous in the Isle of Arran, where, as Professor Judd has
shown, the two types are closely associated, sometimes in composite
intrusions. In Skye the known occurrences of acid pitchstone all
lie on a narrow belt passing through the granitic tract and having
a direction corresponding with that of the dykes themselves. They
thus seem to connect themselves with the Local Series as a final and
feeble recrudescence of activity about the acid Red Hills centre.
The reversion in the closing stages to intermediate and finally to
acid types seems to suggest a new reversal of the order of eruptions,
and the composite intrusions (augite-andesite and acid pitchstone) of
Arran may perhaps be taken as pointing to a second critical epoch
during transitional conditions. These sporadic manifestations of an
igneous activity nearing its point of extinction do not, however,
afford any very firm ground for such deductions.
VI.—Gerorocicat Norres on THE NEIGHBOURHOOD oF LADYSMITH,
Natat. No. 1: On some Icneous Rocks.
By Dr. H. Exton, F.G.S.
(Communicated by Professor T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., F.G.S.)
RITING from the Station Hospital at Ladysmith, Dr. Henry
Exton, F.G.S., has communicated his observations on the
geology of the country near Ladysmith, in the northern part of
Natal, in letters to Professor T. Rupert Jones. A very noticeable
geological feature is the prevalence of an igneous rock (intrusive
andesitic diabase) on all the hills from Umbulwana, four miles east
by south from Ladysmith, to the famed Spion Kop, sixteen miles
west from here.
This rock covers all the hills, in rounded, smooth, and almost
polished boulder-like blocks, of a rusty brown hue on the surface,
with a clean blue crystalline fracture, and giving out a ringing
sound when struck. It is called by the Dutch yzad-klip (iron-
stone). The hill-sides around about here can be ascended on foot
only where a military road has been cleared to the summit. The
slopes of the hills are so profusely strewn with the rounded iron-
stone blocks that riding along them is impossible, and even walking
is a tedious task. The surface of the boulders is generally so rounded
and smooth that one has to tread between them, not upon them,
as the foot is apt to slide off. Of course, on the summits, where
these rocks are in mass, the rounding of the edges is not so apparent,
but they are alike weathered to a rich brown colour, very different
from the blue crystalline surface of a recent fracture.
510 H. W. Monckton—Gravel-Flats of Surrey and Berks.
In Pearson’s “Story of Ladysmith,” p. 108, it is stated that in
ascending Gun Hill, to capture the Boer guns, the soldiers found
that the boulders, rounded and worn by the storms of ages, were
slippery to tread on, and occasionally the foot would become wedged
between them.
The photograph marked, No. 3, gives a general view of a ridge,
on the upper level, near the hospital, from which loose blocks have
fallen to the slopes below. The upper portion of the ridge consists
of a fine-grained sandstone ( ? Upper Karoo beds).
On the hill-tops of the district the igneous masses show some flat
surfaces, and a further effect of weathering is seen in numerous
shallow depressions more or less circular, with a diameter of an inch
and a half to two inches.
About half a mile in a north-westerly direction from this hospital
some military trenches have been cut across the summit of a low
hill. The stones there exposed are similar to the surface-rock of
the country (dolerite or diabase) elsewhere; but they vary in size
from a mere flake to a ton in weight, and are cemented together
by a yellow ferruginous sandy matrix, and each separate stone is
encrusted by a coating of the same firmly adherent. The pieces
have mostly fairly angular edges without any rounded or water-worn
aspect.
It is very probable that this red matrix in which the diabase is
imbedded is the result of decomposition. If so, these stones of hard
crystalline rock, thinning out to thin sheets (such as the specimens
sent), appear to have been either intrusive or overflowing lavas.
Mr. Fred. Chapman, A.L.S., who has kindly examined the
specimens sent home, states that the so-called diabase is an altered
augite-andesite (porphyrite). The specks of magnetite scattered
throughout have decomposed and given rise to the vivid orange-red
or brick-red exterior. The weathering action has, no doubt, been
accentuated by extremes of temperature.
VIL—On tHe Oricin oF THE GRaAveEL-FLATS oF SURREY AND
BERKSHIRE.!
By Horace Woottaston Monckton, F.L.S., V.P.G.S.
Ihe the south-east of England considerable tracts are covered by
sheets or patches of gravel. It is mainly composed of flints
from the Chalk, has a thickness of, say, from 6 to 20 feet, is
generally stratified, and rests upon an uneven surface of the older
strata. The top is nearly always flat and inclined at a low angle.
These sheets of gravel lie at various levels: thus, at Casar’s Camp,
Aldershot, there is a large gravel-covered flat the highest part of
which is 600 feet above the sea. A little to the north-east there
is another flat, named the Fox Hills, at a level of 3860-390 feet, and
a few miles to the north there are Hartford Bridge Flats, which lie
330 feet above the sea. (These are in Sheets 284 and 285 of the
new series one-inch ordnance map.)
* Read before the British Association, Section 0 (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901.
H. W. Monckton—Gravel-Flats of Surrey and Berks. 511
On the side of the Fox Hills (Sheet 285) there is a sheet of gravel
south of Mitchet House, with a level of about 250 feet; and at
Eversley, Shinfield, and Hurst, in Sheet 268, there are flat expanses
of gravel almost flush with the alluvium of the rivers Blackwater
and Loddon, and at levels of 180 to 120 feet.
There are many other sheets of gravel in this neighbourhood, but
I have mentioned sufficient to show that there are here a series
at very various levels, from the high ground of Czsar’s Camp,
Aldershot, down to the level of the alluvium of the rivers which
drain the area.
If we continue our course down the Thames we find similar
gravel-fiats practically down to the present level of the sea.
I have said that these gravels consist mainly of chalk-flints, but
they also contain other stones, and a careful examination of these
convinced me that the gravels are of fluviatile origin, the nature
of their composition depending upon the geological structure of the
drainage area of different rivers.’
If, then, these sheets of gravel are, as I believe, river gravels, they
must all have been originally deposited at the bottom of a valley,
and where, as in several of the cases above mentioned, they are now
on plateaux or terraces, this position must be due to denudation,
which has destroyed the sides of the valleys since their deposition.
It is pretty clear that this is the case, for every stage may be found
between the gravel terrace in a valley and the gravel-capped plateau
with valleys all round it.
There is a good example at Maidenhead, where there are three
well-marked terraces of gravel, as shown in a sketch-map by
Mr. Whitaker.2 They are lying on the side of the Thames Valley,
but if we follow the highest terrace southwards we find that
between Bray Wick and Maidenhead the progress of denudation
has been sufficient to make the terrace into a plateau with valleys
all round it.
Now it has for some time seemed to me that these gravel-flats
may have something in common with the terraces which we see
in so many places on the coast and in the fjords of Norway. In the
first place there are several points of resemblance—
1. They are formed of gravel and sand.
2. They have a flat and somewhat sloping top.
3. Several flats occur one above the other.
4. Between the flats there is a steep slope.
5. They appear to be mainly the work of rivers.
Now the explanation of the Norwegian terraces which, I believe,
finds favour in Norway is as follows :—
The rivers carry with them sand, clay, and small stones, much of
which is deposited in the valleys. ‘The remainder sinks to the
bottom before the mouths of the rivers in the sea or fjords, and
is spread out as a slightly inclined plain where circumstances are
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., 1892, vol. xlviii, p. 29; 1898, vol. liv, p. 184.
2 « Geology of London’’: Mem. Geol. Sury., 1889, vol. i, p. 391,
512 H. W. Monckton—Gravel-Flats of Surrey and Berks.
favourable. There is often, therefore, at the head of the fjords
a shallow which is called dr. It ends abruptly a little distance out
with a steep slope, where the water all at once becomes some
fathoms deep.
Suppose, now, that the land is raised up; we shall have a long,
slightly sloping plain of sand and clay, with an abrupt steep slope
where the deep water was. The river will at first throw itself over
the steep slope as a waterfall, but by degrees it will cut down into
the plain and begin to form a new shallow out of the materials.
The terraces are just such plains, with so gradual a slope up above
the floor of the valleys that they appear horizontal, and ending
outside with a steep precipice. At the mouths of most of the
valleys, one sees many such terraces rising staircase-like one above
the other. These terraces seem to show that the land has rapidly
risen many feet at a time, a rise for each terrace, and between them
have been long periods of repose, during which the ér were formed.
The above is roughly translated from a small Norwegian school
geology by Corneluissen, and seems to me to afford a good
explanation of the step-terraces of Norway; but does it not also
explain the gravel-flats of England? It seems to me that short,
rather rapid elevations, separated by long periods of repose, would
produce precisely the result which we see in Surrey, Berkshire, and
other parts of the country.
The flats are due partly to excavation and partly to deposition.
Assume that an elevation of the Thames Valley to an amount of
20 feet took place now. ‘The river would at once begin to cut
down its channel to the new level, and in our soft strata its progress
back from the sea would be very rapid. We should have a new
plain excavated, and the gravel now at the level of the river
alluvium would stand up as a terrace; part of it would, moreover,
be destroyed, and the materials spread out as a gravel sheet at
the lower level. In England, where the rock is soft and easily
eroded, the gravel-flats are wide-spread, but in many of the
Norwegian valleys the rock is very hard, and the terraces are
consequently of very limited extent.
The gravel-flats are best seen on the south of the Thames. North
of that river similar flats occur, but there drift questions are much
complicated by the presence of glacial beds ; indeed, the elevation of
the south of England and the deposition of most of the gravels
appears to have taken place whilst the north of the country was
under glacial conditions, and after they ceased the country seems to
have undergone but little further elevation. In Norway, on the other
hand, movements of elevation seem to have taken place from time to
time up toa much more recent date, and so we find the step-terraces,
which are post-Glacial and were formed after southern England
had entered upon a period of repose.
The gravel beds upon these flats differ materially from most or all
of the older geological deposits of this country. The fact that the
stones are to a large extent subangular, and but little water-worn,
distinguishes them from the Eocene pebble beds; nor do they resemble
Kendall & Muff—Giacier Lakes in the Cheviots. 513
the old breccias with which I am acquainted; but if the suggested
explanation be correct the gravels were formed during a period
of elevation of the land, whereas most or all of our older deposits
were formed during periods of slow subsidence. But, though the
explanation now suggested accounts for much of the problem
presented to us by the gravels near the Thames, it must be admitted
that there are certain facts which it does not explain. Thus, the
Corbicula fluminalis bed at Crayford and Grays bears so strong
a resemblance to deposits which have been clearly formed during
a long, slow depression of the surface, that I can only think that
at some time this particular part of the Thames Valley sank whilst
the remainder was either rising or, more probably, was lying
stationary during a period of repose.
The deep channel of drift in the valley of the Cam described by
Mr. Whitaker! also seems to me to point to an area of local
depression. .
The conclusions to which I have come are, therefore, four in
number :—
1. That the gravels of which I have spoken are river gravels,
formed since the country last rose above the sea.
2. That the process of elevation was not continuous, but that
short periods of rapid movement were separated by long periods
of repose.
3. That the gravel-flats are the work of rivers during the periods
of repose.
4. That the earth-movements did not affect the whole area
uniformly, and that local depression occurred.
VITI.—Evivences or ANcIENT GLACIER-DAMMED LAKES IN THE
CHEVIOTS.”
By Percy F. Kenpatu, F.G.8., and Herserr B. Murr, B.A., F.G.S.
T is uncertain whether Cheviot itself was overridden by extraneous
ice, but striae on Thirl Moor and Baker Crag, recorded by the
Geological Survey, probably indicate that that portion of the
watershed was overridden by ice from the Tweed Valley, and
Professor James Geikie mentions the occurrence of till and striated
stones on the tops of the Cheviot Hills at 1,500 feet. The transport
of erratics shows movement along both sides of the axis of the
range from S.W. to N.E. at some stage of the glaciation. Across
_ the northern end and for at least ten miles down the eastern side,
however, a distribution of erratics from the Tweed Valley, together
with other indications to be mentioned, points to an ice-flow veering
round through easterly to a north to south direction. Our
observations go to confirm the above conclusions with respect to
the area north and east of Cheviot.
During a few days spent in the district, we observed certain
features which throw much light on the later stages of the Ice Age
1 Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., 1890, vol. xlvi, p. 333.
2 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. XI. 33
514 Kendall & Muff—Glacier Lakes in the Cheviots.
in this area. Mr. Clough mentions’ “ dry, steep-sided little valleys
crossing over watersheds, which do not appear to lie along lines of
weakness or the outcrops of soft beds. It is suggested that they
might have been formed by streams from glaciers.”
Some of the valleys observed by us run along the sides of hills or
occur as loops detaching portions of the walls of valleys, and the
general characters of similar valleys have been described by us
separately.” Their mode of occurrence, and the relations to the
relief of the country as well as to the position occupied by the
ancient ice-sheets, show that they can be ascribed only to the over-
flow of water from lakelets held up by an ice-barrier. In the
country between Yeavering Bell and Ingram we found that each of
the spurs separating the valleys which radiate from Cheviot was cut
across by one or more sharp gorge-like channels, draining, with one
significant exception, tothe south. The spur between Roddam Dean
and the Breamish River is cut, near Calder Farm, by a channel,
bounded on the east by the moraine, draining to the south, but
a higher portion of the same spur is traversed by a channel
draining in the opposite direction, i.e. to the north.
The highest member of a series across any given spur is usually
just above the boundary of the drift, containing extraneous boulders.
At the outlets of the valleys there are in several cases deltas,
represented by masses of gravel.
Conclusions.—The existence of the series of overflow channels
points clearly to the former presence of a chain of small lakes held
in the radial system of valleys of the Cheviots by a barrier of ice.
The ice-stream, by the boulders which it bore, may be inferred to
have swept round the end of the Cheviots out of the Tweed Valley.
The margin of the sheet at its maximum extension rose to about
1,000 feet along the arc from Yeavering Bell to Brands Hill, beyond
which it may have declined. Along the south-eastern slopes of the
Cheviots, another extraneous glacier swept in a north-east direction.
Where their confluence took place, or whether they were not in
succession rather than simultaneous, is not easy to decide, but
the Roddam Burn channel points very clearly to the preponderating
influence of the southern stream, while the Calder Farm overflow
lower down the same ridge shows by its southerly slope that the
northern ice later acquired the mastery. If the two glaciers were
confluent, then the overflowing waters of the lakes must have been
discharged either beneath the ice, as at present happens to the
overflow from a chain of ice-dammed lakes on the Malaspina glacier,
or over the top of the ice.
An important and unexpected result of our brief examination has
been the discovery that while ‘foreign’ ice was rising along the
flanks of the Cheviots to an altitude of 1,000 feet, not only were
the spurs free from any native ice-sheet, such as Cheviot or
1 «The Geology of the Cheviot Hills’’: Geol. Surv. Mem.
2 P. F. Kendall, ‘‘On Extra-morainic Drainage in East Yorkshire’’: Brit.
Assoc. Rep., 1899. A. Jowett & H. B. Muff, ‘‘ Preliminary Notes of the
Glaciation of the Bradford and Keighley District’’: ibid., 1900.
J. Nolan—Volcanie Rocks of Co. Armagh. 515
Hedgehope might have been expected to support, but even the
lower ends of the intervening valleys were occupied, not by great
native glaciers, but by lakes.
The conditions thus described may have some relation to the fact
that, while the porphyrites of the Cheviots have furnished the most
abundant types of erratics in the Drift of the Yorkshire Coast, the
granite, if present, which is not quite certain, is very rare.
TX.— Note on THE Voncantc AGGLOMERATE OF ForKILL,
Co. ARMAGH.
By Josrrn Notan, M.R.I.A., late Senior Geologist (retired), Geological Survey
of Ireland.
fe a paper by Messrs. J. R. Kilroe and A. M‘Henry, M.R.LA.,
which appeared in vol. lvii of the Q.J.G.S., published last
August. the following statement concerning the above rock is
made: “In parts they [the rock masses] consist of brecciated
slate or brecciated granite and felsite, the fragments being embedded
in a scanty andesitic matrix.” Now this description is quite
erroneous, the great and almost unique characteristic of the Forkill
agglomerate being that the greater portion is made up of non-
volcanic materials—in some places of granite pieces for the most
part, in a groundmass of finely comminuted material of the same
rock, and in others of Silurian slate fragments in a correspondingly
derivative base. This I have described long ago in the official
memoir to accompany Sheet 70 of the Geological Survey Map of
Ireland, as also in the following papers: “(On a Remarkable
Volcanic Agglomerate near Dundalk” (J.R.G.S., Ireland, new
series, vol. iv, pt. 4) and “On the Ancient Volcanic District of
Slieve Gallion ” (Guox. Mac., Dec. II, Vol. V, October, 1878).
Recently Sir Archibald Geikie, D.C.L., has examined this district,
and the results of his investigations are published in his book on
the “Ancient Volcanoes of Great Britain,” vol. ii, p. 423: “ The
Slieve Gallion District,” where he particularly comments on the
remarkable absence of volcanic fragments in the upper and greater
part of the mass, which, as already stated in my own essays, graduates
downwards into a rock with felsitic matrix and ultimately into the
underlying igneous rock.’
1 «The most remarkable features of this agglomerate, which has been well
described by Mr. Nolan, are the notable absence of truly volcanic stones in it, and
the derivation of its materials from the rocks around it. I found only one piece of
amygdaloid, but not a single lump of slag, no bombs, no broken fragments of lava
crusts, and no fine volcanic dust or enclosed lapilli. The rock may be said to consist
entirely of fragments of Silurian grits and shales where it lies among these strata,
and of granite where it comes through that rock. Blocks of these materials, of all
sizes up to two feet in breadth, are confusedly piled together in a matrix made of
comminuted débris of the same ingredients. . . . . ‘The essentially non-volcanic
material of the agglomerate shows, as Mr. Nolan pointed out, that it was produced
by eriform explosions, which blew out the Silurian strata and granite in fragments
and dust. These discharges probably took place either from a series of vents placed
along a line of fissure running in a north-westerly line, or directly from the open
516 Notices of Memoirs—British Association—
From the inseparable association with the igneous core there can
be no doubt that this peculiar agglomerate or breccia is due to
zriform explosions by which the pre-existing crust was broken up
while the volcanic energy ceased without any appearance of the
uprising lava.
NOTICES OF MEMOTRS.
UY eS Oe
J.— British Association FoR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SOIENOE.
Seventy-first Annual Meeting, held at Glasgow, Sept. 11-18, 1901.
List or Papers READ IN Section C (Groxoey).
Joun Hornz, F.R.S., President.
President’s Address. (See p. 452.)
W. Gunn.—Recent Discoveries in Arran Geology.
gee Sona? Variations in a certain Zone of the Eastern Highland
chists.
P. Macnair.—On the Crystalline Schists of the Southern Highlands,
their Physical Structure, and its probable manner of Development.
Professor J. Geikie, F.R.S., and Dr. J. S. Flett—The Granite of
Tulloch Burn, Ayrshire.
Dr. J. S. Flett.—On Crystals Dredged from the Clyde near
Helensburgh, with analyses by Dr. W. Pollard.
H. B. Woodward, F.R.S.—Note on a Phosphatic Layer at the Base
of the Inferior Oolite in Skye. (See p. 519.)
—— Further Note on the Westleton Beds.
Professor W. W. Watts.—Report of the Committee for the Collection
and Preservation of Geological Photographs.
Sir A. Gekie, D.C.L., F.R.S.— Time-intervals in the Volcanic
History of the Inner Hebrides.
A. Harker.—The Sequence of the Tertiary Igneous Rocks in Skye.
(See p. 506.)
A, M‘Henry and J. R. Kilroe.—On the Relation of the Old Red
Sandstone of N.W. Ireland to the adjacent Metamorphic Rocks,
and on its similarity to the Torridon Rocks of Sutherland.
J. R. Kilroe and A. M‘Henry.—On the Relation of the Silurian and
Ordovician Rocks of the North-West of Ireland to the great
Metamorphic Series.
G. H. Kinahan.—Notes on the Irish Primary Rocks with their
associated Granitic and Metamorphic Rocks.
— Some Laccolites in the Ivish Hills.
Dr. R. H. Traquair, F.R.S.—The Geological Distribution of Fishes
in the Carboniferous Rocks of Scotland.
On the Geological Distribution of Fishes in the Old Red
Sandstone of Scotland.
fissure itself. Possibly both of these channels of escape were in use, detached vents
appearing at the east end, and a more continuous discharge from the fissure further
west. After the earliest explosions had thrown out a large amount of granitic and
Silurian detritus, andesitic lava rose in the fissure, and, solidifying there, enclosed
a great deal of the loose fragmentary material that fell back into the chasm.”’
(‘* Ancient Volcanoes of Great Britain,’’ vol. ii, p. 423.)
Titles of Papers read at Glasgow. 517
Miss C. A. Raisin, D.Sc.—Perim Island, and its Relation to the Area
of the Red Sea.
R. L. Jack, LL.D.—The Artesian Water Supply in Queensland.
B. N. Peach, F.R.S.—The Cambrian Fossils of the N.W. Highlands.
Professor W. J. Sollas, F.R.S.—On a New Method in the Investiga-
tion of Fossil Remains. With illustrations, Monograptus, Ophiura,
Paleospondylus.
R. Kidston, F.R.S.E.—Notes on some Fossil Plants from Berwickshire.
Dr. Wheelton Hind.—Report of the Committee for studying Life-
zones in the British Carboniferous Rocks.
J. R. Kilroe.—Geology regarded in its Economic Applications to
Agriculture by means of Soil Maps.
A. M. Bell.—Plants and Coleoptera of Pleistocene Age from Wolver-
cote, Oxfordshire.
Vaughan Cornish, D.Sc.—Report of the Committee on Terrestrial
Surface Waves and Wave-like Surfaces.
Dr. R. F. Scharff.—Report of the Committee to Explore Irish Caves.
Professor P. F. Kendall and H. B. Muff.—Evidences of Ancient
Glacier-dammed Lakes in the Cheviots. (See p. 513.)
Professor P. F. Kendall.—Report of the Committee on the Distribution
of Erratic Blocks.
A. Smith Woodward, LL.D., F.R.S.—Report of the Committee for
considering the best methods for the Registration of all Type
Specimens of Fossils in the British Isles.
W. Barlow.—Report of the Committee upon the present state of our
knowledge of the Structure of Crystals.
J. G. Goodchild.—On the Scottish Ores of Copper in their Geological
relations.
——— A revised list of the Minerals known to occur in Scotland.
W. Mackie, M.D.—The occurrence of Barium Sulphate and Calcium
Fluoride as cementing substances in the Elgin Trias.
On the Pebble Band of the Elgin Trias and the Wind-worn
Pebbles.
On the occurrence of Covellite in association with Malachite
in the Sandstone of Kingsteps, Nairn.
J. M. Maclaren.—On the Source of the Alluvial Gold of the Kildonan
Field, Sutherlandshire.
Field Notes on the influence of Organic Matter on the
deposit of Gold in Veins.
W. H. Wheeler.—On the Sources of the Warp in the Humber.
_ G, Barrow.—On the Alterations of the Lias Shale by the Whin Dyke
of Great Ayton in Yorkshire.
E. H. Cunningham Craig.—On Cairngorms.
W. Ackroyd.—On the Circulation of Salt, and its Geological Bearings.
J. Rhodes.—Notes on the occurrence of Phosphatic Nodules and
Phosphate-bearing Rocks in the Upper Carboniferous Limestone
(Yoredale) Series of the West Riding of Yorkshire and the
Westmoreland border.
Note on a Silicified Plant Seam beneath the Millstone
Grit of Swarth Fell, West Riding of Yorkshire. (See p, 520.)
518 Notices of Memoirs—Papers read at British Association.
A. Smith Woodward, LL.D., F.R.S.—On the Bone-beds of Pikermi,
Attica, and on similar Deposits in Northern Euboea. (See p. 481.)
H. J. L. Beadnell.—The Fayum Depression. A preliminary notice of
the Geology of a district in Egypt containing a new Paleogene
Vertebrate Fauna.
Captain A. R. Dwerryhouse.—Report of the Committee on the Move-
ments of Underground Waters of N.W. Yorkshire.
Professor E. Hull, F.R.S.— Notes on the Physical History of the
Norwegian Fjords.
H. W. Monckiton.—On the Origin of the Gravel-Flats of Surrey and
Berkshire. (See p. 510.)
A. Somervail.—On the Occurrence of Diorite associated with Granite
at Assouan, Upper Egypt.
James Stirling.—On some Hornblende Porphyrites of Victoria.
Malcolm Laurie.—Note on some Arthropods from the Upper Silurian.
F. P. Mennell.—The Copper-bearing Rocks of 8. Australia. (p. 520.)
H. Bolton.—Report of the Committee on the Excavation of the
Ossiferous Caves at Uphill, near Weston-super-Mare.
Section A (MarHEmaticaL AnD PuystcaL ScrENcE).
Report of the Committee on Underground Temperature.
Report of the Seismological Committee.
F. N. Denison.—The Seismograph as a Sensitive Barometer.
Professor J. Milne, F.R.S.—On Meteorological Phenomena in relation
to Changes in the Vertical.
Section B (CHeEmistRyY).
W. Ackroyd.—Inverse Relation of Chlorine to Rainfall.
— The Distribution of Chlorine in Yorkshire.
Professor A. Michael.—On the Genesis of Matter.
Dr. E. F. Armstrong.—The Equilibrium Law as applied to Salt
Separation and to the formation of Oceanic Salt Deposits.
Section D (Zoonocy).
Coral Reefs of the Indian Region. (Report.)
J. Stanley Gardiner.—The Coral Islands of the Maldives.
Dr. Francisco P. Moreno.—Exhibition of Photographs of Fossils in
the La Plata Museum.
Section H (GuoGRAPHy).
Vaughan Cornish, D.Sc.—Report of Committee on Terrestrial Surface
Waves.
H. N. Dickson.—The Mean Temperature of the Atmosphere and the
Causes of Glacial Periods.
Dr. R. Bell, F.R.S.—The Topography and Physical Features of
Northern Ontario.
kh. T. Giinther.—Report of the Committee on Changes of the Land-
level of the Phlegrzan Fields.
Szotion F (Economic Scrence anp SrarisrTI0s).
R. W. Dron.—Some Notes on the Output of Coal from the Scottish
Coalfields.
Notices of Memoirs—H. B. Woodward—Oolite in Skye. 519
Sxotion G (ENGINEERING).
P. Bunau Varilla.—The Panama Canal.
J. Dillon.—Recording Soundings by Photography.
Vaughan Cornish.—Size of Waves observed at Sea.
Section H (AnrHRopoLoGy).
Miss Nina Layard.—Note on a Human Skull found in peat, in the
bed of the River Orwell, Ipswich.
W. Allen Sturge, M.D.—On the Chronology of the Stone Age of Man,
with especial reference to his coexistence with an Ice Age.
G. Coffey.—Naturally Chipped Flints for comparison with certain
forms of alleged artificial chipping.
Ebenezer Duncan, M.D., and T. H. Bryce, M.A., M.D.—Remains of
Prehistoric Man in the Island of Arran.
Miss Nina Layard.—An Early Paleolithic Flint Hatchet with
alleged Thong-marks.
F. D. Longe.—A piece of Yew from the Forest Bed on the Hast
Coast of England, alleged to have been cut by man.
G. Coffey.— Exhibit of Manufactured Objects from Irish Caves.
Szotron K (Borany).
Dr. H. Conwentz.—The Past History of the Yew in Great Britain
and Ireland.
W. N. Niven— On the Distribution of certain Forest Trees in Scotland,
as shown by the investigation of Post-Glacial deposits.
A. CO. Seward, F.R.S., and Sybille O. Ford.—The Anatomy of Zodea,
with notes on the Geological History of the Osmundacew.
E. N. Arber.—On the Clarke Collection of Fossil Plants from New
South Wales.
Professor H. Potonié.—Die Silur- und Culm-Flora des Harzes.
A. C. Seward, F.R.S.—A Chapter of Plant-evolution: Jurassic Floras.
The Structure and Origin of Jet.
I].—Nover on a Puospuatic Layer at THE Bask or THE INFERIOR
Oourre In Skye. By Horace B. Woopwarp, F.R.S., of the
Geological Survey.’
T the southern end of the great cliffs of Ben Tianavaig, south
of Portree, in Skye, the basement beds of the Inferior Oolite,
which contain large dogger-like masses of calcareous sandstone, rest
in a hollow of the Upper Lias Shales, owing to local and to a certain
extent contemporaneous erosion. Lining this hollow there is an
irregular and nodular band, two or three inches thick, of dark
brown oolitic and phosphatic rock; a fact of interest, as instances
of local erosion are often attended by the accumulation of phosphatic
matter in beds, nodules, and derived fossils.
Mr. George Barrow, who made a rough analysis of the rock,
estimated the amount of phosphate of lime at about 50 per cent. ;
and Mr. Teall, who examined a section under the microscope, noted,
1 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901,
and communicated by permission of the Director of the Geological Survey.
520 Notices of Memoirs—J. Rhodes—Silicified Plants.
in addition to the oolite grains, fragments of molluscan shells and
echinoderms, and foraminifera, in a finely granular matrix formed
of calcite. He observed that the central portions of some of the
oolite grains were formed of a nearly isotropic brown substance in
which the typical concentric structure of the oolite grains was well
preserved. ‘This substance was no doubt phosphatic.
III].—Notz on tHe Discovery or a Srniciriep Prant Seam
BENEATH THE Mitistonge Grit oF SwartH Fen, West Ripinc
oF YorRKSHIRE. By Joun Ruopss, of the Geological Survey.’
Y kind permission of the British Association Committee on
Carboniferous Zones I am enabled to record the discovery of
a silicified plant seam beneath the Millstone Grit at Swarth Fell,
and two miles north-west of Hawes Junction.
The exact geological position of the overlying strata is doubtful,
but apparently they occupy the horizon of the grindstone or ganister
of the district.
At this particular place, however, the grindstone or ganister is
absent, and its place is taken by flaggy silicious limestones with
marine shells and by a bed of highly silicious grit with plant remains,
the latter resting more or less directly on the silicified plant seam.
Chert occurs, probably as lenticles in the uneven surface of the
seam, and contains a mass of detached silicious sponge spicules,
apparently rod-like bodies, which may belong to the anchoring ropes
of hexactinellid sponges. In the same chert are included fragments
of silicified plant remains beautifully preserved.
In the plant seam included pebbles of silicious grit occur, which
contain a few spicules similar to those in the chert, and also
plant remains. The plant seam rests on a layer of silicified shale
containing a few fragmentary sponge spicules, mostly rod-like forms,
one piece belonging to an hexactinellid sponge. The beds below
are more or less rotted clay shales with ironstone nodules.
I am indebted to Dr. G. J. Hinde for notes on the sponge remains
directly associated with the plant seam. The plants have not been
determined, but have been placed in the hands of R. Kidston, Esq.,
F.R.S.E., F.G.S., Stirling.
IV.—Tue Copprr-searing Rocks or Sournw Auvustrauia. By
F. P. Menne.t.!
(ie author drew attention to the fact that the copper ores of
Yorke’s Peninsula in South Australia were the first metallic
minerals worked on the Australian continent. They occurred in
rocks of Archean age, which at Moonta and Wallaroo had been
subjected to crushing and shearing to such an extent that they
presented but few traces of their original structures, except in the
case of a diorite at Wallaroo, which was of a typically plutonic
character. Most of the rocks were mylonites, and in some instances
1 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901.
Notices of Memoirs—F. A. Bather—Pollicipes, ete. 521
they had been reduced to a compact flinty type in which none of the
minerals could be recognized with certainty. Where the original
constituents had survived they were of a fragmentary character.
Oligoclase seemed to have best resisted the crushing, and orthoclase
occasionally remained in lenticles, but the brittle quartz had been
invariably reduced to powder. Mr. Mennell thought that the
economic aspect of the examination was of considerable importance,
for the mines had been shut down several times when the ore had
thinned out owing to doubts as to its permanence. From the
character of the rocks it was, however, obvious that they occurred
in a true ‘fissure lode,’ and no doubts need be felt as to the con-
tinuance of the ore to the limit of workable depths.
V —Tue Gerotocic DistriButTion oF PoOLLicipES AND SCALPELLUM.!
By F. A. Batusr, D.Sc., F.G.8.
N a valuable memoir on the “ Hudson River Beds near Albany,
and their taxonomic equivalents,” published as Bulletin of the
New York State Museum, No. 42, April, 1901, Dr. Rudolph
Ruedemann describes a number of variously shaped valves found
in the Upper and Lower Utica Shale of Green Island and Mechanics-
ville, N.Y. (p. 578, pl. ii). These he believes to “find their
homologues in parts of the capitula of the pedunculate cirriped
genera Scalpellum and Pollicipes, notably of the latter. On this
account the various valves have been united under the caption
Pollicipes siluricus, in full consciousness of the enormous gap
existing between the appearance of this Lower Siluric type and
the next Upper Triassic (Rhetic) representatives of these genera.”
Confirmation of Dr. Ruedemann’s ascription may be derived from
the fact that ‘‘the enormous gap” does not exist. Harly in 1892
Dr. C. W. 8. Aurivillius* published the descriptions of Pollicipes
signatus from bed e (= Lower Ludlow), P. validus from bed ¢
(= Wenlock Shale), Scalpellum sulcatum, S. varium, S. granulatum,
S. strobiloides, S. procerum, S. cylindricum, and 8S. fragile, all from
bed c, of the island of Gotland. The species of Scalpellum are
founded on peduncles, Pollicipes validus is represented by a broken
scutum only, but P. signatus is based on an almost perfect specimen.
The occurrence of more. than one species of both these genera in
the Silurian lends significance to the diversity of form presented
by Dr. Ruedemann’s specimens. The ornament on his fig. 18
most nearly resembles that of PP. signatus, while the rostrum,
fig. 22, is also not unlike that species. Figs. 16, 17, and 19 may
belong to more than one other species, while 24 (with which pre-
sumably 25 is to be associated) may belong to a Scalpellum, as
Dr. Ruedemann seems to hint. In the circumstances it is specially
regrettable that Dr. Ruedemann has selected no one of these specimens
as the holotype of Pollicipes siluricus. If he does not do so soon,
confusion is pretty certain to arise.
1 Reprinted from Science, July 19th, 1901, p. 112 (N.s., vol. xiv, No, 342).
2 Bihang Sveska Vet.-Akad. Handl., xviii, Afd. iv, No. 3.
522 Notices of Memoirs—Caucasian Museum, Tiflis.
Figs. 18, 14, and 15 are referred to Turrilepas (?) filosus, n.sp.
A recent examination of the plates of that genus suggests to me
that the note of interrogation is fully justified.
Aurivillius considered that Pollicipes signatus showed a closer
approach to the Balanidz than any other of the Lepadidaw, but he
too, in ignorance of the Devonian Protobalanus, Whitf., discoursed
needlessly about the gap in the distribution. Now that the range
of the Lepadide has been extended to the Ordovician, we may look
confidently for further discoveries. We may also hope that the
time has now come when even the textbooks may awake to the
fact that the genera Pollicipes and Scalpellum existed in Paleozoic
times.
My apology for insisting on this is not merely that both
Dr. Aurivillius and Professor Lindstrém, who supplied him with
the material, have unhappily passed away, but that I had the good
fortune to be the discoverer of the beautiful specimen of Pollicipes
signatus, when developing a specimen of Gissocrinus verrucosus from
the Pterygotus bed of Wisby Waterfall, in May, 1891. The very
fragile specimen was subsequently licked into shape (no metaphor
is intended) by Mr. G. Liljevall, to whom the excellent drawing of
it is due.
VI.—Tue Cavoastan Museum, Tirtis, is publishing a complete
Catalogue of its Collections, in both the Russian and German
languages, the title in the latter tongue being: “ Die Sammlungen
des Kaukasischen Museums im Vereine mit Special Gelehrten
bearbeitet und herausgegeben von Dr. Gustav Radde, Direktor, etc.”
The catalogue is in the form of quarto volumes, in boards, measuring
31x 238cm. Volume III, which has been sent to us for review,
deals with the geological collections, and is by Professor N. I.
Lebedev. It consists of xii+322 pp. and 8 plates. The material
is arranged under the heads of the several collections, which are
classified quite roughly, apparently following the localities in the
order in which they were visited. Among the collections that of
Abich from Daghestan is one of the most famous; this is accompanied
by a descriptive catalogue which is in greater detail than the present
one and will be published in extenso in Mittheilungen des Kaukasischen
Museums. There are also donations by successive chiefs of the
Office of Mines; the collections of F. Bayern, chiefly of value for
the exactness of the localities given, and worked over by Arzruni,
Valentin, and Lebedev ; other collections that have afforded material
for the writings of these geologists, of Simonovitsch, and others.
The preceding are all local, but there are also collections serviceable
for comparison, especially those from the Crimea, Bessarabia, and
Transcaspian, as well as a fine series from various horizons and
localities in Western Europe, partly purchased and partly the gift
of Mr. J. de Morgan. The present catalogue does not profess to
be much more than a rough list, and, as is only natural in a work
produced under such disadvantageous conditions as regards literature
and the help of specialists, the determinations are clearly lacking
Notices of Memoirs. 523
in precision. The work will nevertheless be useful to two classes
of students ; those who are investigating the geology and physical
history of the Caucasus, and specialists in petrology or paleontology
who desire to see all the material available for their researches.
In his readiness to enter into relations with specialists Dr. Radde
pursues an enlightened and liberal policy, so that readers of the
catalogue need not imagine that because the specimens are in Tiflis
it is no use to trouble about them. The collotype plates illustrating
this volume afford a sample of the treasures within; two are of
rock-sections, one of undescribed species of Ammonites, and two
of species of Cardium, Congeria, Dreissenia, Rissoa, Neritina, and
Naitica ; one of the figures is labelled ‘‘ Cardium apscheronicum, n.sp.,”
but we can find no description.
VII.—Garonoay or Drvonsuire.—The main part of No. 3 of the
Proceedings of the Geologists’ Association of London is devoted to
an account of the excursion made by the members to the Start,
Prawle, and Bolt districts during Haster this year. The report is
written by W. A. E. Ussher, who gives in his introductory remarks,
as well as in his report, a good deal of interesting matter which
will be much appreciated by Devonians especially. In the report
are incorporated many notes by A. R. Hunt. The result enabled
those who enjoyed the excursion to realize the geological difficulties
of the region, and served to whet their appetites for the long-
expected memoir upon it.
VIII.—On a New Fosstt Lizarp From THE Bens oF THE LOWER
Cuatk Formation in THe Istanp or Lustna [Coast of Dalmatia] ;
by A. Kornuvuser.—‘ Ueber eine neue Fossile Hidechse aus den
Schichten der unteren Kreideformation auf der Insel Lesina.”
(Verhandlungen der k.k. geol. Reichsanstalt, 1901.) — In this
paper the author describes another of the remarkable reptilian
skeletons from the thinly bedded Lower Cretaceous limestones of
the island of Lesina. In this instance the skeleton is that of a
lizard about 1:4 metres long, apparently in its general structure
related to the Varanide, but in its dentition approaching the
Mosasauride. The specimen is made the type of a new genus,
Opetiosaurus, the specific name being O. Bucchichi.
IX. —Snortrer Norices.—Georera Bauxrre.—The most im-
portant article in the American Geologist for July is T. L. Watson’s
account of the Bauxite deposits of the Coosa Valley region of Georgia
and Alabama. Discovered in 1887, these fields now provide the
entire home consumption of the United States. After a sketch of
the geology of the area and the geological position of the mineral,
the author deals with the associated minerals, chemical composition,
origin, and age of the deposits. This latter is apparently the close
of the Kocene period.
Brace Srructurs.— Another article in the same Journal of
considerable interest is H. L. Fairchild’s “Beach Structure in
Medina Sandstone,” which is illustrated by five plates of repro-
ductions from photographs. The author describes the various
524 Notices of Memoirs.
appearances due to abrupt change of material, oblique bedding,
ripples, wave-lines, ridges, and troughs, and has come to the con-
clusion that this 1,075 feet of arenaceous shale is a typical sandy
beach deposit.
Cutt anp Arcrentina.—The long dispute over the boundary-
line between these two countries is further illustrated by Charles
Rabot in La Géographie, No. 4, 1901. As the frontier line
involves the watershed, the arbitration at present proceeding is of
vital importance to both countries. Rabot gives some excellent
reproductions from photographic views of the glacial phenomena of
the district, and a particularly clear map showing the differences
between the claims of the two countries.
Proressor O. HK. Brecuer gives an account in the Yale Scientific
Monthly for June, 1901, of the mounting of the complete skeleton
of the dinosaur Claosaurus annectens. This is the first complete
skeleton of a dinosaur yet set up, and came from the Laramie beds.
It belonged to the Marsh Collection, is 29 feet in length, and is
placed in the Yale University Museum. A plate accompanies the
notice.
“MaryLanpD AND ITs Naturat Resources” is the title of
a pamphlet which has been prepared by W. Bullock Clarke as
the official publication of the Maryland Commissioners at the Pan-
American Exposition.
Inpian Tertiary BeLemnites.—The announcement is made in
the Report of the work carried on by the Geological Survey of
India, 1900-1901, that Dr. F. Noetling has found great numbers
of true Belemnites in Lower Eocene beds near Jhirrak, in Sind.
Tut Typxoon, Luzon.—The typhoon which swept Luzon on the
8th September, 1900, forms the subject of a memoir by Padre José
Coronas, S.J., which was issued by the Observatorio di Manila, 1900.
Beyond generalities, however, it has little geological interest.
Woopwarp1an Museum, Campripce.—The additions made last
year comprised, among other things, the collections of the late
C. J. A. Meyer, the greater part of a skeleton of Zutra vulgaris from
the peat of Barwell, and part of the S. S. Buckman Collection of
Inferior Oolite Ammonites. Mr. Reed has been at work on the
British and Foreign Paleozoic fossils, Mr. Woods on the Cretaceous
fossils, and Mr. Asher on the fossil plants. The identification of
figured specimens continues to make satisfactory progress, and we
hope a revised catalogue of types will soon be attempted.
Proressor J. M. Cuarxe, State Paleontologist of New York,
announces in the 54th Annual Report of the New York State Museum
that a catalogue of the type fossils used throughout the history of
the “ Paleontology of New York” is in hand. Specimens of type
fossils, as they are identified and can be replaced by duplicates, are
removed to a fireproof building, in accordance with the vote of the
Regents in 1882. It would be a good plan to have casts made of
them, for inclusion in the general collection.
Correspondence—Professor T. G. Bonney. 525
Messrs. C. Davies SHersorn anp B. B. Woopwarp are issuing
a series of papers on the dates of publication of various French
Voyages which appeared between 1800 and 1900. The papers will
be found in the Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist. for April, August, and
October, and contain many notes on geological papers which have
heretofore presented difficulties as to date.
New Foraminirera.—R. J. Schubert has a paper on some Fora-
minifera from the Upper Chalk of East Galicia, in the Jahrb. k.k.
geol. Reichs., u (4), 1901. The chief novelty is a curious form to
which he gives the name of Karreria cretacea. J. Grzaybowski
writes on the Foraminifera of the Inoceramus beds of Gorlice. His
paper appears in the Bull. Internat. Ac. Sci. Cracovie for April, 1901.
Two plates, chiefly devoted to arenaceous forms, are given.
From tHE Report or Progress or THE MancuesterR Museum
we gather that the Geological Department has been enriched by
the Barnes Collection of Carboniferous invertebrates, and some
selections from the Jukes-Browne Collection. Fossil plants have
received a good deal of attention, the types and figured specimens
of Oolitic species, which were examined by Mr. Seward, having
been labelled and displayed. Mr. R. D. Darbishire has presented
the Museum with a specimen of the recent Pleurotomaria adansoniana
from Barbados, an important and valuable acquisition to any
collection.
New Jersey Grotocy.—The annual report of the State Geologist
of the Geological Survey of New Jersey for 1900 contains an
administrative report ; Report on the Palaeozoic Formations, by Stuart
Weller, consisting of Hardiston Quartzite, Kittatinny and Trenton
Limestones, and Hudson River Beds ; Report on the Portland Cement
Industry, by H. B. Kiimmel; Artesian Wells in New Jersey, by
Lewis Woolman; Mineralogical Notes, by A. C. Chester ; Chlorine
in the Natural Waters of the State, by W. S. Myers; and the Mining
Industry, by H. B. Kiimmel.
Portueurse Geotocy.—Paul Choffat has published in the Bull.
Soc. Belge Geol., xv, May, 1901, an important paper on the
“Limite entre le Jurassique et le Crétacique en Portugal.” From
a careful study of the different exposures and the fossils contained
in the beds, he comes to the conclusion that the limit between the
two systems in Portugal must be regarded as only a conventional
one. He finds that both the fauna and flora show an almost
imperceptible passage between the two formations in certain places.
CORRESPONDENCE.
FOSSILS AND GARNETS.
Sir,—If your correspondent “ Verbum Sap.” had signed his own
name I would have endeavoured to explain to him my reasons for
writing the paragraph which he quotes, though I knew that the
“traditions of the elders” might be cited against me by dealers
526 Correspondence—ZJ. R. Dakyns—T. E. Knightley.
in second-hand science. As it is, I content myself with remarking
that the maxim ‘“ Verbum sat sapienti” has only a very limited
application in scientific matters, for there a diet of words is both
innutritious and flatulent. But as he evidently loves “wise saws”
I will add another to his store, ‘“‘ Words are the counters of wise
men and the money of fools.” T. G. Bonney.
INTRUSIVE IGNEOUS ROCKS IN IRELAND.
Sir,—With reference to the interesting paper on “ Intrusive,
Tuff-like, Igneous Rocks and Breccias in Ireland,” by Messrs.
Kilroe and M‘Henry, published in the August number of the
Q.J.G.8., it is noteworthy that there are in the neighbourhood of
Snowdon several instances of intrusive rocks of so fragmentary
and brecciated a character as to resemble volcanic agglomerates.
Such is the case in part with the diabase occurring in Cwm Llan,
S.S.E. from the summit of Snowdon. Other instances of this
character that I have observed are a small boss of brecciated diabase
at the base of the felstone of Cribiau, near Bwlch Ehediad, and
another, also of a fragmentary character, amidst the felsitic rocks on
the south-east side of Llyn Gwynant. Somewhat similar too is the
greenstone on Glyder Fawr, which Ramsay in his memoir on North
Wales describes as a “ great vesicular, rubbly-looking patch.”
J. R. Daxryys.
Snowpon View, Nant GwyNnant, BEDDGELERT.
October 10, 1901.
EBBING AND FLOWING WELLS AND SPRINGS.
Str,—Some time back you were good enough to print a com-
munication from me on the ebbing and flowing well between
Buxton and Castleton in Derbyshire. In the Illustrazione Popolare
of August 18th of this year is a paper on a phenomenon of the
Lago di Garda of kindred character, of which I submit a substantial
translation.
“The Lago di Garda is one of the largest lakes in Italy, admired
for the fertility of the country that surrounds and for the beauty of
the gardens that adorn its shores. There happens in these days
a phenomenon that impresses the surrounding population; a flux
of thirty centimetres of height every forty minutes is observed,
according to the boatmen. Many newspaper readers wish to explain
it as a result of volcanic action.
‘‘The phenomenon may have a volcanic origin, since from the
beginning of 1800 Count Bettoni, a studious naturalist, had to
verify in the lake a species of flux and reflux, not perilous but
irregular and inconstant ; and not only is it in the Lago di Garda
observed, but in the lake of Geneva the water rises and falls in
a notable manner.
“The phenomenon cannot be attributed to the action of the sun
and moon, since the action of these two stars should produce a rise
and fall regularly as in the level of the sea.
Obituary—Edward Waller Claypole. 527
“« Some scientists were of opinion that the rise and fall were the
result of wind action, but how can the rise and fall be explained
when there is sometimes not a breath of wind? Others were of
opinion that the rise and fall might be due to unexpected melting
of the snow, and to the action of electric clouds, but if so, why not
a like action on all other Italian lakes ?
“The most probable cause of such uprising, according to the
hypothesis of the Engineer Pedrini, is found in the gases which,
arising from the bed of the lake and seeking a vent pass across
the water, produce undulations, and sudden upward movements of
like nature to those observed in the lake of Geneva by Lembari.
In the Lago di Garda emanate continuously an infinity of gas
bubbles, and thermal springs are observed.
“The action of the sun upon the Mediterranean raises the water
only eighteen inches, and if this attraction on so large a surface
is thus weak, the surface of the Lago di Garda is too small
comparatively to be at all affected.
‘In the bay of Peschiera, about a hundred steps from Sermione,
there are at three different points springs with an unpleasant odour,
manifesting the existence of sulphuretted hydrogen gas. Incrustations
from thermal waters are to be seen on the eastern side of the lake,
about one mile distant from the grotto of Catullus.
“The fishermen take particular care to extend their nets a distance
from these springs; if they happen to draw the nets over them,
they rot in a short time.” T. E. Kyiguriey.
106, Cannon SrrReet, E.C.
September 9, 1901.
©2 EP U ArmmY-
——
EDWARD WALLER CLAYPOLE.
Born June 1, 1835. Diep Aveust 17, 1901.
Proressor EK. W. Craypous, one of the many noted geologists
of the United States, was of English extraction, having been born
at Ross, Hereford, on 1st June, 1835. He was educated privately
and graduated at the London University, taking his B.A. in 1862
and becoming D.Sc. in 1888. In 1871 he emigrated to the United
States, and in 1873 became Professor of Natural Science at Antioch
College, Ohio, a post which he held until 1881. He was Paleon-
tologist to the ‘Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania” and
Professor of Natural Science at Buchtel College, Akron, Ohio, from
1888 to 1898, when he succeeded Professor A. J. McClatchie as
Instructor of Biology (to which Geology was afterwards added)
at the Throop Institute, Pasadena, California. This office he
retained until his sudden death from apoplexy at Long Beach,
California, 17th August, 1901. He was a genial and successful
teacher, much beloved of his pupils, while his varied attainments
find reflection in the scope of his numerous scientific papers, although
geology holds the principal place.
028 Miscellaneous.
His more important contributions to scientific literature were :—
On the oldest-known fossil tree (Glyptodendron Hatonense), from
the Upper Silurian of Eaton (Guot. Mac., 1878); papers on the
Migration of Animals and Plants between Europe and America,
published in 1880 and 1881; on the discovery of Pteraspidian
Fish in the Upper Silurian of North America (Quart. Journ.
Geol. Soe., vol. xli, 1885) ; The Lake Age in Ohio (8vo, 1888) ; on
the Head of Dinichthys (Amer. Geol., 1892) ; and on the Cladodont
Sharks of the Cleveland Shale (Amer. Geol., 1893). He was also
one of the Editors of and largely contributed to the American Geologist
from its foundation in 1888.
Professor Claypole was elected a Fellow of the Geological Society
of London in 1879, of that in Edinburgh in 1887, and was one of
the original members of the American Geological Society when it
was founded in 1888.
IVES Cate ke AwN Bes OgrsS
SORE,
BRACHYLEPAS ORETACEA.—Since the publication of my paper
(Grou. Mae., n.s., Dec. IV, Vol. VIII, April, 1901, p. 145) on the
interesting find of this new form of Cirriped from the mucronata-
zone of the White Chalk of Norwich, I have received from Dr. A. W.
Rowe, the finder, a second specimen. This latter comes from the
mucronata-zone, Whitway pit, South Dorset, and gives the fossil
an interesting geographical range. At present Brachylepas cretacea
has not yet been found outside the mucronata-zone, and it is possible
that Dr. Rowe has discovered yet another fossil of considerable
zonal value.—H. W.
GroLtocicaL Survey or Great Britain anv IreLanp. — The
following geologists have been appointed to fill vacancies in the
Staff of the Geological Survey, caused by the retirement of Sir A.
Geikie, Mr. R. G. Symes, Mr. J. Nolan, Mr. A. C. G. Cameron, and
Mr. A. J. Jukes-Browne, and by the deaths of Mr. F. W. Egan and
Mr. J. H. Blake: Dr. J. 8. Flett, M.A., M.B., to take charge of
Petrographical work; Mr. J. Allen Howe, B.Sc., and Mr. H. H.
Thomas, B.A., on the English Staff; Mr. H. B. Muff, B.A., on the
Scottish Staff; and Mr. W. B. Wright, B.A., on the Irish Staff.
A stxtH edition of Mr. Whitaker’s handy little “Guide to the
Geology of London” has just been issued by the Geological Survey.
It has been thoroughly revised by the author and many illustrations
have been added, including figures of Palzeolithic implements and
a few characteristic fossils. The first edition, published in 1875,
comprised 72:pages; the present edition reaches 102 pages. The
price remains 1s.
Erratum.—In the September part of the Grotocican Macazrne, 1901 (p. 408),
the name Bradytherium was employed for a genus of large Ungulates from the
Eocene of Egypt. This name seems to have been employed some months earlier by
G. Grandidier for a large extinct Edentate from Madagascar, and the designation of
the Egyptian genus is therefore amended to Barytheriwm (see ‘‘ Nature,’’ October 10th,
1901, p. 577).—C. W. AnpREWSs.
THE
GHOLOGICAL MAGAZINE.
NEW SERIES: —DECADE IV. . VOL.. VIII.
No. XII—DECEMBER, 1901.
ONRLGLINAL ARTICLES.
—»—__
I, — Devonian Fosstts rrom DervonsHIRE.
By the Rey. G. F. Wurprorne, M.A., F.G.S., V.P. Pal. Soc.
1. Coptenzian Fossits From Lynton.
(PLATE XVII.)
({\HE specimens described below were collected by my friend
Mr. J. G. Hamling, F.G.S., and kindly placed by him in my
hands for description. Being casts and often much obscured by
injury and distortion, their identification must be in a degree
problematical, but for the most part they seem to agree with
German species of the Upper Coblenzien age.
BELLEROPHON, sp.
A slab with several poor casts comes from the “Cliff path, W. of
Woodabay.” They appear high with rounded back.
PreRINEA FasoicuLaTA, Goldfuss, sp. (Pl. XVII, Figs. 1, 2.)
1834-40. Pterinea fasciculata, Goldfuss: Petref. Germ., vol. ii, p. 137, pl. exxix,
fig. 5.
1853. a6 A Sandberger : Verst. Rhein. Nassau, p. 293, pl. xxx,
fig. 7.
1885. a “ Follman: Devon Aviculacee, p. 187, pl. iii, fig. 3.
1889. of $4 Kayser : Abh. k.p. Geol. Landes., N.s., pt. i, p. 20,
pl. vii, fig. 11.
1891. 3 a Frech: Abh. Geol. Specialk. Preuss., vol. ix, pt. 3,
p. 84, pl. viii, fig. 1; pl. ix, fig. 1.
Left valve convex, somewhat produced at the postero-inferior
margin. Front wing large, rounded, not truncated in front. Hind
_ wing large, long, rather narrow, sigmoid behind. Surface having
on the body six or seven strong, high, nodulate, distant ribs, with flat
interspaces each of which bears five or six minute irregular minor
ribs; on the front wing, three or four closer and more confluent
ribs; and on the hind wing, ten or twelve small close ribs; the
whole being crossed by very numerous, minute, regular, crenulated
growth-lines. Hinge with four strong, irregularly horizontal teeth
in front of the umbo, below which is a small deep muscle-mark.
Hind teeth unseen in English specimens.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. XII. 34
580 Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire.
Size: length 45 mm., height 30 mm.
Hight specimens from “ Woodabay, above Pier,” “ Quarry in road
above Crock Point, Woodabay,” and “Cutting under Railway N. of
Barhrick Mill, Lynton.”
Upper (and Lower) Coblenzien.
AOCTINOPTERIA, 8p.
From the “ East side of Lee Bay, Lynton,” are two very
fragmentary specimens of an oblique Avicula, with rather fine
alternating strie (in one finer than in the other). They are
exceedingly like some of the Actinopterie from the Barton Beds
and from the Upper Devonian of Germany, but they do not admit
of identification.
MopIoMoRPHA LAMELLOSA, Sandberger, sp. (PI. XVII, Figs. 3, 4.)
1895. Modiomorpha lamellosa, Beushausen: Abh. k.p. Geol. Landes., n.s., pt. Xvii,
p- 18, pl. i, figs. 19-21.
Cast very oblique, transverse, almond-shaped, obliquely depressed
down the centre. Umbo situate at about the anterior fifth of the
length. Anterior end narrow, rounded. Anterior muscle-mark
large, prominent, terminal. An oblique triangular tooth under the
umbo of the right valve, and two or three long transverse striations
on the arching hinge-line behind.
Size: about 60mm. long and 30 mm. high.
There are six specimens from the “Hast side of Lee Bay,
Lynton.” They seem chiefly to differ from Sandberger’s and
Beushausen’s figures in being rather narrower and more produced
at the anterior end, and are probably no more than a variety.
The internal arrangements agree exactly with Kayser’s figure of
Modiomorpha bilsteinensis, Beushausen (Jahrb. k.p. Geol. Landes.
fiir 1894, p. 127, pl. iii, figs. 4-6), a much shorter and more oval
species.
Upper Coblenzien.
Nucuzta Lopanensts, Beushausen. (Pl. XVII, Fig. 5.)
1895. Nueula Lodanensis, Beushausen: Abh.k.p. Geol. Landes., n.s., pt. xvii, p. 48,
pl. iv, figs. 6, 7; 14?
From the “Cutting under Railway N. of Barhrick Hill, Lynton,”
is the cast of a Nucula, which appears almost exactly to agree with
Beushausen’s species. Our figure does not give a very clear idea
of its real shape, the back of the cast having been sheared off,
and thus lessening its apparent height. It was evidently thick-
shelled and deep; there are signs of a few strong teeth; its umbo
is somewhat to the rear, and bends slightly forward; its posterior
end is rounded, its anterior end narrow and subangular, and its
lower margin decidedly curved; its posterior muscle-mark is large
and faint, and its anterior deep and occupying the upper half of the
anterior end.
Size: 14mm. long, 9mm. high.
This shell is larger and rounder than N. Krachte, F. A. Romer, to
Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire. 531
which M’Coy appears to have referred it, and very much smaller
than Zima Neptuni, Giebel, which is referred to Nucula by Kayser.
Upper Coblenzien.
PaNENKA RIGIDA, F. A. Romer, sp.
1866. Cardium rigidum, F. A. Romer: Betr. Harzgeb., pt. v, p. 10, pl. iii, fig. 1.
1879. Cardiola? rigida, Kayser: Abh. Geol. Specialk. Preuss., vol. vi, pt. 1,
p- 122, pi. xviii, figs. 2, 3.
A specimen from “ Heddon’s Mouth (new road)” evidently belongs
to this magnificent species. It is a blurred cast in bluish micaceous
schistose grit, retaining the surface-ornament round the margins and
showing the inner line of the shell beneath the umbo. Its size and
marginal contour exactly agree with the German figures. Its ribs,
while slightly more numerous than those of the figured specimens,
are no more than the number mentioned in Kayser’s description.
Size: 80 mm. long, 67 mm. high.
Unter Wieder Schiefer (below Haupt Quarzit).
Sprrirera Daerpensis, Steininger. (Pl. XVII, Fig. 6.)
1840. Spirifera aperturata, Phillips: Pal. Foss., p. 77, pl. xxx, fig. 133.
1864. 5 canalifera, Davidson: Brit. Foss. Brach., vol. iii, p. 26.
1889. Ef Daleidensis, Kayser: Abh. k.p. Geol. Landes., n.s., vol. i,
pp- 27, 84, pl. i, figs. 5, 6; pl. x, fig. 11.
A dorsal valve from “East side of Lee Bay, Lynton,” appears
to agree with the species defined by Kayser, though it is so crushed
and defective that little of its character remains. It seems to have
been somewhat wider than long, with a strong elevated fold having
at least three ribs, which perhaps divaricate in front in the manner
of that species, and with nine strong ribs on each wing.
This is no doubt the same as Phillips’ shell, for which Davidson
had found a still earlier name than Schlotheim’s, but which Kayser
(1878, Abh. Geol. Specialk. Preuss., vol. ii, pt. 4, p. 174, note)
considered more probably to belong to S. Daleidensis than to the
species to which Phillips had referred it. Phillips’ figure shows
four ribs on the fold.
Upper Coblenzien.
SPIRIFERA PARADOXA, Schlotheim, sp. (PI. XVII, Fig. 7.)
1858. Spirifer paradoxus, Schnur : Paleontogr., vol. iii, p. 198, pl. xxxii 4, fig. 1.
1889. 53 35 Kayser: Abh. k.p. Geol. Landes., n.s., vol. i, p. 28,
pl. ii, figs. 6, 7.
Nine specimens from ‘“‘Quarry on road above Crock Point,
Woodabay,” appear to belong to an extremely transverse variety
of this species, being more like those quoted above than are most
of the numerous figures given of it by various authors. The central
fold is large and probably prominent, the flatness seen in our
figured specimen having been most likely caused by pressure. The
lateral ribs are small, visible almost to the angles, and almost
50 in number. The wings appear to be acute and alate at their
extremities,
Size : about 15 mm. long and 75 mm. wide.
Upper Coblenzien.
302 »=Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire.
ORTHOTETES HIPPONYX, Schnur, sp. (Pl. XVII, Fig. 8.)
1878. Streptorhynchus Devonicus, Kayser: Abh. Geol. Specialk. Preuss., vol. ii,
pt. 4, p. 199, pl. xxix, figs. 3, 4.
1897. Orthotetes hipponyx, (hlert: Bull. Soc. Géol. Fr., ser. 11, vol. xxiv, p. 856,
pl. xxvii, figs. 9-11.
Numerous specimens of a shell akin to O. umbraculum come from
the ‘‘ Cutting under Railway N. of Barhrick Mil], Lynton.” They
appear to belong to a widespread Lower Devonian species, to which
(thlert, rejecting D’Orbigny’s name Devonicus, has applied the one
which Schnur had first adopted, but afterwards dropped upon wrongly
identifying his shell with Vanuxem’s.
(thlert gives various distinguishing characters which, even in the
imperfect condition of our shells, seem to hold good, except that ours
are not of so large a size. Our shells are remarkable for the very
great size and irregularity of the hinge-area of the ventral valve.
This sometimes appears triangular in shape and higher than its
length, and sometimes irregular in shape but still high. The rest
of the shell seems little affected by this contortion of the umbo.
The hinge-line, though sometimes auriculate, is not generally equal
to the greatest width of the valve. It seems also to differ from
O. umbraculum by being more circular, by the method of increase of
its ribs, by not being roughened by the existence of dense transverse
striations, and by other particulars.
It is rather curious that this irregular shape and great size of the
hinge-area should be so pronounced in a Lower Devonian form,
when it does not appear in higher Devonian zones, but becomes
again exceedingly noticeable in Carboniferous varieties of O. crenistria,
as witness Davidson’s plates.
Our figure, unfortunately, does not show the distinguishing
characters of the shell, which I did not realize until after it had
been drawn.
Coblenzien.
OrTHIS LonGIsuLCATA, Phillips. (Pl. XVII, Fig. 9.)
1840. Orthis longisulcata, Phillips: Pal. Foss., p. 62, pl. xxvi, fig. 105.
From the “ Cutting under Railway N. of Barhrick Mill, Lynton,”
and ‘“ Woodabay, above Pier,”’ are several specimens of a rather large
Orthis. It has a transversely oval form, rather elevated umbo and
short hinge-line, and is covered with very fine divaricating stria,
which arch outwards on the shoulders. Its muscular area is large.
This appears to be the species described by Phillips, though his
drawing is rather smaller. It was doubtfully united by Davidson to
O. arcuata, Ph., from Hoype’s Nose, from which, I think, it is really
quite distinct. It bears much resemblance to the shell figured by
Kayser and Cithlert as Orthis palliata, Barrande, but our shells
present no evidence of a double hinge-line.
PHYLLOPORA ASPERA, Ulrich ?
1890. Phyllopora aspera, Ulrich: Geol. Surv. Illin., vol. vii, p. 613, pl. xliv, fig. 5,
Specimens from the “Road Section above Watersmeet” and the
“Quarry in road above Crock Point, Woodabay,”’ show little to
Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire. 533
separate them from this American species. Possibly the fenestrules
may be arranged in rather more regular lines and in some parts the
cells may be rather more numerous, but this seems only accidental.
Upper Helderberg Beds.
FENESTELLA, 8p.
Several fragmentary specimens come from the “ Quarry in road
above Crock Point, Woodabay,” but they are quite unrecognizable.
2. Lower Devontan Fossits rrom Torquay.
(PLATE XVIII.)
It is not often that a Museum can supply its shelves with
specimens dug from its actual site. Such, however, was the
case with the Torquay Natural History Society, when, in digging
the foundation of the “ Pengelly Memorial” Hall, which it added to
its Museum in 1894, a rich fossiliferous bed, 4 feet thick, was found
in the soft slates on which that building stands. Hundreds of
fossils were carefully collected from it by the Curator, the late
Mr. Else, and by the kindness of the Society I have been permitted
to attempt their description below. The fossils are entirely moulds
or casts, and have suffered very greatly from squeezing and
distortion, but in some cases minute structure is beautifully
preserved. It will be seen that they may on the whole be referred
to the Upper Coblenzien, or to a slightly higher horizon. The
richness of the band is in striking contrast to the general barrenness
of the adjoining strata.
Mr. A. Somervail, F.G.S., Secretary to the Society, thus writes
of the position of the slates :—“ A slight examination of the structure
of the Torwood Valley would at once reveal the relations of the
slates to the adjoining rocks. The valley runs in a nearly E.N.E.
and W.S.W. direction, lying between the long ridges of the
Lincombe and Warberry Hills. The valley at its commencement
on its S.W. side traverses limestones, and a little in its N.E.
course the slates at the Museum, which pass below the limestones.
Still further on in the same direction another series of slates and
grits, forming the Lincombe and Warberry ridges, in their turn
pass below the slates exposed at the Museum ; so that, as we ascend
the Torwood Valley from the Strand, we walk over rocks in
a descending sequence, the highest being the limestones, the
lowest the Lincombe and Warberry grits, the fossiliferous slates
at the Museum holding an intermediate position.”
Puacops ScHLoTHErMti, Bronn, sp. ?
1825. Calymene Schlotheimi, Bronn: Leonhard’s Zeitsch., pt. i, p. 319, pl. ii,
figs. 5-8.
1876. Phacops latifrons, F. Romer: Leth. Paleoz., pt. i, pl. xxxi, fig. 2.
1884. 5, Schlotheimi, Kayser: Jahrb. k.p. Geol. Landes., 1883, p. 35.
1897. ss Fy Kayser: Zeitsch. Deutsch. Geol. Gesell., p. 285.
The head of a small trilobite occurs, which is too much covered
with matrix for certain identification. What can be seen of it,
however, points to its belonging to the small common form from
904 Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire.
the Hifel, which Bronn, and afterwards independently Kayser,
separated from Ph. latifrons. The eyes are large and level with the
top of the glabella, which overhangs the strong marginal rim of the
front. There are eight lenses in the vertical rows of the eye.
Though it is a cast, indications remain that the glabella was as
roughly tuberculate as in Romer’s figure, which Kayser refers to
this species.
Calceola-schists and Hifelkalk.
ORTHOCERAS, sp.
The cast, probably, but not certainly, of a body-chamber, shows
a central siphuncular opening. It is widely oval in section, but has
been somewhat squeezed. It might possibly belong to O. ellipticum,
Minster.
ORTHOCERAS HERCYNICUM, Kayser ?
1879. Orthoceras hereynicwm, Kayser: Abh. Geol. Specialk. Preuss., vol. ii, pt. 4,
Do (Ay ls 3x less 7/5 SH Til
Another cast appears to approach, or to belong to, this species.
Its section is oval, with diameters of 21mm. and 18 mm., and the
siphuncle is situated on the longer diameter, nearly half-way from
the centre. The chambers are about four times as wide as high,
and are very obliquely placed.
Haupt Quarzit.
Caputus priscus, Goldfuss? (Pl. XVII, Fig. 1.)
21878. Capulus priscus, Kayser: Abh. Geol. Specialk. Preuss., vol. ii, pt. 4, p. 94,
pl. xvi, fig. 5; pl. xx, figs. 11, 14, 16.
A flattened cast may perhaps belong to Goldfuss’s species, but
it does not retain sufficient character to admit of certainty. All that
can be said is that what remains of the fossil agrees with it, and
that the curvature of the apex and the rate of increase of the whorl
are the same. A few spots on the cast may perhaps indicate
the tubercles of that shell; but they are far too indistinct to be
relied on, and may be entirely accidental marks.
Upper Coblenzien and Wifelkalk.
Conocarpium cf. cunEatum, F. A. Romer, sp.
21895. Conocardiwm cuneatum, Beushausen: Abh. k.p. Geol. Landes., n.s., pt. xvii,
p. 407, pl. xxx, figs. 9-13.
A large species of Conocardium is represented by a specimen
crushed almost beyond recognition. It measured about 18mm.
across the valves, and its plaits were strong, squared, and close-set.
It appears not to have had any flattened central region. What
is seen of it suggests that it might be a small specimen of Romer’s
shell, which, however, often reaches much larger dimensions.
Passage beds of Lower Devonian to Calceola-schists.
ATHYRIS CONCENTRICA, von Buch, sp. (Pl. XVIII, Fig. 6.)
1895. Athyris concentrica, Kayser: Aun. Soc. Géol. Belg., vol. xxii, p. 207,
pl. iii, figs. 7, 8?, 9?
Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire. 585
A few rather small and obscure specimens are referable to this
species. The fold, though pronounced, seems similar in character
to Davidson’s figures from Hope’s Nose, and is not subangular
as in A. undata, Defr. A mould of the closed valves shows the
characteristic strong concentric ridges.
Coblenzien of Belgium, but not in the Rhenish Lower Devonian
(Kayser).
SPrRIFeRA curvaTA, Schlotheim, sp. (Pl. XVIII, Figs. 2, 3, 3a.)
1853. Spirifer ewrvatus, Schnur: Paleontogr., vol. iii, p. 208, pl. xxxvi, figs. 3a, b.
Several specimens of a very large Spirifer occur, but all in
a fragmentary and distorted condition. They are apparently a good
deal wider than long, and are entirely without ribs. The fold
is elevated, rounded, and very much produced in front; and the
sinus is deep from near the umbo, and forms a very long tongue-
shaped projection in the front of the ventral valve. Some specimens
(Fig. 3a) preserve the surface-ornament, and show it to consist of
fine, regular, concentric, elevated lines, bearing minute punctations,
which are the endings of still more minute, discontinuous, radiating
lineations.
These shells seem to be like Schnur’s figure quoted above and
Davidson’s from Hope’s Nose, though probably they were wider.
I am not inclined to follow Beushausen in regarding the very
variable form of the Lummaton Beds as more than a variety of
this species.
Upper Coblenzien and higher beds.
SPIRIFERA PRIMZVA, Steininger.
1895. Spirifer primevus, Béclard: Bull. Soc. Belg. Géol., vol. ix, p. 137, pl. xi,
figs. i-vii, 1-12.
Several rather small casts and moulds appear to belong to this
species, exactly resembling S. Beaweani, Béclard, which that
author afterwards merged into Steininger’s shell. They are a good
deal wider than long, with rather rounded cardinal angles, a very
deep sinus, and (in the smallest specimen) five strong rounded ribs
on the wing. The surface is covered by very strong close-set
concentric ridges, becoming coarser in front, and united by strong
radiating lines. One specimen is 50 mm. wide.
Throughout Lower Devonian of Europe.
ATRYPA RETICULARIS, Linné, sp.
This shell seems rare, being represented by a single mould.
Upper Coblenzien and higher beds.
PEnTAMERUS GALEATUS, Dalman, sp. (PI. XVIII, Figs. 4, 5.)
1853. Pentamerus galeatus, Schnur: Paleontogr., vol. iii, p. 196, pl. xxix, fig. 2.
Cast large, globose. Umbo large, much recurved. Area wide,
undefined laterally. Dorsal valve smaller than the ventral and with
a deep, flattened, receding sinus, a corresponding fold being on the
ventral valve. Shell covered with strong ribs, reaching nearly
536 Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire.
to the umbo; from three to five being on the fold and five or six on
each side.
Size: A specimen that has hardly been distorted is 40mm. in
length and width, and 20mm. in depth. A flattened specimen is
nearly 50 mm. long.
This species is the prevailing shell of the locality. Very large
numbers of specimens have been found, but always in the condition
of casts.
From Silurian to Middle Devonian (Kayser).
ORTHIS HYSTERITA, Gmelin.
1853. Orthis Beawmonti, Schnur: Paleontogr., vol. iii, p. 215, pl. xxxvii, fig. 9.
1889. », vularius, Barrois: Ann. Sci. Géol. Nord, vol. iii, p. 72.
1889. », Aysterita, Kayser: Abh. k.p. Geol. Landes., n.s., pt. i, p. 58, pl. v,
figs. 1, 7-9.
Some casts of the double valves, showing the internal arrange-
ments, appear to agree exactly with the shell by Schnur referred to
O. Beaumonti, De Vern., and by Gosselet and Barrois to O. vulvarius,
Schlot. ; the latter remarking that it is distinguished from O. striatula,
Schlot., by its long and stronger muscular impressions. Other
larger casts of single valves equally correspond to Kayser’s figures
of the same shell, for which, following Quenstedt, he adopts a still
earlier name.
The shape of these fossils is a transverse oval, the dorsal valve
is deeply convex, the ventral valve is concave laterally and has
a broadly arched sinus. The valves meet in a deep sweeping curve
in front. The muscular area reaches rather more than half-way
forwards in the smaller examples, and less than half-way in the
larger. Only marginal traces of the very fine ribs remain.
Size: about 30 mm. long by 45 mm. wide.
Throughout the Lower Devonian of Germany.
OrtHis, sp. (Pl. XVIII, Figs. 10a, 6.)
Cast longer than broad, tumid. Dorsal valve very convex,
larger than the other. Ventral valve apparently nearly flat, with
a wide shallow sinus in front and reflexed sides, and massive near
the umbo with a wide oblique hinge-area. Hinge-line as long as
the width of the shell. Cardinal angles gently rounded. Valves
meeting in front in a sweeping curve. Muscular impressions
extremely large and strong, reaching very nearly to the front margin
of the shell in both valves. Surface covered with very numerous
small rounded strive, which seem to divaricate close to the margins.
Shell-structure thick.
Size: about 20 mm. long, 15 mm. wide, and 11 mm. deep.
There is a cast of the closed valves and an exterior of the dorsal
valve, which retains the surface though much decayed. These
specimens, together, show a good deal of the character of the
species, which seems to me very distinctive. Internally, it appears
very like O. Monnieri, Roualt, from the Lower Devonian, but it
differs from it in shape and in the size of the hinge-area. I have
seen very similar specimens from the Lower Devonian of Cornwall.
Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire. 537
ORTHOTETES UMBRACULUM, Schlotheim, sp. (Pl. XVII,
Figs. 7, Ta.)
1865. Streptorhynchus wnbraculum, Davidson: Brit. Foss. Brach., vol. ii, p. 76,
pl. xvi, fig. 6; pl. xviii, figs. 1-5.
A few moulds of this species occur, which are interesting from
their having well preserved the minute surface-ornament, which has
been described by Davidson, but is rarely, if ever, fully seen in
the numerous specimens from Lummaton and other higher beds.
A wax-cast shows this to consist of very numerous and regular
‘scale-like projections on the strie,” which are not only connected
in the interspaces by the corresponding growth-lines, but by a still
finer superficial series of elevated microscopic lineations, slightly
irregular and arching, and at the rate of about five to each growth-
line. This finer ornament is so minute that it can only be seen
by a strong lens, but it is extremely beautiful.
Lower and Upper Coblenzien and higher beds.
STROPHOMENA RHOMBOIDALIS, Wilckens.
This species is represented by a fine cast of the closed valves and
by an interior of the lower valve. The former appears to have
been a very deep shell, and shows much detail: its characteristic
ornament can be discerned on the covering mould.
Upper Coblenzien and higher beds.
STROPHEODONTA THNIOLATA, Sandberger, sp. (Pl. XVIII,
Figs. 8, 8a, 8b, 9, 9a, 9b.)
21842. Orthis Sedgwickii, D’ Arch. & De Vern.: Geol. Trans., ser. 11, vol. vi,
Pyogl. ple cexviyhion
1853. Strophomena teniolata, Sandberger: Verst. Rhein. Nassau, p. 360,
pl. xxxiv, fig. 11.
Shell apparently convex, somewhat deflexed in front, and about
as long as wide. Hinge-area narrow, as long as the width of the
shell, bearing numerous strong dentations. Ornament consisting
of multitudinous, fine, straight, regular striz, divided into groups
of five or six by somewhat stronger ribs, half of which only reach
half-way to the umbo.
Size : about 20mm. long by 25 mm. wide.
This species is not very rare in these beds, but the specimens are
very much squeezed and fragmentary, probably from its being
a delicate shell. Its ornamentation was evidently very beautiful.
It appears exactly to agree with the shell figured by Sandberger,
who quotes O. Sedgwickit as a synonym. If that be so, of course
this latter name would have priority ; but I am by no means sure
of its identity with that shell, whether as described by De Verneuil
or by Schnur, and am more inclined to believe it to be the species
attributed by Schnur and by Barrois to Leptena interstrialis, Phillips,
which itself is certainly distinct from it.
Spiriferen-sandstein of Daleiden (Sandberger).
FENESTELLA ToRWOODENSIS, n.Sp.
Some specimens, apparently of a frondose habit, have been found.
Their branches are slight (being much narrower than the fenestrules),
588 Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire.
appear to divaricate about once to seven or eight fenestrules, and
bear a very much elevated, blade-like keel within. The fenestrules
are long flattened ovals, about 6 to 10mm. in length and 13 to
10mm. across. There are four or five cells to a fenestrule.
This probably belongs to the species figured by Phillips as
F. antiqua, var. a, from Lynton; but it also comes extremely close
to the Hope’s Nose fossil, which I have referred to his F. arthritica,
differing from it in probably branching more rapidly and in
certainly having the cell-mouths and keel on the outside face.
HALLIA QUADRIPARTITA, Frech.
1886. Hallia quadripartita, Frech: Paleont. Abhandl., vol. iii, pt. 3, p. 83,
pl. viii, figs. 20, 21.
Simple, cornute, oval in section; axis excentric. Cup deep.
Major septa 28. Septal fossula deep, extending to centre and
containing the principal septum, which does not reach the centre.
Opposed and lateral septa reaching centre. Septa of each principal
quadrant 5, pinnate against the septal fossula; and those of each
opposed quadrant 7, pinnate against its lateral septum. Minor
septa 28, long.
Size: about 23 mm. wide.
There is one specimen from this locality, but the above description
has been completed from an example from near “‘ Walls Hill,”
which is in better preservation and contains forty-six septa. It
seems perfectly to correspond with Frech’s German species.
Lower ? Siringocephalus Beds of Gerolstein.
AMPLEXUS, Sp.
Conical. Cup very deep (about 25mm. deep by 25 mm. wide),
flattened at the base. Major septa 28, reaching half-way to the
centre. Minor septa rudimentary. Tabulee (as seen at the base of
the cup) irregularly flat, extending to the sides, and marginally
deflexed. Septal fossula very deep, marginal, not extending half-
way to the centre, and containing a short septum, while the adjoining
septa arch round its sides. No dissepiments.
The specimen, being only the distorted cast of the cup, is not easy
to decipher, but belongs, I think, clearly to this genus. As far
as can be seen, it approaches somewhat nearly to the Carboniferous
A. cornu-bovis, Hdwards & Haime.
MerrioPHyLtuM Esti, n.sp.
Small, apparently elongate, sub-conical, about 10mm. wide.
Major septa 16, reaching to the centre, where they are slightly
deflexed. Minor septa16, long. Signs of a large pseudo-columella,
which appears to be formed by the invagination of the centre of the
arching tabulee.
This form seems the commonest true coral of the zone, though
rather rare. It is so similar in style and structure to Metriophyllum
gracile, Schliiter, that it is doubtless congeneric; but it differs
from it specifically in the central twisting of the septa, the probably
looser structure of the columella, and other points.
AE Re eee ee be ee
WGntern Bros imp.
5
i
4
-
el
| W)
| 13)
oO
fy
rc)
a
<)
io}
5
o
A
= cf
S a
e, in
‘a0 i}
8 a
Ss a
= ‘J
9 4
fap) Pe abe
Rev. G. F. Whidborne—Devonian Fossils, Devonshire. 539
Cuapocuonus cf. Scuivreri, Holzapfel. (Pl. XVIII. Fig. 11.)
Cf. 1895. Cladochonus Schliiteri, Holzapfel: Abh. k.p. Geol. Landes., n.s., pt. xvi,
p- 305, pl. xi, figs. 1, 2, 4, 5, 7.
Two specimens of Cladochonus come very near to Holzapfel’s
species, which Schliiter had before referred to Cl. alternans,
F. A. Romer, sp. They differ from each other considerably in
size, suggesting that our species was very variable. Nor do they
agree very well with Holzapfel’s coral as against Romer’s; for,
while they have the habit of the former, they are more like the
latter in the stoutness of the stems. Our material is, however,
insufficient to define them properly.
PLEvRODICTYUM? PACHYPOROIDES, n.sp. (Pl. XVIII, Figs. 12, 12a.)
Corallum forming masses, which often become very elongate and
ramose. Base and epitheca unknown. Oorallites large, short,
polygonal, obliquely radiating, with thick walls, which are pierced
by a few irregularly placed, straight, horizontal canals; a few
corallites being much smaller than the rest.
Size of corallites: 2 or even 3mm. in diameter; about 5 or 6, or
rarely 9 or 10 mm. long.
This abundant species is very perplexing. It appears to have
the structure of Pleurodictyum, but the habit of Pachypora. In one
instance a specimen appears attached to the mould of a crinoid-
stem, and has in one place all the appearance of an ordinary
Pleurodictyum, radiating from a centre. In this case the epitheca
may have been destroyed, the crinoid-marks being obliterated
from the mould, which is covered by minute longitudinal lines.
Occurring only as casts, the connecting-rods are very noticeable.
They are sometimes nearly 1mm. long. They are placed on the
flat sides, and have sometimes an irregularly vertical arrangement.
The state of preservation is such as to allow no signs of septal strias
or tabule. ‘The corallites are very much larger and shorter than
those of Pachypora cervicornis, De Blain.
EXPLANATION TO PLATE XVII.
Devonian Fosstts rrom Lynton.
The specimens are in Mr. J. G. Hamling’s collection, and are drawn natural size.
Fic. 1.—Pterinea fasciculata, Goldfuss. Left valve, restored from the mould and
east. Woodabay.
Fic. 2.—The same, cast of anterior end. This has been accidentally drawn with the
anterior end upward, and should be turned through a quarter circle for
examination.
Fic. 3.—Modiomorpha lamellosa, Sandberger, sp. Cast of right valve, showing
part of hinge, defective in front. Lee Bay.
Fic. 4.—The same, cast of both valves, showing the anterior muscle-mark (8).
Lee Bay.
Fic. 5.—Nucula Lodanensis, Beushausen. Cast of right valve, imperfect on the back.
Barhrick Mill.
Fic. 6.—Spirifera Daleidensis, Steininger. Distorted cast of dorsal valve. Lee Bay.
Fic. 7.—Spirifera paradoxa, Schlotheim, sp. Dorsal valve, restored from a cast
and mould. Woodabay.
Fic. 8.—Orthotetes hipponyx, Schuur, sp. Dorsal valve of a young specimen, one
side of which is irregularly alate.
Fic. 9.—Orthis longisulcata, Phillips. Cast of ventral valve. Barhrick Mill.
540 Hugh J. L. Beadnelti—The Faytim Depression.
EXPLANATION TO PLATE XVIII.
DeEvoniIAN Fosstuts From Torquay.
The specimens belong to the Torquay Natural History Society, and were obtained
from the foundations of its Museum. ‘They are drawn to natural size.
Fie. 1.—Capulus priscus, Goldfuss ?
Fic. 2.—Spirifera curvata, Schlotheim, sp. Portion of ventral valve.
Fie. 3.—The same. Central part of the front of dorsal valve, showing the fold.
Fig. 3a, portion of surface magnified.
Fic. 4.—Pentamerus galeatus, Dalman, sp.
Fic. 5.—The same.
Fie. 6.—Athyris concentrica, von Buch, sp. A small dorsal valve.
Fic. 7.—Orthotetes umbraculum, Schlotheim, sp. Mould showing the minute
ornamentation. Fig. 7a, portion of the mould magnified. :
Fie. 8.—Stropheodonta teniolata, Sandberger, sp. Lower valve and hinge-line.
Fig. 8a, portion of hinge-line magnified. Fig. 8b, portion of front of
the valve magnified, showing the double series of striz.
Fie. 9.—The same. Lower valve showing internal arrangements. Fig. 9a, portion
of hinge-line magnified. Fig. 90, portion of ovarian area, showing its
pitted surface.
Fia. 10.—Orthis, sp. Fig. 10a, cast of dorsal aspect. Fig. 103, cast of ventral
aspect.
Fie. TeV ie eee ef. Schliteri, Holzapfel. Mould of the part of a specimen.
Fie. 12.— Plewrodictyum ? pachyporoides, n.sp. Portion of a ramose cast. Fig. 12a
portion of one of the corallites magnified, showing the arrangement of
the rods.
I].—Tue Faytm Depression: A Prenimtnary Notion oF THE
GroLoGy oF A District In EGypt CONTAINING A NEW PaLmo-
GENE VERTEBRATE F'auna.!
By Hvuen J. L. Beapnett, F.G.S., F.R.G.S., of the Geological Survey of Egypt.
HE Faytim, one of the largest depressions of the Libyan
Desert, is situated some 50 miles south-west of Cairo. It is
cut out in rocks of Eocene and Oligocene age, while still younger
deposits of Pliocene and Post-Pliocene date are found within the
hollow. The depression owes its origin to the action of the ordinary
suberial denuding agents, which I have shown in previous papers
were capable of producing the oases-depressions of Baharia, Farafra,
Dakhla, etc. Faulting, which has played so important a part in the
formation of the Nile Valley, appears to have had little or nothing
to do with the production of the Fayim and other depressions of
the Libyan Desert.
During my survey of the Faytim in 1898 I found that certain
strata of the Middle Eocene were veritable ‘ bone-beds,’ being
crowded at many points with vertebrate remains, such as the ribs
of cetaceans, crocodile vertebra, fish-bones, and coprolites. Up to
that time the only vertebrate fossils which had been obtained from
the district were remains of Zeuglodon and some fragments of
a mandible thought to belong to Cheropotamus; these had been
collected by Schweinfurth and noticed by him in 1886.
* Communicated in abstract to the British Association at Glasgow, 1901, by
permission of Sir William Garstin, K.C.M.G., Under-Secretary of State, and
Capt. H. G. Lyons, Director-General of the Survey Department, Cairo.
Geol.Mag.1901. PIecvile
Mintern Bros imp.
Devonian fossils ; Torquay.
Hugh J. L. Beadnell—The Fayiim Depression. 541
In the early part of 1901 I spent a short time in the Fayaim
exploring the borders of the Birket el Qurun lake, on which occasion
Dr. C. W. Andrews, of the British Museum, who happened to be in
Egypt at the time, accompanied me. On our return journey to
Cairo we visited some of the localities I had found to be bone-
bearing in 1898, and on our last day’s march were most fortunate
in crossing the Hocene escarpments at a point where a number of
well-preserved marine and terrestrial vertebrate remains lay exposed
on the surface of the outcrop of the bone-beds. On reporting,
Capt. H. G. Lyons, Director-General of the Survey Department, at
once organized a special collecting expedition; Dr. Andrews again
accompanied me, and together we succeeded in obtaining a unique
collection of almost entirely new mammals and reptiles. A brief
description of these is now being published by my companion in
the GronocicaL MaGazine (see September and October issues),
and the object of the present paper is to give a preliminary account
of the geology of the district from which these interesting remains
were obtained.
GENERAL SUCCESSION.
The oldest beds found in the depression are the clays, marls,
and limestones, with Nummulites gizehensis, of Middle Hocene age.
These are succeeded by a group of white marly limestones and
gypseous clays, which largely underlie the cultivated land of the
Fayiim. They are followed by a series consisting of clays, sand-
stones, and calcareous grits, some beds of which are characterized
by the abundance of Operculina. The latter series is followed by
the uppermost marine Eocene beds (Carolia beds), an alternating
group of clays, sandstones, and limestones, characterized by an
abundant vertebrate and invertebrate fauna, and equivalent to the
Upper Mokattam beds of Cairo. Above the ‘Carolia beds,’ and
well marked off from them, both lithologically and palzontologically,
is found a great thickness of variegated sands and sandstones, clays,
and marls, divided near the summit by one or more thick intercalated
lava sheets. These variegated beds are largely of fluvio-marine origin
and are of Upper Eocene — Lower Oligocene age. No Miocene
deposits have been recognized within the area, but further north,
as at Mogara, Lower Miocene beds occur, and it is probable that
a continuous conformable series of lithologically similar deposits
extends from the summit of the Faytim escarpment (Lower Oligocene)
to the Mogara Miocene beds.
The Pliocene is probably represented by the great masses of
gravel, or raised beaches, which form such a marked feature in
the geology of the district. Fossiliferous Pliocene deposits have
also been recorded from the south part of the area by Schweinfurth.
Of Post-Pliocene age we may mention the ancient high-level
lacustrine clays, the cultivated alluvial loams, and the desert
sand-dunes.
The following table shows the sequence of strata known in the
Fayiim and the classification adopted by the writer :—
542 Hugh J. L. Beadnell—The Fayiim Depression.
RECENT AND ea soil, blown sand, and high-level lacustrine sands
PLEISTOCENE. and clays.
Shell- Bonne on exposed rocks.
Fossiliferous deposits of Sidmant.
Gravel terraces.
PLIOCENE.
Lower CaCO)
AND 5. Fluvio-marine Series (Gebel el Qatrani beds).
Upper Eocene. )
. Qasr el Sara Series (Carolia beds).
. Birket el Qurun Series (Operculina-Nummulite beds).
. Ravine Beds (fish-scale marls).
. Wadi Rayan Series (Nemmutlites gizehensis beds).
MInDDLE
KocrEne.
bo co
1. Want Rayan SeEprizs.
The wadis of Rayan and Mouailla, on the southern side of the
Faytm depression, are cut out in the clays and limestones of this
group, equivalent to part of the Lower Mokattam of the Nile Valley.
The uppermost bed of limestone, characterized by the profusion of
the large foraminifer Nwmmulites gizehensis, forms a considerable
part of the floor of the depression west of the Fayim cultivation,
stretching from Gebel Rayan northwards to the foot of Gar el
Gehannem, 28 kilometres west of the western extremity of the
Birket el Qurun.
2. Ravine Beps.
This series, estimated at 25 metres thick, consists of gypseous
clays and white marly limestones, and is met with bordering the
cultivated land on the east, west, and north sides. The same beds
are frequently exposed in the deep ravines of EH] Butts and Hl Wadi
which intersect the cultivation. The beds yield shell-impressions
of Leda, Tellina, etc., with fish-teeth and numerous scales. No
vertebrate remains have as yet been obtained from this or the
underlying series. Beds of this group form the base of the isiand
‘Geziret el Qorn’ and the lower part of the northern shore of the
Birket el Qurun.
3. BIRKET EL QuRUN SERIES.
The beds of this group, some 60 metres thick, form the main
part of the escarpment immediately overlooking the north shore of
the lake. The series appears to be the equivalent of the upper
part of the white beds (limestones) of Gebel Mokattam, although
lithologically there is considerable difference. Certain beds of the
series are characterized by the abundance of two foraminifera,
Nummulites Fraasi and Operculina discoidea. A well-marked
molluscan fauna is also present, and cetacean and fish remains
are not uncommon. ‘The series is well seen in the desert separating
the Faytim and Nile Valley, along the northern boundary of the
cultivation and of the lake, and westwards in the cliffs to the
outlying hill-mass of Gar el Gehannem.
In the northern part of the Faytim the series is divisible by
a very constant well-marked bed of hard sandstone, which almost
invariably weathers out into a number of huge globular masses.
The lower beds are seen in the island of Geziret el Qorn, and from
Hugh J. L. Beadnell—The Fayim Depression. 543
them Schweinfurth first collected cetacean remains. The mollusca
from these beds were described by Mayer-Eymar (Zittel, Palgonto-
graphica, N.F., X, 3 (xxx)) as having on the whole a Bartonian
aspect, but his determination seems much open to doubt, as they
underlie the Upper Mokattam (Qasr el Sara series), the Parisian
age of which appears to be well established. The cetacean remains
were described by Dames, who compared them with the American
Zeuglodon macrospondylus and Z. brachyspondylus, but did not con-
sider them to represent a new species. The same author, however,
subsequently described similar but more complete remains (also
collected by Schweinfurth, from beds belonging to my Qasr el
Sara series) as a new species, Z. Osiris. The upper division of the
Birket el Qurun series is lithologically rather similar, consisting of
alternating clays and sandstones. The beds, however, are generally
much richer in organic remains. In the uppermost beds very large
cetacean vertebrae occur, and these probably represent a second
species of Zeuglodon, as although Dames considered the difference
in size of the bones of separate individuals to be sexual, the
apparently much greater upward range of the smaller type suggests
the existence of two species.
4, Qasr EL Sara SERIES.
The exact junction between this and the last-described series is
purely arbitrary, some of the commonest fossils passing from one
to the other. The name of the series is taken from an ancient
ruined temple near which the beds are well developed. The Qasr
el Sara series (or Carolia beds) is perhaps the most important and
best marked division of the Faytim succession; it forms a bold
escarpment of great length and height, consisting of a series of
very fossiliferous clays and limestones, with sands and sandstones
in the upper part of a total thickness of 175 metres. The ‘Carolia
beds’ closely correspond to the Upper Mokattam division of the
Eocene at Cairo, but are much more fully developed in the Fayim,
where they occupy a large part of the northern desert. In the
cliffs about 8 kilometres north of the Birket el Qurun the beds
form a steep double escarpment, running nearly parallel to the
northern shore of the lake.
Vertebrate remains may be found in places in most of the beds of
this division, but the most prolific horizon is the ‘ bone-beds’ proper,
a double band of clay separated by two layers of limestone, and
occurring about midway in the series. In this bed groups of
skeletons, or portions of skeletons, are occasionally met with, sug-
gesting that they were carried out to sea by a strong river current
and deposited at the tail-end of the latter. That the Qasr el Sara
series was deposited in fairly shallow water at no great distance
from land seems certain, no less from the common occurrence of
terrestrial animal remains than from the general lithological character
of the beds. The clays abound with impressions of plants, much
lignitic matter occurs, current-bedding is well seen in many of the
more sandy beds, while the thin interbedded bands of limestone
544 Hugh J. L. Beadnell—The Faytim Depression.
are more or less impure and do not indicate conditions of any
great depth.
The commonest and perhaps the most important mammal from
these beds is Meritheritum Lyonsi, Andr., which Dr. Andrews con-
siders to be a generalized forerunner of the Mastodon type of
Proboscidean ; a second species may also be present. The mandible
and upper teeth, together with some of the limb bones of a large
heavily built ungulate, somewhat resembling Dinotherium, have also
been described as Barythertum grave. Sirenian remains are not at
all rare and may belong to Hotherium egyptiacum, Owen, the type
of which was a natural brain-cast from the Mokattam beds of Cairo.
It is possible, however, that the Faytim animal may yet prove to be
distinct from Hotherium. Cetacean remains are remarkably common
in these beds, and all appear to belong to Zeuglodon Osiris; the
larger cetacean bones, mentioned as occurring in the underlying
beds, have not here been detected. Reptiles are represented by two
new genera of snakes, the larger of which, Gigantophis Garstini,
Andr., was a python-like type, and probably attained a length of
30 feet. The remains of the smaller Meriophis Schweinfurthi, Andr.,
in the shape of well-preserved vertebra, are remarkably abundant.
Two new species and one new genus of chelonians were obtained
from this series and have been described as Psephophorus eocenus,
Thalassochelys libyca, and Stereogenys Cromert. Crocodilian remains
abound, the most important new species being Tomistoma africanum,
Andr. Fish-remains occur throughout the series, one of the
commonest forms being a large, and probably new, species of
Siluroid. Fragments of the Saw-fish, Propristis Schweinfurthi, are
also frequently met with.
5. FLUVIO-MARINE SERIES.
In the north of the Fayiim, the Qasr el Sara series is always
conformably overlain by a unique series of variegated sands and
sandstones, with alternating clayey and marly bands. The often
repeated bands of limestone of the underlying division are now only
represented by an occasional bed of calcareous grit or impure lime-
stone. Near the top of the series occurs a horizontal sheet of basalt,
in all probability contemporaneously interbedded. For the most
part the series is barren of organic remains, but certain bands in the
upper part yield numerous individuals of Unio, Spatha, Mutela,
Ampullaria, Turritella, Cerithium, Melania, and Potamides. From
such a facies, we may without doubt conclude that the conditions
of deposition of these sediments were estuarine or fluvio-marine.
Moreover, the enormous quantities of silicified wood, in the shape
of hundreds of trees of great length and girth, associated with the
remains of terrestrial animals (Palgomastodon, etc.), show that rivers
of considerable size emerged from the land to the south, the coast-
line of which was probably not very far distant.
The series attains a maximum thickness of about 250 metres.
With regard to age, I have already stated’ that the lower part of
1 Beadnell: ‘* Recent Geological Discoveries in the Nile Valley and Libyan
Desert ’’ ; London, 1901.
Hugh J. L. Beadneli—The Fayiim Depression. 545
the series may be regarded as Upper Eocene, while the higher beds
above the interbedded basalt marks the base of the Lower Oligocene.
It seems probable that this age-determination will hold good,
although whether it will ever be possible to draw a precise junction
between the Eocene and Oligocene is more than doubtful. The
series is quite continuous in the field, and the passage from the
one to the other formation appears to be perfectly gradual, both
lithologically and paleeontologically.
Occasional fragments of bone may be observed in many parts
of the series, but, so far, the only remains of value obtained were
unearthed from the lowest bed, and are thus certainly of Upper
Eocene (Bartonian) age. The most important terrestrial animal
is Paleomastodon Beadnelli, Andr., a small generalized form of
proboscidean, and probably a direct descendant of Merithium Lyonst
of the Qasr el Sara series below. Part of the mandible of another
and different ungulate was also obtained, but has not yet been
determined. In addition, remains of crocodiles and turtles are not
uncommon in the basal beds of the ‘ Fluvio-marine Series.’ The
post-basalt portion of the series forms the highest part of the
escarpment on the north of the Fayiim depression. These beds
cover the desert to the north, stretching to beyond the latitude of
Cairo. To the north-west, however, they appear to pass gradually
up into younger deposits, as at Mogara Lower Miocene rocks occur.
Space does not permit of any details being given here of the
younger Tertiary and Post-Tertiary Faytim deposits.
GENERAL REMARKS.
The Eocene rocks of the Faytim are of special importance, owing
to the presence in them of a new and highly interesting succession
of vertebrate remains, enabling us to gain some insight into the
nature of the fauna at that time inhabiting the great African land-
mass to the south. In the region to the west of the Nile Valley,
comparatively shallow water existed from probably the beginning of
the Middle Eocene, and numerous rivers entered the sea in this
neighbourhood, bringing quantities of forest trees and floating
carcases of animals from the south. To the east deeper water must
have existed, as limestones continued to be accumulated until the
latter part of the Middle Eocene period, and even then the amount
of land sediment deposited was much less than in the Fayim.
Later, in Upper Eocene times, while the Fayiim appears to have
been the site of an enormous delta, no deposits of the same age
at all appear to have been laid down to the east of the present
Nile Valley, as there the top beds of the Middle Eocene (Upper
Mokattam) are unconformably overlain by the Oligocene deposits
of Gebel Ahwar, etc.
It is to be hoped that further exploration in the Fayim and
surrounding desert regions may in time lead to paleontological
discoveries of the highest importance. Some of the primitive
ancestors of the proboscidea have already been discovered, and it is
not improbable that in the still lower Rayan series earlier and still
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. XII. 39
546 E. A. N. Arber—Fossil Plants from India.
more generalized forms may eventually be unearthed. Up to the
present time it has been maintained, by some authors at least, that
at the close of the Pliocene or commencement of the Pleistocene
period a great immigration of the Europasian ungulates took place
into Africa ; whereas the recent discoveries in Egypt show this theory
to be untenable, as it was in the ancient African Continent itself
that the elephants, and possibly some other groups, were evolved.
TII.—Notrs on Roytz’s Tyres or Fosstn Puants From INDIA.
By E. A. Newett Arser, B.A.,
Trinity College, Cambridge ; University Demonstrator in Palzobotany.
N his Illustrations of the Botany of the Himalayan Mountains,
published in 1839, Royle! figures several important fossil
plants from the Burdwan Coalfield of India. These are of especial
interest, not only as being the first mention of several of the best
known fossil types from the Lower Gondwanas of India, but also
as among the earliest descriptions of members of the Glossopteris
flora.
Royle’s types are now in the Geological Department of the British
Museum (Natural History), Cromwell Road. The object of this
notice is to call attention to the whereabouts of these types, and to
some of the more important morphological features which they
present. A full account of the literature, in which reference is
made to these fossils, will be found in Feistmantel’s? Flora of the
Lower Gondwanas of India, and need not be recapitulated here.
The horizon in the Lower Gondwanas, from which these plants were
obtained, is the Raniganj group of the Damuda Series.
SPHENOPHYLLUM SPECIosuUM (Royle). [V. 4,190.] °
1837. Trizygia speciosa, Royle: ibid., p. xxix*, pl. ii, fig. 8.
1881. Ws ap Feistmantel: ibid., p. 69, pls. xia, xiia, figs. 1, 2.
The type figured by Royle under the name Trizygia speciosa is
a very interesting one. It is a fine specimen, 6 inches long and
24 inches across, and showing nine whorls of leaves. The stem is
slender, 31s—74s inch across. The internodes have two fairly
prominent longitudinal ridges, but the preservation is not sufficiently
good to show that these ridges are continuous at the node. Hach node
bears a whorl of three pairs of leaves, unequal in size, and con-
sisting of four elongate-ovate, entire, and spreading leaves, 14 inch
long by 3 inch broad, and a smaller pair, 2 inch by 2 inch, ovate
and reflexed. The successive whorls are superposed.
In the arrangement and unequal size of the leaves, S. speciosum
differs from the majority of European Sphenophyllums, to which,
1 Royle: ‘Illustrations of the Botany and other branches of Natural History of
the Himalayan Mountains, and of the Flora of Cashmere’; London, 1839.
* Feistmantel, “‘ The Fossil Flora of the Gondwana System’’?: Mem. Geol.
Surv. India, 1881, ser. xm, vol. iii. (The Flora of the Damuda and Panchet
Divisions, 1880.)
* Registered number of specimen in the Geological Department, British Museum.
E. A. N. Arber—Fossil Plants from India. 547
however, it is in other respects nearly related. Feistmantel,’ for
these, and for other reasons which M. Zeiller and Mr. Seward?
have since shown to be untrustworthy, supported Royle in assigning
the Indian plant to a separate genus, Trizygia. But M. Zeiller* has
further shown that the unequal size and arrangement of the leaves
in such specimens is not a constant feature of either generic or
specific value, and that it sometimes occurs among such European
species as S. oblongifolium and S. filiculme, from the Upper Coal-
measures and Permian. M. Zeiller therefore rejects the genus
Trizygia, a view which Mr. Seward‘ has supported in his textbook
on Fossil Plants.
The occurrence of such a typical Coal-measure genus as Spheno-
phyllum, in association with members of the Glossopteris flora in the
Lower Gondwanas of India, is a point of special interest, as showing
that in India, as in similar beds in South Africa, and in South
America, there occur plants which are typical of the flora of Europe
and North America in Permo-Carboniferous times.
VERTEBRARIA INDICA, Royle. [V. 4,189. ]
1839. Vertebraria indica, Royle: ibid., p. xxix*, pl. ii, figs. 1-3, 5-7.
1881. +3 », Feistmantel: ibid., pl. xiia, figs. 10, 11; pls. xia,
xiv a, fig. 11; pl. xiva bis, fig. 3.
Royle says “the shales of Ranigunj and Chinnakooree contain
abundant vegetable remains of the Ranigunj Reed, Vertebraria
indica, and Vertebraria radiata.” It is now known that both these
species represent different views of the rhizome of Glossopteris ;°
V. radiata, the transverse section, and V. indica, the surface view.
Three specimens of each of these are figured by Royle. I have
only been able to identify one large specimen ° figured as V. indica.
This is 5% inches long, and # inch across. It is composed of two
regular longitudinal rows of small square (3 x 2inch), or slightly
oblong (+ x % inch) areas.
As seen in transverse section, judging by Royle’s figures, the
structure of Vertebraria indica is very similar to that of Vertebraria
australis (McCoy). In surface view, however, there is less resem-
blance. The areas, which represent the broad outer edges of the
wedge-like seements composing the fossil, are in the Indian specimens
small, and fairly regular, in size. From other Indian specimens
figured by Feistmantel, this would seem to be a constant characteristic.
In Australian specimens’ they appear to be often very irregular,
and to vary greatly in size. Oldham* has pointed out that the
Vertebraria described by Zeiller from South Africa also differs from
1 Feistmantel: Rec. Geol. Surv. India, 1879, xii, p. 163.
2 Seward: Mem. and Proc. Lit. Phil. Soc. Manchester, 1889, vol. iii, p. 1.
3 Zeiller: Bull. Soc. géol. France, 1890-91, ser. m1, vol. xix.
4 Seward: ‘‘ Fossil Plants,’’ vol. i; Cambridge, 1898.
> Zeiller: Bull. Soc. géol. France, 1896, ser. 111, vol. xxiv, p. 349.
SSB ily tice, Ue
7 Feistmantel: Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S. Wales, Palzont., No. 3, 1890, pl. xiv,
fig. 6; pl. xv, figs. 1-3.
8 Oldham: Rec. Geol. Surv. India, 1897, vol. xxx, pt. 1.
548 E. A. N. Arber—Fossil Plants from India.
Indian specimens. Although it is highly probable that all these
species are the remains of the rhizome of one and the same plant,
Glossopteris Browniana, Brongt., yet it would not seem possible to
unite them, on account of the variation in structure’ which they
present.
MacRoT&NIOPTERIS DANOIDES (Royle). [V. 4,191. ]
1839. Glossopteris daneoides, Royle: ibid., p. xxix*, pl. ii, fig. 9.
1881. Tae daneoides, Feistmantel: ibid., p. 88, pls. xxa, xxia,
gsi; 2.
This specimen, which is beautifully preserved, measures 5} inches,
and nearly 24 inches across. The midrib (3%; inch across) gives
off at right angles parallel veins, which are distant (34; inch), and
simple, or occasionally dichotomizing. There is no regular alternation
between the simple and branched veins. The leaf is oval-lanceolate,
and the margin entire or undulate.
The generic value of Macroteniopteris is a doubtful one. It
would perhaps have been better, in the present state of our
knowledge, to have included such forms under the broad definition
which Mr. Seward? has adopted in dealing with similar remains.
The chief distinctions between Macroteniopteris and Teniopteris
are apparently the simple frond of large size—a point of doubtful
value—and the distant secondary nerves, in the former case. It is
therefore open to question whether a generic distinction based only
on such characters will eventually be found to hold good.
CiapopHuesBis Rovuzi, Arber. [V. 4,192. ]
1839. Pecopteris Lindleyana, Royle: ibid., p. xxix*, pl. ii, fig. 4.
1881. -Alethopteris Lindleyana, Feistmantel: ibid., p. 80, pl. xviiia, figs. 2, 2a;
pl. xix qa, figs. 3, 4.
Royle’s specimen is a large bipinnate frond, the main axis of
which is nearly 7 inches long, and some of the pinne are of a similar
length. The pinnules, which are badly preserved, are somewhat
oblong in shape, and attached by a broad base. The apex is rounded.
They average 4 inch long, by 3°; inch broad. There is a strong
median nerve, from which dichotomizing secondary nerves are given
off. Feistmantel’s figures show the nervation accurately, but those
of Royle, and especially of McClelland,’ are somewhat misleading.
The general habit and the nervation recall certain fronds of
a British Jurassic fern, Todites Williamsoni (Brongt.); so much so
that Feistmantel* originally placed the Indian species in a group
with Alethopteris Whitbyensis, Heer, a plant very possibly identical
with T. Williamsoni (Brongt.).° The fructification of Royle’s plant
is known, and is of the Polypodiaceous type, and thus differs from
that of Heer’s plant, as Feistmantel® later admitted. It would seem
1 Etheridge: Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1894, ser. 11, vol. ix.
2 Seward: Brit. Mus. Cat., ‘‘ The Wealden Flora,’’ 1894, pt. i, p. 124.
3 McClelland: Rep. Geol. Surv. India, 1849-50, pl. xiii, figs. 10a, 100, 10e, 11.
* Feistmantel: Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1876, vol. xlv, p. 360.
5 Seward: Brit. Mus. Cat., ‘‘The Jurassic Flora’’?: I. The Yorkshire Coast,
p- 88; London, 1900.
6 Feistmantel: ibid., p. 80.
Dr. H. Exton—Geology of Ladysmith. 549
best to refer Royle’s type to the genus Cladophlebis, a group of fossil
ferns whose fructification resembles that of recent Polypodiacex,
and of which the best known representative is Cladophlebis denticulata
(Brongt.), from the English Oolite. I have called Royle’s type
Cladophlebis Roylei, as the term Pecopteris Lindleyana was in any
case inadmissible, for it had been earlier applied by Presl to a fern
now known as Coniopteris arguta (L. & H.).1 The nervation in
Cladophlebis and Todites is of the same general type, but the
evidence of the fructification would seem to be strongly in favour
of referring Royle’s plant to the former genus.
PustuLaria CaLpERIANA, Royle.
No scientific description is given by Royle of any of his types.
All the plants he mentions are, however, figured, with the exception
of one which he merely refers to as having been named by him
Pustularia Calderiana.* The rock-specimen with Cladophlebis
Roylei contains several other smaller fragments, and also bears a label
with ‘“ Pustularia Calderiana” in probably Royle’s handwriting.
These specimens are imperfect, and perhaps for this reason were not
figured. They apparently consist of slender branched specimens of
Vertebraria indica, Royle, similar to those figured by Feistmantel.°
As, however, Royle’s plant was neither figured nor described, the
name Pustularia Calderiana has no significance.
IV.—GeoxtocicaL Notes on THE NeIGHsBouRHOOD oF LapysmITH,
Natat. No. 2: On some Travettep Buiocks in THE Ecoa
SHALES.‘
By Dr. H. Exton, F.G.S.
(Communicated by Professor T. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., F.G.S8.)
N both sides of the Klip River running through this district
a shale predominates, varying in colour from greyish-brown
to purple, having a conchoidal fracture, and the features of Ecca
Shale, as described by Dr. Molengraaf (Trans. Geol. Soc. South
Africa, vol. iv, pt. 5, pp. 107-112).
The watercourses and dongas are too shallow to show the base
of the EKcca series, and J have searched for the presence of Dwyka
Conglomerate here without avail.’ In a narrow gorge running into
the Klip River near to this station is a level piece of ground covered
with blocks, which, from the absence of a parent rock and from the
1 Seward: ibid., p. 116.
2 Royle: ibid., p. xxix*.
3 Feistmantel : ibid., vol. iii, pl. xiii, figs. 1, 2.
4 For No. 1 see p. 509.
5 Since Dr. Molengraaf’s memoir on ‘* The Origin of the Dwyka Conglomerate,”’
describing the Ecca Beds as resultants of elacial. action, much attention has been
given to the subject. See the Trans. Geol. Soc. South Africa, 1898, vol. iv,
pp: 108-115; and Nat. Science, 1899, pp. 199-202. In E. J. Dunn’s
Geological Map of South Africa (1887) the Ecca Beds range only up as far as the
Tugela River in Northern Natal. The Ecca Beds described by Dr. Molengraaf are
in the Vr yheid district, just south of Utrecht and west of Zululand.
550 Dr. H. Exton—Geology of Ladysmith.
peculiarity of their disposition, appear to have been travelled
blocks (Locality No. 1). Hach one is more or less encased with
a fine-grained sandstone, like the kernel of an almond in its shell,
which to a certain extent takes the shape of the central mass.
These blocks, lying on the Hcca Shale, are well shown in the
photographs Nos. 1 and 2, for which I am indebted to Captain
Dalgleish, of the Newcastle Field Artillery.
“No. 2” shows an artificial pile of detached blocks, each partially
exhibiting the crust or casing of sandstone. These stones have
evidently been exposed, and possibly rolled from higher ground,
and thus more or less fractured.
“No. 1” (see Fig. 1) shows a block still lying in siti, partially
embedded in the Hcca Shale, size 27 x 19 x 12 inches. The
immediate foreground shows the cutting of a military road, and by
this the portion facing the spectator has been exposed, whilst the
base of the block and the further portion remain embedded in the
shale, as when planted there by natural agencies.
oO,
WS
Me Sul Nyics
he .
YG ar, “ds WS
1), NEN, &, he S*
\ ; a
x ) ax St
9) Pc
Ih) \ fasta So
WT Bx \aeea me
Li) BS Fh Wy
Fic. 1.—One of the encrusted blocks in the Ecca Shale near the Station Hospital,
Ladysmith, Natal.
There is so much that to me is enigmatic in these stones that,
with the stimulus your kindly interest in them has excited, I have
extended my researches, with the result, as mentioned in mine
of May 16th, that I found a similar specimen at Nicholson’s Nek,
four miles due north-east from this station (Locality No. 2), and
on a second visit discovered others having the same characters.
Since then I spent a satisfactory day at Bester’s Farm (Locality No. 3),
behind Waggon Hill, about five miles in a south-west direction
from the Station Hospital (that is, Stationary, in contradistinction
Dr. H. Exton—Geology of Ladysnuth. 551
from Field Hospital). This Bester’s Farm (occupied by a man of
that name) must not be confounded with “ Besters,” a railway station
on the Harrismith line, about 16 miles from Ladysmith.
Following the watercourse (at this season merely a dry donga)
towards the hills a mile and a half away from Bester’s house
I found many of these Olifant Klip’ blocks in siti, embedded in the
blue shale. Some were embedded in the bed of the watercourse,
but others were revealed by projecting from the almost perpendicular
sides of the donga, having ten feet of shale between them and the
surface of the ground. These are absolutely untouched by the
hand of man. A casing of similar sandstone is here also evident ;
but, from moisture during the rainy season, more or less decomposition
has ensued.
A blow with the hammer sufficient to break the crust generally
detaches the same from its contained central mass ; in order, therefore,
that you may have the fullest opportunity of investigation I am
having a small block sawn through by a local mason here, so as
to give a section of the central portion still retaining its part of the
crust above and below. This is from the site of my first find, on
the declivity near the Klip River at this Station Hospital.
The thickness of the portion sliced off is 3 to 5 inches, and the
diameters of its flat face are 163 by 12 inches.
In the same package I have enclosed specimens from the centre
of blocks found by me at Bester’s Farm. These, as far as I can see,
possess the same characters as the specimens sent you by post
at first.
The enquiry as to the source of these blocks becomes more
interesting, and their geological relations more important, since
I am now enabled to prove their presence on or in the Heca Shale
at four different points widely apart.
Mcholson’s Nek
st
Bester’s Farm.
Fig, 2.—Showing the relative position of the four localities in which the travelled
concentric blocks have been found in the Ecca Shales near Ladysmith.
The fourth point is in the Nek between Gun Hill and the
mountain Umbulwana (Locality No. 4). Gun Hill is four miles
east of Ladysmith and 5} from the Hospital Camp. At this Nek
there are eight or ten blocks lying; partially exposed, im siti, on
1 The kernel of these blocks resembles in microscopic structure the so-called
‘Elephant Rock,’ or ‘ Olifant Klip’ of the Transvaal.
552 F. Chapman—The Olifant Klip from Natal, ete.
the Ecca Beds, with central mass and concentric coatings similar
to the others already mentioned.
The occurrence of these peculiar blocks in large numbers, at
places so far apart, points to some extensive physical operations
under which their formation and deposition have taken place.
Mr. Fred. Chapman suggests that these blocks, with a more or
less concentric structure, have been due to sigmoidal folds in crushed
Paleozoic rocks. Their distribution was probably due to ice-action
during the formation of the Keca Shales.
The encrusted blocks and their association with the Eeca Shale
are precisely the same in the four several localities in which J have
now found them.
There can be no question about their being travelled blocks.
I have been over the whole country within a radius of 15 miles
round here, and have failed to find anything approaching the kind
of stone of which the central portion consists. Therefore I] am
certain that I have not met with the rock from which these blocks
were derived, nor, as far as ] am aware, is there any previous mention
of the occurrence in Natal of what I must perforce call ‘dolomite,’
such as the central mass of these encrusted blocks, which is a blue
magnesian limestone, effervescing on application of a mineral acid.
[If the Ecca Beds are really extra-morainic deposits in connection
with the Dwyka Conglomerate, it may be to the latter we have to
look for the immediate source of the blocks, and to far-away southern
regions for the earlier rocks from which they originally came.—
DAR. Jl
V.—Nores on THE OxiFaANtT Kure From NATAL, THE TRANSVAAL,
AND LYDENBURG.
By Freperick Cuapman, A.L.S., F.R.M.S.
(Appendix to Dr. Exton’s paper on the Travelled Blocks in the Kcca Shales near
Ladysmith.)
J.—Specimen from one of the blocks lying on the EHcca Shale
on the declivity near the Klip River at the Station Hospital,
Ladysmith. This is a bluish-grey rock of close texture, with
a flaky and sometimes conchoidal fracture. The broken surface
does not reveal the rock’s internal structure; but on the weathered
surface, which appears as a brown crust, the siliceous strings and
bands passing through the rock stand out in high relief. The
surface effervesces freely when touched with acid.
Under the microscope this rock appears to be a mylonized
siliceous limestone. It was perhaps originally a calcareous sand-
stone ; possibly having organic remains (as shell-fragments), more
or less massive.
The arenaceous part of the rock now appears as brecciated fragments
of sandstone, alternating with contorted and fibrous calcareous
material. The whole structure shows an extraordinary amount
of crushing, and exhibits various stages in the formation of
a cleaved rock. The harder arenaceous portion occurs as strings
of rifted quartzose fragments, once continuous, but now broken
F. Chapman—The Olifant Klip from Natal, ete. 5d3
up and rippled, whilst between the folds, which are often sharp
and V-shaped, the calcareous and other minerals lie in fibrous
bands or intermingled with quartz-grains.
On the margins of the sandstone fragments some dolomite rhombs
may be detected.
This ‘ Olifant Rock’ is not a true dolomite, but a crushed limestone
with much siliceous interstitial matter, and the crushing has given
rise to a pretty ‘rippling’ of the granular portion, such as one
often sees in the Skiddaw Slates and other rocks of a similar nature.
II.—The large block, from near the Hospital, is broken on one
side, and has been sawn across carefully on the other to show its
structure ; and a large portion of the original surface exposed by
weathering is seen on the rest of the specimen. It is evidently
a portion of a sub-lenticular mass, consisting of an inner calcareo-
siliceous material and an outer finer-grained siliceous and limonitic
crust.
The whole block is strongly suggestive of its having been
a lenticular mass, produced by intense folding, which has resulted
in two contiguous, but differently constituted, layers being cut off
in their continuity from the rest of the mass, as may be seen in
certain of the folded Paleozoic rocks of the West of England, where
a series of sigmoidal folds ultimately give rise to a band of separate
lenticles. (See for instance Dr. H. Hicks’ paper on “ Folds and
Faults in the North Devon Rocks,” Grot. Maa., 1893, pp. 3-9,
especially the woodcut at p. 5.)
Fig. 3.—Sigmoidal folding in Devonian Rocks,:east side of Hele Bay, Ilfracombe.
To illustrate the origin of the concentric Olifant Klip blocks.
A. Ordinary sigmoidal fold in limestone.
B. Dumb-bell shaped fold due to pressure and thrust.
C. Isolated fold with crust and core.
D. Crushed and contorted slaty beds.
From a photograph by F. Chapman, 1899.
In explanation of the formation of the travelled and broken
blocks found in the Ecca Shale near Ladysmith, as lenticles, in
contorted Palxozoic strata, which have subsequently been broken out
and then shifted by water or ice-action, the above section is given.
504 FE, Chapman—The Olifant Klip from Natal, ete.
The microscopic structure of the inner portion of this Ladysmith
specimen is seen to be both minutely and coarsely crumpled; whilst
at short intervals the rock is traversed in various directions by
small and interrupted faults. The weathering has brought out
this structure of the internal portion very distinctly ; and therefore
the harder parts, with more silica in their composition, stand in
high relief. ole
The forces which have produced the structures of ‘rippling,’
shearing, thrusting, and faulting in the central part of the mass
have resulted in the formation of coarser vertical faults in the
stronger and more homogeneous siliceous layer which now, probably
through the folding process, forms the outer crust.
III.—A specimen from one of the blocks found in the Ecca Shale
at Bester’s Farm behind Waggon Hill, four miles from Ladysmith.
This is a dark-grey rock, weathering on the dull side to a light-
brown crust, along which harder bands of quartz stand out in
strong relief. These hard bands are thin and almost papery in
structure; and they are not continuous now, but nipped and dis-
connected by the oblique lines of the dynamical compression to
which they have been subjected. The remnants of the siliceous
bands are thus converted into a string of small lenticles.
The microscopic characters are like those of another specimen
(from Ladysmith) above mentioned; that is, a contorted and
mylonized siliceous limestone with much limonite.
IV. Note on a specimen of the Olifant Klip of the Lydenburg
District, from the Collection of Nicol Brown, Esq., F.G.S.— This
specimen shows strong indications of bedding lines, some of which,
in consequence of their being siliceous, stand out in rugged relief.
The rock also shows lines of faulting in a V-shaped manner (trough-
faulis). The surface of the limestone is coarsely hollowed or pitted
(like elephant hide), and is of a dull bluish colour. Cold acid has
no effect on the rock.
in section this rock is seen to be a dolomitic limestone. The
main mass is composed of tesseree of dolomite crystals with a few
idiomorphic ones; that is, with their faces developed, especially
in the clear parts of the section.
Darker patches in the rock, more finely crystalline to granular
in structure, seem to point to former organic inclusions.
V. Note on Olifant Klip from the Sterkfontein Caves near
Johannesburg, in the Transvaal, in Mr. Nicol Brown’s Collection. —
(1) A greenish or slate-coloured argillaceous limestone rock.
Decomposing externally into a brown ochreous crust. Under the
microscope this specimen shows itself to be much crushed, rapidly
on the way to become a micaceous calc-schist. Minute quartz-grains
interspersed through the section. Much limonitic material present.
The apparent lamination seen on the fractured surface is probably
due to cleavage.
(2) A sub-translucent, pale grey rock with oolitic structure.
Composition, a dolomite. Under the microscope the larger pro-
portion of this rock is seen to consist of minute rhombohedra of
Professor E. Hulli—On the Norwegian Fjords. 555
dolomite, whilst some of the oolitic grains have patches of poly-
synthetic quartz, as a mosaic, near their centres. The concentric
layers of the oolite granules seem to be marked out by a thin
coating of graphite.
VI. On the Olifant Klip from Lydenburg and Ladysmith; by
F. Rurtey, F.G.S.—I do not see any ground to doubt that the
rock from the Lydenburg district (see above) is other than what
the label on the section states, namely, a dolomitic limestone. The
prevalent rhombohedral forms, and the absorption of light when the
polarizer alone is turned, suffice, I think, to show that the opinion is
acorrect one. The section of the rock (Olifant Klip) from Ladysmith
is labelled «Crushed calcareous and siliceous rock.” Probably if
you have immersed a chip of the rock in H Cl you found a certain,
but I suppose not very large, residue of insoluble matter. The
section looks like limestone and sandstone crushed together, or very
fine grit. The sand-grains are very small, and cemented by what
I take to be limonite.
The sand-grains do not give satisfactory interference figures, but
in one or two cases they appeared to be positive.
I find that I can make out nothing satisfactory from the small
grains in the darker patches in the Olifant Klip. They do not
give any trustworthy figures in convergent light. I suppose they
are fragments of a fine grit.
VI.—On tue Paystcat Hisrory or tHe NorweGian Fyorps.'
By Prof. Epwarp Hutt, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S.
| Neate the Norwegian fjords were originally river valleys is a
statement which scarcely admits of controversy. In their form,
outline, and topographical position they are simply prolongations of
the valleys which descend into the sea partly submerged ; and if the
land were still further submerged, as it once was to the extent of
200 metres according to Andr. M. Hansen, the fjords would be
prolonged beyond their present inland limits without much variation
of form.
The process of valley erosion by rain and river action is nowhere
in Europe more admirably exemplified than in Western Norway,
and the process may be supposed to have been in operation in the
early formation of the fjord channels themselves before the epoch of
submergence. But when we come to examine the form of the
channels, as shown by the soundings marked on the Admiralty
charts, we find ourselves confronted by the remarkable fact that the
beds of the channels descend to very great depths, far exceeding
those of the outlets where the fjords open out upon the floor of the
North Sea. Now as river valleys must necessarily increase in depth
(in reference to the surface of the sea) from their sources to their
outlets, we are here brought face to face with a physical problem
which apparently is inconsistent with our view of the original
character of these channels as stated above. To the solution of this
problem we must now shortly apply ourselves.
1 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901.
596 Professor E. Hull—On the Norwegian Fjords.
2. General form of the fjord-beds. —The numerous soundings
laid down on the Admiralty charts of 1865 and 1886 enable us to
determine with accuracy the form of the submerged portions of the
fjords. Using these soundings, and by their aid laying down the
isobathic contours, we arrive at results sufficiently remarkable. In
the case of the Hardanger, the Feris, the Sogne, the Nord, the
Vartdals, and the Stor Fjords with their branches, we find that
shortly after passing the entrance from the outer sea, and the chain
of islands which fringes the coast of the mainland, they rapidly
descend to great depths, which are continuous for long distances
inland, and then gradually become shallower toward the upper limits,
where they pass into river valleys characterized by terminal moraines
of ancient glaciers, or old sea terraces. In carrying out the mapping
of the contours the author has adopted the following soundings :—
(1) Those of the 100-fathom contour (600 feet).
(2) Sp 200 ) Me sk ania i ae OOsteae)
(3 29 ” 400 39 ” (2,400 feet).
(An 2; 3 000 bo eer orm. (O;000rteeh) =
The floor of the Sogne Fjord descends to even greater depths than
the last of these, viz. 661 fathoms (3,966 feet), which is reached in
the case of this fjord at a distance of about 25 miles from the entrance.
At the entrance itself the depth seldom exceeds 100 fathoms
(600 feet), and is generally less; but once the deep water is reached
there is little change of level for long distances. As regards the
cross-section of the principal fjords, a glance at the charts shows that
they retain the form of narrow channels with little variation in
breadth, receiving tributaries on either hand and bounded by steep
or precipitous walls of rock ; as in the case of the valleys of which
they are only prolongations under the surface of the sea.
3. When endeavouring to account for the peculiar form of the
fjords and the depth of their floors over the central portions we must
not forget that these old river valleys were the channels of great
glaciers during the post-Pliocene or Glacial period, and that glacial
erosion has contributed to the deepening process. Some Norwegian
geologists, such as Hansen,' attribute the great disparity of the depth
of the fjords at the inner and outer stages of their course to this
deepening of the original channels by glacier erosion on the one
hand, and to the piling up of enormous masses of moraine matter at
the entrance onthe other. To the latter cause the author fully assents ;
but he is doubtful whether glacier erosion has had the effect of adding
many hundreds of feet to the depth of the original floor of the valleys.
But leaving this question, we have to consider a second problem:
namely, by what means did the original rivers empty themselves
into the ocean before the Glacial period, when there was neither
deepening of the floor by glacial erosion nor shallowing by moraine
matter? Previous to the Glacial epoch the rivers must, in the
1 “Norway,”’ edited by Dr. Sten Konow and Karl Fischer, May, 1900. Translated
by J. C. Christie and Miss Muir, and others.
Professor E. Hull—On the Norwegian Fjords. O07
author’s view, have entered the Arctic Ocean through channels which
cannot now be clearly traced by soundings over the shallow floor of
the North Sea. At the same time it is certain that it was by such
channels that they reached their ultimate destination in the Arctic
Ocean, because rivers as they flow seawards must necessarily descend
to lower levels. This being so, it follows that the channels do
actually exist, though they may not be traceable by the soundings
over the flow of the comparatively shallow North Sea; and we have
now to consider why it is that they are untraceable.
The cause appears to be closely connected with the subsequent
submergence in later or post-Glacial times, as indicated by the raised
beaches and terraces." During this epoch the glaciers had only
partially disappeared or receded from the lower valleys. Great
quantities of mud, sand, gravel, and boulders would thus be carried
down by the streams and distributed by floating ice over the sea-bed.
By such material the whole floor of the North Sea has been overspread
to unknown depths, and owing to the agency of tides and currents
may have been swept into the deep channels of the pre-existing
rivers. ‘The author is convinced that, were it possible to strip the
floor of. the North Sea of its sedimentary covering, these channels
would be found traversing the floor of the continental platform, and
ultimately opening out by cajion-like channels on the floor of the
Arctic Ocean.
The phenomena here observed, or inferred, have their representa-
tives along the coasts of the British Isles and Western Europe. In
both cases there is the shallow continental platform, terminating in
a deep and rapid descent to the floor of the abyssal ocean, and
traversed by channels of ancient rivers traceable by the soundings
in the case of Western Hurope, or inferential in the case of Western
Scandinavia. Ina few cases these channels are for short distances
clearly indicated on the charts; as, for example, in the case of the
Bredsund Dybet, which is a prolongation of the Stor Fjord out to
sea, between the islands of Godo and Harejdo in lat. 62° 30’, with
a general depth of 100 fathoms below the adjoining floor of the sea ;
and there are a few other similar cases.
Outline of the physical history of the fjords.—As connected with
the past history of the Norwegian fjords the following appear to be
the most important stages :—
1st (Harliest) Period.—Continental conditions; Archean rocks ;
river erosion begins.
2nd Period.—Partial submergence in early Silurian times.
3rd Period.—Elevation of land during Mesozoic and Tertiary
periods ; further deepening of river channels.
4th Period.— Quaternary. Early Glacial ; great elevation of land
and ultimate extension of snowfields and glaciers. Ice filling the
valleys and moving out to sea.
1 According to Professor Reusch the terraces with marine shells reach an elevation
of about 200 metres (656 feet) in the Trondhjem district; but the author during
a recent visit was unable to observe any higher than 250 feet south of this position.
558 W. Ackroyd—Circulation of Salt.
5th Period.— Quaternary. Post-Glacial; subsidence and partial
submergence of land; retreat of the glaciers. Icebergs and rafts
of ice covering the adjoining sea. Amelioration of climate.
6th Period. — Recent. Re-elevation to approximately present
position with regard to the outer ocean. Formation of raised
beaches (strand linien) during the progress of emergence.
The paper concluded with a comparison between the above
physical features as they occur in Norway with those of Scotland.
VII.—On tre Circunation or Sart 1n 17s RELations To GEOLOGY.
By Witu1am Ackroyp, F.J.C., F.C.S., Public Analyst for Halifax.
wrong impression is given by the question: ‘“ Why will
Mr. Ackroyd not have the 19 rivers?” (Grou. Mae.,
November, 1901, p. 505). The data collected by Sir John Murray
are admirable additions to our natural knowledge, and they are used
in my last article (Guox. Mac., October, 1901, p. 448), but I contend
that they are not available for use in the expression—
Sodium in the sea.
= the age of the Earth ;
Sodium annually delivered into
the sea by rivers.
and I cannot accept either the minor or major limits of time arrived
at in this way. Perhaps a few more lines are necessary to further
amplify my reasons.
The 19 rivers contain the following compounds, among others, in
tons per cubic mile of water: calcium and magnesium carbonates,
439,580; sodium sulphate, 31,805; sodium nitrate, 26,800; and
common salt, 16,657. One may take the following views of these
data and of river water generally in so far as they affect the
denominator of the fraction :—
The Nitrate.—The succession of events in the process of nitri-
fication is well known to chemists from the genesis of ammonia
and carbonic acid to the final production of ammonium nitrate.
The theory is further held that when the ammonium nitrate is
changed to sodium nitrate it is by interaction with sodium chloride,
and that the latter is of marine origin. This last idea is strongly
supported by the composition of the caliche of the South American
nitrate industry. The inference is plainly that the sodium in
sodium nitrate is cyclic, and no more available in this calculation
of the age of the Earth than Triassic salt. Professor Joly makes no
allowance for it, nor indeed any mention of it.
The Common Salt.—I will not reiterate my arguments concerning
the part of this compound which is cyclic of short period, as
I have sufficiently indicated their nature in my last article. But
under this heading the calcium and magnesium carbonates certainly
demand attention. These carbonates carry with them on the
average probably not less than -01 per cent. of combined chlorine
(p. 447), which, as anyone who knows anything of analysis will
Notices of Memoirs—Prof. Beecher—Cambrian Fossils. 559
understand, is included under the head of chlorides, and calculated
into common salt would furnish 43 per cent. of the 16,657 tons.
It is cyclic of long period, and not available for Professor Joly’s
calculation.
Fluctuations.— An inverse relation undoubtedly exists between
the soluble contents of a river (including, of course, sodium
compounds) and the amount of water in it in Summer and Winter.
In all the great rivers subject to flood the variation must be
enormous; in the case of the Nile it amounts to 400 per cent.
As far as I can learn, these fluctuations have not been taken into
account.
Coming once more to the numerator: Mysteries hang over it.
The composition of the sea is not what one would expect with the
precise conditions of solvent denudation required by Professor Joly’s
speculations. For instance, one looks for huge proportions of nitrate
in it ; sea analyses show practically none. Again, the chlorine in it
multiplied by a known factor is a measure of its sodium contents,
but the same factor does not apply to average river water. These
are not matters of opinion but of fact. What becomes, then, of
Dr. Joly’s ‘constancy in the nature and rate of solvent actions
going on over the land surfaces” (Trans. Roy. Soc. Dublin, ser. 11,
vol. vii, p. 24) ?
Too much space and time would be required for me to deal with
the second half of Professor Joly’s November article. I may,
however, be permitted to observe that he appears to me to tilt at
an irrefragable law of solution, and then only saves his lance from
being utterly shattered by an adroit swerve.
NOt? ken SS) Oe VEaVE@ ar Se
—— ——~<>—__-
I.—Nore on THE CamBRIAN Fossiius oF St. Francois County,
Missouri. By Professor C. HK. Brxcuer.'
TQ\HE small collection of fossils submitted to the writer by F. L.
Nason, for identification, is interesting, especially as it determines
the geological horizon of an extensive series of limestones, sandstones,
conglomerates, etc., in south-eastern Missouri, the age of which has
hitherto been somewhat in doubt. Also, since these strata are
intimately associated with the lead-bearing rocks of this region, the
identification has considerable economic value.
It is stated by Arthur Winslow, in a paper on “ The Disseminated
Lead Ores of South-Eastern Missouri” * (p. 11), that although these
rocks are placed in the Lower Silurian ‘‘ The possibility still remains
that there may be a faunal break which will admit of some of the
lower strata being classed as Cambrian, though there is nothing in
1 Reprinted from Silliman’s American Journal of Science for November, 1901,
pp. 362-366.
2 Bulletin No. 132 of the United States Geological Survey, 1896.
560 Notices of Memoirs—Prof. Beecher —Cambrian Fossils.
the stratigraphy to suggest it. This must, therefore, be left to the
paleontologists, and owing to the dearth of fossils the problem is
not an easy one for them to solve.” In volume ix of the Missouri
Geological Survey (pt. iv, p. 52, Keyes, 1895) the Fredericktown
dolomite (=St. Joseph limestone) is referred to the Upper Cambrian
on account of the presence of Lingulella Lamborni (Meek), but since
this species is peculiar to the horizon, and the genus has a much
wider range, this correlation is not established. A general statement
is made by Keyes regarding this region (lc., p. 44) that “No strata
younger than the Cambrian are believed to be represented. But
few fossils have been found in the rocks of the area, so that the
faunal evidence as to geological age is somewhat meagre.” The
present collection of fossils, made by Mr. Nason, indicates that the
entire series is older than the Lower Silurian (Ordovician), and that
at least the upper portion probably belongs to the Upper Cambrian.
All but one species of the fossils were obtained from the lower
members of the Potosi limestones, and since this is the topmost
formation of this region its correlation is of the first importance.
The fossils occur abundantly in the limestone and conglomerate
beds, and more sparsely in the sandstones. They consist chiefly
of fragments of trilobites, with a few brachiopods and other forms.
Lithologically, there is a very close resemblance between these
fossil-bearing beds and those of a similar horizon in the Black Hills
of South Dakota. Limestones, limestone conglomerates, and sand-
stones of the same appearance are found in both sections. Faunally,
there is a suggestion of affinity with the Potsdam fauna of Wisconsin
and Texas. A careful comparison, however, reveals that these
resemblances are more general than specific, and that the species
seem to be distinct. Nevertheless, the facies of this fauna seems
to indicate Upper Cambrian, though further studies with additional
material may show it to belong to the middle member.
Owing tothe small number of specimens in the present collection,
the number of species is necessarily limited. It will doubtless be
considerably increased by future collections. Among the trilobites
the genera Ptychoparia, Ptychaspis, Chariocephalus, and Crepicephalus
are more or less clearly identifiable. A species of Chariocephalus
closely agrees with the C. onustus of Whitfield.
The species of brachiopods seem to be fairly abundant, especially
an orthoid shell resembling in some respects Billingsella. It occurs
in the shaly partings between the layers of limestone. A species
of Acrotreta and Lingulella are common both in the limestones and
arenaceous beds.
Hypolithes primordialis, Hall, and a small species of Platyceras also
occur in the limestones, together with segments of cystidean or
crinoidal columns.
Abundant remains of a linguloid shell are found on the lower,
or La Motte, sandstones constituting the basal member of the clastic
rocks of the section. Making allowances for different conditions
of preservation, this species may be identified with the Zingulella
Lamborni of Meek, which occurs in some green shales of the same
Notices of Memoirs—Prof. Beecher—Eurypterus in Cambrian. 561
age in Madison County, a little further south. In the absence of
other evidence the diagnostic value of this brachiopod is very slight,
and it is impossible to say whether the Bonne Terre, or St. Joseph,
limestones and the La Motte sandstones represent Lower Cambrian
terranes or whether they with the Potosi all belong to the Middle
or Upper Cambrian.
The important point of this correlation is that, upon paleontological
evidence which has hitherto been largely wanting, an extensive area
and thickness of sedimentary rocks ate definitely placed in the
Cambrian.
IJ.—Discovery or Evuryprertp REMAINS IN THE CAMBRIAN OF
Missouri. With an Illustration. By Prof. C. E. Brxcurr.
HE wonderful development of Merostomes in various parts of
the world at about the close of the Silurian has long been
recognized, and the suddenness of their appearance out of an
apparently clear Paleozoic sky has been a matter of considerable
speculation. Almost at the same instant of time there appeared on
the geologic horizon a marvellous assemblage of these ancient
arthropods. A very few scattering forerunners are known from
older rocks, but most of them are small and strange creatures, little
resembling the characteristic Hurypterus and Pterygotus of the Upper
Silurian, and in fact belonging to other orders than the Merostomata.
In North America the known genera and species of the order
Kurypterida belong almost exclusively to the Waterlime group
(Rondout) above the Salina beds. Dr. John M. Clarke’ has
recently announced the discovery, by Mr. C. J. Sarle, of a new
Kurypterid fauna at the base of the Salina, which carries this peculiar
biologic facies one comparatively brief stage further back. Evidences
of still older forms are very meagre. A single species of Eurypterus
(Z. prominens, Hall) is referred to the Clinton beds of the Silurian
with considerable doubt. The next indication of a greater antiquity
of this order consists of a fragment of an abdominal segment and
a single jointed limb, from the Utica slate of New York, described
by C. D. Walcott * as Echinognathus Clevelandi.
It is therefore of considerable interest and importance that a new
and much older horizon for the Kurypterida can now be chronicled.
Mr. Arthur Thacher, President of the Central Lead Company
of Missouri, formerly a professor in Washington University, found
a nearly entire specimen of a new Eurypterid in the Potosi limestone
of St. Francois County, and through his generosity and the kindly
interest of Mr. Frank L. Nason the specimen was transmitted to
the Yale University Museum. Owing to the supposed scarcity of
fossils in the Potosi and St. Joseph terranes of Missouri, their
1 Notes on Paleozoic Crustaceans. N.Y. State Museum, Report of the State
Paleontologist for 1900. 1901.
2 Description of a new genus of the Order Eurypterida from the Utica Slate.
Silliman’s Journal (8), vol. xxiii, 1882.
DECADE IV.—VOL. VIII.—NO. XII. 36
562 Notices of Memoirs—
correlation was long a matter of uncertainty, until Mr. Nason
described certain horizons bearing an abundant and characteristic
Cambrian fauna.
The specimen here described at once suggests the familiar and
well-known genus Eurypterus, and only when its characters are
studied in connection with its geological occurrence is it apparent
that its differences are of sufficient importance to warrant its generic
separation. The specimen represents nearly the entire dorsal test
of the animal, and consists of the cephalothorax with the abdominal
segments, including the telson or tail-spine.
= tii Ly) ~ SN
EEE
HENNE) Oi
Sa
N
Strabops Thacheri, Beecher.—Dorsal aspect of type-specimen, +. Potosi Limestone
(Cambrian): St. Francois County, Missouri. Original in Yale University
useum.
The cephalothorax is comparatively shorter and wider than in
Eurypterus, the eyes are further forward, nearer together, and more
oblique, and besides the telson but eleven abdominal somites can
be determined on the dorsal side, instead of twelve as in Hurypterus.
Professor C. E. Beecher—Eurypterus in the Cambrian. 563
These differences are considered as indicative of a new genus, and
it is proposed to recognize this type under the name Strabops, nov.
gen., with Strabops Thacheri, n.sp., as the type species. The generic
name is in allusion to the inward turning or squinting of the eyes
(ozpaBos ‘squinting ’ and dys ‘ face’).
Doubtless many generic differences will appear when the
appendages of this type are obtained. The differences in the
characters available for ‘comparison are quite as great as between
Eurypterus and Dolichopterus, Stylonurus, Anthraconectes, or
Husarcus. This, taken with the fact that practically all the
Cambrian genera, especially the more highly organized types,
became extinct long before the Upper Silurian, lend support to
the conclusion that Strabops is generically distinct from any hitherto
known form.
Srrapors THACHER, gen. et sp. nov.
Body broadly ovate in general outline exclusive of the telson,
slightly convex in the specimen, though probably quite arched both
transversely and longitudinally in life, as indicated by the outline
of the separate segments.
Cephalothoraxy short and broad, length less than one-half the
width, anterior and lateral margins regularly rounded, posterior
margin gently curved in the middle and turning obliquely forward
toward the genal extremities, which are obtusely angular.
Eyes medium-sized, ovate, narrow ends pointing obliquely inward,
situated in the middle of the anterior half of the cephalothorax,
distant about the length of one eye, connected anteriorly by a distinct
arched line or fold. The eye tubercles are mostly exfoliated, and
their convexity and surface cannot be determined. Ocelli indicated
by two spots midway between the eyes.
Abdomen. The dorsal side shows eleven segments exclusive
of the telson. The axis in the specimen is slightly convex, and
slopes off into the nearly flat pleural region without any line of
demarkation. The greatest width is across the third segment. The
extremities of the segments are rounded anteriorly and on the sides,
and terminate behind as a simple angulation. The first six segments
are quite uniform in length, while the three following are somewhat
shorter, and the last two are a little longer.
Telson a broad flat spine, obtusely elevated along the middle.
Surface smooth, with an indication of a row of minute crenulations
or scale-like markings near the posterior edge of each segment.
Dimensions.—Greatest length of specimen 110mm., length ex-
clusive of telson 82 mm.; greatest width, allowing for compression
on left side, 60mm.; length of cephalothorax 20mm., width
49 mm.; greatest width of telson 17 mm.
Formation and locality.—From the lower members of the Potosi
limestone, Flat River, St. Francois County, Missouri.
The only known genus of merostomes besides Sérabops occurring
in the Cambrian is Aglaspis, Hall, represented by two species
(A. Barrandi and £. Eatoni, Whitf.). But since Aglaspis belongs
564 Notices of Memoirs—Seward & Ford—Anatomy of Todea.
to the order Synxiphosura, it leaves Strabops as the present sole
representative of the Hurypterida.'
IlI.—On tHe Anatomy or YJopr4a, with an ACCOUNT OF THE
GeronocicaL History or Osmunpacem. By A. C. Sewarp,
F.R.S., and Miss Sypittz O. Forp.?
HE anatomical structure of the genus Osmunda has been dealt
with by several writers, and more particularly by Zanetti in
an able paper published in the Botanische Zeitung for 1895, but
the other genus of the Osmundacez has not received equal attention
at the hands of anatomists. Our work, which was undertaken with
a view to discover in what respects Todea differs from Osmunda,
includes the examination of Todea barbara and T. superba, as well as
the investigation of series of microtome sections of young plants.
The family Osmundacez is usually regarded as to some extent
intermediate between the Husporangiate and Leptosporangiate ferns,
and in many respects the two genera Osmunda and Todea are of
interest in regard to the phylogeny of the various divisions of the
Filicine.
The stem of Todea barbara is traversed by a single stele composed
of xylem groups surrounding a central pith and separated from one
another by medullary rays: these groups vary considerably in shape
and number at different levels. There may be as few as two or as
many as eight xylem strands in one transverse section of the stem,
while in Osmunda regalis the number is considerably greater. The
xylem strands are surrounded by parenchyma, and the sieve-tube
zone occupies the same position as in Osmunda. This zone, which
is continuous in O. regalis, is occasionally discontinuous in Todea
opposite some of the xylem strands. The comparatively large
sieve-tubes occur in triangular patches at the outer end of each
medullary ray. A characteristic band of tangentially elongated
elements succeeds the sieve-tube zone, and this is followed externally
by a parenchymatous band, the outermost layer of which constitutes
the endodermis. The paper deals with the phyllotaxis of Todea
barbara, the origin of the leaf-traces, and the gradual alteration in
structure which the collateral leaf-trace undergoes as it passes out
from the stele of the stem as a horseshoe-shaped strand with one
protoxylem group, and gradually assumes the form of the broadly
U-shaped concentric stele of the petiole with its numerous proto-
xylem groups. The anatomy of ‘seedling’ plants of Todea is
found to agree with that of Osmunda regalis plantlets as described
by Leclerc du Sablon. As bearing on the questions of relative
1 Although Aglaspis was compared with Limulus by Professor Hall, and its
affinities were distinctly stated as with the Merostomata, yet most subsequent
writers have overlooked its true relationships and have included it in their lists
of trilobite genera. The family named Aglaspidie was first employed in 1877 by
S. A. Miller in ‘‘The American Paleozoic Fossils,’’ p. 208, and the restoration
of the family to the Merostomata was first made by the writer in a paper entitled
‘‘Outline of a Natural Classification of the Trilobites’’ (Silliman’s Journal (4),
vol. iii, p. 182, 1897).
2 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901.
Notices of Memoirs—A. M. Bell—Plants and Insects, Oxon. 5665
antiquity and phylogeny of the members of the Filices, we have
endeavoured to give an account of the geological history of the
Osmundacez.
ITV.—Purants anpD CoLEOPTERA FROM A Deposit or PLEISTOCENE AGE
AT Wotvercote, OxrorDsHIRE. By A. M. Bett, M.A., F.G.S.)
LANT remains of Pleistocene time are of great rarity in England.
The two most important series which have been described are
from Hoxne, in Suffolk, obtained by Mr. Clement Reid, F.R.S., and
Mr. H. N. Ridley (Guoz. Mac., 1888, p. 441), and from North
London by Mr. Worthington G. Smith.
There is in these remains a singular difference. Of twenty-eight
plants obtained at Hoxne three are Arctic (Salix polaris and myrsi-
nites, Betula nana) ; seventeen range to the Arctic Circle. At Stoke
Newington, on the contrary, Mr. W. J. Smith obtained the elm, the
chestnut, clematis, and perhaps the vine. Only three out of eleven
plants reach the Arctic Circle. The pine, the alder, birch, and yew,
with the royal fern, were more in harmony with the present and the
past floras. In the author’s opinion the Stoke Newington flora
represents a much later age of Pleistocene time than the Hoxne
flora. The conditions were continental, and the flora of the south
was gaining, while the Arctic flora was disappearing.
The plants as yet identified, by the kindness of Mr. Clement Reid,
from Wolvercote resemble those found at Stoke Newington more
than those at Hoxne. This is in harmony with the writer’s view
that the Wolvercote deposit is of late Pleistocene age, nearer to the
Stoke Newington than to the Hoxne deposit.
Highteen plants obtained by the author are given. All of them
are found in Oxfordshire to-day. Hight only have an extension to
the Arctic Circle. Four mosses have been obtained, one of which
is certainly recent. A considerable number of the wing-cases of
beetles have also been found. These are difficult to identify, but
the genus of one, remarkable by its rows of hairs, has been named
by Mr. Waterhouse, of the Natural History Department of the
British Museum. Only one of the genus is now found in England,
and that is different from the Wolvercote species. On the other
hand the genus is common on the Continent.
These facts, coupled with those from Stoke Newington, tend to
the conclusion that in late Pleistocene time the climate of the
Thames Valley was more continental than it is at present.
Y.— Recent Discovertrers in Arran Geronocy. By WIiLLiaAm
Gunn, of H.M. Geological Survey of Scotland.’
(Communicated with the permission of the Director of the Geological Survey.)
N the last ten years very important additions have been made to
our knowledge of the geology of Arran both in the aqueous and
in the igneous rocks of the island.
Among the older rocks a series of dark schists and cherts has been
discovered in North Glen Sannox. They are probably of Arenig
1 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901.
566 Notices of Memoirs—Wm. Gunn—Geology of Arran.
age, though no organic remains have been found in them, are closely
related to the rocks of Ballantrae in Ayrshire, and similar beds
occur in various places along the Highland border, where they have
been described by Messrs. Barrow and Clough. In the Isle of Arran
these rocks are intimately connected with the Highland schists.
The Old Red Sandstone of Arran has been found to comprise two
subdivisions, and in North Glen Sannox the upper division lies
unconformably on the lower. This formation is not confined to the
ground north of the String road, as generally supposed, but extends
in places three miles to the south of that road, being well developed
in the Clachan Glen, where it is much metamorphosed by intrusive
igneous rocks. No fossils have been found in the Old Red Sandstone
of Arran except Psilophyton princeps, specimens of which have been
obtained from the lower division in Glen Shurig.
The Carboniferous formation, fine sections of which occur on the
shore at Corrie and at Laggan, is now known to occupy but a small
portion of the area of the island. Near Brodick Castle and in Glen
Shurig its width of outcrop is not much more than 200 yards, and it
does not reach the western shore, being overlapped in the interior
by unconformable beds of New Red Sandstone. Beds probably of
Coal-measure age with characteristic Upper Carboniferous fossils
have been recognized at Sliddery Water Head, Corrie, The Cock,
and in various other places, but these have no great thickness and
contain no seams of coal. They represent apparently the basement
beds of the Coal-measures.
The stratified rocks of the southern part of the island, consisting
of red sandstones, conglomerates, and marls, have been proved to
repose unconformably on the Carboniferous formation, and in places
they contain derived pebbles with Carboniferous fossils. All the
evidence points to their being of Triassic age, and they may easily
be divided into two series, the lower of which probably represents
the Bunter Sandstone and the upper the Keuper marls. These
Triassic rocks occupy the whole of the coast from Corrie southwards,
around the south end of the island, and the west coast up to Machrie
Bay, where they appear to lie conformably on the Old Red Sandstone.
They also form a small area in the north-eastern part of the island
near The Cock.
That still more recent formations once existed in the island,
whence they have been removed by denudation, is proved by the
presence of fragments of Rhetic, Liassic, and Cretaceous rocks in
a large volcanic vent which is probably of Tertiary age. These
fragments occur on the western side of the island in the district of
Shisken, on the slopes of Ard Bheinn, and they have yielded a con-
siderable number of characteristic fossils which have been examined
and determined by Mr. E. T. Newton.
Some of the most important of the discoveries are those connected
with the old volcanic rocks of the island. A series of interbedded
lavas and tuffs is found in North Glen Sannox associated with
the schists and cherts previously mentioned. Like them they are
probably of Arenig age, and closely related to similar rocks at
Notices of Memoirs—P. Macnair—Schists of S. Highlands. 567
Ballantrae in Ayrshire. Two distinct volcanic platforms have been
found in the Old Red Sandstone of the island. One set of basic
lavas is intercalated in the lower division on the west side of the
island, and another occurs in the upper division of the North Glen
Sannox. In addition to the volcanic series previously known in the
Lower Carboniferous rocks two others have been discovered in the
upper part of the formation. That the island was the seat of volcanic
activity in times still more recent is proved by the recognition of
a large volcanic vent in the Shiskin district, which must be of
post-Cretaceous age, as shown by some of the fragments it includes.
From these facts we conclude that the island has been the scene of
volcanic action at no less than seven different periods.
Much has also been learned with regard to the distribution and
age of the various intrusive igneous rocks. 'T'wo masses of a some-
what intermediate character found in Glen Rosie and in Glen Sannox
are probably of Old Red Sandstone age, but nearly the whole of the
varied igneous rocks of the island must now be assigned to the
Tertiary period, not excepting the well-known granite mass of
the northern part of the island. The finer granite which occupies
the interior of the nucleus has a tortuous boundary. It is clearly
intrusive in the coarse granite which surrounds it, but both belong
practically to the same period, as they have one and the same system
of jointing.
The ring of granite, granophyre, and quartz diorite which sur-
rounds the large volcanic vent was previously little known, and
the other numerous and varied intrusive masses, both acid and
basic, which occur in the island were but poorly represented on
existing maps.
VI.—On tHe CrystTALLiIne Scuists oF THE SouTHERN HIGHLANDS;
THEIR PHysicAL STRUCTURE AND PROBABLE MANNER OF
Devetopment. By Prerer Maonair.'
'T\HE area under notice is defined as that lying immediately to the
north-west of the great boundary fault which crosses Scotland
from the Firth of Clyde to Stonehaven. An account is then given
of the various opinions that have been held concerning the structure
of this region since the time of Macculloch up to the present day.
The author then proceeds to show that the schist zones traverse this
region in roughly parallel bands, and described a series of sections
at right angles to the strike of the principal foliation of the area.
The following is a summary of the author’s conclusions regarding
the stratigraphy, physical structure, and the manner of development
in this part of the Scottish Highlands :—
1. The sedimentary schists of the Highlands proceeding from the
margin inwards may be divided into the following zones :—Lower
Argillaceous zone, Lower Arenaceous zone, Loch Tay Limestone
zone, Garnetiferous Schist zone, Upper Argillaceous zone, Upper
Arenaceous zone. Associated with these are schists of igneous
1 Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901.
568 Notices of Memoirs—
origin. It is probable that these zones are capable of still further
subdivision, but this is not attempted as yet.
2. From an examination of the relationships of these different
zones, the order as given above appears to be an ascending one,
proceeding from the margin inwards, the well-marked zone known
as the Loch Tay Limestone forming a sort of datum-line, from which
one can recognize the positions of the lower and upper schists.
3. It is supposed that the movements which plicated the rocks of
the Highlands were directed from the centre outwards, or from the
north-west towards the south-east. This is shown by the fact that
where the bedding can be traced the overfolding is generally
towards the south-east. Also the foliation, where it has been
observed, faces in the same direction.
4. In the eastern part of the region we suppose that the beds
have been folded into a series of isoclines facing the south-east, and
that foliation has been developed roughly parallel to the axes of
the folds in the bedding, thus making the foliation appear to be
roughly coincident with the original planes of stratification. At
Comrie, in Perthshire, the axes of the isoclines in the bedding are
nearly vertical, but with a slight hade towards the north-west. The
axes of the isoclines get gradually lower and lower as we proceed
towards Loch Tay. In the same way the foliation planes are nearly
vertical along the frontier, but get flatter and flatter as we proceed
northwards.
d. In tracing these rocks towards the south-west an increasing
crumpling and folding of the foliation planes, accompanied by more
intense metamorphism, is seen to take place: this is made evident
in approaching the shores of Loch Katrine and Loch Lomond, but it
seems to have reached its maximum in Cowal.
6. In Cowal, along the Firth of Clyde, the position of the foliation
planes has been reversed, now dipping towards the south-east.
Between the Firth of Clyde and Loch Fyne the foliation planes
have been much crumpled, and still later divisional planes have
been developed in them, this being a region of the most intense
metamorphism.
VII.—Tuz Source or Warr in tHe Humser. By W. H.
Wueeter, M.Inst. C.H.!
[° has frequently been stated that the mud or warp in suspension
in the Humber is derived from the erosion of the cliffs on the
Yorkshire coast, and the object of the paper is to show that it is
physically impossible for the detritus eroded from those cliffs to be
carried into the Humber, and that the material in suspension in the
water is derived from detritus washed off the land drained by
the Humber and its tributaries or eroded from their banks. The
drainage basin of the Humber covers 10,500 square miles, and
embraces strata of various kinds of rocks, including estuarine
deposits, glacial drifts, chalk, sandstone, and oolites.
The water in the zone extending around the junction of the Trent
* Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901.
W. H. Wheeler—The Warp of the Humber. 569
and the Ouse with the Humber, extending over a length of thirty-
five miles, is very highly charged with solid matter in suspension,
the maximum quantity being attained in the Summer, when the
downward flow of the fresh water is at a minimum, the quantity
then in suspension amounting to as much as 2,240 grains, or nearly
the third in a cubic foot of water. Above and below this zone the
quantity diminishes to 262 grains up the river Trent and 202 grains
near the Albert Dock at Hull, while off Spurn, at the entrance to
the river, there is no mud in suspension, but only a few grains
of clean sand. The floor of the North Sea at the entrance is covered
with clean sand and shells, the beach up to Grimsby also being
covered with sand.
The solid matter in suspension is derived from the detritus washed
off the land and poured into the river when freshets occur, or from
the erosion of the banks of the river and its tributaries. The greater
quantity that prevails in the more turbid zone is due to the material
being kept in a state of oscillation by the ebb and flow of the tides
when the quantity of fresh water flowing down is not sufficient to
carry it out to sea.
The average quantity of solid matter contained in thirteen other
English rivers when in flood is 200 grains in a cubic foot. The
average rainfall within the watershed of the Humber is 29-60 inches,
of which 10 inches may be taken as the quantity due to such rains
as produce freshets. With these figures the normal total quantity
of solid matter placed in suspension in floods may be put at three
million tons in a year. A portion of this is carried out to sea
in heavy freshets, and the rest remains in the river in a state of
oscillation.
The tendency in all rivers, whether fresh or tidal, is for material
to work downward under the laws of gravity. The same quantity
of tidal water that flows into the river has to flow out again, but
its capacity for transporting material downwards is reinforced by
the discharge of the fresh water.
The flood current in the Humber runs at the rate of four miles
an hour, and its duration varies from six hours at Spurn to two and
a half at Goole. It may be taken, therefore, that a particle of
solid matter entering the Humber at Spurn Point wouid not be
carried by the flood tide more than 20 miles up the river, or 25 miles
below the point where the greatest amount of solid matter is held
in suspension. On the turn of the tide it would be carried back
again. Allowing for the greater time the ebb current is running
above the junction of the rivers as compared with the flood, the
material carried down on the ebb is 73 per cent. greater than that
carried up on the flood.
Taking the length of the Holderness Cliffs as 34 miles, the
average height at 12 yards, and the mean annual loss at 24 yards,
the mean quantity falling on the beach is about 1} million cubic
yards a year, of which about 40 per cent. consists of stones, gravel,
and coarse sand, leaving less than a million cubic yards to be
washed away. ‘The foot of the cliffs is only reached for about four
570 ~=©Notices of Memoirs—R. L. Jack—Artesian Water.
hours at high-water of springs, that is, by 260 tides in a year,
the average quantity of alluvial matter for each tide being 3,728
cubic yards.
The drift of the tidal current towards the Humber lasts 34 hours,
and runs at a velocity of 24 miles an hour; the greatest distance
a particle of solid matter put in suspension at the point of mean
distance, 20 miles from the Humber, could be carried southward
is 83 miles; when this distance is reached the tide would turn and
the particle would be carried northward for 16 miles, or 28 miles.
away from the Humber.
It is, however, quite improbable that a particle of matter placed
in suspension at the foot of the cliffs could ever reach the main
current going to the Humber. Owing to the Yorkshire coast being
in an embayment the main tidal current does not approach nearer
the coast than the 6-fathom line, or a mile away from the coast.
The current of the flowing tide sets into the embayment towards
the coast. Even if a particle from the cliffs could overcome this
shoreward set and traverse the water contained in this mile of water
in an opposite direction, so as to be brought into the main southerly-
going current, the quantity of solid matter brought into suspension
would only be sufficient to supply one grain to 14,000 cubic feet
of water.
It is evident from the above facts that it is not possible for the
detritus from the Yorkshire coast to reach, much more to be carried
_ up, the Humber.
VIII.— Tue Arrestan WATER IN THE STATE OF QUEENSLAND,
Ausrratia. By R. Logan Jaox, LL.D., F.G.S."
HE western interior of Queensland is a vast area of magnificent
pastoral country, but is not endowed with a sufficient rainfall.
In 1881 the author had reason to suspect that the Cretaceous rocks of
the Western Downs afforded conditions favourable for the discovery
of artesian water. Subsequently, in 1885, the author (then Govern-
ment Geologist) and Mr. J. B. Henderson, hydraulic engineer, made
a study of the area, and an experimental bore was put down which
proved a success.
From Mr. Henderson’s annual report for 1899-1900 it appears
that up to June, 1900, 185 miles of boring had been made in search
of artesian water in the district, and a large proportion of the bores
have been successful; and though the artesian water does not fully
compensate for the lack of rain, still the bores have already produced
an important change in the conditions of life in the interior.
The greater part of the western interior of Queensland is composed
of soft strata of Lower Cretaceous age, consisting of clay-shales,
limestones, and sandstones. These strata are so disposed that the
lower members of the series crop out on the western flanks of the
coast range, where not only is the elevation of the surface greater
than in the downs to the west, but the rainfall is also comparatively
abundant.
' Read before the British Association, Section C (Geology), Glasgow, Sept., 1901.
Reviews—Charles Rabot—Length of Arctic Glaciers. 571
Along the eastern margin of the Cretaceous area there is a porous
sandstone of great thickness, the ‘Blythesdale Braystone,’ and owing
to low dip the outcrop of this permeable stratum occupies a belt
from five to twenty-five miles wide; but the Braystone finally
disappears beneath the argillaceous and calcareous upper members
of the series which forms the surface of the downs to the west.
Several rivers disappear while crossing the outcrop of the Braystone,
and the water must be carried in it beneath the clay-shales of
the downs.
The outcrop of the Braystone is concealed over part of the area
by nearly horizontal tablelands of the ‘Desert Sandstone,’ an upper
member of the Cretaceous formation lying unconformably on the
lower divisions. It is, however, also of a permeable nature. The
author gives an estimate of the water which should penetrate the
Braystone, and suggests the probability that much of it finds an
outlet under the sea in the Great Australian Bight and the Gulf of
Carpentaria.
The artesian water basins are, in fact, broken basins, and the
break gives rise to leakage either on land or beneath the sea. In
places, therefore, the water rises in a bore, but does not reach the
surface owing to the site of the bore being higher than the head of
pressure. This is termed ‘sub-artesian water,’ and the author gives
illustrations of both artesian and sub-artesian water in the district
in question.
ee) ce WV EVV Se
Bee
LES VARIATIONS DE LONGUEUR DES GLACIERS DANS LES REGIONS
ARCTIQUES ET BOREALES. Par Cuartes Rasor. (Extrait des
Archives des sciences physiques et naturelles, 1899-1900.)
pp. 230. (Geneva and Bale: Georg & Co.)
(J\HIS is the latter part of a treatise of which the former was
published in 1897. Since that date much additional informa-
tion has appeared, of which a summary is given, together with the
conclusions to which the author has been led. These are :—(1) Prior
to the eighteenth century the glaciers, as proved by documentary
evidence in Norway and Iceland, and made highly probable also
in Jan Mayen and Spitzbergen, were much less extensive than they
are at the present day, and this minimum condition had lasted for
centuries. (2) During the eighteenth century, as well as in the
earlier years of the nineteenth, a very great extension (une crue
enorme) occurred, which was general throughout the Northern
Hemisphere. In the course of this the glaciers invaded regions
which had been free from ice during historic times. Of this, in
Greenland, Jan Mayen, Iceland, Norway, and Alaska, in some cases
there is documentary proof; in others it is made highly probable
by less direct evidence. (8) The remainder of the nineteenth
century has been a period of uncertain movements. In some places
a considerable advance has been followed by a slight retreat ; in
others the latter set in after a pause at the maximum which had
been reached in the earlier years. At the present day the Greenland
572 Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London.
glaciers appear to be stationary at a maximum. In Iceland almost
all the glaciers are now retreating, though not to any great extent,
and in some of them the previous advance continued till about the
year 1880. From Spitzbergen the evidence is defective; so far
as it goes some glaciers appear to be advancing, others retreating.
In Norway the ice reached a maximum at the beginning of the
century, and since then there has been a slow retreat, interrupted by
slight advances. In none of these regions has there been a diminution
comparable with that which has been observed in the Alps during
the last half-century. M. Rabot has drawn up a table to show the
advances of the glaciers for Greenland, Iceland, Jan Mayen, Spitz-
bergen, Scandinavia (north and south), and the Alps. Though
the information is not equally full and precise in all cases, it
suffices to show that while the movements of the glaciers in the
northern region exhibit a general correspondence, they afford signs
of a local individuality, and those of the Alpine glaciers appear
to be in most cases independent. The results from the northern ©
region are then used by M. Rabot to test the three laws of the
variation of glaciers which were tentatively advanced by Professor
Forel. (a) The law of periodicity. In the north this apparently
does not hold good, the duration of the advances and retreats
being irregular. (6) Law of simultaneousness. This holds good.
(c) Law of variation of volume; namely, that any change affects
the length, breadth, and thickness of the glacier. This apparently
is not valid in the north, for there the end of a glacier may be
stationary or even advancing, while its thickness higher up is
diminishing. For this apparent anomaly the author offers an
explanation. Lastly, he discusses the question whether the results
of the more minute observations which have been carried on in the
Alps during the last twenty years establish a relation between
the variations of the climate and the length of the glacier; such
a relation appears to be suggested, but more evidence is needed
before it can be regarded as established.
The rule “ Always verify your references” holds good, as
commonly, in M. Rabot’s book, for names are often misspelt.
We leave Germans to deal with Pettermanus, but object to Professor
Garwood being persistently transformed into Garnwood. This,
however, is a superficial blemish. The memoir itself embodies
a mass of information, accumulated by patient and laborious study,
and cannot fail to be very valuable for purposes of reference to
all who take an interest in glacial questions. T. G. Bonney.
ee Ome S AN» 92> 22@ CD NieaS-
I.—Geonoercat Socrery oF Lonpon.
November 6th, 1901.—J. J. H. Teall, Hsq., M.A., V.P.R.S., President,
in the Chair. The following communications were read :—
1. “Note on a Submerged and Glaciated Rock-Valley recently
exposed to view in Caermarthenshire.” By Thomas Codrington, Esq.,
M. Inst. C.E., F.G.S.
Reports and Proceedings—Geological Society of London. 573
This valley was brought to light in building a bridge across the
River Towy at Drysllwyn, 9 miles from Caermarthen, to which
the tide now flows. At the bridge the valley is narrowed to about
half a mile. Near the water-edge the rock sloped down gradually
to 23 feet below summer water-level, and was glaciated in large
furrows a foot or more across, and striated blocks of grit rested
upon it. About 60 feet farther out into the river, rock was not
met with till depths of from 84 to 42 feet below summer level were
reached, and the rock-surface was found to be sloping towards the
south at an angle of from 28° to 18° with a vertical line; it was
followed down to between 45 and 56 feet below summer water-level.
Scratched stones were again met with in the clay near the rock.
The glaciated surface on the northern bank is only 25 feet above
sea-level; and the rock-surface is sloping down at a precipitous
angle at 8 feet below sea-level at a distance of 18 miles from the
mouth of the river.
2. “On the Clarke Collection of Fossil Plants from New South
Wales.” By Edward Alexander Newell Arber, Esq., B.A. (Com-
municated by Professor T. McKenny Hughes, B.A., F.R.S., F.G.S.)
This collection, numbering nearly 2,600 specimens of all kinds,
including some 80 fossil plant-remains, was presented to the
Woodwardian Museum, Cambridge, in November, 1844.
The following is the stratigraphical succession in New South
Wales :—
4, Wianamatta and Hawkesbury Beds.
3. Newcastle Beds.
( c. Upper Marine Beds.
b. Lower Coal-measures.
| a. Lower Marine Beds.
1. Lepidodendron-beds (Arowa, etc.).
2. Marine or Muree Beds.
Four species from the Wianamatta Series are described, fourteen
species (including one new one) from the Newcastle Series, and
two from the Arowa Beds. Of the twelve new types described by
McCoy; five (namely, Odontopteris microphylla, Sphenopteris plumosa,
Glossopteris linearis, Phyllotheca ramosa, and Ph. Hookeri) are no
longer considered as such. One new type has been added.
The age of the beds is then discussed. Such evidence as the few
plants in the Clarke Collection afford supports Feistmantel’s con-
clusion that the Wianamatta Beds are of Triassic age. Thinnfeldia
odontopteroides occurs in Rheetic beds in South America, and the
identification of Rattee’s Salisburia palmata with the American
Baiera multifida, and a comparison with the Rhetic Baiera Steinmanni
of Chile, is a new point in favour of this conclusion. The plants
also support Feistmantel’s opinion that the Newcastle Beds are
equivalent to the Permian of Hurope. The exact horizon and age
of the Arowa Beds must for the present remain doubtful.
3. “On an Altered Siliceous Sinter from Builth (Brecknockshire).”
By Frank Rutley, Esq., F.G.S.
1 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1847, vol. xx.
574 Reports and Proceedings—NManchester Literary Society.
A rock-specimen, given to the author many years ago by the late
H. W. Bristow, forms the main subject of this paper. It shows no
trace of original sand-grains; it is compact, and with a fracture
platy to conchoidal; small splinters of it can be fused on their
edges to a white, frothy glass. Under the microscope the rock is
decidedly tufaceous, containing small fragments chiefly of pumice,
less often of crystals which are apparently epidote. In the slides
of this rock and in some of the siliceous sinters from New Zealand
used for comparison, there are small patches of a brown substance
which may possibly be of organic origin; in connection with it,
Professor Weed’s discovery of algous growths in some of the New
Zealand sinters is mentioned. A specimen of hard breccia, also
from the vicinity of Builth, is described. The cement of this rock
is also possibly siliceous sinter, as well as some of the fragments,
which latter show faint evidence of the inclusion of little shreds
of pumice.
JI.—Manonester Literary AND PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY.
October 15th, 1901.—Mr. Charles Bailey, President, in the Chair.
Mr. R. D. Darbishire, F.8.A., exhibited a large collection of the
Holithic implements of the Kentish plateau, and illustrated with
map and section the outline of the denudation of the valley of the
Weald, leaving a drift-deposit on the remaining Chalk of the north
and south escarpments.
In the process many levels of river-gravels had been fixed, and
partly occupied by stone implements of successive ages, mostly much
mixed up in the redeposition of the gravels by succeeding move-
ments. He described the general facies of the so-called Paleolithic
implements from river deposits in France and England, and their
peculiar modes of manufacture by ‘chipping’ or flaking, and shapes ;
and confessed inability to determine the uses of such tools or any
characteristics of the men who made them. They were fossil
indications of man with mind, skill, and purpose, and that was all.
He then referred to the late Sir Joseph Prestwich’s announcement
of Mr. B. Harrison’s great discovery of stone implements in the
drift covering the remaining chalk plateau, quoted important
adhesions, and referred to the expressions of scepticism by Sir
J. Evans, Professor Boyd Dawkins, Sir H. H. Howorth, and others.
Exhibiting a very complete and well-arranged series of the plateau -
remains, Mr. Darbishire, after claiming large personal familiarity
with stone implements, proceeded to vindicate the primeval and
distinctive character of the same by reference to :—(1) The peculiar
character of (a) the material used, and (6) the uniform and extreme
‘patination’ of most specimens. (2) The peculiar shapes of the
same, showing several separate designs (c) in lateral curves (like
bites out of a cake), sometimes duplicated with a point left between ;
(d) in instruments with bold lateral curves on each side of a strong,
sometimes sharp, sometimes obtuse point; (e) in flat flints, with
chipped edges more or less all round; and (f) in repudiation of
a vague dismissal of the remains in question as ‘ wastrels.’
Correspondence—J. R. Dakyns—“ Verbum Sap.” 575
(8) The peculiar and original fashion of chipping the flint
perpendicularly through the thickness so as to remove the natural
edge (sharp and rough) of the stone, and the general absence of
work on the sides of the tool. (4) The collective facies of the
mass, unembarrassed by admixture of forms known as Paleolithic.
And lastly to (5) a very decided declaration that after many years’
study of stone implements from various countries and ages, he had
never seen an eolith amongst paleoliths, or a palolith amongst
eoliths.
In conclusion, he declared his unhesitating concurrence with
those more learned and skilful observers who believed that in the
so-called Holithic remains Mr. Harrison had revealed the fossil
indications of the mind and purpose of a race of men long anterior
to that of the Paleolithic record, and confirmed a precedent geological
era for the habitation in this country of Man, actually qualified
by invention, design, skill, purpose, and perseverance—still the
fundamental characteristics of the race—which with the great
development and inheritance of civilization, the arts, and literature,
is now possessing the earth.
Coes FOND PINGC Br
FAXE OR FAXOE.
Str,—I recently saw it stated in the GronocicaL Magazine that
Faxe is the correct name of the well-known locality for fossils in
Zealand, and that the name Faxoe used by Darwin and others is
impossible, as the place is not an island. This is not conclusive.
May not the place have formerly been an island, and may not Faxe
be a modern corruption of an older name Faxoe? It is well known
to philologists, and to all who have paid any attention to place-
names, that there are many places which are proved by their names
to have once been islands, though they are no longer so. The late
Isaac Taylor, in his interesting book, ‘“‘ Words and Places,” mentions
several such names in the Valley of the Thames and in the Eastern
Counties, as well as elsewhere. J. R. Dakyns.
Snowpon View, GwyNant, BEDDGELERT.
FOSSILS WITH GARNETS.
Sir,—Verbum sapientibus contains in itself no proposition: it
may equally be either sat sap. or sat upon insip.; in this style,
“Words are worth nothing, therefore take mine.” But certainly,
in a case like the present, where statements of opposite import are
both alike quotations from the “traditions of the elders,” the old
motto of the Royal Society, for those in a position to adopt it,
Nullius per verba, is the best VeRBUM Sap.
THE CIRCULATION OF SALT.
Sir,—In connection with recent questions concerning the circu-
lation of salt I would like to call attention to a curious phenomenon
described by Messrs. F. W. and W. O. Crosby in the Technology
Quarterly (U.S.A.), vol. ix, No. 1, March, 1896. I refer to the
576 Oorrespondence—A. K. Coomara-Swamy—Couper Reed.
« Sea mills of Cephalonia” (Greece). ‘ January. Oi. LOO eae cee tee 94
BURGE Gis) eLOet Mivacseacvsk shes 71 | VY. CoxrrEesronDENCeE.
II. Novices or Memoirs. Professor ‘I. G@. Bonney, F.R.S. 95
1. Movements of Underground Waters | VI. Onrrvary.
of Graven. By Protessor W. W. Frederick Wm. Egan, B.A. ...... 95
Watts and others - ......in.:.5.5.6 72 | VII. MisceLLannovs.
2. Underground Waters of N.W. | _ Retirement of Sir A. Geikie,
Yorks By the Rey. W. Lower Director-General of the Geo-
Carter and others ...%.............. 75 | logical Survey.s.-.....sc.+-eseesegses 96
LONDON: DULAU & CO., 37, SOHO SQUARE
_¢ The Volume for 1900 of the GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE is ready,
price 20s. nett. Cloth Cases for Binding may be had, price 1s. 6d. nett.
COLOURED CASTS OF RARE FOSSILS
SUPPLIED BY
ROBERT F. DAMON, WEYMOUTH, ENGLAND.
136. Upper portion of cranium (a) with mandible ; another cranium (6),
right femur, and left tibia: from the cavern of Beche Aux Roches, Spy, in
Province of Namur, Belgium. Figured and described by MM. Fraipont and
Lohest in Archives de Biologie, 1887. Bu
137. Upper portion of cranium from an ancient burial-place. Manor
Hamilton, co. Sligo, Ireland. ig
138. An imperfect mandible of obtuse angle as seen in profile, from the
caves of Naulette, Dinant.
139. An almost entire mandible of similar character. Malarnaud.
Casts of human bones found in the cave of Cro-Magnon, near
Les Eyzies in Perigord. Deseribed by MM. Lartet and Christy in “ Reliquix
Aquitanice,” and in Bulletin Soc. d’Anthrop. Paris, 1868. Also noticed in
Dawkins’ “‘ Cave Hunting,’’ etc. -The series consist of :—
140. Almost perfect cranium (a) with mandible (1 & 2).
141. Imperfect cranium _(b) with mandible (3 & 4).
142. Upper portion of cranium (ce) (5).
143. Imperfect mandibles (6 & 7).
144. Left humerus and proximal half of ulna (8 & 9).
145. Right femur (articulations wanting) (10).
146. Left tibia and imperfect right tibia (11 & 12).
147. Right fibula (18).
ADDENDA.
148. Didus ineptus, Linn. Foot. Recent: Mauritius.
149. Ichthyosaurus Zetlandicus, Seeley. Cranium. Type-specimen
of I. longifrons, Owen. Figured in “ Liassic Reptilia”: Mon. Pal. Soc.,
1881, pls. xxiii-xxv, Upper Lias: Curcy, near Caen, Normandy.
Prices on application. In ordering, the numbers will be sufficient,
R. F. D. begs to call the attention of Directors of Museums and Professors of Biology
and Geology in Universities to his fine series of 149 Coloured Casts of rare and interesting
Fossils. The complete set, except Nos. 28 and 75, will be sent carriage paid for the
sum of £180. =
Any Museum acquiring such a grand series of Casts would possess much, not only to
interest the Student, but also to attract the general public. 3
A town about to establish a Museum would find that these specimens, when properly
mounted and displayed in glass cases, with instructive labels to each, would form
a substantial basis for a Public Museum at a very small cost. i
Directors or Curators and Protessors of Colleges can obtain by return of post, if
desired, a list of the Museums in Great Britain, Australia, Africa, America, Austria,
Belgium, Brazil, Canada, Denmark, France, Germany, Greece, Holland, India, Italy,
Japan, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Russia, and Switzerland, where these Casts
can be seen which R. F. D. has supplied.
bd
Gs = 2 Se ee i
No. 441. New Series.—Decade IV.—Vol. VIII.—No. III. Price 1s.6d. nett.
|
pe eICAL MAGAZINE
Sonthly J
Journal of Geology.
WITH WHICH IS INCORPORATED
—LHE GHOLOGIST.”
EDITED BY
HENRY WOODWARD, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., &e.
ASSISTED BY
ROBERT ETHERIDGE, F.R.S.L. & E., F.G.S., &c.,
WILFRID H. HUDLESTON, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S., &e.,
GEORGE J. HINDE, Pu.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., &c., AND
HORACE BOLINGBROKE WOODWARD, F.R.S., F.G.S.
MARCH, 1901.
eRe ING a NE ESS
|
LONDON: DULAU & CO., 37, SOHO fk aren
ee
¢& The Volume for 1900 of the GEOLOGICAL MAGAZI
s price 20s. nett.
Sa ia
Cloth Cases for Binding may be had, price mene
I. OxtgInaL ARTICLES. PAGE | IJ. Reviews. PAGE |f-
1. Some Lake Basins in Alberta 1. Geology of the South Wales
and British Columbia. By J. Coalfields Parte Ll x esse eee 139
Parkinson, I'.G.8S.. (Plate VI.) 97 | 2. Three Works by the Geological
2. Bone Cave in the Carboniferous Suryey of Canada (Dr. A. H.
Limestone of the Wye Valley. TOOT O) eos. ese aco rese eae eee 136
By Miss Dorotuy M. A. Bare. é
(With Illustrations in text.) ... 101 III. Reports anp PRocrEprnes.
3. Woodwardian Museum Notes. Geological Society of London—
By F. R. Cowprr Rexrp, M.A., Tee January 23, NCU: cota eee 140
BE GuSs a (blate VIL) Incr as 106 2. Webriary-Cy 19 Ol 2 ccednanes ae 140
_/4. Lower Carboniferous Fishes of Iv. C nage
| Eastern Fifeshire. By Dr. R. 1 SE
H. Traquatr, F.R.S., F.G.S. 110 1. Mr. G. W. Lamplugh, F.G.S. 142
5. History of the Sarsens. By Pro- QoNr a Seis DAK VNS ee tee tose aceon 143
fessor I’. Rupert Jones, F.R.S., 8. Professor T. McKenny Hughes 143
F.G.S. (Concluded from the . G
February ate Vee neabay as 115 V. Onrrvany.
6. The Age of the Earth and the Mr. James Bennie ............... 143
Sodium of the Sea. By AnrHtR . Se
Pica MG Rs ok. jag | VI. MiscenLanzous.
7. Geological Literature of the The New Director of the Geo-
Malay Peninsula, etc. By R. logical Survey ......:...... sesteenes 144
Butien Newron, F.G.S. (With Retirement of Professor T. G..
an Illustration.) .........-+s.0005- 128 Bonney, D.Sc., LL. Dey grt 144
8. Origin of Coal. By J. R. Appointment of Mr. F. J. Gar-
MDASEVN SISO CO be deve sseeascewicane ee 136 wood, M.A., ! Se oie 144
ROBT.
1-2
CS G9 =¥ G Gr P C9
55
56-57
58-59
60-61
62
ROBT 3k DAMON
ABRIDGED LIST OF
F. DAMON’S COLOURED CASTS
OF RARE FOSSILS.
Archezopteryx.
Acrodus Anningie.
Anthracotherium magnum.
Asaphus tyrannus, v. ornata,
Astropecten orion.
#lurosaurus felinus,
Bothriceps Australis.
Huxleyi. y
99
Bothriolepis Canadensis.
Cancrinus latipes.
Cephalaspis Lyelli..
jie Salweyi.
Che rolepis Canadensis.
Cyamodus laticeps.
Celodus ellipticus.
», gyrodoides.
Cynognathus erateronotus.
sip leptorhinus.
a0 platyceps.
Delphinognathus ccnocephalus.
Biprotodon Australis,
Didus ineptus.
Dinotherium giganteum,
Dinornis maximus.
Eurypterus nanus.
Elasmotherium Fischeri,
Eurypterus lanceolatus.
fe €eculeri. :
Eleven teeth and left humerus
of Pigmy Elephants of Malta.
Eusthencpteron Foordi.
Gastornis Klaasseni.
Ganorhynchus Woodwardi.
Gomphcegnathus polyphagus.
species.
Holoptychius nobilissimus,
Homalonotus delphinocephalus. —
Hyperodapedon Gordoni.
Hoplosaurus ?
Hyracotherium leporizum.
Iguanodon.
. Hollingtonier sis.
Loxomma Almanni.
Lariosaurus Balsami.
Lithomantis cartonarius.
Lithosialis Brongniarti.
Megalosaurus Bucklandi.
Mastodon elephantoides.
Mesosaurus tenuidens.
Meiolania Oweni.
Meiolania platyceps.
Megalania prisca.
Macropus anak.
99-108
109
110-111
112-113
114
115-117
118
119
120
121
122
123-124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
182-147
148
149
Neusticosaurus pusillus.
Procoptodon rapha. 5
Phascolomys gigas.
Pliosaurus grandis. =
Ptychognathus Maccaigi.
Paleotherium magnum.
Placodus gigas.
Plesiosaurus Hawkinsi.
macrocephalus.
Pterocactylus crassirostris.
Ptychogaster emydoides
Pareiasaurus Baini.
Phorarhacos.
Proterosaurus Speneri.
Paleopithecus Sivalensis. .
Pyc.odus Bowerbanki.
Pterygotus Anglicus.
Rhinoceros antiquitatis.
Rhamphosuchus crassidens,
Sapheosaurus laticeps.
Scaphognathus Purdoni.
Strophodus medius.
Stylonurus.
Sivatherium giganteum.
Tapirus priscus.
Theriodesmus phylarchus.
Thylaccleo carnifex.
Tetraconodon magnum.
Tritylodon longevus.
Tiirachodon Kannemeyeri.
Rhytina gigas.
Elginia mirabilis.
Geikia Elginensis.
Gordonia Huxleyana.
i Judciana.
iy Traquairi.
Sacrum, etc. (? ¢enus).
Herpetosuchus Granti.
Brachyodus Africanus.
Hoplophorus, sp.
Ichthyosaurus Zetlancicus.
Iguanodon,
Macherodus.
VW astodon arvernensis.
Melriorhynchus Moreli. —
Qdontopteryx.
Rhytidosteus capensis.
Scelidosauius Harrisoni.
Zanclodon Cambrensis.
Casts of human remains.
Lidus ineptus.
Ichthyosaurus Zetlandicus.
WEYMOUTH, ENGLAND.
» 7
]
Bm Detainee
No, 442. New Series.—Decade IV.—Vol. VIII.—No. IV. Price 18.64. nett,
Series
| GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE
Shlonthly Jounal of Geology.
WITH WHICH IS INCORPORATED
“THE GEOLOGIST.”
EDITED BY
HENRY WOODWARD, SSeS
ASSISTED BY
ROBERT ETHERIDGE, F.R.S.L. & E., F.G.S., &c.,
WILFRID H. HUDLESTON, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S., &c.,
GEORGE J. HINDE, Pu.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., &c., AND
HORACE BOLINGBROKE WOODWARD, F.R.S., F.G.S.
«Fi. Ge. Se:
APRIL, 1901.
Se) OOS es Mae SN
I. OntGrnau ARvICLES. . “pace | III. Reviews. PAGE
1. Oa ‘ Pyrgouwa cretacea,’ from The Graphite Mines of Ceylon.
the Upper Chalk. By Henry By Professor Weinschenek ....., 17a
Woopwarp, LL.D., F.R.S., eee : : wee a
WPS. BGS ..cte. (Plate +, IV. Repvorrs anp PROCEEDINGS.
; VIII, Figs. 1-5, and 3 Illustra- Geological Society of London—
: tions in the text.) ........ccccc.s. 145 1. Anniversary Meeting, Feb. 15... 177
4 2. Note on some Carboniferous [ase Atebruary 20, 19019 >. <.5. ake sites 183
: Trilobites. By Henry Woop- | V. CorresPponDENCE.
warp, LL.D.,P.R.S.,V.P.Z.S., 1. Rev. O. Fisher, M.A.; F.G.S, 186
F.G.S., ete. (Plate VIII, Figs. i 2. Professor 'l’, G. Bonney, D.Se.,
GHB.) note ceetecee ee eeeete tenant caee 152 Bh dt. Gem. ote van ae he eee 187
3. Notes ou the Geology of the 3. Professor G. A. J. Cole, F.G.S. 187
Eastern Desert _ ot Egypt. By 4, A. Strahan, M.A., F.G.S......2. 188
* I. Barron, A.R.C.S., F.G.S., 5. Prof. J. E. Marr, M.A., F.R.S: 189
3 and W. F. Hume, D.Sc., . 6. R. Bullen Newton, F.G.S....... 189
Do Wuese Ma GB 154 x ;
4. Schists in the Lepontine Alps. VI. Oprrvany.,
By Professor T. G. Bonney, 1. Dr.-'G. M.» Dawson, ©.M.G.;
Weep. ERS 161 LEDsetd ee, ecdacaaen aoe 190
5. Oscillations in the Sea-level. By 2. Protessor C. F. Liitken ......... 191
: EW... PEARSON, Hsq. (Plate | 3. Robert OTAig* sas! 5 ates tee 191
‘ Rea ce erick oe Tai beac ad ogse 167 | VII. Miscertanzous: 5 |
II. Norrces or Memorns. | The Geological Survey............ 19265)
* Dr. D. H. Scott, M.A., F.R.S.: ‘Blood Rain’ in Sicily, Italy,
‘ Structure and Affinities of Fossil and*AustriaQ.. 2! AaB CR. 199) 4
“s Plants from the Palwozoie Rocks 174 Miolama in Patagonia............ 192 |
s LONDON: DULAU -& CO., 387, SOHO SQUARE. |
i \ |
price 20s. nett.
The Volume for 1900 of the GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE
is ready,
Cloth Cases for Binding may be had, price 1s. 6d. nett.
‘uoryeordde uo s|Issog ervey Jo sys¥Q pemojog 9LT SNOWVA AZ “A Jo S3sTT
1
CAN) wnesngy ystyag ey} ut poaroserd o1v suoutoads yeursti10 ONY,
‘VINODVLVd ‘ZOU0 VENVS ‘(¢ENHOOIN) SLISOdHA AUVILAIL
‘cT-1 ‘dd ‘oggq ‘Arenure ‘sag7 Ul SMOIPUY "MM *)
Aq paquosap os|Y ‘c@gyT ‘Ax emo} ‘ounueSity yeadooy “ysuy ‘Jog ul oulysomy “qq ‘yorg Aq
pequiosap pue pesedoosip osye ‘sngny/u Ud soloads 1eT[Vts JeyMoewos oY} Jo yy} WoT po]jopou
Usvseq sey {juys oy} pus ‘nowtoods jeuiS110 ey} Wolst po10jsol ATVYSTS teeq SY 9] qipuvul onL
sousouty “SO WISSIONOT SOOVHYOUOHd
) QUI LONILXT SILNVIID 3HL 40 31SI0NVIN ONY TINS
AED HO
STHCON HZIS HALT SHIIddOs
‘pupysuq ‘yyNours[ AA ‘NOWVG | “LgOd
aRS ee ey a
No. 443. New Series.—Decade IV.—Vol. VIII.—No.V. Price 18.64. nett, -
oe 7
GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE
’
Sonthly Jounal of Geology.
WITH WHICH IS INCORPORATED
“THE GEOLOGIST.”
EDITED BY
Peat.) VV OOD AR D 1 b.D:,:-F.R-S,
i ASSISTED BY
ROBERT ETHERIDGE, F.R.S.L. & E., F.G.S., &c.,
, OF G20 weet
WILFRID H. HUDLESTON, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S., &c.,
GEORGE J. HINDE, Pu.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., &c., AND
HORACE BOLINGBROKE WOODWARD, F.R.S., F.G.S.
MAY, 1901.
Solel GO Ae INS Diese al SI EAE a aed Pha
| IT. OrtetnaL ARTICLES. PAGE | ORIGINAL ARTICLES—continued. PAGE
1. Erosive Effect of Sand-blast on | 6. The Fish Fauna of the Millstone
Wood. By T. Metzaxp Reape, | Grits of Great Britain. By E. D.
Gske FG. Sa> PUR. 1B: A. Weipurn, L.R.C.P., F.G.S.,
REALG ohte) Sea eec atone siesremein = Se 193 | BER LPS ects coiedaeaeneeees 216
; aaaeT | 7. Oscillations in the Sea-level. By
2. Note on Graptolites from Peru. | H. W. Paxson, Esq. (Con-
By E. Tf. NeEwTon, F.R.S., tinued from the April Number,
Bree, Cte (With-an Ius-” | ee era. 223
LORE ie oe beasasitectbreeece 195 Sve, Coa ae hea eee ne
tration.)..........5 5 TEoheteee.
3. The Rift Valleys of Eastern The Permian of Russia. By
Sinai. By W. F. Hume, D.Sce., Professor V. Amalitzky ......... 231
A.R.S.M., F.G-.S., etc:......... FS ITT) Busonie aNd ecoeeneeae
‘ te nghe Wate B Geological Society of London—
: a i rte oar: 1H March Gy BOOTS Se sree tacesnte se 234
F G S etc siete ? 200 Fe Miarehr 20: 190s ec tice eee 236
LOSER aa tie 5 esac Ss oncob oop |
: : ; | IV. Oprrvany.
5. The Glacial Period and Oscilla- John Hopwood Blake ............ 238
tion of Land ‘in Scandinavia. .
By Dr. Nits Oxor Hotst. VY. MiscELLaNezous.
{ Translated by F. A. Batuzr, International Geological Con-
D.Se., F.G.8. ....eeseeeeseeeee sees 205 | EVES IOO cg cette ep treaties 240
LONDON: DULAU & CO., 37, SOHO SQUARE.
¢¢ The Volume for 1900 of the GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE is ready,
price 20s. nett. Cloth Cases for Binding may be had, price 1s. 6d. nett.
“uoTyeorT[dde uo psy aq BD YOryM Jo 4siry ‘STISSOT e1ey JO SISVH PeANOT[OD 190440 o2T puy
‘Anojon adey : uoywmsog oovy
ne ees ‘SA LONOWALVYO SAHLYNOONKO
FO UOPTPAS PUB [NAG Fo S[epoy_ os, y
"U0 OFE JYSIOL
woMKQ ‘SOWIXVN SINYONIG
Jo jopoyy ospy “Auojog edup : UOIJBUIOT COBY
° (4
Aefaeg « ‘TNIVE SOMAVSVIAMVd
JO. WozOTOYG Oy} JO Topo] oz1s-ojr'T ospy
"eINoovyeg ‘ZnIg Se emad0TP, ¢
Oulysowy ‘SOWISSIONOT SOOVHNOWOHA
PUC JOUNXH o1uvsSry oyy Jo erqrpuvy_ pur TMHg
OU} JO sapoyy ozts-eyry sorpddng
‘puyjsuq ‘yynowse ‘NOWVG ‘qT “LGOd
at Beer Psa cee
| No 444. New Series —D
~N
| GEOLOGICAL MAGAZINE
; ———— Honthly Journal of Geology.
“THE GEROLOGIST.”
EDITED BY
HENRY WOODWARD, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., &c.
ASSISTED BY
x
4 ROBERT ETHERIDGE, F.R.S.L. & E., F.G.S., &c.,
|| WILFRID H. HUDLESTON, M.A., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S., &c.,
GEORGE J. HINDE, Pu.D., F:R.S., F.G.S., &c., AND
a HORACE BOLINGBROKE WOODWARD, F.R.S., F.G.S.-
Ba . JUNE, 1901. |
2 SS GB GST ES SI 1 fier Bl ep
-f) I. Oxternau ARTICLES. pace | Notices or Memorrs—continued. PAGE
5 1. On the Evidence of the Trans- 12. Fossil Foraminifera of Servia... aio
ference of Secondary Sexual 13. Geology of Evypt..............005. fal
Characters of Mammals trom 14. Shorter Geological INGLES: 35 0 5t 271
Males to Females. By C. I. Ill. R
Forsyrtu Masor, M.D., F.Z.S. 241 : ae ee Gada bas,
....... Ra 470 |
F.R.S., F.G.S. (Plate XVI.) 433 8. Economic Gedlogy ............... 471 |
2. Recently Discovered Extinct 4. Canadian Geology s aoenaes oer 471 |
Vertebrates from Egypt. (Pt. IT.) 5. Canadian Paleozoic Corals ...... 472
By Cuas. W. AnpxeEws, D.Se., 6. Paleozoic Crustacea............... 472
F.G.S8., of the British Museum 7. Map of Mt. Blane ...c.cs.sv0csee 472
(Nat. Hist.). (With 4 Ilus- 8. Geology of the Philippines ...... 472
trations.) ....eseve eeseeseesseeeeess 436 9. New Brachiopoda gre eeecemisetsnes 473
8. On the Circulation of Salt in
its Relations to Geology. By III, Reviews.
Witrram Ackroyp, F.I.C., 1. Fauna of the Gas-coal, ete., of
SO Stieaae cc cctcacsaietesett eres ces 445 Bohemia. By Dr. Fritsch. ... 473
3 4. The Periodicity of Earthquakes. 2. Geology of the Transvaal ...... 475
@ lee By R. D. Oupnam, F.G.S., Le f it
Bie cemiaident Geol. Surv. of LY: Ee aN EN Es: CRS ae
An Sah iin eee 449 1, Mr. 8S. 8. Buckman, F.G.S. ... 478
2. Fossils and Garnets ............... 479 |
II. Nortces or Memorrs. |
1. British Association, Glasgow, V. Oxrruary,
Sept. 12th, 1901. Geology: 1. John Storrie, ACTOS. < as ive fae
Presidential Address by John 2. J. W. Kirkby -......se..sceeeeee 480
Horne, F.R.S. L. & E., F.G.S., 3. Professor E. W. Claypole ...... 480
POMS EGULOTSG! se) cote atteraaciesees « 452 AME ES WV OD wWardsos ccc esateet sens 480
LONDON: DULAU & CO., 387, SOHO SQUARE.
{ E>E>E————EE-
Pais P=
es
wi